iiiiiili* ,Οο, ''^^^^ :£y^/% ^^φ -- ^>ii^r ^^ ^• ^ ξζί^ t ^ 0^ λΟο<. .- c. ^'5^^^ - N^ "^.Λ .'^• -^^ *- * .V-^^v%.' ^^• y^^' y^- 0^^ Λ» ^-P α^ 'c^. <;^ ^- %:' ,^' «> "V, ^ \> ^ ^ ^ ^ i ■ν -ϊ- ^?<' _^_. -iy£v .. ^' ■ ...--. ^y^' .-. ^ ' -νΤ^- '' Λ• * ■^^^ί^. Λ^ χΟ' ^' "■"' 'ο C' ^^ π GREEK GRAMMAR, roR TiiK USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. I By E. a. SOPHOCLES A. M. A NETV EDITinN HARTFORD: WILLIAM J. HAMERSLEY. 1855 ΤΑ ^56 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1847, oy E. A. Sophocles, m the Cletk^s Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusfctte. Transfer Engineers School Lil^, June 29,1931 The sections of the old and new edition compared. Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 6 5 13 13 13 13 13 14 7 15 16 22, 23, 24 25 224 29 30 29, 30 37 18 20 21 12 39 40 41 43 43 45 45 47 47,48 49 50 51 56 47 47 47 47 55 53, 56 54, 56 57 58 58 59 59 59 61 60 62 63 58 64 no 113 59 65 HI IH, lU 60 79,80 112 112 61 79, 80 113 108 62 79,80 114 109 63 73 115 113 64 68 116 119 65 68 117 121 66 69 118 133 67 71 119 134 68 72 120 79 69 72 121 134 70 74 122 134 71 75 123 76 72 70 124 135 73 76 125 66 74 81 126 139 75 90 127 139 et seq 76 91 128 139 77 91 129 139 78 91 130 142 79 91 131 142 80 92 132 142 81 94 133 142 82 95 134 143 83 98, 115 i:^ 144 84 115' 136 156 85 116 137 157 86 117 138 158 87 117 139 167 88 117 140 169 89 117 141 167 90 117 142 166 91 130 143 160 92 127 144 160 93 35,36 145 161 94 98 146 162 95 107 147 164 96 100 et seq. 148 165 97 108 149 163 98 HI 150 172 99 113 151 175 100 111 152 171 101 113 153 174 102 109 154 117 103 109 155 161 104 110 156 149 105 113 157 150 106 108 158 221 107 111 159 153 108 111 160 149 109 111 161 224 Old. New. Old. New. 162 177 187 194 163 181 188 195, 199 164 181 189 200 165 184 190 200 166 185 191 196 167 182 192 231 168 186 193 196 169 186 194 231 170 186 195 202 171 183 196 201 173 187 197 201 174 156 198 203, 206 175 190 199 206 176 187 200 206 177 188 201 204 178 191 202 204 179 192 203 231 180 197 204 155 181 200 205 207 182 192, 193 206 208 183 194 207 209 184 189, 197 208 210 185 187 209 211 186 198 210 211 Old. New. 211 211 212 211 213 212 214 214 etseq. 215 218 216 213 et seq 217 216 218 218 219 292 220 223 221 221 992 225 223 227 224 229 225 230 226 231 227 233 228 236 229 138 230 237 231 238 232 238 This new edition has been enlarged and considerably altered. Every example in nouns and verbs has been fully expanded. The arrangement of the different heads is more natural in the new than in the old edition. In accordance with the practice of recent grammarians, the simple and regular βονλζίω has taken the place of the com- phcated and irregular τνπτω. The uncontracted form of con- tract verbs is not given, because it does not differ from the regular paradigm, and because -άω is rare and Epic, and ίω chiefly Ionic. As to verbs in -οω, their uncontracted form is never used. (See §119, ns.) The portions which should be read first, and which, in reality, constitute a Greek accidence, are printed in the largest type. The rules, however, contained in ^178, though belonging to the elementary portion of the grammar, are, for typographical reasons, printed in smaller type. The notes are intended for the advanced scholar. INTRODUCTION. The classical Greeks were divided into three principal tribef? , die ^olic, Doric, and Ionic. The Molians occupied Thessaly, Boeotia, ^olis, Lesbos, and some other places. The Dorians occupied Peloponnesus, Megaris, Doris, Sicily, Southern Italy, and many other places. The lonians inhabited Attica, Ionia, and some of the islands in the ^Egean Sea. The principal dialects of Greece were the Molic^ Thessalian^ Boootic, Doric., lonic^ and Attic. The Molic dialect, properly so called, was spoken in Lesbos and iEolis. The BcBotic was the dialect of Boeotia ; and although a oranch of the ^olic, it differs essentially from its Asiatic sister. The Thessalian dialect was used in Thessaly ; it differed considerably from the Boeotic and iEolic. The Doric consisted of many branches, as the Laconian^ Cretan^ Argive^ Sicilian^ Tarentine, The Ionic is divided into old and new ; the old Ionic, called also the Epic, or Homeric, was spoken in Attica and Ionia; it is the basis of the language of Homer and Hesiod. The Jieio Ionic was spoken in Ionia. The Attic was the language of Attica, or rather of Athens, the capital of Attica. It was the most cultivated of all the dialects of Greece, and, on that account, is made the basis of Greek grammar. AVith respect to purity, the Greek, like any other dead lan- guage, may be said to have seen four different ages ; the golden^ 6 INTRODUCTION. silver.^ hrazeriy and iron ages. The writers of the silver and Drazen ages are often called the later Greek writers, and their lano;uage the later Greek, in the following list of Greek authors, /E. stands for ^olic B., for Bxotic^ D., for Doric, E., for Epic, and I., for Ionic. Golden Age. — From Homer to Aristotle. /Kneas Demosthenes iEst liines, a philosopher Ernpedocles Aiischines, an orator Epiiorus ^.schyius Al(aeus(iE.) Alcidamas Alcinan (D.) Aiiacreon (I.) Andocides Antiniachus (E.) Antiplianes Antiphon Antisihenes Archilochus (1.) Archytas (D.) Aristopiuiaes Asclepjades Bacchvlides (D.) Calhirus (E.) Callistratus Cebes Charon CorJnna(B.) Cratinus Ctesias Demades Epicharmus (D ) Erinna (iii.) Eupolis Euripides Gorgias Hanno Heraclltus Herodotus (I.) Hesiodus (E.) Hippocrates (I.) Hipponax Homer us (E.) Hyperides Ibycus (D.) Ion Isaeus Isocrates Lesches (E.) Lycurgus Lys'uis MeJissus Mimermnus Ocellus Panyasis (E.) Parmenides Pherecrates Philistus Findarus (D.) Plato, a poet Piuto^ a philosopher Praxilla (D.) Pythagoras (E.) Sappiio (iE.) Scylax Sirnonides of Amorgos Simonides of Ceos (D.) Solon (E.) Sopliocles Sophron (D.) Stasinus (E.) Stesichorus (D.) Thucydides Timaeus the Locrian ^(^•) Tyrtaeus (E.) Xanthus Xenophanes Xeiiophon Silver Age. — From Aristotle to ahoui A. D. I, Agatharchides Alexis Afitigonus Jlpoilodorus Jlpollonius of Rhodos (E.) Apollonius of Perga Apollonius Sophista Jiralns ( Ε ) Archimedes (D.) Aristarchus of Samos Jir'i.stoteUs Aristoxenus Babrius Berosus Bion (D.) Cnllimachus (E. & D.) Cleanthes Demetrius Phalereus Dicaearchus Dinarchus Dlodorus Dionysius of Halicarnas- sus Dionysius Thrax Dionysius Periegetes Epicurus Ε uc I ides Gemiiiius Heraclides Ponticus Hermesianax Hipparchus Lesbonax Lycopliron Manetho Matron Meleager Menander Moschus (D.) Kicnndrr (E.) Nicolaus of Damascus Palaephatus Paitheiiius Pha nodes Philemon Philetas Philo of Byzantium Philqrhorus INTRODUCTION. Philodcmus Pol tjhiiis Posiiluiiius» Kiiiaiius ScymniJS Thanrritus Septuaginta Interprete? Theophrastus kSiinmias Tiiiion SiraOo Brazen Age. — From A. D. 1 to about A. D. 300. Aclnllos Tatiiis JFJinnus of i*raenoste ^liaiiiis die Tactician Alcinous Alciphron Alexander Aphrodisieus Aiinaeus Antoninus Antonius Liberalis Apollonius, a gramma- rian Appianus Apion Arcadins Aretaeus (I.) Aristides Arr'uiniis Artemidorus AthiMiaeus Atlienagoras Clenjeiis of Alexandria Cleomedes Dio Cnssius Dio Chrvsostomus Diogenes Laertius Diogenianus Dioscorides Dositheus Draco Epictetus Erotianus Galenus Hephaestion Herniogenes Η erodes Herodianus, a historian Herodianus, a gramma- rian lamblichus Joseph us Justinus Longinus Lucl/inus Marcelhis JMaximus of Tyre Memnon Moeris Musonius Ruphus Nichomachus ^^ovum Testamentum Onesander Opi>ianus (E.) Origenes Pansanias Pliilo the Jew Philostratus the elder Philostratus the younger Phi ego η Phrynichus Plotinus Plutarckus P(jlenio Polyaenus Polydeuces Porphyrins Ptolemaeus SfXtUS Sibylline Oracles Tatianus Theon of Smyrna Tiberius Timaeus, a Sophist Trypho Ulpianus Iron Age, — From A. D. 300 to Λ. D. 1453. Aetius Agaihias i^s.opic Fables Annnonius Anna Coinnena Aphthonius Armenopulus Arislaenetus Atliiinasius Bdsll'ius Cantacuzenus Cedrenus Cephalas Chalcondyles Chariton CI rysoluras Coluthus Dnmascius D ophantus £piphaniu3 Etymologicum Magnum Eudocia Eunapius Eusebius Eustathius,the commen- tator Eustathius of Egypt Gazes, a grammarian Glycys Grcgorius of Nazianzus Gregorius, bishop of Nyssa Gregorius, bishop of Co- rinth Harpocration Hftiodurus Heraclitus Hesychius, a lexicogra- pher Hesychius, a historian Hierocles Himerius Johannes of Damascus Johannes Laurentius Ly dus Johannes Chrysostomus JuUunus Lascaris Leo the Deacon Libanius Longus IVIarinus Moschopulus Musaeus Nemesius Nicephorus Nicephorus Gregoraa Nicetas Konnvs Oribasius 8 INTRODUCTION. Orphica Pappus Paulus of Angina. Paiilus of Alexandria Philemon, a graminarian Pliotius Phrantzes Planudes Porp hy rogennetus Proclus Procopuis Psellus Ptochoprodromus Quintus Sailustius Siraplicius Sozoaienus Stephanus of Byzantium Stobaeus Suidas Symeon Sethus Synesius Syrianus. Tzetzes Themistius Theodorelus Spurious Works, Theodosius Metochites Theon Theophilus Theophylactus Simocata Theophylactus, bishop of Bulgaria Thomas Magister Tryphiodorus Xenophon of Ephesus Zonaras Zosimus And many others. Chion Phalaris Phocylides Tlieano Themistocles It may be remarked here, once for all, that, in this edition, the remarks on the ^Eolic, Boeotic, Thessalian, Arcadian, and Doric dialects are based on Ahrens'^s work on the Greek Dia- lects, Struve^s dissertation on the dialect of Herodotus also has been used. The Catalogue of Anomalous Verbs is taken from a revised copy of the author's Catalogue of Greek Verls, The chapter on versification is based on Munk^s Greek and Roman Metres. In the Appendix, the remarks on the Alphabet are based on Franzes Element a Epigraphices Graecae^ Boeckli's Corpus In- scriptionum Graecarum^ the Heraclean Tables^ and Gese7iius''s Scripturae Linguaeque Phoeniciae Monumenta. The remarks on the Digamma are based on the above-men- tioned works of Boeckh^ Franz^ and Alirens^ and on the Herac- lean Tables. The short chapter on Numerals is based on Franz''s above- mentioned work. CONTENTS. PART I. LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. PAGE The Alphabet Η Vowels and Diphthongs 12 Breathings 13 Consonants . .15 Change, Transposition, Addition, and Omission of Letters 17 Euphonic Changes 22 Contraction and Synizesis 28 Crasis and Elision 30 Syllabication 32 Quantity 34 Accent ,......••• 36 Enclitics and Proclitics • . . • . • 44 Punctuation Marks 47 PART IL INFLECTION OF WORDS. Paits of Speech 4'' , Noun 48 First Declension . . . . • . ,52 Second Declension •••••• 55 Third Declension 58 Anomalous, Defective, and Indeclinable Nouns . . 69 Adjectives ......... 75 Anomalous and Defective Adjectives . . • 86 Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs . • .88 ?ronoun and Article 94 Numerals , 103 Verb 107 Augment 119 Formation of the Tenses 126 Personal Endings and Connecting Vowels . . ,139 Contract Verbs , 146 Omission of the Connecting Vowel . . • ,151 Anu^iialous and Defective Verbs . . . . 170 A.d-.-rbs . .207 ^repositions ........ 209 Conjunctions . . . . . • . ,210 Interjections . . . • ... . ■ . 210 Derivation of Words . . • • . .211 Composition Of Words ^ • . .918 1* 10 CONTENTS. PART in. SYNTAX. PAGE Subject and Predicate 220 IVijnii native 2*20 \^ocative 2*24 Substantive and Adjective 224 Pnuiouns and Article . . . • • • • 230 Article 233 Relative . . 238 Is^umerals 243 Object. — Oblique cases •...... 244 Accusative 245 Genitive * 248 Dative 257 Voices 202 Tenses ••••••••• 204 MiMuls 207 Quotations • • 207 End, Motive 208 Conditional Sentences 270 Expression of a Wish 272 Relative Sentences 273 Exhortations, Commands, Prohibitions • • • 274 Inten-ofrative Sentences 275 Comparative Sentences 277 Infinitive 277 Participle . . . . . . . . .282 Adverb 286 Preposition . . 288 Conjunction 292 Irreirnlar Construction 293 Arrangement of Words 2u4 PART IV. VERSIFICATION. Trochaic 298 Iambic 299 Dactylic 300 Anapestic • . . 30C Cretic or Paeonic 304 Choriambic 305 Ionic 305 APPENDIX. Remarks on the Alphabet 307 Numerals . ....... 312 Reuxarkson Pronunciation 313 PART I. LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. foUowin Figure. A a Β Γ Δ Ε Ζ β β 7 δ 6 THE ALPHABET. , The Greek alphabet consists of the twenty-four letters : Representative. Name. a '^Αχφα Alpha b Βήτα Beta g Γίίμμα Gamma d AeXra Delta "E ψϊχόν Epsilon L• κ λ Η 7) Θ ^ Ι Κ Α Μ μ Ν ν Η ξ Ο ο Π Ρ Τ τ φ φ ^ χ ψ ψ Ω, ω 7Γ Ρ σ - τ ν final e ζ e th i k or c hard / m η X \j Ρ r s t u ox y ph ch ps δ Ζήτα 'Ήτα Θήτα Ιώτα ΚατΓττα ΛαμβΒα Μΰ Νυ υ μικρόν Πι Ρώ Σίγμα Ταυ ^r ψΐλόν ΦΙ Χι Ψΐ 'Ω, μέγα Zeta Eta Theta Iota Kappa Lambda Mu or My Nu or Ny Xi ^ Omicron Pi Rho Sigma Tau Upsilon Phi Chi Psi Omega (I The character ς is used at the end of a word ; as σ€σωσμ€νος Many editors put it also at the end of a w^ord compounded ^vith anoth er ; as cis-cpxo/xat, ^ν:-τνχης, oi-rty. In manuscripts only σ is asud. 12 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§ 2, 3. CU 2. The letters are divided into vowels and co7i- sonants. The vowels are a, e, 77, i, o, v, ω. The consonants are β, y, δ, ξ; ^, κ, λ, //., ζ/, ξ, ττ, ρ, σ, τ. Note. For the obsolete letters Βαν or Αίγαμμα, Κόππα, and 2άν, see Appendix. VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. : ^ 2. There are five short vowels, and five cor- responding long ones. The short vowels are a, e, Ϊ, o, ϋ '^ the long, ά,η, ϊ, ω, V. The mark (-) is placed over a short vowel, and (-) over a long one. These marks, however, are necessary only in the case of a, t, and υ, since the characters η and ω represent long Ε and Ο respec- tively. Note 1. The vowels e and ο are often called the short voivels, η and ω, the long vowels, and a, i, v, the doubtful vowels. By the tenn doubtful, we are not to understand that the quantity of a, t, υ is uncertam in any given syllable, but that in some syllables these vowels are always long, and in others always short. E. g. ν in the words Si'/xoy, irvpos, wheat, is always long ; in the words πί^λτ;, νπό, always short. There are, indeed, instances where the quantity of these letters is variable, as α in 'Άρης, l in μνρίκη, and υ in κορννη ; but we should recollect, that the sounds Ε and Ο also are, in certain instances, vari- able, as ξηρός ζ€ρ6ς, ϊωμ€ν Ίομζν. Note 2. In strictness, the Greek alphabet has but five vowels, A, E, I, O, Y. The long differ from the short in quantity, but not in power, - § 3. There are thirteen diphthongs, of Λvhich seven, L•, av, ei, ev, ol, ου, and vl, begin with a short vowel, and six, a, άυ, y, ηυ^ ω, and ων, with a long one. The former are generally called proper άίρ/ι- thongs, and the latter, improper. The ι is written under the long νοΛνοΙ, and is called iota sidjscript. In capitals it is written as a regular letter ; as THI *ΑΓΙΑΙ rfj ay la, ΤΩΙ ΣΟΦΩΙ τω σοφω. So when only the first letter is capital ; *Α:δω αδω, '*\αώζΐν jj^€Lv, "Ωιχςτο ωχ€το. Note 1. During ihe most flourishing period of the Greek language, the iota sicbscript, so called, was pronounced like any other iuta ; § 4.] BREATHINGS. 13 and in inscriptions cut before the Roman period (say before the year 100 B. C.) it is never omitted; as ΓΕΡΟΥΣΙΑΙ yepoxaia, ΒΟΥΛΗΙ βουλί), ΔΗΜί2Ι δήμω. In process of time it became a silent letter, and consequently it was omitted in writing ; hence in inscriptions belonging to the Roman period (say from B. C. 100 to the commencement of the fourth cen- tury of our era) it is almost always omitted ; as ΓΕΡΟΥΣΙΑ yepovaia, ΒΟΥΛΗ /SouXfi, ΓΥΜΝΑΣΙΩ γνμνασίω. The orthography a, 77, ω, as also the expression improper diphthongs (δίφθογγοι καταχρηστίκαί) , generally used in grammars, was intro- duced long after this iota ceased to be pronounced. Note 2. According to the ancient grammarians, the diphthong vt cannot stand before a consonant. The ^olic dialect, however, has τυίδε, htre. Note 3. The diphthong vl (with long v) is found nowhere ; it may be supposed, however, to have once existed in the perfect passive op- tative of verbs in νω ; thus, λβλΟτο was perhaps originally λβλυιτο, after the analogy of κ€κΧψτο^ κ^κτψτο, μεμνηιτο. Note 4. In the old Boeotic dialect, AT, 01 were sometimes written AE, OE, as in Latin ; as ΑΕΣΧΡ0ΝΔΑΣ Αίσχρώνδας, ΠΑΑΥΧΑΕ Πλαυ- χαί Ώλαύχα, ΔΙΟΝΥΣΟΕ AiovvaoL Αιοννσω^ found in inscriptions. Note 5. ΩΥ owes its existence entirely to crasis ; as ωντός, των- τον, τωύτό^ ωνριπ'ώη^ for ό αυτός, του αυτόν, το αυτό, ώ Ένριττ'ώη. As to ων in the Ionic words €μ€ωντον, σ^ωντον, €ωντον, ^ωνμα, and τρωνμα, they, according to the ancient grammarians, constitute two syllables, ωϋ ; thus, ζμεωντον, σ€ωντον, €ωντον, 3ώί'/χα, τρωνμα. BREATHINGS. 1^4. 1. Every Greek word beginning Λ\τΐ1ι a vowel has either the rough breailiiiig ('), corre- sponding to A, or the smooth breathing ('), over that vowel ; as '^Αριτνια, Harpy ; άψ, air. ' The breathing, as also the accent, is, in all recent editions, placed over the second vowel of a diphthong ; as Κίμων, HcEmon ; Alueias, But in the diphthongs a, -η, ω, these marks are place( over the first letter; as αδω ^Αιδω, rjdov ^Ήιδον, ωδη Ώίοή. When a word is written in capitals, both the breathing and the ac- cent may be omitted ; as ΑΡΠΥΙΑ, ΑΗΡ, ΑΙΝΕΙΑΣ. x2. The rough breathing is placed also over ρ at the beginning of a word. \Vhen ρ is doubled in the middle of a word, the first one takes the 14 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 4. smooth breathing, and the other the rough. E. g. pohovy rose ; αρβην, male ; αρρητο<ζ^ unspeakable. Note 1. It must be learned from obsen^ation what words take the rough breathing, and what ..the smooth. It is only added here, that derivatives generally take the breathing of their primitives ; and that u, at the beginning of a word, generally takes the rough breathing ; as νπνος, sleep ; vnip, over. Note 2. Many w^ords which now appear without the rough breath- ing were once pronounced with it. Thus, in inscriptions we find Αβ3ηρΙται, άγαΧμα, ^ΑγρνΧηθεν, Άγρνλησι, αγω, Αίσωττο?, άκονσια, άνάΧωμα, άνηρ, αρνησίζ, ίκ, ενιαυτόζ, βττι, ίλπίς, ίλπίζω, eroSf Idios, ισοί, oLKos, οίσω (from φ^ρω), οκτώ, οπισθοφανης. On the other hand, words beginning with the rough breathing were often pronounced and written without it. Thus, in Doric and Attic inscriptions cut before the archonship of Euclides, we find ΙΠΟΜΕ- ΔΟΝ ΊπτΓομξ^ων, Ο 6, ΟΙ ot, Ε 77, A α, ΑΙΣ αίς, ΕΚΑΣΤΟΙ εκάστω, ΟΣΙΟΝ δσων, ΕΜΕΡΑΙ ήμ^ρα, ΕΤΕΡΟΝ erepov. Note 3. The rough breathing was also used in the middle of a word. Thus, in ancient inscriptions we find ΤΡΙΗΕΜΙΠΟΔΙΟΣ τρι- ' ημιπο^ίονς τρί-ημίπο8ίονς, from τρις ημίσνε πους ; ΕΝΗΟΔΙΑ βν-όδια evodia, from eu όδο? ; τρυ-ημίγνον, τταρ-εξοντι, 7Γ€ντα-€τηρίς, άν-Ιώσα- σθαί, άν-ίλόμβνος. Compare ewdpis, enhydris, evuSpo?, enhydrus, τΓολυιστωρ, poly his tor, Πολυμνία, Polyhymnia; also the barbar- ous word Sanhedriin, avvibpiov, from συν edpa. Note 4. The αΈοϋο dialect did not make much use of the rough breathing ; as αμμ^ς, αμμιν, αμμ€, ϋμμ€ς, νμμιν, νμμ€, for d/xei, άμίν, ά /xe, νμ€€, νμϊν, νμ€. Note 5. The character (') was employed by the ancient gramma- rians to denote the effoj^t with which a vowel, not depending on a pre- ceding letter, is pronounced. Let, for example, the reader pronounce first the word act, and then, eiiact, and mark the difference between the a in the first, and the a in the second word. He will perceive, that the utterance of a in act requires more efiibrt than that of a in enact. As, however, no vowel at the beginning of a word can be uttered without a slight effort or breathing, it is evident that this character is about as important as the dot over the Roman i; thus, έχω, ei/ti, Atay are nothing more than ίχω, et/xt, Αίας. Note 6. The rough breathing is never found in connection with ρ or pp in ancient inscriptions. Thus, ?η•γίνοίς, άρραβ^ώτονς, Τΐύρρος, άπο ρ μαίνονται are, in inscriptions in which Η represents the rough breathing, written ΡΕΓ1Ν0ΙΣ, ΑΡΡΑΒΔΟΤΟΣ, ΠΥΡΡΟΣ, Α1Ί0ΡΡΑΙ- NONTAI. Further, ουκ never becomes ούχ before ρ ; as ου ρητός, never οίχ ρητός. It is inferred therefore that the orthography p, pp was employed by the grammarians to indicate the ?'y////i if sound of ρ at the beginning of a word, and of tiie second ρ in the middle of a word. §§ 5, 6.] coNSONANT^. 15 It may be remarked here that some of the most learned editors now employ pp instead of pp ; as (ίρρην, άρρητος, Πυρρός, Note 7. The ancient grammarians placed the rough breathing also o\^er ρ after a rough mute (3, φ, χ) ; and the smooth breathing over ρ after a smooth mute (r, π, κ); as θρόνος, αφρός, χρόνος, Κτρ^νς, κάπρος, CONSONANTS. ^^5. According to the organs with which they are pronounced, the consonants are divided into labials ir, β, φ, μ, Unguals τ, δ, ^, ζ, σ, λ, ν, ρ, palatals κ, γ, χ. CuThe labials are pronounced chiefly with the lips; the Unguals, with the ^n^e ; and the palatals, with the palate. ^^^ 6. 1. The consonants λ, μ, ν, ρ are, on account of their gliding pronunciation, called liquids. ii2. The consonants ξ, ψ are called double con- sonants ; because ξ stands for κσ, and ψ for ττσ. a 3. The consonants ττ, β, φ, κ, γ, χ, τ, δ, ^ are called mutes. They are divided into smooth mutes it, k, t, middle mutes β, γ, δ, rough mutes φ, χ, ^. β These letters correspond to each other in the perpendicular direction ; thus, φ is the correspond- ing rough of 7Γ. a4. The letter σ, on account of its hissing sound, is called the sibilant letter. ^• The consonants z/, p, σ, ξ, ψ are the only ones that can stand at the end of a genuine Greek word. Except AC in the preposition i κ, from, out of, and in the adverb ουκ or ουχ, not. Note, Aecording to Dionysius and the ancient grammarians, Ζ 16 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 7. stands for ΣΔ. This howe\^er does not mean that Ζ is a mere abbre- viation for ΣΔ, but that, in pronunciation, it has the power of a double consonant, and that the -^olians and Dorians, in the middle of a word, very often used ΣΔ, where the lonians and Athenians employed Ζ (^ 10). We add further that the Boeotians and Megarians used ΔΔ, and the Tarentines ΣΣ for Z, but only in the middle of a word, from which it cannot certainly be inferred that Ζ was a mere abbreviation for ΔΔ or ΣΣ. Had Ζ been sounded like ΣΔ, Dionysius and Quintilian w^ould not have admired its beautiful sound (*' ή (τνχη τω πνενματι Sacrvi/erat," it is gently aspirated, and ^^jucundissima littera ''"'), and the Roman grammarians would not have asserted that the Latin had no sound corresponding to it. It is evident therefore that Ζ is not a double consonant, in the usual acceptation of the term double. (See also ^ 25, n. 3.) Doubling of Consonants, § 7. 1. All the single consonants, except the rough mutes and f, admit of being doubled ; the liquids λ, /ζ, ν, ρ, and σ are very often doubled, and next to them,r ; as dWos^t other ; αμμος^ sand ; yei/mo), to beget ; θάρρος^ darings courage ; πράσσω or πράττω^ to do, 2. At the beginning of a word p is doubled when, in the for- mation of a word, it happens to stand between two vowels ; as ρίπτω ίρριψα eppippai^ to throw ; άναρρίπτω, to throw up. Except when the first component part is cv, v:ell ; as εύρω- στος, vigorous. 8. A rough consonant (φ, χ, 3) is not doubled ; but instead of this, its corresponding smooth (ττ, κ, τ) is placed before it ; as Σαπφώ, Βάκχος, ϋιτΰενς, for Σαφφώ, Βάχχος, ΤΙίθθενς, Note 1. The Poets, except the Attic Poets, often double a conso- nant for the sake of the metre ; as ποσσί, ν€κνσσι, τελίσσαι, εΧΚαβον, τυσσος, οπίσσω, οττι, οππως. On the other hand, the same Poets sometimes employ one conso- nant where that consonant is commonly doubled ; as ΑχιΚίνς, Οδυ- σ€υς, εραπτον. Note 2. The doubling of ν in ΙΙελοπόννησος, ΙΙροκόννησος, is an accidental peculiarity ; also the doubling of ρ in βορράς (contracted from βορίας), the north wind. Note 3. Some words, which originally were wTitten with one σ, were in later times written wath σσ; as Κνωσός Κι/ωσσό$•, Cnossiis ; ΤΙαρνησυς ΙΙαρνησσός, Parnassus ; Κηφϊσός Κηφισσός, Cephissus ; ΚρΙσα Κρισσα^ Orissa. ^§ 8, 9.] CHANGE, TRANSPOSITION, ETC., OF LETTEKS. 17 T*ioTE 4. In some of the most ancient inscriptions, not unfreqnent- ly a word is written with a single consonant, where com.monly that consonant is doubled ; as Ίττο/χβ'δων, άλάλοις, αΧα, καδαΚημΕνοι, iypa- μίνω, Tvpavaf for Ίττττο/Χέδωζ/, αλλάλοίί, ciXXa, κα^οα\ϊ]μ€νοί, ^γραμμέ- νω, Ύνρράνά. Note 5. Σ Λvas often doubled before a consonant, especially before r; thus, in inscriptions we ήηά Αρισστόδαμος, Κρισστοφάνψ^ TeXeV- στας^ Ασσκληπιό^ωρος. We find also €ξσατραπ€νω (€κσσατραπ€νω), for σατραπεύω^ in an Ionic inscription. Note 6. A rough mute was sometimes doubled in the middle of a word ; as κά6θ€σαν, KXf o^^iy, Αφφιανός, ^Άφφιον, Οφφιανόζ, Βαχχί- δαί, Σάφφον, for κάτθ€σαν, Κ\€θτθίς, Αππιανός, "Αππιον^ Οππιανός, Βακχίδας, Σάττφου, found in inscriptions. — Σαφώ for Σαπφώ is found in an inscription. CHANGE, TRANSPOSITION, ADDITION, AND OMISSION, OF LETTERS. § 8• Commutation of Vowels. a, e : /zey^^oy, αρσην, μνάα, τ€σσαρ€ς, όράω, Ionic μίγαθος^ epcnjVf μν€α, τ/σσ€/3ε?, όρ€ω ; "Apre/xt?, €T€pos, ye, iepos, ττύζω, Doric "Αρταμις^ arepos, γά, ίαρό?, πιάζω, α, f , ο : τρ€πω τράπω ίτραττον Τ€τροφα τρόπος. α, ο : ανά, στρατός, εφθάρθαι, ^olic ον-τίθην (άνατίθηναι), στρότος, ζφθορθαί ; γράφω, τ€τταρ€ς, Doric γρόφω, TeTopes. α, ω : ^άω ^ώω, κράζω κρώζω ; ΑΓΑΓΩ άγω-γη, ΑΚΑΚί2 άκωκη, άο, €ω : λαός λβώ?, ναός νζώς, ΐλάος ΪΧβως : so in the genitive of the first declension ; Bcsotic Τυδβίδάο, Ionic Τυδείδβω. e, L : βζομαί Ίζω, €χω 'ίσχω ; χρνσ€ος, χά\κ€ος, o^e, jEolic χρνσιος, χάλκίος, οψ-ι ; '^€0ς, σνκ€α, Doric ?ίίός, σνκία. The Bceotic regularly changes e before a vowel into ι ; as χρίος, Ferta, ΑαμοτίΚως, €j Ο : λβγω λόγο?, π€νομαι πόνος ; Απόλλων, Doric Απόλλων. e, ω : AEPQ αωρτο, πλ^ω ττλώω, λ/ττω Χώπη, στρέφω στρωφάω, η, ω : ρηγννμί ζρρηγα €ρρωγα βώξ, πτησσω πτώσσω πτώξ, άρηγω αρω- γή άρω-γός, Μαιητίς Μαιώτις, η, L : ήδ^ Ide ; rare. ι, υ : νψος, ν^Ιτηλός, νπαρ, νπίρ, -^olic ιψ-ο?, 1>\τη\ος, Χπαρ, Ιπίρ, ο, ν : όνομα, όζος, Οδυσσευ?, από, πρντανις, ΤΥΧΩ, ^olic οννμα, νσδος, Υ3ύσσ€νς, άπν, πρότανις, τόσσαι {τυξαι). § Ο. Commutation of Diphthongs. d, ai : the ^olic uses at for ά, when it arises from αντσ, ανσ. at, €L : el, Doric al : the Boeotic sometimes changes at into et ; as A^a- ν€Ϊος, Tavaypelos", θειβζίος, ai, η : the Bceotic regularly changes ai into η ; €ν€ργ€της, κ^κόμιστη^ άπογράφ€σθη, Ύαναγρηος, for €ν€ργ6ταίς^ Κ€κόμισται, άπογράφ^σθαίη Ύαναγραϊος. 18 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 10• συ, ου . ΑΥΡί2 άπ -ovpas άπ-ονράμ^νος et, η : the Bceotic changes η into et ; θ^ίβαθζν, θ€ίβηος, €πΟ€ΐσ€ : the Doric often uses η for et ; κηρνλος, N^Xos-, €πίτάΒηος, άσαμηωτος, et, Γ : the Bceotic regularly changes et into Γ ; αρχΓ, ασφάλΓα, FeXarto, ΦΓδ ι'αί. During the silver and brazen ages of the language, e was often pre- fixed to Γ nnerely to show that it was long ; that is, e, in this case, was an orthographical mark ; as τ^Ισαι^ κρ€ίνω, τ^ιμησαι, found in inscrip- tions. During the latter part of the brazen age, this e was prefixed even to t ; as Tetroy, ILeios, yv^vaaeiapxrjaas, in inscriptions. (See Appendix.) et, OL : δβιδω ^idoiKay α^/δω άοώός άοώη^ λβ/ττω λοιττο?. €v, ου : σπβυδω σπουδή, ΕΛΕΥΘί2 ^ΐληΧουθα. οι, ϋ : the Bceotic regularly changes ol into ϋ ; as τυδβ, tvs cikXvs προ- ^eVuy, FvKLa, for τοίδβ^ rols aXXots• npo^evoLS, οΙκία. 01, ov : the ^olic uses ot for ου, when it arises from οντσ, ονσ. ου, υ : the Boeotians and Laconians changed υ into ου, and pronounced ου long or short according as the original υ was long or short ; thus, in ουδωρ, aovu, σούγγραφος, άργονρίον, ου was short ; in οϋλη, άσον λια, long, ου, ω : the Doric uses ω for ου, but only when it arises from o, over, oo^ o€ : the Thessalian uses ov for ω ; as άνάΧονμα,^ κοινάονν, Φείδοι^ va, viy €L : in the feminine perfect participle, the Doric sometimes uses et for VL ; as ερρηγΕΪα, cnLTereXeKela, ίστακίία, σνναγαγοχ€Ϊα. vii V : ^νην, φυην, λβλυτο, daivvTo, πηγνντο, for the analogical ^νιην^ ί)υΐ7^ί', XeXvLTOf δαίνυιτο, πηγνυίτο, η inscriptions we find vos, παρ€ί\ηφυα, for vl6s, παρ€ΐ,\ηφνϊα, § 10. Commutation of Consonants. 7Γ, /3, φ, /χ, of the 5a7we organ : άσφάραγος άσπάραγος ; πατξΐν βατείν, πικρός βίκρός, Αμπρακία Αμβρακία ; άπαζ αμακις, ύπνος S Ο m η u s ; αβαξ άμάκων, κνβ€ρνητης κνμ€ρνητης, /xeXXetv βίΚ\€ίν, μ^γα βάγων mag is, μάρψαι βράψαι, σέβομαι σ€μνός, €ρ€φω κρεμνάς, στίλβω στιλπνός, στρ€φω στρεβλός, ροφάω s or be ο. κ, γ, χ, of the same organ : δέχομαι ^ίκομαι ; γναφενς κναφενς, γνάμ- πτω κνάμπτω, Κνωσός Τνωσός ; α-γχω an go. τ, δ, 3, σ, of the same organ : τίριος Sepeoy ; διδωσί, πλούσιος, ενιαύ- σιος, Λκοσι, Doric ^ίδωτι, πλουτιος, ενιαύτιος, Υείκατι ; παρθένος, *^εός, ελθείν, Laconian παρσενος, σιός, ελσην, π, κ, τ, of the same power : ποϊος κοίος, που κον, οποίος όκοΊος, ΟΠί2 6π- τίλλος οπτίλος οκταλος oculus; πέμπε πέντε quinque ; πίσνρες πίτταρες quatuor ; ενβπω inquam; κηνος τηνος, κηλον telum, πότε πόκα ; στέλλω σπελλω σπολάς ; λνκος lupus. β, y, δ, of the sa?ne power : βληρ δέλεαρ, Αελφοί Βελφοί, οβελός υδε- λός ; γννη βανά, γληχων βληχων ; 8νόφος γνόφος, γλυκύς dulcis. φ, χ, 3, of the same power : ^ηρ φηρ fera, ^ηρίον φηρων, ^άρσος fortis, 3ύ/ία fores, door ; αύχην αΰφΐ]ν οχ άμφην, πλήβω πλ7]χω, όρνιθες ορνιχες. •^ 11.] CHANGE, TRANSPOSITION, ETC., OF LETTERS. 19 β, ζ : βάραθρον, ΙπιβαρΙω^ βάΧλω, Arcadian (epeupov, eVtfa/5 /ω, ζίλ- λω ; so ΝΙΒΩ νίζω, ΛΑΒΩ λάζομαι. δ, δδ, f, σδ : The Doric and ^'Έοϋο generally use σδ for ζ in the mid die of a word ; as φράσσω, σνρίσ^ο)^ for φράζω, σνρίζω. The Dor- ic and JBoeotic often use δ for fat the beginnins; of a word ; as Δευ?, Δ.άν, hvyov, doXou, for Z€vs, Ζάν, Cvyof, ζηΧον. The Boeotic and some of the branches of the Doric use δδ for ζ in the middle of a word ; as yvfJLvaddopai, iepeiaddovroSj for γυμνάζομαι, ί€ρ€ίάζοιη•ος. δί, ζ : δίαβάλΧζΐν, καρδία, Αιώνυσος, ^olic ζαβάΧλ€ίν, κάρζα, Ζόνννξος. δ, λ : δάκρνον la cry ma, Odvaaevs OXvaaevs Ulysses, δασύ? Xaaios δα- λα-. f, σσ : σαΧπίζω, άνάσσω, Tarentine σαλττ/σσω, άνάζω. Sft, />t/x, πτΓ : όμμα, (ΐΚξίμμα, ^olic δττττα, ΙΐΧ^ιππα : οθμα, στίθμα, γρά- 6 μα, for όμμα, στίμμα, γράμμα, in Hesychius. \, ν : βίΧτων βίΧτιστος, φίΧτατος, ηΧθον, κίΧτο, Doric β^ντων βίντι- στος, φίντατος, ηνθον, κίντο. λ, υ : αυκάν αΧκάν, αύκνονα άΧκνόνα, ανμα αΧμη, ανσος αΧσος, Sevye- σθαί '^ύΧγβσθαί, avyclv aXyeiv, €v6e1v iXBelv, in Hesychius. X, ρ : κλίβανος κρίβανος, ράκη Χάκη Χακίς, ν, σ : as Xeyo/zei/, ην, Doric Xeyo/xey, rjs. pp, par : αρσην αρρην, 3άρσο? ?iappos. ρ, σ : the Laconian dialect very often changes σ into ρ ; as πίθος πί- σορ, '^ζός σιορ, πους πόρ, άώς (ηως) άβώρ. σσ, ττ : the Doric and Ionic use σσ, the Boeotic and Attic, ττ ; as πράσσω πράττω, πΧάσσω πΧάττω, ^^άΧασσα '^άΧαττα. στ, ττ : ϊστω, Ιπιχαρίστως, Boeotic 'ίττω, βπιχαρίττως ; άνάστηθι, La- conian Ιίττασι, that is αν-σταθι. σ, h : αΧς, αΧας, άΧμη, sal, salum, salt; e|, sex, six; ίπτά, septem, seven; ήμισυς, ημι-, semis, semi-; ϋΧη, sylva; υπ^ρ, super; υπο, sub; ύπνος, s ο m η u s. According to the ancient grammarians, in some of the branches o^ the Doric dialect (as the Laconian), σ was often changed into h (') in the middle of a Avord ; as ποιησαι ποιηάι {ποιηΐιαι), μώσα μώά (μώήα), βουσόα βουοα {βουΐιόα), πάσα πάά (παίια). Lengthenings Shortenings Protraction^ and Resolution of Vowel-sounds. §11. 1 . When from any cause a short vo\vel is to be lengthened^ the following changes take place : α is lengthened into d; as πράγμα, σοφία, τιμά, άΧιος, άμ^ρά. The Ionic dialect lengthens it into 7;, and this is its chief peculiarity ; as πρηγμα, σοφίη, τιμή, ηΧιος, ήμ€ρη. The Attic follows the Ionic, ex- cept when the a is preceded by a vowel or ρ ; as τιμή, ηΧιος, σβ/χι/ό- της; σοφία, ήμερα, πράγμα. The exceptions to this rule are very trifling. When 7; arises from e, it cannot be changed into d; thus, the clas- sical Cohans and Dorians never said β^οσφάς ζΧβχβάν, because the roots are θ€οσ€β€-, Χ€χθ€-. 20 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ H Not unfrequently a is lengthened into at ; as άγαίομαι, φαίνω, diai from ά-γάομαί, ΦΑΝΩ, δίά. c — τ;, or €L ; Χιμην \ιμ€Ρθζ, /χελω μ6μηλα, ΣΠΕΡΩ σπείρω. In gener- al, in the ^olic and old Doric, it is lengthened into η ; in the Ionic and Attic, into et ; as -^olic σνμφβρην, σννβχην, χηρ, Ionic and At- tic συμφ€ρ€ΐν, συν€χ€ίν, χ^ίρ ; Doric 7τaρayyη\ωvτL, Ionic and Attic τταραγγείλωσι. X — Γ, or et ; ΚΛΙΝΩ κλΓι/ω, ΛΙΠΩ λείπω. ο — ω, or ου, rarely οι ; ^ηΚόω δηλώσω, ΑΚΟΩ άκονω, πο€ω 7rot/a>. The Cohans and Dorians commonly lengthen it into ω ; the loni- ans and Attics, into ov ; as ^olic opavos ωρανος, Doric ωρανός, Ionic and Attic ουρανός ; Doric βώς, Ionic and Attic βους. υ — ν, or €υ ; ΑΙΣΧΥΝΩ αίσχϋνω, ΦΥΓΩ φεύγω. 2. Α long vowel or diphthong is shortened by simply revers- ing the preceding rule. 3. Protraction is the repetition of the same vowel-sound ; it is confined to the Epic dialect ; as iroboiv ποδοαν, όμοιος ομοίως^ Α,χαιάς Αχααάς, nepavnepdav, ην ήην, κραίνω κραιαίνω, η ψ, eee, ου οου, 4. When a diphthong does not arise from the lengthening of a short vowel (§ 11, 1), it originally consisted of two distinct syllables ; as πάϊς τταΐς, Μαΐων Μαίων, άνω αϋω, άϋτός αυτός, t'ihov eldov, Ατρ€Ϊ3ας ΑτρΕίδας, Αργαίος Apyctoi, ev cv, οίγω οϊγω, όιομαι οΧομαι, Except 6t, eu, when they arise from ee, eo, respectively ; as edee edei, KaXeovrai KaXedvraL, 5. The Ionic dialect lengthens the first vowel of the original form of a diphthong as follows : (a) It changes cl (originally et) into ηϊ ; as βασιλεία βασιΚηΐη, ση- μύον σημηίον, κΧείς κΚηΐς, κλβιω κΧηΙω, λεία Χηϊζω, (b) It changes αν (αν) into ων in the following words : €μαντου c/xe- ωντον,, σ€αντου σ€ωϋτου, ίαυτου ίωντου, ^αυμα 3ώϋ/χα, τραύμα τρώϋμα. (See also § 3, η. 5.) (c) Other changes ; eus• ηνς, ev ηΰ, evre ηϋτ€, γραυς γρηνς, Μαίων Μηΐων Ml] ων. Note 1. When a short vowel is followed by a liquid, the ^olic dialect usually lengthens the syllable by simply doubling that Uquid ; as eareWa, ΓαλΧος, nebiXKov, βόλΧα, βόΧλομαι, €μμι, τίμμα, χρίμμα, Ιίμμζς, ϋμμζς, κτ€ννω, κρίννω, κΧίννω, eyevvaro, Ιμύρρω, φθύρρω, άβρρω, οΧοφύρρω, Sometimes it doubles the liquid even after the vowel has been length- ened ; as μηννος, καΚημμι, προαγρημμ€νω. Note 2. In an Ionic inscription, φ€ογ€ίν, φ e oyer ω are found for φ€υy€Lv, φevy€τω. Note 3. In an inscription, cv is shortened into c ; €πισκ€νάζ€ΐν ^ττ*- τκ€αζ€ίν, σκ€νοβηκη <ΓΚ€θ6ηκη. ^ 12.] CHiiNGE, TΠA^-SPOSITION, ETC., OF LETTERS. 21 Transposition^ Addition^ and Omission, , § 12. 1. Metathesis is an interchange of place between two letters in the same word : one of the letters thus transposed is fommonly a liquid ; as καρδία κραοίη, κάρτος κράτος. 2. Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to a word 5 as eXdopai iiXdopai, μικρός σμικρός. So στάχνς ασταχνς, σταφίς άσταφίς, στβροπη άστεροπη : 6£λδωρ, eet- δομαι, αΧπομαι, εΥργω, €^£λω, €ορτάζω, (χθβς. 3. Aphceresis is the taking of one or more letters from the beginning of a word ; as λείβω ^Ίβω, φημί ημί, σκζ^άνννμι κώάν ννμι, ΓΝΟΟΣ νόος, mind, ^ 4. Epenthesis is the insertion of one or more letters in the j middle of a \VOrd ; as ΜΑΘΩ μανθάνω, έπομαι ζσπομαι. So ^avaros (ΘΑΝΩ), κάματος (ΚΑΜΩ), κόναβος (ΚΟΠΩ), στεγανός στεγνός, τέμενος (τεμω), ενεπω (ΕΝΠΩ), "φράσσω ταράσσω, αριθμός άρ- \ θμός. So όμφη (ΕΠΩ), κόμβος κόπος, ρίμφα (ΡΙΦΏ), βενθος βάθος, κιγχάνω κιχάνω,πίμπρημι{'Π.ΡΑζ1),7τίμπλημι (ΠΑΑΩ), καγχλάζω (ΧΑΑ- ΖΩ), κιγκράω (ΚΡΑΩ). So δαρδάτττω 3άπτω, άκροάομαι ακούω, άγρυπνος j ανπνος, ' (V 5. Syncope is an omission of the vowel -sound of a syllable from the middle of a AVOrd ; as πατέρος πατρός, μιμενω μίμνω, ήλν 6ον ηΚθον, ι This term is used also when one or more consonants are omitted from the middle of a word ; as εκπλαγλος εκπαγλος, λελίλημαι λελίη- ' μαι, πΧνεΧος ^νεΧος, 6. Paragoge is the adding of one or more letters to the end of a word ; as εκείνος εκεινοσί, εφης εφησθα. 7. Apocope is the cutting off of one or more letters from the end of a W^ord ; as apa ap, παρεχόντων παρεχόντω, μισθούσθων I μισθονσθω. Note 1. When μ\, μρ arise from a syncope or metathesis, the labial β (kindred to μ) is inserted between them ; thus ΜΟΛΩ μεμβλω- κα, με\ω μεμβΧεται, μέσος ήμερα μεσημβρία, γαμερός γαμβρός, άμορτός αμβροτος, ημαρτον ημβροτον, είμαρμαι εμβραμαι. At the beginning of a word, μβλ, μβρ drop μ ; thus βλώσκω, βρο- τός, for μβΧώσκω, μβροτός. As to βλάξ, βλίσσω, from μαΧακός, μεΧι, they might have come from μβΧάξ, μβΧίσσω ; or from μΧάξ, μΧίσσω, by changing μ into β, according to another analogy. Note 2. Not unfrequently, the same w^ord undergoes aphsresis or syncope; as ^w {κσνν) ζυνός, συν, κοινός, cum, con-, communis common 22 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 13. So κτ€ίνω, καίνω, Se /νω, ^ai/eti/, caedo, cudo, cut; Τρηγννμι, ρψ fwui, ράγννμι, άγνυμι^ frango. EUPHONIC CHANGES. ^"13. 1. When two mutes come together, the first is changed mto its corresponding smooth, middle, or rough, according as the second is smooth, middle, or rough : when both are of the same power, no change takes place. E. g. τ^τριβταί τετριπταί^ ηγται ηκταί, ίλ^-γΘην ίΚύχθην, So γ€γραφται yeypanrai, Τ€Τ€νχται τίτ^υκται^ ζτρίβθην ^τρίφθην, irv- Τϊθην ζτύφθην, €π\€κθην €π\€χθην, κύφ^α κvβ^ay ίτη-γράφ^ην cViypa- β^ην, €π8ομο9 εβΒομος, οκ^οος όγδοος. It is observed here that a Ungual (r, δ, 3) is never found before a labial or palatal (ττ, /3, φ ; κ, γ, χ). 2. A palatal {κ, χ) before μ is commonly changed into γ ; γ, of course, undergoes no change before μ ; as πίπλ^κμαι π^πλε- γμαι, τβτενχμαί τίτ€υγμαι. Sometimes κ before μ becomes χ ; as Ιωκμός Ιωχμός, άκακμίνος άκοτ •χμίνος, αΐκμη αίχμψ 3. Α palatal (γ, χ) before σ is changed into κ, in which case κσ is written ξ; κ, of course, undergoes no change before σ ; as λ/γσω λβ^ω (λ€κσω), τ^νχσω Τ€νξω [τ€υκσω). 4. Α labial (π, β, φ) before μ is always changed into μ ; as Χ^Χαπμαι XeXet/i/xat, τβτριβμαι Τ€τριμμαι, γ^γραφμαι Ύ€γραμμαί. 5. Α labial (β, φ) before σ is changed into ττ, in w^hich case πσ is written -ψ- ; ττ, of course, undergoes no change before σ , as τρίβσ<ι> τρίψω {τρίπσω), γράφσω γράψω (γράπσω), 7. Α lingual (r, δ, θ, ζ) before μ is commonly changed into σ 5 as Ί]Βμαι. ^σ /xat, π€7Γ€ΐθμαί ττ€π€ίσμαι, φρόντιζμα φρόνησμα, λΙΒ. α lingual (r, δ, θ, ζ) before σ, or before a palatal {κ, γ, χ), is always dropped ; as €π€τσα €π6σα, αδσω ασω, πλάσσω πλά- σω, φροντίζσω φροντίσω : ^δκα ^κα, π^παθκα πίπ€ΐκα, π€φρ6ντίζκα π€φρόντίκα. 9. Α lingual (r, δ, θ, ζ) before another lingual is, in verbs and verbal nouns, changed into σ ; as ^δται Τ^σται, ίδτε tVre, πί• τΧαθταί π€π\ασταί, φροντιζτης φροντιστής. 10. Α mute consonant before σ is, in certain cases, changed, by assimilation, into σ; as φfίκσω φρίσσω, πίπσω π^σσω, βλίτσω βΧίσσω. ^ 13.] EUPHONIC CHANGES. 23 So πράγσω πράσσω, τνχσαι τόσσαι (for τνσσαι) , φάβσα φάσσα, οπσα οσσα, πλάθσω πλάσσω, τάδσα Γασσα, πίκσα πίσσα. 11. When κατά loses its final vowel before a consonant, the τ is by assimilation changed into that consonant. But when that consonant is φ, χ, the τ becomes ττ, ac, respectively. Before 3 or another r, it of course remains unchanged. (§ 7, 3.) E. g. κατάβαΧ€ κάββα\€, Karauaveiv κατθαν^Ιν, κατακ€ίθΡΤ€ς κακκ^ί• OVTES. So κατίλιπον κάΧλιπον, καταμ^νω καμμ^νω, καταν^νσας κανν€νσας, κατ€π€σ€ κάττπβσβ, καταρίζω καρρίζω, κατατανύσας κατταννσας. So in ehsion, κατά γοι/ν, καγγόνυ (pronounced kag-gonu) ; κατά δυναμιν, καδδνναμίν ; κατά 3άλασσαι/, κατΘαΚασσαν ; κατά κζφαΧψ, κακκ^φα- \τ]ν ; κατά μεν, καμμεν \ κατά τό, καττό ; κατά φάλαρα, καπφάλαρα. Before two consonants, κατ- becomes κα• ; as κατακτάνε κάκτα* V€f κατ€σχ€θ€ κάσχεθβ, κατάβλημα κάβΧημα. The Doric dialect, however, sometimes drops the r, even before a single conso- nant ; as κατάβηθί κάβασι, κατίπζτον κάπ€τον, 12. Σ between two consonants is dropped ; as €ψαλσθ€ eyp-akOe, πεφάνσθαί πεφάνθαι, εσπάρσθαι €σπάρθαι. Note 1. The preposition €κ before a consonant remains unaltered ; as €κσκορπίζω, εκδερω, €κθρώσκω, €κμαίνω, (a) In ancient inscriptions, €κ before /3, δ, λ, μ, or f, is often changed into ey ; as iy Βεζ/διδβιωΐ', εγδόσβίί, ey Xt/xei/oi, cy Μνρίιη]ς, €γνη\ηθίωντί, (b) Before σ, €κ in Attic inscriptions is sometimes written €χ ; thus, €χ Σάμου. (c) Frequently, the κ of ex and the initial σ of the noun following were represented by ^ ; as εξοννιεων, i^vpov, for €κ Σουνύων, €κ Σύ- ρου, found in inscriptions. (d) We find also, ΤΚΧυσιν, €ττων, εχθειάσας, υπεχθηται, υπζχθίσι- μος, for €κ\υσιν, €Κ των, εκθειάσας, υπεκθηται, υπεχθίσιμος. Note 2. In one of the most ancient inscriptions, απ θ it ov is found for αφθιτον. Note 3. During the most flourishing period of the Attic dialect, a palatal before σ was changed into χ, and a labial, into φ ; as ζ^οχσεν eho^^v, χσυν€λ€χσαμ€ν ξννεΧεξαμεν, παραδεχσάσθων παραδεξάσθων \ γρύφς Ύρυψ, άνβγραφσαν ανάγραψαν, found in inscriptions. In the other dialects, a palatal before σ was changed into κ, and isi labial, into π. In process of lime this rule became general ; that is, ξ, ψ were, by the later Greeks, sounded hke κσ, πσ, respectively. Note 4. Words beginning with σ followed by a consonant do not lose their σ in composition with προς ; as προσσπ^νΒω, προσσχών. 24 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [^ 14. Note 5, In ancient inscriptions we find ταστηλας, clarrpiasj foi ray arrjXaSt fty στήΧας, Note 6. ΤΣ is found only in foreign words ; as Ίσα3η, Tsade, a Hebrew letter. As to the unintelligible inscription ΣΟΤΣΟΤΟΣΑΕΣ, most preposter- ously tortured into Σώζον του Σαης, that is, This is the vase 'Of So- zus the son of Sa'e " (his mother), it is nothing more than a string of Greek letters without any meaning. (Franzes Epigraph. Graec, p. 345.) § 14. 1. Before a labial (π, β, φ), ν is changed into /χ; as €νπΐ7Γτω €μπίπτω, σννβαίνω συμβαίνω, ίνφανηζ εμφανής, €νψνχος («/- ΤΓσνχ^ος) €μψνχ^ος, 2. Before a palatal {κ, γ, χ), ν is changed into γ ; as σννκαΐα σνγκαιω, σννγενης σνγγζνης, σννχίω σνγχ^ω, Ιν^ίω (^€νκσ£ω) €γξ€ω^ μίΚάνκαρποζ μζΧάγκαρπος, 3. Before a liquid (λ, μ, ρ), ν is changed into that liquid, as σννλίγω συλλέγω, €νμ€νω έμμίνω, σννρίω συρρέω, οί,4. In many instances ν is dropped before «τ, and the preced- ing vowel, if short, is lengthened ; in Λvhich case e, ο become et, ου, respectively ; as piXavs μίΧάς, kt^vs kt€ls, dibovai διδουσί, deiKPvvaL• 8€ίκννσι ; βονΧ€νωνσι βονΧζύωσι, So τάΧανς τάΧας, μονσανς μούσας, β€βονΧ€υκανσί β€βονΧ(νκάσί, Ιστάνσι Ιστασι, evs els, τιθίνσι τιθ^ίσι, βουΧ^νονσι βονΧίύονσι, Xoyovs Xoyovs. 1 5. When after the ν a lingual (r, δ, s) has also been dropped before σ (§ 13, 8), the preceding short vowel is almost always lengthened ; as βουΧ€υσαντ9 βονΧ€νσα9, SeVry Sets•, Χ€οντσί Χίουσι, dvPTs dvs. So d€LKVvvTS ^eiKvvs, φθίντσα φθϊσα, σπίν^σω σττεισω, ττίνθσομαι π€ίσομαι. The dative plural of adjectives in e t y does not lengthen the e be- fore σι ; as φωνψντσί φωνη€σι, perhaps the only example. ' 6. When the root of a noun of the third declension ends in V, this letter is dropped before σι in the dative plural^ without any further change ; as ^αίμονσι δαίμοσι, Χιμίνσι Χιμίσι, μψσί^ μησί. \i « 7. Συν m composition drops ν when the word with which it is compounded begins with ζ, or with σ followed by a conso- nant ; as συνζνγος σύζυγος, συνοτροφη σνστροφη. The same rule appUes to the ^olic o»'- for αν-, ανά ; as ονσκάτττω ?5 14.] EUPHONIC CHANGES. 21 όσκάπτω, ονστασαν οστασαν^ ονστάθ^ις οστάθ^ις. So αττασι,, Laconian fur ίίν-σταβι άνάστηθι, 8. Sometimes, ν before σ followed by a vowel is changed iiO σ ; as συνσιτος σύσσιτοί, πανσυδί πασσυδί. So παΧίνσντος τταΧίσσντος, -χαρίενσα γαρί^σσα, πρόφρανσα προ- φρασσα. 9. In the Ionic dialect, the personal ending νσι becomes daif in verbs in /xt ; νται, in all kinds of verbs, becomes άται', as Ιατάνσ-ί [ίστάασι) ίστβασ-ι, τίθίνσυ τίθβασί, βνσι eaai, δίδονσι δίδόασι, ^€ΐκνυνσι deiKiwaai : dede^vrai δβ^ζχαταί, π^πότηνται π€ποτηαταί. Note 1. The combinations μπ, /χ/3, /χφ, γκ, γγ, yx were original- ly written ι/π, νβ, ι/φ, νκ, ι/γ, νχ, even in words in which μ and γ are apparently radical letters ; as awnpoedpos, Ιΐάνφίλος, evKaipos, παΧιν- λντων, συνμαχία, π€νπτος, \ανβάν€ίν, άμενφβς, Μίνκων, evyvs, Χαι^χά- Ρ€ίϊ/, found in ancient inscriptions. Note 2. At the end of a \vord, ν was often pronounced and written as if it were a part of the following word ; as τημ πολιν, e'c 7i/x πβρι, e/x βύν\€ντηρίω, τομ φόρον, μβμ \1τνχάς '. τώγ καιρών^ ay και, Toy ypaμμaτea, Upcoy χρημάτων : τόλ Xoyov, τωλ Xoy ιστών, τημ Μυσίαν : €s Σιδώνί, €S Σάμω, ey σνΧω, €ς στηΧτ] (also €στηΧτ] or claTrjXrj), €s Σ/γ- yo), all found in ancient inscriptions. Note 3. (a) The ^^olic dialect changes ανσ or αντσ, over or οι/τσ, into αισ, οισ, respectively ; as μίΧανς /xeXat?, ννμφανς ννμφαις, πάντς πάνς παις : tovs τοις, νόμονς νόμοις, άρμόζοντσα άρμόζονσα άρμόζοισα. (b) The old Doric dialect changes 6ζ/σ, ονσ, into ησ, ωσ, respec- tively ; as €νς ης, χαρί^ντς χαρί^νς χαρίης, καταΧυμακωθβντς καταΧν- μακωθης : δώόντσί δώόνσι διδώσι, μ€Τ€χοντσί μετίχονσι μΕτίχωσί, τόνς τώς, Ίττπονς Ιππως. (c) The Boeotic changes ονσ into ωσ, after the analogy of the Dor- ic ; as Ιόνσα Ιώσα, iσy6vovς iσy6vως. Note 4. The Latin ending -ens is, in Grecized names, changed into -ης, after the analogy of the Doric dialect ; as Clemens, ΕΧημης. Note 5. Ν is not dropped before σ in the folloAving cases : (a) In the ending -νς; thus, €Χμίνς, πβίρινς, Ύίρννς. (b) In the second person singular of the perfect passive, and in ver- bal nouns in -ί/σ£5 ; ΆΒ πβφανσαί, ττάχννσις, 'ίτίπανσις. Also m Kev σαι, aor. act. inf. from κ^ντίω. (c) HaXiv and παν often retain ν before σ ; as παΧίνσκιος, πανσέ- ληνος. (d) The Argives and Cretans retained the original combination νσ ; as eVs", τίθίνς, τόνς, πp€Ly€vτάvs, νπαρχόνσας, πάνσας. Note 6. Εν usually remains unaltered before σ, ρ, ζ ; as Ινράπτω^ (νσάττω, €vζ€vywμL. 2 26 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 15. IN OTE 7. The Doric and Thessalian dialects often changed the end- ings -avs, -evSi -ovs, into -a?, -es, -oy ; as τ^χνανς τβχνας, πά- σανς πάσας, τάλανς τάλάς, μ^Χανς μίΚας, Κ'ίαντς Αια?, πράξαρτς πμά~ ξάς, χαρίβντς ^apUs ; evepyerevrs evepyeres, Thessalian. Note 8. (a) "Αγαν drops ν in ayaKkvroSf ayaa'^cvrjs, ayaarovos. (b) The -allelic 6 v-, for άν-, and that for άνά, drops ν in ό-μνά&'^ην^ for άναμνησ'^ηναι, found in an inscription. Note 9. "Εππασί? or εττασί?, Boeotic for ^γκτησις, possession^ 'property, compounded of iv and ττάσις from ΠΑΟΜΑΙ. § 15. 1. When, in the formation of a compound word, a smooth consonant (ττ, ac, r) comes in contact with a vowel hav- ing the rough breathing, that smooth consonant is changed into its corresponding rough consonant (φ, χ, Θ), and the rough breathing disappears ; as άφ-ίημί, for άπ-ΐημι, from άπό ΐημι ; δ€- χημβρος, for deK-TJpepos, from deKa rjpepa ; καθ-αφεω, for κατ-αιρίω, from κατά αΙρ€ω. 2. When, of two successive words, the first ends in a smooth consonant, and the next begins with a vowel having the rough breathing, that smooth consonant is changed into its correspond- ing rough ; as άψ" ου, for άπ ου ; ονχ ύ/χ6Ϊί, for ουκ Ipels ; μ€ΰ* ήμων, for μ€Τ ημών. So eVS' όπως, for eVrti/ όπως ; νυγβ αΚην, for νύκτ ολην ; τίφΰ* ού- τως, for τίπτ οϋτως ; (^ 13, 1.) 3. In reduplications^ when two successive syllables would each have a rough consonant, the first rough consonant is changed into its corresponding smooth ; as πίφηνα, κ^χψα, τβθη- λα, for φβφηνα, χ€χηνα, θίθηΚα, So φροντίζω π€φρόντίκα, χράω κεχρηκα, ^λαω Τ€^\ακα, ^βω τί^ημι, ΑΦΩ άπαφίσκω, ΑΧΩ άκαχίζω, ΦΛΑΖΩ παφΧάζω, (a) Also, in the aorist passive of 3υω and τίθημι ; thus, €τύθην, €τίΘην, for ζ'^ύθην, ζθίθην, (b) Also, in the following words: ΘΑΦΩ, θάπτω, €τάφην; ΘΑΧΥΣ ταχύς, 6 άσσων ; ΘΡΕΦΩ, τρίφω^ θρ^ψω ; ΘΡΑΧΩ, θράσσω, Τ€τρηχα; ΘΡΕΧΩ, τρίχω, Θρ^ζομαι; ΘΡΥΦΩ, θρύπτω, €τρύφην ; θρίξ,τριχυς, 4. The personal ending θ ι of the aorist passive imperative becomes η when the preceding syllable has a rough consonant ; as βονΧ^ύθητι for βου\€υθηΘι. Note 1. In a few instances, the rough breathing affects the smooth mute without coming in immediate contact with it ; thus, τ^^ριππον (τ€τταρ€ς ίππος), φρουρός {πρό οδός), ^οΐμάτιον {το ίμάτιον), ^ημ€Τ€ § 16.j EUPHONIC CHANGES. 27 pov {του ημ€Τ€ρον), ?ίονοατος (του ν3ατος)^ '^arepov (του άτερον), χω f καί ό), )^ω {καΐ οί), φροίμίον {ττρό οϊμη Οι οϊμη, § 4, Π, 2). Note 2. ΘΑΦΩ, to be astonished, has perfecf τί^^αφα, τ€^ηπα. "Έχω, to have, has perfect participle συν-οχωκώς, for σνρ-οκωχώς. Note 3. The Ionic dialect deviates from the first two rules ; as άπί- κν€ομαί, κατ€ν8ω, απ ου, ουκ οίος, μετ ημών, for άφίκνεομαι, κα^βυδω, αφ' ου, ουχ οίοί, /xeS* ημών. This seems to show that the lonians did not pronounce the rough breathing ; for the sake of uniformity, however, this breathing is, in our editions of the Ionic writers, suffered to retain its place. Note 4. In strictness, the second rule ought to read thus : When, of two successive words, the first ends in a smooth consonant, and the next begins with a vowel having the rough breathing, that smooth con- sonant is changed into its corresponding rough, and the rough breath- ing disappears. Thus, in inscriptions, in which Η stands for the rough breathing, we find ΚΑΘΕΚΑ2Τ0Ν, κα3' εκαστον ; ΚΑΘΟΤΙ, κα3' ότι. In order however not to disturb the usual orthography of the second word the rough breathing is, in our editions, suffered to retain its place. Movable N, Σ, K. c§ le. 1. Tho dative plural in l is written with a final ν when the next word begins with a vowel ; as θηρσί κακοΊς, θηρσίν aypLOLs, This rule applies also to the adverbial datives in σ^ ; as Αθη- νησιν, θηβησιν, ΐϊλαταιασίν, ΟΚυμπιασυν. 2. Also, the Epic ending φι; as θύρηφιν, άγεληφιν, θεόφιν, οχεσφιν. 3. Also, the demonstrative ending /, but rarely, and then al- ways after σ ; as εκεινοσίν, ούτοσίν, τοντουσίν, ουτωσίν, ΰΛ' Also, all third persons in σι and e ; as φησϊ Σωκράτης, φη• σ\ν ούτος ; τυπτουσι τούτους, τυπτουσιν αυτούς ; eXeye τούτοις^ ελε- yev αύτοϊς, 5. Also, the numeral είκοσι, which however can stand before a vowel without ν movable ; as είκοσι ετη. 6. Also, the adverbs πέρυσι, νόσφι, νυ, κε. Note 1. The Poets may for the sake of the metre use this ν her fore a consonant ; as εστερξιν μέγα. Note 2. The Poets may drop ν in" the adverbial ending Sev ; as αλ- Xc'^e for ίιλλο^εν. 28 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§ 17^ 18. Note 3. The lonians most commonly omit this ν before a vowel : as προσ€λασ€ 6 Ιππ€νς. Note 4. Ν movable may be used also at the end of complete sen- tences, sections, books, and most kinds of verse. Note 5. In ancient inscriptions, this ν is often used before a conso- nant, and as often omitted before a vowel ; as εγραμμάτενβ EvTreiS^/s• €Ϊπ€ άπο^ονναι, ταμίασι ois, edo^ev rfj βουλτι, €3ωκ€ν Σνκ€ΐ€νσίν. ? § 17• 1. Εκ before a vowel, or at the end of a verse, be- comes € ξ (eic?, €χς) ; as €Κ τοντον, i^ €K€lvov, εκτίνω i^erivov ; κακών e^, for e/c κακών. Ουτωί, tlius^ commonly drops s before a consonant ; as ούτως €ίπ€ν, ούτω φησί, "Αχρ IS and/xexpts- drop s before a consonant, and often even before a vowel ; as μ€χρι σκότος lyiv^TO ; άχρι αν ζω ; /xe- Xpt ivTav6a. Κτρίμα, μ€ση'γν, a φ ν ω, before a VOWel άτρ€μας, μζσηγνς, αφνως. Ιθν or lOvs, straight to, Ionic. 2. Adverbs in άκις may, in the Ionic dialect, drop ?; as ττολ- Χάκίζ, Ionic ποΧλάκί. 3. Ovy before a vowel ουκ, before a vowel with the rough breathing ονχ; but only when it is immediately connectet5 with the following ^vord ; as ov σοφός, ουκ εγώ, ουχ ημϋς. At the end ι f a clause, it is always pronounced and written .. ov, no, not. Μ η follows the analogy of ov only in the compound μηκ€Τί, formed after the analogy of ovk€tl. Note. Sometimes the addition or omission of ς slightly modifies the meaning of the Avord ; thus, άμφί άμφίς, iv ζΐς (eVs), αντικρύ αντί- κρνς, ev'^v €ν'^νς, ττως πω. CONTRACTION AND SYNIZESiS. § 18. Two successive syllables, of which the former ends 'u, and the other begins with, a vowel, may be contracted into one long syllable. 1. Two syllables may be contracted by simply removing the mark of diseresis (") ; as τ^ίχ^'ί τ€ίχ€ΐ, όΐομαι οίομαι, ττΚηθνί πληθνΐ, ηϊσσω ασσω, ήϊα jrja, Τ^ώϊστος Χωστός, 'Ζ. Ε before or after ci, η, τ/, οι, ου, ω, αν, is dropped ; as φιλ^εις § 18.] CONTRACTION AND SYNIZESIS. 29 φιλείί, φίλ€ητ€ φίλητβ) φιΚ^τ] φίλη, φίλβοι φίλο7, φίλ^ονσι φιλονσι. φίλ^ω φίΧο), iavTov αυτού, ^ 3. ο before or after αί, οι, ω, ω, ον, also after βί, is dropped ; as δίπλόαι δίττλαΤ, δηλυοις δηλοϊς, δηλόω δηλώ, ττλοω πλω, δηλόουσι δηΧονσΐ) ττλείοι/ nXelv. ' 4. Α before σ, αι, and after ου, is dropped ; as μράα μνα, μνά- αι μναί, ούας ους, 5. The remaining cases are exhibited in the following table. aa — a ; as μνάα μνα. ae — α, Doric and BoeotlC η ; VLKUere viKare D. VLKrjre, iviKae ivLKa D. €νίκη, opae opa D. ορη. αη — α, Doric η ; Τίμάητ€ τιμάτε, όράτ] όρα D. Sprj. αο — ω, -iEolic, Boeotic, and Doric α ; τιμάομ^ν τιμωμεν, άσαό쀕 VOL άσώμενοί JEi, Β. D. άσάμενοι, ττεινάοντί D. ireivavTiy ηραο ήρω ηρα, Ατρείδαο Ατρβιδα, MeveXaos MeveXas. αω — ω, -^Eolic and Doric α ; μου&άων μουσών τΕ. μοισαν D. μω• σαν, ΙΙοσ€ΐδάων ΤΙοσ€ίδών JEt, ΤΙοσείδαν D. ΊΙοσ€ίδάν, φάωντι φαντι^ Ισάωντί Ισαντι. Λ^ο. — Ύ] ; συκ€α συκη, 'Έρμίας 'Έρμης, κρέας Doric κρης. In neuters of the second declension, and in the accusative plural of the first, ea becomes d ; as όστεα 6στα, χρύσεα χρνσα, σνκεας συ• κας ; also when it is preceded by a vowel or p ; as vyUa υ-για, χοία χοα, Tleipaua Τίειραία, κλ^εα κλεα, άργνρεα αργυρά. But in the third declension -ρεα becomes -ρη ; as τριηρεα τρι- ήρη. In the same declension, εα sometimes becomes η even after a vowel ; as διφυία διφυή. εε — ει, iEolic and Doric η ; as φιΚείτω φιλείτω JEi, D. φιλητω, φιλεετε φιλείτε Μ. D. φιλητε. The Attic sometimes follows the analogy of the Doric ; as βασιΚεες βασιλεϊς or βασιλης, περικαλΧεε περικαΧΧη. εο — ον, Doric and Ionic εν ; as ^^ερεος '^ερενς, ?ίάμβεος ?ίάμβευς, φιΧβομεν φιΧευμεν, στεφανεονται στεφανουνται στεφανευνται. The verbal ending ενσι for ουσι is contracted from ίονσι'^ as οίχνε- ουσι οίχνευσι [οίχνίονσι). ιε — - Γ ; as ιερός ίρός, Ιεραξ ΐρηξ, ^olic, BoBOtic, and Ionic. II — Γ ; as ττόΧιι ττόΧι, δίιος δως, "Κίιος Χ-Ιος, οα — α or ω ; άπΧόα άπΧά. οε — ον, old Doric ω ; δηΧόετε δηΧοντε, προεγγνενω προνγγνενω Doric πρωγγνενω, So in the Doric infinitives μαστιγόεν μαστι- γών, ριγόεν ριγών, στεφανόεν στέφανων, οη — ^ ω ; δηλόητε δηλώτε, διδόητε διδώτε. In nouns of the first de- clension, ο is dropped ; as άπΧόη άπΧη, 30 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [^§ 19, 20. oo — ov, -^olic, BcEotic, and old Doric ω; δηλόομ€Ρ δηλονμεν, τνλόον πλουν f μισθόοντι μισθώντί. ΐ/€ — ϋ ; Ιχθυ€5 Ιχθυζ, ^pves dpvs, 6. When the second syllable is a diphthongs its first vowel is contracted with the preceding syllable according to the preced- ing paragraph (except the cases mentioned in the second, third, and fourth paragraphs) ; as n/xaets• or τιμάτ}ς τιμάς, Doric τιμιις^ τίμάθίμ€ν τιμωμ€ν, χρνσβα χρνστ], τιμψις τίμτ]ς, didorjs δίδω?. -αον, in verbs, contracts αο into ω and then drops ν ; as χράου χρο), τιμάον τιμώ, -eat, in nouns, merely drops e; as xpvaeai χρυσοί, συκβαις συ- Kois ; in verbs it becomes -rj, Attic -et ; as βουλβύβαί βου\^υτ] βου\€υ€ΐ, -ηαι in the subjunctive passive becomes -77 ; as βου\€υηαι βου- ^exjTj, οίηαι oirj. -oei, -077, in verbs in οω, become -ot; as δτ/λοα? ^ηλοΐς, ^η\07]ς 8η- λοϊς, ^η\ό7J δηλοΖ As tO SUch contractions as δηλουν, Onovs, from δηλΟ€ίν, ΟπΟ€ίς, they came from the original -oei/, -oevs ; thus δη\0€ν δηΧουν, Οπόενς Οποΰς. In verbs in οω, the Doric contracts oei, orj into ω ; as στ€• φανοΕί, πριότ}, Doric στ e φ αν ω, πριω, found in inscriptions. § 1 0. Two successive syllables, of which the former ends m, and the other begins Λvith, a vowel, may be so rapidly uttered as to form but one syllable. This is called synizesis or synecphonesis. The first of the vowels thus contracted is most commonly e, and sometimes ι ; as στη6€α, ημβας, Kpea, 6€0Ly θ€ου, πολιός, ΊστιαΙ αν, ΐ€ρ€υουσα, χρυσβω. So όγδοοι/ (^0(1. 7, 261), δακρύοισι, δηΐοιο, δη'ιων, δηϊοισι, ήϊα. Note. In such cases e and ι were probably sounded not unlike y in yet, yes, you, your; thus πόλιος πόλyoς ; Ι^ρ^υουσα, yep€ύoυσa ; χρυσίω ανά (originally χρυσ^οι ανα), χpϋσyo ανά. It must not be sup- posed however that e and i, thus hardened, had the power of ordinary consonants, for they never make position with a preceding consonant ; thus πόλyoς is a pyrrhich, not a trochee. CRASIS AND ELISION. § 20. Two successive words are, in many instances, con- tracted into one, when the former ends in, and the next begins with, a vowel. This kind of contraction is called crasis. The roronis (*) is generally placed over the syllable thus con- tracted. § 21.] CRASIS AND ELISION. 31 1. The words, of which the final syllable may be contract- ed with the next word, are chiefly the article^ the relative pro noun., and the conjunction και, and ; as 6 άνήο, άνηρ ; α edapeiaa το, adavciaaro ; α αν, αν. So 6 €κ, ουκ ; 6 eVt, ονπί ; ή Ιπαρη, ητταρη ; το αΚηθβς, ταΚηθίς ; το ivavTLOv^ τουναντίον ; το όνομα, τοϋνομα ; τα αγαθά, τάγαθά ; δ εφόρονν, ονφόρουν ; βγω olda, iyoiba ; που iaTiv, που ^ στιν, 2. When the preceding word ends in a diphthong., the sec- ond vowel (t, υ) of that diphthong is dropped before the two words are contracted into one ; as οί ά^ίΚφοί, άδζλφοί ; τω άσύ- λω, τώσύΧω ; καΙ €ΐτα, κατά. So TTJ Επαρτ], τηπαρτ) ; το\ Apyeloi, τάργ€7οί ; κάϊ iyS, κάγώ ; κα\ eVt- στατον, κάπίστατον ; κα\ αφ' ϋψους, κάφ ύψους ; κα\ iv, καν ; του ημ€- Τ€ρου, θημζτίρου ; τοι αν, ταν ', tol αρα, τάρα ', μίντοι αν, μ^νταν. -- Note 1. In many editions, the ι of και is subscribed; as κάγώ, καν. But this orthography is incorrect, first, because no contraction can take place as long as l retains its place ; secondly, because in ancient in- scriptions it is omitted. The Elean inscription however has TOINTAYT, which is commonly supposed to stand for τω 'νταυτ', that is τω ενταύθα. In another in- scription we find also KAIMON, that is κα\ 'μον, καμόν ; but this seems to be an error of the stone-cutter, for in the same inscription we find ΚΑΦΥΨΟΥΣ, that is κάφ' ύψους, κα\ άφ' i)\f/ov£. Note 2. The forms άτ^ρος θατ^ρου θατίρω θάτερον come from 6, του, τω, το, and ciTepos for the usual €Τ€ρος. Note 3. Και drops ai before the diphthongs ai, €i, €v, ου ; as κα\ αιτις, καϊτίς ; καϊ είκοσι, κ^ίκοσι ; κα\ €υσ€βύων, κ^υσ^βίων ; κα\ ουκίτι, κούκ€Τΐ. Note 4. In crasis, the Ionic dialect contracts oa into ω ; as to άγαλ- μα τωγαΧμα ; ό άριστος, ωριστος ; οί aWoL, ώΧλοί ', 6 αυτός, ωυτός ; τον αγώνος, τώγώνος. ^ Note 5. When the first Λvord apparently remains unaltered, the coronis may be placed over the space separating the two words ; as a βδωκας, ά8ωκας or α ^^ωκaς. - So ω ανθρωπ€, ωνθρωπ€ or ω *νθρωπ€ *, ω av€p, ων€ρ ΟΓ ^ Vep ; ω άγαβζ, ωγαθβ ΟΓ ω 'γαθβ ; που eVrt, πουστι or που Vrt ; μη €θίγ€ς, μη- θίγζς ΟΓ μη 'θιγβς ; η €παρη, ηπαρη ΟΓ η ^παρη. ,^ Note 6. Crasis was very often left to pronunciation. Thus, in ancient inscriptions we find του αυτοί), καϊ άρ€της, το αντρον, κα\ €υσζ' βίων, where the metre requires τωυτου, κάρ^της, ταντρον, κ€υσ€β€ων. ^ Even in our editions crasis is sometimes left to pronunciation ; as eVet ου, μη ου, η ου, η ζΐσόκ^ν, ΈνυαΧίω άν^ρ^ιφονττ], δή άφveι6τaτoςf μη αΧλος, ζϊΚαπίνη η€, άσβετω ουδ'. y § 91• ΛVhen of two successive words tbe former ends with 32 LETTERS AIND SYLLABLES. [§ 22- a short vowel (except υ), and the other begins with a vowel, the former often drops, by elision^ its final vowel, and the apostrophe (') is put over the vacant space ; as δια e/xoi), St' €μον ; αλλά €γώ, αλλ βγω ; όδε αι/ϊ^ρ, δδ άι^ηρ. So /caret ourrji, κατ^ αντης ; cii^rt €Κ€ίνης, αζ^τ' €Κ€ίνης ; Χεγοίμι αν, λε- γοι/ι' αί/ ; eVt i/^tl•', €φ\ημϊν ; αι^τΐ ωζ^, αζ/^' ωζ^ ; ννκτα ολην, ννχθ ο\ην, (a) Πβρ t and ττρό never lose their final vowels in the Attic dialect ; as TT€pi αυτόν, προ €μον. (b) The dative of the third declension, and the conjunction on never lose t in the Attic dialect. Note 1. The diphthong -at at the end of a word is sometimes elided by the Poets, but only in the verbal endings /xat, σαι, ται, σθαι, and in the nominative plural of the first declension ; as βονλομαι βγω, βοΰ- \ομ iyo) ; ησαι οΚΐ'^ηπίΚίων, ησ οΚι-γηττ^Κίων ; o^etat ohvvai, o^et' οδύ- ναι» Note 2. The -^olians, Boeotians, Dorians, and the Poets, some- times reject the final vowel even when the next word begins with a consonant. This takes place in the prepositions αζ/ά, τταρά, κατά (§ 13, 11), and the adverb apa ; as av νίκνας, αν δβ, αμ fieya, αμ π^Χα- yoy, αμ φόνον ; ττάρ Ζηνί, παρ ποσί ; κα^^ϋναμιν ; ap φρίνας. Strictly speaking, the preposition, in this case, and the next word shoulc be written as one word ; thus avveKvas, avbe, d/x/^eya, άμπίλα- yoSi άμφόνον, παρΖηνί, παρποσί. Π or ι drops t before the article; as ποττό, ποττοίς, ποττοντοισι, ποτ- τα. Note 3. Elision was often left to pronunciation ; thus, in ancient metrical inscriptions we find dpi ανάριας, edpaae aya^iay τουων^ζ αν- δρών, yivovs T€ €κατι, δε Αρίστοκλψ, σε άχρι, SYLLABICATION. α^ 23. 1, There are as many syllables in a Greek word as there are vowel-sounds in it. . > 2, Words of one syllable are called monosxjlla- hies ; of two, dissyllables ; and of more than two, polysyllables. 3. The last syllable but one is called the peimlt ; the last but two, the antepenult ; thus, in οφ^αλ/^ο9, eye, μας is the last syllable, φ^αλ, the penult, and o, the antepenult. ^§ 23, 24.] SYLLABICATION. 33 x4. A syllable is called pure^ when its vowel- sound is immediately preceded by the vowel-sound of the preceding syllable ; as a in ^ea, goddess ; 09 in S^609, god, ηΧίος, sun. § 23. 1. Any single consonant can commence a Greek word. 2. The following combinations of consonants may com- mence a Greek word or a syllable : βδ, βλ, βρ, y\, yv, γρ, δ/χ, dv, dp, 6X, θν, θ ρ, κλ, κμ, κν, κρ, κτ, μν, ττλ, πν, π ρ, πτ, σβ, σθ, σκ, σκλ, σκν, σ/χ, σττ, σπλ, στ, στλ, στρ, σφ, σχ, τλ, τ/χ, r/j, φ^, φλ, ΦΡ^ X^y Χ\ X^y ΧΡ- Tlie following combinations also may commence a syllable : γδ, γ/χ, Θμ, τν, φν, χ/χ. ιΤ § S4:. With respect to dividing a Greek word into syllables, the following rules are observed in the best editions : 1. A single consonant standing between two vowels, or a combination of consonants capable of commencing a syllable, is placed at the beginning of the syllable ; as φυ-γτ^, flight ; ί-σπ€-ρα, evening ; i-pv-6p6s, red ; ve -κταρ, nectar. j/ 2. When the combination cannot commence a syllable, its first consonant belongs to the preceding syllable ; as ΐπ-ποί, horse ; αν-τρον, grotto ; σκηπ-τρον, sceptre ; τνρ-σις, tower ; ay χω, to choke^ strangle, f 3. A compound word is resolved into its component parts, if the first part ends with a consonant. But if the first part ends with a vowel, the compound is divided like a simple word, even when that vowel has been cut off. E. g. Ινά-^ω, ε^-άγω, εκ-φε- οω, προοΓ-€ρχομαί, άν-άξίος, πα-ρουσία, άν-θίστημι, - 4. When elision takes place, the preceding word is, in pro- nunciation, regarded as a part of the following ; as αλ-λ' ov-dev, πα-ρ €'μον, e -φ* ω, σ^-μν €-πη, - Note. Syllabication is not based on any linguistic principle. Ac- cording to Sextus, it is foolish talk (μωρολο-γία). In ancient inscrip- tions, a word is divided where the line ends ; as α-χρις, αχ-ρις, αχρ-ις, αχρι-ς. 2* 34 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [^ 25. QUANTITY. ^ 25. In any Greek word, every syllable is either long or short. ll. A syllable is long by nature when it has a long vowel or diphthong ; as, the penult of οίκο^ζ, housej αν^ρωτΓΟ'^, man, κάω, to burn, τϊμη, honor. .2. A syllable is said to be long by position when its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by t\vo or more consonants, or by ζ, ξ, ψ; as, the penult of ττ/στί?, confidence, ορκο<ζ, oath, φράζω, to say, βψω, to cook. 3. When a short vowel is followed by a mute and a liquid, the syllable is short in the Attic dialect ; in the other dialects it is generally long ; as, the pe- nult of TeKvovy child, viTVQ^, sleep, νβρί^, haughtiness. But the syllable is almost always long \vhen its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by βΧ, y\, γμ, ην, Βμ, Sv ; as in djvm, unknown. 4. Every syllable, which cannot be proved to be long, must be assumed to be short. This rule has reference only to a, t, v. As to e, o, 77, ω, they pre- sent no difficulty whatever. Note 1. A syllable may be long both by nature and by position at the same time ; as in μαΧλον, ?ίωράξ, ττράσσω, πράγμα, πρησσω, πρηγμα, διωγμός. Note 2. It must not be supposed that, when a syllable was long by position, its vowel was prolonged in pronunciation ; for, had this been the case, the Greek would have used η for e, and ω for ο, and such words as τάγμα, ί'σμβζ/, σκύμνος would have been accented ταγμα^ Γσ/χ6ΐ/, σκύμνος ; further, the lonians would have used η for a. It is observed also that, when the Greeks wrote Latin words in Greek characters, they employed e, ο when the Latin e, were short by nature, and η^ ω when they were long by nature, without reference to position ; as centurio κ€ντνρίων, Tertius Τίρτίος, Sejrfi/s Σίξτος, Cornelius Κο^ί/ήλιο?, census κηνσος^ Festus Φηστυς, Constantinus Κων- §§ 26, 27.J QUANTITY. 35 σταντϊνος. So Marcus Μάρκος, Flaccus Φλάκκος, Felix Φηλίξ, whore the accent shows that, in these words, «, i are short by nature. Note 3. S and Ψ make position because they are double consonants (§ 6, 2). As to Z, its making position was owing to its strong vocal hissifig ; for it has already been shown that it is not a double conso- nant. (§ 6, 71.) .( § 26. The quantity of a, t, υ, in radical syllables, must be learned by observation. As a general rule, these vowels are short. Further, „7.1. Every a, t, υ, arising from contraction is long by nature ; as αΕκων άκων, Ι^ρηζ φηζ, βότρνβς βότρϋς, 1 2. Every ασ, ισ, vcr, arising from αντσ or ανσ, ινσ, νντσ or υι/(Γ, is long by nature ; as peXavs μβλάς, φθίνσα φθϊσα, ζ€νγνυντς ζεν γνυνς Cevyuvs. 3. Derivative words generally retain the quantity of their primitives ; as τϊρη ατΤμος πολυτίμητος τϊμάω, . 4. The accent very often indicates the quantity of the last two syllables of a word. (See below.) 5. A is long by nature when the Ionic dialect changes it into η ; as ΤΙρίάπος, ^Ayts", lonic ΐΐρίηπος, 'Hyts". § 27. Quantity of the Endings of the Declensions, 1. First Declension. O^ -a of the nominative singular is always short when the genitive ends , in -ης ; as δό^α ^όζης. ClAII proparoxytones and properispomena of course have the a short ; as ά\ηθ€ΐα, μο7ρα, δια. •" Oxytones and paroxytones Avhich have -ας in the genitive have -a long in the nominative ; as χαρά χαράς, ττίτρα τνίτρας. Except μΙά, Κίρρα, Τΐύρρά. (Χ -α of the vocative singular from nouns in -ας is always long ; from nouns in -ης it is always short ; as ταμίας ταμία, ποΧίτης ποΧίτά. . 15 -α of the nominative, accusative, and vocative dual is always long ; as μονσά, ταμία, τίΚωνά. -αν οΐ the accusative singular always follows the quantity of its nom- inative ; as δόξαν, μονσάν, π€τράν. «- α -ay is always long; as ταμίας, μούσας. The Doric dialect however may make it short in the accusative plural; as ττάσάς, τβχνάς, -a ο, -άων, always α long ; as Ατρείδάο, τάων, άΧΚάων, -σι, always short ; as ποίμναισί, μονστισΧ. 36 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§ 28, 29. i^lJ. Second Declension. -a. always short; as οστία, ξνλα, σνκα, χρνσ€α, -σι, always short ; as λόγοισί., ^ευΐσι, τοϊσί. ί -3. Third Declension. -t, -σί, -a, -ay, short; as κόρακι, κόραξι, κόρακα, κόρακας, τ^ίχ^α Nouns in evs however nciay haΛ"e -ά, -ά? ; as βασιλέα, βασιλέα?. The quantity of the last syllable of the root of nouns of the third declension must be learned by observation. It is only added liere, that, (a) Monosyllabic words are long• ; as ττάν, pis, dpvs. Except the pronouns r/y, riy, ri, τΐ. (b) The vowels a, t, v, when they stand at the end of the root, are short ; as γήρας 'γηράος, ττόλις πόλϊος, δάκρυ δάκρνος. Except ypavs γράός, and νανς ναός. (c) 1η substantives, αν, ιν, w, at the end of the root, are long ; as Ύίτάν Ύίτάνος, ΣαΧαμίς ΣαΧαμίνος, Φόρκνς Φόρκϋνος. § 28. Quantity of the Verbal Endings, -/it, -σι, -τι, -νσι, -ντι, always short ; as Ιστημι, ίστησι, δίδωτί, βουλζύουσι, μοχθίζοντι. The connecting vowel a is always short ; as €βονλ€νσάμ€ν, ίβονΧζυσάς, ^βουλ^νσατο. ACCENT. ^ 29. 1. There are three accents ; the acute Q, the ^ra^e (^), and the circumflex (" or '^). The acute can stand only on one of the last three syllables ; the chcamflex, only on one of the last two, and the grave only on the last. Further,' the circumflex can be placed only on a syllable long by nature. 7 2. A word is called oxytone^ when it has the acute accent on the last syllable ; as βραχύς, short ; μηχανή, machine. Paroxytone^ when it has the acute on the penult ; as κόραξ, crow ; 8όμο<;, house. Proparoxytone, Λvhen it has the acute on the an- tepenult ; as daTrapayo^, asparagus ; φάσηΧος, bean § so.] ACCENT. 37 aJPerispomeviOn^ when it has the circumflex on the last syllable ; as ημω, to honor ; μβτρώ^ to measure. aProperispomenon^ when it has the circumflex on the penult ; as συκον, fig ; οίνος, icine. xBarytone^ v/hen its last syllable has no accent at all ; as ττλβω?, full ,* γάλα, niilk ; τρίαινα, trident ; ανθαρ, udder. Note 1. According to the ancient grammarians, the grave accent is understood on every syllable which appears unaccented. Thus άν θρωποκτόΐΌζ, τύπτω, are ανθρωττοκτόνος, τντττω. The grave accent then is no accent at all. Note 2. The circumflex, according to ancient authorities, is com- posed of the acute and the grave ; thus, '\ or ^, ", ". Note 3. The place of the accent in any particular word must be learned from the lexicon. As scon however as the place is known, the kind of accent is generally determined by the following rules. . αΛ ^®• ^• If ^^^G l^^l^ syllable is long either by na- ture or by position, no accent can be placed on the antepenult. ^ J 2. If the antepenult is accented, it always takes the acute ; as σμάρα<γ8ος, emerald ; ττβττβρί, pepper ; 7Γ€\€κνς, axe. 4- 3. The penult^ if accented, takes the acute when its vowel is short by nature, or v/hen the last sylla- ble is long by nature ; as Xqjgs, word ; ττίσσα, pitch ; \ σέΚτινη, TUOOn. |r 4. When the vowel-sound of the penult is long by nature, and at the same time the vowel of the last syllable is short by nature, the penult can take I only the circumflex ; as μήλον, apple ; καταίτυξ, a ; kind of helmet. r <^5. When a word which has the acute on the last syllable stands before other words belonging to the same sentence, this acute becomes grave (') ; 38 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 31. as του<; ΤΓονηρους καΐ του^ α^αθου^ ανθρωττονς, not τον^ ιτονηρου^ καυ του<ζ ayaOov^ ανθρωτΓον<;, The interrogative pronoun τις, τι, who? what? which? always re- tains its acute accent. Note 1. The ^olic dialect throws the accent as far hack as the last syllable permits ; as θνμος, βόλλα, αμμιν, δυνατός, αεισι, for the common θυμός, βονλη, ημίν, δυνατός, aeicri. Prepositions are except- ed , as τΓβδά, the same as μ€τά. Note 2. It will be percei\^ed that, in Greek, the accent of the pe- nult and antepenult is regulated by the quantity of the last syllable; in Latin, the accent of the antepenult is determined by the penult, a^ 31. 1. The endings -at^nd -ol are, with re- spect to accent, short ; as Xeyovrat, ανθρωττοι, μοΰσαί, Χυτταί, oIkol, ώμοι, / (a) Except the third person singular of the opta- tive active ; as ημησαί, ημησ-οί, (b) Except also the adverb οι /cot, at hoine, Λvhich in reality is the original form of the dative οίκω. . 2. In nouns in ω? of the second declension, in the genitive of some nouns of the third declension, and in the Ionic genitive in eo) of the first declen- sion, the final syllable permits the accent to stand on the antepenult ; as βιίγβω? βυγεω βυγεω βυγβω?, €v- ρυκερω^ βνρνκβρω 5 ττοΧβως ττοΧβων ; ΤυΒεώβω, ΠηΧηΐα- δεω. Also, in the Ionic οτεων for οτων. Note 1. The first of these apparent anomalies is explained in the following manner ; the t in the diphthongs at and ot, at the end of a word, had ordinarily an obscure or vjeak sound. But w^hen it was an essential letter, as in the dative and optative, its sound was clear or strong ; as in μοί, σοΐ^ τοί, οίκοι. The second anomaly is ey plained as follows; βω w^as, by synizesis, ordinarily pronounced as one syllable, not unlike -yoh. As to the com- pounds of γ/λω? and κίρας, as φιλογελωί, €ϋκ€ρως, they ordinarily suf- fered a kind of syncope; thus φιλόγ'λως, €ϋκρως. Note 2. According to the ancient grammarians, barytone nomina- tives in -ot, and barytone verbal forms in -eLTaiy in the Doric dialect, take the acute on the penult, according to the general rule (§ 30, 3) ; as ayyeXoL, άνθρωποι, φιΚοσόφοι, πωΧουμίνοί ; φορ€ίταί, €σσ€ίται ; from / §§ 32, 33.] ACCENT. 39 ' wliich it maybe inferred that the Doric did not recognize the rules ex- hibited in this section. Accent as affected hy Contraction^ Elision^ Anastroplie^ and Crasis. 'l§ 32. 1. If the first of the syllablee to be contracted has the acute or circumflex, and the second the grave, that is, no ac- cent (§ 29, ns. 1. 2), the contracted syllable takes the circum- flex ; as TrXeere ττλβΐτβ, ημάω τιμώ, ουας ους. j^But when the first has the grave, that is, when it is unaccent- ed, and the second the acute, the contracted syllable has the acute ; as φιΚζόμ^θα φιλου/χε^α, φίΚ^όντων φιΚονντων^ iau ην, eoou ων. - :.ΐ2. If neither of the syllables to be contracted has the accent, the accent of the word generally retains its place ; as noXecs TToXety, /3oi;X6Ueat jSovXev?;. (7 Note 1. Exceptions to the first rule : (a) The contracted nomina- tive dual of the second declension; as πλόω π\ω. (b) The contracted genitive, dative, and accusative plural of poly- syllabic compounds in οος ; as άντίπνοος άντίπνους, άντιπνόον άντίπνου ; άντιπνόω άντίπνω ; evvoovs evvovs, προπλυονς πρόπλονς ; that is, they I take the accent of the contracted nominative. (c) The adjective αθρόος αβρούς, άθρόον αθρονν, crowded, (d) The contracted subjunctive passive and middle of verbs in /xt most commonly deviates fi'om the first rule ; as ^ννίωμαι ^ννωμαι, ίστίωμαι ιστωμαί, ξνμβΧβηται ξνμβΧηται. (e) The genitive plural of adjectives in ηθης (from ήθος), and of τριήρης, αυτάρκης ; as συνηθ^ων συνήθων, τριηρίων τριηρών, αΐταρκ^ων .. αυταρκών. l• (f ) The contracted genitive plural oi barytones of the second declen- sion ; as ΧοΎοων λογωι/, άνθρωπόων ανθρώπων. (g) The genitiΛ'e singular of masculines in ώ? of the second declen- sion ; as νζωο ν€ω, Πβτβώο Ilerfoj, Xaycuo Χαγώ. ir Note 2. Exceptions to the second rule : (a) The contracted forms of adjectives in eo? ; as χρύσ-€ος χρυσούς, χρυσ^α χρυσά. So το κά- VEGV κάνουν. (b) The contracted genitive and dative singular of δαί?, deXeap, Θρη- ϊξ, GLQ, ούας, στίαρ, φάος, φρβαρ, φωΐς. (See below.) (c) The contracted second person singular of the second aorist mid- dle imperative usually takes the circumflex on the last syllable ; as λά- βεο Χαβου, €κβάΧ€θ εκβαΧου. (d) The imperfect €χρην, from ίχρα^ν, from the impersonal χρη. § §3. 1. In prepositions d^vA conjunctions., if the elided 40 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [^ 34. vowel had the accent, this accent also is cut off with the vow- el ; as άμφ\ αντω^ άμφ'' αντώ ; αλλά eiTre, αλλ' etTre. ,i{. In all other words the accent is thrown back upon the pre ceding syllable ; as σ€μνα ίπη, σ^μν' '4πη ; γαληνά ορώ, γαΚψ ορώ ; φ7]μΙ εγώ, φημ^ εγώ. /r- 2. When a dissyllabic preposition is,- by anas/ro^/ie, put after its substantive, or after* the verb with which it is compounded, its accent is placed on the penult ; as από ^εώι^, ^βώζ/ απο ; άπο- Xeaas, ολβσας απο. The prepositions άμφί, αντί, ανά, δια, hial, ντταί, ύπειρ, παραί are never subject to anastrophe. 3. When the dissyllabic prepositions stand for €ΐμί, ίο Ζ>β, compounded with themselves, or rather when ei/xi is under- stood, they take the accent on the penult ; as €vl, πάρα, πίρι^ βπι, sc. βστί. 4. In crasis^ the contracted syllable can take the circumflex only when one of the original syllables had it ; or when the acute is immediately followed by the grave, that is, by an unac- cented syllable (§ 29, ns. 1.2); as καΐ olvov, κωνον ; εγώ olba, εγωδα ; και eira, κατά. But if the acute is follov/ed by another acute, or if the grave is folloΛved by the acute, the contracted syllable can have only the acute ; as κα\ αν, καν ; μίντοι αν, μ€νταν ; τα οΧΚα, ταλλα \ τα όπλα, ^ώττλα ; το epyov, τονργον. Accent of Nouns. η \ 34. 1. The place of the accent remains the same as in the nominative, if the last syllable permits it ; if not, it is re- moved to the next syllable, towards the end ; as "ί^αΚασσα 'θαλάσ- σης 'θάλασσαι, άνθρωπος άνθρωπο), νήσος νησον, κόραζ κόρακος κορά• KOLV, πράγμα πράγματος, οδονς οδόντος. ν (iTbe kind of accent is of course to be determined by the g-eneral rules ; thus, νήσος becomes νησον (^ 30, 3) ; πράγμα πράγματος (^ 30, 2), οδούς οδόντος οδουσι (^ 30, 3. 4). 1 2. The genitive and dative of oxytones of the first two de- clensions take the circumflex according to the general rule (>^ 32, 1); as τιμή τιμής ιΥΟΙΏ τιμηος, τιμή fl'Om τιμηϊ, τιμών from τιμάων ΟΥ τιμίων, Seoy Seoi) from ^Seoo, 25εω from Seoi 3εώΥ. α The dative plural and dual of th.ese declensions always takes the accent of the dative singular ; as τιμαίσι τιμαΊς τιμαΐν, ^εοίσι ^€θϊς ^€θΊ.ν. § 34.] ACCENT. 41 <.NoTE 1. Exceptions in the ftist decknsion : (a) The contracted gen- itive plural of the feminine of barytone adjeciives and participles in oy takes the accent on the penult, contrary to ihe general rule (§ 32, 1) ; that is, the genitive of the feminine is the same as that of the mascu- hne ; as Xeyajxevos, \€'γομ€νίων Χε'^ομίνων ; αζιος, άξύων αξίων. (b) Also, the genitive plural of η άφνη, ol ίτησίαι, 6 χρήστης^ 6 χλουνης ; thus άφνων^ ετησίων, χρηστών, χΧούνων, (c) Μία, from els, one, has pas, μια, with the accent on the last syllable. (d) Α€σπ6της, master, has vocative δεσττοτα, proparoxytone. Note 2. Exceptions in the second declension : (a) The genitive sin- gular of masculines in ώς takes the acute, contrary to the general rule (§ 32, 1) ; as ν€ώς, veo) (from νβώο), Uereais, Πετεώ (from Uerecoo), (b) The Epic ending -όφι οτ -όφιν is always paroxytone ; as τίκνον τβηνόφι, €σχάρα €σχαρ6φιν. ^^ΝοτΕ 3. Exceptions in the third declension : (a) Monosyllabic sub^ stantives and adjectives throw the accent in the genitive and dative of all the numbers upon the last syllable : here the genitive plural and dual takes the circumflex ; as κίς klos kll κίών klolv, els ίνός ίνί, y (b) The following monosyllables throw the accent in the genitive singular, and dative singular and plural, upon the last syllable ; in the genitive plural and dual they follow the general rule (1) : 6 ^μώζ, Βμωός δ/χωι δ/χωσι, slave ^ό ίϊώ?, 3ωο9 3ωί '^ωσί, jackal το ΚΡΑ2, κρατάς κρατί κρασί, head ■»-Ό, η παϊς, τταώός τταώί παισί, child 6 σης, σ€υς or σητός, moth ο Ύρώς, Ύρωός Ύρωΐ ΎρωσΙ, Tros, Trojans, The Doric dialect hoΛvever places the accent on the last syllable even in the genitive and dative plural ; as παώών, Ύρωων, (c) Has•, all, throws the accent in the genitive and dative singular on the last syllable ; the plural is regular ; thus, παντός παντί πάντων πασι. The Dorians throw the accent on the last syllable of the genitive plural also ; thus, πάντων for πάντων. ; (d) Ύίς; who? follows the general rule throughout ; as τίνος, τίνι* τίνων. I (e) The contracted form of the following nouns is accented after tho , analogy of monosyllables (a, b) : δαΓ? δα? δαδό? δαδί 8ά3ων δάδοιν δασί, torch Ορηϊξ θριίξ θράξ θρακός θρακί θρακών θραξί, α Thracian οίς οίς οΙός οΐί οΙών, sheep Ι ούας ους ώτός ώτί ώτων ωτοιν ώσί, ear Ι στίαρ στη ρ στητός, tallow 42 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ξ} 35. φρεαρ ψρητάζ φρητών, a well φάος φώζ φωτός φωτί φώτων, light φωΪ9 φως φωδός φωδί φωδων φώ^οιν φωσί, blister (f ) AeXeapf bait, in the contracted forms, takes the accent on the first syllable ; as deXiaTos ^βλητος, (g) The following nouns are more or less irregular in their accent : άνηρ, man, άνερος, regular ; but avdpos dpdpL avdpa auep avdpes ανδρών άνδρας, γαστηρ, belli/, γαστβρος, regular ; but γαστρός γαστρί. yvvrj, iDoman, γυναικός, -κι, -αϊκα, ω yvvai, -αϊκες, -κών, -ξι, -αΐκας, δαηρ, husband's brother, regular ; but ω daep. Αημητηρ, Demeter, Αημητερος, regular ; but Αη μητρός Αημητρι Αη μήτρα Αημητερ. θυγάτηρ, daughter, ^vyarepoy, paroxy tone ; but Θυγατρός βυγατρί θνγα- τρα θυγατερ θύγατρες, μητηρ, mother, μητβρος, paroxytone ; but μητρός μητρί μητερ. πατήρ, father, πατέρος, regular ; but πατρός πατρί πάτερ, σωτηρ, preserver, σωτηρος, regular ; but ώ σωτερ, (h) The vocative and neuter singular of adjectives in ων G. όνος, take the accent on the antepenult ; as ευδαίμων, ω εϋδαιμον, το εϋδαί- μον ; καΧλίων, το κάλΧΐον. (i) The vocative of the following nouns in ων takes the accent on the antepenult : Απόλλων ^ΆποΧΧον, Τίοσ-ειδών Τίόσειδον, Αγαμέμνων Αγάμεμνον, Αμφίων " λμφΤον, ^y. (k) The vocative and neuter singular of some compounds in ης G. εος, take the accent on the antepenult ; as Σωκράτης Σωκρατες, κακοη- ?ίης κακόη'^ες, φιΧαΧη^ης φίΧάΧη'^ες, (1) In the Doric dialect, the nominative and accusative plural of the third declension take the acute on the penult ; as χείρες, παίδες, όρνί- Ses, γυναίκες, πτώκας. (m) The ^olic dative plural in βσσι always takes the accent on the antepenult ; as πάντεσσι, ποΧίεσσι. Accent of Verhs. § 35. 1. In verbs, both simple and compound, the accent is placed as far back as the last syllable permits ; as βουΧεύω βουΧεύετε βεβουΧευμαι^ Ίστημι έστησαν εστατον, ανάγω ανηγαγον, πα- ρέχω πάρασχε, παρατίθημι παρεθηκαν, άποδίδωμι άπόδοτε, κατατίθημι κατάθεσθε, 2. The aorist active iiifinitive, the perfect passive infinitive and participle, the second aorist middle infinitive, and the in- finitive mvai and μεν take the accent on the penult ; as βουΧευ- i 35.] ACCENT. 43 σαι, β€βουλ€υσθαί βββουΧζυμβνος, \ιπίσθαι θβσθαι π€ρίθ^σθοί αττοδό • σθαί, β€βον\€υκ.ίναι ^ώύναι δόμ€ν. But the Epic infinitive in μ^ναι follows the first rule ; as e/x- μζναί, ζ^μ^ναι^ Τίθημ€ναι, 3. The second aorist active participle, participles in ety, ο ν ς, ν ς, ω?, and participles in α? from verbs in /xt take the acute on the last SvHable ; as λιπών, βον\€νθ€ίζ tlUcls, ^ώούς, deiKPVi, βζβου- \€υκώς €πιπλώς, Ιστάς, 4 The second aorist active infinitive takes the circumflex on the last syllable ; as λιπβίι/, Trteii/, φαγ^ν, 5. The contracted form of the second person singular of the second aorist middle imperative usually takes the circumflex on the last syllable (§ 32, n, 2, c) ; as λάβ€ο λαβου, 6κβάλ€ο €κβαλοϋ, πίθ€θ πίθου, ^ β. In compound verbs in /xt the second person of the second aorist middle imperative takes the circumflex when the prepo- sition with which it is compounded consists of one syllable ; but if it consists of two syllables, this person follows the first rule ; as προδοΰ €v6ov άφον, αττόδου άπόθον κατάθον. . ' 7. When the connecting vowel is omitted, the third person plural in j/^t takes the accent on the penult ; as Ιστασι, τιθεΐσι, διδονσί, 8€ίκννσί, βββασι, ^στασι, τίθνασί, Τ€τλάσι, (^ Note. Exceptions to the preceding rules: (a) The imperatives Ide, etTre or ζΐπόν, eXOe, evpe, Xa/3e, from ΕΙΔΩ, ΕΙΠί2, άρχομαι, ευρί- σκω, λαμβάνω, take the acute on the last syllable, contrary to the gen- eral rule. In composition, hoΛvever, they are regular ; as βΓσιδε, απελ- θβ, μ€τά\αβ€, (b) The compounds of δόί, es, Se'y, σχες, are always paroxytone ; .as άπό3θ9, πρΟ€9, παράθζς, πρόσχ^ς, L (c) The dissyllabic forms of the present indicative oi εΙμί and φημί deviate from the rule ; as eVrt, eV/LteV ; φατ€, φασί. In composition, they are regular ; as συν^ιμι, παράφημι. The second person singular φης retains its accent even in composi- tion ; as σνμφτ]ς, άντίφτ}ς. The imperative of φημί is φάθι or φαθί, (d) The following participles deviate from the first rule ; ioov ων, kl- ' ών. Ιών, from €ΐμί, κίω, ei/xt. (e) The ^^olic accentuation is employed in the following infinitives and participles : άκάχησθαι άκαχημ^νος άκηχεμΕνος, άλάλησθαι άλαΧη- μ€νος, άλίτημζνος, άρηρ€μ€νος, €\η\άμ€νο5, ημ€νος, €σσυμβνος, €γρηγορ- Θαι, τ€τυπων, π^φνων, οίσ€ΐν, eypcaOai, πρίασθαι, ονασθαι^ €ρΕσθαί. Also in the indicative, imperative, and participle of the compound 44 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§ 36, 37. κάθημαι., as κάθησαι, κάθησο, καθήμενος ; the accent of καβησθαι is reg- ular (5 36). (f ) The accent of the contracted subjunctive passive of polysylla- bic verbs in μι most commonly follows the first rule ; as δύνωμαι δννη δύνηταί, άφίστηται, Κ€ρωνταί, πι/χττρτ/σί, eparai. (g) The optative passive of verbs in μι takes the accent on the pe- nult even when the last syllable is short ; as ΙστάΙο ΙσταΙντο. But the optative of αγαμαι, δνναμαί, επίσταμαί^ ττρίαμαί, and a few others, always throws the accent as far back as the last syllable per- mits ; as bvvaio δνναισθε, επίσταίτο, πρίαιο πρίαιτο, κρεμαιο, οναω, ονοιτο. ' (h) The Doric dialect retains the original accent of the third persoh plural of the imperfect and aorist active ; as irpexov^ i\iyov, ίκάβον, ίΧνσαν, εστάσαι/, from the original Ιτρεχοσαν, iXeyoaav, ελάβοσαν^ ίλνσασαν, εστάσασαν. So in the third person plural of the aorist passive, and of the im- perfect and second aorist active of verbs in μι ; as εκοσμηθεν, άνίθεν^ for €κοσμηθησαν, ανέθεσαν, § 3β. 1. In compound dissyllabic verbs, the accent cannot go farther back than the augment ; as προσεΊχον, άνεσταν, άνε- σχον, infjdov, κατεΐ^ον. So when the compound verb begins Λvith a long vowel or diphthong ; as εξενρον. 2. But when the augment is omitted, the accent is placed on the preposition ; as εμφαινον, πάρθεσαν, υπείρεχον, άπόζρσε, σννα- yev, 3. When the syllabic augment upon which the accent would have been placed is omitted, the accent is, in dissyllabic verbs, put on the penult ; as πίπτε, βαίνε, daU, for έπιπτε, έβαινε, eSate. 4. Long monosyllabic forms take the circumflex when the syllabic augment is omitted ; as βη, φη^ yvS), for εβη, εφη, έγζ^ω. ENCLITICS AND PROCLITICS. § S7. 1. An enclitic is a word which is pronounced as if it were a part of the preceding word. The enclitics are (a) The personal pronouns μου μοί με, σον σοι σε, ου οΙ ε μίν ■νίν^ and the oblique cases of those beginning with σφ, as σφίσι σφίν σφωϊν. (b) Tlie indefmite pronoun τ\ς, τ\, through all the cases, as also the words τον, τω, for τίνος, tlv\. f 37.] ENCLITICS AND PROCLITICS. 45 (c) The present indicative of ei/x/, to Je, and φημί, to say ; except the monosyllabic second person singular ef, and φτις. (d) The particles ποθεν^ ποθί, ττο/, ττ?;, που, ττώί, ττοτε, ye, ^τ^ι/, /ce or AceV, ί/υ Or νΰι^, Trep, πω, re, rot, ρά, and the inseparable par- ticles -δε, -^e, -χι. 2. If the word before the enclitic has the acute on the ante- penult, or the circumflex on the penult, the accent of the en- clitic is dropped, and the acute is placed on the last syllable of I the preceding word ; as άνθρωπος tls, del^op poc, οίτός iaTLV. 3. When the word before the enclitic has the accent on the last syllable, the accent of the enclitic is simply dropped ; and if the accent on the last syllable of that Avord be the acute, it remains so ; as εγώ φημι, ποΚΚοΙς τισιν, σοφός τις. ^Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent also when the pre- ceding word has the acute on the penult ; as τούτου ye, πόσος τις. 4. A dissyllabic enclitic retains its accent, (a) When the pre- , ceding word has the acute on the penult ; as avdpes tlv^s, j /- (b) When the syllable, upon which its accent would have * been thrown back, has been elided ; as ττολλά eWt, ττο'λλ' eVrt ; ΤΓολλοΙ δε ζίσι, ποΧλοΙ δ' ^Ισί, ■^ 5. When seΛ'eral enclitics succeed each other, the preceding takes the accent of the followincr according to the last three ■rules ; as oύδe7Γore Ιστί σφισιν, for ον^ίποτ^ eWt σφισιν. Note 1. (a) Enclitics, which can stand at the beginning of a clausi. or sentence, retain their accent ; as Σου yap κράτος eVrl ρβγίστον. For THY power is greatest ; Φησ\ν οΰτος. '^ (b) Έΐρί, after el, ουκ, ως, retains its accent; as el eV^eV, ουκ Ισρίν^ ως eV/xeV. ^ Ε ση', at the beginning of a sentence, or after αλλ', el, ουκ, μη, ως, I και, μίν, GTL, που, is accented on the penult ; as eVrt ταύτα, eVrti/ evTv- Xelv ; αλλ' eVrt, el 'έστι, ουκ eVrt : also, after τουτ^ for τούτο ; as τουτ €στι. ^ (c) The personal pronouns σου, σοι, σί retain their accent when . thev depend upon a preposition ; as μ€τα σου, Ιπ\ σοι, κατά σέ. .They retain it also in antithesis, and after και ; as εμοί, ου σοι ; e/xe καΧ σε. The forms μου, μοί, με are very seldom found after prepositions ; except μ€ in the expression προς /χε. ^d) "Εγωγε, ^or εγώ γε, is an ^^ohcism 46 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 38. (e) The pronouns ov, ο Γ, e retain their accent when they are re- flexive. Note 2. (a) The inseparable -Se is found in the demonstratiA^ pro- nouns οδε, τοσόσ^ε, τοίόσ^€, ττ^λικόσδβ, and in pronominal adverbs ; as €v6ade. Also, in adverbs answering to the question whither ? as οΐκόν- δβ, ovhe δό/χοΐ'δβ. Also, in ovbe, μη^β. The accent of demonstrative pronouns strengthened by -be is always on the penult ; as roaoabey τοϊσ^ε roLaide, But τοϊσδβσσι, in Ho- mer, for τotσ/δe, is irregular. (b) The particles -Se, -χι are found in eWe, ναίχί, ^χι. Note 3. Of the above-mentioned words, the following are always en- clitic ; μον μοί με, του τω, πόθεν ττοθί ποί ttjj ττον πώς ποτέ, γε ?ίην κε νύ περ πώ τε τοί ρά. Note 4. Frequently the indefinite pronouns and several of the par- ticles are not separated by a space from the attracting word ; as όστις, Ότις, εϊτις, ovtls, μητις^ οσπερ, ωσπερ, ώστε. Sometimes ο tl, whatever, 6 τε, and the, τό τε, and the, are written o,TL, ο,τε, τό,τε, to prevent their being confounded with 6τι, that, ore, when, τότε^ then. § 38. A proclitic is a word which is pronounced as if it were part of the word before which it stands. The proclitics (commonly called at όπα., that is, unaccented words) are εΙς or is, to^ εν or ε\ν, in., εκ or e^, from., ov or ουκ or ουχ^ 7iot^ ω?, α5, to^ and the articles 6, ol, η, at, also εΐ, if. Note, (a) Ef at the end of a verse takes the acute ; thus, εξ; as κακών εζ, for εκ κακών. (b) Ου at the end of a clause is always written ου, no, not; as ουχ 6 μεν 6 δ' ου. (c) 'ils•, when it is equivalent to the demonstrative adverb τώς, thus, is written ώς ; as ώς εΙπών, thus having said. (d) The article 6 takes the acute when it stands for the relative 6V. (II. 16, 835; Od. 2, 262.) According to the ancient grammarians, when 6, η,οΐ, αί are demon- strative, they should be read as if they were accented ; thus, 6 in Ό yap βασίληϊ χολωθείς, is to be read o. §39.] PUNCTUATION MARKS. 47 ^ 39. PUNCTUATION MARKS. Comma • ,] Colon Period ;•] Interrogation i Apostrophe . • ['] Coronis • ['] Diaeresis • ■ •• ~ Marks of quantity . • i-l• "-' Marks of parenthesis , [0] Mark of admiration, little used ' f " The mark of dicBresis is placed over t or υ to prevent its (forming a diphthong with the preceding vowel. E. g. -γηραιή άντη^ χρηιζω are trissyllables ; but -γηραι γηρα, αντη, χρψζω χρί]ζ(ι' are dissyllables. PART IL INFLECTION OF WORDS. PARTS OF SPEECH. cv^ 4®. 1. The declinable parts of speech are the noun, the article, the pronoun, the verb, and the participle. lz2. The indeclinable parts of speech are the ad verb, the preposition, the conjunction, and the in- terjection. cvS. The declinable parts of speech have three numbers ; the singular, the dual, and the plural. The dual may be used when two things are spoken of, but not necessarily. NOUN. i?^ 41. 1. Nouns are grammatically divided into substantive and adjective. Substantives are divided into proper and com- mon. ci 2. The noun has three genders ; the masculine, feminine, and neuter. aThe genders are, in grammar, distinguished by the articles o, ή, τό^ respectively ; as 6 άνηρ, the man^ η ywl]^ the womari, TO σνκον, the β(ξ. § 42.] NOUN. 49 ί Nouns which are either masculine or feminine are said to be of the common gender. Such nouns are, in grammar, distinguished by the articles 6, ή ; as 6, ή άνθρωπος, a human being, man or ivoman. f 3. The noun has three declensions ; the first, second, and thnd. 7 4. The cases are five ; the nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and vocative. a5. All neuters have three of the cases alike ; the ^nominative, accusative, and vocative. In the plural these cases end in a. a6. The nominative, accusative, and vocative du- al are alike. The genitive and dative dual are also alike. ' In the plural^ the vocative is always like the nominative. Note 1. In nouns of the common gender, the masculine is com- monly employed to denote the species; as 6 άνθρωπος, man, man- kind, the human race ; but η άνθρωπος, the woman. Note 2. Many names of animals have but a single gender (yei/os ' ewiKOLvov) which is used without reference to sex ; as 6 ά€τός, eagle, 6 yv\jr, vulture, 6 Χαγώς, hare, ή χ^εΧίδών, swallow, η άη^ών, nightin- gale, ή άλωπηξ, fox. ■ ι^ 42. 1. The root of a noun consists of those letters Λvhich are found in every part of that noun. Li,The first declension comprises nouns of which the root ends in a ; as ημη, root τίμα- ; the second, those of which the root ends in ο ; as Χόγος, root Xojo' ; the third, all the rest. 2. The case-endings, that is, those parts of a noun which denote the different cases, are exhibit- ed in the following table : Singular, Plural Dual Nominative -s -es '€ J^enitive JDative -ος, -ως -ων IV -ι -σι, -S -IV Accusative -ν, -α -vSf as '€ Vocative •^9 3 -€9 -€ 50 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 42. 'S is iiropped in feminines and ^o]ic masculines of the first declen- siun ; as μονσα, τιμά τιμή, ίππότα ; also, in a few feminines of the second declension ; as ήχώ, π€ίθώ ; also, in many nouns of the third declension ; as λεωι/, πράγμα. In neuters of the second declension it is softened into ν ; as συκον, μηΧον. When the vocative is not like the nominative, it is the same as the root. (For particulars, see below.) ►o ?, in most nouns of the second declension, and in masculines of the first, drops the s and is then contracted with the radical vowel ; as Xoyo'os \ογο-ο λόγου, Πβτβώί Πετβώ-ο Πετβώ ; τβλώι/α-ο τ€\ώνά re- Χώνου. Further, in the second declension, -oo may become -oio, -ot, (both Thessalian ; ) as Oeos 6eo-o 6eoi-o, iavro-o iavroio iavroi, (Compare the Latin illius, hiijus, ejus, istius, ipsius, cujus, alius, nullius^ solius, totius, uUius, unius, alterius, utrius, neutrius.) It drops ς also in the pronouns e^eo, σεο, eo, reoTo, rin^ oreo. In fem- inines of the first declension, it is always contracted with the radi- cal vowel ; as oLKia-os ot/c/as•, τιμα-ος τιμάς τιμής. In some nouns of the third declension, it may become -ω? ; as πόλβ-ο? πόΧ€-ως. The common ending - ο v, in the first declension, presupposes a change of -ao into -eo, contracted -ov. - 1 in the first and second declensions is always contracted with the radical vowel ; as μονσα-ϊ μονσαι μούσα μούστ], Xoyo -Ϊ Xoyoi Χόγωι λόνω, π€ΐθϋ-ϊ π€ΐθοι, νεω-ϊ ν€ω. Ihe dative singular of the first two declensions was originally formed by annexing ι to the root without any further change ; as τιμα-'ί τιμαι, Xoyo -Ϊ Χογοι. In the course of time the radical vowels {a^ o) were lengthened {a, η, ω) ; as τιμά-ϊ rt /χα, τιμη-ϊ τιμί]^ Χογω-Ϊ λόγω. Πάλαί, anciently, and χα μ αϊ, humi, on the ground, seem to be relics of the original form of the dative of the first declension. The original dative of the second declension is found in the adver- bial datives in ο t ; as oUoi, domi, at home, ττοΐ, ΦαΧηρυΐ. Also in feminines in ω and ως ; as ηχοϊ, aldot It is found also in inscriptions cut after the introduction of ω ; as τοη ΟΧυμπίοι, τοΊ. Μμοι, βωμοί, Σωσίνοι. Further, the Boeotic endings -η and -υ do not come from a, 77, ω, but from the original -at, -oi. (^9.) 'V is always used in the first two declensions, and sometimes in the third. In the third declension it was generally preceded by a, that is, it was -avy which, by dropping the v, became a. (Compare Latin -em, as in patr~em, matr-em, mulier-em.) -es in the first two declensions drops ς, and changes e into ι which is contracted with the radical vowel ; as μονσα-€ς μουσα -e μονα-ηι, Χογο-€ς Xoyo-€ Χόγοι. In the third declension it was originally -ης; hence, in the Doric dialect, the nominative plural of this declension is never proparox)rtone. {^ 34, n. 3, 1 ; compare also the Latin -es.) - ω V is formed from -ως by changing ς into v. In the second declension, it is always contracted with the radical vowel ; as λογο-ωι/ λόγων. -σι, -ί, in the first and second declensions is generally appended to the dative singular ; as μούσα (originally μουσαι) μούσαισι μούσαις, λόγω (originally Χόγοι) Χόγοισι Χόγοις. In the third declension -σι is appended to the root ; as κόρακ-σι κόραξι, ελττιδ-σι €Χπίσι. § 42.] NOUN. 51 •vsy -ay, formed by annexing s to the accusative singular ; as μουσαν μονσανς μούσας, \6yov \oyov£ λόγους, κόρακα κόρακας. In the lliird declension -άς was originally -as (arising from -avs) ; hence, in the Doric dialect, the accusative plural of this declension can never be proparoxytone (ξ> 34, τι. 3, 1*. -6 is a modification of -e? ; in the first two declensions it is contracted with the radical vowel ; as μονσα -e μούσα, Xoyo-e λόγω. -11/, a modification of the dative plural -ty, is always contracted with the radical vowel ; as τιμα-ιν τιμαΊν, λογυ -Lv Xoyocv. As to -olv of the third declension, it is borrowed from the second. Note 1. The Greek has four other cases, three of which however are commonly regarded as adverbs ; the locative, ablative, terminal, and instrumental. Locative -θι, ichere? as oXXo^t, τόθι, ονρανόθι. Its functions are performed by the dative or genitive. Relics of its original force are ηωθι πρό, ΐΧίόθί πρό, ούρανόθι πρό, in Homer. Ablative -Bev^ ivhence? as πό^βι/, οΚΚοθ^ν, ουρανόθ^ν. In process of time it became confounded with the genitive. (Compare ipidev, σίθζν, €θ€ν. ) Its functions are performed by the genitive. The Ho- meric expressions e^ ονρανόθζν, αττ' ούρανόθεν, €ξ Κΐσύμηθ^ν are relics of its original character. Termiyial -δβ, -σβ, -fe, ivhither? as aka^e, ot/caSe, ot/coi/Se-, πόσε, ποτ€ρωσ€, θύραζε. Its functions are performed by the accusative. Instrumental -φι, or - φ 1 1/, ivith what 1 In the progress of the lan- guage it became confounded with the genitive and dative. (Compare the latin -bi, -bis, in tibi, sibi, ibi, ubi, nobis, vobis.) Its functions are performed by the dative or genitive. Note 2. The Epic ending -φι or -φιν denotes the dative and geni- tive of all the numbers ; it is appended to the root according to the following analogies : κ€φα\η κεφαΧηφί, βίη βΙτ}φι, first decleusion. β€Ος θεόφιν, 6στ€ον οστεόφιν, second declension. στήθος στηθβσφι, οχος οχεσφι, third declension. In the third declension, it becomes -σφι Avhen it is appended to the root of neuters in -ος, gen. -€ος. It is observed further, that, in this declension, with the exception of νανφί from ναυς, and the adverbial dative ϊφι from ϊς, and perhaps a few others, it is confined to neuters in -ος, gen. -εος. Έρεβευσφί, fiom "Έρζβος, annexes φι to the contracted genitive Έρββενς. Κράτ€σφί from ΚΡΑΣ, κρατός, prefixes an e to -σφί, as if the nominative were ΚΡΑΤΟΣ. Έσχαρόφίν, and κοτνΧη^ονόφιν, from ίσχάρη, κοτνλη^ων, fol- low the analogy of the second declension. In nouns of the first declension, the ending -ηφί of the dative sin- gular is, in the best editions, wTitten --ηφι, as if -φι were appended to the common dative. This orthography is founded on tradition. (Compare -Ύ]σθα, "οσι, of the Epic subjunctive.) 52 INFLECTION OF WOEDS. [ξ} 43. FIKST DECLENSION. ^ 43. 1. The following table exhibits the case- endings and the last vowel of the root united : Dual, Plural, Masc. & Fern. Masc. & Fern. N. A. V. a at G. D. aiv Singular, Feminine. Masculine. N. a, η as, ης G. asy η9 ου Ώ, α, 7/ α, rj Α. αν, ην αν, ην V. α, η, α, η ων ais as αι > 2. Nouns in α or η are feminine ; nouns in a?, t;? are masculine ; as οΙκία, house, X(^p(^y joy, Βόξα, glory, μούσα, musa. muse, θάλασσα, the sea, Βίκη, judgment, γνώμη, opinion ; ταμίας, steward, τελώνης, publican, κριτής, judge. ί3. Nouns in a pure, pa, and some others, retain the a throughout the singular ; as οΙκία οΙκίας οΙκία OLKiav, χαρά χαράς χ^ρα 'χαραν. So αΚαΧά, eVt/SSa, σκαν^άΧα, Αν^ρομ€δα, Απάμα, Γέλα, Αωτίμα, Kt- μαίθα, Κισσαίθα, Kvvalda, Λήδα, Σιμαίθα, φιΧομηΧα, η 4. The following classes of nouns in ης have a in the vocative singular : (a) Nouns in r?;? ; as ποιητής ττοιητά, poet a, poet, κομήτης κομητα, 3 ο met a, comet. In Homer, αΐναρίτης, unhappili/ brave, has αΐναρ^τη, contrary to the rule. In Appolonius Rhodius Αίητης has Αίητη. . (b) Verbal nouns in 77$•; as Ύ^ωμίτρης γ€ωμ€τρα, geometra, geo- vieter; φαρμακοπωλης φαρμακοπώΧα, pharmacopeia, druggist, (c)All national appellations; as Σκνθης 2κνθα, Scythian, ΤΙ^ρσ-ης ΐίβρσα, Persian. (d) A few proper names; as Ιΐνραίχμης ΤΙνραϊχμα, PyrcBchmes; Ύστάσπης Ύστάσπα, Hystaspes, Lib. Nouns in aa, ea, βας, βη, and οη are contract- ed; as μνάα μνα, mina, συκβα συκη, flCUS, fig-tree, ^Ερμιάς Έρμης, Hei^mCS, άττλόη άττλη, simple, βορβας βορράς, boreas, the north ivind (§^ 7, n. 2; 44). §43.] FIRST DECLENSION. 53 cl6. Examples. Singular, ή , honor. η, judgment. ή, opinion. 6, publican. 6, judge. Ν. τΐμη δίκη γνώμη τίΚώνης κριτής G. τιμής δίκης γνώμης τξΚώνου κριτον D. Τίμη diKTJ γνώμυ τίΚών-η κριττ] A. τιμήν δίκη ν γνώμην Τ€λώνην , κριτή ν V. Τίμη δίκη γνώμη Dual. τίλώνη κριτά Ν.Α.ν. τιμά δίκα γνώμα τελώνα κριτά G. D. τιμαίν δίκαιι γνώμαιν Plural, τξΚώναιν κριταϊν N. τιμαί δίκαι γνώμαι τεΚώναι κριταΐ G. τιμών δικών γνωμών τελωνών κριτών D. τιμαΊς δίκαις γνώμαις τελώναις κριταΊς A. τιμάς δίκας γνώμας τεΧώνας κριτάς V. τιμαί δίκαι γνώμαι τεΚώναι κριταί Singular, V , house. Vjoy, η^ g^ory. η, muse. η, sea, 6, steward. Ν. οΙκία χαρά δόξα μονσα θάλασσα ταμίας G. οικίας χαράς δόξης μονσης θαλάσσης ταμίου D. οικία χαΡ^ δόξη μου ση θαλασσή ταμία Α. οΐκίαν χαράν δόξαν μονσαν θάλασσαν ταμίαν V. οΙκία χαρά δόξα Dual μονσα θάλασσα ταμία N.A.V. οΙκία χαρά^ δόξα μούσα θάλασσα ταμία G.D. οΐκίαιν χαραϊν δόξαιν μονσαιν θαλάσσαιν ταμίαιν Plural, Ν. οΐκίαί χαραί δόξαι μονσαι θαλασσαι ταμίαι G. οικιών χαρών δοξών μουσών θαλασσών ταμιών D. οΐκίαις χαραΐς δόξαις μούσαις θαλάσσαις ταμίαις Α. οικίας χαράς δόξας μούσας θάλασσας ταμίας V. οΐκίαι χαραί δόξαι μονσαι θαλασσαι τοίΐίαι 54 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§44. Ν G, D. A. V. ή, m μνάα μνάας μνάα μνάαν μνάα ajContracts. Singular. η, fig-tree. Ν. A.V. μνάα G. D. μνάαιν Ν. G. D. Α. V. μνααι μναών μνάαις μνάας μνάαι μνα μνας μνα μναν μνα μνα μναΊν μναί μνών μναΐς μναζ μναΐ σνκη σνκης crvKfj σνκην σνκη σϋκ.€α σνκ€ας συκία σνκ€αν σνκβα Dual, σνκ€α (τνκα σνκίαιν σνκαΐν Plural. σνκίαι σνκ€ών σνκίαις σνκεας σνκ€αί σνκαι σνκων σνκαΐς (τνκάς σνκαΐ 6, Hermes, 'Έρμ€ας ^Έρμης 'Έρμ€ου Έρμου *Έρμ€α Έρμίί *Έρμ€αν Έρμην *Έ,ρμ€α '^ρμη Έρμεα Έρμα 'Έρμβαιν ΈρμαΊν 'Έρμβαι ΈρμαΊ Έρμ€ων Έρμων Έρμβαις Έρμαΐς Έρμ^ας Έρμας Έρμεαί Έρμαϊ^(/ For examples in -pea, and -όη, see the feminine of the adjectives apyvpeos, and άττλοο?, below. § 44. Dialects. S. N. -ης, old ^olic -a, used chiefly by the Epic poets ; as Ιππότα. -η, -ης, ^olic, BcBOtic, Thessalian, and Doric -d,-as; a.s τιμά, τ€\ώνας, -a, -άς, Ionic -η, -ης: as οΐκίη, ταμίης. G. -ου, Boeotic and Thessalian -do; as Ατρειδάο : Arcadian -av ; as Απόλλωνί^αν,Ένμηλί^αυ: Doric and ^olic -d ; asArpeiSa: Ionic -6ω, after a vowel, -ω; as Ατρ^ίδ^ω : Epic -ao, -βω (-ω). The Attics sometimes use the Doric genitive, especially in proper names; as βορράς βορρά, Τωβρνας Τωβρνα. So in all circum- ilexed nouns in ας ; as Μάσκα? Μάσκα. The early Attic au- thors sometimes use the Ionic genitive in -βω, but only in proper names ; as θάλης θάλβω, Ύηρης Ύηρ€ω. -ης, ^olic. Bee otic, Thessalian, and Doric -a ς; as τιμάς, δό- ξας, -ας, Ionic -ης; as οΐκίης, σοφίης, θνρης, D. -7), ^olic, Thessalian, and Doric -a; as τιμα9 δό^α : Bceotic η (for the original at) ; as ri). -a, Ionic -77 ; as οΐκίη, σοφίτ] : Boeotic -η (for the original -at) ; as FeXart/y, άγορη, ίππασίη. Α. -ην, -^olic, Boeotic, Thessalian, and Doric -dv; as τιμάν, τβλώ- vav. -dv, Ionic -ην ', as οΐκίην, σοφίην. ^45.] SEC0NX3 DECLENSION. 55 Ν. G. D. , -α feminine, ^olic -a ; as Αφρόδΐτα, νυμφα, -η, ^olic, Thessalian, and Doric -d ; as τ€\ώνά, -ai, Boeotic -η ; as Ιππότη, -ων, Bcfiotic -άων\ as τιμάων : Thessalian ~άονν\ as Πβλασγι- οντάονν : ^olic and Doric -dv \ as τιμάν : Ionic -εωζ/; as τίμβων, μονσεων : Epic -άων, -€ων. -uLSy Old and Poetic -αισι ; as ταμίαισι, τιμαίσι : Bceotic -τ;? ; as τιμής, €V€pyeTr]S : lonic -rjai, - j]S ', as μούστ]σι μούστ]^ : Epic -at σι, -τ]σί, -tjs, A. -ά?, ^i^olic -ats" ; as τβγναις: Doric -as; as τ€χνας, πάσας: Cretan -avs ; asTrpetyevraz/s, inan inscription. 1. Some proper names in ης, belonging to the later Greek, make the genitive singular in ^ ; as Ιαννης, G. lauurj, D. lavprj, A. Ιαννψ, V. Ιαννη, Jannes. 2. The endings -atcri, -ηισι, of the dative plural, were sometimes pronounced and written without the first t ; as ταμίασι, τησι, αντησι, €πιστάτησι, found in ancient inscriptions. In the adverbial dative plural these endings are written -ασι, -ησι\ as Αθηνησί, ΆγρνΧησί, Άλωπεκησι, found in inscriptions. 3. Adverbial datives in -a, -rj are often written without the t. Dur- ing the classical period, however, this t was not omitted ; thus, in in- scriptions we find οπτ], Doric 6πα, not οπη, οπα. SECOND DECLENSION. ^ 45. 1. The Γο1ΙθΛνίιι§ table exhibits the case- endings and the last vowel of the root united : Si? igular. Dual Plural ISIasc. & Fem. Neut. All genders. Masc. & Fem. Neut, N. ος ov N. A. V. ω 01 a G. ου ου G. D. OLV ων ων D. ω ω 0L9 OLS A. ov ov ους a V. e ov at a ;χ2. Nouns in 09 are masculine, feminine, or com- mon ; nouns in ov are neuter; as 6 λογο9, word^ η Βοκός, beam, ό, η αρθρω7Γο<;, a human being, man, wo- man, συκον, ficUS, fig. a^ 3. Some nouns of this declension lengthen the radical vowel into ω throughout ; as 6 λαγώ?, 1 e - pus, hare, 0, η. βυγβως, fertile, το βυ^βων, fertile 56 INFLECTION OF ΛνΟΚΒ». [§45. In nouns of this description, the genitive singular and the nomina- tive of the neuter plural end in -ω (contracted from -ωο, -ωα). The vocative is always like the nominative. 4. A few /emmn^5 of this declension (commonly referred to the third) take the following endings in the singular : N. ώ, G. ους, D. οι, A. ώ, V. οΐ ; as ηχω, e c h Ο, 7Γ6ίθω^ persuasion. A^Two nouns of this class have -ώ? in the nominative singular; η ηώς, morning, and η αΙδώς, shame, respect, 5. The termination ων of the accusative singular, in some masculines and feminines, drops v; as 6 Αθως, τον Αθω'^ ο \αγω<ζ, τον Χαγων OV λαγω 5 η έω9> την βω, morning. 6. The following neuters have ο instead of ov ; aXXo, αυτό, βκβίνο, ο, το^ and τοΰτο, from αΧλος, αυτός, εκείνος, ος, 6, ούτος. 7. Nouns in €ος, οος, eov, οον are contracted ; as ττλόος ττλοΰς, sailing, οστ€ον οστονν, hone. /χ 8. Examples. Singular, 6, word, η, beam, η, island. 6, η, man. το, work, το, fig. Ν. \6γθ9 ^OKOS νήσος άνθρωπος έργον συκον G. Χόγον doKov νήσου άνθρωπου βργου σύκου D. λόγω 8οκω νήσω άνθρώπω έργω σύκω Α. Χόγον doKov νήσον ανθρωπον έργον συκον V. λόγε d0K€ νησ€ Dual άνθρωπε έργον συκον Ν. Α. V. λόγω δοκώ νήσω άνθρώπω έργω σύκω G, Ώ, λόγοίΐ/ doKolv νήσοιν Plural, άνθρώποιν εργοιν σύκοιν Ν. λόγοί BoKoi νήσοι άνθρωποι έργα σύκα α λόγων δοκών νήσων ανθρώπων έργων σύκων D. Χόγοις δοκοΊς νήσοις άνθρώποις εργοις σύκοις Α. Xoyovs doKovs νήσους ανθρώπους έργα σύκα ν. λόγοι doKoi νήσοι άνθρωποι έργα σύκα § 45.] SECOND DECLENSION. 57 Ρ^Ι.ΝΛ Singular. 6, temple, 6, ή, fertile, to, hall. η, echo, η, morning, ν^ως βυγβωί άνω-γ^ων ηχώ ηώς νεώ €νγ€ω άνώγ€ω ηχουί ηοΰς ν€ω €ϋγ€ω άνώγ€ω VX^^ V^^ νζών €ϋγ€ων άνώγ€ων ηχώ ηώ νεώς (νγ€ως άνώγβων ^χοΐ ηοΐ Dual, Ν. Α. V. ι/βώ €νγ€ω άνώγεω ηχώ ν€ων cvyecpv άνώγεων VX^^^ Plural, Ν. α Ό. Α. ν. G. D. Ν. α D. Α. V. ν€ω €νγ€ω ανωγεω VX^^ ν€ών €ϋγ€ωι/ άνώγεων νχών ν€ως ενγεως άνώγεως ηχοΊς νζώς €νγ€ως άνώγεω ηχον£ V€(u €υγ€ω ανωγεω ^χοι O^Contracts. P31.§3iJi\.CL. Singular, ό, sailing, τό, hone. Ν. Α. V. Ν. πλόος πλοΟί G. πλόου πλου D. ττλοω πλω Α. πλόορ πλουν V. ττλοε πλου Dual V. ττλοω πλώ D. πλόοιν πλοϊν Ν. πλόοι Plura πλοϊ G. πλόων πλών D. πλόοις πλοΊς Α. ttXoovs πλους V. πλόοί πλοΐ οστ€ον οστουν 6στ€ου οστού θ(ΓΤ€ω οστω 6στ€ον οστουν οστίον οστουν οστ€ω οστώ οστίοιν οστοΊν 6στ€α οστά οστίων οστών oarioLS οστοίς 6στ€α οστά οστία οστά For examples in eo?, oov, see the adjectives χρύσεος, apyipeosy απλό- 09, below. Notp: 1. The vocative of nouns in os is sometimes the same as the nominative ; as ώ φίλος, ώ dlos αίθηρ, 3* 68 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§^ 46, 47. Note 2. The vocative of nouns in os is the same as the root with a change ot* ο into e ; as Xoye, ανθρωπ€, for λόγο, άνθρωπο. That of feminines in ω, ω?, lengthens the radical vowel ο into ot ; as ηχοί, ήοΐ, for ήχο, ήό. § 46. Dialects, S. G. -ου, ^olic, Bceotic, and Doric -ω ; as /^βγάλω, ονρανω : old Thessalian - ο t o, later Thessalian -ol ; as ^eoto, πόνοω, iavTol, Τΐανσανίαίοί, Σιλάνοι : Epic - ο t ο, sometimes, - ο υ. -ω, original and Epic -ωο ; thus, Πβτβώο, from Τΐ€Τ€ώς, -ovs^ jEolic and Doric -ως ; as Αάτως, Aarois. D. -ω, Boeotic -v (for the original -ot) ; as rO δα/χυ, Ένβωλυ, ΈζΧατίην, for τω δά/χω, Εύ/3ώλω, EXaretato) : Thessahan •-ου ; as του Kotz/oi), αυτόν, Α. -ω, from feminines, ^olic -ω ζ/; as Κάτων: lomc-ovv \ as Λτ^τοΟζ^, Ιούν. D.G. D. -OLV, Epic -ο It Ι/; as Ίπποαν. Ρ. Ν. -ot, Boeotic -υ ; as τυ, τνδε, for rot, το/δβ. D. -ots", Old and Poetic -otσt ; as Xoyotfft, βριγκοΊσι : Boeotic -ϋ?; B^s aXXvs, ττροβάτνζ, A. -ου?, ^olic -ots ; as νόμοις, τοις : Boeotic -ως ; as εσγόνω? : Doric -ως, - ο s ; as Χύκως, Χνκος : Cretan -αν ς', asroz^s, from 6. 1. In ancient inscriptions, ω, in the expression β'φ' ω, on condition that, is always written without the t subscript ; thus, ΕΦΩ. 2. Proper names in -ου y are inflected like contracts in -ου?; ex- cept that they make the dative in -ου; as Ιτ^σου?, G. Ιτ^σου, D. Ιτ^σου, A. Ιησουν, V. Ιησον, Jesus, or Joshua, In the Septuagint, the dative of Ιτ^σου? is also I τ; σοι. 3. In a Doric inscription, Αατος is found for the genitive Αατως, that is Αητους. 4. In inscriptions cut during the brazen period of the language, the endings -ις, -lv are found for -ιος,-ιον ', as Αημητρις, Ελλάδι?, Aio- ννσις, Ανρηλις, Ιουλι?, Α7Γθλλιι/ά/3ΐ? ; τον Ακ^σιν, Αφροδβίσιι/, Καλλί- στιν, ΈΧζνθίριν ; neuter το μαρτυριν for μαρτύρων. Also ό Αθήναις, Έιρηναι,ς, Εστιαι?, for Αθηναίος, Έίρηναως, Εστιαίο?. THIRD DECLENSION. •ν ^ 47. 1. The root of this declension is obtained by dropping 09 of the genitive singular ; as κοραξ κόρακος^ root κορακ 5 Χβων Χβοντος^ root Χβοντ, 2. The following table exhibits the case-endings of the third declension: § 47.] THIRD DECLENSION. 59 Singular. i)w«/. Plural. All genders. All genders. Masc. & Fern. Neul N. N.A.y. 6 €ff α G. 0?, ως G. D. oti/ ωϊ/ ων D. ι σι σί A. a, V α? α V. ί €S α 3. The following table exhibits the endings (not the case-endings) of the nominative and genitive singular, of the third declension. The ending of the nominative contains a part of the root and very often the case-ending -ς ; the ending of the genitive always contains a part of the root followed by the case-ending -oy. Thus, in πραγμ-α πράγμ-ατος^ -a is a part of the root, and -ατος^ a part of the root fol- lowed by the case-ending -ος ; in tt-ols π-αώός, -at? is a part of the root and the case-ending -ς. -a G. aT09f neuter ; as ττραγμα, thing, σώμα, body. But γάλα G. γά- λακτος, lac, milk. Κάρα, head, has a long in the last syllable. αις — αώος, αίτος ', 6, ή παΐς τταώός, puer, child, hoy, girl, το σταίς σταιτός, dough, ή 8αίς ^αιτός, feast. -αν — άνος, masculine ; παιάν, paean, ΤΙάν, Pan, Ύιτάν, Titan. -αν — ανος, αντος, neuter to -άς ; μβΧαν, βουλ€νσαν. -άρ — ατός, αρος, neuter ; ήπαρ, -ατός, hepar, the liver, νέκταρ, -αρος, nectar, ονθαρ, -ατός, uber, udder. But 6 ψάρ ψαρός, starling, 6 μάκαρ, -αρος, blessed, η δάμαρ, -άρτος, ivife. When -αρ is preceded by 6, a contraction may take place ; as deXeap, δ€λ€ατος δβλητος, bait, €ap ηρ, ver, the spring, κίαρ κηρ, cor, heart, στίαρ στηρ, tallow, fat, φρίαρ, φρέατος φ ρητός, a icell. 'άς — άτος, αος, neuter ; as κέρας, cornu, horn, κρέας, car ο, meat, τέρας, prodigy Nouns of this class may drop the τ ; as κέρας κεραος, κρέας κρεαος, τέρας τεραος. Some nouns of this class always appear without the τ ; as δεπας, -αος, goblet, σεΧας, -αος, effulgence. -^y — αδος^ feminine ; as λαμπάς, torch, μονάς, unit. But adjectives of this ending are of the common gender ; as o, ή λογάς, picked, chosen. -ας {-ας, -at?) — αντος, ανος, masculine; ελεφας, elephas, ele- phant us, e/e;?/zizn^ γίγας, gigas, giant, ΑΪας, Ajax, Only two have G. ανος, μέλας, black, and τάλας, U7ifortunate. — The short end- ing -a? in nouns of this description is Doric ; as Ata?, πράξάς, τινάξάς, δησας, τάλάς, μ^λάς. (ξ> 14, η. 7.) The ending - α t ? is ^olic ; as παις, κίρναυς, μελαις, τάλαις. -άς — αδό?, feminine, contracted from -at? ; δα? δαδός, torch. -ανς ~ άο? ; η γρανς, old woman, η ναυς, navis, ship, the only nouns in -ανς. -€Lp — etpo? ; 6 φθείρ, louse, η χειρ χεφός or χερός, hand. -€t? — ενός ; 6 el?, unus, one, ό ktcLs, pecten, comby the oaly ex- amples 60 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ ^^"7 '€(ς ('€vs, -es", -ηί) — εντός, masculine; βον^ευβείς, τίθείς, χαρίεις, αστ6ρΟ€ίς, αίματόεις. When it is preceded by 77 or ο, a contraction may take place ; as τιμψις τιμτις, ηΧακόεις πΧακους. — Some names of cities in -6 εις -ο ν ς are feminine ; as Ύραττεζους, -ουντος, Trope- zus. — The endings -ενς, -ης are Doric ; as τιθβνς, γαρίης, άστερό- 77?, αίματόης, καταλνμακωθης. The ending -ey is Thessalian and Doric; as ευεργέτες (Thessalian participle from ευεργβτημί), χαρί- ες, άστερόες, αίματόες. -εις — εώος' ; ή κλείς, c 1 a ν i S, hy, lock. -ευ (-ειν) — εντός, ενός, neuter to -εις G. εντός, ενός ; as εν, βονλενθβν. The ending -ειν belongs to the later Epic dialect; as σκιόειν, δα- κρνόειν, in Apollonius. -ες — εος, neuter to -?;? Ο. εος ; as αληθές, σαφίς. -εν ς — εος, Attic εως ; as βασιλεύς, king, -η — TITOS' ; το κάρη, head, Ionic for κάρα, the only example. -ην — ηνος, ενός, masculine, sometimes feminine; 6 μην μηνός, men- sis, month, 6 σπλην, -ηνός, lien, spleen, 6 λιμην, -ενός, haven, η φρην φρενός, mind. -η ρ — ηρος, ερος, masculine, sometimes feminine ; as 6 σωτηρ, -ηρος, preserver, 6 θηρ θηρός, fera, wild beast, 6 άηρ, -ερος, aer, air, 6 al- Θηρ, -ερος, aether, ether ; η μητηρ, η θυγάτηρ, η Αημητηρ, ή y αστήρ, η Κηρ, η ραιστηρ. — For -η ρ contracted, see -άρ. -ης — εος, masculine or feminine ; η τριήρης, triremis, 6, η αληθής, true. -ης — ητος, femipine, sometimes masculine ; all abstract nouns in -της are feminine ; as η θεότης, divinity, η βραδντης, slowness. ΤΙάρνης, G. -ήθος, Parnes, a mountain. -ης — εντός, Doric for -εις, εντός. Also in Latin names, as Κλημης, Clemens. -rjs — ]]^ος, contracted from -ηΐς; η παρης, cJieeh, η Νηρης, Nereid. -t — toy, εος {εως), neuter; σίνάττι, sinapi, mustard, πιπέρι, piper, pepper. But /xeXt μίλιτος, mel, honey, τι τίνος or τινός, from τις, τΙς. -Τ ν — Ινος, another form of -Γ? Τνος, -ις — ιος, Attic εως. Poetic εος, feminine ; as ττολις, state, city, ύβρις, superbia, haughtiness, τνρσις, turris, tower, κάνναβις, canna- bis, hemp, σάγαρις, securis, axe. Except 6 κίς, 6 ορχις, 6 όφις, οι, αΐκύρβεις, 6, η εχις, 6, η κόρις. -ις — ιτος, ώος, ιθος, generally feminine, sometimes masculine or com- mon ; η χάρις, -ιτος, grace, η ελπίς, -ίδος, hope, 6, ή όρνις, -ϊθος, bird. -ίς or -IV — ΐνος, masculine rarely feminine ; as ό 8ε\φίς or δελφίν, del ρ hi η, dolphin, η ρις, nose, η 'ίς, vis, strength. But τις, τις, G. τίνος, τϊνός. -λί — λος, 6 αλς, sal, salt, η αλς, salum, the sea, the only example. ■νς— νθος ; η ελμινς, ή πείρινς, η Ύιρννς, perhaps the only exam- ples. ξ — κος, γοί, χος, generally masculine, sometimes feminine ; as ό κό- ραξ, -ακος, corvus, crow, 6 κόκκυξ, -νγος, coccyx, cuckoo, ό οννξ, -υχος, unguis, nail, η θρίξ τριχός, hair, ό, η άρπαξ, rqpax, rapa- § 47.] THIRD DECLENSION. 61 cious. But 6 αναξ G. ανακτος^ sovereign, η ννξ G. νυκτός, η ο Χ, night, η άλώπηξ G. άλώπ€κος, vulpes, fox. -oLs — oLos, contracted from -ots ; ή ols, ο ν is, sheep, 6 φθοΊς, a kind of cake, the only examples. -ov — ovos, ovTos, neuter to -ων, ovos, ovtos ; as evdaijiov, βονλ€νον, -op — ορός, neuter; as ητορ, heart, ~ος — €ος, neuter ; as yeVoy, genus, race, νέφος, nubes, cloud, ρίγος^ frigus, cold, Χηνος, lana, wool, έλκος, ulcus, ulcer, -6 ς — ότος, neuter to -ώς, οτος *, as βεβουΧενκός. -ovv — ο^ος, neuter to the compounds of πους ; as hlnovv. -ους — οντος, masculine ; as οδονς, dens, tooth. But 6, η βονς βοάς, bos, ox, cow, 6 χους χοός, a measure, 6, η ρους, rhus, sumach, 6 πους ποδός, pes, foot. -υ — €ος (εως), neuter ; αστν, γλυκύ. -ϋν — ϋνος, another form of -υ? ϋνος. -ν ν — νντος, neuter to -υ ς, νντος ; as δύν, δεικνυν. 'Vp — νρος ; το πυρ πυρός, fire, 6 μάρτυρ, -υρος, ivitness. 'vs — νος, €ος {^ως), masculine or feminine ; as 6, ή συς, sus, swine, sow, hog, 6 μυς, mus, mouse, 6 Ιχθύς, fish, 6 γΧυκύς, -κεος, dulcis, siveet. In masculine substantives the Attic genitive is in εως ; as 6 πεΧεκυς, -κεως. -ν ς — ν8ος, υθος, feminine ; as δαγΰ?, -υ^ος, κωμυς, -ϋθος, "ϋς οτ 'ϋν — ϋνος, masculine or feminine ; as οΦόρκυς, η Τόρτνς, ~ϋς — νντος, masculine; as δεικνύς, φύς, δύς. -ψ• — πος, βος, φος, masculine, rarely feminine ; as 6 γύψ γυττοί, vul- ture, 6 'Άρα-ψ-, -αβος, η κατηΧίψ, -ίφος, trap-door ? -ων — ωνος, όνος, masculine, feminine, or common ; as 6 αΙων, -ώνος, aevum, age, 6 άξων, -όνος, axis, axle-tree, 6, ή ευδαίμων, -όνος, happy. Proper names m -άων are contracted ; as, ΙΙοσεώάων, -δων, Posl- don, {Ξενοφάων) Ξενοφών, Xenophon. -ων — οντος, masculine ; Χεων, leo, lion. -ω ρ — ωρος, ορός, masculine, sometimes feminine or common; as ό φό)ρ φωρός, fur, thief, 6 ρητωρ, -ορός, η προμητωρ, -ορός. But το εΧδωρ, το εΧωρ, το ϋδωρ. -ως — ωτος, ωος, masculine; as γεΧως, -ωτος, laughter, φως φωτός, man, θως θωός, ^ΐίνως, -ωος. But η δώς, dos, gift, το φως, (φάος,) light. -ώς — ότος, participle masculine; βεβουΧενκώς, -ως — ωδος, only η φως φωδός, blister, α burn, contracted from φωΐς. 4. Many nouns of the third declension, of which the root ends in e, l, v, are contracted. The contracted accusative plural is always like the contracted nominative plural. .Λ (a") Nouns in ης, ες, ος are contracted when the vowel of the case- ending comes in contact with the vowel of the root ; as τριήρης, τριηρεος τριήρους ; σαφές, σαφεος σαφούς ; τεΊχος, τείχεος τείχους. 62 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 4T. (b) Nouns in ις, ι, V9, ν, and €vs are contracted in the dative singu . lar, and ni ttie nominative, accus?aive, and vocative plural ; as πόλις^ ' πόλα πόλΓ ; Ιχθύς, Ιχθύϊ Ιχθυϊ; βασιλεύς, βασιλεες βασιλεΊς» (c) The radical vowels t and ν are, in many nouns, changed into e in all the cases, except the nominative, accusative, and vocative, sin- gular ; as πυλις πόΧεως, neXcKvs ττβλβ/^βω?. (d) Neuters in ας often drop the τ and are contracted when the vowel of the case-ending comes in contact with the a ; as κέρας, Kepa τος κβραος κερως. (e) Bouy, ό, η, bos, ooc, cow, η γραυς, old woman, and η νανς, η avis, s^2j9, are contracted only in the accusative plural; thus βόας βους, γράας γρανς, ναας ναυς. ' α.5. Examp es. ^3\N3,'S^'^^wZar h'i^.m-l 6, crow, ο , vulture . ή, grace. η, hope. 6, jackal. 6, orator. Ν. κόραζ γύψ^ χάρις ελπίς βώς ρητωρ G. κόρακος γνπός χάριτος ελπίδος θωός ρητορος D. κοράκι γνπί χάριτι ελπίδί θωΐ ρητορι Α. κόρακα γύπα χάριν ελπίδα θωα ρήτορα V. κοραξ γύψ χάρι Dual, ελπί θως ρήτορ N.A.V κόρακ€ γνπε χάριτε ελπίδε θωε ρητορε G.D. κοράκοιν γνποΊν χαρίτοιν Plural, ελπίδοιν θωοιν ρητόροιρ Ν. κόρακες γύπες χάριτες ελπίδες θωες ρήτορες α κοράκων γυπών χαρίτων ελπίδων θώων ρητόρων D. κόραζί γνψί χάρισι ελπίσι θωσί ρητορσι Α. κόρακας γύπας χάριτας ελπίδας Θωας ρήτορας ν. kopoK^s γύπες χάριτες ι ελπίδες Θωες ρήτορες^ §ΐ3.ν Singular, S ;s. ^■,^--'^ το, thing. 6, age. 6, god. 6, haven. 6, lion. 6, giant Ν. πράγμα αΙων δαίμων λιμην λέων γίγας α πράγματος αΙωνος δαίμονος λι μένος λέοντος γίγαντος D. πράγματι αΐώνι δαίμονι Xt/zeVt λεοντι γίγαντι Α. πράγμα αΙωνα δαίμονα λιμένα λέοντα γίγαντα ν. πράγμα αΙών δαϊμον Dual λιμην λεον γίγαν Ν. Α. ν. πράγματε αιωνε δαίμονε λιμενε λεοντε γίγαντε G. D. πραγμάτοιν αΐώνοιν δαιμόνοιν λιμενοιν λεόντοιν γιγάντοΐ9 §47.] THIRD DECLENSION. 63 Ν. G. D. A. V. N. G. D. A. V. Plural. πράγματα αΙωνα δαίμονα \ιμίν€ί Xiovres ylyavres πραγμάτων αΙώνων δαιμόνων Χιμίνων Χίόντων γιγάντων ττράγμασι αίωσι δαίμοσι Xi/iieVt λίουσι γίγάσί πράγματα αΐωναί δαίμονα! Χιμίνας Χίονταί γίγαντα! πράγματα ald>ves δαίμονα Χιμίνα \(ovTes γίγαντα τριήρης TpLTjpeos τριήρους τριηρ€Ϊ τριηρ€ί Tpirjpea τριήρη τριήρης Ρ ^; -ν ^ α Contracts. Singular. το, wall, τείχος Τζίχζος Τ€ίχ€Ϊ τείχος τείχος Dual, τείχους τείχει ό, fish, Ιχθυς Ιχθύος Ιχθύ'ί Ιχθυϊ Ιχθύν Ιχθύ Ν. G. Ν. G. D. Α. V. Α.ν. τριηρεε τριήρη D. τριηρεοιν τριηροΐν τριηρεες τριήρεις τριηρεων τριηρών τριηρεσι τριηρεας τριήρεις τριηρεες τριήρεις τειχεε τείχη τειχεοιν τειχοΐν Plural, τείχεα τείχη τειχεων τειχών τείχεσι τειχεα τειγεα Sinorular, τείχη τείχη Ν. G. D. Α. V. Ν, ρ, Ν. G. D. Α. V. η, state, ΤΓολις 3 " '' *• ' πόλεος πόλεως Ιχθύ ε Ιχθύοιν ιχθύες Ιχθυς Ιχθύων Ιχθύ σι Ιχθύας Ιχθυς ιχθύες Ιχθυς το, mustard. A.V. πόΧεϊ πόΧιν ττόλι πόλεε ποΧεοιν ΤΓολεες ΤΓολεων τΓολεσι πόλε ας πόλεες πόλει Dual. Plural, πόλεις πόλεις πόλεις σιναπι σινάπεος σινάπεϊ σιναπι σιναπι σινάπεε σιναπεοιν σινάπεα σιναπεων σιναπεσι σινάπεα σινάπεα σιναττη σιναπη σινάπη J 64 INFLECTION OF WOEDS. Singular, R47. ■ 0, cubit. το, city. 6, king. Ν. G. D. Α. V. ττηχνί πήχΐΦί πήχ€Ϊ πηχΐΐ πηχυν πηχν άστυ αστ€05 αστε'ί αστει άστυ άστυ βaσιλευs βασιλεω5 βασίλεϊ βασιλέα βασιλευ βασιλεΧ Dual N.A.V G. D. ττηχίοιν αστ€€ άστεοιν βασΐλε€ βασιλεοιν Plural, Ν. G. D. A. V. πήχΐ€5 Tzrixw πήχεων πηχ€σι ■πηχ^αί πηχηί ■TTTjxees τνηχ^ΐί αστεα άστη άστεων άστεσι αστεα άστη αστεα άστη Singular, βασΐλεε5 βασιλέων βασιλευσι βaσιλεas βaσΐλεεs βασιΚ-είς^ -§£ βασιλείς βασιλεία N. G. D. A. V. TO, horn, Kepas Kepdros Kepaos κερως κερατι κερα'ί κέρα Kepas Kepas Dual, το, prize, yipas yipaos yεpωs yipa'i yεpa yipas yipas Ν.Α.•ν • κερατ€ κεραε κέρα yipae yipa G. D. κεράτοιν κεράοιν κερων yεpάoιv yepav Plural, N. κέρατα κεραα κέρα yipaa yipa G. D. A. κεράτων κεράσι κέρατα κεράων κερων κεραα κέρα yεpάωv yεpaσι yipaa yεpωv yipa V. κέρατα κεραα κέρα yipaa yipa Note 1. Proper names in -κ\iης, contracted -κληs, undergo a double contraction in the dative singular, and sometimes in the accusa* live singular ; as N. 'Π.εpικ\iηs TIepiK\rjs, Pericles G. Ήερικλεεος TlεpLκ\iovs D. Τίερικλεεϊ 'Π.εpLκλiει Ώερικλεΐ Α. ΤΙερικλεεα Ώερικλεα ΤΙερικλη V. Περίκλεες ΊΙερίκλεΐ5 § 48.] THIRD DECLENSION. 65 Note 2. In later Greek, the genitive of nouns in νς may be con- tracted ; as ττηχνς, πηχβων ττηχων. Further, the genitive singular and neuter plural of adjectives in vs may be contracted ; as j^/xtav, ημίσβοζ ημίσονς, ημίσεα ημί<τη, (Luc, 19, 8.) Note 3. (a) The genitive singular of nouns in evs may be contract- ed after a ΛΌ\νο1 ; as netpateus•, Πεφαιεω? UeLpaLcus ; χοευ?, χοβως χοώς, a kind of measure. (b) In the old Attic dialect, the ending ees of nouns in evs is con- tracted into ης ; as innevs ίπττης^ wXvvevs ttXvutjs. Note 4. The ending ee of the dual of neuters in o$ was also con- tracted into €L ; as σκβλος σκίΚεί, ζεύγος ζεύγει, found in Attic inscrip- tions. Note 5. The contracted dati\'e singular of neuters in as lengthens the α after the analogy of the first declension ; as yepas yepdi yepa. Note 6. The genitive singular of neuters may, in Attic Poetry, end in ω^ ; as αστν άστεως. In later Greek, such genitives were used also in prose ; as σίναπι σινάπεως^ βρ^-Χ^ βραχίως. Note 7. According to the old grammarians, the Attic genitive and dative dual of nouns in t? and νς end in ων ; as πόΧίς πόλεων. ^ 48. 1. Most nouns of the third declension form the nominative singular by annexing 9 to the root 5 as ^ω-9 θω-ο<ς^ σαφβ-ζ σαφβ-ος. So κίς Actos", πολις πολως, κόραξ κόρακος, θρίξ τριχός, yv^\r γϋττο?, κατη\ι>\τ κατηλίφος, χάρις χάριτος, εΧμινς εΧμινθος, μεΧάς μεΧανος, βονΧεύσας βουΧενσαντος, τώείς τίθβντος. (§§ 13 ; 14.) (a) When the root ends in e, masculines and feminines lengthen es• into ης ; as τριήρης τριηρεος, triremis, σαφής σαφεος, ^ (b) The perfect active participle lengthens ο into ω in the mascu- line ; as βεβουΧευκως βεβονΧενκότος. (c) AU neuter substantives change ες into ος ; as τε'ιχος τείχεος, βί- Χος βεΧεος. (d) Some neuters change ς into ρ ; as ήπαρ ήπατος, φρεαρ φρέατος (e) Που?, pes, foot, lengthens ος into ονς. Homer has άρτίπος, sound-footed, (f ) Nouns Λvhose root originally ended in of, eF, of, change f into υ before s• ; as ναΤς νανς, γραΤς γρανς, βασΐΧεΤς βασιΧενς, ΖεΡς Ζενς, βοΥς βους, χοΡς χονς, ροΤς ρονς. ^ 2. When the nominative is not formed according to the preceding rule, it is the same as the root, 66 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 49, 50. witn the omission of such consonants as cannot stand at the end of a Greek word (^ 6, 5). Mas- culines and feminines lengthen € and o, in the last syllable, into η and ω, respectively. E. g. αΙων αίων -os^ Χίμην Χίμβν-ο^;^ ρτγτωρ ρητορ-ος. So πράγμα πράγματος, παιάν παιανος^ ^άμαρ δάμαρτος, χ€ίρ χειρόζ^ σίναπι σινάπως, πυρ πυρός, δαίμων δαίμονος, Xeoov Χβοντος. § 49. 1. The accusative singular of masculines and feminines is formed by annexing a to the root ; as κοραξ Kopa/c-a, Χβων \eovT-a. 2. Nouns in ^9. f ?, αυς, ους, of which the root ends in a vowel, form their accusative by dropping 9 of the nominative and annexing ν ; as ττόΧις ttoXlv, ίχθυ<ζ ιγθυν, ireXeKV^ ττβΧβκνν, So γρανς γραυν, νανς νανν, βους βονν, χους χουν, ρους ρουν, 3. If the root ends in a consonant, paroxytones and proparoxytones in t9 and νς have α or i^ in the accusative ; as opvL<^, ορνΙθα or opvLv ; κόρνς, κόρυθα or κόρνν ; βϋέλτΓίς, βυέκττώα or βϋβΧτην. The accusative in a, in nouns of this description, is rather Poetic. Note. In the Epic dialect, the following• nouns often have α in the accusative singular, contrary to the second rule : βους βόα, €υρύς €ύ% pea, Ιχθύς Ιχθύα, ναυς vea, πόΧις πόΧηα. The accusative of ΔΙΣ (originally ΔΙΓΣ) is always Ata. ^ 50. In many instances, the vocative singular of masculine and feminine nouns is like the nom- inative singular. 1. The vocative of nouns in «9 (arising from ανς, αντς)^ 669 (from 6z^T9), ηρ, ων, ωρ, is the same as the root with the omission of such consonants as can- not stand at the end of a Greek word (^ 6, 5) : as Ύ^γα^ζ ycyavTO'; ycyaPy ττατηρ ττατερος ττατ^ρ. §^ 51, 52.] THIRD DECLENSION. 67 So χαρίας γ^αρί^ντος χαρίερ, δαίμων δαίμονος 3αίμον. So also yvi^v γνραικός yvvai, aua^ ανακτος ava. 2. Nouns in 69, v?, eu9, and the compounds of 7Γοιί9, foot^ drop the 9 of the nominative : ev is al- ways circumflexed ; as eX7r/9 ελττ/, Ιχθύ^ ίχ^^^? βασι- Xeu9 βασίλβν, 'χ^αΧκοττους 'χαΧκοττου, So also ypavs ypav, old woman J nals παί, child. (λ 3. Nouns in 779, G. 609, shorten 779 into €9 in the vocative \ as Σωκράτης ^ωκρατβς, τροηρης τριηρβς, αΧη- θης αΧηθβς, :c4. ΑτΓοΧΧων, ΠοσβιΒών, and σωτηρ shorten the final syllable in the vocative ; thus, "AttoWov, Πόσε/,- Sov, σωτβρ, § 51. 1. The dative plural is formed by annex- ing at to the root ; as θως θωος θωσΐ, Ιγθύ^ \γθυο<^ ιγβυσι. So τριήρης τριηρξος τριηρζσι, θρίξ τρίχας θριξί, πους ποΒυς ποσι, τά- \ας τάλανος τάλασ^,. τιΘ^ίς τιθ^ντος τίθ€ΐσι, Χίων \€οντος Xeovai, δ€ίκννς deLKi /ύντος δ€ίκννσι, (§§ 13 ; 14.) 2. Nouns in eu9 form their dative plural by drop- ping 9 of the nominative and annexing ac ; as /3a- σίλβυς βασιλβΰσί. Also γρανς γραυσι, νανς νανσι, ρους ρονσι, χους χονσι, ρους ρονσι. Note. Syncopated nouns in η ρ annex the Doric case-ending άσι to the syncopated root ; see άνηρ, y αστήρ ^ 6υyάτηp, μητηρ, πατήρ, also αρί /os, άστηρ, υιός, in the Catalogue of Anomalous Nouns. . § •52. Dialects. P. D. -σι, ^olic andBoeotic -εσσι; as πους ποδβσσι, ίλθων l\6ou τ€σσι, διάλυσι? διαλυσ/βσσί : Doric -α σι, -ασσι, -€σί ; as υπάρχων υπαρχόντασσι^ πράσσων πρασσόντασσι, θηρ θη- peaiy ϊς 'Iveaty μάθημα μαθημάτ^σι '. Epic -ζσσι, -eat, - σ σ ί ; as πους ποσσί, βπος εττβ-σσι. D. G. D, 'OiVy Epic ouv ; as 2€ίρην Σ€φηνοαν, πους ποδοαν. 68 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 52. 1 Example of nouns in ls of which the root ends in ι : S. N, ττόλις, cit^, state G. ^olic, B(£0tic, Thessalian, Doric, and Ionic noXios D. (πόλα), Μ. Β. Th. D.J. τΓολΓ Α. ttoXlv, in all the dialects D. N. A. Ionic ττόλιβ G. D. Ionic πόλίοιν P. N. M. B. Th. I. TTokus, Doric πολιβ? G. M, B. Th. D. I. Ίτολίων D. ^. B. Th. D. πολί^σσί, Ionic πόλισι A. ^. B. Th. TTOXtas", Doric πολιάς, Ionic ττόλια? ttoXis 2. Example of nouns in -evy : S. N. βασιλβυ?, ^olic βασίλβυ?, Doric βασιλεύς, king G. Doric and Ionic βασιλ^ος, Bceotic βασΐλεϊος, -^olic βασί' ληος, Epic βασϊληος D. Ionic βασιΧί'ί, Doric βασιλει, Bceotic βασιλέα, ^olic βασΙ ληϊ, Epic βασιληϊ Α. Ionic βασιλβα, Doric βασιλη, Bceotic βασιλεία, -^olic βασι- λίδα, Epic βασιληα. The Attic Poets sometimes use the Doric accusative; as Ιερεύς ίερη, ξυγγραφενς ζυγγραφη, D. Ν. Α. Epic βασιληε, G. D. βασιληοιν Ρ. Ν. Doric and Ionic βασιλεες, Bceotic βασιλείες, -^olic βασίληες, Epic βασιληες G. Doric and Ionic βασιλέων, Bceotic βασιλείων, jEolic and Epic βασιληων D. Doric, Bceotic, Ionic, and Epic βασιλενσι, ^. βασιληεσσι A. Doric and Ionic βασιλέας, Bceotic βασιλείας, ^olic βασί- λ7}ας. Epic βασιληας 3. Nouns in εης (especially proper nouns in -κλ/τ;?), and neuters in εος are sometimes inflected Avithout the e ; that is, they are syn- copated ; as ^Ηρακλεης Ηρακλής, G. 'ΐΐρακλεος, D. *Ηρακλεϊ, Α. Ίΐρακλεα, V 'Ήρακλες, Ionic and Doric, in part. TO κλέος, τα κλεα ', το σττεος, τοΙς σπεσσι, Epic. So ^νσκλεα, νπερδεα, in Homer; ευκλεάς, in Pindar. Also, τα κρεά, τα κερά, from κρέας, κέρας. Ν τ; λ ή S for νηλεης, and θεον^7]ς ΐοΐ θεο^εης, drop the ε in the nom- inative. 4. The Ionic contracts -e ο s•, from nouns in ης, ος, into -ευ ς; as θάμβος, G. θάμβεος θάμβενς. 5. In nouns in -κλέη ς, the Epic contracts εε into η or ει, and the Bceotic into ει ; as Ήρακλεης, -κλεεος -κληος, -κλεεϊ -κληϊ, -κλ€εα -κληα ; €νρρεης, εϋρρεεος εϋρρεϊος ; εϋκλεης, ενκλεεας ενκλεΐας ; Ααμοκλης, Δα- "" μοκλεεος Ααμοκλεϊος. 6. The later Greeks made G. -κλείονς from nouns in -κλέη ς ; as Ιΐασικλης -κλείους, Αριστοκλής -κλείονς. ^ 53.] * AN >MALOUS NOUNS. 69 7. According to the ancient grammarians, the ^olic vocative of contract nouns in ης is the same as the root ; as Αριστοφάνης Apt- στόφαν€, Σωκράτης Έώκρατ€, 8. The later Dorians sometimes shortened - e i y of the contracted nominative and accusative plural into -e? ; as oi, τους ίαρ€ς, βιοπλανίς, ΙΙρίανσιίς^ from tepevy, βίοπλανης, ΤΙρίανσιβύς, 9. In inscriptions belonging to the brazen age of the Greek language, the accusative singular of the third declension often ends in av, which, properly speaking, is the original case-ending of this declension ; as τον avdpaVj.TTjV yvvaiKav, την μητεραν, 10. In later Greek, some diminutives in is• retain the υ through- out ; as 6 Αίοννς, τον Alovv, τω Αιονν ; 6 Κλαυσί)?, τον Κλανσν, τω Κλανσν. {Bekker. Anecd. Gr. no. 1195.) ANOMALOUS, DEFECTR^E, AND INDECLINABLE NOUNS. ^ 53• Nouns Λvhich have more than one root are regarded as anomalous. ^l. All contract proper names in ης οι the third declension may be inflected after the analogy of the first. In classical Greek, however, this rule applies chiefly to the accusative sin- gular. E. g. Αριστοφάνης, A. Αριστοφάνη or Αριστοφάνην Τισσαφέρνης, Α. Ύισσαφβρνην, V. Ύισσαφερνη ΚαΧΚισθενης, G. ΚαΧλισθενον ΑριστοκΧης, Μενεκράτης, V. Αριστοκλή, Μενεκράτη The j^Eolic dialect applies this principle also to adjectives ; as 6 δνσρ,ενης, τον ^νσμενην ; 6 κνκΧοτερης, τον κνκΧοτερην. 2. On the other hand, masculines of the first declension may, in the Ionic dialect, make the accusative in ea, eay ; as Τνγης, δεσπότης, Α. Τν-γεα, ^εσπότεα, Βεσττότεας. Αρταξέρξης, in an Ionic inscription, has G, Αρταξερξενς, contract- ed from Αρταξερξεος. 3. Some nouns in ι ς have G. ιος or ώος ; as μηνις μψιος or μηνιοος, θετις Θέτιδος or θετιος. See also όρνις, κλείς, θέμις, τι- γρις, in the Catalogue. 4. Some neuters in ας, G. αος, change, in the Ionic dialect, α into €, in the inflection. See βρετας, κνεφας, κώας^ ονδας, ΥΔΑΣ, ΔΟΡΑΣ, in the Catalogue. 5. Nouns in ά? (arising from ανς, αντς) of the third declen- sion sometimes are inflected after the analogy of the first ; as 70 ' INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 54. Τίολν^άμας, Υ. ΙΙολνΜμα, Poly^amas Xv κάβας, μ^Χας, Aiay, ατταί, Α. Χνκάβαν, μ^Χαν, Aiav, άπαν 6. ΑπόΧΧων, Ποσζώών, and κνκεών commonly drop ν in the ac- cusative, and then contract ωα into ω ; thus, Αττολλω, Ποσβιδώ, κυκ€ίώ (Epic). 7. Sometimes the genitive of the second declension is form- ed after the analogy of the first ; thus, Herodotus has Βάττο?, ΚΧ€Ομβροτος, G. Βάττεω, }Ω^€θμβρότ€ω. So βΧεφάρων κυανζάων, in Hesiod ; νήσος νησάων {Ahrens,!, p. 229). 8. The ending ων (circumflexed) of the genitive plural of the third declension may be changed into €ων by the lonians, and into a ν by the Dorians, after the analogy of the first ; as ρις ριν€ων, χην χηνβων, αίξ alyav. So Ίζίρην Σ€ίρηνάων, χιΧιάς χίΧί.α^€ων {Her, 7, 103). 9. The later Doric uses also -oty for -σι, in the dative plural of the third declension ; as άγων άγώνοίς, €ντνγχάνων ^ντυγχανόν- τοις, Ααμΐ€υς Aa/xte'oty, γέρων γερόντοις. (Compare Latm -matis for -7natihus^ as poema poematis ; also -otv of the dual of the same declension.) So ηγυς, that is, αίγοις, from at^, goat, found in a Boeotic inscrip- tion. ,10. Some nouns in ηρ^ Λvhich make the genitive in epos, are generally syncopated in the genitive and dative singular. See άνηρ, γαστηρ, Αημητηρ, θνγάτηρ, μητηρ, and πατήρ, in the Cata- logue. 11. Some nouns of the second declension are masculine in the singular, and masculine or neuter in the plural ; as 6 Xv- χνος, oi Χύχνοι or τα Χνχνα ; 6 δεσμός, οί δεσμοί ΟΥ τα δεσμά ; 6 σίτος, τα σίτα. 12. Many nouns have more than one form even in the nom- inative ; such nouns are commonly called r^ednndant ; as η εως and ηως^ viorn^ morning; η γάΧως^ Ionic γαλόω?, glos, husband,'' s sister ; το δενδρον and δενδρος -εος, tree ; η χωρά and 6 χώρος, place^ space. § 54. 1. Defective nouns are those of which only some of the cases are in use ; as τ6 γΧάφν, cave, την νίφα^ snow. 2. Names οι festivals are used only in the plural; as ra ΤΙαναθηναια, τα ΟΧύμπια, Ιίυθια, Νεμέα, "ΐσθμία. §^ 55, 50.] ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 71 § 53, ΙαάβοΙΙηαΜβ nouns are those Avhich have only one form for all tlie genders, numbers, and cases. Such are, Al. The names of the letters of the aJphahet ; as το ίΐλφα, του άλφα, τα, άλφα. 2. The cardinal numhers^ from 5 to 100 inclusive ; as ol π€ΡΤ€^ ai nevTC, τα ireuTCy tovs π^ντ€, Λ 3. All foreign names not Grecized ; as 6 κΜμ, του Αδά/ζ, τω j Αδά/χ, τον Αδά/χ, Adam. Ι (L4. Χρεώι/, το, necessity^ destiny^ fate, — ©//xty, in the expres- sion θ€μί9 cLuai, ίο be lawful. § 56. In the folloΛving Catalogue, assumed or imagmary nominatives are written in capital letters. άφων (ΑΗΔΩ), όνος, η, nightingale, regular. Also, G. άηχους, V. άη^οΐ. Αΐδης (Α-ΙΣ), ου, ό, Hades, regular. Also, G. "A'i^os, D. "A'ibt, A. ""Αϊδα. άλκη (ΑΛα), ης, η. Strength, regular. Also, D. άλκί. ίΐλφιτον, ου, το, meal, bread, regular. xAlso, το άλφι. Epic. άλως, ω Or ωος, η, threshing-floor. αναξ, ανακτος, 6, sovereign, regular. When employed to invoke a god, it has V. αναξ or ava ; elsewhere the vocative is always like the rominative. avhpanobov (ΑΝΔΡΑΠΟΥΣ), ου, το, slave, regular. Also, D. PL avhpa πόδβσσι. Epic. Λνηρ, 0, man, vir, G. άνΕΟος ανδρός, D. avepi avbpl, A. avepa άνδρα, V. ciuep, Dual N. A. Λ . avepe avhpe, G. D. avepoLV av^polv, Plur. άν€ρ€ς αν3ρ€ς, G. άνερων ανδρών, Τ), άνδράσι, Α. άνερας άνδρας, Λ^, άν€ρ€ς ανδρ€ς. (In this Avord, e is dropped, and the lingual δ is in- serted between ν and ρ . ) ΑπόΧλων, 6, Apollo^ G. Αττόλλωνο^. D. ΑττόΧλωνί, A. ΑποΧλωνα Αττολ- λω, Λ . '\\ποΧλον. "Αρης, υ, Ares, G.^Apeo?, rarely "Αρ€ως, T>/'Apei "Apei, Α. "Ap^a "Αρη "Αρην, Υ. "Αρ€ς. — Epic, G. "Αρηος, D. "Αρηί, Α . "Αρηα. ΑΡΝ-, ό, η, lamb, G. άρνός, D• αρνί, Α. αρνα. Dual apve apvclv, PI. Ν. αρν€ς, G. άρνών, D. άρνάοΊ, Α. αρνας. άστη ρ, ίρος, 6, Stella, star, regular; but D. PI. άστράσι, after the analogy of ττατράσι from πατήρ. Βάττος, ου, 6, Battus, regular. Herodotus has G. Βάττβω. βους, 6, η, bos, OX, cow, G. βοός, D. βοΐ, A. βουν (Poetic βόα), Υ. βου. Dual Ν. Α. βΟ€, G. D. βοοίν, PL Ν. βόες, G. βοών, Ι), βουσι, Α. βόας βους. — Boeotic PL G. βουών, D. βουεσσι, found in inscrip- tions. βρίτας, €ος, το, a wooden image. Poetic. γαίττηρ, η, venter, belli/, G. γαστερος -γαστρός, D. y αστέρι γαστρί, Ώ PL γαΌ-τράσί rarely Ύαστηρσι ; the rest is regular. 72 φ INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 56. Ύ€Χως, ωτοζ or ω, 6, laughter. γΧάφυ, τ6^ cave, defective. Q^^.yovv (ΓΟΝΑΣ, ΓΟΥΝ), το, genu, hiee, G. yovaros, D- yomrt, Dual N. A. yovare, G. D. yovaroLVy PI. N. A. yovara, G. yovarcuv, D. yovaai. Poetic forms, G. yovpos, D. yovvi, PI. N. yovva, G. γοΰ- νωι/. The Ionic changes ο into ου in the inflection, as G. yovvaros. ypavs, η, old ιυο7ηαη, G. ypaos, D. ypat, A. ypavv, Ύ. ypav, Dual JN. A. V. ypae, G. D. ypaoiv, PI. N. ypaes, G. ypacov, D. ypaval, A. γραίί, V. ypaey. Ihe Ionic changes α into τ; ; yρηυs, ypηv, It fur- ther uses τ^ϋ for ην ; thus, ypηυs, ypηV' yvvrj (ΓΥΝΑΙΗ), ?7, ivoman, wife, G. y^z^ai/cos•, D. yvvaLKL,'A. yvvoLKa, V. yvvai, Dual N. A. Y. yvvoLKe, G. D. yvyaiKoiv, PI. N. γυί/αίΐί^?, G. yvvaiKCuv, D. yvvat^L, A. yui^ai/cas', V. y waives. The comedians sometimes inflected yuj/jj after the analogy of the first declension ; as την yvvTjv. dats (ΔΑΣ), ιδοί, η, fight, regular. Also, D. bat ^άκρυον, ov, TOy lacryma, tear, regular. Also, το ^άκρν, PI. D. da- κρνσι. Poetic. ^€μας, το, body, defective. Αημητηρ, η, Demeter, G. Αημητ€ρο9 Αη μητρός, D. Αημητζρι Αημητρί, . Α. Αημητ€ρα Αη μήτρα, V. Αημητ€ρ. χδο/3υ (ΔΟΡΑΣ, bovpas, ΔΟΡ ΔΟΥΡ), το, spear, G. αόρατος, D. δορατί, Dual Ν. Α. δόρατ€, G. D. ^οράτοιν, PL Ν. Α. αόρατα, G. δοράτων, D. dopacTL, Poetic forms, G. dopos, Epic ^ονρατος, δονρός, D. δορι, δο'ρβι, Epic dovpl, ^ονρατι. Dual Epic hovp€, PI. N. δορ/;, Epic δου- ρα, δουρατα, G. δονρων, D. dovpeaai. δορνξόος (ΔΟΡΥΕΟΣ), ου, 6, spear-polisher, regular. V. dopv^L δώμα, ατός, το, domus, house, regular. Also, το δω, Epic. €γκατα, τα, entrails, D. PL eyKaai. eyxeXvs, vos, η, anguilla, eel, regular. The Attic has PL N. iyxe XeLs, G. βγ^^ελβωζ/. €ΐκών (ΕΙΚΩ), όνος, η, image, regular. Also, G. ζΐκονς, Α. €ΐκω, PI Α. €ΐκονς. €τησί.αί, ων, οί, etesian or trade ivinds. ζί^Ζβνς (ΔΙΣ), ό, Zeus, G. Διό?, D. Δα', Α.. Αία, Ύ. ZeC. Also Ζην, G. Ζηνός, D. Ζηνί, Α. Ζηνα, Poetic. In Doric inscriptions we find D. Δί, and AltL ηρα, τα, used only in the expression ηρα φύρ^ιν, to show favor, to humor, ηρως, ωος, 6, hero, regular. Also, D. ηρω, A. ;7ρω, A. PL ηρως, Θαλής, ου, 6, Thalcs, regular. The early Attic authors use G. θά λβω. In later Greek it is inflected Θαλής, θάλητος, -ητι, -ητα. Θίμις, ώος, Ionic ως, Doric ιτος, Epic ιστός, η, justice, right. θΕράπων (ΘΕΡΑ^), οντος, 6, attendant, TegxAdir. Also, Α. θ^ραπα, PL Ν. θεραπ^ς. θνγάτηρ, η, daughter, G. θνγατ€ρος θνγατρός, D. 6vyaT€pL BvyaTpl, Α. OvyaTepa, Poetic θύγατρα, V. 6vyaT€p, Dual Ν. Α. Λ^. OvyaTepe, G, D. OvyaTepoLV, PL N. θνγατ€ρ€ς, Poetic θvyaτp€ς, G. θυγατ€ρων, Puetic uvyuTpcbv, D. θνγατράσι, A. θυγατέρας, V. θυγατέρες, ίδρώί, ώ or ώτος, 6, sudor, sweat. § 56.] ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 73 'ίκτϊνοζ (ΙΚΤΙΣ), ου, 6, a kind of hawk, regular. Also, A. ΙκτΙνα, Ν. PL lktIu€s. Ιχώρ (ΙΧΩΣ), ώροζ, ο, ichor, regular. Also, A. Ιχώ. Ιωκη (Ιί2Α), ης, ή, din of battle, regular. Also, A. Ιώκα. κάλως {κάλος), ω, later Epic ωος, cable. Also, PL N. κάλοι, A. κάλους, ^κάρα (ΚΡΑΣ, ΚΡΑΑΣ, ΚΑΡΗΑΣ), Ionic κάρη, το, head, G. κάρητος κράατος κράτος καρηατος, also της κρατάς, Ό. κάρητι κράατι κράτί καρηατι κάρα κάρτ], Α. κάρα κάρη, το or τον κράτα, PL Ν. καρηατα κάρα, G. κράτων, D. κρασί, Α. καρηατα κράατα, τους κρατάς. Later Greek η κάρη, της κάρης ; latest ή κάρα, της κάρας. ΚΑΡΗΝΟΝ, ου, το, head, regular. κίρας, ατός, αος, €ος, το, cornu, horn, Kkabos (ΚΛΑΣ), ου, ό, bough, regular. Also, D. κλαδί, PL D. κλά- icXetff, Ionic κΚηΐς, old Attic κλης, η, c lav is, ley, lock, G. κΚ^ώός κΚηΐ- δο? κλη^ός, regular. Also, Α. κλζϊν, PL Ν. Α. κλβίί. Ελ€Ομβροτος, ου, ό, Cleonibrotus , regular. Herodotus ha^ G. KXeo/i- βρότ€ω. κνύφας, το, darkness, G. Epic κνίφαος κν6φ€ος, Attic κν^φους, later κνβφατος. κοινωνός (ΚΟΙΝΩΝ), ου, 6, partaker, regular. Also, PL Ν. κοινων€γ, Α. κοινωνάς, κρέας, ατός, αος, €ος, το, car Ο, meat, κριθή, ης, η, barky, regular. Also, Epic το κρ7. κρίνον (ΚΡΙΝΟΣ), ου, το, lily, regular. Also, PL κρίνεα, D. Kpiveai, κρόκη (ΚΡΟα), ης, ή, looof, the filling, regular. Also, A. κρόκα, PL N. κρόκες, κυκεων, ώνος, 6, a kind of mixed drink, regular. Also, A. κυκειω Epic. ^ κύων (KYN-), 6, η, can is, dog, bitch, G. κυνός, D. κυνι, A. κυνα, Ύ, ί κύον. Dual Ν. Α. κυνε, G. D. κυνοϊν, PL Ν. κύνες, G. κυνών, D. κυσι, Α. κύνας. κωας, κώεος, το, fleece. λάας λάς, 6, lapis, stone, G. λάος λάου, D. λά'ί, Α. \άαν λάν, rarely λάα, PL D. λάεσσι. λέων, οντος, ό, leo, lion, regular. Also, Epic Ν. λΐς, Α. λίί/, later Epic PL Ν. λίες, D. λίεσσι. λιβάς (AISE^), άδος, η, drop, regular. Also, Α. λίβα. λίπα (Α1Ψ), το, fat, oil, chiefly in the Epic expression λιττ' ίλαίω, ivith olive-oil, ΛΙΣ, 6, fine linen, Ό. λιτί, A. λΙτα, defective. μάλης, armpit, a defective Genitive used in the phrase υπό μάλης, under the arm, that is, clandestinely, μάρτυς, later μάρτυρ, 6, witness, G. μάρτυρος, D. μάρτυρι, A. μάρτυρα, rarely μάρτυν, PL N. μάρτυρες, G. μαρτύρων, D. μάρτυσι, A. μάρ- τυρας, Ύ . μάρτυρες, μάστιξ (ΜΑΣΤΙΣ), ιγος, η, scourge, whip, regular. Also, D. μάστΐ, Α. μάστιν. μήλον (ΜΗχ\ΑΣ), ου, το, sheep, regular. Also, G. PL μηλάτων, rare. (^Λ'^ητηρ, η, mater, mother, G. μητερος μητρός, Ώ. μητερι μτγτρί, Α. μη- 4 74 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 5β T€pa, V. μητ€ρ, PL N. μητ€ρ€ς, G. μητέρων, Τ), μητρασι, Α. μητεραί, V. μητ€ρ€ς. ιιητρω^, ω or cooy, 6, maternal uncle. Μίνως, ω or ωος, 6, Minos. μνκης, ον or ητος, 6, musJiroom. β vavs^, vdos, η, η avis, ship, regularly inflected like ypavs. The Attic inflection is as follows ; vavs, G. ζ/βώ^. D. νηΐ, A. ναυν, Dual G. D. v€olu, PL N. z/^es, G. vecoi/, D. νανσί, A. ι/αί)?. The Ionic changes α into η, as ζ^τ^ί)? ι/7;ό? νηΐ νηα : it has also G. veas, A. j/ea, Dual G. D. veoiv, PL N. i/eey, G. ν^ων, A. i/eay. NISE', η, nix, 5?ιοΐϋ, A. ζ^/φα, defective. νοοζ νους, 6, mind, regular. In later Greek it is inflected like βονς. OldiTTOvs (ΟΙΔΙΠΟΔΗΣ), 6, (Edipus, G. Οιδίποδος, Οΐδίπον, Oldiwobdo, ΟιδιτΓοδα, ΟΖδίττόδβω, D. Οιδίττοδί, Οιδιττόδ//, Α. Οιδίποδα, Οΐδίπονν, Οΐδίπόδην, V. ΟίδίτΓου, Οιδιττόδα. δϊί ois, 6, η, Ο vis, sheep, G. oios olos, D. ο'ά oU, A. otV οΓζ/, PL N. otey 0L€S OLS, kjt. οίων οίων, JJ. οεσι, Α. ota? otas" οις. ονεφον (Ο'ΝΈΙΡ ΑΣ), το y dream, G. ονείρατος, D. ονείρατι, PL Ν. Α. ονείρατα, sometimes όνειρα, G. ονειράτων, D, ονείρασι. Also, το δι/αρ. opvLs, Ιθος, 6, η, bird, regular. Also, PL Ν. opveis όρνις, G. ορνεων, 02Σ-, ΟΣΣΟΝ, τ-ό, eye, Dual Ν. Α. δσσ€, G. δσσωζ/, D. οσσοις οσσοι- σι, defective. ονδας, -δέος, το, floor, '- ους (ρυας), Doric ως, το, ear, G. ωτός, D. ωτί, Dual Ν. Α. ωτβ, G. D. ωτοιν, PL Ν. Α. ωτα, G. ωτων, D. ώσί. όφελος, το, advantage, defective. πατήρ, 6, pater, father, G. πατέρος πατρός, D. πατερι πατρί, Α. ττατβ- ρα, Υ. πάτερ, PL Ν. πατέρες, G. πάτερων, D. πατράσι, Α. πατέρας, V. πατέρες. ΤΙάτροκλος, ου, 6, Patrodus, regular. In Homer also G. Πατροκλήοί, A. ΤΙατροκληα, Υ. nar/jo/cXets', as if from a nominative in -e?;?. πάτρως, ω or ωο?, ο, patruus, paternal uncle. Ιΐνύξ (ΠΥΚΝ-), η, Pnyx, a place of meeting in Athens, G. Ιίυκνός, D. ΐΐυκ,νί, A. ΙΙυκνα. Later forms ΙΙνυκός, ΤΙνυκί, Πνύκα, πόλις, €ως, ή, city, state, regular. Epic also G, πόληος, D. πόληί, PL N. πόληες, A. ποληας, ΤΙοσειδάων ΐίοσειδών, 6, Posldon, G. ΤΙοσειδάωνος ΤΙοσειδωνος, D. Πο- σ€ΐδάονι ΙΙοσειδώνι, Α. Ποσειδάωι/α Ποσ€ΐδώζ/α ΐίοσ-ειδώ, Υ. Πό- σβιδοζ/. πρεσβυς, 6, old man, Α. πρεσβυν, Υ. πρεσβυ, PL Ν. πρεσβηες (in Hesiod). The rest is from the regular πρεσβύτης. πρεσβυς, εως, 6, ambassador, PL Ν. Α. πρέσβεις, G. πρέσβεων, D. πρεσβεσι. The rest is from πρεσβευτής, ου. πρόσωπον (ΠΡ0Σί2ΠΑΣ), ου, το, face, regular. Also, PL Ν. πρόσω* πάτα, D. προσο^πασι. πρόχοος (ΠΡΟΧΟΥΣ), όου, η, ewer, regular. Also, D. PL πρόχουσι» πυρ (ΠΥΡΟΝ), πυρός, πυρί, το, fire. Also, PL πυρά, G. πυρών, D. . πυροίς, fires, watch fires. ρόδον (ΡΟΔΟΣ), ου, ro, rosa, rose, regular. Also, D. PL ροδεεσσι^ later Epic. § 57.J ADJECTIVES. 75 Σαρπη^ών, ouos, 6, Sarpedon, regular. Also, G. Έαρπη^οντος^ D. Έαρπηδοντί, V. Σαρπη8ον, Epic. στ/9, aeos or σητός, 6, moth, σκώρ (ΣΚΑΣ), τ6^ G. σκατός. Τ), σκατί. σμώ^ίξ, tyyoi, η, wale. σπίος or σττείο? (ΣΠΕ-), specus, grotto, G. σπ^Ιονς, D. σπ^ϊ, PL G. σπ€ίων, D. σττεσσί, σπψσσι, Epic. σταγώι/ (ΣΤΑα), oVoy, 17» ^/*ojt?, regular. Also, N. PL σταγ^^. στ/χοί (ΣΤΙΗ), ου, ό, row, regular. Also, G. της στίχός, Ό. τ^ στιχί, &C. Έτρ^ψίά^ης, ον, 6, Strepsiades, regular ; but Υ. Στρ€ψία^€9. (τωτηρ, ηρος, ό, preserver, regular ; but V. σωτ€ρ, *■ τάν, used in the expression ω τάν, Ο tliou ! ταως (ΤΑΟΣ), ώ, 6, pavo, peacock, regukr. Also, Ν. PL ταοί, τίγρις, LOS or ώος, tiger, PL Ν. τίγρεις, G. τίγρεων; the rest is regular. Τισσαφέρνης, -νους, -vet, -νην, -νη, 6, Tissaphernes. ύδωρ (ΎΔΑΣ, υδος), το, ivater, G. ύδατος-, Ώ. νδατί (rare vBei), PL Ν. Α. νδατα, G. υδάτων, D. ί;δασί. υΜ? (ΎίΕΥΣ, ΎΐΣ), ου, 6, regular. Also, G. νΐεος, Ώ. υΐεϊ, &C., like βασιλεύς. Also, Epic, G. υϊος, Ώ, υα,_ Α. via, Dual νΙε, PI. Ν. νίες, Ό. υΐεσί or υΐάσι, Α. υΐας. νπαρ, το, waking, opposed to οναρ. υσμίνη (ΎΣΜΙΣ), ης, η, battle, regular. Also, D. υσμινι, φάρυγξ, γγος, η, gullet, regular. Poetic, G. φάρυγος, φθοίς φθοίς, 6, a kind οί cake, Α. PI. φθοΐς. $ΐ.χείρ, χειρός, η, hand, regular ; but D. Pi. χερσί. Poetic forms, G. χερός, D. χερΙ, Dual χεροΐν. χελίδών (ΧΕΑΙΔΩ), όνος, η, swallow, regular. Also, Υ. χελώοΊ, χ^οίις χοός, ό. a measure, inflected like βοϋς. — The form χοενς has G. χοώς (χοεως), Α. χοά, Α. PL χοάς Χους, α heap of earth, is always inflected like βους, χρεως (ΧΡΑΟΣ), το, debt, G. χρεως. The rest is from the regular χρέος ; PL N. x\. χρεεα χρεα. Xpo:>s, χρωτός, 6, skin, Ό. χρωτί, Α. χρώτα. ΧΡ0Υ2 is inflected like βους, as G. χροός. The dative χρω, in the expression εν χρω, fol- lows the analogy of πλω from πλους. ADJECTIVES. .,^ 5T. 1. In adjectives of iAree eniZm^^, the fem- inine is always of the first declension ; the mascu- line and neuter are either of the second or of the third. 2. Adjectives of two endings are either of the second or of the third declension ; the feminine is the same with the masculine. 76 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 58. 3. Adjectives of one ending are either of the first or of the third declension. As to gender, they are either masculine, feminine, or common. ^ 58. 1. Most adjectives in 09 have three end- ings, 09, 'η, ov ; as σοφό^, σοφή J σοφόν, Wise, When 09 is preceded by a vowel or by p, the feminine ends in α ; as αξως, άξια, άξων, worthy ; μάκρος, μακρά, μακρόν, long. All participles in os are declined like σοφός ; as βονλ€υόμ€νος, βονλ€νομ€νη<, βονΚ^νόμ,ζνον, 2. Many adjectives in 09, especially such as have the accent on the antepenult, have only two end- ings, 09, ov ; as 0, ?; ησνχ^ος, το ησυγρν, quiet ; ο αΧο- γος, αλογον, irrational. 3. Adjectives in 009 have η in the feminine, ex- cept when 009 is preceded by ρ ; as άττΧόος, άττλόη, άττΧόον, simple ; αθρόος, αθρόα, άθρόον, crowded to- gether, in a heap. 4. Adjectives in ω9 have two endings, ω9, ων ; as 6, η €νγ€ως, το ευθέων, fertile ,* ά^ηρως, άηΎ\ρων, un- fading. 5. Adjectives in εος, ea, eov, and 009, όη, όον, may be contracted ; as ^χρυσβος ^χρυσούς, 'χρνσβα ^χρυσή, 'χ^ρνσεον 'χ^ρνσοΰν, goldcil ^ αρ^ύρβος αργυρούς, argen- teus, of silver, silvery ; άττΧόος άττΚους, simple. 0.6• Examples. Singular. Ν. σοφός σοφή σοφόν ήσυχος ήσυχον G. σοφον σοφής σοφού ήσυχου ήσυχου D. σοφω σοφιι σοφω ήσυχο) ήσυχω A. σοφόν σοφήν σοφόν ήσυχον ήσυχον V. σοφ€ σοφή σοφόν ήσυχ€ ήσυχον ^58.] ADJECTIVES • 7 Dual, N.A.V . σοφώ σοφά σοφώ ησνχω ησυχω G. D. σοφοίν σοφαΐν σοφοΊν ησνχοιν ήσύχοιν Plural Ν. σοφοί σοφαί σοφά ησνχϋ ι ήσυχα G. σοφών σοφών σοφών ήσυχων ήσυχων D. σοφοΐς σοφαΐς σοφοΊ,ς ησυχοις ήσύχοΐί A. σοφούς σοφάς σοφά ήσυχους ήσυχα V. σοφοί σοφαί σοφά ήσυχοι ήσυχα Singular, N. μακρός μακρά μακρόν άξιος άξια άξιον G. μακρόν μακράς μακρού αξίου άξιας άξιου D. μακρω μακρά μακρω αξίω «|ί« «έ^ν A, μακρόν μακράν μακρόν άξιον άξίαν άξιον V. μακρέ μακρά μακρόν αξίζ αξία άξιον Dual N.A.V. μακρω μακρά μακρω άξίω άξια άξίω G.D. μακροΐν μακραιν μακροΐν άξίοιν άξίαιν άξίοιν Plural N. μακροί μακραί μακρά άξιοι αξιαι άξια G. μακρών μακρών μακρών αξίων αξίων άξιων D. μακροίς μακραΐς μακροίς άξιοι ς άξίαις άξίοις A. μάκρους μακράς μακρά άξιους αξίας άξια V. μακροί μακραί μακρά άξιοι αξιαι άξια Singular, N. €νγ€ως €νγ€ων άγηρως άγηρων G. €ϋγ€ω βι/γβω άγηρω άγηρω . D. evyeco evyeco αγηρω άγηρω A. €νγ€ων €ϋγ€ων άγηρων άγηρων V. €ϋγζως €ϋγ€ων ay η ρ ως άγηρων Dual N. A.V. €ϋγ€ω εϋγεω άγηρω άγηρω G.D. evyecuv evyccuv άγηρων άγηρων Plural N. €vy€Co €ϋγ€ω άγηρω άγηρω G. ζϋγεων €ϋγ€ων άγηρων άγηρων D. €νγ€ως €νγ€ως άγηρω ς άγήρως A. ζϋγβως βυγεω άγηρω ς άγηρω V. €ϋγ€ω €ϋγ€ω άγηρω άγηρω 78 Ν. G. D. Α. INFLECTION OF WORDS. ■ Contracts. Singular. β 58. χρνσεος χρνσ^ου χρνσίω χρυσ€ον χρυσούς χρυσού χρυσω^ χρυσουν Ν. Α. G. D. χρυσ€ω χρυσω χρυσίοιν χρυσοίν Ν. G. D. Α. Ν. G. D. Α. χρνσ€οι χρυσοί χρυσ^ων χρυσών χρυσβοις χρυσοΊς χρυσ€ους χρυσούς Ν. Α. άργυρεω άργυρ^^ G. D. άργυρ€θίν άργυροΐν Ν. G. D. Α. Ν. G. D. Α. χρυσ€α χρνο-η χρυσβας χρυσής χρυσία xpycrfi χρυσεαν χρυσήν Dual. χρυσ€α χρυσά χρυσ^αιν χρυσαίρ Plural. χρυσ^αι χρυσοί χρυσ€ων χρυσών χρυσεαις χρυσαίς χρυσ€ας χρυσας αργυρεοί άργυροι άργυρ€ων αργυρών άργυρ^οις άργυροίς άργυρ€ους αργυρούς άπλόος άπλους άπλόου άπλου άπΧόω αττλώ άπλόον άπΧουν Singular, αργυρεος αργυρούς αργυρίου αργυρού άργυρίω άργυρώ άργύρ€ον άργυρουν αργύρια αργυρά άργυρίας αργυράς άργυρβα αργυρά άργυρίαν άργυράν Dual. χρυσεον χρυσουν χρυσίου χρυσού χρυσεω χρυσω χρυσεον χρυσουν χρυσεω χρυσω χρυσίοιν χρυσοίν χρυσεα χρυσά χρυσίων χρυσών χρυσίοις χρυσοίς χρύσεα χρυσά jj/^ αργυρεον άργυρουν αργυρίου αργυρού άργυρίω άργυρω άργύρεον άργυρουν Ν. Α. άπλόω άπλώ G. D. άπλόοιν άπλοΐν αργυρεα αργυρά αργυρεω αργυρω άργυρίαιν άργυραϊν άργυρίοιν άργυροΐν Plural. άργυρεαι αργυροί άργυρε α αργυρά αργυρίων αργυρών αργυρίων αργυρών άργυρίοις άργυροΐς άργυρίοις άργυροΊς άργυρίας αργυράς άργύρεα αργυρά Singular. άπλόη άπΧή άπλόον άπλουν άπλόη ς απλής άπλόου άπλου άπλόη άπλη άπλόω άπλω άπλόη ν απλή ν άπλόον άπλουν Dual. άπλόα άπλα άπλόω άπλώ άπλόοιν άπλοΊν άπλόοιν άπλοΐν \ ζ) 59.] ADJECTIVES. 79 ADJECTIVES. Plural άπλόαί άττλαί απλό α άπλα άπλόων άττΚων άπλόων απλών α.πλόαις άπλαΐς άπλόοις άπλοΊς απλό ας άπλας άπλόα άπλα Ν. άπλόοί άπλοϊ G. άπλόων απλών D. άπλόοις άπλοϊς Α. άπλόονς άπλονς JVoTE. In Attic \ΛτίίθΓ8 and in the Poets, many adjectives in ος, which commonly have three endings, aie found with only two ; as 6, ή €λ€νθ€ρος, το Ιλενθζρον, free ; κλντος Ίππο3άμ€ία, the illustrious Hip- porlomla. Even comparatives and superlatives are sometimes found with only two endings ; as η άπορώτ^ρος, η 8νσ€ρβολό)τατος, ολοώτατος ο^μη, α very offensive odor, πρώτιστον υπomηv, first sight, {Horn. Hym, 4, 157•) ^ S9*tl. There are but three adjectives in a? ; ττα? ττάσα τταν^ or αΊτα<ζ αττασα ίίτταν, αΙΙ^ inflected like Ιστάς ; μβΧα^; μεΧαινα μεΧαν, black ,* and τάΧας τάΧαι- να τυΧαν, unfortunate^ inflected like μ€λα^. λ2. Participles in ας have three endings, άς, άσα, αν '^ as ο ιστα<;, η ίστασα, το ισταν, erecting• 3. Adjectives in e^? have three endings, et9, εσσα, ei/ ; as 'χαρίβυς, η γαρίβσσα^ το γαρίβν, graceful. '4. Participles in e/9 have e/?, βίσα, ev ; as ό τίθβίς^ η τίθ€ΐσα, το τίθεν, placing^ putting. 5. Participles in ων have three endings, ων, ουσα^ ov ; as ο βονλβυων, η βονλβνονσα, το βουλβνον, Coun- selling. Those in άων, εων, όων are contracted throughout ; as φίλβων φίλων, φίΧβονσα φΐΚουσα, φιΧεον φίΧονν, (jr. φιΚεοντος φίΧουντος. 6. Adjectives in ων have two endings, ων, ov ; as ο, η τΓβττων, το ττεττον, ripe. ■"' But 6κων efcovaa i/cov, willing, and its compound άκων άκουσα ακον, unwilling, have three endings, and are inflected like βονΧβύων. 80 INFLECTION OF WORDS. • [^ 59 1. Participles in 01/9 have three endings, ού<ς, ου- σα, όν ; as ο hihov<^, η SiBovaa, το 8lSov, giving. ■' 8. Participles in νς have three endings, U9, νσα, ύν \ as hetfcvv^, η δβίκννσα, το Ζβίκνυν, showing, 9. Participles in ώ? have three endings, ώ?, via, 09 ; as βββονλβυκως^ η βββονλευκυΐα, το βββοϋλβνκος^ having counselled. 10. Contract adjectives in 779 have two endings, ης, €9; as 6, η αΧηθης, το αΧηθβς^ true '^ Ίτρηνης, Ι^ΐΟ^ nus, with the face downward. 11. Adjectives in νς have three endings, ^9, eia^ ν ; as ο <γΧυκύς, η yXvKeca, το y\v/cu, dulcis, SWeet; βραχύς, b r e V i s , 5/iori . ' "t •; 12. There are but two adjectives in ην ; 6 τβρην, η Tepeiva, το Tepev, G. τβρενος^ tener, tender ^ and ο αρσην OX αρρην, τ)) αρσβν OV appev, G. αρσβνος ΟΥ άρρε- νος^ male. 13. Adjectives in ^9 have two endings, ^9, c ; as 0, η ΪΖρνς, tIj iSpt, knowing. I cU. Examp] Singular. es. N. ίστάί ίστασα ίστάν ^i\as μ4\αινα μζΧαν G. icrravTos ίστάσ-ηζ Ιστάντος μ€λανο£ μίΚαίνης μζΧανοί D. Ίστάντι ίστάσ-τ] Ιστάντι μ€λανί μζλαίντ) μβΧανι A. ίστάντα ίστασαν Ιστάν μ€\ανα μίΧαιναν μξΧαν V. ίστάί Ιστασα ίστάν μίΧαν μ^Χαινα μίΧαν Dual Ν. Α. ν . Ιστάντε Ιστάσα Ιστάντβ μ€\αν€ μίΚαίνα μζ\αν€ G. D. ίστάντοιν Ιστάσαιν ίστάντοιν μίΚάνοιν μ^Καίναιν μίΚάνοιν ^59.J ADJECTIVES. 81 Plural. N. G. D. A. V. N. G. D. A. V. laravrei ιστασαι ισταντα ίστάντων ίστασων Ιστάντων ίστασί ίστάσαις Ιστασί ίστάντας ίστάσας ίστάντα ίστάρτ€9 Ιστασαί ίστάντα ι μίΧανζζ μίΧαιναι μ4\ανα μζΚάνων μ€\αινων μελάνων μ^Χασι μίΚαίναις /χελασ* μ€\αναζ μέλαινας μεΧανα μί\αν€ς μίΧαιναι μέλανα Singular, XapLCLS χαρίεσσα χαρίερ τιθείς τιθείσα Τίθεν χαρίεντος χαρ^σσηζ χαρίεντος τιθίντος τιθείσης TiOivTos XapUvTL xapuaajj χαρίεντι τιθίντί τιθεΐστ) τιθεντί χαρίζντα χαρίεσσαν χαρίβν τιθ^ντα τιθεΊσαν τυθίν χαρίεν χαρίεσσα χαρίβν rt^ety τιθεΐσα riueu Dual. Ν,Α,Ύ, χαρί€ντ€ χαριίσσα χαρίεντβ G. D. Ν. G. D. Α. V. XapuvTOLV χαρί^σσαιν χαριεντοιν Plural, XapUvres χαρίεσσαι χαρίβντα χαρύντων χαριεσσών χαριεντων χαρίεσι χαριεσσαις χαρίεσι XapUvras χαρύσσας χαρίεντα XapUvres χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα TLUivre ηθείσα τιθεντε Τίθεντοι,ν τιθείσαιν τίθίντοιν τίθεντζς τιθζίσαι τιθίντα τιθίντων τιθεισων Τίθεντων τιθβισί Τίθείσαΐζ τιθείσι Τίθεντας τιθείσας τιθβντα TLUevTcs τίθεΐσαι τιθίντα Sing ular. Ν. βονΚευων βουΚενουσα βονλζυον G. βονλζνοντος βονΚζνονατης βονλενοντος D. βονλεύοντι βονλζνονστι βουλενοντι Α. βουλενοντα βουΚζνονσαν βούλενον V. βουλζνων βονλεύονσα βονλξνον Dual, Ν. Α. V. βουλβυοι/τβ βονΚενονσα βονΚςνοντς G. D. βουΚζνόντοιν βουΚζυονσαίν βονΚενόντοιν Plural, βονλενονσαι βουΚενοντα βουλευονσών βουλενόντων βονΚευονσαις βονΚευουσι βονλενούσαζ βουΧευοντα βουΚενουσαι βουΧεύοντα 4* Ν. βουλίνοίτεί G. βον\€υόντα>ν D. βουΧίΰονσι Α. βον\(νοι>τα! V. βουΧΐνοντα ττεπων 7Γ€7Γ0ΐ/ Ίτίπονος ττεπονος irinovi πεπόνι πεπονα πεπον πεπον πεπον πεπονξ π(πον€ πεπόνοιν πεπόνοιν πεπονες πεπονα πεπάνων πεπόνων πεποσι πεποσι π^πονας πεπονα πεπονες πεπονα 82 INFLECTION OF AVORDS. [§ 59. Singular. -N. bibov9 ^ώουσα hZov heiKvvs heiKvvaa hciKvvv G, bibovTos ^ώονσψ ^ώόντος deLKvvvros ^€ΐκνυσηζ deLKvvvTos D. δίδόι/τ6 dibovarj ^ώόντί beLKvvvTL deLKvvarj deLKuvvri A. didovra δώουσαν διδοι/ deiKvyvra δβίκννσαν dcLKuvv V. didovs δώουσα didov deiKvvs ^€ίκννσα heiKvvv Dual, N.A.V. hibovTC dibovaa δώ6ι/τ€ deiKvyvre ^€ΐκννσα deiKvyvTe G. D. didovTOLV bibovaaLV bibovroiv beLKvvvTOLv ^^ικνύσαιν beiKvvvTOiv Plural, N. bibovres ^ώονσαι ^ώόντα deiKvyvres ^ζίκννσαι heiKvyvra G. δώόντων δώονσων ^ώόvτωv 8€ίκΐ'ύντων δ€ίκννσών ^€ίκννντων D. δίδοΟσί διδουσαίί διδουσί deiKvvaL deLKvvaais deiKvvaL Α. δώόντας dibovaas 8ώόρτα deiKPvvras deiKvvcrag heLKvvvra V. bibovT^s bibovaai δώόντα beLKvvvres δεικνϋσαι deLKvvvra Singular, N. β€βονλ€νκώς βεβονλβνκνΊα βεβουλ^νκός G. β€βονλ€νκότθ9 βζβονλζνκνίας β€βονλ€νκότο9 Ό, βζβονλζυκότι β€βονλ€νκνία β€βονλ€νκότί Α. β€βονλ€νκότα β€βου\€νκνΊαν β€βου\€νκός V. β€βουλ€υκώ$ β€βουλ€νκνϊα β€βονλ€νκός Dual. Ν. Α. v.. β€βονΧ€νκότ€ βεβονλβνκνία β€βονλ€νκ6τ€ G. D. βζβονΧ^νκοτοίν βζβουλευκνίαιν β€βονΚ€νκ6τοιν Plural, Ν. β€βονλ€νκότ€9 β€βονλ€υκν'ίαι β€βον\€υκότα G. β€βονλ€νκότων β€βονλ€νκνίών βξβονΚζνκότων D. β€βονλ€υκ6σι β€βονλ€νκνίαίς β€βονλ€υκόσι Α. β€βονλ€νκότα9 β€βουλ€νκνίαί β€βονΧ€υκότα V. β^βουλ€νκότ€ς β€βονλ€υκνΐαι βζβουλζνκήτα C Contracts. Singular, Ν. άΚηθής αληθές G. άληθεοζ αληθούς άληθεος αληθούς D, αληθί'ί άληθεϊ αληθεϊ άληθεϊ Α. αληθία αληθή αληθές V. αληθές αληθές ^ί >y.j ADJECTIVES. Dual N.A.V. αΚηθίζ άληθτ^ άΧηθ€€ άΧηθή G. D. αΚηθ^οΐν άΚηθύίν άΧηθεοίν όΧηθοίν Plural Ν. άληθ€€ί αΚηθζΙς άΧηθβα άΧηθη G. αΚηθίων αληθών αΚηθύων αληθών D. άληθ^σί άΧηθβσί Α. ά\ηθ€ας ' άληθ€7ς άληθ^α αληθή V. αληθείς άληθ€Ίί άΧηθ€α αληθή Singular, Ν. yXvKvs y\vK€7a yXvKv G. yXvKeos yXvKelas yXvKeos D. yXvKe'i ykvKel y\vK€La γλνκ€Ϊ yXvK€i Α. yKvKvv y\vK€iav yλvκv V. yXvKv yXvKcia Dual yλvκv Ν. A.V. y\vK€€ yXvKeia yλυκ€€ G. D. y\vK€Oiv y\vK€LaLV y\vK€Oiv Plural, Ν. yXvKees yXvKelg y\vK€7aL yλvκ€a G. y\vκ€ωv y\vK€LQ)V yλvκ€ωv D. yXvKeaL yXvK€LaL9 yXviceaL Α. yXvKeas γλνΚΕΪς y\vK€Las yλvκ€a V. y\vK€€s y\vK€7s yXvKclaL yλvκia Singular, Plural ^N. iBpLS tbpL Ibpies tdpia G. 'βρω ς 'Id ρ LOS Χορίων Ι^ρίων D. (ίδρα) ιδρΓ (ίδρα) ιδρΓ "ώρισι Ίδρίσι A. ϊδριν tdpi 'idpLas 'idpis Ibpia V. βρι βρι XdpLes "ώρια Dual. Ν . A.V. ιδρί€ G. D. IbpLOLV Θ3 Ο Participles of Contract Verbs. Singular. NT. G. D. A. V. τιμαων τιμών τιμαονσα τιμωσα τιμαον τιμωι τιμάοντος τιμώντος τιμαονσης τιμώσης τιμάοντος τιμώντας τιμάοντι τιμώντι τιμαούση τιμώση τιμάοντα τιμώντα τιμάονσαν τιμώσαν τιμάον τιμάων τιμών τιμαονσα τιμώσα τιμάον τιμάοντι τιμωντι τιμών τιμών 84 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§59. N.A.V. τιμάοντ€ τιμωντ€ G. D. ημαόντοίν τιμώντοιν Ν. G. D. A. V. N. G. D. A. V. τιμαοντ€ς τιμωρτ€5 τιμαόντων τιμωντων τιμάονσι τιμωσι ημάοντας τιμώντας τίμάοντ€5 Τίμώντ€9 Dual. Τίμαούσα τιμώ σα τιμαονσαιν τιμώσαιν Plural, τιμάονσαι τιμώσαι τιμαονσών τιμωσών ημαονσαις ημώσαις τιμαονσαζ Τίμώσας τιμάονσαι τιμώσαι τιμαοντζ τιμωντζ τιμαόντοίν τιμωντοιν τιμάοντα τιμώντα τιμαόντων τιμωντων τιμάονσι τιμώσι τιμάοντα τιμώντα τιμάοντα τιμώντα Singular, φίΧίων φιλών φΐλεονσα φιλούσα φιλίον φιλούν φιλίοντοζ φιλονντος φιλβονσηζ φιλονσης φιλβοντος φιλονντος φιλ^οντι φιλονντι φιλ€ονστ] φιλονστ] φιλεοντι φιλονντι φιλεοντα φιλονντα φιλίονσαν φιλούσαν φιλεον φιλούν φιλ€ων φιλών φιλίουσα φιλούσα φιλίον φιλούν Dual. N.A.V. G.D. φίλεοντε φιλονντε φιλβόντοιν φιλονντοιν φιλεονσα φιλούσα φιλεονσαιν φιλονσαιν φιλ€οντ€ φιλονντβ φιλεόντοιν φιλονντοιν Plural. Ν, φιλ€οντ€ς φιλονντ€ς φιλ^ονσαι φιλονσαι φιλ€οντα φιλονντα G. φιλεόντων φιλονντων φιλ€ονσών φιλονσών φιλ^όντων φιλονντωι D. φιλύονσί φιλονσι φιλβονσαιςφιλονσαις φιλ^ονσι φιλουσι Α. φιλζοντας φιλονντας φιλ€ονσας φιλονσας φιλ^οντα φιλονντα V. φιλ€οντ€ς φιλονντβς φιλίονσαι φιλονσαι φιλ^οντα φιλονντα Singular. Ν. δηλόων δηλών δηλόονσα δί:)λονσα G. δηλόοντος δηλονντος δηλοονσηζ δηλονσης D. Βηλόοντι δηλονντί δηλοονστ] δηλονστ] Α. δηλόοντα δηλονντα δηλόονσαν δηλονσαν V. δηλόων δηλών δηλόονσα δηλονσα Ν. Α. V. δηλόοντ€ δηλουντ€ G. D. δηλοόντοιν δηλονντοιν Dual. δηλόονσα δηλονσα δηλοονσαιν δηλονσαιν δηλόον δηλονν δηλόοντος δηλονντο% δηλόοντι δηλονντι δηλόον δηλονν δηλόον δηλονν δηλόοντ€ δηλονντ€ δηλοόντοιν δηλονντοιν ^ 60.] ADJECTIVES. 85 Flurah N. δη\6ορτ€ς δηλουρτ€ζ δηΧόουσαί ^ηΧουσαί δηΧυορτα ^ηΧουντα G. ΒηΧοόι^των δηΧούρτων δηΧοονσών δηΧονσών δηΚοόντων δηΧούντων D. δηλόουοΊ δηΧοϋσι δηΧοονσαις δηΧούσαΐ5 δηΧόονσι δηΧοίσι Α. δηΧόοιττας δηΧονντας δηΧοούσα: δηΧούσας δηΧόοντα δηΧονντα V. δηΧόοντες δηΧοϋντ€£ δηΧόονσαί δηΧονσαι δηΧόοντα δηΧονρτα Note 1. The endings -η€ί9, -ήβσσα, -Tjev are contracted into-^^s, -ήσσα, -ην] as ημψίς τιμιις^ τιμψσσα τιμησσα, ημψν τιμην^ valuable^ G. τιμψντος τιμηντος, τιμηίσσηζ ημησσηί, τιμψντο^ τιμηντοί. The endings -oety, -όβσσα, -oei/ are contracted into -ovs, 'ονσσα, -ουν ; as πΧακυ€ίς πΧακους, nXaKoeacra ττΧακονσσα, πΧακόερ πΧακουν, βαΐ, G. nXaKoevTos πΧακουρτοί, πΧακο€σση£ πΧακονσσης, πΧακΟ€ντος πΧα- κουντος. Note 2. In the Ionic dialect, the feminine of adjectives in vs com- monly ends in ea or ίη ; as βαθνς βαθία or βαθίη, βαρνς βαρ€α, θηΧυς 6ηΧ€α, ήμισυς ήμίσ€α. Note 3. (a) In the Epic dialect, the feminine of adjectives in vs sometimes is like the mascuhne ; as o, ή rjdvs, 6, ή θηΧνς, 6, η που- Xvs, in Homer. (b) In Homer, ημαθόβίς, ai/^e/xoeiy, apyLvoeis, noLTjets sometimes seem to agree with feminine nouns. Note 4. The Poets sometimes form feminines in eia from adjec- tives in Tjs ; as μοννο-^^νης μονρογ€ν€ία, ηδυβπηζ ήδυ€π€ία, θ€σπί€πη9 6€σπί€π€ία, So ripiyiveia, Θάλεια, δνσαριστοτόκ€ία. Note. 5. The feminine of adjectives and participles in ά?, ct?, ovs, vs, ων is formed by annexing a to the root, and changing r into σ ; as Ιστάντα Ιστάνσα Ιστασα, χαρίβντα χ^αρίβνσα )(αρί€σσα, τιθβντα ηθβνσα τίθ€ΐσα, δώόντα δώόνσα δώονσα, deiKvvvra δ^ικνννσα δζίκννσα, €κόντα €κόν(τα ίκονσα. The feminine of adjectives in vs is formed by annexing α to the root, and lengthening the radical e into €l ; the Ionic however retains e be- fore a or 77 ; as yXvKvs^ γλυκεία, Ionic yXvKea or yXvκ€η, ^ eO. CompoM/ziZ adjectives, of which the last component part is a substantive, follow the declension of that substantive. Compound adjectives of the third declension may have a neuter^ when it can be formed by dropping s•, or by changing ω into. ο. Ε. g. €νχαρίς, t, G. ltos, graceful ; ev, xapLs. cveXnis, t, G. tSoy, hopeful ; eu, iXnis. abaicpvs, v, G. vos, tearless ; a-, δάκρν. €νδαίμων, ov, G. ovos, happy ; €v, δαίμων, μ€γαΧητωρ, op, G. opos, magnanimous ; μ€yas, ητορ» 86 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 61. (a) The compounds of noXts generally have G. ibos ; as anoXiSy i, G. ατΓολιδο?, vagabond, (b) The compounds of πατήρ, μη τ η ρ, and φ ρ η ν change η into ω; as άπάτωρ, ορ, άρητωρ, ορ, G. άπάτορος, άμητορος ; σώφρων, ον, G. σώφρονος. — Homer has η evnarepcLa. (c) The compounds of γελώ? and Kepas are ehher of the second or third declension ; as φίΧόγξλωζ, ων, G. φιλόγελω or φί\ογ€Χωτο9 , τρίκ€ρως, ων, G. τρίκερω or τρικίρωτος. (d) The compounds of πους, foot, have -ουι^ in the neuter, after the analogy of contracts of the second declension ; as λίπους δίπονν, G. δίτΓοδοί, bipes, two-footed; τρίπονς τρίπουν, tii^es, three-footed. (e) In Homer, the following compounds of άνηρ end in -eipa', η βωτίάναρα, ή avTiaveipa, η κυδιάν€ΐρα. § 61• Adjectives of one ending are generally derivative or compound : -as G. ados, ό,η ; Xoyds, picked; φυγάς, fugitive; ίππάς, μανιάς, σπο- ράς, δρομάς. -ας G. ου, δ ; γ^ννά^ας, noble; μονίας, solitary, -α? G. αντος, 6 ; άκάμας, indefatigable, -apG, αρος ; 6, η μάκαρ, η μάκαιρα, happy, the only example. -ην G, ηνος ; 6, ή άπτην, unfledged, the only example. -7^9 G. ου ; 6 εθελοντής, €υώπης, τριακοντουτης. Some of them have a feminine form in -ις G. ώας ; as ή €υώπις, τριακοντουτις, -ης G. ητος, 6, η, formed from nouns in -ητος or -ητης', adprjs, άκμης, ημιθνης, γυμνής, χ€ρνης.'— Αργής, -ητος Or -6Τος, white, ΐίενης (π€ν€στης), η π^νησσα, poor, -ίς G. ώος, 6, η, commonly feminine ; 6, η αναΧκις, ή πατρίς, patria, country, μητρίς, -ζ G. κος, γος, χος, 6, η ; 6 βΧάξ, -ακός ; άρπαξ, -άγος ; ηΧιξ, -ικος ; €πίΤ€ξ, -κος ; ποΧυάϊξ, -ικος. -υ ς G. υ^oς, 6, η ; ν€ηΧυς, €πηΧυς. -ψ G. πος, 6, ή ; αΙγίΧιψ, παραβΧώψ. -ων G. ωνος, 6 ; α'ίθων, burning, bright, -ωςG. ωτος, 6, η ; άβρώς, άγνώς, ignotus, unknown» Note. Adjectives of one ending are sometimes used as neuters in the genitive and dative ; very rarely in the nominative plural ; as eV π€νητι σώματι, in a poor body; μανιάσιν Χυσσημασι, with raving madness ; δρομάσι βΧ^φάροις, rapidly moving eyelids, ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. § 63. The following list contains most of the anomalous and defective adjectives. βριθύς, eia, ύ, heavy, regular. Also, το β pi, rare. 8υσδάμαρτος (δυσ-, dapap), του, unhappily married. ΕΛΑΧΥΣ, small, fem. ^Χάχαα, <5» 62.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 87 ΕΛΕΓΧΥΣ, infamous, PL N. iXeyxe^s. ερίηρος, dear, regular. Also PI. N. €ρίηρ€ς, A. ερίηρας, Epic. €ρνσάρματ€ς, oi, A. ζρνσάρματας, cliariot-di'awing. fvs r]vs, neuter eu ηύ cv, good, G. βηος, A. ivv ηνν, PI. G. εαωζ/, ο/* good things (neuter ? ). ζωός (ΖΑΟΣ), living, regular. Also ζώς, TjXe, wandering in mind, a defective vocatiΛ-e used in the Homeric ex- pression φρ^νας η\€, madman. Full form ^Xee from η\€Ος. T]pLyev€La, η, bom, or daughter, of the morning, βαΚ^ια, ή, rich, sumptuous, as a feast. θαμ€(τι, τοΙς, θαμ€ας, τους, frequent. καλλιγύναίκα, την, producing fair women. \ίς, η, smooth, as a rock. μβγας (ΜΕΓΑΛΟΣ), μ€yάλη, fteya, magnus, great, large; for its in- flection, see below. jLteXe, in the expression ω /leXe, my good friend or sir. ττίων (ΠΙΗΡ),/ί/ί, ricA, regular. Also, feminine TrUipa. πλίως πλ^ων, pi en us, /w//, borrows its feminine from πλ/ο? ; thus πλβως πλεα ττλίων. In composition it has only two endings, ω?, ων. πόλναρνι, τώ, rich in sheep, owning many sheep. ΤΓολνς τΓοΧλη πολν, much ; Ionic πολΧός ποΧΚη ποΧλόν ; Epic ttoXvs τγο- Χ^Ία ποΧύ ; for its Attic inflection, see below. The syncopated ot nXees, rovs πλεα?, in the Epic dialect, have the 'signification of the comparative TrXetoi/es•, nXeiovas, more. πότνια or πότνα, η, venerable, revered, την πότνιαν πότναν, al πότνιαι. πράος, meek, borrows many of its parts from the regular πρανς ττρα^ία ττραν, G. πρα€ος ; for its inflection, see below. ττρίσβυς (ΠΡΕΣΒΟΣ, ΠΡΕΣΒΗΡ), old^ aged, regular. Also, feminine ττρίσβα and πρ€σβ€ίρα. ττρόφρων (ΠΡΟΦΡΑΣ), kirtd, compliant, regular. Also, feminine πρό- φρασσα. padios, α, ov, easy, regular. Also, to pa, rare. σώς (ΣΑΟΣ), 6, ή, salvus, safe, rarely η σα; neuter σων, Α. σων, Α. PL σώς, neuter PL σα. Regular form σώος, a, ov. υψικβράτα, την, high-peaked, as a rock. φρούδος, η, ov, gone, used in the nominative ; φρούδου is found in the genitive absolute (Soph. Aj. 264). ΧΕΡΗΣ, χ^ρηος, Ώ. χ^ρηϊ, Α. χ^ρηα, PL Ν. χ^ρη^ς, neuter χ^ρηα or X€p€La, with the signification οί χ€ρ€ίων, icorse.. Inflection of /xeyas•, ποΧύς, and πράος• Singular. N. μ€γας μζγάΧη μ€γα ποΧνς ττοΧΧη ποΧ.ν G. μεγάΧου μ^γάΧης μζγάΧον ποΧΧον ποΧΧης ττοΧΧοΰ Ό. μεγάΧω μεΎαΧτ] ^eyaXo) ττοΧΧω ττοΧΧη ττοΧΧώ Α. μβγαν μ^ΎοΧην /xeya ττοΧνν ποΧΧην ποΧύ V αεγάλβ μ€γάΧη ^εγα 88 INFLECTION OF ■WORDS. [5)63. Dual, N. A. V. μ€γάλω μ€γάΧα μεγάλω G. D. μεγάλοίν μεγάλαιν μεγάΧοιν Plural, Ν. /icyaXot μ€γάλαι μεγάλα Gr. μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων D. μεγάλοίς μεγάλαις μεγάλοις Α. μεγάλους μεγάλας μεγάλα V. μεγάλοι μεγάλαί μεγάλα G. D. Α. V. Singula?'*. TTpaos ττραεΐα πραον πράου ττραείας πράου πράω πραεία πράω πραον πραεϊαν πράον πράζ ^ραεϊα πραον πολλοί πολλαί πολλά πολλών πολλών πολλών πολλοϊς πολλαϊς πολλοίς πολλούς πολλάς πολλά Plural. πράοι πραεις πραειαι πραεα πραεων πραειών πραεων πράοις πραίσι πραείαις πραεσι πράους πραεϊς πραείας πραεα πράοι πραείς πραεΙαι πραεα Dual, Ν. Α. V. G. D. πραω πράοιν πραεια πραείαιν πραω πράοιν COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. ^ 63. 1. Adjectives in 09 are compared by drop- ping 9, and annexing repo^ for the comparative, and τατο9 for the superlative. If the penult of the posi- tive be short, ο is changed into ω. Ε. g. σοφός, ivise, σοφώτερος, wiser, σοφώτατος, wisest αξίος άξίώτερος άξιοίτατος, idorthy ατΤμος ατιμότερος ατιμότατος, dishonorable σεμνός σεμνότερος σεμνότατος, venerable In general, ο remains unaltered when it is preceded by a mute and a liquid ; as πυκνός πυκνότερος πυκνότατος, dense ; πικρός πικρότερος πικρότατος, bitter. (a) The comparative and superlative of adjectives in εος are con- tracted after they have been formed according to the preceding rule ; as πορφύρεος πορφυρούς, πορφυρεώτερος πορφυρώτερος, πορφυρεώτα- τος πορφυρώτατος, purple. (b) Some adjectives in ο? are compared by dropping ος and annex- ing αίτερος αίτατος ; as μέσος μεσαίτερος μεσαίτατος, middle. So εϋδιος ευ^ιαίτερος ευδιαίτατος, 'ι8ιος Ιδιαίτερος Ιδιαίτατος, 'ίσος Ισαίτερος, όρθιος όρβιαίτερος όρθιαίτατος, ο^\ηος οψιαίτερος όψιαίτατος. § 63. J COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 89 (c) A few adjectives in os drop ος and annex repos τατος ; as πβραϊ- os nepairepos nepairaros, on the other side. (d) Adjectives in όος, and many others in os, drop ος and annex earepos eararos ; here oearepos οεστατος are contracted into ονστβρος ονστατος ; as άπλόος άπλονστεροζ απλούστατος, simple. So αΐ^οϊος αΐδοίβστατος, άκρατος άκρατ€στ€ρος άκρατβστατος, άνιηρός άνιηρζστΕρος, ^ρρωμίνος €ρρωμ€ν€στ€ρος €ρρωμ€ν€στατος. Those in ό ο y are sometimes compared according to the first rule ; as ξυπνοος €υπνοώτ€ρος, €νχροος €ύχροώτ€ρος. (e) Some adjectives in ος are compared by dropping ος and annex- ing ίστ€ρος ίστατος ; as \άΧος \αλίστ€ρος Χαλίστατος, loquacious. So οψοφάγος, μονοφάγος, πτωχός. 2. Adjectives in υς are compared by dropping 9, and annexing τβρος τατο<; ; as οξν<; οξύτβρος οξύτατος, sharp. 3. MeXa^, blacky and τάΧας^ unfortunate, annex Τ€/?09 τατος to the root ; thus, μβΧας μβΧάντβρος μβ- Χαντατος, ταΧας ταΧαντερος ταΧαντατος. οΑ. Adjectives in ης and βος shorten these endings into €9, and annex τβρος τατος ; as άΧηθης άΧηθβστβ' ρος αληθέστατος, true ,* 'χαρίβυς γαρίέστβρος γαρίεστα- τος, graceful. 5. Adjectives in ων annex βστβρος βστατος to the root ; as σώφρων σωφρονβστβρος σωφρονβστατος, dis- creet. 6. Some comparatives and superlatives are de- rived from substantives, adverbs, prepositions, or verbs ; as, βασιΚ€νς, king, βα(ΓΐΧ€υτ€ρος, more Mngly, a greater king, βασιλεύ- τατος, most kingly, a very great king, ανω, up, ανώτερος, upper, ανώτατος, uppermost. νπ€ρ, over, νπερτβρος, higher, υπέρτατος or ύπατος, highest, φαίνω, to shine, φαάντερος, brighter, φαάντατος, brightest, 7. The comparative and superlative may be formed by means of the positive and μαΧΧον, magis, more, μάχυστα OX ττΧβΐστα, maxime, most ; as, 90 INFLECTION OF WORDS. f§ 64. μαλΧον φί\ος^ μάλιστα φίλος • μάλλον σώφρων, ττλβίστα μο^ροί JS'OTE 1. In the Epic dialect, ο may be changed into ω even when the penult of the positive is long ; as κακοξΕίνώτερος, οίζϋρώτ^ρος οϊζϋ- ρώτατος, λάρώτατος. Even the Attic Poets sometimes change ο into ω after a mute and a liquid ; as €ντ€κνώτ€ρος, 8νσποτμώτ€ρα. Note 2. Substantives, pronouns, and participles, as such, do not admit of different degrees in their signification. The comedians how- ever compare avros ; thus, αυτός, himself, αντότ€ρος, himselfer, αυτό- τατος, ipsissimus, himself est . They compare also proper names ; as Ααναός Ααναώτατος, Danaus. Note 3. In the Epic dialect, some superlatives end in ατός; as μέσος μεσάτος or μεσσατος. See also νέος, μυχός, ττρό, εξ, πυθμην, υπέρ, below (^65). Note 4. In a few instances, new comparatives and superlatives are formed from adjectives which are already in the comparative or super- lative degree ; as πρώτος πρώτιστος. See also αγαθός, εξ, κακός, μι- κρός, below (^ 65). @4. 1. Some adjectives in ν 9 drop this ending, and annex Ιων for the comparative, and ιστός for the superlative; as ηΒνς τβίων^ ηΒιστος^ suavis, pleasant. 2. Some adjectives in u? form the comparative by dropping νς and annexing σων ; as τταχύς ττασ- σων, pinguis, fat. (^ 13, 10.) See also βαθύς, βραδύς, γλυκύς, ΕΛΑΧΥΣ, ΉΚΥ2, μακρός, ταχύς^ below (ζ) 65). 3. Comparatives in ων are inflected according to the following example : Singular, N. η^ίων ηδΤον G. η^ίονος η^ίονος D. ηδίονι η3ίονι A. ήδίονα η^ίω Tjdiov V. ήδίων • Dual, rjbLOV N. A. Tjdiove G. D. ηδίόνοιν § 65.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 91 Plural N. rjb LOVES Tjdlovs ηδίονα ηδίω G. ήδωνων ήδίόρων D. ηδίο&ί ηδίοσι A. ηδίονας η Βίους ηδίονα ηδίω V. rjdioves ήδίονς ηδίονα ηδίω ^j The endings -pm, -oi^e?, -ovas drop ν and are then contracted into -ω, -ovs. Note. K/aaru?, κρεσσων or κρείσσ-ων, changes a into e Avhich in the Attic dialect becomes €l. The Doric comparative is κάρρων form- ed from κρατνς as follows ; κρασσων, καρσων, κάρρων. Μ eyas, μεζων οτ μείζων, and oXtyos, όλίζων, imply ΜΕΓΥΣ, ΟΛΙ- ΓΥΣ, whence μεσσων ολίσσων, μεζων όλίζων. (^ 10, ζ, σσ.) § 65. The. comparison of an adjective is anomalous when that adjective has, or implies, more than one positive. The comparison is defective when the adjective has no posi- tive in use. The following list contains nearly all the adjectives Λvhich are anomalous or defective in their comparison. ayaOos, good, Comparative άμείνων, βελτίων, κρείσσων or κρβίττων. Χω ίων \ω ω ν, Ionic κρεσσων, Doric κάρρων, Poetic αμεινότερυς, ββΧτερος, Χωϊτερος, άρείων or άρεωτερος, φερτερος ; Su- perlative άριστος, βίΧτίστος, κράτιστος, Χωϊστος Χω- στός, Poetic άyaθωτaτoς, βίΧτατος, κάρτιστος (Epic), φερτατος, φβριστος, Doric βίντιστος. ciyxL or ayxov, near, ayxoTEpos, ayxoTaTos or ayχLστoς. αισχρός (ΑΙΣΧΥΣ), ugly, αίσχίων, sometimes αΙσχρότερος, αίσχιστος. άXy€ιvός (ΑΑΓΥΣ), painful, άXy€lvότ€poς, άXy€lvότaτoς, sometimes άXyίωv aXyιστoς. ανω, up, άνό^τερος, upper, ανώτατος, uppermost. άοώός, bard, άοώότατος, very celebrated. αρπαξ, rap ax, rapacious, άpπayίστ€poς, άpπayίστaτoς, άφαρ, quicJdy, άφάρτερος, quicker. άφηΧιξ, having passed the meridian of life, άφηΧικίστερος. άφθονος, abu7idant, άφθονίστερος, άφβονίστατος, or άφθονώτερος, άφ6ονύ)τατος. άχαρις, disagreeable, αχάριστε ρος.. βαθνς, deep, βαθύτερος, βαθύτατος. Epic βάσσων, βάθ ιστός. βασιΧεύς, king, βασιΧεύτερος, more kingly, a greater king, βασιΧεντα- τος, most kingly, a very great king. βΧάξ, stujjid, βΧοκώτερος, βΧακώτατος or βΧακίστερος, βΧακίστατος. βραούς, tardus, bard US, slow, βραδύτερος, βραδύτατος, Epic βράσ- σων, βάρδιστος. γεραιός, old, venerable, yεpaίτεpoς rarely γεραιότερος, yεpaίτaτoς. γΧνκύς, dulcis, sweet, γΧυκύτερος, yXvκύτaτoς, Epic y\vKiav, rarely γΧύσσων. 92 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [^ 65. διάκονος, SCI vant, diaKovearepos, more attentive to his duti/, a better ser- vant, διττλόοί, duplex, double, 3ίπλ6τ€ρος, in the New Testament. ΕΑΑΧΥΣ, ίλάσσων, ελάχιστος, see μικρός. ΕΛΕΓΧΥΣ, infamous, ζλβγχίστος. έξ (^χς), ex, out of, έσχατος, last; also €σχατώτ€ρος, εσχατωτατος. ζξω, out, εξώτερος, exterior, oute7\ εξώτατος, extremus, exti- mus. επιΚησ-μων, forgetful, επίλησμότατος. επίχαρις, agreeable, επιχαριτώτερος , επιχαριτώτατος . εταίρος, friend, εταιρότατος, most friendly, a very good friend, the best friend. (Κ^Ιχβρός (ΕΧΘΥΣ), hostile, εχθρότερος, εχθρότατος, or εχθίων, εχθιστος, *ΗΚΥΣ, ησσων, ηκιστος, see κακός, ήρεμα, quietly, ηρεμεστερος, more quiet, ηρεμεστατος, most quiet. ήσυχος, quiet, ησνχαίτερος or ησνχώτερος, ήσνχώτατος. ^\ κακός (ΚΑΚΥΣ), bad. Comparative κακίων (Poetic κακώτερος), χειρών (Poetic χερείων, χερεωτερος, χειρότερος), ησσων (Ionic εσσων); Superlative κάκιστος, χείριστος. Poetic ηκιστος. καΧός (ΚΑΛΑΥΣ), beautiful, καΧλίων, κάΧλιστος. κάτω, down, κατώτερος, lower, κατώτατος, lowest, lowermost, ΚΕΡΔΥΣ, crafty, κερΒίων, κερ3 ιστός, ΚΗΔΥΣ, dear, κη^ιστος. κλέπτης, thief, κΧεπτΙστερος, more thievish, a greater thief, κΚεπτίστα- τος, most thievish, a very great thief. κν^ρός (ΚΥΔΥΣ), glorious, κυρίων, κυλιστός. κνων, canis, dog, κνντερος, more impudent, κνντατος, most impudent, μάκαρ, happy, μακάρτερος, μακάρτατος. μακρός (ΜΑΚΥΣ, ΜΗΚΥΣ), long, μακρότερος, μακρότατος, also μάσ- σων, μηκιστος, μέγας (ΜΕΓΥΣ), magnus, great, μείζων (Ionic μεζων), μέγιστος. μέσος, medius, middle, μεσαίτερος, μεσαίτατος (Epic μεσάτος, μεσσα- τος). /Lit/cpo?, 5m<7/Z, Comparative μικρότερος, εΧάσσων or εΧάττων, μείων (Poetic μειότερος), εΧαχιστότερος ', Superlative μικρό- τ ατός, εΧάχιστος Poetic μεΐστος. μνχός, recess, μνχατος or μνχοίτατος, innermost, Epic. νέος, no ν us, 7iew, young, regular. Poetic superlative νεατος, Epic νείατος, last, lowest. οικτρός (ΟΙΚΤΥΣ), pitiable, οίκτίων, οΧκτιστος or οικτρότατος, οΐς, ο vis, sheep, οΐότερος, more sheepish, a greater sheep. όΧίγος (ΟΛΙΓΥΣ), little, in the -plurol few, όλίζων later όΧιγώτεροί (Sextus), όλίγιστος. It borrows also the comparatives and superla- tives of μικρός. οπίσω, behind, όπίστατος, hinder most. οπΧα, arms, όπΧότερος, younger, οπΧότατος, youngest. παΧαιός, old, παΧαίτερος or παλαιότερος, παλαιότατος. παχύς, ])inguis, fat, παχύτερος, παχύτατος, Epic πάσσων» πάχιστος» πένης, ητος, poor, πενεστερος, πενεστατος, πεπων, ripe, πεπαίτερος, πεπαίτατος. ^ 66.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 93 πίων,/αΐ, πιότ€ρος, πίότατος. πλ€ον€κτης, a covetous person, ιν)^€ον€κτίστατος . πλησίος, near^ π\η(ηαίτ€ρος, πΧησιαίτατοζ, or πΧησ^στβρος, π\ησΐ€- στατοζ. πόλυς, much, πλβιωζ/ or πΧίων, πΧ€Ϊστος, plus, plurimus. πρ^σβυς, old, πρεσβύτερος, Ίτρεσβυτατο^'Έ^^ιο. πρεσβίστος. πρό, prae, before, πρότερος rarely προτεραίτερος, prior, former, πρώ- τος (προ-ατος), πρώτιστος, Doric πράτος, ^riraus, first, πρόσω, forward, προσώτερος, προσώτατος. προϋργου, to the purpose, προυργιαίτερος, προυργιαίτατος. πνθμην^ bottom, πνματος, hindermost, last. Epic. ράδως (ΡΑ-ΥΣ), Ionic ρηΐδως, easy, ράων, ραστος, Ionic ρηΐων, ρηϊ- στος. Epic ρηΐτερος, ρηΐτατος, ΡΙΓΥΣ, frigid us, cold, dreadful, plyLov, ρίγιστος. σπουδαίος, serious, earnest, σπονδαιεστερος, σπονδαιεστατος or σττου- δαιότερος, σπουδαιότατος. σχολαϊος, slow, σχοΧαίτερος or σχοΧαωτερος, σχοΧαίτατος. ταχύς (ΘΑΧΥΣ), swift, ταχίων commonly θάσσων, τάχιστος. υβριστής, an insolent person, υβριστότερος, υβριστότατος. υ-γιης, healthy, regular. Doric comparative ϋγιώτερος. υπέρ (ΎΠ-), super, over, υπέρτερος, higher, υπέρτατος Οΐ ύπατος, high" est, superior, supremus or summus. υπό, sus-, under, ύστερος, later, ύστατος, latest. Ύ^ΥΣ, high, υ^\τίων rarely υψίτερος, ύψιστος. φαίνω, to shine, φαάντερος, brighter, φαάντατος, brightest. φίΧος (ΦΙΑΥΣ), friendly , dear, beloved, φιΧώτερος φιΧώτατος, φιΧαίτζ- ρος φιΧαίτατος, φίΧτερος φίΧτατος, or φιΧίων φίΧιστος. φώρ, fur, thief, φώρτατος, very thievish, a very great thief. ψευδής , false, ψευδεστερος οτ ψευδίστερος, ψευδίστατος. ώκύς, swift, ώκύτερος, ώκύτατος Epic ώκιστος, ocior, ocissimus Comparison of Adverbs. ^ 66. 1. The comparative of an adverb de- i rived from an adjective is the same with the neuter singular of the comparative, and the superlative is the same with the neuter plural of the superlative, of that adjective ; as σοφός — σοφώς, ivisely, σοφώτερον, more wisely, σοφώτατα, most wise- ly, very wisely οξύς — οξέως, sharply, δεύτερον, οξύτατα άΧηθης — άΧηθως, truly, άΧηθεστερον, αληθέστατα . χαρίεις — χαριεντως, gracefully, χαριεστερον, χαριεστατα σώφρων — σωφρόνως, discreetly, σωφρονεστερον, σωφρονεστατα ηδύς — ηδεως, pleasantly, ηδϊον, ηδιστα ταχύς — ταχέως, quicJdy, Θάσσον or θάττον, τάχιστα φΆ. Primitive adverbs generally make the com- 94 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ ^"^ 68. parative in τβρω, and superlative in τατω ; as ανω, up, ανωτβρω ανωτατω. So ayxov or αγχί, near, ά-γχοτβρω or ασσον (Epic άσσοτ€ρω, Doric άσσων), άγχοτάτω or α'γχιστα ; αττο, fctr, άπωτ€ρω, άπωτάτω ; iyyvs, near, €γγντ€ρω βγγυτάτω, eyyvre ρον eyyvrara, or eyyiov eyy ιστα ; e/cay, y<2?', €καστ€ρω, ίκαστάτω ; evbov, within, in, €ν^οτ€ρω, €Ρ^οτάτω ; κάτω, down, κατωτέρω, κατωτάτω ; ττέρα, further, heyond, π€ραίτ€ρω or π€- paiTepov, π^ραιτάτω ; πόρρω, far, πορρωτβρω, πορρωτάτω ; τηΧυυ or τή- λβ, τηΧοτβρω, τηΚοτάτω. Note 1. Some adverbs of the comparative degree end in ω? ; as ^aXencus χαΚ^πωτέρως, αληθώς αΚηθ€στ€ρως, καΚώς καλΧίόνως, μeyάkωs μ€ίζόνω9. Superlatives in ως are very rare. Note 2. The following adverbs are more or less anomalous in their comparison : Ιθύ, straightforward, Ιθυντατα. μάλα, very, μάλλον (Doric μάλλων), more, rather, μάλιστα, very much, especially, νυκτωρ, noctu, nightly, by night, ννκτιαίτερον, farther hack in the night, that is, early in the morning, ννκτίαίτατα, very early in the morning, πολλάκις, often, πλεονάκις, πλβιστάκίς. πpoϋpyov, to the purpose, πρoυpyLaLτepov, more to the purpose, πpoυpyLaί- τατα, very much to the purpose. PRONOUN AND ARTICLE. ^ &7. There are eight kinds of pronouns ; the personal, reflexive, reciprocal, possessive, interroga- tive, indefinite, demonstrative, and relative. The personal, reflexive, and reciprocal are usually called substantive pronouns, the rest, adjective. :^ 68. 1. The perso7ial pronouns are εγώ, ego, /, νω, we tWOj both of US^ ημβΐς^ We^ σιί, tU, tllOU, σψώ, you two, both of you, ύμβϊς, you, ?, is, he, σφεΖ?, they, αύτό<;, ipse, he, himself Singular. N. iya) συ (0 αυτός αυτή αυτό G. f> €μου, μου σου ον αυτού αυτής αυτού D. €μοί, μοί σοι οι αυτω αυττ} αυτώ A. e/xe, μ€ σ€ € αυτόν αυτήν αυτό ^69.] PRONOUN AND ARTICLE. 95 Dual N.A. νώ σφώ σφωε αυτω αυτά αυτω G. D. νών σφων σφωΐν Plural αυτοίν αυταΐν αυτοΐν N. G. D. ημ€ΐς ημών ημίν υ/χα? υμών ύμΐν σφύς, σφεα σφών σφίσι αυτοί αυτών αυτοίς αυταί αυτών αύταϊς αυτά αυτών αυτοΐς A. Λ ημάς υμάς f σφας, σφεα αυτούς ι__ι» • αυτάς αυτά ^ .'Ί (Χ 2. Αυτός with the article before it means idem, the same, and is often contracted with the article ; as του αυτού, ταυτοΰ J τω αυτω, ταυτω 5 tjj αυτί], ταυττ), (S 20.) ' ' ' ' .^^When this contraction takes place, the neuter has ο or oi/ ; thus, το αυτό, ταυτό or ταυτόν. Note 1. According to the ancient grammarians, the nominative of the third person singular was t, is, ea, id, he, she, it. Note 2. The forms σφω^ σφωΐν belong to the Epic dialect. I Σφω€ is always an accusative. — Σφεα is neuter. {7 Note 3. The particle ye is often appended to the pronouns of the first and second persons for the sake of emphasis ; as εγωγβ, egomet, / indeed, for my fart ; συγ e, t u t e , t u t e m e t , thou indeed. j^k^ 69. The reflexive pronouns are Ιμαυτού, of my- self, my own, σβαυτού, of thyself thy own, and εαυτού, of himself, his own. They are compounded of the * oblique cases of the personal pronouns and αυτό<ζ. Singular, Plural ημών αυτών ημΐν αυτοΊς [αύταϊς) ημάς αυτούς {αυτάς) υμών αυτών υμΙν αύτοϊς [αυταΊς) υμάς αυτούς (αύτάς) εαυτών, ΟΓ σφών αυτών ίαντ-οίς, -αΐς, ΟΓ σφίσιν αύτ-οίς (-αΓ?) ίαυτάν έαυτην ίαυτό €αυτ-ονς, -άς, -ά, ΟΓ σφάς αύτ-ούς {^'άς) G. ζμαντου €μαυτης D. εμαυτω €μαυτη Α. ζμαυτον €μαυτην G. σεαυτοΰ σεαυτης ID. σ€αυτω σεαυτη Α. σ£αυτόν σεαυτην G. ι Α. ζαϋτου εαυτής ίαντω εαυτή εαυτόν εαυτην ε 96 INFLECTION OF Λν0Κϋ8. [^^ 70 - 72. '■ Σ€αντον and iavrov are often contracted ; thus, G. σαντου σαντης^ αντου αυτής, αυτών, D. σαυτω σαυττ}, αύτω αυττ^, αυτοίς αϋταΐς, Α. . σαυτόν σαυτην, αυτόν αυτήν αυτό, αυτούς αϋτάζ αυτά. Also, G. Dual αυτοΊν. ^ 70. The reciprocal pronoun is άχλτϊλων, of one another^ formed from αΧλος. The nominative case and the singular number are of course wanting. Plural. Dual. G. άΧΚηΧων άΧΚηΧων άλΧηλων άΧληΧοιν άΧΚηΚαιν άΧληΚοιν D. aWrfkoLS άΧΚηΧαις akXrjXoLS aXXrjXoLV άΧΧηΧαιν άΧΧηΧοιν Α. άΧΧηΧους άΧΧηΧας αΧΧηΧα άΧΧηΧω άΧΧηΧα άΧΧηΧω ^ yi. The possessive pronouns are derived from the personal pronouns. They are inflected like adjectives in 09. €μ05, η, όν, me US, my, mine : νωΐτ€ρος, a, ov, of us two., our, j Epic : ημ€τβρος, a, ov, noster, our, ours. σόί, ση, σον, tuus, thy^ thine : σφωΐτ€ρος, a, ov, of you two^J your. Epic : νμ€Τ€ρος^ a, ov, V ester, your^ yours. OS, η, 6v, SUUS, Λΐ5, ΛβΓ, JierS^ zVs, ^Epic: σφίτ^ρος, a, ov, suus, their ^ theirs, ^ 73. 1. Ύ\\^ interrogative pronoun τ/9, quis? who ? ivhich ? what ? always takes the acute on the ί. The indefinite pronoun rh, aliquis, quid am, ulhis, any, certain, some, takes the accent on the last syllable. Interrogative. Indefinite. *^ ^ \ - Singular. M. F. ' N. M. F. N. N. TiS τι τ\ς τ\ G. τίνος., τον τίνος, του τίνος, τον τίνος, του D. TLVi^ τω τίνι, τω TLVL, τω τινΙ, τω A. τίνα τι Dual. TLva τι N.A. TLve TLve G. D. τίνοιν TLVOIV §§ 73. 74.] PRONOUN AND ARTICLE. 97 Plural. N. TLV€S τίνα TLves TLva G. τίνω^ τίνων • τίνων Τινών D. τίσι TL(ri τισϊ τισι A. TLvas τίνα Tivas Tivaf ασσα or αττα 2. The indefinite demonstrative' Belva, such-a- one, is declined as follows : N. G. D. A. Sing, 6, rj, TO Belva delvos delvt delva Plur. ol, al, τα Reives Βαίνων delvas Sometimes it is fomid indeclinable ; as τον belva, (Arisf. Th, 629.) § 73. The article 6 (originally TOS) is declined in the following manner : Singular Dual Plural. M. F. Ν. Μ. F. Ν. Μ. F. Ν. N. 6 ν τό Ν. Α. τω τά τώ Ν. οί ai τά G. τον της τον G.D. τοΐν ταΐν τοίν G. των των των D. τω -^u τω D. τοΐϊ ταΐς τοΊς A. τόν την τό Α. TOVS τάς τά ^ 74. The demonstrative pronouns are oSe, ούτος, hie, this^ and ίκβίνος, that. '^OSe is simply the arti- cle with the inseparable particle -Be ; thus, oSe ijSe ToBcj G. TOvBe τησΒε TOvSe, D. τωδε rySe τωδε, &C. u Singular, .Κ' οντος αίιτη τοντο €Κ€7νος €Κ€ίνη €Κ€Ϊνθ ' G. 1 τούτον τούτω ΊΟνΤΟν ταύτης ταύτη ταύτην τούτον τούτω τοντο Dual €Κ€ίνθν €Κ€ίνω €Κ€Ϊνθν €Κ€ίνης €Κ€ίνΤ] €Κ€ίνην εκείνον €Κ€ίνω ineivo ' N. A. τούτω ταύτα τούτω €Κ€ίνω €Κ€ίνα €Κ€ίνω G. D. TOVTOLV ταύταιν τούτοιν €Κ€ίνθίν ' €Κ€ίναιν €Κ€ίνθΐν 98 inflectio:n of words. m "75, 76. Plural. N. ovTOL ανται ταντα G. τούτων τούτων τούτων D. TOVTOLS τανταις τούτοις Α. TOVTOVS ταύτας ταντα €K€LVOL €K€LVaL €K€LVa €Κ€ίνων €Κ€ίνων €Κ€ίνων €K€LVOLS €K€LVaLS €K€LVOLi €K€LVOVS €K€LVaS €K€lva Ol§ 75. The relative pronoun 0^9, qui, ivho, which^ hat^ is declined as follows : Singular, Dual, Plural, N. G. D. A. M. rt OS οΰ τ ? ov ξ. τ 77 ψ Ν. ft Ο οΰ τ ω Η Ο Μ. F. Ν. Ν. Α. ά ά G.D. ο aLV OCV Μ. F. Ν. Ν. G. D. Α. οις OVS at τ ων αίς rf α? ων οίς 2. The relative οστίς, quisquis, whoever^ who^ is compounded of 0^9 and the indefinite pronoun rh^ which are separately declined. Thus, Singular, M. N. N. όστις ήτις 5 τι G. ούτινος, ότου ηστινος ούτινος, οτον D. ωτινι, οτω ψινι ωτινι, οτω A. οντινα ηντινα Plural, ο τι N. οίτινζς αίτιν€ς άτινα, άσσα άττα G. ωντινων, οτων ωντινων ωντινων, οτων D. οϊστισι, οτοισι αίστισι . οιστισι, οτοισι A. ουστινας άστινας άτινα, άσσα άττα § 76. 1. The following pronouns and adverbs, or pronomi- nal adjectives and adverbs, are derived from ΠΟΣ, ΤΟΣ, ard Interrogative. Indefinite. 1. πόσος, quanta s, quot, how ττοσός, of a certain quantity much 1 how many ? 2 . τΓοΙος, q u a 1 i s, ο/' what quality 1 ττοιός , of a certain quality 3. πότερος, uter, luhich of the two 1 4. πόστοί, quotas, ο/'ι^Λβί nz/m- herl 5. τΓοσταΐοί, in how many days? § 76.] PRO.NOUN AND ARTICLE. 99 G. πηλίκος, Jiow old οτ large? πηλίκος, of a certain age or size 7. τΓοδαποί, cujas, of what coun- try / 8. quantulum, Λο?ί; Z////^^ ? Demonstrative. Relative. 1. τόσο?, τοσοσδί", τοσοΟτοί, tan- οσοί, όπόσο?, qaantus, qutJt, tus, tot, so much, so many as, as much as, as many as 2. τοΐος, Totoade, τοωντος, talis, οίος, όποϊος, qualis, as, such as such 3. 6πυτ€ρος, whichever of the two 4. όπόστος, of what number soever 5. όποσταίος, in whatever nunώer of days 6. τηλίκος, τηΧίκόσΒζ, τηλίκουτος, ηλίκος, οπηΚίκος, as old as, as large so old, so large as 7. όποδαπό?, of what country soever 8. τνννος, τνννοντος^ tantulus, (\\ΐΆΐλΧ\ι\\ιτΆ, as little as tantillus, so little Adverbs. Interrogative. Indefinite. 1. 77ov, πόθί, ubi, where? ττον. alicubi, somewhere 2. TTOOev, unde, whence? ποθίν, alicunde,yrom someplace 3. TTot, TToVe, quo, whither? ττοί, aliquo, to someplace 4. irfi, qua, in what direction or tttj, in som£ direction way ? 5. TToVe, quando, when'? irork, aliquando, quondam, at some time, once 6. ττως, quomodo, how? πως, quodammodo, ^omeAou', iTi a manner 7. πηνίκα, at what time of the day? 8. ττημος, when ? 9. Ίτοσάκις, quoties, how often? Demonstrative. Relative. 1. τόθί, liic, here ου, οθι, οπού, όπόθί, ubi, where 2. τάθ^ν, thence o6ev, οπόθεν, unde, whence 3. 01, oTTot, oTTOcre, quo, whither 4. r^, τ^δβ, ταντχι, hac, in this ^, οπτ], qua, in which direction or direction or way way 5. τότ^, then ore, όπότ€, quando, ichen 6. τώς, ωδβ, οΰτως, ώς, sic, thus, so 7. τηνίκα, τηνίκά3€, τηνικαντα, at ηνίκα, οπηνίκα, at which time of the tJiis or that time of the day day S. τημος. τημόσ^€, τημοντος, then ημος, όπημος, when 9. τοσάκίς. to ties, so often οσάκις^ όJΓOcrάκLς, quoties, as of•- tea as 10. τίως, so long εω?, till, until 1 1 τόφρα^ so long as οφρα, as long as 100 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 77. ' fa) Τοσούτος, tolovtos, and τη\ίκοντος coincide Avith ovtos αντη TovTo in respect to the diphthongs ov and αυ./ In the neuter, they have ο or 02/ ; as τοσούτο or τοσούτον. ' (h) The adverbs ττόθί, ποθί, τόθι, o6l, toOcv, οΐ, τώ?, ώ^ for τως, πημος, ημος, τημοζ, τημόσδζ, τημουτος, τόφρα, οφρα are Poetic. (c) In the expressions tote μεν τοτ€ 6e, and 6τ€ μεν 6τ€ Se, the adverbs τοτ6 and 6τ6 have the force of the indefinite ttotc. (d) The adverbs devpo, €νθα, ivBa^e, ενταύθα (Ionic ενθαΰτα), evOev, ivuevde, εντεύθεν (Ionic ενθεντεν), and vvv are regarded as demonstra- tive ; the adverbs επεί, επεώη, as relative. 2. The following adjectives are regarded as pronouns : άλλος, η, ο, alius, Other, another : αλλοδαπός, η, όν, from another country , foreign . εκάτερος, α, ov, uterque, each, both, said of two: έκαστος, η, ovj quisque, each, every, έτερος, a, ov, cetera, ceterum, alter, other, another, saidof tw^o : negative ουδέτερος, μη^ετερος, neuter, neither, ημεδαπός, η, όν, nostras, our countryman, ϊδιος, a, ov, proprius, proper, peculiar, his own. 'ίσος, η, ov, aequus, aequalis, equal, μόνος, η, ov, and οίος, a, ov, solus, alone, όλος, η, ov, totus, whole, πάς πάσα πάν, omnis, all, every : παντο^απός, η, όν, of all kinds, νμε^απός, η, όν, vestras, your countryman, 3. The indefinite ενιοι^ sunt qui^ some, is declined like the plural of α^ως ; thus, ενωι^ ai, G. ενίων, D. ενίοις, αις, οις^ Α. ivi- ονς, ας, α, 4. The following pronouns are formed by prefixing ov, μη, et to τ\ς \ οντις, ovTi, no one ^ none : μητις, /x^rt, nequis, wowe, lest any one : είτις, είτι, siquis, if any one, £;!§ 77. 1. The letter / (long) is appended to the demonstra- tive pronouns and pronominal adjectives, and to some of the demonstrative adverbs, for the sake of emphasis ; as οντοσί αν- τηΐ τουτί, obi η3ί το^ί, this here ; τοσοντοσί, as much as yau see here. So TavTrj't, ώδι, ουτωσΐ, ^ενρί, ενθα^ί, ενταυθί, εντενθενί, νννί ; also ενγεταυθΐ, ενμεντευθενΐ, νννμενί, COmic for εντανθί ye, ετενθενΐ μεν, wv\ μεν. The short vowel is dropped before l ; tlius, 6δί, 17 δι, Tobl, τουτί, ταντί, 3ενρί, for όδει, η^εϊ, το^εΐ, τουτοΐ, τανταΐ, δενροΐ. 2. The particles περ, ουν, περούν, δη, Βηποτε, δηποτοϋν are ap- § 78.] PRONOUN AND ARTICLE. 101 pended to the relative pronouns and pronominal adjectives, and to some of the relative adverbs, for the sake of emphasis ; as οσπ€ρ ηπ€ρ one ρ, G. οϋπ^ρ ησπ^ρ. So όσος nep οση ire ρ όσον nep, G. όσου ττ€ρ : οίος nep οία ire ρ οίον π€ρ, G. οίου π€ρ : οσησουν ητισουν όηουν, G. οντινοσουν, ότονουν, Λ. ovTLvaovv, quicunque : 6στίσ8ηποτ€, 6σοσ3η ; όποιοσ^ηποτονν, qua- liscunque, of what sort soever: ώσττβρ, ωσπ^ρουν, όπονουν. 3. When the relative adverbs ore, όπότβ, eVet, cneibrj are mod- ified by av, they become όταν (Doric οκκα), οπόταν, enav, eneidav, § 78. Dialects. Personal Pronouns. Εγώ. S. N. €γώ, Doric €γών, €γωνη : Bceoiic ιώ, Ιών, Ιών€ί : Epic €γών before a vowel. "Έγωγβ, Doric βγώϊ/γα : Boeotic Ιώγα, ίώνγα. G. e/xou, μου, Doric ipeos, ipovs, e/xei;?, e/xev, enclitic pev, peOcv : Boeotic €μους : ^olic epeOev : Ionic ipev, enclitic p€v : Epic e/i€0, epelo, epeOev. D. €poL, Doric €/xiV, βμίνη : Boeotic €μύ. ^E/xotye, Doric €μίνγα. A. e/:x6, /x€, Doric e/xft ; also /χα, in an inscription. D. N. A. ι/ώ. Epic ι/ώϊ: Boeotic νώβ. G. D. νών, Epic i/cotV. P. N. ημ€Ϊς, Ionic 17/xeey : Doric άμβς (a): yEolic and Epic αμμ^ς, Qc. ημών, lonic ημβων, Doric άμ€ων, άμων '. JE^oWo, άμμίων : Boeotic άμίων : Epic ημ€[ων. D. ημίν, Doric άμίν (t) : ^.olic and Epic αμμι, αμμιν ; ^olic 3\so (ίμμξσιν : Poetic 77/xtV (t), ημϊν. A. ημάς, lonic η μίας : Doric ά /xe (ά) : ^olic and Epic a/x/xe : Poetic ή/χά? (α), ημάς. Συ. S. Ν. συ, Doric τΰ, τύι/τ^ : Laconian τοννη : ^olic τυ : Boeotic τον, τούν : Epic τύντ^. Συγβ, Doric τυγα : Boeotic τουγα. G. σου, Doric reoy, reo, Τ€ονς, τ€θν, τ€νς, Τ€ν, τίος, τίω, τίως : Cretan τ€ορ : Boeotic τ€ονς, τωνς, τ€υς : ^olic σε^βι/ : Ionic σβυ : Epic σβο, σείο, σ€υ, σίθ^ν, τ€θ7ο. D. σοι, Doric τοί, τίν, τζΐν, τίνη : Ionic τοί. Α. σ€, Doric re, rei, rv enclitic, reV?; : Boeotic τίν : Cretan τρ€ (TFel). D N. A. σφώ. Epic σφωϊ. G. D. σφων. Epic σφωίν, P. N. υμ€ΐς, Ionic {i/xee? : Doric υ /xe's• (1;) : ^Έοΐϊο and Epic υ/χ- μ€ς : Boeotic ού /xey. G.vμωv, Ionic νμβων : JRollG υμμεων : Boeotic ου/χιωι^ : Epic ύ/χείωι/. D. ύ/χίι/, Doric νμίν (T), νμϊν : -^olic and Epic ϋμμι,νμμιν: Boeotic ονμϊν. 102 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 78. A. νμας, Ionic νμεας : Doric νμ€ : ^olic and Epic νμμζ : Poetic υμάς (α). S. G. ου, Doric eoOy, iov, ovs : Bceotic iovs, Flo : -^olic Feuev : Ionic ev: Epic eo, eto, e^ei^, later Epic i^lo.^ D. ο Γ, -^olic and Bceotic Fot : Bceotic also v, itv : Doric «/ (FtV) : Epic eoi. A. e, -^olic Fe : Epic ie : Ionic and Epic /xtr: Doric vlv, used also by the Attic Poets for αυτόν, αντην, αυτούς, αΐτάς, αυτά, {Eur. Bach, 814. 979 ?) P. G. σφών, Ionic σφεων. JEaoYig, Doric, and Epic σφείων : Doric also ων, rare. D. σφίσι, Doric, Ionic, and Epic σφί, σφίν : jEolic ασφι : Laconian φίν : Syracusan ψίν, A, σφας, Ionic σφεας : Epic σφε: -^olic ασφ€ : Sjrracusan ψβ : Poetic σφάς (α). The Attic Poets use σφε in all gen- ders and numbers, him, her, it, them. AvTos. S. G. a ντον, in an Ionic inscription AFYTO ατντον. — The Ionic inserts e before the long endings ; as avTejj for avTrj. — In the Doric dialect αυτός was sometimes reduplicated; thus, αυταυτώ, αυταυτόν, αυταυτων, after the analogy of ούτος τούτου, from ΤΟΣ, and of αλλή- λων from άλλος. 2. Reflexive Pronoun. (a) The Ionic uses εωϋ for αυ ; thus, εμξωϋτου, σ€ωϋτου, €ωϋτου, (b) In the Epic dialect, the component parts of these pronouns are always separate ; as G. e/xei αύτης, εμίθεν αυτής, D. ol αυτω, Α. e/j,' αυτόν, αυτόν μιν. 3. Possessive Pronoun. 'Ή.μ€Τ€ ρος, Doric and Bceotic άμός(ά) : -^olic άμμος, άμμίτ^ρος \ Epic άμός (α). — Σοί, Doric τεός : ^olic τ€ος : Bceotic τιός. — Ύ /ze- T€po ς, Doric and Epic υμός (ϋ) : Bceotic or Laconian ουμός : ^olic ϋμμος. — 'Ό ?, ^olic and Doric τός : Epic €0ς. — Σφ€Τ€ ρος, ^olic and Epic σφός. Alcman uses σφός for 6ς, his. 4. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronoun. S. N. TL, Doric σά, rare. G. του, Ionic and Epic τβο, reO ; indefinite tco, τευ, enclitic. D. τω, Ionic and Epic τβω, indefinite reo) enclitic : ^olic τίω. P. G. Ti2N, Ionic τ€ων ; indefinite τ€ων enclitic. D. T0I2, Ionic τεοισι : ^olic τίοισι. XIoios, πότ€ρος, Ionic (κοτερος) κότερον, 5. Article. The article has all the dialectic peculiarities of the first two declen- sions ; as Doric τώ τάς τα, Bceotic τω τας τη, for του, της, τη. §79.; NUMERALS. 103 Further, the Doric has τοί, ταί, for ol, al, formed from the full form ΤΟΣ. 6. Demonstrative Pronoun. "^Οδί, PI. G. Touvde, ^olic τώι/δεωι/, D. rolade. Epic τοΓσδβσσι or Γοίσδβσι. — Ούτος, Ν. PI. ovtol αύται ^ Doric tovtol τανται. The Ionic inserts e before the long endings ; as τοντ€ον, τοντβων. — E/cet- ϊ/οΓ, Ionic κ€Ϊρος: ^olic and Doric κψος: Doric also τηνος, used com- monly Avhen the object is near the person addressed, that ichich is near you. — Τόσο?, Poetic τοσσάτιος, 7. Relative Pronoun. O?, G. ου. Epic oov, €ης. S. N. όστις, ο τι. Epic οτις, ο ττι. G. ούτινος, Doric οτινος. — "Οτου, Ionic οτζο, 6τ€ν : Epic οτεν, ΟΤΤ€0, OTT€V. D. ωτινι, Doric οτινι. — "Οτω, Ionic and Epic οτεω. Α. οντινα. Epic οτινα. Ρ. ^. οΊτινζς, ^olic οττιν€ς. G. οτων, Ionic and Epic 6τ€ων, D. οτοισι, Ionic and Epic οτίοισι, feminine cTerjai. A. ουστινας, ατινα, iEolic οττινας : Epic οτινα, neuter. "Οσος, Epic οσσος, όσσάτιος : Poetic όσάτιο?. — *Οπόσο$•, BcEOtic όπόττος : Epic οππόσος : Ionic ό/ίόσο?. — ΌποΓο?, Epic όπποϊος : Ionic ό /cotos. — *Οπότ€ρος, Epic οτΓττϋτεροχ•. Pronominal Adverbs. Που, Ionic κου. Πώ$•, Ionic κως. Όπόθ€ν, Ionic o/co^ei/, Epic όππόθ^ν. — Όπόθι, Epic όππόθι. — "Οπως, Ionic οκω?, Epic οππως, — *0πόσ6, 6πότ€, όποσάκις^ Epic ότΓΤΓοσβ, ότΓττοτε, ότττΓοσάκί?. NUMERALS. ic^ 79. Numeral words are divided into cardinal^ ordinal^ mulfiplicative^ numeral adjectives^ substantives^ and adverbs. ' ύκοσάκΐ5 ehas 21. els κα\ ζ'ίκοσί πρώτο5 κα\ et/co- στόs 30. τριάκοντα τpιaκoστόs TpiaKovTaKis 40. τ€σσαράκοντα τ€σσapaκoστόs τ€σσαρακον- τάκΐ5 τ€σσαρακοντά$ 50. ττ^ντηκοντα 7Γ€vτηκoστ6s 60. ίζηκοντα €ξηκoστόs ίξηκοντάκις 70. ζβ^ομηκοντα €β^oμηκoστόs φδομηκοντάκις 80. ογ^οη κοντά όγ^oηκoστόs 90. evvevrjKovTa €νν€νηκοστ05 100. €κατόν €κατοστ65 €κατοντάκΐ9 ίκατοντά% 200. διακόσιοι διaκoσιoστόs διακοσιάκι$ ♦ 300. τριακόσιοι τpιdκoσιoστόs 400. Τ€τρακόσιοι τ€τpaκoσιoστόs 500. π€ντακόσιοι π€ντακοσιοστ05 600. εξακόσιοι eξaκoσιoστ6s 700. €7Γτακόσιοί iπτaκoσιoστόs 800. οκτακόσιοι 6κτακοσιοστ05 900. €ννακοσιοι ivvaκoσιoστόs 1000. χίλιοι χΐλιoστόs XikiaKis χιΚιά9 2000. δισχιΚιοι 10000. μύριοι μνριοστό$ μνριάκΐ9 μνριάς 20000. δισμνριοι &C. δισμvoιoστόs &C. 1. The cardinal numbers answer to πόσοι ; how manyl From 5 to 100, inclusive, they are indeclinable. Those in lot are declined like the plural of a^ios ; as χίλιοι χίλιαι χίλια. Thousands are formed by prefixing the numeral adverbs to χίλιοι *, as δισχιλιοι, two thousand. Tens of thousands are formed by prefixing these adverbs to μύριοι ; as τρισμύριοι, three mynads, 2. The ordinal numbers answer to 'πόστο5, luhich in order? one of how many? They end in tos (except δ€ύτ€ρο5, e)3So/zoy, oyboos), and are inflected like σοφ05 ; ^€ύτ€pos is inflected like μaκρόs. 3. Multiplicatives, answering to ττοσαπλάσιοί, how many fold? how many times as large? end in -πλόos, -πλaσιos (Ionic -πλησιο5), οτ -πλασίων, -ρ 1 e χ, -fold ; as dmXoos or ^ιπλάσιos, duplex, double. § 79.] NUMERALS. • 105 Those in -πΚόος refer to size ; those in -πλάσως or -πλασίων com- monly refer to number. 4. Numeral adjectives answering to ττοσταΊος, on what day? end in aloff ; they are formed from the ordinals ; as devrepaios, on the second day. 5. Numeral substantives end in as G. άδο?, feminine; as μονάς, monad, unit, rptay, triad, trinity. A few end in υ^; thus η rpirvs, rpirrvs {τριττνα), ternary, η re- TpaKTus, quaternary, η χιλιοστνς, a thousand. 6. The numeral adverbs answer to ποσάκις, how often? they end in άκις, except the first three. Add to these πολλάκις, πλ^ονάκις, πλ^ιστάκις, ολί-γάκις, σνχνάκις, άμφοτ€ράκίς, ίκατ^ράκις. 7. The ending χος or χΘος appears chiefly in the adverbs δι'χα ^ίχη ^ίχθά, τρίχα τριχη τριχθά, Τ€τραχη τ€τραχθά, π^νταχα, βπταχα, and a few others. Αισσός and τρισσός (Ionic διξός, τριξός) are formed from -χος by annexing σ to ;^. 8. ΈΪς, unus, one, δυο, duo, two, τρβίς, tres, three, and τίσσαρξς or τ€τταρ€ς, quatuor,/owr, are inflected as follows : N. μία rf €V οΐ, τω δυο. , δύω G. eVoy μιας €ν6ς τοϊν δυοίν. δνεΐν, των δt D. €VL μια ivi τοίν ΒνοΊν, τοις δνσί A. €va μίαν εν τω, τους δ νο, δυω N. τρ^ίς τρία Τ€σσαρζς τέσσαρα G. τριών τριών τεσσάρων τεσσάρων D. τρισΐ τρισί τεσσαρσι τεσσαρσι A. τρεις τρία τεσσάρας τέσσαρα 9. The negatives ουδείς, μηδείς, nullus, no one, not one, none, can be used also in the plural ; thus, N. ονδενες, G. ονδενων, Ώ. ονδε- σι, Α. ονδενας, none, also insignificant persons. 10. In cardinals and ordinals after είκοσι, εικοστός, the smaller is usually put first, and is connected to the larger by και ; as είς καΐ ε'ίκο- σιν ; e^ κα\ εϊκοσι καΐ εκατόν ; έκτος καΐ εικοστός κα\ εκατοστός. When the larger is put first, καί is usually omitted ; as εϊκοσι εϊς ; εκατόν εϊκοσι εξ ; εκατοστός εΐ κόστος έκτος. Sometimes the cardinals and ordinals from 13 to 19, inclusive, fol- low this analogy ; as τρεΙς καΐ δέκα ; τρίτος κα\ δέκατος. When δέκα precedes, the two parts are written as one word ; thus, δεκατρεΊς, δε- κατεσσαρες, δεκαπέντε, δεκαεξ, δεκαεπτά, δεκαοκτώ, δεκαεννέα ; in which case δεκατρείς, δεκατεσσαρες, also the first component part of τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα, are declined like τρεΊς, τέσσαρες, respectively. 11. ■^Α/χφω, G. D. άμφοΐν, ambo, both, of all genders, and its com- parative άμφότερος, a, ov, both, answer to πότερος, which of the two? 5* 106 INFLECTION OF WORDS. ^ [^ 80. i^OTE 1. Avo, Ανω, in Homer, are indeclinable. — "Κμφω is found indeclinable in one of the Homeric hymns. — Eiy κα\ άκοστός is found for πρώτος κα\ (Ικοστόζ. Note 2. The ancient grammarians say that μύριοι, proparoxytone, means ten thousand ; but μύριοι, paroxytone, innumerable, countless. Note. 3. Sometimes, in numerals larger than €Ϊκοσι, €ΐκοστός, the conjunction και was omitted ; thus in an inscription we find iwra 6ydor)KovTa οκτακόσια ; ev ίβ^ομηκοντα ; τίσσαρ^ς evcurjKovTa ; τίσσαρα €V€vrj κοντά διακόσια Τ€τρακισχί\ια Ιξ deKa μνριάδ€9 ; ev έβδομηκοντα €νακ6σια χίλια. The same order was sometimes observed in numeral figures ; as j3t, ς-πρ, ς -qp, θλφ, for ιβ, ρττς; pqs-, φλθ. Note 4. ^Ένν^νηκοντα, ^ννακόσιοι were also written with one V. (See the preceding note.) Note 5. When a declinable cardinal number agrees with a collect- ive noun in the singular, it takes the endings of the singular; as (Xen, An. 1, 7, 10) άσπίζ μνρία κα\ τβτρακοσία. § 80. Dialects, 1. ζίς, Doric ης : μία, ^olic ια : ivi, in Homer Ιω : πρώτος, Doric πρατος : άπαξ, Cretan άμάκις, Tarentine άμάτις. 2. δυο, Epic δοιώ δοιοί, inflected throughout : δυσί, -<Φ]ο1ίο δυβσι. 3. τρ€Ϊς, Doric τρϊς: τρίτος, ^Φ^οΐίο τβρτος, tertius, Epic τρίτα- τος : for τρις, Laconian τριάκις. 4. τ€σσαρ€ς, ^olic πίσνρ^ς πίσσυρ^ς ', BcBOtic πίτταρζς, quatu- or ; Doric τ€τορ€ς τίττορες ; Ionic τίσσερες : for τεσσαρσι, τέταρτος, Poetic τίτρασι, τ^τρατος. 5. π€ντ€, ^olic π€μπ€, quinque. 6. €ξ, €κτος, Doric Fe^, Fe/cros, in the Heraclean Tables. 7. 8, 9. έβδομος, δγδοοί, €ννατος, Epic €β3όματος, υγδόατοί, ένατος or ξ'ίνατος. 11. evdeKa, Doric ^€κα €Ϊς, rare. 12. δώδβκα, Doric and Ionic δυώδεκα ; Doric also ^€κα dvo ; Poetic δυοκαίδεκα : for δωδβκατος, Poetic δυωδβκατος. 14. Ionic τ€σσ€ρ€σκαί3€κα, indeclinable ; also τ€σσ€ρ€σκαώάτη for Τ€σσαρακαώ€κάτη . 20. είκοσι, Boeotic Fi/cart, viginti ; Doric Fi/cart, Τείκατι, βείκατι, ε'ίκατι, ϊκατι ; Epic εείκοσι. 30, 40, 80, 200, 300. Ionic τριηκοντα, τεσσερηκοντα, ογδωκοντα, δι- ηκόσιοι, τριηκόσιοι. For τεσσαράκοντα, Boeotic πετταράκοντα, Doric Τ€τρωκοντα. 60, 70. εξηκοντα, ίβδομηκοντα, Doric τεξηκοντα, ίβδεμηκοντα. 200-900. For -κόσιοι, Boiotic -κάτιοι; as διακάτιοι, τριακάτιοι, tc- τρακάτιοι, πεντακάτιοι. 1000. χίλιοι, Boeotic χείλιοι. 9000, 10000. Epic εννεάχϊλοι^ δεκάχΐλοι. §§81,82.] VERB. 107 VERB. ^t^ 81• 1. The Greek verb has three voices; ac- tive, passive, and middle. c2. There are nve moods ; indicative, subjunctive, optative, imperative, and nifinitive. c 3. There are seven tenses ; present, imperfect, perfect, pluperfect, future, aorist, and future perfect. / The primary or leading tenses are the present, perfect, and future. /The secondary or historical tenses are the im- perfect, pluperfect, and aorist. The indicative is the only mood in which the imperfect and pluperfect are found : the subjunc- tive and imperative want also the future. '■ 4. There are three persons; the first, second, and third. 5. Deponent verbs are those Λvhich are used only in the passive or middle. They are called depo- nent passive or deponent middle according as their aorist is taken from the passive or middle. Note. The later Greeks sometimes formed a future subjunctive ; as μ€μίσθωσωνται^ in the Heraclean Tables; κανθησωμαι, κ€ρ8ηθησων- ται, in the New Testament. ^ §3. 1. A regular verb is conjugated by form- ing the present, future, aorist, perfect active, per- fect passive, aorist passive ; as βουλβνω βονΧβύσω ΕβουΧβυσα βββουΧβυκα βββουΧβνμαι ββονΧβνθην. 2. Α deponent verb is conjugated by forming the present, future middle, perfect, and aorist pas- sive or middle (as the case may be) ; as αρνβομαι αρνησομαί ηρνημαί ηρντιθην 5 'χαρίζομαι χαρισομαι κβχα- ρισμαι εγαρίσαμην. 108 INFLECTION OF ΤνθΕΒ5. 1^83. 5S So Si ?^ Ο Ο "Κ» a, i^ .rr 3 ^1 Cm ο Ο ^ 3 b ^ ^ ^ b b vjj "«■a fi /< w (t» ;:;} '< ^ ^ C ο vw Ρ ^ b ^ C vu b b ^ ^;5 *;a /< \u \o 7^ ^ ^ s QCl QX 00.02. Ph Ο 99 ϋ '^ 1 Oi eg. 3 3v§ b Ji 01^ 3 ^s> - ^ ^ Jii r$ ^ /< (±5 οχ "ν*. 02. ^ oa. -^ Dh Λ ΡϊΗ <; ίΐ^ CU b 02. <2X {:S CO "^^ a QQ. b .ij a. ii ^ /< ^ ^ 2i ^ /< Ο ?^ ί> OX 02. 02. οχ οχ b S b ^ ^ »4» W U, i> ^ ^ s i> ;s οχ c ο uT OX ox ox ρ b 1^ OX OX 5 ^v^ «b w ;:) ^ ^ n2 5 5 ox ox οχ ox οχ (•^ <3 §* 1i ox ox b OX b ο OX .3" ox b b 02 02 b b b b a οχ οχ « ^a. b s> ^v^ b ^ ^ '< ^ nS OX ο go ii ο οχ vw 03 OX "^ OX -Mi- OX ^ CQ G "t; c5 ^• t3 ^ ^^ CD 3 q tS ϋ 3 c c b b -» C Ο ϋ 0X02. ϋ ο C-, S 3 b /< Ο OX (D a. .^ iL, <^ CL, (i, ^ti "^ If λ5 οχ S ο ί)84.] VERB. 109 § 84. Inflection of βουΧβύω. Indicative Active. Present. Future. Perfect. s. βονΚ€νω βουλ€νσω β€βούλ€νκα βουλ€ν€ΐ5 βονλ€νσ€ΐς β€βονΧ€νκα9 D. βθνλ€ν€1 βονλ€νσ€ΐ β€βθνλ€νΚ€ βουΚζύζΤον βονλζνσζτον βφον\€νκατον βθνλ€ν€Τθν βονΚζυσ^τον βζβονΚζνκατον P. βονΚξνομζν βονΚζυσομζν βζβονλζνκαμζν βθν\€ν€Τ€ βονλ€νσ€Τ€ βΐβονΚ^νκατζ βθνλ€νθν(Γί βονλ€ύσονσί βζβονΚζνκάσι Imperfect. Aorist. Pluperfect. S. €βθνλ€νθν €βονλ€νσα €β€βθνλ€νΚ€ίν €βθύΚ€υ€5 €βονλ€νσας €β€βθνΧ€νΚ€15 υ. ζβονΚζυζ €βον\€νσ€ €β€βθυ\€νΚ€1 €βθν\€ν€Τθν ξβονλενσατον €β€βονΚζνκ€ΐτον ζβονΚζνίτην ΙβονΚζνσάτην €βζβον\€νκ€ίτην p. €βουλ€νομ€ν ζβονΚζνσαμ^ν €β€βου\€υκ€ΐμ€ν ejSouXevere ζβον\€νσατ€ €β€βθνλ€νΚ€ίΤ€ ξβονΧζυον €βον\€νσαν €β€βονλ€ύκ€ίσαν ΟΓ €βφον\ζυκ€σαν Subjunctive Ac tive. Present. Aorist. Perfect. s. βον\€νω βονΚξνσω βζβονΚ^νκω βον\€νυ9 βουλενσηί βζβονΚζΰκ-ης T) βονΧζνυ βονΚζνσυ β€βου\ζυκτ) u. βονΚξνητον βονΚζνσητον βζβονλευκητον βον\€νητορ βου\€υσητον βζβουΚενκητον P. βονλ€νωμ€Ρ βουΚεύσωμζν βζβονΚζνκωμζν βονλ€ύητ€ βονΚ^νσητ€ βφονΚ^ύκητξ βονλζνωσι βονλ€ύσωσι βξβονλζύκωσι 110 INFLECTION OF WORKS. [§84. D. Present βονλ€ύοιμι βουΧ€νοίς βονΧ€ύθί Optative Active. Future. βονλ€ύσοίμί βουλ€υσοΐ9 βονΧζύσοί βονλ€υοιτον βονλβνοίτην Ρ. βονΚ^υοιμ^ν βονΧ€νοίτ€ βον\€υοΐ€ν βονΚζνσοιτον βου\€νσ:οίτην βουΚ^υσοίμ^ν βονλξύσοίτζ βονΧ€νσοί6ν Perfect. βζβονΚ^υκοιμι βζβουΚξνκοις βζβονΚξνκοι β€βον\€υκοίτον β€βον\€υκοίτην β€βον\€νκοιμζν β€βθν\€νΚΟίΤ€ β€βθνΧ€ύκθί€ν Aorist. βουΚ^υσαιμι D. Ρ. βονΚενσαιμ^ν βονΚζνσαις or βονΚ^νσζίας βουΧεύσαιτον βονΧ€νσαιΤ€ βουΧζύσαι or βονΧ€νσ€ί€ βονΧβνσαίτην βουΧ^νσαΐζν ΟΓ βονΧ^νσ^ίαν Present. S. 2 βούΧ€ν€ 3 βουΧ€υ€τω D. 2 βονΧ€ν€τον 3 βονΧ€υ€των Ρ. 2 βθνΧ€ύ€Τ€ 3 βονΧζνίτωσαν ΟΧ βουΧΈνοντων ImOerative Active. Aorist. βοΰΧ^υσον βονΧζυσάτω βουΧ^νσατον βονΧζυσάτων βονΧζνσατξ βονΧ€υσάτωσαν or βουΧ^υσάντων Perfect. βββούΧενκξ β€βουΧ€νκ€τω β€βθνΧ€νΚ€ΤΟΡ β€βονΧ€νκ€των β€βθυΧ€νΚ€Τ€ βζβουΧζνκίτωσαν Infinitive Active. Present. βουΧ^ν^ιν Future. βουΧ^νσ^ιν Aorist. βονΧ^υσαι Perfect. β€βονΧ€υκ€ναι Participle Active. βουΧ€νων βοχιΚζΰσων βουΧ^ύσαί βζβουΧ^νκώς §84.] VERB. Ill Indicative Passive. Present. Perfect. Future. s, D. βουλ€νομαί βθνλ€ν-Τ], '€L βονλ€ν€ταί βζβουΚζυμαι β€βου\€υ(ται β€βούλ€νταί βουΚ^υθησομαι βονλ€υθησ-υ, -€ί βονΚζυθησεται βον\€υ€σθον βουΚ€ν€σθον β€βονλ€νσθον βζβονΧζνσθον βονΚενθησεσθον βονΚζνθησζσθον P. βονλβνόμ^θα βύν\€ύ€σθ€ βουλώνονται β€βονλ€νμζθα β€βούΧ€υσθ€ βζβονΚζννταί βουΚζνθησόμζθα βουλ€υθησ€σθ€ βουλξνθησοντω Imperfect. Pluperfect. Aorist. s. D. €βον\€ν6μην €βουλ€ύον €βθν\€ύ€ΤΟ ζβζβονΚ^νμην ζβζβονλζνσο €β€βθν\€νΤΟ ζβουΚζνθην ζβονλζνθης €βουλ€ύθη €βον\€υ€σθοι/ ζβονΚζυίσθην €β€βον\€υσθον €β€βον\€ύσθην ΐβουλεύθητον φονλευθητην P. ζβονΚζνόμ^θα €βθν\€ν€σθ€ €βονλ€ύοντο €β€βθν\€νμ€θα €β€βθνλ€νσθ€ €β€βού\€νντο Future Perfect. €βον\€νθημ€ν €βονΧ€νθητ€ ζβονλζνθησαν s. β€βονΚ€νσομαί D. Υ. β€βονλ€υσόμ€θα β€βονλ€νσ-τ]^ -66 β€βον\€υσ€σθον βζβονΚ€νσ€σθ€ β^βονΚΈνσεται βζβονΚ€νσ€σθον β€βον\€νσονται Sub unctive Passive. Present. Perfect. Aorist. s. D. βονΚ^νωμαι βονΧ€ντ] βονλίυηται βεβονΧΕυμβνος ω β€ βουλών μένος rjs β€βον\€νμ€νος fj βονΚ^νθω βονΚενθτις βονΚΕνθτ] βουλενησθον βουλ€νησθοΡ βεβονΚζνμ^νω ητον βζβον\€νμίνω ητον βονλζνθητον βον\€νθητον P. βονλ€νώμ€θα βονλ€ύησβ€ βονλζνωνται βεβονλευμβνοί ωμ€ν βζβον\€νμίνοι ητ€ βζβονΚενμίνοί ωσι βον\ενθωμ€ν βθνλ€νθηΤ€ βονΚ^νβωσι 112 INFLECTION OF WOEDS. R84 Present. S. βονΚ^υοίμην βον\€νοιο βουλ€νοίτο D. βουΚ^νοισβον βονλβνοίσθην P. βον\€νοίμ€θα βονΚζνοίσθζ βουλξνοιντο S. βονΚξνθείην βονΚ^νθζίης βου\€υθ€ΐη Optative Passive. Perfect. βζβονΚ^νμΙνοζ €Ϊην β€βονλ€νμ€νος ζ'ίης β€βονλ€νμ€νος €Ϊη Future. βονΧζνθησοίμην βονΚ^υθησοίο βονΚ^νθησοιτο β€βονλ€νμ€νω ζ'ίητον βζβονΚ^νμίνω βίητην β^βονΚ^υμίνοι ζίημζν βζβονΚζνμίνοι ζ1ητ€ β€βονλ€νμ€νθί ξ'ίησαν Aorist. D. βονΧζυθβίητορ βονλ€νθ€ΐητην Future Perfect. βον\€νθησοισθον βονΧενβησοίσθην βονλβνθησοίμζθα βονΚζνθησοισθξ βονλβνθησοιντο . βονΧβνθ-βίημζΡ, '€Ϊμ€ν βονΧ€νθ-€ίητ€, -eire βονλ€νθ-€ίησαν, -eUv S. βζβοηΚ^νσοίμην βξβουΚ^νσοιο β€βον\€νσοιτο D.— Present. S. 2 βονΚ^νου 3 βονλζνεσθω D.2 βονΚζύζσθον 3 βονΚζυίσθων Ρ. 2 βονλ€ύ€σθ€ βζβονΚζύσοισθον βζβονΚζυσοίσθην Imperative Passive. Perfect. βζβονλενσο βζβουΚζνσθω^ β€βον\€νσθον βζβονΚζνσθων βεβουλ€νσθ€ . βεβονΚζνσοίμεβα βζβονΧενσοισθβ βζβονΧζνσοιντο 3 βουΧενίσθωσαν or βΕβονΧζύσθωσαν or βουΧενίσθων βεβονΧενσθων Aorist. βονΧενθητί βονΧζνθητω βονΧενθητον βονΧζνθητων βονΧ€νΘητ€ βονΧενθητωσαν ΟΓ βονΧζυθεντων Infinitive Passive. Present. βουΧεν^σθαι Perfect. βεβουΧευσθαι Aorist. βονΧζνβηναι Future. βονΧβυθησεσθαι Fut. Perf. βεβουΧενσεσθαι Participle Passive. βονΧ€νόμ€νθ9 β€βθνΧ€νμ€νθ£ β ovX ευθείς βονΧενθησό μένος βεβονΧενσόμενος/ .' §85.] VERB. 113 S. βονΚζνσομαι βουλζνσ-υ, -fi βονΧξνσζται S. €βον\€νσάμην €βουΚζνσω €βονΧ€νσατο S. βονΚςνσωμαι βονΚζνση βουΧξύσηται S. βον\€νσοίμην βον\€νσοιο βονΚςυσοιτο S. βονΚευσαΙμην βονΚ^νσαιο βονλβνσαιτο Indicative Middle. Future. D. D. βονΚξνσ^σθον βονΧ^νσβσθον Aorist. €βον\€υσασθον €βουΧ€νσάσθην P. βονΧζνσόμζθα βονΧ€νσ€σθζ βουΧ^νσονται, Ρ. ζβονΧζνσάμζθα €βονΧ€νσασθ€ έβονΧζνσαντο Subjunctive Middle. Aorist. P. βονΧ^υσωμζθα D. βονΧζύσησθον βουΧ^νσησθον Optative Middle. Future. D. D. βονΧζύσοισθον βονΧβυσοίσθην Aorist. βονΧζυσαισθον βουΧ^υσαίσθην βονΧ€υσησθ€ βονΧζνσωνταί βονΧζνσοίμζθα βονΧ€νσοίσθ€ βονΧ^νσοιντο βονΧζνσαίμ^θα βονΧζνσαισθζ βονΧενσαιντο S. 2 βουΧευσαι 3 βουΧ€νσάσθω Imperative Middle. • Aorist. D. βονΧ€νσασθον P. βουΧ^νσασθε βουΧενσάσθων βουΧενσάσθωσαν ΟΓ βονΧ€νσάσθων Infinitive Middle. Participle Middle. Future. βουΧ^νσ^σθαι βονΧ€νσ6μ€νο9 Aorist. βονΧζνσασθαι βουΧενσάμενοί § 85. 1. The first person singular of the example βου- λβΰω translated : Indicative Active. Present. / advise, I do advise, I am advising. Imperfect. / was advising, I advised. 114 INFLECTION OF WOKDS. [§85. Future. I shaU, or will, advise. Aorist. / advised, I did advise, I have advised, I had advised. Perfect. / have advised. Pluperfect. / had advised. Subjunctive Active. Present. / may, or can, advise or be advising, I advise, I am advising. Aorist. / may, or can, advise or have advised, I shall, or will, advise, I have advised, I shall, or will, have advised. Perfect. / may, or caiiy have advised, I have advised. Optative Active. Present. / might, could, would, or should, advise or be advising, I was advising, I advised. Future. / should, or would, advise. Aorist. / might, could, woidd, or should, advise or have advised, I had advised. Perfect. / might, could, would, or should, have advised, I had advised. Imperative Active. Present, yidvise, do advise, be advising. Aorist. Advise, do advise. Infinitive Active. Present. To advise or be advising. Future. Should, would, shall, will, advise. Aorist. To advise, to have advised. Perfect. To have advised. Participle Active. Present. Advising. Future. Being about to advise, who shall advise, and in certain connections, to advise, in order to advise. Aorist. Advising, having advised, who has advised. Perfect. Having advised. . , Indicative Passive.• Present. / am advised, continually. Imperfect. / was advised, continually. Future. / shall, or will, be advised. Aorist. / was advised, I have been advised, I had been advised. Perfect. I have been advised. Pluperfect. / had been advised. Future Perfect. I shall, or will, have been advised, I shall, or will, be advised. Subjunctive Passive. Present. / may, or can, be advised, I am advised, continually. Aorist. / may, or can, be advised or have been advised, I shall, or will, be ad' vised, I have been advised, I shall, or ivill, have been advised. Perfect. I may, or can, have been advised, I have been advised. Optative Passive. Present. I might, could, would, or should, be advised, I was advised, continually. §86.] VERB. 115 Future. / should, or woidd^ he advised. Aorist. / might, could, should, or would, be advised or have heen advised^ I had been advised. Perfect. / might, could, should, or would, have been advised, I had been advised. Future Perfect. / should, or would, be advised. Imperative Passive. Present. Be advised, continually. Aorist. Be advised. Perfect. Be advised. Infinitive Passive. Present. To be advised, continually. Future. Should, would, shall, will, be advised, Aorist. To be advised, to have been advised. Perfect. To have been advised. Future Perfect. Should, would, shall, will, be advised. Participle Passive. Present. Being advised, continually. Future. Being about to be advised, λυΙιο shall be advised, to be advised, in order to be advised. Aorist. Being advised, having been advised, who has been advised. Perfect. Having been advised. Future Perfect, like the future. Middle. The middle is the same as the active with the reflexive pronoun appended to it ; as, Present, / advise myself, simply / deliberate, 2, The Latin paradigm amo adapted to the Greek. Indie. Subj. Opt. Imperat. Inf. Part. Pres. Imperf amo . amabam amera amarem ama amare amans A or. amavi amaverim amavissem amavisse Perf. amavi amaverim amavissem amavisse Plup. amaverara Fut. amabo amaturus sim amaturus es- amaturus es- amaturus or fuerim sem or fuissem se or fuisse F.Per. amavero I :/ § 86. Example of the future active and middle ' of liquid verbs : αγγελλω, to announce. ' Indicative. Syno J Optative. )sis. Iniinitive. Participle. F. A. αγγελώ άγγ^λοίμί ayycKcIv αγγβλωι/ F. M. άγ-γελουμαί άγγίΚοίμην αγγζλ^ισθαι άγγ€Χονμ€νο5 116 INFLECTION OF WORDS, [§87, Indicative S. nyyeXcu ayy€\€2s ayyeXei Future Active. Optative. Infinitive. άyy€X-0Lμι, -οίην ayyeXelv ayyeX-oi?, -οίης ayyeX-OL, Όΐη Participle. ayyeX(uv ayyeXelrov ayyeXelTov ayyeX-OLTov, -οίητον άyy€X-OLτηv, -οιητην άyyζXovμζV ciyyeXetre αγγβλοίσι ayyik-o^€V, -οίημεν ayyeX-otre, -οιητε ayyeX-oiev, -οίησαν Future Middle. ayyeXoO/xat ayyeX-fi^ -et ayyiKeiraL άyydXoiμηv ayy^X^iauai ayyeXoio ayycXoLTO αγ^ζΧονμζνος • D. ^ dyyeXetσ^ov ayyeXeiaeov P. άyyeXovμ€θa αyy€λetσ^e ayyeXovvraL ayy^XoiaOov άyy€XoLσθηu άyy€XoLμ€θa ayyeXotcr^e ayyeXolvTO [ij^ 87. Examples of the second aorist, second perfect and pluperfect, and second future passive : λε/ττω, to leave. Synopsis. Indie. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. 2 A. A . € λιτΓοι/ Χίπω Χίποιμι Χίπ€ λιπβιι/ Χιττων 2 Α.Μ..€Χίπόμην ΧίπωμαιΧιποίμην Χιπον Χιπίαθαι Χιπομ^νος 2 Α..Υ . ίΧΙττην Χιπω Χιττ^ίην Χίπηθι Χιπηναι Xtncis 2 F. Ρ. Χιττησομαι Χιπησοίμην Χιπησ^σθαι Χιπηο-όμ^νος 2 Ρ. ΧεΧοιπα λβλοιττω ΧζΧοίποιμι XiXome XeXomepaL ΧζΧοιπώς 2 PI. iXeXoLireLV 2 Aor. Act. S. eXiTTOV eXines cXtne D. cXlTTfTOI/ €Χίπ€την P. €Χίπομ€ν eXinere eXmov Indicative. 2 Aor. Mid. 2 Aor. Pass. ζΧιπόμην ζΧΙπην * iXinov eXiTrqs iXincTO ζΧίτΓ^σθον ζΧιπ^σθην €Χιπ6μαθα €Χίπ€σθ€ «Χίποντο ζΧίπη 2 Fut. Pass. Χίπησομαι Χιπησ-τ}, -et Χίπησ€ταί έΧίπητον ^Χίττητην ζΧΙπημζν €Χίπητ€ € Χιττησαν Χιπησ€σΘον Χιττησζσθον Χιπησόμζθα Χίπησ€σθ€ ΧιπησοντΜ §87.] VERB. 117 S. XeXotTra D. XeXoLnas λελοιΤΓβ 2 Perfect. XeXoLwo^ov XeXoLnarov 2 Pluperfect. S. eXeXoLn-eiv, -η D. eXeXoiTr-ets•, -ης eXeXotTT-et, -eiv iXcXoLneLTov eXeXoi7reiV?;z/ P. \€\οίπαμ€ν \€\οίπατ€ XeXoinaaL P. eXeXoiVet/xei/ eXeXoineLTe iXeXoin-eiaav, -eaav 2 Aor. Act. S. λι'πω Χίπτ]9 Χίπη a- Χίττητον Χίπητον P. Χίπωμ€ν Χίπητ€ Χίπωσι Subjunctive. 2 Aor. Mid. 2 Aor. Pass. Χίπωμαι Χίπυ Χίπηται ΧΙπησθον Χίπησθον Χιπωμ^θα Χίπησθβ Χίπωνται λιττώ XLnrjs Χιπτ} Χίπητον Χιπητον Χιπωμζν Χιπητζ Χιπώσί 2 Aor S. υ. Act. Χίποιμι Χίποις Χίποι Χίποίτορ Χιποίτην Ρ. Χίποιμβν ΧίποίΤ€ Χίποΐ€ν 2 Aor. Mid, Χιποίμην Χίποιο Χίποιτο Χίποισθον Χιποίσθην Χιποίμ^θα Χίποισθζ Χίποιντο Optative. 2 Aor. Pass. Χιπ^ίην Χιπ^Ιης Χιπζίη Χίπ-€ίητον, -eiTOV Χίπ-ζίητην, -βίτην Χίπ-€ίημ€ν, -ei/Ltei/ Χιπ-€ίητ€, -6tre Χίπ-€ίησαν, eiev 2 Perfect. 2 Perf. λβλο/πω ΧζΧοίπτις ΧζΧοίπυ Χ^Χοίττητον ΧίΧοΙπητον ΧίΧοίπωμξν Χ^ΧοΙπητζ ΧβΧοίπωσι 2 Fut. Pass. Χιπησοιμην Χιπησοιο Χιπησοιτο Χιπησοισθον Χιπησοίσθην Χιπησοίμζθα Χιπησοισθζ Χιπησοιντο . λβλο 177-0 t/At, -οίην XeXoiV-oty, -οίηζ λελοίτΓ-Οί, -οίη D. ΧζΧοΙποίτον ΧίΧοίποιτην Imperative. 2 Aor. Act. "S. λί7Γ€ Χιπ^τω \ίπ€τον Χίπβτων Χίπ€τ€ Χίπ€τω(ταν, Χιπόντων Mid. D. IP. 2 Aor. Χιπου Χιπ^σθω Χίπησθον Χιπίσθων Χίπ€σθ€ Χιπίσθωσαν, Χ,ιπίσθων 2 Aor. Pass. Χίπη θ L Χιπητω Χίπητον Χιπητων Χίπητζ Χιπητωσαν, Χιπ€ντων , XeXotTT-otjLtei/, -οίημ^ν Χ€Χοίπ-θίΤ€, -οίητ€ ΧζΧοίπ -oLeVf -οίησαν 2 Perf. λβλοίΤΓβ λβλοιττετω Χ€Χοίπ€τον Χ€Χοίπ€των XeXoiVere Χ€Χοίπ€τωσαν 118 INFLECTION OF WORDS. Κ 88. . Infinitive. 2 A. A. Xinelv 2 A.M. Χιττίσθαι 2 A . 'Ρ,Χητψαι 2 F. P. Χιπησεσθαι 2 Perf. \ίΚοιπεναι Participle. 2 A. A. λιττώι/ 2 A. M. XtTTo/xei^os 2 A. Ρ.λιπβΐί 2 F. P. λιτττ^σο/χβζ/οί 2 Perf. λβλοιττώ? ^ 88. Examples of the perfect and pluperfect passive and middle of mute and liquid verbs : τρίβω^ to ruh^ ττλβκω, to knit, ττβίθω^ to persuade, αγγβ'λλω, to announce. Perfect Passive an^ Middle. πεπΧεκται πεινλεχθον π€πλ€χθ€ π€πλ€γμ€νόί ττίπΚζζο π€π\€χθω τνίπΚζχθον π€πλ€χθων Τ€τρίφθω(ταν, πεττλεχθωσαν, τζτρίφθων π€π\€χθων Inf. τξτρίφθαί πεπλεχθαι Part. τ€τριμμενος πβπΧεγμερος uperfect Passi\"e επεπΧβγμην eVeVXeKTO e7reVX6;!(^oz/ €π€πλ€χθην eVeTrXey/xe^a π€πΧ€γμ€νοί ήσαν The perfect and j^l uperfect passive and middle of verbs in πω, /3ω, φω, are inflected like τβτριμμαι ετετρίμμην ; of verbs in fcω, γω, ;^ω, like π€πλ€γμάί επεπλβγμην ; of verbs in τω, δω, ^ω, ^'ω, like TreVet- σμαί ξττζττζίσμην \ of verbs in λω, νω, ρω, like ήγ-γ^Χμαι ηγγίΧμην. Ind. S. Τ€τρίμμαί Τ€τρίψαι τάτριπται D. τ€τριφθον Ρ. Τ€τρ1μμ€θα Τ€Τρίφθ€ τετριμμίνοι Imp.S. rirpL^o Τ€τρίφθω Ώ. τβτρίφθον Τ€τρίφΘων Ρ. τίτριφθζ S. €τ€τρίμμην €Τ£τρι\Ιτο €τ€τρίπτο D. €Τ€Τ ρίφθον €τ€τρίφθην Ρ. €Τ€τρίμμ€θα €Τ6Τρίφθ€ Τ€τρίμμ€νοι ήσαν ) 7Γ€π€ΐσμαί ηγγελμαι 7Γ€π€ίσαί ήγγ€\σαι 7Γ€7Γ6ΐσται rjyyiKTai π€π€ίσθον ηγγβλθον πβπείσμεθα ηγγβΧμεθα π€π€ίσθ€ 7Γ€π€ίσμ€νοι ηγνελθε ηγγ€λμ€νοί etVt €Ϊσί π€7Γ6ίσο ηγγ€λσο π€π€ίσθω ηγγζΧθω π€π€ίσθον ήγγ€\θον 7Τ€7Γζίσθων η-γγεΧθων π€π€ίσβ6 η^ψλθ€ 7Γ€π€ίσθωσαν, ηγγελθωσαν, ηγγελθων π€π€ίσθων π€π€Ίσθαι ηγγεΧθαί ΊΤ€π€ΐσμίνος ηγγ€\μ€νος [id Middle. €π€π€ίσμην ηγ-γελμην €π€π€ίσο ήγγελσο €π€π€ίστο ήγγεΧτο €π€77€ίσθον ήγγ€\6ον €π€π€ίσθην ηγγ^Χθην €π€π€ίσμ€θα ηγγίΚμεθα €π€7Γ€ίσΘ€ rjyy€\6€ π€π€ίσμ€νοι ηγγελμενοί ήσαν ήσαν §^89-91.] AUGMENT. 119 § 89. 1. Not unfrequently the tenses are, for the sake of greater strength, formed by means of the participle and the auX' iliary verbs ei/x/, γίγνομαι, διαγί-γνομαι, κνρβω, υπάρχω, 7Γ€λω, and €χω ; also άρχομαι with the future participle ; as, Present. βου\€νων €Ϊμί Imperfect. βονλ€νων ην Future, βουλ^υων ζσομαι, βονΚ€νσων ζΐμί or βονΚ^υσων άρχομαι Aorist. βονλζνσας €χω, or βον\€ύσας €ΐχον ; passive βουΚζνθζίίί ζίμι Perfect. βεβονλξνκώς ζίμι, sometimes βεβουλενκως €χω Pluperfect, βεβουλευκώς ην, sometimes βεβουλευκως είχον Fut. Perf. βεβουΧευκώς εσομαι, or βονΧεύσαζ εσομαι And so through all the voices, moods, numbers, persons, and gen- ders. 2. Me λ λ ω, ίο he about to do any thing, to intend^ shall^ fol- lowed by the present, future, or aorist, of the infinitive, forms a periphrastic future ; as MeXXet τιθεναι, He is about to place, AUGMENT. L^ 90. 1. The perfect and future perfect of all the moods and of the participle, and the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect of the indicative, receive an increase at the beginning, called augment. α 2. There are two kinds of augment ; the syllabic augment^ and the temporal augment. ^ The syllabic augment is formed by prefixing a c- syllable or two syllables to the verb. cThe temporal augment is formed by lengthening the first svllable of the verb. »/ (^ 91• 1. When the verb begins with a conso- nant followed by a vowel or a liquid, the augment of the perfect is formed by prefixing to the verb that consonant together with an e. This kind of aug- ment is called reduplication. E. g. βοϋλβύω βεβού- Xevfca βεβούλβνμαί, Ύραφω ^ε^ραφα yeypafipbat. So θνω τεθυκα, φνω πεφνκα, χαίνω κβχηνα, χράομαι κεχρημαι, θεάο- jULi τζΘεαμαι. (^15.) 120 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 91. | 2. When the verb begins with two consonants ; the second of which is not a liquid, or with ξ', ξ, ψ, the augment of the perfect is formed by prefixing an € to the verb ; as σκάτττω βσκαφα, ζητβω ίζητηκα, ψβνΒομαί βψβυσμαί, 3. The augment of the pluperfect is formed l?v prefixing an e to the reduplication of the perfeci : as βονλβυω βββουΧβνκα ββββουΚεύκβιν• 4. When the augment of the perfect is simply e, the pluperfect takes no additional augment ; as σκατΓτω βσκαφα €σ/€αφ€ίν^ ζητβω βξητηκα βζητηκβιν. 5. When the verb begins with a consonant, the augment of the imperfect and aorist is formed by prefixing an e ; as βούλβύω, ββονλβυον^ ββούΧβυσα : γράφω, βγραφον^ βγραψα, 6. When the verb begins with ρ, the augment is formed by prefixing an e, and doubling the ρ ; as ράτττω, imperf. eppairrov^ perf. βρραφα^ pluperf. ippa'i φβίρ^ a or. βρραψα. Note 1. (a) Some verbs beginning with a mute and liquid some times take e instead of the redupKcation of the perfect ; those begin- ning with yv always take e ; as βλαστάνω βφΧάστηκα €βλάστηκα, κατα-γλωτίζω κατ~€γ\ώτίσμαί, γνωρίζω iyvcdpiKa. See also γλύφω, γράφω ^ κληΐζω, τρίφω^ in the Catalogue of Verbs. Μίμνησκω (ΜΝΑΩ) has μίμνημαι μ€μνησομαι^ but its kindred μνη- μον€νω has €μνημόνενκα. (b) A few verbs beginning with a liquid take et instead of the redu- plication, which is nothing more than the augment e lengthened ; as \ayχάvω €'ίληχα. See also Χαμβάνω, λέγω, μ€ίρομαι, in the Catalogue of Verbs. Observe further that μ€ίρυμαι has also ^μβραται εμβραμβνη, Παρα-νομβω takes η instead of the reduplication in the form ττα- ρηνομημβνοζ. •i Note 2. (a) Some verbs take the reduplication contrary to the sec- ond rule ; as κτάομαι κ^κτημαι. See also τττβρυγόω, τττησσω, in the Catalogue of l^erbs. {b) The perfect of εχω, in an inscription, has παρ-^ίσχηται, for πα 0€σχηταί. The pluperfect of ΐσ τη μι is ίστηκ€ΐν and ςίστηκαν. 5i 92.] AUGMENT. 121 Note 3. The augment of the perfect of t στη μι takes the Γουσίι breathing; thus, εστηκα ίστηκειν. Στβλλω has εσταλκα, in the com- pound άφ-€στάλκαμ€Ρ, found in an inscription. Note 4. The additional augment of the ph/perf eel is often omitted ; as τελευτάω TereXevTrjiceLP, αναβαίνω άναβε βί]Κ€ίν^. κατατρέχω καταδε- ^μαμηκειν. ΐΝοτΕ 5, Some verbs lengthen the syllabic augment e into η, in the imperfcit and aorist ; as βούΧομαι, εβονΚόμην ηβονΚόμην, εβονληβην ηβονληθην. See also απολαύω, dvvapaiy μεΧλω, παρανομεω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. Note 6. (a) The following Poetic forms take the reduplication, con- trary to the analogy of verbs beginning with ρ ; ραπίζω ρεράτησμαι^ ρίπτω ρερίφθαι, ρυπόω ρερνπωμενα. (b) Some Poetic forms do not double the ρ after the syllabic aug- ment ; thus, ράπτω εραπτον, ρεζω ερεζον ερεξα, ρίπτω εριψα ερίφην, (c) ΡΕΩ, ίο say^ may take ει- instead of €/3- in the aorist passive ; thus, είρεθην είρηθην. In the perfect it always takes εΐ- for ip- ; thus, εϊρηκα^ εφημαι. ^ 9^. 1. \Vhen the verb begins with a short vowel the augment of all the past tenses is formed by lengthening that vowel ; in this case, a and e become η^ and ο becomes ω ; as, άκολονθεω, imperf. ηκολονθεον, perf. ηκολονβηκα, pluperf. ηκόλον- θηκειν, aor. ηκολούθησα εΧεεω, η\εεον, ηΧεηκα, ηΧεηκείν, ηΧεησα, ηΚεηθην ορθόω, ώρβούμην, ωρθωμαί, ώρθώμην, ωρθωσα ϊκετευω, ϊκετενον, ϊκετενσα υγιαίνω, νγίαινον, ϋγίάνα 2. If the vowel is already loiig^ no change takes place ; except that d (long) is commonly changed into η ; as ημβροω ημβρουν^ ωΒινω ωΒινον, άϊσσω η'ίξα, 3. When the verb begins \vith a diphthongs the augment is formed by changing the first vowel of that diphthong according to the first rule ; as αΐτεω yreov, αοω f]Bov, αύΧβω ηνΧβον, βυχομαί ηνχομην, οικβω ω /ceov. (a) ΟΥ is neΛ'er augmented ; as ονρανοω ονράνονν, οντάζω ονταζον. (b) ΕΙ is augmented only m ΕΙΔΩ, εΙκάζω, and εϊμι ; thus, fjBeiv, γκαζόν ιίκασα ^κασμαι* S^i-^' 6 122 INFLECTION OF Λν0ΚΒ8. [§§ 93, 94. § 93. 1. Verbs, which originally began with the digamma F, are augmented as if the digamma was still prefixed to them ; that is, they take the syllabic augment e. Some of them take the temporal augment in addition to the syllabic. E. g. ayw/xt, €αξα %aya ζά-γην ; οιγω, €ωξα €ωχα εωγ/ζαί €ωχθην εωγα. See also άλίσκομαι, άνάσσω, άν^άνω, άπτω, εθω, ΕΙΔΩ, εικω, βιλεω, €ΐλω, €t^t, ΕΙΠΩ, €φω, to join, ελττω, βνννμι, εορτάζω, ερδω, ΈΩ, to place, ϊημί, οΙκ.€ω, οίνοχοίω, οράω, ουρ^ω, ωθίω, ώνβομαι, in the Cata- logue of Verbs. 2. Some digammated verbs, after the omission of the digam- ma, contracted the initial syllables ee- into ei ; as εάω, e'laov eX- άσα €Ϊάκα ^Ιάθην, See also ίθίζω, ίΚίσσω, ίλκόω, €\κω, ΈΛΩ, €πω, Εργάζομαι, ζρττνζω, €ρπω, εστιάω, βχω, *ΕΩ, to place, ϊημί, in the Catalogue of. Verbs. JN"oTE 1. ΕΙΔΩ and ef/xt lengthen the syllabic augment e into η, in the forms η-€'ώ€ΐν, ri-'iov η-ίσαν. — "Ε^ω lengthens the augment € into et in the forms €ί-ωθα ά-ωθ^ιν. Note 2. The forms %ωθα Εΐωθα, €ωκα €ωνται, from ζθω,ϊημι, pre- suppose €οθα €ίοθα, ίοκα eovrai. The pluperfects βωκειν, icoKneiv, icdpyeiv, from ζ'ίκω, ελττω, βρδω, come directly from their perfects eouKa, €ολπα, copya. Note 3. In some of the dialects, these verbs were also augmented in the usual way ; as €λκω ηλκον, €χω ηχον. So ^ξ-ηργάσατο, from €ξ-€ργάζομαι, found in a later inscription. Note 4. Some verbs of this class retain the augment of the aorist throughout the dependent moods ; thus, αγννμι, i^-eayelaa κατ-€άξας KaT-€aya> Kar-eayeis ; ΕΙΔΩ, ίεισάμ^νοζ ; βϊλω, ieKaai ; *ΕΩ, είσον el- σας', ών^ομαι, €ωνηθηναί. ^ 94. 1. Some verbs beginning with ά, e, b, fol- lowed by a single consonant, form the augment of the perfect by prefixing the first two letters of the root to the temporal augment. This kind of aug- ment is called the Attic reduplication. E. g. ακούω perf. άκ-ηκοα €μ€ω '' €μ-ημ€κα, €μ-ημ€σμαι ορύσσω ** ορ-ωρνχα,ορ-ωρυγμαι See also αγβιρω, αγω, αΙρ€ω, άκαχίζω, ΑΚΩ, αλάομαι, αλείφω, αλ/ω, αΧνκτάζω, ΑΝΕΘΩ, άραρίσκω, άρβσκω, ορόω, βγειρω, βδω, €\αννω, eXey- ;!^ω, ελίσσω, ΕΝΕΘΩ, ερβίδω, €ρ€ίκω, ερβ/ττω, €ρίζω, άρχομαι, €χω, ημνω, ΟΔΥΩ, οζω, ολΧυμί, ομννμί, οράω, υρίγω, υφαίνω, φβρω, in ihe Catalog^ue of Verbs. § 95.] AUGMENT. 123 • ν 2. When the perfect takes the Attic reduplica- tion, the pluperfect takes no additional augment; as, αη^ίρω α^η^βρκα^ pluperf. ά^η^ερκ€ίν. Except άκονω, άραρίσκω, ζ\αννω, ερβ/δω, ο^ω, oWvjUy ορρυμι, which see in the Catalogue of Verbs. Note, (a) The Epic forms άκάχημαι, άκαχμ^νος, αλάλημαί, άλα- Χνκτημαι^ from ά κ αχ [ζω, ΑΚΩ, άΧάομαι, άΧνκτάζω, and the femi- nine participle άραρυϊα, from άραρίσκω, do not lengthen the second syllable. The common perfect αράρα, from άραρίσκω, merely length- ens the second syllable. (b) The Epic ηρηρασμαι and ΕΪληΧονθα, from €ρβιδω, ζρχομαι, lengthen the first syllable. (c) The Epic form ipipmro from ερξίπω, and the later €μ€μ€Κ€ΐν from €μ€ω, omit the temporal augment. (d) Αίρβω and ημνω shorten the reduplication; thus άραίρηκα άραίρημαι, Avith the smooth breathing ; υπ-€μνημνκ€ with ν inserted. (e) The perfect iypr]yopa, from ζ-γ^ίρω, prefixes eyp- to the tern• poral augment ; that is, it prefixes the root without the second e. (f) The perfect participle σνν-οχωκώς, from €χω, changes e into ο before it takes the Attic reduplication ; thus, €χω OXQ, ωχα, οχ-ωχα, οχωκα, .; v.(g) The perfect ά-γηγοχα or άγηοχα, from αγω, comes from the re- duplicated theme ΑΓΑΓΩ. ^ 95• 1. Verbs compounded with a preposition receive the augment after that preposition. Prepositions ending in a vowel lose that vowel before the syllabic augment e; except irepl and ΊΤρό. Ε. g. ττροσ-γράφω, προσ-εγραφον, προσ-γβγραφα, π pocr-ey έγραφαν, προσ• ε-γραψα άτΓο-κόπτω, άπ-εκοπτον, άπο-κεκοφα, άττ-εκεκόφείν, άπ-εκοψα So ττερι-γράφω περι-εγραφον περί-γεγραμμαι ττερι-εγεγράμμην ττερι- εγράφην, προ-Χεγω προ-εΧεγον, εμπίπτω ενεπίπτον, εγκρίνω ενέκριναν εγκεκρικα, συΧΧνω σννεΧνον σνΧΧεΧνκα, σνζνμόω σννεζυμονν, εκΧνω εξεΧνσα. (^§ 14 ; 17.) 2. Verbs compounded with ev and δυσ-, if they begin with a, β, ο, take the augment after these particles ; in all other cases the augment precedes them, or, in compounds with eS, it may be omitted : 124 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 96. as, €υαρ€στ€ω^ βυηρβστονν ενηρβστηκα ; Βυσαρβστεω, Sv- σηρεστουν Βνσηρεστηκα, So €υ^οκίμ€ω ην^οκίμονν ην^οκίμηκα, 5υ(ττνχ€ω €Βνστυχονν ^€^υστη- χηκα, δυσωτΓβω βδνσωπονν, εύεργετ^ω Ευηργβτονν. So also avrev- ΤΓούω άντ€ν-π€ποίηκα, σνΡ€ν-π€πονθώς from πάσχω. Note 1. The augment is regularly put after the preposition, even when the simple verb has no existence ; as απολαύω άπί\ανον άποΚ^- Χανκα, ζγκωμιάζω ίνΕκωμίασα €γκ€κωμίακα. So €Ύχ€ίρ€ω, €κκλη(ηάζω, ζνθυμίομαι, Επιτη^ενω, κατηγορ€ω, παρανο- μβω, προφασίζομαι, προφητεύω, σνν€ρ'γ€ω. Note 2. Some verbs take the augment before the preposition ; as άροίγω ijvoiyov. A few verbs take the augment before and after the preposition at the same time ; as άνεχω ηνειχόμην. See also άμπεχω, άμφιάζω^ άμφίγνο€ω, άμφίΕνννμι, άμφισβητίω, ανα- λίσκω^ άνβχω, άνορθόω, άντίβολβω, άφενω, άφίημί, ^ιοίκβω, ε/χπβδοω, εγγυάω, εμποΧάω, βνανηόομαι, βνοχΧεω, επίσταμαι, καθίζομαι, καθενδω, καθημαί, καθίζω, μ^θίημι, παροινεω, προχ€ίρίζομαι, πρω-γγνενω, σννίημι, in the Catalogue of Verbs. Note 3. Έκ-κλησιάζω may repeat €κ in the imperfect and aorist ; thus €ξ-€κ-κ\ησίαζον, €ξ-€κ-κλησίασα. Έγ-γνάω repeats iy-{€v) in the forms €ν-€γ-γυώμην, ^ιζ-βγ-γΰτ^σα, ζν-ζγ-'γνησάμην, €ν-€γ-Ύ€γνημηι/. Note 4. Αιαιτάω and ^ιάκονίω are augmented as if Si-, δία- were the preposition hia ; thus, ^ιαιτάω, Ε^ιι^τησα δεδίτ^ττ^/χαί 8ΐϊ]τύ)μην 8ί7)τηθην ; ^ιακονεω, δίηκόνονν ^ε^ιηκόνηκα 3€8ίηκόρημαί β^ιακονηθην. (^95, η. 2.) Note 5. Αμφισβητβω, derived from an imaginary \^erbal sub- stantive in -ητης, compounded of άμφίς and βαίνω, takes the augment before the preposition (^ 95, n. 2), Two of its forms, however, namely, ημφ-ζσβητονν, ημφ-^σβητησα, take the augment also after άμφ-, as if the simple verb began with σ/3-. Note 6. Verbs derived from compound nouns, the first component part of which is a noun, are augmented like simple verbs; as άσεβεω ησίβονν ησεβηκα. Except aptaro7roteo/xat, Ιπποτροφίω,μζΚοπούω, and ονοματοπούω, which see in the Catalogue of Verbs. ' § 96. I. The present of some verbs, beginning Λvith a consonant followed by a vowel or a liquid, prefixes to the root that consonant together with an t ; as βάω βιβάω βίβημι^ ΤΡΑΩ τίτράω^ ΓΕΝΩ γίγνομαι, (a) In a few instances, the present takes the reduplication of the perfect ; as ΤΡΑΩ τ^τραίνω. § ί^^.] AUGMENT. 125 J-W Ι-άχω and ί/ω Ίημι come from ΑΧΩ, ΈΩ, oriirinaHy FAXi2, FEQ. (Compare § 93.) —'Ίττταμαι and Ιστημι come 'ivom ΠΤ^^Ω and ΣΤΑΩ. (Compare ξ> 91, 2, ?i. 3.) (c) The reduplication of the present of some verbs is irregular ; as ^άκτω δαρδάπτω, καγχλάζω καχλάζω, κοχύω, λαλαγέ'ω, μαψάω, παι- φάσσω. 2. In a few instances the present prefixes e to the root, which pre- fix has the appearance of the syllabic augment ; as θξλω ΙβίΧω, όρτά- ζω ίορτάζω. 3. In a feAv instances the present seems to take the teniOoral auo•- ment ; as αγω ηγ€υμαί. 4. Sometimes the root of a verb takes the Attic reduplication, but without the temporal augment of the second syllable ; as ΑΧΩ AKA- ΧΩ άκαχίζω^ 2 A. ηκαχον. See also αγω, αλβ^ω, άπαφίσκω, άραρίσκω, ^λελίζω, ίνίπτω, ορννμι^ in the Catalogue of Verbs. Ατίτάλλω, ονίνημι^ and οττίΤΓτευω, from άτάΧΚω, ΟΝΑΩ, ΟΙΙ- ΤΗΣ, change the second vowel into l after the Attic reduplication. § 97. Dialecfs. 1. The Epic, ^olic, and Doric Poets often omit the augment ; ex- cept the s}dlabic augment of the perfect and pluperfect. The Ionic prose- writers often omit the temporal augment. E. g. φέρω φ€poUf τεΧεντάω τεΧεντηαα, Χαμβάνω Χάβον', άγορενω dyopevov, εργάζομαι εργασμαί, ομίΧεω όμιΧεον. The following verbs often omit the augment even in the Attic dia- lect : άηθεσσο^^ αιω, αυαίνω, οίακοοττροφεω, οΐμώζω, οΐνόομαι^ οίστρ^ω^ υίχομαί, οίωνίζομαι. 2. The Epic dialect lengthens ε in the reduplication into et in the following verbs ; δείδω Βείδοίκα; 3ε ίκνν μι δείδεγμαι δείδεκτο δει- δεχαταί δεώεχ^ατο; δίω, to fear^ δε'ώιμεν δεώνΐα εδείδιμεν; εϊκω (τείκω) εΙοίΚύ)ς {τειτοικως). The common εϊωθα {τείΡωθα)^ from ε θ ω, follows the same analogy. 3. Some Epic forms beginning \vith a liquid, or σ•, double that con- sou ant after the augment ε ; as Χαγχάνω ΤΧΧαχον, σείω εσσείοντο. See also δε'ώω, Χαμβάνω, Χείπω, Χίσσομαι, μανθάνω, ΜΕΙΡΩ, ρεω, ΣΕΥΩ, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 4. In the Ionic dialect, the syllabic augment of the pluperfect is sometimes formed after the analogy of the imperfect ; as μηχανάομαι εμηχάνωτο, παΧΧιΧογ^ω επαΧΧιΧόγητο, in Hippocrates and Herodotus. 5. In the Epic dialect the second aorist active and middle some- times takes the reduplication of the perfect ; as κάμνω κεκάμω, φράζω πεφρα^ε. See also δάκνω, ΔΑΕΩ, to teach, θιγγάνω, θρώσκω, κεΧομαι, κευθω, Χαγχάνω, Χαμβάνω, Χανθάι/ω,Χά(τκω, μάοπτω, πάΧΧω, πείθω, ττλήσσω, 126 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 98 - 100. ΤΑΓΩ, TEMi2, τίρπω^ ητρώσ-κω, τίτυσκομαι, τνπτω, φ^'ώομαι, ΦΕΝΩ, χάζω^ χαίρώ^ in the Catalogue of A^erbs. keXo/xat, ΤΕΜΩ, ΦΕΝΩ, and φράζω may take the syllabic aug- ment € in addition to the reduplication ; thus κ^κΚόμψ €Κ€κΧόμην, re- τμον €Τ€τμόν, πβφνον ^τζζφνον, ττ^φρα^ον εττίφρα^ον. 6. Ένίπτω and Ιρνκω take, in the second aorist, a kind of Attic reduplication at the end of the root ; thus ψίπαπορ, ηρνκακον, Epic. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. The title, " Formation of the Tenses," relates only to the first per- son singular of the tenses of the indicative. For the inflection of the tenses in the other moods, see below. ^98. 1. The root of a verb consists of those letters which are found in every part of that verb ; as ημάω, λέγω, μβνω, roOtS ημα-^ λβγ-, μ^ν. 2. Verbs are divided into pure^ mute^ and liquid^ according as the root ends in a vowel, a mute (τΓ, β^ Φ ; '^j 7^ % ; '^? δ, θ^ also ξ*), or a liquid (λ, )L6, V, p) ; as βονλβνω, a pure verb ; λε/ττω, λέγομαι, mute verbs ; /^ελω, οΒυρομαι, liquid verbs. § 09. The root of a pure verb is obtained by dropping ω or ομαι of the present ; as τί/ιά-ω, φιλε-ω, άρνί-ομαι. The root of a liquid verb may be obtained by dropping ω, ομαι of the present, or ώ of the future ; as /Χ6ΐ/-ω, οδυρ-ομαι^ βάλλω βαλ'ώ. The root of a mute verb may be obtained by dropping ω, ομαι of the present, oz/, ομην, ην of the second aorist, a of the second perfect ; or from some kindred word ; as λεγ-ω, €-τάγ-ην, άπτω άφ-η, κρύπτω e -κρύβ-ην κρνφ-α. J^ 100• Veiy frequently, the root of a verb is, by the addition of one or more letters, strengthened in the present \\ for exam- ple, the roots of the presents μανθάνω, ττννθάνομαι, ^ώάσκω, πράσ- σω are μανθαν-, πννθαν-^ διδασΑί-, πρασσ-^ but the rootS of these verbs are ΜΑΘ-, ΠΥΘ-, ΔΑ-, ΠΡΑΓ-. For practical purposes, an Ω is often appended to the root. of the verb when it is obscured in the pi'esent ; in which case it is called the simple theme., or sim^pJe or imogmary present ; thus, the simple themes of μανθά- νω, πυνθάνομαι, δώάσκω, πράσσω are ΜΑΘΩ, ΠΥΘΩ, ΔΑΩ, ΠΡΑΓΩ. ! As a common rule, when the root is modified in the present, the other tenses, except the imperfect, are derived from the § 101.1 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 127 simple present : for example, the perfect active of αγγ/λλω is rjyy^X'Ka, from ΑΓΓΕΛ-, ΑΓΓΕΛΩ. § 1®I. 1. A^erbal roots are strengthened by the addition of Δ, Z, Θ, K, N, Σ, ΣΚ, T, X ; also by doubling λ, ν, ρ, Λvhen they stand at the end of the root. -α(,νω or -ανω \^ often appended to roots ; as άλφαιρω, οσφραίρομαι, αυξάνω, άπ€χθάνομαί, Ικάνω. So ^ζΐκ-αν-άω, Ισχ-αν-άω. — Not un- frequently a root is strengthened by annexing -ανω (sometimes -at- νω), and inserting ν before its last letter; as άν3άνω, μανθάνω, ipvy- yai/oj, λαγ;^άνω, Χαμβάνω, (^ 14.) -δω is appended to the root of a few verbs; άμ€ρ8ω, δειδω, 'ΕΔΩ, ΑΧΕΔΩ, ΕΑΑΔΩ, ΒΑΔΩ vado. -€LvωJ m αλβ-ειι/ω, ζρ€-€ίνω, φα-^ίνω. ' f ω is not unfrequently appended to the root in the present ; if the root ends in a consonant, -ζω is preceded by a, t, or υ ; as σχά^ω, ^ακνάζομαι^ άκαχίζω, κτίζω, ίρπνζω. — Ihe root of some primitive verbs in -^ω ends in δ ; as εζομαι, 6ζω, φράζω. Here δ is changed into its kmdred ^ (ξ» 10). In general however the root of verbs in -^ω ends in ζ ; as ζΧπίζ-ω, φωτίζ-ω, roots ξΧπιζ-, φωτιζ-, — See also -σσω. 6 ω is not unfrequently appended to the root ; when the root ends in a consonant, -θω is commonly preceded by a, €, or υ ; ττβλά^ω, άΧη- θω, ττΧηθω, σηθω,βσθω {ed -θω), φλεγ/^ω, ηγερίθομαι, τζΧβθω, φθινύ- θω. In this case, the present indicative in -a ^ ω is not used ; thus, αΧκαθω^ αμνναβω, 3ίωκαθω, ζ^ργαθω, €ίργαθω, εργαθω, κιαθω are used only in the dependent moods and imperfect ; as άΧκάθ€ΐν, άμυ- νάθζΐν, εδίώκαθον. -IV ω, - 1 1/ 6 ω, in 6ρ-ίνω , άγ-ίν€ω . κω is appended to the root of a feΛV verbs ; as €ρνκω, ολβκω. ^ -λ λ ω comes from -λω by doubling λ ; as άγγίΧ-Χω, σφάλ-λω, τίΧΧω. So οΧΧύω οΧΧνμι, from ΟΑΩ, with ν annexed to the root. -ναω or -νημί, formed by inserting ν before a ; in which case, e, in the first syllable of the verb, becomes t ; thus, πιΧνάω, κίρνάω, πε- τνημί, σκ'ώνημι, κίδνημί, from τΓβλαω, Κ€ράω, 7Γ€τάω, ΣΚΕΔΑΩ, ΚΕ- ΔΑΩ. But περνημί, κρεμνάω κρημνάω do not change e into t. -ι/εω is sometimes appended to the root; as βννβω, ίκν€ομαί, Ισχνί- ομαί, -ν ν ω, from -νω ; an uoEohc peculiarity ; as κρίννω, for κρΤνω, Δ^-ννω or -ννμί is often appended to the root ; as αγννμί, δαίννμι^ ^ίχνυμαι. If the root ends in a vowel, the ν is generally doubled ; further, ο is lengthened into ω before ν ; as Ενννμί (eti /ΰω), ζωνννμι, τίνυμι τίνννμι. So κτίνννμί from ΚΤΕΝΩ, with a change of e into t. ϊ/ω is often appended to the root; as κάμνω, δάκνω, κορθννω, Ιστάνω, φθίνω. So πίτνω from ΠΕΤΩ, with a change'of e into t. -ξ ω, in the present, comes from -κω or -γω, by annexing σ to the root ; thus, άΧεξω, αϋξω, όδά^ω. τΓτω, in the present, comes from -πω, -βω, -φω, by annexing r to the VZ^ INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 102, 103. loot; as τνπτω (π) , βλάπτω (/3), σκάπτω (φ). For the euphonic changes see above {^ 13, 1). -ρρω comes from -ρω by doubling ρ ; as €ρ-ρω, aip -ρω, Ιμ^ρ-ρω. This is an ^'i'.ohc peculiarity. -σγω, only in μίσ-γω, from ΜΙΓΩ. ' σκω is, in a few instances, formed by inserting σ before -κω or -;^ω; thus, αλύσκω, ϋ'σκω, Χάσκω, τίτυσκομαι, δεδίσ/^ο/χαί, ^ώάσκω. Roots, ending in a vowel, are very often strengthened, in the present, by σκ ; in which case the radical vowel is often lengthened before σκ ; as βάσκω βίβάσκω, αρέσκω, πιπίσκω, βιβρωσκω, Θνη σκω, κίκλησκω. — If the root ends in a consonant, t is inserted be- fore σκ ; as όΧίσκομαι, άμβΧίσκω, ευρίσκω ; also κυΐσκω. -σπω is formed by inserting σ before π in the forms εσπομαι, €σπ€Τ€, €νίσπω. -σσω or -rr ω, in the present, comes from -^^ω, -γω, or -χω, and some- times from -τω, -θω, or -πω, by annexing σ to the root (^ 13, 10) ; as μοΧάσσω (κ), άΧΧάσσω (γ), ταράσσω (χ) : Χίσσομαι (τ), κυρυσ- σω {θ) : ίνίσσω (π), οσσομαι {π), πεσσω (π). — Sometimes σσ is changed into f ; thus άρμόσσω αρμόζω, ίΧίσσω ^Χ^Χίζω, βράσσω• βράζω, σνρίττω σνρίζω, σφάττω σφάζω. In some verbs of this description -σσω is always changed into -^ω ; as αρπάζω (γ), άΧαΧά- ζω (γ), βρίζω, ^αΐζω, ^ναρίζω, κΧάζω (γ), κοΐζω, κράζω (γ), Χάζομαί (β), μαστίζω (γ), νίζω (β), οΐμώζω (γ), όΧοΧνζω (γ), παίζω [y, δ), ττλά^ω (y), ρεζω (γ), στάζω (y), σταΧάζω, στηρίζω, στ€νάζω [χ), στίζω (γ), σφύζω, τρίζω (γ). — Α few roots ending in a vowel are . strengthened by σσ or ττ ; as άηθε-σσω, άφά-σσω, άΧν-σσω, -σχω, only in ϊσχω from εχω. -τω, in a few pure verbs ; άρύτω, άνύτω, 'Χ ω, rare ; νηχομαι, ΔΙΔΑΧΩ, στεν-ά-χω with α inserted. -ψ ω, in the present of ζφω (επ-σω). 2. Some roots ending in a consonant are strengthened by in- serting V before that consonant; ΕΝΕΓΚΩ, ΠΛΑΓΓΩ, ΣΑΑΠΙΓΓΩ, ΕΝΠΩ. (§ 14.) § 1012. The radical vowel is often lengthened in the fol- lowing manner : α into r; or at, sometimes into α ; as ΛΑΘΩ Χηθω, άγάομαι άγαίομαι, ΦΑΝΩ φαίνω εφηνα, ΚΑΩ καίω κάω, ΠΡΑΓΩ πεπράγα. In the aorist active of liquid verbs, and in the second perfect, it is commonly lengthened into η, € — ft, commonly in liquid verbs; rarely into η ; as ΑΜΕΡΩ άμ^ίρω, ΣΠΕΡΩ σπβίρω βσπβιρα, ΕΠΩ ΕΙΠΩ, ΕΩ εΙμί ; μεΧω μβμηΧα. L — €ί ; before a liquid into Γ; as ΑΑΙΦΩ άΧείφω, ΛΙΠΩ λείπω, ΤΙΑΩ €τϊΧα, Κ ΑΙΝΩ κΧΤνω εκΧΙνα. ο — ου ; ΑΚΟΩ άκονω, βόΧομαι βούΧομαι. ν — €v\ before a liquid into ν ; ΦΥΓΩ φενγω, ΚΥΘΩ κεύθω, ΑΙΣΧΥΝΩ αίσχϋνω. § 103. 1. When the radical vowel of a dissyllabic liquid § 104.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 129 verb is e, it is changed into a in the perfect, pluperfect, aorist passive, future passive, second aorist, and sometimes in the present, future active, and aorist active. This commutation takes place also in dissyllabic mute verbs when c is preceded or followed by a liquid. E. g. στβλ-λω, €σταΧκα ίσταΧμαι, €στάλθην, €στάλην τρίπω τράπω, τίτραμμαι^ €τράφθην, €τραπον €τράπην See also 8^ρκομαί, δερω, δρεττω, εϊλω, Κ€ίρω, κτ€ίι/ω, λβττω, πε/ρω, ττερθω^ πλ€κω, σπ€ίρω, στρέψω, τβμνω, μείρομαι^ τέρπω, τρέφω, τρεχ^ω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. The following retain the e in the second aorist : ΓΕΝΩ, ΕΛί2, ΕΡΟ•. ]MAI, θείνω, βερομαι, \εγω, to collect, στερεω, τέμνω, τερσομαι, φλέγω. ^ 2. When the radical vowel of a verb is e, it is regularly changed into ο in the second perfect, and sometimes in the per- fect, and second aorist active ; as, δερκομαι 8ε8ορκα, ΓΕΝί2 γε-γονα, στεργω εστοργα κλέπτω κεκΧοφα, πέμπω πεπομφα, πΧεκω πεπΧοχα μείρομαι εμμορα μεμορμενος εμμορον See also ΑΝΕΘΩ, εΧπω, εγείρω, ΕΝΕΘΩ, ε,οδω, εσθίω, Ίημι, Χαγχά- νω, Χεγω, to collect, ΑΕΧΩ, ΜΕΝΩ, ζνν-νεφεω^ πάσχω, περ^ομαι, στρέ- φω, τίκτω, τρέπω, τρέφω, τρέχω, φερβω, φέρω, χέζω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. (a) In some verbs, the e of the diphthongs ει and εν becomes ο in the perfect ; see δειδω, ΕΙΔΩ, είκω, ΕΑΕΥΘΩ, Χείπω, πείθω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. (b) Not unfrequently the radical vowel ε is changed into ω ; as ΑΕΡΩ αωρτο, πΧεω πΧώω. Most commonly, however, ε becomes o, ω, and εω, αω are annexed to the root ; as στρέφω στρωφάω. 3. Sometimes e is changed into t ; as εζομαι Ιζω, ΈΩ ιω, εχω ϊσχω. 4. Sometimes the radical νοΛνεΙ α is changed into ο or ω ; as μηχανάομαι, άτιμάω, lonic pluperfect εμηχάνωτο, ητίμωτο, implying -όομαι, -όω ; ζάω ζώω^ ΤΡΑΓΩ τρώγω. See also άγω, άμαρτάνω, πάσχω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. ΑΥΡΩ changes a into ο in the forms άπ -ovpas άπ-ουράμενος, .\_§ 104. 1. Roots are very often prolonged by annexing e, sometimes a or o, rarely ι or v, to their last letter ; as αίρομαι αώεομαι, Ισχάνω Ισχανάω, ΆΑΩ *ΑΑ0Ω, εσβω εσθίω, ανω ανυω. Particularly in the Ionic dialect, verbs in ω are not unfre- quently inflected after the analogy of verbs in €ω ; as αγόμενος άγεόμενοζ, βάΧΧείΡ βαΧΧεειν, σχεθειν σχεθεειν, βαΧλόμενος /SaXXeo- uevosy ^ύνουσι δυνεουσι^ ρεόύμ€νοε ρεόμενο:. β* 130 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 105 - 107. So €Χχ€€, eyjree, ωφλ€€, lonic for €t;^e, ηψ^ί ωφλε, from ζ^ω, Ιψω, οψλισκάνω, 2. When the root is thus prolonged, the radical vowel e is very often changed into o. The Poets may further change it into ω, and then prolong the root by annexing a to it ; as ΔΡΕ- ΜΩ δρομάω δρω/χάω ; π^ρθω ττορθίω, , 3. When a root contains two consonants without an inter- vening vowel, it may be prolonged by inserting a short vowel between those consonants ; thus, ΕΝΠί2 ^νίπω ΕΝΙΠΩ, θράσσω ταράσσω, ΠΝΥί2 πίννσκω. § \05. 1. Sometimes the root is syncopated ; in \vhich case, monosyllabic roots lose their vowel ; dissyllabic and poly- syllabic roots most commonly drop their last vowel ; as άγζίρω aypopevos, ΓΕΝί2 yiyvopat. See also ά\€ξω, €γ€ίρω, βρχορ,αι, Κ€\ομαί, κ^ράνννμι^ μίμνω^ ττ€\άω, ττίΧω, πιπράσκω, 7Γ€τάω, ϊπταμαι, π€τομαί,, πίπτω, €πω, ^χω, ΤΑΛΑΩ, τίκτω (for τίτ-κω), ΤΕΜΩ, ΦΕΝΩ, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 2. In some verbs the root undergoes a metathesis ; as bipKo- μαι edpaKov ίδράκην. See also άμαρτάνω, βάλλω, βιβρώσκω, βλώσκω, δα/χάω, δε^ω, θνη- σκω, θρώσκω, καλβω, κάμνω, μβίρομαί, μ€\ω, περδομαί, π€ρθω, ΠΟΡΩ, ΣΚΕΛΛΩ, Τ€μνω, στρώννυμι, Τ€ρπω, τίτρωσκω. % 106• New themes are sometimes formed from the per- fect active, and second aorist, by changing a, ov, ομην into ω, ομαι ; as γίγνομαί yeyaa, new present yeyάoμaι ; ΔΑΕΩ dedaa, δβ- δάομαί. So iyζίpω iyprjyopa, iypηyopάω ypηyopeω, both prolonged ; Ίστημι Ζστηκα, στηκω ; Τ€μνω τβτμηκα, τμηyω. So also Ίημι (ηκα), ηκω ; ϊω {ίκα) ϊκω. § 107. The last vowel of the root of a pure verb, if short, is lengthened in all the tenses, ex- cept the present and imperfect• In this case, a is lengthened into η; when how- ever it is preceded by β, t, or p, it is only length- ened. E. g. τιμάω τιμήσω €τίμησα τβτίμηκα Τ€τίμημαι ζτιμηθην φίλίω φιλήσω €φίλησα π^φίΧηκα π^φίΧημαι Ιφιληθην δηλόω δηλώσω €δήλωσα δζδι'ιλωκα δεδήλω/χα* €3ηλώθην tsj 108.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 131 τίω τϊσω ετΤσα τΙτΤκα τίτΤμαι δακρνω δακρύσω β^άκρϋσα dedaKpvKa δεδάκρϋ/χαι €άω ίάσω ζΐάσα ζ'ίάκα ζΐάθην Ιάομαι Ιάσομαι Ιάσάμην δράω δρά<τω edpdaa de δράκα δβδράμαι Note 1. Ακροάομαι, βηινάω^ ΠΑΟΜΑΙ, ττίΚάω (ΠΑΑί2), and ποινάο- μαι, do not change ά into η ; as άκροάσομαι, βοινάσομαι. πάσομαι, €7τ\ά- θην^ ποινάσομαι. — Π.ίμπρημί (ΠΡΑΩ), ητράω (ΤΡΑΩ), χράω χράομαι^ change d into η ; as πρησω, Ετρησα, χρησομαι. — 'Έω, to ylace^ has F. ^Ίσομαί. θέω {τίθημι), to put, has Perf. τβθβίκα, re^et/jtai. Note 2. Many pure verbs retain the short radical vowel through all the tenses ; as, γελάω γελάσω ε-γίΚάσα, καλεω καλέσω εκάλβσα See also αγαμαί, ΑΕΩ, άηθβσσω, άκ€θμαί, άκηδβω, άλεο /zat, αλεω, αλ- θομαί, άμφL€vuvμL, άντιάω, άννω, άραρίσκω, άρίσκω, άρκέω, αρόω, άρύω, άφύω, αχβομαί, βδ^ω, γελάω, δαίνυμι, δαίομαι^ ^Ιμ'ι•, ^Καννω, ΕΑΥΩ, ev νυμίη €ραμαί, ε'ράω, ε'ρΰω, εσ^/ω, ^εω, ΘΧάω, ΐλάσκομαι^ καλεω, κ^ράννυ- μι, κλάω, κοτβω, κρβμάνννμί,Χο^ω, μαίομαι, μεθύσκω, ραίω, ν€ΐκζω, ξε'ω, ολΧνμί, ομννμι, ονομαι, ορννμί, ττατίομαι^ 7Τ€τάννυμί, πιπράσκω^ τττνω^ σκ^δάνννμι^ σπάω, στορ^νννμι, ΤΑΑΑΩ, τανύω, τελεω, τρεω, φθίω, χαλάω, χβω, in the Catalogue of A^erbs. Note 3. The quantity of the last radical vowel of some pure verbs is variable ; as, αΙν€ω, αΐνίσω, αΐνησω, ι^νησα, fjv€Ka, γινημαι, ^νεθην See also ΑΑΩ, άγρεω, αΐδεομαι, αΐνεω, αίρεω, άκαχίζω, άνω, άφάω βαίνω, γαμβω, θεω, to hind, δίδωμι, δυναμαι, δύω, είρύω, έλκω, ε/^ε'ω, ευνάω, ευρίσκω, ευτνχεω, εχω, κηδω, κορενννμί,Χνω, μάχομαι, νέμω, οζω, υνίνημί^ πεινάω, πίμπρημι, πινύσκω, πίνω, ποθεω, πονεω, ΡΕΩ, to say, ρνομαι, σβενννμι, στερε'ω, τίθημί, ΦΕΝΩ, φημί, φθάνω, φβονεω, φορεω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. Present and Imperfect, a^ 1©8. 1. Ail verbal forms are, in practice, re- ferred to the present indicative. For example, έμαθαν, ελείφθην, εσφηλα, are, in parsing, said to come from μανθάνω, Χείπω, σφάλλω. 2. To form the present passive, drop ω of the present active, and annex ομαί ; as βουλεύω βουΚεύ ^ ομαί, Ct3. To form the imperfect active, drop ω of the present, annex ov, and prefix its augment ; as βου- Χβνω εβουΧβνον. 132 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 109. 4. To form the imperfect passive, drop ομαι of the present, annex ομην^ and prefix its augment ; as βονΧεύω, βουΧβνομαί ββουΧβνομην. Future and Aorist Active and Middle. ^ 109. 1. To form the futm'e active, drop ω of the present, and annex σω ; as βονλενω βονΧ€ύσω. So τιμάω τιμήσω, καλίω καλ€σω, πλε/^ω ττλβξω, γράφω γράλΙ^ω, αδο) acrco, ζΧπίζω ελπίσω, σπ^ν^ω σττβισω. (§^ 107 ; 13.) So also κράζω (ΚΡΑΓί2) κράξω, βλάπτω (ΒΛΑΒΏ) βλάψω, ττράσσω (ΠΡΑΓΩ) πράξω, πλάσσω (ΠΛΑΘΩ) ττλάσω. (§ 101.) 2. Το form the future active of a liquid verb, annex εω, contracted ω, to the root ; as μβνω μβνβω μένω, καθαιρώ καθαρβω καθαρω. So κρίνο) κρίνω, άμννω άμννω, φαίνω φάνω, κτ^ίνω κτ€νώ, dyyeXXco άγγ€λώ, στίλλω στβλώ. σπείρω σπερώ. {^^ 100— 103.) 3. Το form the future middle, drop ω of the future active, and annex ομαί ; as βουΧβύω βον- Χβνσω βονΧβυσομαί ; αμυνω αμννβω αμννβομαί con- tracted άμννονμαί. Note Ι. (a) Futures in ασω and βσω, from verbs in αω, αζω, βω, often drop σ, and are contracted like verbs in αω and εω. The Attic dialect uses only the contracted form. E. g. €λαννω, βιβάζω, F. βλάσω ελω, βιβάσω βιβω δικάζω, τβλέω, F. δικάσω δίκώ, τελέσω τελεω τελώ The future middle, in this case, is contracted chiefly in ε/^εω ζμβσο- μαι εμονμαι, κολάζω κολάσομαι κολοψαι, μάχομαι μαχ^σομαι μαχίομαι μαχονμαι. (b) In a few instances, άσω, ωσω seem to be contracted into ώ ac- cording to the preceding analogy ; thus, δράω, ερημόω, Μομαι, F. δρά- σω δρω, €ρημύ)σ€Τ6 €ρημουτ€, ^ζησόμ^θα ^€ονμζθα. (c) In the Epic dialect, ΔΑΕΩ (ΔΑΩ), to teach, €ρνω, to draw, ΚΕΙΩ or ΚΕΩ, to cause to lie down, and τανύω, to stretch, drop the σ in the future ; thus, F. δτ^ω, I shall find, ερύσω ερύω, κειω or κίω, 1 shall lie down, τανύσω ταννω. Note 2. Futures in ϊσω, from verbs in ιζω, drop σω and annex €ω, which is always contracted into ώ ; that is, ίσω ίσομαι become ιώ ιουμαι, respectively ; as, οΐκίζω. l•. οΐκίσω ουαώ, οΐκίσομαι οίκωυμαι φροντίζω, F. φρ'οντί&ω φροιτη'ω φρ'όί/τίΌνμαι § 110.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 133 L Note 3. (a) Some mute verbs form the future middle after the analogy of liquid verbs ; thus, καθβζομαι καθβ^ονμαί, μανθάνω μαθβνμαί Doric for μαθονμαι, τίκτω Τ€Κουμαί, τρίβω σνν-τριβύται. (b) The following form the future middle without the characteristic σ : βδω (ΦΑΓί2), to eat, F. ξδυμαι, φάγομαι, I shall eat ; πίνω, to drink, F. πίομαί, I shall drink. For βδομαί, πίομαι, the later Greeks said Μυούμαι, πιονμαι^ formed according to the preceding analogy. (c) The future 8ράμομαί, for ^ραμουμαι, from τρβχω (ΔΡΕΜί2), is formed after the analogy of ^bopai. ^ 11©. 1. To form the aorist active, drop ω of the present, annex σα, and prefix its augment ; as, βουΧενω εβουΚβυσα, So τιμάω €τίμησα, γβλαω iyeXaaa, καΧβω €κάΧ€σα, πΚίζω ^πΚ^ζα^ γράφω έγραψα, αδω fjaa, ελπίζω ήΧπισα, σπενδω ίσπεισα. {^^ 107; 13.) So also βλάπτω (ΒΛΑΒΩ) έβλαψα, πράσσω (ΠΡΑΓί2) έπραξα, πλάσσω (ΠΑΑΘΩ) έπλασα. (^ 101.) (2, Το form the aorist active of a liquid verb, an- nex a to the root, lengthen the radical vowel, and prefix its augment ; as κρίνω βκρϊνα, στβΧλω eareiXa. So άμννω ημννα, τίλλω ετΤλα, σπείρω έσπειρα, μένω έμεινα, σφάλλω €σφηλα, φαίνω εφηνα, καθαιρώ εκάθηρα. (§ 102.) a3. Το form the aorist middle, drop a of the aorist active, and annex αμηρ; as βοϋλβνω, ββούΧβυσα ββον- Χβνσαμην ; κρίνω, βκρίνα βκρίναμην. ΓίΝοτΕ 1. These three verbs, δίδωμι, τίθημι, and Ίημι, take κα instead of σα in the aorist ; thus, έδωκα, εθηκα εθηκάμην, ηκα ηκάμην. Note 2. Some verbs do not take σ in the aorist ; as άλεομαι or αλεύομαι ηλεάμην or ηλενάμην. See also δατεομαι, καίω, ΣΕΥΩ, φέ- ρω, χεω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. - Note 3. In a few instances, the aorist annexes σον, σο.μψ to the root, that is, it is inflected after the analogy of the second aorist. See ay ω, άείδω, βαίνω, δύω, ΐκω, ΛΕΧΩ, ορννμι, πίνω, πίπτω, φέρω, χ^ζω^ in the Catalogue of Verbs. Note 4. Verbs in -ιαίνω and -ραίνω lengthen the radical vowel into α ; as πιαίνω έπιανα, περαίνω επεράνα, επικραίνω επεκράνα. Also the following : Ισχναίνω 'ίσχνάνα, κερδαίνω εκερδάνα, κοιλαίνω εκοίΧάνα, λενκαίνω ελεύκάνα, οργαίνω ωργάνα, πεπαίνω επεπάνα. But τετ ραίνω Ιτετρηνα ετΈτρηνάμην^ μιαίνω εμίηνα rarely εμίάνα. 134 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 1^^ JSoTE 5. The radical vowel of αΐ'ρω and αλλο /xat becomes η only in the indicative, in consequence of the augment ; in the other moods it is merely lengthened ; thus αίρω η pa αρω αραιμι άρον cipas, ηράμην αρωμαι ; αΧλομαι, ηΚάμην αλωμαί. Note 6. In later Greek, verbs in -αίνω and -αίρω often lengthen the radical vowel into ά ; as σημαίνω βσημάνα, καθαιρώ βκάθάρα, €χθ αί- ρω ήχθάρα, φαίνω ^φάνα. Note 7. The aorist in -ηνα, -η pa, from verbs in -αίνω, -αίρω, is often written -771/a, -jjpa, with iota subscript, as if at were changed into rj. But this is incorrect, first, because the aorist of liquid verbs comes from the root ; secondly, because in ancient inscriptions it is written Avithout this t ; thus, €π-€κράν€, άν-βφηνβ, καθηράντων, κατ-αραι iir-apri in-apas, fjpe αρατο. Note 8. The future and aorist of some liquid verbs are formed after the analogy of other verbs ; that is, by annexing σω, σα to the root ; as, Κ€ίρω, F, κίρσω, A. €Κ€ρσα. See also αβίρω, άερρω, €ρρω, άραρί- σκω, βίλω, €λαυνω, θ€ρομαί, Κ€λλω, κνρω, μ€ίρομαι,6ρννμι,Τ€ίρω, φθζί- ρω, φνρω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. Perfect^ Pluperfect^ and Aorist and Future Passive. ^ 111. 1. To form the perfect active, drop ω of the present, annex κα, and prefix its augment; as βονΧβύω βββουΚβυκα, So τιμάω Τ€τίμηκα, αδω ^κα, ττ^ίθω π€7Τ€ίκα, €Χπίζω ηΚπικα. (§§ 107 ; 13, 8.) So also αγγελλω rjyyiKKa, φαίνω πβφαγκα, καθαίρω κ€κάθαρ- κα, στέλλω €στα\κα, σπείρω εσπαρκα. (§§ 100 ; ΙΟΙ ; 103 ; 14.) 2. Το form the perfect active of mute verbs whose root ends in a labial (ττ, β, φ) or a palatal (λ:, 7, χ), drop ω of the present, annex a, change the preceding smooth or middle mute into its cor- responding rough mute (, χ), and prefix its aug- ment ; φ and χ of course remain unchanged ; as τρίβω τβτρίφα^ Ίτλβκω ττεττλεχα. So Ύράφω y έγραφα, ρίπτω ερριφα, τευχω τετευχα, πράσσω πεπραχα. (Μ01.) 3. Το form the perfect passive, drop ω of the present active, annex μαι^ and prefix its augment ; as βουΧβύω βββουΧβυμαο, ^ 111. J FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 135 So τιμάω Τ€τΙμημαί, άνιάω ηνίάμαι ^ ττλεκω ττ/ττλεγμαι, λβ/ττωλβλβί/χ/χαι, π€ίθω πίττειαμαί^ χωρίζω κ€χό)ρίσμαι, σπ€ν8ω βσττβισ/χαι. {^^ 107 ; 13 ; 14.) So also ογγ^λλω ήγγβλμαί, αίσχννω ^σχνμμαι^ καθαιρώ κ€κάθαρμαί^ αίρω ηρμαι, στβΧλω ίσταΚμαι, σπείρω βσπαρμαυ. (^^ 100 ; 103; 14.) 4. Το form the pluperfect active, drop α of the perfect, annex ecv^ and prefix its augment ; as βου- Χβυω βεβουΧβυκα ββεβούλβνκείν, 5. To form the pluperfect passive, drop μαί of the perfect passive, annex μην, and prefix its aug- ment ; as βουλβύω βββούλβυμαί Ιβεβούλβνμην. 6. To form the aorist passive, drop ω of the pres- ent active, annex θην, and prefix its augment ; as βουΧβύω ββουΧβύθην. So τιμάω €τιμηθην, πλ€κω €πλ€χθην, \ξγω €λ€χθην, λβιττω ίλ^ίφθην, ΤΓ^ΙΘω ζ-πΕίσθην, χωρίζω €χωρίσθην, (^ξ^ 107 ; 13.) So also αγγβλλω ηΎγ€Χ6ην, φαίνω βφάνθην, αίσχύνω -ησχννθην^ καθαιρώ €καθάρθην, α'ίρω ήρθψ\ στ€λλω €στάλθην^ (^^100; 103.) 7. Το form the future passive, drop θην of the aorist passive, annex θησομ^αι, and reject the aug ment ; as βοϋΧβυω ββουΧβυθην βουΧβυθησομαί, Note 1. (a) The ίοΠοΛνίησ mute verbs change e into a in the per- fect passive ; στρέφω €στραμμαι, τρ^πω τβτραμμαι, τρ^φω τζθραμμαι. The Ionic dialect changes it also in the aorist ; thus βστράφθην, irpa- φθην. (§103.) Tp βτΓ ω has also perfect active τ€τ/3αφα. (b) In some instances the radical vowel e becomes ο , rarely ω, in the perfect and pluperfect; as κλετττω κάκλοφα €κβκ\όφ€ΐν. (§ 103,2.) See also ά^ίρω, δβ/δω, €χω, ιημι, Χαγχάνο:)^ ΛΕΧΩ, μζίρομαι^ ζυνν€φ€ω, πέμ- πω, πλβκω, στρέφω, τίκτω, τρέπω, φέρω, in the Catalogue of A^erbs. (c) "Αγω and πάσχω change the radical α into ο in the forms ayr)- γηχα or ά-γτιοχα, πεποσχα, (§ 103, 2, b.) ^ Note 2. When, in the perfect passive, yy or /li/x \vould come to stand before μαι, μέθα, the combinations γγμ, μμμ become yju. μμ, for the sake of euphony ; as εΚεΎχω εΧηΧεγγ-μαι εΧηΧεγμαι, κάμπτω κε- καμμ-μαι κεκαμμαι. When μμ ΛνοηΜ come to stand after a consonant, it drops one μ ; as τέρπω τετερμ-μαι τετερμαι. * Note 3. In a few instances, the unguals δ, θ remain unchanged 136 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 112. before jjl; as ΚΑΔΩ, Κ€κα^μαι κορύσ(τω, κ^κόρυθμαι, in Homer; πνκά' ζω ΤΓβπύκαδ/χαι, in Sappho. Note 4. Many pure verbs, especially such as do not lengthen the radical vowel, insert σ before μαι^ μ€θα, μένος, and rat of the perfect passive, and before θην of the aorist passive ; as τβλεω, τετ^λβσ/χαι τξτίΚζσμζθα τετελεσμένος, τετε\εσται ; ετε\εσθην. See also ΑΑΩ, αγαμαι, αώίομαι, άκονω, άλεω, €ΐλθομαί, άμφιενννμι^ άννω, αρέσκω, άρνω, ηχθομαι, βαίνω, βοάω, βνεω, γβλάω, "γι-γνωσκω, δαίννμί, Καίομαι, δεω, δράω, δνναμαι, είρυω, ε\αννω, ΕΑΥΩ, ενννμι, εδω, *Εί2, to seat, ζεω, ζώνννμι, 6\άω, 6 ράνω, ιλάσκομαι, καΧεω, κεΧενω, κε- ράνννμι, κλαίω, κΧάω, to break, κΧείω, to slnd, κΧηΐω, κναίω, κνάω, κο- Χονω, κορενννμι, κρεμάνννμι, κρούω, κνΧίω, Χενω, to stone, μάχομαι, με- θνω, μιμνησκω, ναίω, νεω, ζεω, ο'ίομαι, ομννμι, ονομαι, παΧαίω, πατεο- μαί, πάνω, ττετάνννμι, πίμπΧημι, ττίμπρημι, ττιπίσκω, πΧεω, πνέω, πρίω, πτύω, ραίω, ρωνννμι, σάω, to sift, σβενννμι, σείω, σκεδάνννμι, σπάω, στορενννμι, ταννω, τίνω, νω, φέρω, φλάω, φΧνω, φρεο^, χαΧάω, χόω, χρά- ομαι, χράω, χρ^ω, χώνννμυ, ψαύω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. Note 5. (a) The following verbs in νω drop ν in the perfect ac- tive and passive, and aorist passive; κΧίνω, κεκΧικα κεκΧιμαι εκΧίθην; κρίνω, κεκρικα κεκριμαί εκρίθην ; πΧύνω, πεπΧνκα πεπΧνμαι επΧύθην, The Poets hoAvever often retain the ν in the aorist passive ; thus εκλίν θην, εκρίνθην, επΧννθην. (b) The perfect drops the ν also in a few other verbs in νω ; as κερ- ^αίνω κεκερδακα, βραδύνω εβεβραδύκειν, τραχύνω τετράχνμ,αί. Note 6. Some verbs in νω drop ν before the endings pat, μέθα, μένος, of the perfect passive, and insert σ ; as φαίνω πεφασμαι πεφά- σμεθα πεφασμενος. So σημαίνω σεσημασμαι -σμεθα -σ μένος, περαίνω πεπερασμαι -σμεθα -σ μένος, ραίνω ερρασμαι, παχύνω πεπάχνσμαι, μοΧύνω μεμόΧνσμαι, Χν- μαίνομαι ΧεΧνμασμαι, μιαίνω μεμίασμαι, νφαίνω νφασμαι. — ξηραίνω has εζηραμμαι and εζηρασμαι. ' Note 7. In the following forms, the perfect takes the characteristic of the aorist : 'ίσάσι, ε'ίξάσι, γεγ ράψαταί (Tabul. Heracl.), for Ίδασι, ε'ίκασι, γεγράφαται, from ΙΔΩ, ε'ίκω, γράφω. Future Perfect. ^ lis. 1. To form the future perfect active, drop a of the perfect, and annex σω, Avhich may assume the middle form σομαι ; as θνησκω, τβθνηκα τβθντιξω or τβθνηξομαί. See also δ^/δω, ϊστημι, κηδω, κΧάζω, κράζω, χαίρω, in the Catalogue of A'^erbs. 2. To form the future perfect passive, drop at of ^ 113.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 137 the second person singular of the perfect passive, and annex ομαί ; as βλατττω^ βεβλαψαο βββλάψομαι. See also /3άλλω, βιβρώσκω, γράφω, δα/χάω, δίχομαί, δ/ω, ΐο hind, 8η- λοω, θάπτω, καΧ^ω, κλαίω, κλβίω, κόπτω, κρύπτω, κτάομαι, Χαμβάρω, λανθάνω, λέγω, λειττω, λυω, μίγννμι, μιμνησκω, ΠΑΟΜΑΙ, πάνω, πίμ- πρημί, πιπράσκω, πλησσω, πούω, πράσσω, ΡΕΩ, to say, σιγάω, σκο- πβω, ταννω, τάσσω, τέμνω, τενχω, τιμάω, τρβπω, φάω, ΦΑί2, to kill, φιλεω, φνρω, χολόω, χράομαι, in the Catalogue of A'^erbs. Note 1. The future perfect of δβιδω, κηδω, and κράζω, inserts η before σω, after the analogy of verbs in eo) ; further, the future per- fect of κηδω retains the radical vowel ; thus, dedoiK -η-σω, κεκάδ-η-σο- μαι, Κ€κραγησω. Note 2. The future perfect of δεω, τενχω, and ΦΑΩ, imply a per- fect passive in -ημαι, -ενγμαι ; thus, δε ω, δβοεσαι δεδ/ισο/ιαί ; τεύχω, τ€τνξαι Τ€Τ€νξομαι ; ΦΑΩ, πίφάσαι πεφησομαι. Second Aorist^ Second Perfect and Pluperfect, and Second Future Passive, ^ lis. Some primitive verbs form their aonst^ perfect and pluperfect active^ and future passive^ by annexing the following endings to the root : Aorist Active -ov ; as λείπω %λιπον, τέμνω ετεμον A orist Passive -^1^5 ά^ λείπω ελίπην, φλέγω εφλεγην Aorist Middle -όμην \ as λείπω ελιπόμψ Perfect Active -α ; as λείπω λελοιπα, πράσσω πεπράγα Pluperfect Active -ειν; RS ελελοίπειν, επεπράγειν Future Passive -η σο μαι; BlS λείπω λιπησομαι .ν• These tenses are commonly designated by the numeral second, in order that they may be distinguished from the regular tenses of the sam.e name, which commonly are designated by the teiva first. For practical purposes, the second pluperfect may be formed by sim- ply changing a of the second perfect into ειν ; the second future pas- sive, by changing ην of the second aorist passive into ησομαι. A list of verbs in Avhich these tenses are found : άγγελλω, άγείρω, αγνυμι, αγω, αίρεω, α'ίρω, αισθάνομαι, άκαχίζω, ακούω, αλείφω, άλεξω, αλιταίνω, αλλάσσω, άλλομαι, άλφαίνω, άμαρτάνω, άμπεχω, άμπλακίσκω, άνδάνω, ΑΝΕΘΩ, ανοίγω, άνώγοο, άπαφίσκω, άραρίσκω, άριστάω, αρπά- ζω, βαίνω, βάλλω, βάπτω, ΒΑΡΕΩ, βιβρώσκω, βλάπτω, βλαστάνω, βλώσκω, βονλομαι, ΒΡΑΧΩ, βρέχω, βρίθω, BFOXQ, γεγωνίσκω, γηθεω, γίγνομαι^ γλνφω, γράφω, ΔΑΕΩ, 3αίω, Βάκνο), δα/χάω, δαρθάνω, 8εί- Ίτνεω, δερκομαι, δε ρω, δ/δωμ,ι, ΔΙΚΩ, δί'ω, δονπεω, δρέπω, δυω, εγείρω, €θω, ΕΙΔΩ, ε'ίκω, εΐλω, ΕΙΠΩ, ελπω, εναίρω, ΕΝΕΘΩ, ενεπω, ενίπτω^ 12* 138 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 114. έπαυρίσκομαι, εττω, βρδω, epei/io), epetVo), EPOMAI, ίρχομαι, βρυγγανω, €ρνκω, €σθίω, ευρίσκω, €χω, ζ^ν-γνυρΛ^ θάΧλο), θάπτω, ΘΑΦί2, θ^ίνω^ θβρομαι, βίγγάνω, ΘΧίβω, θνήσκω, θρνπτω, θρώσκω, Ικνίομαι, ιστημι^ καίω,, κάμνω, ΚΑΦΕί2, κείρω, κεΧομαι, κενθω, Κί^δω, κιχάνω, κΧάζω, κλέπτω, κΚίνω, κλυω, κόπτω, κορίννυμι, κοτεω, κράζω, ΚΡΙΖί2, κρύπτω, κτείνω, κτνπεω, Χαγχάνω, Χαμβάνω, \άμπω, \αν6άνω, Χάσκω, Χεγω, to collect, Χείπω, Χείχω, Χεπω,Χίσσομαι, μαίνομαι, μανθάνω, μάρπτω, μάσ- σω, ΜΑΩ, μείρομαι, μεΧω, μένω, μηκάομαι, μίγνυμι, μνζω, μνκάομαι, ο'ίγω, οΧισθαίνω , οΧΧνμι, όράω, ορνυμι, υρνσσω, οσφραίνομαι, οφείΧω, οφΧισκάνω, πάΧΧω, πάσχω, πείθω, πείρω, περ3ομαί, περθω, πετομαι, πηγνυμι, πίνω, πίπτω, πΧεκω, πΧηθω, πΧησσω, πνίγω, ΠΟΡΩ, πράσσω, πτάρννμαι, πτησσω, πτνρομαι, πτύσσω, πτύω,, πυνθάνομαι, ράπτω, ρεω, ρη-γνυμι, ριγεω, ρίπτω, σαίρω, ΣΕΥΩ, σηπω, σκάπτω, ΣΚΕΛΑΩ, σμύχω, σπείρω^ στείχω, στεΧΧω, στεργω, στερεω, στρέφω, στνγεω, σύρω, σφά- ζω, σφάλλω, ΤΑΓΩ, ΤΑΛΑΩ, τάσσω, τέμνω, ΤΕΜΩ, τέρπω, τερσομαι, τήκω, ΤΙΕΩ, τίκτω, τιτρό^σκω, τιτύσκομαι, τίω, τμηγω, τορίω, τρέπω, τρέφω, τρέχω, τρίβω, τρίζω, τρώγω, τυγχάνω, τύπτω, τύφω, ΦΑΓΩ, φαίνω,, φείδομαι, ΦΕΝΩ, φερβω, φέρω, φεύγω, φθείρω, ΦΑΑΖΩ, φλέ- γω, φλίβω, φράζω, φράσσω, φρίσσω, φρύγω, φυλάσσω, φύρω, φύω, χάζω, χαίνω, χαίρω, χανδάνω, χέζω, ΧΛΑΖΩ, χλώάω, ΧΡΑΙΣΜΕΩ, "^ύχω, which see in the Catalogue of Verbs. Note 1. Some of these verbs have also the regular form of the aorist, perfect, pluperfect, aud future passive ; but, as a general rule, when the second aorist, perfect, pluperfect, and future passive are used, the regular forms are of rare occurrence ; thus, the usual aorist of αγω is ηγαγον, the regular ηξα being little used. Note 2. The perfects δεδηα, μεμηνα, σεσηρα, πεφηνα, from δα /ω, μαίνομαι, σαίρω, and φαίνω, are often written with an iota sub- script ; thus, δβδτ/α, μεμτ^να, σεσ-ηρα, πεφηνα. But as they come from the roots Δ A-, Mx\N-, ΣΑΡ-, ΦΑΝ-, this iota should he omitted. (Com- pare § 110, n. 7.) § 114. Dialects, 1. (a) The Doric forms the future generally by annexing to the root -σεω, middle -σεόμαι, which are generally contracted into -σω, -σούμα ι ΟΥ -σεύμαι, and the future then is inflected throughout like contract verbs in εω ; as οίκοδομεω, F. (οίκοδομησεω) οΙκοδομησώ, F. Μ. (οίκοδομησεόμαι) οίκοδομησούμαι or οίκοδομησεύμαι. So απογράφω, F. άπβγραψώ, inf. άπογραψεν. The Attic makes use of this Doric future in the verbs θεω, to run, νευω, κλαίω, παίζω, πίπτω, πλέω, πνέω, πυνθάνομαι, χέζω, which see in the Catalogue of A^erbs. — The future χεώ, from χεω, is the Doric future without the σ. (b) Not unfrequently the Doric changes -σεο), -σεόμαι into -σ/ω, -σιόμαι; as πράσσω, βοηΰ^ω, προλείπω, φυλάσσω, F. ττραξίω, βο- ηθησίω, προλειψίω, φυλαξίω. (c) The Dorians sometimes formed the future passive by simply ^ 115.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 139 changing -τ;!/ of the aorist into -ησω ; thus, Β^ιχθησουντι, σνναχβησονν Tt, φανησ€ίν, ώατωθησω, from Οξίκννμι, συνάγω^ φαίνω, ΏΑΤΟΩ. 2. (a) The future of liquid verbs is inflected throughout like verbs m €ω. Its uncontracted form is Ionic and Epic ; as κτ^ίρω, Ionic future κτ€Ρ€ω, Attic κτ€νώ. (b) The Doric may change -€ω into -ιω in the future of liquid verbs ; as €μμ€ρω, αναγγέλλω, F. €μμ€νίω, άνα'γ'γ€\ίω. 3. (a) The Doric often conjugates verbs in ζω, and sometimes verbs in ao), as if the root ended in κ; as ορκίζω, δοκιμάζω, χαρίζομαι, iydi- κάζω, €ργαζόμαί, F. ορκιζ^ω, δοκιμάζω, χαριξιόμαι, ζγ^ικαξουμαί, ipya- ξονμαι : σω^ω, γβλάω, φθάνω, Α. εσωξα, iyeka^a, ζφθαξα. So κρα- τηρίζω €Κ€κρατηρίχην, νομίζω νζνόμιγμαί, πορίζω €πορίχθην, 6\άω re- ΘΧαγμαι, (b) In the Doric dialect, some verbs in 6ω are conjugated as if the root ended in α ; as φωνίω φώνάσε, πτοίω επτοάθην, φιλ^ω ττεφίλάκβ, ων^ομχίι ωνασ^ίται» (c) In the Ionic dialect, verbs in αω are sometimes conjugated as if the root ended in ο or ω ; as άτιμάω, μηχανάομαι, Plup. ητίμωτο, €μηχάνωτο. 4. The Poets, except the Attic Poets, often double the σ of the \ future and ao?ist after a short vowel ; as τελ^ω τίΚίσσω irikeaaa, ' άννω άνυσσομαι ήννσσα, δικάζω ίδίκασσα. PERSONAL ENDINGS AND CONNECTING TOWELS. ^ il5. 1. The letter or letters which are pecu- liar to a tense are called the characteristic of that tense; thus, 5' is the characteristic of the aorist and future active and middle ; E, of the future active and middle of liquid verbs ; ΘΕ, ΘΗ, E, or H, of the aorist passive ; K, of the perfect and pluper- fect active ; ΘΗ^*, HS, of the future passive. 2. That which denotes the person and number of a verbal form is called the personal ending; thus, -μβν is the personal ending of Χβγ-ο-μβν; -re, of Key-e-re, οβ. The following table exhibits the personal endings of the indicative. 10 INFLECTION OF WORDS. L^ Primary Tenses. - Active. Person. 1st. 2d. 3d. Singular. μι , (ΓΙ, S, σθα τι, σι Dual. τον τον Plural. μ€£, μ€ν Passive and Middle, VTL, VT€Si vOi, VQ-L, VL, άσι Person. 1st. 2d. 3d. Singular. μαι σαί, at rat Dual. (μ.ζ6ον) σΘον σθον x^lural. μζβα, μεθ€ν, μ€σθα σθβ νται, άται Secondary Tenses. Active, Person. 1st. 2d. 3d. Singular. ν s, σθα — • Dual. — τον τάν, την Plui:al. μ€ς, μ€ν Passive and Middle. σαν, ν Person. 1st. 2d. 3d. Singular. μαν, μην σο, ο το Dual. σθον σθάν, σθην Plural. μέθα, μ^σθα σθε ντο, άτο -μι is found in the indicative of Λ^erbs in μι ; in the Epic subjunctive active ; and in the optative active. In the secondary tenses, and in. the optative actiA^ of verbs in μι, the element μ becomes v, and t is dropped. In the greatest number of verbs this ending is dropped. ,^ — The endings μ€ς, μβν, μαι, μαν, μην, μβθα, μ€σθα, μ^θβν, μ€θον are modifications of -μι. -σι of the second person is found only in the Epic ίσσί, thou art, from the root ΕΣ- ; in all other cases it becomes -ς, which is some- times strengthened by ^a.^-^^ The endings re, τον, σαι, σθβ, σθον^ σο, σθαν, σθην are modifications of σι, σθα. •{rt Doric, -σι common, found in verbs in μι, and in the Epic subjunc- tive active. In the greater number of verbs it is dropped ; as eXeyf for eXeye-rt. — The endings ταν, την, ται, το are its modifications. -[VTL Doric, -νσι common, formed from rt by prefixing v. Its modifi- cations are νται, ντο, αται, ατο. -σαν, a modification οΐνσι, is found in verbs in /xt ; in the pluperfect active ; aorist passive^ and in the imperfect, second aorist, and opi;i- tive, of some Bceotic forms. JNoTE. The personal endings are fragments οΐ personal 'pronouns; thus, the endings beginning with Μ aie mcdifications of μ-ου, μ-οί, μ-€, η-μ^ΐς ; those beginning with Σ and Τ come from σ-ι', τ-ν, Τ-ΟΣ, r ό. It is evident therefore that, in Gi'jck, the pronoun is annexed to the root ; as ΧΙ-γο-μ^ν, xce-say, Xcye-re,. lou-say, Xeyo-vTL, they-say. §§ 116, 117.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 141 ^ 116• The vowel which stands between the personal ending and the root or characteristic of a verbal form is called the connecting vowel. In the first person of all the numbers, and in the third person plural of the indicative, it is an ο ; in all the other persons of the same mood, it is an e. Ex- cept that, (a) The connecting vowel oi ilrn perfect active^ and aorist active and middle, is an a. But in the third person singular of the perfect and of the aorist acti\^e it is an €. (b) The connecting vowel-sound of the jpluperfect active is an et. in the third person plural it is an et or e. ' (c) The 'present and future active lengthen ο into ω in the first per- son singular, and e into et in the second and third person singular. § 117. 1. The ;- following table exhibits the jDersonal end- ings and the connecting vowels of the indicative, united. Present and Future. Active. Passive. P. 1st. 2d. 3d. 1st. 2d. 3d. s. ω €LS €L ομαι eat, Τ], et erat D. — €TOV €TOV — εσθον €σθον P. ομ^ν €T€ ονσι {ονσι) ομζθα €σθ€ ονται Imperfect and Second Aorist. Active. Middle. S. ov €S e ομην eo, ου €T0 D. — €TOV €την — €σθον €σθην P. ouev ere Active. ov Ac ομζθα )rist. €σθ€ Middle. οντο S. a ας e αμήν αο, ω ατο D. — ατον ατην — ασθον ασθην P. αμ€ν are αν αμ^θα ασθ€ αντο Perfect Active. Pluperfect Active. s. a ας e €LV et? et D. — ατον ατον — €LTOV etr7;v P. αμ<Εν ατζ άσί {ανσι) €ΐμ€ν €LT€ €ΐσαν, €σαν 0^2. The suljunciive takes the terminations of the primary tenses of the indicative, but lengthens the connecting vowels o, € into ω, η, respectively. 143 INFLECTION OF -WORDS. [§ in. Active, s. ω rjs υ D. ητον ητον P. ω /xev ητ€ ωσί (ωνσι) Passive and Middle, ωμαι ωμ€ϋ ηαι, 7] ησθον ησθζ ηται ησθον ωνται ) 3. The optative takes the personal endings of the secondary tenses of the indicative. ' (a) But the first person singular of the optative active takes -μι, and the third person plural ends in -ev, (b) For its connecting vowel-sound the optative has ot ; but in the aorist active and middle it has at. S. D. P. S. D. P. οιμί Active, OLS OL OLTov οιτην οιμ€ν 0LT6 OL€V Aorist Active. | αιμι αις at aLTov αιτην αίμ€ν aLT€ aL€V Passive and Middle, οιμην οίμεθα αιμην αιμβθα OLO οισβον οισθβ ο LTD 0Lσθηv OLVTO Aorist Middle. mo αιτο αισθον αισθην aLaUe αιντο (c) The optative active has also the following endings : S. ην^ ης J η, D. ητον, ητην, P. ημ€ν, ητ€, ήσαν. These endings are found in the second perfect and second aorist of a few verbs in ω ; in contract verbs ; in the future of hquid verbs ; and in verbs in μL ; as 7Γ€ί6ω π€ποίθοίην, φ€νγω ττ^φευγοίτ/ν, ^ργομαι €\η\νθοίην ', €χω σχοίην^ oXkvμL οΧοίην ; Λρω εροίην, φαίνω φανοίην. 4. The first of the following tables exhibits the persona! endings of the imperative ; the second and third exhibit the personal endings and the connecting vowels (e, a, o) united. Active, Passive and Middle, 2d. 3d. 2d. 3d. s. UL τω σο, σθω D. τον των σβον σθων P. T€ τω σαν, ντων, ντω, ντον σθ€ σθο)σαν, σΟων, σθω, σθον s. € €τω €0, ου €σθω D. CTOV €των €σθον €σθων P. ere €τωσαν, όντων €σθ€ €σθωσαν, εσθωρ Aon St Active. jVorist Middle. s. ov ατω at ασθω D. ατον ατών ασθον • ασθων P. ατ6 ατωσαν, αντων ασθ€ ασθωσαν, ασθων 'θι is used only when the connecting vowel is omitted ; as κίκραχ-θί, €στα-θί, ϊσ-θι, φά-θι, διδω-^ι. § 118.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 143 5. The original endings of the infinitive active are -/xez/at, -μ€Ρ. In the Attic dialect the endings and connecting vowels are as follows : 'Present, Future, and Second Aorist Active, cl-v Perfect Active, . . . e-pat Aorist Active, . . . . -at Passive and Middle, . . . c -σθαί Aorist Middle, .... α-σθαι 6. The root of the active participle ends in i^r, preceded by ο ; in the aorist active, preceded by a. In the perfect active, the root ends in r preceded by o. In the passive and middle, the participle ends in -μ^νος pre- ceded by ο ; in the aorist middle, preceded by a. Note 1. In the dual of the secondary tenses of the active, τον is sometimes used ίοτ την^ and την for τον; thus, 8ίώκ€τον, λαφύσσ•€τον, and perhaps τ€Τ€νχ€τον, for ^ίωκίτην. Χαφυσσβτην, τ€Τ€νχ€την, in the Iliad. On the other hand, ΕΪπετην, 6π€8ημησάτην^ ηστην, eXeyeVr^v, e/cot- νωνησάτην, for etTrerov, ^π^^ημησατον, ήστον, eXeyeroi^, Έκοινωνησατον, are found in Plato ; ηλλαξάτην for ηλλάξατον^ (Eurip. Ale. 672.) Note 2. The dual has no first person ; consequently, when two persons speak, they use the first person plural. In a few instances, howeA^er, the passive uses the ending -/ze^oi/ when two persons speak. Thus, πβρι-δώ/χβ^ον (//. 23, 489), XeXei/x- μζθον (Soph. El. 950), ορμωμ^θον {Id. Ph. 1079) ; σνντριβησόμ^θον (Athen.3, 19), άπολουμ^θον (Id. ibid.). ^NoTE 3. (a) The aorist acti\'e and middle, in a few instances, takes the connecting vowels of the second aorist ; as πίπτω επβσον, βαίνω ββησυμην. See also αγω, ά€ί3ω, δυω, ϊκω, ΛΕΧΩ, ορνυμι, πίνω, φ^ρω, χ^ζω, in the Catalogue of Λ''erbs. (b) On the other hand, the second aorist sometimes takes the con necting vowels of the aorist ; as ΕΙΠί2 €ΐπα, ευρίσκω ενράμην. See also αίρβω, ΑΥΡΩ, ^ερκομαι, ΕΙΔΩ, όσφραίνομαι, φίρω, in the Cata- logue of A^erbs. Note 4. In the second perfect of βαίνω, γίγνομαι, and ϊστημί, the feminine participle ends in -ώσα (for -ονσα) ; as β€βαώσα,'γ€Ύαώσα, €στ€ώσα, contracted βββωσα, γβγώσα, ίστώσα. This is, properly speaking, a Doricism. Note 5. The imperfect ffeiv of el μι (ΕΙΩ), to go, takes the end- ings of the pluperfect. § 118. Dialects. 1. Indicative Active. f ts, 2 pers. sing, of the present and future, Doric -ey, as σνρίσ-δβί, άμίΧΎες : jEolic -ξίσβα, as ερ^ω €χ€ΐσθα. 144 INFLECTION OF AVORDS. [^ 118 'μ€Ρ, 1 pers. plur, of all the tenses and moods, Doric -/xey, as evpl σκομ€ς, άπ^στάλκαμ,ζς, κατ€τάμομ.ες, €Κι3αΧουμ€ς. -ου σι, 3 plur. of the present Ό^ηά future^ Doric -ovrty as έχοντι ίξονν- TL {i^eovTL) : Cretan -ovl^ -ovre ς, as Εχω €χορί, δί^^άγω dei^ayop-^s : jEolic -οισί, as εμμ^ν^οισι^ οίκησοισι. -άσι, 3 plur. of the perfect, Doric -αντί, as άνατίθημι άνατ€6€καντι . Cretan -αντ^ς, as αττεστάλκαι/τε? .' Boeotic -ανθι^ as αττοδ/δω/χι αττο- δβδοαν^ί : Alexandrian -α j/, as eopyav, ^ίρηκαν, π^φρικαν^ άττίσταλ- καν, εΧηΧνθαν. -ΟΙ/, 3 plur. of the imj)erfect and second aorist, Bceotic -οσαι/, as εσχά- ζοσαν. 3ο\ίόω edoXiovaav (eboXLOoaav) , €μάθοσαν, βιδοσαζ/, used chief- ly in the Septuagint. -την, 3 pers. dual of all the secondary tenses and of the optative. Doric -rdv, as βποησάτάν. (a) In the following Ionic forms, the imperfect takes the connecting- vowel of the aorist : ea or ηα, eas, plur. care, eacrav, from ζΐμί ; ή'ία or ^a, from ef/xt ; Ιτίθεα, from τιθίω. Further, during the iron age of the language, -άσι was used for -ov (-av) ; as, 3 pers. plur. ζπββασί, for €τίθ€ον or rather irieeav, from τιθίω. (b) The Ionic dialect inficcts the singular of the pluperfect after the analogy of the aorist ; that is, it uses -ea, -fay, -f e, which the Attic contracts into -77, -?;§•, -7/ (1) ; as χαίνω, Ionic €Κ€χην€α €Κ€χιιν€- \ as €Κ€χην€€, Attic €Κ6χηνη €Κ€χηνης €Κ€χηνη (?). The ending -ee of the third person singular may become -fci/, contracted -eti/, rarely ^ην; thus, TreTTOt^eiv, €στηκ€ΐν, β^βληκ^ίν^ dedeLirvrjKCLv, jjbeLv or jjo-qv, — Herodotus has pluperf. 2 pers. plur. avvrjdeare for σνί'τίδΕίτε, (c) When an action is repeated, the Ionic (both' the old and neΛv) uses the iterative endings σκον, σκόμην, \vhich, in the imperfect, and second aorist active and middle, are preceded by € ; in the aorist active and middle, by a. When, however, the root ends in a vovv^el, these endings are, in the im.perfect, commonly annexed without e. They are used only in the indicative, and appear without the augment. As to inflection, they follow^ the analogy of the common imperfect. E. g ανοίγω, βρδω άναοίγΕσκον, cpbeaKOV ΕΙΠΩ, ύκ.ω ύπ^σκον, Λζασκ€ν ερυω, Καίομαι βρνσασκε, δασάσκ€το α-γίνβω, καΧβω άγίνεσκον ; KoXeeaicov Οι KoKecrKOV, καΧβσκετο πωλβομαί, ρνομαι πω\€σκ€το, ρύσκ€θ ρνσκ€ν In a few instances, these endings are preceded by a even in the imperfect; thus, γοάασκυν (γόασκον), δρομάασκον, κρνπτασκον, vaiera- ασκον, π€Βάασκον, ρίπτασκον^ άνασσ^ίασκον. (d) According to the ancient grammarians, some of the branches of the Doric dialect inflected the perfect and pluperfect indicative active after the analogy of the present and imperfect respectively ; as nenoirj- κω, δεδοΐΑτω, ολώλω. (Compare the endings -€lv, -ην, -ων, of \ho po.rfect infliiitive and participle.) The Epic dialect follows this analogy in the forms άνψοθ^ν, ih^l^L^if, €νηνοθ€ν, μ€μα€ν, €μ€μηκον, αρηρ^ν, €πίφϋκ.ον, and perhaps π^πΧηγον or § 118.] ^ PERSONAL ENDINGS. 145 επεπληγον, τ€Τ€νχ€τον, from ΑΝΕΘΩ, δίω, ΕΝΕΘί2, ΜΑί2, μηκάομαι, άραρίσκω, φύω, πΧησσω, τ€νχω. 2. Indicative Passive and Middle. -ρβθα^ 1 plur. of all the tenses and moods, Poetic -μ€σθα, as λβγό- μ€σθα : ^olic -pcSev, as XeyopcBev^ φερόμεθεν. -μην^ ι sing, of all the secondary tenses and of the optative, Doric -μάν, as εμπορευόμαν, άνειΧόμαν, γζνοίμαν. 'VTOy 3 plur. of the imperfect passive and middle and second aorist mid- dle, Ionic -ατο. In this case the connecting vowel becomes e ; in pure verbs, hov^ever, -ατο is appended to the root. E. g. άγραφε- ατο, €σίν€-ατο, εμηχ^ανβ-ατο, 3. Subjunctive, -ω, 1 sing., Epic -ω μι, as τύχω μι, εθίλωμι. -τ/ί, 2 sing., Epic -υσθα, as τύχτ)σθα, εθβλτ^σθα. -?;, 3 sing., Epic -rjcri, as τύχυσι, εθίΧ^σι : -^olic, Thessalian, and Doric -€t; as άρτύσει, anouavcL, δό^α. Even the Attic and Ionic sometimes used -et for -77; as e^eX^et, e'lncL, ζπίψηφίσβι, κατάξζί, €κκό\Ι/€ί^ ποίησ€ί, found in inscriptions, -ω σι, 3 plur., Bceotic -ων θ ι, as ϊωνθί^ for €ωνη, €ωσι, from εΙμΙ. The Epic may, for the sake of the metre, use the connecting vow- els of the indicative, o, e, for ω, η ; as ερύξομεν, ϊομ€ν, φθίεται, for epv- ξωμ€ν, ϊωμ€ν, φθίιιται. 4. Optative. -οι μι, 1 sing., very rare -oti/, with the personal ending ν of the his- torical tenses ; thus, τρεφοι-ϊ/ ; also άμάρτ€ΐ-ν (?) in Suidas. -οις, 2 sing., ^olic and Epic -ουσθα; as χαίρουσθα, κΚαίοισθα, -οιην\ 1 sing., j^Lolic -όην, rare, Χαγχάνω Χαχόην. -ei/, 3 pers. plur., Bceotic -σαν, as παρεχοισαν, elwa εϊπαισαν : Elean -αν, as άποτίνω άποτίνοιαν. -αιμι, -αις, -at, plur. -αί/χ6ΐ/, -atei/, of the αοη5ί active, JEolic -€ta, -€ias, -€i€, plur. -et/xei/, -eiav, which, with the exception of -eia, -€ίμ€ν, are common to all the dialects. -oLvro, 3 plur. opt. passive and middle, Ionic -oiaro, as yevoiaro, Κ€χαροίατο, όψοίατο. -αϊ ντο, 3 plur. aor. mid. opt., Ionic -ataro, as άρησαίατο, φρα- Γαίατο. 5. Imperative. -I -ων, 3 pi. imperative active, Cretan -ντω, as παρεχόντω, εοι/τω, άποστ€ΐλάντω, ποιούντω: ^olic -ντον, as φεροντον, φυλάσσονταν, σθων, 3 plur. passive and middle, Cretan -σ^ω, as μισθούσθω, κρι- νίσθω, €γ3αν€ίζ€σθω : -^Eolic -σθον, as επιμίλεσβον, from eVt/ieXe- μαι. 6. Infinitive. >6ty. Epic -€/i,ei/at, -εμεν, as ττινεμ^ναι πίν€μ€ν<, ίΧθίμ^ναι ίΧθΙμ^ν : Bceotic and Thessalian -e /χ cj/, as την€μ€ν: ^olic -τ/ι/, as πίνην, €\θην : Doric -cv, as πΤί/εν. ■ 7 146 INFLECTION OF WORDS. * [§ 119. civ of the second aorist, Ionic -eeiv, as βοΧεϊν βαλεβιν, ίδαν l^eeiv: Doric -e ι/, as eX^eV. '€vaL of the perfect active, ^olic -ην, as τ€θνάκην, Ιπιτ^θ^ωρηκην \ Doric -ημ€ν, -€LV,^S π€φντ€νκημ€ν, π€7Γρωγγν€νκημ€ν, y€yov€LVy άμ- φίσβάτηκ€ίν, γ€γάκ€ίν, αΚωκζίν. The endings -ψ, -eiv are borrowed from the present. (Compare 1, d.) 7. Participle. 'ουσα, the feminine of -ων, Doric and Bceotic -ω σα, as ιωσα for eoi- σα, from ei/xi : Cretan and Argive -ονσα, as νπάρχονσα : Laconian -ωά (-ω Λ α), as κλεωά for κλβονσα: -^olic -οισα, as έχρισα, -άί, -άσα, of the aorist active, .^oHc -ais, -αισα, as δισκησαις, δι- σκησαισα, '0)9 of the perfect active participle, ^olic -ων, the same as in the pres- ent, as φβύγω π^φΰγγων, πβπληρώκων. (Compare 1, d, and 6.) -υΐα, the feminine of the perfect active participle, Doric -ονσα, -el a, as μ€μζνακονσα, άν^στακουσα, iniTereXeKela, €στακ€Ϊα, avvayayoxua^ ippηy€Ίa. Second Person Singular Passive and Middle. 8. The original personal endings of the second person singular pas- sive and middle are -σαι, -σο. In the present, future, imperfect, and aorist, they drop σ and, in the Attic dialect, are then contracted with the connecting vowel. The optative merely drops σ. The uncontract- ed forms belong to the ^olic and Ionic dialects. E. g. Pres. XcycaaL Xeyeat, later Attic \eyr}, early Attic Xeyei ; subj. Xey?;- σαι \iyηaL Xeyrj ; opt. XeyoLao Xeyoto ; imperat. λί'γβσο Xeyeo Xeyov. Fut. Xe^eaaL Xef eat, Xe^rj Xe^ei ; Χζχθησεσαι Χεχθησ^αι Χ^χθηστ] or Χ€χθησ€ΐ ; opt. Χ^ξοισο Xi^oio ; Χ^χθησοισο Χζχθησοω. Imp. €Χ€γ€σο iXeyco iXeyov Aor. ζΧζξασο €Χ€ξαο ελί^ω ; subj. Χξξησαι Χβξηαί Xe^rj ; opt. Χίξαισο Xe^aio. The full ending -σαι is found in some forms belonging to the later Greek ; as (payeaai, nUaai, καυχάσαι, odvi/aaaL, in the Septuagint and New Testament ; κοιμάσαι, in Hierocles. CONTRACT VERBS. • u ^ 119. Pure verbs in αω, βω, and οω are con- tracted by the Attics in the present and imperfect ; as τϊμάω τίμω, tO houor^ φίΧβω φίλω, tO love, Ιηλοω 8η\ώ, to manifest. The uncontracted form is inflected like βουλβυω. The contracted form is inflected according to the following examples. § 119.] CONTRACT VERBS. Indicative Active. Present. 147 S. τιμώ τιμάς τιμά D φιλώ φίλζΊς φιλζΐ 8η\ώ δτ/λοΓν δηλοΐ τιμάτον ^ τιμάτον φιλ€Ϊτον φιΚ^ίτον δηλουτον δηλουτον P. τιμωμ€ν τιμάτ€ τιμωσι φιλονμ€ν φΐλ€ΪΤ€ φιλονσι 8ηλονμ€ν δηλουτ€ ^ηλουσι Imperfect. S, €τ1μων €τίμας ζτίμα D. €φίλουν €φιλ€ΐς €φίλ€1 €^ηλονν άδηλους €δηλου Τιμάτον €φΐ\ύτον €δηλουτφ/ €τιμάτην €φιλ€ίτην ^δηλοντην Ρ. €Τΐμωμ€ν €Τΐμάτ€ €τίμων €φιλονμ€ν €φΐλ€ΐτ€ €φίΧθνν €δηλοΰμ€ν €8ηλθνΤ€ ebrj λονν S Libjunctive Active. S. τιμώ τιμάς ι τι/χα D. τιμάτον τιμάτον φιλώ φιλτ}ς φιλιΐ δηλώ δηλοΐς δηλοϊ φιλητον φιλητον δηλώτον δηλώτον Ρ, τιμώμζν τιμάτ€ τιμώσι φιλώμβν φιλητ€ φιλώσι δη\ώμ€ν δηΧώτ€ δηλώσΐ , Optative Active. S, τιμ-ωμι, ^ -ωην τιμ-ως, -ωης τιμ-ώ, 'ώη D. τιμ-ωτον, -ωητον φι\' φιλ φι\- ο7μι, 'ο'ιην 'οίς^ -οίης οΐ, 'οίη δη\-οΊμι^ δηλ-οΐς, δηλ-οϊ, -οίην Όίης -οίη φιλ- οϊτον, -οίητυν δηλ-οϊτον, -οίητον τιμ-ωτην, -ωητην φι\- οίτην^ -οιητην δηλ'οίτην. •οιητην 148 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 119. P. τιμ-ωμζν^ "^^/>tei/ τιμ-ωτ€, 'ωητ€ τιμ-ω€ν^ 'ώησαν φίΧ-οίμ€ν, Όίημεν φΐΚ'ΟΙΤ€, Όίητ€ φLX-OL€Vy 'οίησαν δηΧ-οΐμ€ν, -θίημ€ν δηΧ'οΊτζ, •θίητ€ dijX-oUVf 'οίησαν Imp erative Active. S. 2 τίμα 3 τιμάτω φίλει φιΧείτω δηΧου δηΧοντω D. 2 τιματον 3 τιμάτων φιΧ^ιτον φιΧ^ίτων δηΧοντον ΒηΧοντων Ρ. 2 τιματ€ 3 τιμάτωσαν, τιμώντων φιΧ€Π•€ φιΧ^ίτωσαν, φιΧονντων 3ηΧονΤ€ δηΧούτωσαν, δηΧούντων Infinitive Active. τιμαν φιΧ€Ϊν δηΧονν Participle Active. τιμών φιΧών ΒηΧών * Indicative Passive and Middle. Present. s. D. τιμωμαί τίμα τιμάται φιΧονμαι φιΧ'^, -et φιΧ€Ϊται ΒηΧονμαι 8ηΧοϊ δηΧονται τιμασθον τιμασθον φιΧβΐσθον φιΧ^ίσθον ΒηΧονσθον δηΧονσθον P. τιμώμ^Θα τιμασθξ τιμώνται φιΧούμζθα φιΧ€7σθ€ φιΧοννται Imperfect. 3ηΧονμ€βα δηΧονσθε δηΧοννται s. T) ζτιμώμην €τιμώ ίτιματο €φιΧονμην €φιΧον €φΐΧ€ΪΤ0 €8ηΧονμην €8ηΧον ζ^ηΧοντο €Τΐμασ6ον €τιμάσθην ΙφιΧ^Ισΰον ζφιΧζΙσβην €δηΧονσθον Ε^ηΧονσθην P. €τιμώμ€θα ίτιμασθζ €Τΐμώντο €φιΧονμ€θα ζφιΧ^ισθζ €φιΧουντο ΙδηΧονμ^Θα €δηΧονσΘ€ €δηΧονντο § 119.] CONTRACT VERBS. 149 Subjunctive Passive an d Middle. S. τιμωμαι τίμα τιμάται D. τιμασθον τιμασθον φΐλώμαι φίλη φιληται δη\ώμαΐ δηλοΊ δηλώται φίΚησθον φιλησθον δηλώσθον δηΧώσθον P. Τίμώμ€θα τιμάσθω τιμώνται φιΚώμζθα φιΚησθζ φιλώνται δη\ώμ€θα δηλώσθε δηΧώνται Optative Ρ assive and Μ iddle. S. τιμώ μην τιμωο τιμωτο D. τιμωσθον τιμώσθην φιλοίμην φιλοϊο φιλοΊτο δηΧοίμην δηλοϊο δηλοϊτο φιλοϊσθον φΐΚοίσθην δηλοΐσθον δηλοίσθην Ρ. τιμωμ^θα τιμωσθζ τιμωντο φΐΚοίμ^θα φιΚοΙσθζ φιΚοΙντο δηΧοίμεθα δηλο1σθ€ δηΧοϊντο Imperative Passive an d Middle. S. 2 τιμώ 3 τιμάσθω φίλου φιΚ^ίσθω δη\ου δηλουσθω D. 2 τιμασθον 3 τιμάσθων φιλ€Ϊσθον φιλζίσθων δηλονσθον δηλούσθων Ρ. 2 τιμασθ€ 3 τιμάσθωσαν^ τιμάσθων φιΚζΙσθζ φιΚ€ίσθωσαν^ φιΚζίσθων δηλονσθ€ δηΧονσθωσαν, δηλούσθων Infinitive Passive and Middle. τιμασθαι φιλ€Ίσθαι δηΧουσθαι Participle Passive-and Middle. τιμώμενος φιλονμενος δη\ονμ€νος J^OTE 1. The uncontracted form of verbs in α ω is rare and Epic. The uncontracted form of verbs in e ω is Ionic and Epic. The uncon- tracted form of those in ο ω is never used. 150 IJSFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 120. Note 2. Dissyllabic verbs in e ω are contracted only when two e's come together ; as, Ind. S. πλ/ω, ττλβΐ?, ττλ^ΐ, P. πλ€ομ€ν, ττλβίτβ, ττλεονσι Subj. S. ττλβω, ττλετ/ί, ττλε'τ;, Ρ. πλίω/χει/, πΧίητε, πλεωσί Opt. S. nXeoL^L, TrXeoty, πλεοί, P. ττλεοι/χβι/, nXeoLTc^ wXeoiep Imp. S. ττλεί, ττλε/τω, P. TrXeire, πλείτωσαν or ττλβόι/τω^ Inf. πλεΓι/ : Part, πλέων πΧεονσα nkeov, G. πλέοντος Impf, S. €π\€ον, eVXety, eVXet, P. επλίομεν, cVXeire, eVXeoi/ Ac ω, ίο Zimi?, may be contracted in all its forms ; as δεουσλ δοΟσ*, δίοζ/ δοίζ/, εδεοι/ εΒουν, δέομαι δοΰμαι. Note 3. The following verbs in αω contract ae and αη into 17, after the analogy of the Doric dialect : διψάω δ^ψ-ώ, to thirsty διψης, διψτ] ; διψητε : εδιψτ^ί, εδιψτ;, εδιψητζ Ι inf. δίλΐ/'ήι/ ί'άω ^ώ, /ο Zi?;e, (fjs, ζτ} ; {"ijre : e^?;?, εζη•. inf. ^ν ^ ^ . ^ κι^άω Kvcuy to scrape, kv^s, Kvfj ; κνητε : εκνης, εκνη, εκνητ€ : inf. κνην^ κνησθαι πεινάω πεινώ, to hunger, πεινάς, πειντ} ; πεινητε : επείνης, επεινητ€ Ι inf. πεινην σμάω σμώ, to smear, σμγις, σμτ}, σμητε, &C. Herodotus has σμαται, regular. χράομαι χρωμαι, to use, χρηται ; χρησθε : εχρητο, εχρησθε : inf. χρη- σθαι. The Ionic contracts regularly, as χράσθαι. χράω, to need, xpfjs : impersonal, χρη, χρψι ^χρψ ψάω ψώ, to rub, ψης, ψη, ψητέ, ψην, &C. Note 4. The contracted form of the infinitive of verbs in αω is, in ancient inscriptions, always found without the t subscript ; as τιμαν, περιοραν, ζην ; which shows that av, rjv arise not out οΐ'αειν, but out of the original or Doric αεν. Note 5. The movable ν is sometimes appended to the contracted third person singular of the imperfect active ; as ήσκειν from ησκεεν, from άσκεω, in Homer ; also the impersonal εχρην. for εχραεν ; so the Doric επλην, ερρην, for επΧεεν, ερρεεν, from π\εω, ρεω, § 120. Dialects. 1. Verbs in -άω. (a) In verbs in αω, the Ionic changes a into e ; as όράω, Ionic όρεω ορεεις ορεει. The Doric sometimes follows the analogy of the Ionic. (b) The Ionic may change ao into εω ; as μηχανεωμενος, εχρεωντο, (c) The Epic protracts a, a, contracted, into aa, aa ; ω, contracted, into οω, ωο, ωω ; ω, contracted, into οω ; as άγάομαι, contracted άγάσθε, Epic άγάασθε εάω — εας, Ε. idas § 121.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 151 ίΧάω — iXoiai, E. ζΧόωσι γελάω — γελώ, Ε. γελόω ; γβλώι/τε?, Ε. γεΧώοντες, 'γ€Χ6ωντ€9 μαιμάω — μαιμώσι^ Ε. μαιμώωσι ; μαιμώντοζ, Ε. μαιμωοντοζ^ μαΐ' μώωντος αΐτίάομαί — αΐτιω, Ε. αΐτιφο^ αΐτιόωο 2. Verbs in -εω. (a) In verbs in εω, tbe Epic changes ε into ει, as πι^ειω, νζίκςίω ; the -^olic, into 77, as ά^ικηω ; the Doric, into i, as αδίκιω, όρμιόμαι. (b) The Doric may change εο into iw : as ε/χετριω/ζε?, μ€τρίώμ€νος, Γη\ίώμ€νος (ειλεο/χεζ^ο?) . (c) The Doric shortens -εί? of the contracted second person singu- lar, and -elv of the infinitive, into -ε'$•, -eV, respecti\'ely ; as ττούω, ποί- €S TTOUv, φροΡ€ω φρον€ν, κρατεω Kpariv, (d) In the second person singular of the indicative and imperative passive and middle, the Ionic drops the connecting vowel ε; that is, it changes -eeai, -ε'εο, into -ε'αι, -ε'ο ; as ε'τταίΐ/εω inaLveat, πωλίομαι πω- λεαί, μνθζομαι μνθ€αι, φοβίομαι φοβύαι φοβ^ο, άκ€θμαί ακ€θ, €ξηγ€θμαΐ €ξηγ€θ. IThe Epic contracts -ε eat, -εεο, into -είαι, -eio, respectively ; as μνθζϊαι, αΙΒζϊαι, aldclo, 3. Verbs in -όω. (a) In verbs in οω, the Ionic contracts 00 into ευ, which implies a change of the radical ο into e ; as ^ίκαωω i^LKaUvvj πληρόω πληρενν- τεί, άξωω ά^ιευ/ζε^α. (b) Some protracted Epic forms from verbs in οω presuppose a change of ο into α (1, c) ; thus, άρόω, contracted άρουσι^ Epic άρόωσι δηϊόω — ^ηϊουντο, Ε. δτ^ϊόωι/το ; ^η'ίοΐ^ν^ Ε. ^ηϊ6ω€ν ίδρόω — ίδρονντας, Ε. ίδρώοντας (c) For the Doric contraction of στεφαι/ώ, πριω, and of the infini- tives ριγών, μαστιγών, στέφανων, see ^ 18, 5. 6. OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOAVEL. Verhs in μι, r.^ 121. Some pure verbs drop the connecting vowel in the present^ imperfect, and second aorist active and middle. They are called verbs in μ t, because the first person singular of the indicative active takes the personal ending μι. 152 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 122. δ § ^ 3. ^ ^ ^ ■Sob ^ b ^ io <5o .t a - - ^ ^ Ο § 1§§ ^ κ *— ^-j yu 0-•^ν ^o ^ t2 i-^io fe^^ ^ -^ ;^ c- ζ3 2 c~ sr- ft. v2 κΌίο b'^i^ 3 2 δ δ 3 ϋ ''^ Η ° ^ 2 ° §*g^^ I <3 a <3c|"<|§ 3~i I ^ >^ a a, ^5 e» § 123.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 153 ^ 123. Inflection of ΐστημο^ to station^ τίθημο, to put J Βί8ωμί^ to give^ δείκννμί^ tO shoW^ ίττρίάμην (from ΠΡΙΑΜΑΙ), I bought^ €8ϋν (from 8ύνω), I en- tered. S. D. S. D. D. P. Indicative Active. Present. ιστημι ΐ(Γτης τίθημι τίθης 8ί3ωμι διδωί Β^ίκνϋμι ^Ιστησι τίθησι δ/δωσί δβίκννσι Ιστατον τίθ€τον didoTov deLKWTOv Ίστατον τίθζτον diSoTov bcLKWTOV ϊσταμ€ν ιστατε τίθβμεν τίθζΤζ διδο/ζ€ΐ/ δίδοτβ Βζίκννμεν beUwre Ιστασι τιθ€Ϊ(Γΐ or διδοΟσί or Βζίκννσι or τιθζάσι dLdoaa-i Βζίκνυασι Imperfect. ιστην €τΙΘην €8ί8ων ihdKvvv ιστη5 ιστη €τίΘη9 €Τίθη εδιδωί €διδω idcUiws idcLKiw Χστατον ετίθβτον idldoTov edcLKVuTOV ίστάτην ζΤίθετην εδιδοττ/ι/ edcLKuvrqv Χσταμζν Ί(ΓΓατ€ €τ1θ€μ€ν €τίθ€Τ€ βδ/δο/ζει/ ididoTC ^^ζίκνυμζν cdeiKiwre ϊστασαν €τίθ€σαν id Id σαν ib^LKwaav Second Aorist. Ζστην €στης €στη ίθην €θης €8ων €8ω9 €'δω tdvp €8vs t8v €στητον €στητην Werov ζθίτην eBoTov ibovqv tdvTOv idimjv €θτημ€ν €υτη7€ €στησαν €θ€μ€ν W€T€ €Θ€σαν βδο/ιει/ €δοσαν €δνμ€ν ZdvT€ cdvaav 154 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 123. Subjunctive Active. Present. s. Ιστω τιθώ Μω δεικνύω D. Ιστης ίσττ} τιθης τιθη δίδω? Ιστητον Λστητον τιΘητον τιθητον 8ώώτον διδώτοι/ δ€ίκνυητορ δ€ΐκνύητορ P. Ιστωμζν Ιστητζ ίστωσι τιθώμ€ν τίθητ€ τιθώσι ^ώώμζν δώώτε διδώσί δ€ίκνυωμ€ν 8€ίκνυητ9 δζίκνυωσι Second Aorist. s. στω Θω δω δνω D. στης στη θης δώί δω bvrjs δύη στητον στητον Θητον θητον δώτοζ/ δωτον δνητορ δνητορ P. στωμζρ στητ€ στωσι θωμ€ν 6ητ€ θώσι Optative δω/χει/ δωτ€ δώσι Active. δυωμ^ν 8ύητ€ δνωσι Present. • s. Ισταίην ισταίης ίσταίη τίθείην τίθζίης τιθζίη δώοίην Βίδοίης δώοίη δ€ΐκιη)θΐμι deiKvvoLS deiKvvoi D. P. D. P. ισταιητον Ισταιητην ίσταίημζν Ισταίητζ ίσταίησαν ισταιτον ίσταίτην ίσταιμζν Ιστάίτε ΙσταΪ€ν τιθζίητον τιθζίητην τιθ€ίημ€ν τιθζίητ€ τιθζ'ιησαν δώοιητον δώοιητην δώοίημ^ν δίδθίητ€ δώοίησαν Or thus, τιθζίτον δίδοΊτορ τιθζίτηρ διδοίτηρ τίθζΐμζρ διδοίμ€Ρ τιθζΧτζ διδοιτ€ τιΘζΙζρ δίδοΐ€Ρ θ€ίκννοιτορ δξίκνυοίτηρ δ€ίκννοιμ€ΐ δ€ΐκννοιτ€ δ€ίΚΡυοΐ€Ρ § 123.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 155 Second Aorist s. D. σταΐην σταίης σταίη Θβίην θζίης θ€ίη 8οίην 8οίη9 ^οίη δνην 8νης Βνη σταίη τον σταιητην Θ^ίητον θαητην ^οίητον ^οιητην Βυητον Βυητην P. σταίη μζν Θζίημζν 8θίημ€ν 8νημ€ν σταίητ€ σταίησαν ΘζίηΤξ θ^ίησαν ^θίηΤ€ Ποίησαν Βύητξ ένησαν Or thus, D. σταΐτον Θείτον ' δοΐτοζ/ hvTov σταίτην θ€ίτην δοίτην δντην P. σταΊ,μ^ν σταϊτ€ θ€ΐτ€ 8οΐμ€ν δοίτε δί/χβι/ σταΐζν β€Ϊ€ν Imperative doUv Active. δΟβι/ Present. S. (,στη Τίθ€1 διδου 8ζίκνν ίστάτω τιΘ^τω δί^ότω 8€ίκνυτω D. ΐστατορ τίθζτον δί8οτον δείκνντον Ιστάτων τιθίτων διδότων δ€ΐκνυτων P. ϊστατ€ τίθ€Τ€ δίδοτβ δείκνντε ίστάτωσαν ΟΧ τιθίτωσαν or ^ώότωσαν or δ€ίκνντωσαν ΟΓ ίστάντων Τίθ^ντων ^ώόντων δεικννντων Second Aorist. S. στηθί eh δόί δνθί στητω Θ^τω δότω δΰτω D. στητον βίτον δοτοί/ bvTOV στητζύΊ/ θέτων δότων 8ύτων P. στητ€ θ€Τ€ ΒάΓ€ δντ€ στητωσαν or θίτωσαν or Μάτωσαν ΟΓ δντωσαν ΟΓ στάντων θεντων Infinitive Βόντων Active. Βνντων Pres. ίστάναι TiBevai tMvai deiKvvvcu 2Aor στ^ναι θ€ΪΡαι dovvai utO^Ot 156 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 123. Pres. Ιστάς 2ΑθΓ. aras Participle Active. Tidels eels δίδονς δον9 s. D. Indicative Passive and Middle. Present. Ισταμαι Ίστασαι Ισταται τίθεμαι τίθ€σαι or τίθ€ται δίδομαι τίθτ) δίδοσαι δίδοται δείκνυμαι δβίκνυσαι δ€ΐκννται ϊστασθον ϊστασθον Ιστάμζθα Ιστασθζ Ιστανται τίθ€σθον τίθβσθον Τίθεμίθα τίθ€σθ€ τίθενται δίδοσθον δίδοσθον διδόμζθα δίδοσθε δίδονται δίίκννσθον δείκννσθον δζίκννμζθα δζίκνυσθζ δζίκνννται Imperfect. S. D. Ρ. Ιστάμην Ιστασο ΟΥ €Τΐθ€μην €τίθ€σο or €δίδόμην ζδίδοσο or ζδζίκννμηι ίδ^ίκνυσο Ιστω €τίθθν €δίδον ιστατο €τίθ€Τ0 €δίδοτο €δ€ίκνυτο ϊστασθον €Τίθ€σθον €δίδοσθον ζδ€ΐκνυσθον Ιστάσθην €τιθ€σθην ζδιδόσθην €δ€ίκννσθην Ιστάμζθα Ιστασθζ €Τίθ€μ€θα €τίθ€σθ€ ζδιδόμξθα €δίδοσθ6 €δ€ΐκνυμζθα €δ€ίκννσθ€ Ισταντο €τίθ€νΤΟ €δίδοντο ^δζίκννντο Second Aorist Middle. €πριάμην €πρίασο ΟΥ €πρίω €πρίατο €θ€μην €θ€σο or €θου €θ€ΤΟ 4δ6μην ίδοσο or €δου €δοτο ■ ^- επρίασθον επριάσθην ζθβσθον βθβσθην €δοσθον ζδόσθην €πριάμ€θα €πρίασθ€ €πρίαντο ζθίμ^θα €θ€σθ€ €θ(νΤΟ €δόμ€θα ίδοσθζ Ιίδοντο ^ 123.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 157 Subj unctive Passive and Middle. Present. s. Ιστώμαι Τίθωμαι ^ώώμαί Βεικννωμαι tVr^ τιθη δώω δεικννη ίστήται τιθηται didcuTai δείκνυηται D. ιστησθον τιθησθον δώώσθον δεικννησθον ιστησθον τιθησθον Βώώσθον δείκννησθον P. ίοΎωμΐθα τιθωμξθα ^ώώμεθα δβίκνυώμεθα Ιστησθζ Τίθησθζ δίδώσ^β δεικννησθε Ιστώνται τιθώνται Βώώνται δείκννωνται Second Aorist Middle. s. πρίωμαι θωμαί δώ /xat ττρίρ ^» δω ττρίηται θηται da>TaL• D. ττρίησθον θησθον δωσθον πρίησθον θησθον ^ώσθον P. ττριωμζθα θώμ€θα ^ώμεθα ττρίησθε θήσθ€ δώσ^6 πρίωνται θώνται δώνται Ορ tative Passive and Middl• α Present. s. ίσταίμην Τίθβίμην ^ώοίμην δεικννοίμην ίσταίο ΤίθξΙο ΜοΙο beiKvvoLO ίσταΐτο ΤίθβΊτο ^ώοϊτο beiKvvoLTO D. ίσταίσθον τίθεΐσθον δίδοΊσθον δείκννοισθον ίσταίσθην Τίθείσθην δώοίσθην δεικνυοίσθηβ P. Ισταίμξθα Τίθείμζθα δώοίμζθα δεικννοίμεθα ίσταίσθξ ΤίθεΙσθζ δώοΐσθζ ' Βεικνυοισθε ίστάίντο τιθύντο bibolvTO deiiawoivro Second Aorist Middle. S. πριαίμην θζίμην Βοίμην πρίαιο θ€Ίθ δοΓο T) πρίαιτο θείτο δοΐτο XJ, πρίαισθον θείσθον ΒοΙσθον πρ^^σβην βείσ&ηρ ^οίσθην 158 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 124. p. 'ττριαίμζθα ττρίαισθε ττρίαιντο θείμζθα Θ€Ϊσθ€ δοίμζθα Βοϊσθζ Imperative Passive and Middle. Present. s. ϊστασο τίθ^σο ^'ώοσο δζίκνυσο or ΐστω or τίθου or δ/δου ίστάσθω Τίθίσθω ^ώόσθω δεικννσθω D. ιστασβον τίθ^σθον δίδοσθον δβίκνυσθον ίστάσθων τίθ^σθων ^ώόσθων δακνύσθων P. Ιστασθζ τίθ€σθ€ διδοσ^β δζίκννσθζ ίστάσθωσαν τιθ^σθωσαν δίδόσθωσαν δ€ΐκννσθωσαν or Ιστάσθων or τιθίσθων or ^ί3όσθ<ύν or δζίκνύσθωρ Second Aorist Middle. s. (πρίασο) πρίω {θ€σο) θου (δόσο) bod πριάσθω θίσθω δόσθω D. πρίασθον θ€σθον δόσθον πριάσθων θίσθων δόσθων P. πρίασθζ θίσθζ δόσ^β πριάσθωσαν θίσθωσαν δόσθωσαν or πριάσθων or θίσθων or δόσθων Infinitive Passive and Middle. Pres. ιστασθαι τίθ^σθαι δ'ώοσθαι δζίκννσθαι 2 Α. Μ. πρίασθαι θβσθαι δόσθαι Participle Passive and Middle. Pres. ιστάμενος ηθ^μ^νος δώόμενοί 8€ΐκννμ€νος 2 Α. Μ. πριάμζνος θεμ^νος δό /xeroff ^ 124. Inflection of ΐημι, to send^ €ΐμί, ίο he^ είμί^ ίο go, φνμί, ίο say, and κβΐμαι, ίο lie down. Present. 'Ίημι, Ind. S. Ίημι^ 7ης, Ίησι, D. terov, P. tf/xfi/, terf, ΙζΙσι ΟΓ (ίβ'ασι) Ιασι. Passive and Middle, S. t6/xat, Ι^σαι or Irj, terat, D. Ϊ€σθον, P. Ιεμεθα, ΐεσθζ, levrai Subj. S. ίώ, Ifjs, Ifj, D. irJToVy P. ίωμ€ν, i^re, ίώσί. Passive and Mid- dle, S. ίώμαί, ijj) ίηται,^ D. ίησθον^ P. ία)/χ€^α, ίησθ€^ ίωνται § 124.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 159 Opt. S. ΐ€ίην, ieiTyy, ί€ίη. D. ί€ίητον, ίζίητην, P. ίζίημζν, ΙΐΙητξ^ ΐ€ίησαν. Passive and IMiddle, S. ίείμην, Ulo, ielro, JJ. ielaOov, ί€ίσθην. P. ί€ίμ€θα, Ulaue, leluTO Imp. S. tet, ίέτω, D. teroi/, ίβτων, P. terf, ϋτωσαν or Ιίντων. Pas- sive and Middle, S. Γεσο or ?ου, ίίσθω, D. Ιξσθον, ίίσθων, P. Ιζσθζ, ϋσθωσαν or ίίσθων Inf. ieVat. Passive and Middle, leadai Part, teis", ίείσα, teV, G. Uvtos. Passive and Middle, Ιίμενος Imperfect. S. tr/v (tetv), tr;?, tTy, D. ϊζτον, Ιετην, Ϋ.ί€μ€ν, lere, leaav. Pas- sive and Middle, S. ίεμην, teao or tov, Ϊ€το, D. Ίεσθον, ί^σθην, P. ίεμεθα, leaue, levro Second Aorist. Ind. S. (ην, ης, η), D. €Ϊτον or eroi/, etr?;!/ or €την, P. et/xev or c/xfi/, etre or ere, elaav or caav. Middle, S. et^r;i/ or €μην, eiao eirOy D. ύσθον^ εϊσθην, P. είμεθα, είσθε, είντο Subj. S. ω, rjy, 77, D. ζτοι/, P. ωμεν, ητε, ωσι. Middle, S. ωμαι, fj, ηται^ D. ησθον, P. ωμεθα, ησθε, ωνται Opt. S. εΐην, εϊης, εΊη, D. είητον, είητην, Ρ. είημεν or είμεν, είητε ΟΓ €tre, εϊησαν or etei/. Middle, S. είμην, είο, είτο, D. είσθον^ είσθην, Ρ. είμεθα, είσθε, εΙντο Imp. S. ey, ετω, D. erov, ετών, Ρ. ere, ετωσαν or εντων. Middle, S. (βσο) ου, εσθω, D. εσθον, εσθων, Ρ. εσθε, εσθωσαν or Inf. eti/at. Middle, βσ^αι Part, ety, βισα, e//, G. εντός. Middle, εμενος Present. Έΐμί and ΈΪμι. Ind. S. ei/xi (^olic e/x/xt) et/xt ε I (Ionic efs. Epic εσσι) εΙς, εϊ (Epic εϊσθα) εστί (Doric εντί) el σι (Doric εξ-ειτή Ό. εστόν ϊτον Ρ. εσμεν (Ι. Ε. εΙμεν, Poetic ϊμεν ε μεν, D. είμες) ε στ ε ϊτε είσί (Ι. εάσί, D. eVri) ιασί (rare είσι) feubj. S. ω (Ι. εω, Epic βιω) ιω (rare ε'ίω) 7] ς Ι-ης (Ε. ϊι^σθα) fj LT] (Ε. ΐ7;σι) ^roi/ ιητον Ρ. ωμεν (D. ω/χε?, ιω/χίζ^) ϊωμεν (Ε. ϊομεν) ητε ϊητε ωσι (Ι. €ωσί,Β(Εθίίο 1ωι/^ί) ιωσι Opt. S. €17; ν tot/xt, Ιοίην (rare tetT^^) e 1 77 y (I. eoty , Ρ . €ΐ7;σ^α) t ο t j, ΙοΙης €Ϊη (I. eoA, Elean EA) tot, totT/ (rare cij|) 160 INFLECTION OF WORDS. L§ ^^4. Imp. υ. p. s. D. P. Inf. Part. D. P. LOLTOV Ιοίτην ϊθίμ€ν lOLT€ 10L€V ϊθί (in composition et) >/ ϊτον ϊτ ω ν it LT€ ϊτωσαν, Ιόντων, Ίτων livai (rare iWt, Ε. t/xez/ai, ϊμμ€ναί, ϊμ€ν) Ιών, Ιοΐ/σα, Ιόν, G. Ιόντος Ind. S. D. P. Opt. S. D. P. Inf. Part. (a) The voice that αηΤΟν €LTOV €ΐητην €Ϊτην €'ίημ€ν et/xei/ €Ϊητ6 etre β'ίησαν eie?/ (Elean ΕΑΝ) ϊσθί (eVo, €σσο) ζ στ ω (ήτω) €στον €στων €στ€ 'έστω σαν, όντων (D. iov- των, €στων, Cretan eoi /τω) elvai {JEi, €μμ€ναι, Ε. €μμ€- ναι, €/xei/at, εμμ^ν, e/xez/, D. ημεν, ημες, €ΐμ€ν, et)uey, et- μ€ΐν, €μ€ν^) if if Γ^ if / Τ > ' ' ' . ων, ο ν, Lr. οντοζ \ι. €ων, €ον , Ι). €Ls, used only in the oblique cases, as eWa, eV- ~ τασσι) ούσα, feminine (I. βουσ-α, ^Φ]. €θίσα, Β. ιωστα, Ό. €θϋσα, €ωσα, €υσα, €άσα or ίασα) Imperfect, ην, η (rarely ημην, Ι. ea, §α, y^iv, rj'ia, ya eov, €σκον, Ε. ήην) ης, ησϋα (1. eay, ϋ<. βτ;?, e?/- jj^is, η€ίσσα σθα) η,ην{Έ. η€ν, ήην, Ι. eWe, ^ct, before a vowel ^^eti/ * I), ^s•) (E. ^7e, ^^6, te) ητον, ησΤον fjciTOv, fjTov ήτην, ήστην τ]€ίτην, ΐΐτην (Ε. ϊτην, LTOV) ημ€ν (Ό. ημ€ς) ^€ΐμ€ν, ημ^ν (Ε. ηομεν) ητ€, ηστ€ {L• eaTc) fj€iT€,fjTe η σαν [Ι. €σαν, εασαν, ε'ίαταιΊ) ηεσαν (Ι. ή'ίσαν, χισαν^ Ε. ή'ίσαν^ 2ΐσαν, ifiov, ϊσαν) Future of ξΐμί, €σομαί, €ση Οι eVet, %σεται or ίσται, (Doric έσσούμαι) €σ€σθον €σόμ€θα, €σ€σθ€, έσονται εσοίμην, eVoto, εσοιτο εσοισθον, εσοίσθην εσοίμεθα-, εσοισθε^ εσοιντο ίσεσθαι εσόμενος, η, ον second person singular et follows the analogy of the middle is, it comes from ΕΩ like φιλεει φιΚει from φΐλεομαι. ■§ 125.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 161 (b) '^Β.μην and eVo, εσσο take the personal endings of the mid- dle voice. (c) In the imperative ϊσθι the radical vowel becomes i. Present. Φημ,ί. Ind. S. φημί, φ.7?5 φησί, D. φατόν, P. φα /xeV, φατ€, φάσί. Middle, 2 plur. φάσθβ, as active. Subj. S. φώ, φης, φτj, D. φητον, P. φωμ€ν, φητ€, φωσί Opt. S. φαίην, φαίης^ φαίη, D. φαίητον, φαιητην, Ρ. φαίημ^ν or φαΓ- /Χ6Ι/, φαίητ€ or φαίτ€, φαίησαν Οι φαΐ€ν Imp. S. φά^ί or φαθί, φάτω, D. φάτον, φάτων, Ρ. φάτ€, φάτωσαν or φάντων. Middle, 2 sing, φάο, 3 sing, φάσθω, 2 plur. φάσ^€, all as active. Inf. φάναι. Middle, φάσθαι, as active. Part, φάς φάσα φάν, G. φάντος• Middle, φάμζνοζ, as active. Imperfect. S. €φην, €φης οτίφησθα^ ^Φΐι ^' ^φατον, ζφάτην, Ρ. €φαμ€ν, εφατζ, €φασαν. Middle,* βφά/Ατ;!/, as active. The traditional orthography of the second person singular of the in- dicative active of φημί is φτ;^, with iota subscript, contracted from φάας. For its acute accent, compare χρη. Present. Ket/xat. Ind. S. Κ€ΐμαι, κύσαι (Epic fcaat), /cetrat, D. κζΐσθον, P. κζΐμζθα^ Κ€Ϊσθ€^ κϋνται (Ionic κτάται, κ^ίαται) Subj. S. Κζωμαι {κ^Ιωμαι^ 8ίά-Κ€ίμαι), Kerj, Κ€ηταί (κηταί^ ΚζΊται), Τ), κίησθον, Ρ. κζωμξθα^ Κ€ησθ€, κίωνται Opt. S. κ€θίμην, KeoLO, κίοιτο, D. κίοισθον, κ€θίσθην, Ρ. ΚζοΙμ^θα, Κ€θίσΘ€, KeoLVTO Imp. S. κβίσο, κ€ίσθω, Ώ. ΚΈΐσθον, κείσθων, Ρ. κβίσθβ, κ^ίσθωσαν Inf. κζίσθαι [κ.ί€σθαι) Part, κ€ίμ€νος, η, ον Imperfect. S. €Κ€ίμην, €Κ€ίσο, €Κ€ΐτο (iterative κ€σκ€το), Ί). €Κ€ί(τθον^ €Κζίσθην^ Ρ. €Κ€ΐμ€θα, €Κ€ΐσθ€, €Κ€ΐντο (Ionic eKearOy Ικζίατο) The infinitive of the compounds of κ^ΐμαι takes the circumflex on the penult, because it is contracted from the rare κί^σθαι ; as κατακ€Ϊ•• σθαι^ 3ίακ€Ϊσθαί» § 13tS. I. The radical vowel is lengthened in the singu- lar of the present and imperfect of the indicative active, and j sometimes in all the numbers of the same tenses of the indica- I tive passive and middle. I The first and third persons singular of the present indicative 162 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ξ) 125. active take the original personal ending μι, σι, respectively. ίστάω gives ϊστημί ίστης Ιστησι, for Ισταομί Ιστά€ΐς ίστα€σι : ϊστα- μαι Ιστασαι ϊσταται, for Ιστάομαι ίσταβσαι ίστά^ταί. τί,θίω τίθημι τίθης τίθησι, for τίθ^ομι TiuicL^ τίθ€€σί : τίθεμαι τίθεσαί τίθ€ται, for rt^eo/xat τίθ€€σαι rt^eerat. διδόω διδω/χί, δι'δω? διδωσι, for διδοο/χι ^ώθ€ΐς διδοβσι : δίδομαι dldoaai diborai, for διδοο /xat διδοβσαι διδοβται. ^€ίκννω ^€ΐκννμι deLKVvs bcLKvvai, for ^€ίκννομι bctKvveis dcL- κννεσι : ^ζίκννμαι ^ξίκνυσαι deiKwraL, for ^^ικνυομαι dcLKvveaai dei- Kvverai. 2. The subjunctive of verbs in 7;jLtt and ω /xt takes the com- mon connecting vowels and is contracted. Verbs in ημι from αω are contracted from the Ionic subjunctive ; as Ιστύω ίστώ, The subjunctive of verbs in νμι is the same as that of verbs in νω, 3. The optative active of verbs in ημι and ω μι annexes to the root of the verb the endings S. ψ ης η, D. ητον ητην, P. ημ€ν ητ€ ήσαν, preceded by t. (§ 117, 3, c.) The optative passive and middle of verbs in ημι and ωμι annexes the regular personal endings, likewise preceded by t. (§ 117, 3.) The optative of verbs in νμί is regularly the same as that of verbs in νω, 4. The imperative annexes the regular personal endings to the root. (See the examples.) 5. The infinitive amiexes -ναι, -σθαι to the root without any further change. 6. The root of the participle active is formed by annexing VT \.o the root of the verb. The participle passive and middle annexes -/xei/oy to the root of the verb. Note 1. In a few instances, the 8ΐώ^ηη€ί2ν6 coincides with the in- dicative ; thus, σκ6δά]/η;/χ6, subj. 3 sing. σκ€3άννϋσί,σκ€^άνννταί', κτίνρνμι, subj. I plur. κτίννυμζρ \ κ€Ϊμαί, subj. 3 sing. Keirat. Note 2. (a) The dual and plural of the optative active often drop τ;; in which case ήσαν becomes cv ; (see the paradigms.) (b) In a few instances the optative of verbs in νμι is formed after the analogy of verbs in ημι or ω /it ; the diphthong vl however becomes V ; thus, Βαίννμι, opt. 3 bing. daivvro or daivvro, 3 plur. daivvaro Ionic ; 8ύνω Βΰην, φύω φϋην, ζ^ύ'γννμι ζ€νγννην, ομνυμι ομνΰην ; ττη- γννμί, 3 sing, πη-γνϋτο. ^ 126.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 163 (c) ΦΘΙΜΙ forms the optative after the preceding analogy ; thus, φθίμην, φθΐο, for φθίίμην, φθαο. (d) The optative passive and middle may adopt the terminations of verbs in ω ; as ξνν-ίστοϊτο, for ξνν-ισταΐτο ; προ-οΐτο, for πμο-ύτο. See also κρίμαμαι, μάρναμαι, ονομαι, τίθημι, in the Catalogue of Verbs. Note 4. The second person singular of the imperative active most commonly drops θι and lengthens the radical vowel; as ϊστη, tlUcl, dl- dov, deiKuv, for ϊστα-θι τίθ^-τί δίδο -^t ^€ίκνυ-6ι. Note 5. As a general rule, all verbs in /zi may be inflected like verbs in ω ; as τιθβω ηθώ, τίθβ^ίς ri^ei?, ri^eet tlUcI ; teet? ieT?, Ucl Ul; ^€ΐκνύω beLKvveLs deiKvvei deiKvvovaLv. The singular of the imperfect of τίθημι and δ/δω/χι is most commonly formed from τι^εω διδόω ; thus, €τίθονν eV/^ets" eVt^et ; ididovv idibovs edldov, ^c§ 126. 1. The second aorist active generally lengthens the radical vowel throughout the indicative and imperative, and in the infinitive. The second aorist middle commonly retains the short radical vowel in these moods. E.g. βίβημι, 2 A. ζβην ης τ/, D. ητον ητην, P. ημ€ν ητ€ ησαν^ imperat, βηθί ητω, Τ), ητον ητων, Ρ. ητ€ ητωσαν^ infin. βηναι γιγνώσκω, 2 Α. ζγνων ως ω, Ώ. ωτον ωτην, Ρ. ωμ€ν ωτ€ ωσάν, im- perat. ^νωβί ωτω, D. ωτον ωτων, Ρ. ωτβ ωτωσαν, infin. yvcuvai δΰι/ω, 2 Α. eddv νς ν. D. ντον ϋτην, Ρ. ϋμ€ν ντ€ ϋσαν, imperat. 8νθι ντω, Ό. ντον ντων, Ρ. ντ€ ντωσαν, infin. ^νναι See also αλίσκομαί, άμβΧίσκω, άμπννω, αρπάζω, βαίνω, βάλλω, βι- βρό)σκω, βιόω, βΧώσκω, βροντάω^ γηράσκω, δώράσκω, δίδω/χι, δυω, €γ€ίρω, €7Γομαι, €χω, θνησκω,ίημι, ίπταμαι, Ιστημι, κιχβω, κΧάω, κλνω, ΚΤ€ίνω, κτίζω J Χνω, ναίω, ονίνημι, οντάω, πβλάω, πΙμπΧημι, πίνω,, πΧώω, ΠΡΙΑΜΑΙ, πτησσω, σβ^νννμι, ΣΕΥί2, σκίΧΧομαι, σνν-αντάω, ΤΑΛΑί2, τίθημι, τιτρωσκω, φθάνω, φθίω, φρίω, φνω, χ^ω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. ^A. 2. The second aorist middle optative, like the present middle optative, retains the radical νοΛνοΙ of its indicative ; as δίδωμι, €δό'μην bo -ίμην ; πίμπΧημι, ΙπΧψμην πΧψιμην πΧτί'μην, See also βάλλω, γιγζ/ώσκω, Ιημι, ονίνημι, πρίασθαί, τίθημι, in the Catalogue of A^erbs. h Note 1. The aorists ζκταν, ονταν, from κτβίνω, οντάω, retain the short vowel of the root. The second aorist of δι δω /χ t and τίθημι lengthens it only in the singular of the indicative and in the infinitive. Note 2. In a few instances the second aorist middle lengthens the radical vowel in the indicative, imperative, infinitive, and participle. See βάλλω, κιχάνω, oz/iVt^/xi, πίμπΧημι, in the Catalogue of Verbs. Note 3. In a few instances, oi, in the second aorist optative active of verbs in ω μι, is changed into ω ; as άΧίσκομαι άΧωην. See also • βιόω, δίδω/χι, in the Catalogue of Yerbs, 164 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 127, 128. Note 4. The imperatives βηθι, στήθι, from βαίνω, ΐστημι, in com- position often drop Ol, and change η into α ; as άναβα κατάβά, ανάστα παράστά. (Compare § 125, η. 4.) Note 5. The second person singular of the second aorist imperative active in the following verbs drops t of the personal ending θι, and changes Θ into y ; thus, δίδω μι δό$•, τίθημι ues, \ημι es, €χω σγβζ, φρεω φρ€ς, Aorist Passive, 5^.^ 127• The aorist passive takes the personal endings of the active voice, and, in its inflection, follows the analogy of verbs in ημι from €ω. (Compare the examples.) Second Perfect and Second Pluperfect, § 128. The second perfect and pluperfect of some pure verbs drop the connecting vowel, after the analogy of verbs in μι. The singular of the indicative is not used ; except δ/δια. 1. Second Perfect of βαίνω, Θνησκω, Ϊστημι, ΤΑΛΑί2. Ind. S. (βββαα) {τίθναα) (βσταα) (τζτ\αα) D. βίβατον τζθνατον €στατον Τ€τ\ατον P. β^βαμβν βίβατ€ τεθναμζν τίθνατζ 6σταμ€ν €στατ€ €στ€ατ€ Τ€τλαμ€ν Τ€τλατ€ β€βάσι τεθνάσι €στητ€ Ιστάσι τετλάσι βζβάάσι ίστίάσι The forms β^βάάσι, €στητ€ are Epic ; €στ€ατ6, ίστίάσ t, Ionic. Subj. S. β€βω βΦΐί^ βΦη (τ€θνω) not found ίστω ίστης ίσττί (τ€τ\ω) not found ' D. β€βητον ίστητον Ρ. β€βωμ€ν β€βηΤ€ βφωσι ίστωμζν ίστητ€ ίστωσι Opt. S. {βφαίην) not found τζθναΐην Τίθναίης τβθναίη ίσταίην ίσταίης ίσταίη τζτΧαίην Τ€τλαίης Τ€τλαίη D. τ^Θναίητον Τ€θναίητην ίσταίητον ίσταιητην Τ€τ\αίητον Τ€τ\αιητην P. Τ€θναίημ€ν Τ€θναίητ€ τ^θναίησαν ίσταίημεν €σταίητ€ ' ίσταίησαν Τ€τ\αίημ€ν Τ€τλαίητ€ τ€τ\αίησαΡ § 128.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 165 Imp. S. (βξβαθι) D. P. τζθναθι τ^θνάτω τίθνατον τζθνάτων Ισταθι τβτλαθί ίστάτω Τ€τλάτω €(Γτατον Τ€τλατιη/ ίστάτων τ€τλάτων €στατ€ Τ€τλατ€ €στάτωσαν Τ€τλάτωσαν ίστάναι Τ€τλάναί Τ€ϋναΤ€ Τζθνάτωσαν Inf. β€βάναι τ€θνάναι Epic infinitives, βεβάμεν, τζθνάμζναι τ€θνάμ€ν, €στάμ€ναι ίστάμ€ν, τ€τ\άμ€ναι τ€τ\άμ€ν. — Te^i/ai/at is written also r e- θνάναι as if from τξθναίναι. Part, βζβαως β€βανία βζβαάς, G. βξβαωτος, contracted β^βως βζβώσα, G. βζβωτος Τ€θν€ως (τ^θν^νία) τ^θν^ός, G. τ^θν^ωτος ; Epic Te6v€Loas or τ^θνηως Τ€θρηνΙα, G. -ώτος or -ότος, Doric τ^θνάως €σταώς, G. -ότος ; also ίστηως ίστηνία, G. -ώτος ; Ionic εστβώί εστβ- ώσα, G. -ώτος ; Attic €στώς ίστώσα ίστώς, G. -ώτος Τ€τΧηώς Τ€τληνΙα, G. Τ€τΧηότος Second Pluperfect. S. {€β€βά€υν) (iTcuvdeLv) {ίστά^ιν) (ererXaeti/) D. €βΙβατον Ετίθνατον €στατον ζτίτΧατον ζβζβάτην Ιτεθνάτην ίστάτην €Τ€τ\άτην Ρ. €β€βαμ€ν ζτβθναμβν €σταμ€ν €Τ€τ\αμ€ν €β€βαΤ€ €Τ€θνατ€ €στατ€ €Τ€τΧαΤ€ ζβίβασαν €Τ€θνασαν €στασαν €Τ€τΧασαν 2. Second Perfect of γίγνομαι, ΜΑΩ, αρίστάω, Βαπνεω (-άω). Ind. S. (yeyaa). (μψαα) {ηρίσταα) (δεδβ/τΓΐ^αα) D. 2 μίματον P. μίμαμζν ηρίσταμ^ν bebcLirvap^v y€yaaT€ μ€ματ€ yeyadai μ€μάάσι Imp. 3 μεμάτω Inf. yeya/xez/ (E.) ηριστάναι dedeinvavai Second Pluperfect. D. 3 €y€yάτηv p• 3 ίμίμασαν 3. Second Perfect of δίω, to fear y κλνω. 'Ind. S. δβδία {κ€κΧυα) δέδ/α? δ€δΐ6 (Epic δε/δ^β) Τ). BediaTOV 166 INFLECTION OF IVORDS. E^ P. ^€^ίαμ€ν δ/δι/χ6ζ/ (Epic δε/δι/χ^ι/) δεδ/άσλ Subj. δεδ/ω, -τ;?, regular Opt. δβδιβιτ;!/ (like le/T/i/) Imp. S. 2 δ€διΐ9ι, Epic δβ/διί^ι P. 2 δα'δΐΓ€ Epic laf. δβδίβι/αι, Epic δειδί/χει/ Part. δβδιώί, regular Κ€κΚνΘι K€k\vT€ [% 129. Second Pluperfect. S. εδβδίβίΐ/ regular ; also 1 plur. Epic εδβίδί/χβι/, 3plur. idebiaav. Epic idei^Laap § 120• 1. A few mute and liquid verbs drop the connect- ing vowel in some of the parts of the second perfect and pluper- fect ; as αι/ώγω ανωγ-μεν, κράζω κεκραχ-Θι, See also ^-γζίρω^ €Ϊκω^ €ρχομαι, πάσχω, π€ίθω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 2. Οιδα, novi^ Iknow^ the second perfect of ΕΙΔί2 flAii), and its second pluperfect ^detv, I knew ^ drop the connecting vowel in many of their parts. In the subjunctive and optative, olda follows the analogy of verbs in /nt, that is, it presupposes ΕΙΔΕί2 ΕΙΔΗΜΙ. Second Perfect. Ind. S. olda Subj. S. βΖδώ (Epic €4δ€ω^ οίσθα (oldas, οίσθας) aide eldfj Ό. Ίστον eldrJTOV P. 'ίσμ€ν (ο'ί^αμεν, Ionic ϊστ€ (o'ldare) Χσάσι (οϊδάσι) ΐδ/Χ6Ι/) (ΙΒώμεν (Ε. €Ϊδομεν) eldrjre €ΐ3ώσ•ι Opt. S. ζΐ^ζίην Imp. ίσθι ϊστω (Bceotic ϊττω) D. €ΐ^€ΐητον 'ίστον €ΐ^€ΐητην Ιστών Ρ. €ΐδ€ίημ€ν €ΐ8€ίητ€ Χστζ ϊστω σαν Inf. d^evaL (Epic tS/xei/at, Part. ίΙΒως eldvla eiSos", G. ιδμ€ΐ/, cldoTos *8€μ€ν) , (Epic feminine ιδυΐα) The regular forms oldas, οϊδαμ€ν^ olbaTc, οϊΗάσι are used chiefly by the later authors. ij 130.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 167 Second Pluperfect. S. fjd^Lv or τ'βη, (Ionic rjdea, Epic ψί^βιν) jjd^Ls or τίοης, fjd€La6a or τΐδησθα, (Epic ήβ/δείί, ψί^ης) ^δ€ί or ιί^η, fjbeLv or τ/δ/^ι/, (Ionic 7;3ee el'dee, once ψώ€, Epic ijeideL ηβίδη) D. fjdecrov or ή στορ τι^ζίτην or τ^στην P. ^3€ΐμ€Ρ or 7)σμ.ζν fjdeLTe or ^^στβ (Ionic ijbeare) fjbeaav or ^^σαι/ (Epic ισαι/) Note. The forms αι/ώχ^ω, ανωχθ€, from α ζ/ ω γ α, are explained as follows ; αι/ωγβτω άνώγ€Τ€^ syncopated άνώγ-το) avcoy-re ; the endings -γτω, -yre suggested the passive endings -χθω -χθβ, (as in λ€λ€-χθω The forms ξγρηγορθε, iypTj-yopuaL, from eye /ρω, are explained as follows ; €γρηγόρ€Τ€ iyp-qyopre €γρηγορθ€, εγρηγορθαί, -pre suggest- ing the passi\'e endings -pOe, -ρθαι, (as in €φθαρθ€, μεμορθαι, τίτορθαι,) Ιίζίθω hdiS πεποσθ€, formed as follows; πεπόνθατε πεπονθτβ ttc- πονστ€ π€ποστ€, -στ€ suggesting the passive ending -σθε, (as in πε- Perfect and Pluperfect Passive and Middle, § 130. 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive and middle have no connecting vowel. (See the examples, § 84, et seq.) i 'T 2. In mute and liquid verbs, and sometimes in pure verbs, the third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect passive and middle indicative is formed by means of the participle and Ιίβίσ/, ήσαν ; as, Τ€τριμμ€νοι (ai, a) είσί, ηγγεΧμενοι (ai, a) βίσΐ, for τετριβ-νται, ηγ- yeX-vrai Τ€τρίμμ€νοι {αϊ, a) ήσαν, ^yyeX/zevot (at, α) ήσαν, for €Τ€τριβ-ντο, ηγ- yeX'VTo Pure verbs Λvhich take σ before μ and r (^ 111, ?z. 4) form this person after the analogy of mute verbs ; as τβλεω, TereX^• σμίνοί ζΐσί, rereλeσ/xeVot ήσαν. 3. The perfect passive suhjunciive and optative are formed by means of the participle and eti/at, to he. (See the exam- ples. ) J Note, (a) The perfect passive subjunctive and optatiΛ^e of a few pure verbs is formed after the analogy of verbs in μι ; as κτάομαί κέ- κτημαι, Subj. κ€κτωμαι KeKrfj κ€κτηταί, &C., or κίκτωμαι Κ€κττ] κέκτηται, &C. Opt. κεκτημην KCKTrjo kckttJto, &C. l68 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 131, 132. See also βάλλω, κάθημαί, καλεω, λύω, μιμνησκω, οίκο^ίομεω, ορνυμι, τ€μνω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. (b) Κτάομαι and μιμνησκω form the perfect passh^e optative also after the analogy of contract verbs in άω ; thus, Opt. Κ€κτωμην Κ€Κτωο Κ€Κτώτο, &C. μζμνωμην μξμνωο μ^μνωτο (lonic resolved μξμν^ωτο) (c) Some of the parts of the perfect passive and middle oi άραρ'κτκω^ μιμνησκω^ and κάθημαί (ΕΩ), take the terminations and accent of the present ; as άραρίσκω, P. P. subj. 3 sing. προσ-αρηρ€ταί ; κάθημαί, subj. κάθωμαί κάθτ] κάθηταί, opt. καθοίμην. See these verbs in the Catalogue of Verbs. Present^ Imperfect^ and Second Aorist Middle, § 131• 1. In the Epic dialect, the present, imperfect, and second aorist middle of a few mute and liquid verbs drop the connecting vowel in some of their parts ; as άρχομαι αργ-μ€νος, ^βχομαί de^o {^€χ-(Γθ), άΧλομαί άλτο. See also αίρβω, άν^άνω, άραρίσκω^ γβυω, yiyi^o/xat, €δω, ελ6λι^"ω, βυ- χομαί, €χω, ίκν€ομαί, κεΧομαί, λέγω, λειττω, ΛΕΧΩ, μίγννμί, ορνυμί, πάλλω, π^ρθω, πηγννμί, σβυομαί, ΣΤΕΥΟΜΑΙ, φέρω, φυλάσσω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 2. The future middle drops the connecting vowel only in eσ-rαt for €σ€ταί^ from et/it, to be. Note. The form προ-φνλαχθβ, from φυλάσσω (ΦΥΛΑΚΩ) is ex- plained as follows ; προφυλάσσ€Τ€ προφυλάκ€Τ€ προφύλακ-τ€ ττροφύ- λαχθ€, after the analogy of ανωχθβ for άι/ώγετβ. § ISS. Dialects, 1. Indicative Active. -σι, 3 sing, of verbs in /zi, Doric -τι, rarely -j/rt; as ^ί^ωτί, τίθηη, ητί, άφίητί, φάτί, άνα^ζίκνυντί, ivri. -ν σι, 3 plur. Doric -i^rt; as ίστάντί : Ionic -άσί, as iVreaat, ίστβάσί, €άσί. The Ionic ending -ασί is used also by the Attics in δίδόασί, τίθεασί, Ιάσί {ί€ασί), and in all verbs in -υμί. -σαν, 3 phir. imperfect and second aorist, and aorist passive, JEolic, Doric, Bceotic, and Epic -v preceded by the radical vowel , as εστάν, τίθ€ν, άν€θ€ν, L€u, ehov , 8ί€γνον, for έστησαν, ετίθεσαν, ανάθεσαν, te- σαν, €^οσαν, έγνωσαν. In the aorist passive -ήσαν becomes -ei/, as ζκόσμηθεν, κατε^ίκασθεν. The forms εγνων, μι άνθη ν, for eyvtu" σαν, βμιάνθησαν, retain the long vowel. (a) The ^olic lengthens the radical vowel a, o, into αϊ, οί, in .lie singular of the indicative active of verbs in μι ; as ϊσταίμί, ττλάναιμι. The Doric lengthens α into α ; as Χσάμι. ^ 132.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 169 (b) The BcEotic lengthens e into €l in the singular of the indicative active of verbs in /xt ; as άδίκ€ίμι. (c) The Cohans usually convert contract verbs into verbs in μι ; as φίλημι^ οϊκημι, άσυνίτημί, κάλημί, €\€νθίρωμί, ^οκίμωμι. Such forois as βμίθησί, βχησι^ φαίνησι^ φίρησι^ φορβησί presuppose a theme in βω. (d) The iterative endings σκον, σκομην are appended to the root of verbs in μι without any further change ; as Ιστημι ΐστασκον στά- σκον ; ζΐμί €σκον €σκ€ ; ττίρνημί π^ρναακον ; κ^ίμαι Κ€σκ€το ; δίδω/χι δόσκον ; ζώνννμι ζωννύσκ^το ; ΔΥΜΙ δυσκβι/. 2. Indicative Passive and Middle. -νται, -ντο, 3 plur. Ionic -αται, -ατο, as ςπιστίαταί, τιθ^αται, (a) In the third person plural oi Xhe pp.rfect and pluperfecl passive and middle, π, β become φ ; κ, γ become χ, and ζ becomes δ, before -arat, -ατο ; further, the radical vowel e commonly remains unaltered before these endings ; as, οΙκ€ω ωκημαί — οΙκ€-αταί, οΙκ€-ατο κρύπτω κίκρυμμαι — κζκρνφ-αται, Κ€κρύφ-ατο λ€'γω XeXey/xat -^-\€λ€χ-αταί, \€Χ€χ-ατο αΎωΡίζω ηγώρίσμαι — άγωνίδ-αταί, άγωνίδ-ατο φθείρω εφθαρμαι — ζφθάρ-αται, ζφθάρ-ατο The Attic dialect sometimes makes use of the Ionic' third person plural; as τετάχαται, βτβτάχατο, in Thucydides and Xenophon. — Herodotus has άπίκ-αται, from άπικνεομαι {1κ-ω), (b) The -^olic and Epic lengthen the radical vowel e into η in the indicative passive and middle of verbs in μι ; as ποίημαυ, νόημαι, ^ίζη- μαι, ζνοημην, εδιζημην, €καΧημηρ, 3. Subjunctive. -τ;?, 2 sing. Epic -rjys, in θηης, ο-τηης, for θης, σττ)ς. -fj, 3 sing. Epic -ητ) ; thus, [βητ], άνη-η, στην, φψί^ ^hv^ ^*^^ βν•» ^^?7> ^ ΧΓτγι, φιι, 6fj ; so in the aorist passiΛ^e, 8αμηη, σαπηη, φανηη, for δα- p.rj, σαπχι, φαντ}. In the ^Eolic, Thessalian, and Doric dialects, t-}iis ending becom.es -el, but only in the aorist passive ; as ονγραφζΐ, ξυλογραφηθζΐ. (a) The uncontracted form of the subjunctive of verbs in μι is Ionic and Epic ; as θβω, στεωμ^ν, βω, βεω, βίομαι. Epic also θείω Beujs θείτ], βείομεν, θείομαι, στείομεν, βιω, βείω, βείομαι, for 6ώ efjs θτ], θωμζν, βωμαί, στώμεν, ω, /3ώ, βωμαι. The aorist passive subjunctive is contracted from the original form -€ω, -€77?, -€77, D. '€ητον, P. -ίωμ^ν, €ητ€, -eo)aL. The uncontracted form is Ionic and Epic, and has all the peculiarities of contract verbs in eo) ; as μίγννμι, μιγεω μιγείω ; δα^άω, βδάμην 3αμ€ί€Τ€ ; εξειΧεω, €ξ€ίληθωσί, Doric εγΥηληθίωντί. («ξ> 120, 2, a.) (b) Tlie Epic protracts η in the forms βλψται, στψτον, for βληται, ^τητον, 8 170 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [sj• 133 (c) The Epic dialect lengthens the radical voAvel in the second aorist subjunctive of άΧίσκομαι^ γ^γνώσκω, δ/δω/χι, and δυι/ω, which see in the Catalogue of A^eibs. (d) The personal ending -σι of the third person singular is found in the forms δώσι for δω, and νπο-πίμπρτ]σί, for νπο-ττψπρί] or -ττίμπρί]. 4. Optative. The personal ending -σι is found in παρ-φθαίησι, for τταρ-φθαίη, and perhaps in ά-γνοίησι for a-yi /οίη. 5. Imperative. The Epic dialect often lengthens the radical vowel of the impera- tive ; as αημι άι)τω, δ/δω /it διδω^ί. 6. infinitive. -ναι, -^olic -jLtei /αι, as ον-βίμ^ναι {άνα-θ^ΐναι) : Doric -μ€ν, later Doric -μβιν^ as 3ώόμ€ν, ινοτιθ^μ^ιν^ αττοδο/χβιι/ : Epic -μ^ναι, -μ^ν, as αΚωμ^ναι, So in the aorist passive ; as ομοιωθημ^ναι^ διακρινθή- μ€ν, άνοικο^ομηθημ^ιν. In the aorist passive the ^olic has -ψ for "ηναι ; as 'γενηθην, οντίθην, ^πιγράφην, €ΐσ€ν€χ^θην, στεφανώθην^ pe- θύσβην. The Epic often lengthens the radical vowel in the infinitive of verbs in μι ; as γοημβναί^ φορημ^ναι, ^ώοΰναι, ^ίζησθαι, βλησθαι, 7. Participle. The ^olic and Epic may lengthen the radical vowels a, e, in the participle passive and middle ; as νοημ€νος, κα\ημ€ρος, φοβημ^νος, δι- ζημξνος. Second Person Singular Passive and Middle. 8. (a) In the passive and middle of verbs in μι, the endings -ασαι -ασο, -ecrai -βσο, and -οσο, may drop σ and be contracted into -a, -ω, -T]f and -ου, respectively; as ^πίστασαι επίστα^ Ιστασο ϊστω, τίθ^σαι τίθ€αι τίθη, Oiao 6eo θον, ^ibocro δι'δου. So επίσττ;, 8vurj, contracted from the Ionic €πίστ€αι, bvveai. The unconlracted forms are not Attic. (b) In the Epic dialect, the perfects βββλησαι, μψνησαι, from βαΚ- λο), μιμνησκω, become βεβλνη, μ€μνηαί jue/xj/r/. ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 133• 1. Verbs which have more than one root are re- garded as anomalous. Also, all verbal forms which omit tha connecting vowel ; except the perfect, pluperfect, and aorist, passive. § 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 171 X A verb is defective when only some of its parts are m use. 2. ΐη the following Catalogue of Anomalous Verbs, roots and assumed or imaginary themes ar(3 written in capitals. Tenses of easy formation, as the pluperfect, are -usually omit- ted. When the future middle has the force of the future active, it occupies the place of that tense. A. ΑΑΩ, to injure, Epic, A. αασα, contracted ?ίσα, A. P. άάσθην. Mid. {άάομαι) 3 sing, άαται as active, A. άασάμην ; contracted άσάμην as active. The quantity of da- is variable in the aorist. άβροτάξομβν^ miss, A. snbj. 1 plur. Epic for άβροτάξωμεν^ defective. α-γαμαι (ά'γά.ομαι), to admire, F. αγάσο^ααί, P. ή-γασμαι, A. P. ηγά- σθην, Α. Μ. ηγασάμηυ rare. ■ αγγβλλω (ΑΓΓΕΑ-), to announce, regular ; 2 Α. rjyyekov, 2 Α. P. ήγγβ- \ην, 2 Α. Μ. ηγΎ€\όμην. άγ^ίρω (ΑΓΕΡ-), to assemble, regular; P. άγηγερκα, 2 Α. Μ. ^yepo- μην. — άγηγβρατο, Pluperf. Μ. 3 plur. Ionic. — άγρόμενος, 2 Α. Μ. part. Epic, for dytpo/zez/os•. άγνο€ω, ignoro, not to know, regular ; F. αγνοήσω, rarely άγνοησομαι, — άγνωσασκζ, Α. 3 sing, iterative, for ayvor](jaaK€. αγννμί, άγννω, (ΑΓ-), to break, F. αξω, A. €αξα, rarely ηξα, A. P. 6άγην, rarely αγην, 2 P. edya, Ionic εηγα, as intransitive or passive. — €|-6αγβΓσ-α, 2 A. P. part. fern. αγρβω,' ^Olic for αίρίω, P. P. α-γρημμαι, A. P. άγρβθην. — aypei, άγρ€Ϊτ€ imperat. 2. pers. as exclamations, up/ on! quick! ay ω, ago, to lead, brino•, F. αξω, A. ηξα rare, P. ηχα, rarely άγηγοχα or άγηοχα DoYlQ άγάγοχα, P. P. rjypaL, A. P. ήχθην, 2 A. rjyayoVf A. M. ηξάμην not Attic, 2 A. M, ηγαγόμην.' — αξ€Τ€, Α. imperat. 2 plur. Epic, for αξατ^. — dyco/Ltei/os•, Ionic for άγόμβνος. ΑΔΕΩ (ΑΔ-), to be sated, to be disgusted ivith, Epic, A. opt. 3 sing. άοησΕί^ν or adbrjaeiev, P. part, ά^ηκώς or ά^δηκώς. Pass. aSerat, raie. ααδω, to sing, regular; F. ά^ίσω, άζίσομαι. — ά€ίσ€0, Α. Μ. imperat 2 sin ο•. Epic, for αζίσαι. άζίρω (ΑΕΡ-), to raise, lift. Poetic and Ionic, regular ; F. ά€ρω, con- tracted άρώ. — (ίωρτο, Plup. P. 3 sing, for ψ pro. αίξω, ψξησα, ά^ξηθην, ά^ξησομαι, Poetic and Ionic for ανξω, ΑΕΩ, to sleej), A. ά^σα (α or α), contracted ασα. άηθίσσω (ΑΗΘΕ-), to be unused, Imperf άη6€σσον, A. άηθεσ-α. αημι (AE-), to blow, breathe, Epic, imperat. 3 sing, άητο), inf. άηναι άψ μζναι, part, de/?, Imperf. αην. Pass, αημαι, Imperf. άημην. — aet- σί, 3 plur. an ^olicism, for αβΐσι. άβ€ρίζθ3, to sJiuht, Epic, F. άθερίξω, A. άθίρίξα, άθίρισα (σσ). αΐ^ίομαι. Poetic α'ί'^ομαι, to respect, F. αΐ^ίσομαι (σσ), rare αΙΒησ-ομαι, P. ϊ'βζσμαι, Α. P. 7]8βσθην, Α. ιι^^σάμψ. — atoeto, imperat. 2 sing, contracted from at6eeo. Epic. 172 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 183. αιν€ω, rarely αίνημι^ to praise^ F. αΐνίσω^ αΐν^σομαι. Epic αΐνησω^ Α. TJueatty Epic κίνησα, F jjueKa, P. P. Ύ/νημαι, A. P•. ΐ]νίθην. αίνυμαί, fo take^ Epic, Imperf. αΐννμην. αίρίω ('EA-"», to take, Γ. αίρησω, rarely^eAS, i*, βρήκα, Joiiic άραίρηκα^ P. P. -ηοημαί^ Ι^Τιί^-Αραίρημαί, Α. Ϋ.ιιρίθην, 2 Α. etXov, έ'λω, eXoi- /it, βλβ, eXely, ίλών, 2 Α. Μ. €Ϊλόμην (ζΐλάμην) , έ'Χω/χοί, ίΧοίμην, 67νθΟ, βλίσθαι, eXo/xeyo?, F. Μ. αίρησομαι, rarely ίΚουμαι. -^—γίντο, he seized, 2 Α. Μ. 3 sinp;•. for eXero (FeXero).' αίρω (AP-), io raise, lift, F. άρω, A. rjpa, αρω αραιμι, αρον,αραι, αράς, P. ηρκα, P. P. ηρμαι, Α. P. ηρθην, Α. Μ. ηράμην, αρωμαι, άραΐμην, αράμ^νος, 2 Α. Μ. ^ρό/χτ^ι/, αρωμαι, άροίμην, αρβσβαί. ή— e ζ-άρτ], 2 Α. subj. 3 sing, rare and doubtful. — ήρά, Α. Μ. 2 sing. BcEOtic, for ηραο η ρω. αισθάνομαι (ΑΙΣΘ-, ΑΙΣΘΕ-), to feel, perceive, F. αίσβησομαι, P. τίσθη- μαι, 2 Α. ιισθόμην. ; άΐω, to hear, Imperf. ίαον. Α. ζττ-ψσα. άκαχίζω (ΑΧ-, ΑΚΑΧ-, ΑΚΑΧΕ-, ΑΧΕΔ-, ΑΧΕ-), to grieve, afflict, Υ. άκαχησω, Ρ. Μ. άκάχημαι, άκάχησθαι, άκαχημ^νος θΐ άκηχ€μ€νος, as Present, Α. άκάχησα, 2 Α. ήκαχον, 2 Α, Μ. ηκαχόμην. — άκηχε- barai, Ρ. Μ. 3 plur. Epic. — άκαχ^Ιατο, Plup. Μ. 3 plur. Epic. άκ€ομαι, to mend, F. άκίσομαι (σσ), Α. ηκ€σάμην, Α. act. part. €ζ-ακ€' σας, rare. — άκβιάμβνος, corrupt, for άκ€ώμ€Ρος Epic. άκη^ίω, to neglect, Α. άκηδεσα. άκονω (ΑΚΟ-), to hear, F. άκονσομαι, Α. ήκονσα, Ρ. ακονκα Doric, Ρ. Ρ. ήκουσμαι, Α. Ρ. ηκούσθην, 2 Ρ. άκηκοα, 2 Plup. άκηκόζΐν, ηκηκόειρ, ■ άκροάομαι, to listen, F. άκροάσομαι, Α. ηκρυάσάμην. ΑΚί2, acuo, to sharpen, point, P. P. part. άκαχμ€νος, Epic. αλαλάζω, to raise a loar-cry, F. άλαλάξομαι, A. ηλάλαξα. άλάομαί, to wander, F. άλησομαι, P. άλάλημαι, άλάλησβαι, άλα\ημ€νος^ as Present, A. άληθψ. άλδαίνω (ΑΑΔΑΝ-, ΑΑΔ-), alo, to nourish, increase, Poetic, imperf. ηλ^ανον as Aorist. άλ^ησκω (AAA-, ΑΑΔΕ-), alo, to nourish, cause to ^rou', also alesco, to thrive, grow, A. άλ^ησασκον iterative. άλ€ίφύ) (ΑΑΙΦ-), to anoint, regular ; P. ήλζίφα, άληλιφα, P. P. τ^'λ^ιμ- μαι, άληλίμμαι, 2 Α. P. ηλίφην. άλ^ξω (AAESE-, άλβκω, ΑΛΚ-, ΑΛΑΑΚ-), to help, loardoff. Poetic in the active, F. άλ^ξησω, rarely άπ-αλίξω, A. ηλ^ξησα, rarely /tXf^a, 2 A. ήλαλκον, F. Μ άλβξησομαί, rarely άλίζομαι, A Μ. ηλζξάμην. — ΑΑΚΑΘΩ, inf. άλκάθβιν, Imperf. ήλκαθον, both x\oristic. άλ€ομαί, to shun, escape, Epic, A. ηλ€άμην, άλζαίμψ, άλ^ασθζ, άλεασβαι, αλβΰω, to avert, protect, Poetic, F. άλ^υσω, A. ηλ^νσα, αλ^νσον, Α. Μ. αλ^υάμην. άλβω, to grind, F. άλίσω αλω, Α. ηλ^σα {σσ), Ρ. άληλ^κα, Ρ. Ρ. άλψ λ^σμαι, άληλβμαι. (ΐλθυμαι (ΑΑΘΕ-), to become healed. Epic, Α. P. άλθίσθην, F. Μ. αΧ- θησομαι as Passive. άλίν^ω, άλίνδομαι, also αΧίΐ^δ^ω, άλιν^ίομαι, to roll, Α. ι^λίσα, Ρ. 7)ΧΓ- κα, regular. άλίσκομαι (ΆΛ-, *ΑΛ0-, ΑΛΩΜΙ) , to be captured, F. άλώσομαί, P. ηλω- ^ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 173 Kci βαΚωκα, 2 A. ήλων, commonly βάλων, αλω, αληίην (ίιλωην), πλώ- vat, άλούς. all passive in sig-nification. — άλώω, ης, η, 2 Α. siibj, Kpic. — €νάλωκ€ν (that is €¥αλωκ€ν), Perf. 3 singr. for ζάΚωκίυ, άΧίταίνω or άλίτραίνω (ΑΛΙΤ-, AAITE-), to err against, A. αΚίτησα rare, P. M. part, αλίτημ^νος as an adjective, ivicked, 2 A. ifkiTov, 2 A. M. ηΚιτόμην. αλλομιη (ΆΑ-), salio, to leap, spring, F. άλουμαί, A. ηΚάμην, αλο)- μαιία), 2 Α. ηλόμην. — Epic forms : 2 Α. Μ. 2 sino•. αλσο, 3 sino•. ^Χτο; subj. 3 sing. aXerat ; part. αλμ€νος, only in com- position. άλυκτάζω ' AAYKTA-), to be in distress, P. M. αλαλυκτημαι as Present, αλύσ^ω, αλυσ.'ν-ά^Ό), (ΑΑΥΣΚΑΝ-, AAYK-) to shun, escape, Poetic, Im- perf αλύο-κανον as Aorist, F. άλύ^ω, A. ίρ^υξα. αλφαί'-'ω (ΑΛΦ-), to find, p?Orvre, bring as price, 2 A. ηλφον, άμαρτάνω ('xVMAPT-, * AM ΑΡΤΕ-), to err^ miss, F. αμαρτήσω, common- ly άμαρτησομαι, A. ημάρτησα later, P. ημ,άρτηκα, P. P. ημάρτημαί, A. P. ημαρτηθην, 2 A. ημαρτον^ Epic ημβροτον. άμβλίσκω, άμβλόω, (AMBA-, ΑΜΒΑΩΜΙ) to miscarry, A. ημβλωσα, P. ημβλωκα, P. P. ήμβλωμαι, 2 A. ήμβλων rare. άμ^ίρω, άμίρ^ω, to deprice, A. ημ^ρσα, A. P. ημερθην. άμπ-€χω, άμπ-ίσχω, {άμφί, €χω, Ίσχω) to ivrap around, clothe, Tmperf. άμπ^Ιχον, αμττ^χον, F. άμφίξω, 2 Α. ημπισχον. ^Wa άμπ€\ομαι^ άμπίσχομαι. άμπισχνίομαι, to put on, wear, Imperf. ημπ€ίχόμην, άμ- φ€χόμ.ην (?), 2 Α. ηιχττίσχόαην, ηαπ€σχ()ΐιην. άμπ\α•<ίσκω (ΑΜΠΑΑΚ-, ΑΜΠΑΑΚΕ-, ΑΜΒΑΑΚ-), ^ο err, miss, P. P. ημπλάκημαι, 2 Α. ημπΚακον, ημβ\ακον, part α/χττλα/^ώι/, απλαΑτώι^. άμ-πνϋω (ΑΜΠΝΥΜΙ, ΠΝΥ-), Epic for αι/αττνεω, ^0 recover breath, Α. P. άμπνΰ^θην as active, 2 Α. Μ. 3 sins". (ίμπνϋτο as active. άμννω, to assist, 2uard οβ,τ&π:η\ΐΐν. — ΑΜΥΝΑΘΩ, in Attic Poetry, im- perat. άμνναθζ, inf. άμννάβ^ιν. ?\ild. άμνναθοίμην, άμννάθου, Imperf. ημνναθον, ημνναθόμην ; commonlv with an Aoristic force. άμφίάζω, later for άμφύνννμι, A. ημφίασα, Ρ ημφίακα. άμφι-γνοβω^ tO doubt, Im^perf. ημφιγνόονν, ημφ^γι/όονν, Α. ημφζγνόησα, Α. Ρ. part. άμφιγνοηθΕΐς. άμφί-€νννμί. to dothe^ Imperf. ημφύνννν, F. άμφύσω άμφιω, Α. ημφί- ασα, Ρ. Μ. ημφίεσμαι. άμφί(Τ'βητ6ω, to dispute, Imperf. ημφκτβητονν, ημφεατβητονν, Α. ημ- φισβητησα, ημφ^σβητησα, Ρ. ημφισβητηκα, Α. Ρ. ημφίσβητηθηρ, F. Μ. άμφκτβητησομαι as passive. άναΐΐίψαι {α-, ΑΙΝ-), to refuse, Imperf. ηναινόμην, Α. ηνψάμην, άνη- νωμαί. άν-αΧίσκω, άν-α\6ω, to expend, Im.perf. άνηΚισκον, avakovv, F. άναΚω- σω, Α. άναΚωσα, άνηΧωσα, κατ-ηνάΧωσα, Ρ. άνάΧωκα, άνηΧωκα, Ρ. Ρ. άναΧωμαι, ανηΧωμαι, κατ-ηναΚωμαι, Α ..^Ρ. άναΧωθην, άνηΧοίθην. άνά(τσω, to reign, regular. — ζάνασσζ, Imperf. 3 sing, for ήνασσε, rare. ίι^^άνω (*ΑΔΕ-,ΆΔ-). to please. Tonic and Poetic, Imperf rjvdavov, iav havov, Ιην^ανον, F. ά^ησω, P. ά^ηκα rare, 2 A. eadov, abov. Epic ev- αδοι/ (that is eFaSov), άδω, άδξΐν, 2 P. εαδα, Doric edda, 2 A. M. part. ασμ€νος as an adjective, pleased, icith pleasure. "" aui 174 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133. ΑΝΕΘΩ, to trickle out, issue forth, 2 P. άνψοθα as Present, 2 Pluperf. 3 sing, άνψοθ^ν with the ending and force of the Imperfect (ξ> 118, άν-ίχω^ to hold U7), Imperf. άν-α,χον, &c., as in ^χω, Imperf. M. ην€ΐ- χόμην, 2 Α. Μ. ηνζσχόμην, rarely άν^σχόμην. άν-οίγω, άν-οίγννμί, to open, Imperf. άνβωγον, ήνοι,γον, Ionic and Epic άνωγον, F. ανοίξω, Α. άν€ωξα, ήνοιξα, Ionic and Epic άνωξα, άνοιξα, Ρ. άνβωχα, Ρ. Ρ. άνβωγμαί, later ηνβωγμαί, Α. Ρ. άνεωχθην, later ηνοίχθην, 2 Α. Ρ. ψοίγην, 2 Ρ. αζ/€ωγα as Present intransitive, to stand open. άν-ορθόω, to set upright, Imperf.'P. ηνωρθονμψ, F. ανορθώσω, A. ηνό^ρθωσα, άνώρθωο-α, P. P. ηνώρθωμαί. άντάω (ANTHMI), to meet, Poetic and Ionic, regular ; F. άντησω, άπ- αντησομαι, 2 Α. 3 dual συν-αντητην. άντ-€υ-πούω , to do a favor in return, regular; P. άντενπ^ποίηκα. . άντί-βολεω, to meet, supplicate, Imperf. ψτιβοΚονν, F. άντίβολησω, A. άντ€β6\€σα, ηντεβοΚησα, Α. P. part. άντίβοΧηθείζ' άννω, άνύτω, {ν) to accomplish, F. αννσω[ν). Epic αννω, Α. ήννσα (σσ), Ρ. ηνΰκα, Ρ. Ρ. ηνυσμαι, Κ. Ρ. ψνσθψ. — ΑΝΥΜΙ, Imperf. 1 plur. αννμζς Doric ; Imperf. P. 3 sing, ανντο, ηνυτο. άνώγω, to order, request, exhort, Ionic and Poetic, Imperf. ηνωγον,ηνώ- ycQv, F. άνώξω^ A. ηνωξα, 2 P. ανωγα as Present, 2 Plup. ηνώγειν as Imperfect. — Syncopated forms: 2 P. 1 plur. αρωγμεν, im- perat. Ιίνωχθί, άνωχθω, ανωχθε. άπ-ανράω (ΑΥΡ-), to take away, Poetic, Imperf. άπηνρων as Aorist, 2 A. part, άπονρας, 2 A. M. άπηνράμην, part, άττονράμενος. άπαφίσκω (ΑΦ-, ΑΠΑΦ-, ΑΠΑΦΕ-), to deceive. Poetic, F. άπαφησω, A. ηπάφησα, 2 A. ήπαφον, άττάφω, 2 Α. Μ. opt. άπαφοίμην as active. άπ-€Κίξαν, they blew off οτ away, scattered about, a defective A. 3 plur. άπ-€χθάνομαι, άπ-ίχθομαι, (ΕΧΘΕ-) to he liated, Imperf. άπηχθετο, F. άπεχθησομαι, P. άπηχθημαι, all as passive. άπο-\ανω, to enjoy, Imperf. aneXavov, άπηΧανον, F. άττοΧανσω, com- monly άποΧανσομαι, A. aneXavaa, άπηΧανσα, P. άποΧβΧανκα. άπτω (*ΑΦ-) , to fasten, cause to take hold of, regular. — ίάφθη or €άφθη, was fastened, A. P. 3 sing. Epic. άράομαι, to pray, regular. — APHMI, inf. αρημεναι. Epic. άραρίσκω (AP-, APE-), to fit, adapt, join. Epic, A. ηρσα, P. M. άρηρ€- μαι, άρηρίμενος, Α. P. ηρθην, 2 Α. ηραρον άράρω, 2 Α. Μ. opt. 3 plur. άραροίατο as passive, part, ηρμένος as an adjective, fitting, suitable, 2 P. αράρα, Ionic αρηρα, as Present intransitive, to fit, 2 Plup. apr)p€Lv,T]pt]p€Lv, as Imperfect intransitive. — άραρυΐα, 2 P. part. fem. for άράρυϊα. Epic. — αρηρεν, 2 Pluperf 3 sing, with tlie ending and force of the Imperfect active. (^ 118, l,d.) — ^προσ- αρηρεταί, P. Μ. suhj. 3 sinfj. for προσ-αρηρηται, (^ 130, ?i. c.) άρίσκω (AP-, APE-), to please, F. άρίσω, A. ηρεσα, P. άρηρεκα, A. P. ηρίσβην as active. άρημίνος(α), oppressed, a defective P. P. part. Epic. άριστάω, to dine, regular. — Syncopated forms : 2 P. 1 pi. ηρίστα- μεν, inf. ηριστάναι. § 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 175 άριστο-πυύομαι^ to ciine^ rep-ular ; P. ηριστο-ττ^ποίημαί. άρκίω^ to assist, siijfice, defend ^ ward off ^ F. άρκβσω, A ηρκ^σα. άρμόττω, αρμόζω, to fit, adjust, A. ηρμοσα, P.M. ηρμοσμαι, A. P. άρμόχθην later. αρνυμαι [αίρω, AP-), to win, earn, acquire, Imperf. άρννμην, 2 A. ηρό- μην, άρόμην, {II. 9, 124 ; 8, 121.) αροο), aro, to flough, F. άρόσω, A. ήροσα, P. P. άρηρομαι, A. P. ηρόβην. — άρόωσ -iu, 3 plur. Epic from ΑΡΑΩ. — APi2MI, inf. a ραμ- μένα l. Epic. ^^όρπάζω (ΆΡΠΑΓ-), rapio, to seize, carry off.^ snatch, F. άρπάσω, άρπάσομαι, also αρπάξω not Attic, A. ηρπασα, not Attic ηρπαξα, P. ηρπακα, P. P. ηρπασμαι, later ηρπαγμαί, A. P. ηρπάσθην, later ηρπάχθην, 2. A. P. ηρπάγην hter. — ΆΡΠΗΜΙ, 2 A. M. part, άρ- πάμενος. • άρνω, άρντω, to draw as \vater, Α., ήρνσα, Α. P. ηρνθην, ηρύσθην, jNIid. also άρνσσομαι, rare. άρχομαι, to begiii, regular. — apy μένος, Pres. part, for αρχόμενος, άσάομαι, άσάω, to be sated, loathe, feel sad be grieved, A. ησηθην, — άσάμενοί, part. JE^oYic, contracted from άσαόμενοι, άτύζο), to terrify. Poetic, A. inf άτνξαι, A. P. part, άτνχθείς as middle. αναίνω, to dry, regular ; A. P. επ-αφ-ανάνθην, implying αύάνθην. αύδάω, to speak, regular. Forms not Attic ηϋδαξα αν^άξασα, ην^αξά- μψ- αυξάνω, αϋξω, (ΑΥλΕ-, ΑΥΓ-) augeo, to increase, F. αυξήσω, Α. ηϋξησα, Ρ. ηϋξηκα, Ρ. Ρ. ηνξημαι, Α. Ρ. ηύξηθην, VQ-Yely (ηνχβην) αύ- χβτΙ. — ανξουμενη, part, for αυξομενη, in an inscription. ΑΥΡΩ, see άπανράω, επανρίσκομαι. ^ αϋω, to shout, F. άύσω (ϋ), Α. ηϋσα (ΰ) , imperat. ανσον {ν), άφάω) άφάοΌτω, to haiulle, feel, F. άφτ)σω, Α. ηφησα, ήφάσα, άφ-ενω, to singe, 'roast, P. P. ηφενμαι, Α. P. part, αφ^νθείς, άφ-ίεω, Imperf. ηφίονν, the same as άφίημι. άφ-ίημι, to let go, dismiss, Imperf ηφίην, rarely ηφίειν, F. άφησω, A. άφηκα. Epic άφεηκα, used only in the indicative, P. άφεΐκα, P. P. άφεΊμαί, A. P. άφείθην, άφεβην, F. P. άφεβησομαι, 2 A. [άφην) , άφώ, άφεΐην, αφεζ, άφεΐναι, άφείς, 2 Α. Μ. άφείμην, άφε- σθαι, άφε μένος. The plural of the aorist άφηκα, except άφηκαν, is rarely used. — άφίηη, 3 sing. Doric for άφίησι. — άφε ω, -ετ^ς, -erj, 2 Α. subj. Epic, for άφώ, -Ύ}ς, fj. — άφεωνται, F. P. 3 plur. for άφεΐνται. άφΰω, άφνσσω, to pour out as liquids, to draw, accumulate, F. άφνξω, A. ήφυσα. άχενων, ax^ow, being grieved, a defectiΛ^e participle, Epic. αχνυμαι, αχομαι, to grieve, sorrow, be sad, Imperf. άχνύμην. αχθομαι (ΑΧΘΕ-), to be indignant or displeased, F. άχθεσομαι, A. P. ηχ^βεσθην, F. P. άχθεσθησομαι equivalent to άχθεσομαι. αω, to sate, satisfy, Epic, F. ασω, A. ασα, ασω, F. Μ. ασομαι, 3 sing. {ασεται αεται αται) αάται protracted, A.M. άσάμην. — αμεναι^ inf. Epic, from ΗΜΙ. Ιίω, to blow^ Imperf liov. Γ76 INFLECTION OF AVOKDS. [^5 133. βάζω, to niter, F. βάξω. P. P. β^βαγμαι. βαίνω (βάω, βίβύω, βίβημι), vado. to walli, gO, F. βησομαι, P. β€βη- κα, P. P. β'ζβαμαι, βζβασμαι, Α. P. ζβάθην. Α. Μ. ζβησάμην 0Γ ζβη- σόμην Epic, 2 Α. εβην, βώ, βαίην. βηθί, βηναί, βάς, 2 Ρ. (βςβαα), βζβώ, βφαίην, βίβάναι, β^βαώς βββώζ, 2. Plup. ϋβ^βάζΐν). When it is equivalent to βιβάζω, to cause to go, it has F. βησω, A. ββησα^' — 2 A. 3 dual βάτην, for Ιβηηιν ; 3 plur. βάσαν for €βησαν•. subj. βεω οτ β^ίω ; 3 sing. βη7] for βϊ] ; 1 plur. βξίομ^ν, Doric βάμ€ς {βάωμ€ς), for βύψ€ν. — βζομαί ΟΎ βζίομαι, 2 Α. Μ. Subj. Epic, as Future, I shall live. βάλλω (ΒΑΛΛΕ-, ΒΑΛ-, ΒΛΑ-, ΒΛΕ-, ΒΛΗΜΙ), to cast, throw, hit, F. βαλώ, Poetic also βαλλήσω, P. βζβληκα, P. P. β€βλημαί, A. P. €βληθην, F. Perf. βζβλησομαι, F. M. ξυμ-βλησομαι, 2 A. ββαλον, Epic ζβλην, 2 A. M. εβαλόμην, Epic εβλημην as passive. — υπέρ- βαλλε € LV, ξνμ-βαλλεόμενος,ΪΟϊΐΙο for -βάλλείν, -βαλλόμενος. — P. P. 2 sing. βεβΧηαι, Epic; 3 plur. βεβληαται, Epic; opt. 2 \)\nr. δία-βεβλ^σθε. — 2 A. opt. 2 sing, βλ €t τ; 9 as passive. — 2 A. M. 2sing. jSX^^o or jSXeto ; subj. 3 sing, (βληται) βληεται protracted . ΒΑΡΕΩ, to load, render heavy, F. βαρησω, regular ; 2. P. part, βεβα- ρηώς as passive, Epic. βάσκω, βίβάσκω, equivalent to βαίνω. — επί-βασκε μεν, inf. Epic, causative. βαστάζω, to carry, support, F. βαστάσω, A. εβάστασα, later ε βάσταξα, Α. P. εβαστάχθην. f β^έω, to foist, A. εβ3εσα. Β1ΑΩ, to force. Epic and Tonic, P. βεβίηκα, regular. βίβρώσκω (BOP-, BPO-, BPi2MI), de-voro, to eat, rare in the Pres- ent, F. βρωσομαι, A. part, κατα-βρωξασαι, P. βεβρωκα, P. P. βε- βρωμαι, Α. P. εβρωθην, F. Perf. βεβρώσομαι, 2 Α. εβρων, 2 P. part. βεβρώς, -ώτος, contracted from βεβροώς. — ΒΕΒΡί2ΘΩ, opt. 2 sing. βεβρό^θοις. βιόω (ΒΙΩΜΙ), vivo, to live, F. βιώσω, commonly βιωσομαι, rarely βό^σομαι, regular; 2 A. εβίων, βιώ, βιωην, βιωτω, βιώναι, βιονς. — βιήμεσθα, Pres. Ι plur. implying βίομαι. βιωσκομαι {βιόω), to restore to life, or to be brought to life again, A, εβιωσάμην, άν-εβιωσάμην, 2 Α. άν-εβίων intransitive, to revive. βλάπτω (BAAB-), ^ Awr/, regular ; F. Perf βεβλάψομαι, 2 A. P. εβλάβην. — βλάβυμαι, for βλάπτομαι, rare. βλαστάνω, βλαστέ ω, (ΒΛΑΣΤ-) to sprout, F. βλαστήσω, Α. ε βλάστη- σα, Ρ. βε βλάστη κα, ε βλάστη κα. βλώσκω (ΜΟΛ-, ΒΛΟ-, ΒΛΩΜΙ), to go, to come, F. μολουμαι, P. μεμ- βλωκα, βεβλωκα, 2 Α. εμολον, rarely εβλων. βοάω (Β0-), boo, to call aloud, regular. Ionic conjugation, βωσομαι, εβωσα, βεβωμαι, εβωσθην. ΒΟΑΕΩ, equivalent to βάλλω, P. P. βεβάλημαι, Plup. P. εβε βολή μην, βόσκω (ΒΟΣΚΕ-), pasco, to pasture, F. βοσκήσω, Α. P. εβοσκηθην later. Mid. βόσκομαι, vescor. § 133.] ANOMALOUS A^'D DEFECTIVE VERBS. 177 βονΧομαι (ΒΟΥΛΕ-), ν οίο, to will, 2 sing. βονλ€ΐ, Imperf. (βονΚόμην^ ηβονλυμην, F. βουλησομαι, P. β€βουλημαί, Α. ζβονΚηθην, ηβονλψ θην)2 Ρ. προ-βξβονλα as Present. — /^όλεσ^β, 2 plur. for βονΚ^- σβ4. ΒΡΑΧΏ, to resound, ring, 2 Α. €βραχ€. βρ€χω, to wet, regular ; 2 Α. P. €βράχην. ΒΡΟΧΩ, ίο swallow νρ, gulp, Α. άν€βροξα, κατ-€βροξα, Α. Ρ. part. κατα-βροχθζ'ΐζ, 2 Α. Ρ. part, άνα-βροχβν. βρνάζω, to teem, exult, revel, shout, F. βρυάσομαι, A. ςβρύαξα. βρνχάομαι (BPYX-), to roar, P. β^βρυγα as Present, to roar, A. P. part, βρυχηθζίς, A. IM. ζβρνχησάμην. βννζω, βϋ€(ύ, (BY-) to caulh, F. βνσω, A. €βυσα, P. P. βίβυσμαι. Pass, also βννομαι. Γ. γαμίω (ΓΑΜ-), to marry, said of the man, F. (γα)α6σω) γαμεω γαμώ, later γαμήσω, Α. €γημα, later ^γάμησα, Ρ. γξγάμηκα, Ρ. Ρ. γβγά/χτ;- /ζαί, Α. Ρ. €γαμηθην, part, γαμζθίίσα. F. ]\Ι. γαμ€σσομαί. Epic, Ζ677Ζ procure a wife for. ΓΑΝ0ί2, ίο delight, P. P. -γζγάνωμαι, A. P. €γανώθην as middle, /o re- γάννμαι, to rejoice, be delighted, F. γαννσομαι (σσ), P. yeyaw/xat. γβγωι/ισκω, γεγων^ω, γεγώι/ω, (ΓΩΧ-) ίο shout aloud, call, proclaim, Imperf. iyey (ΔΜΕ-), to huihl, A. eSet/Lta, P. P. δ^δμημαι, A. M. ε^^ιμάμην, a ϋ€ρχομαι, to look sharply, to see, F. Ββμξυμαι rare, A. ζ^ίρχθην, 2 A. ίδμακον CedpaKa), 2 A. P. ζ^ράκψ, 2 P. οίδορκα as Present. — dep- K€iv, inf. act. , ?/ρω, to flay, flog, regular ; 2 A. P. εδάρτ/ν. \^νομαι (ΔΕΥΕ-), Epic for hiΌμaι, F. δίνησομαι, A. βδβυτ^σα. ^^χομαι, to receive, regular; F. P. δβδέξομαι. — Epic forms: Pres. 3 plur. δ/χαται (δβχ-ϊ/ται) ; imperat. 2 sing, δε^ο, 2 plur. δβχ^β, Aoristic; inf. δεχ^αι, Aoristic ; part, ^^-γμ^νος as Present or Aorist: Imperf. ζδεγμην, I ivas expectmg, 3 sing, δεκτό or ^bf- KTo Aoristic. X^ δβω, to bind, tie, F. δ^^σω, A. εδτ^σα, P. δεδεκα, rarely δεδτ/κα, P. P. , δζ^€μαί, δεδβσ/χαί, Α. P. εδε^/^ν, F. Perf. δεδήσο/χαί. ^ δβω (ΔΕΕ-), ^0 ii;a/ii, io^^e luanting, F. δε^^σω, i\.. εδετ^σα, Epicl'^T/tra, P. ^^δεηκα, P. M. δεδε^/ζαι, A. P. €δ€ηθην as middle. Mid. δέομαι, to need, beg. — δβού/ζε^α, F. M. for δ^ησόμ^θα, ΔεΓ, debet, z7 i^ necessary, there is need, it ought, impersonal, oer], deoL, δεΐι/, δέον, F. derjaei, A. ε'δβτ/σβ. ΒηλοΜ, to manifest, regular; F. Perf. δ^Βηλώσομαι. διαιτάω, to feed, decide, F. διαίτησω, A. ^δίτ]τησα, P. δεδιτ^ττ/ζ^α, P. P. δζδΐΎ]τημαι, A. P. δίτ)τηβην as middle. • δίάί<:ϋΐ/εω, /6> ζ^ί/ίΥ wpo/i, Imperf. δίτ^κοι/ουι/, F. διακονήσω, P. δζΒιηκόι/η- ! κα, P. P. δεΒίηκόνημίΗ, A. P. ζδιακονηθψ. :^(^δι3άσκω (ΔΙΔΑ2ΚΕ-, ΔΙΔΑΧ-), doceo, to teach, F. δίδά^ω, A. εδιδα- |α, Epic ^δΐ§άσΛ:?/<Γα, P. δβδίδαχα, P. P. δεδίδαγ/χαί, A. P. εδώά- δλδ^ιΐίΐ (δεα)), ^0 Μη(Γ, Imperf. εδιδ/^ν. δίδόω (Δ0-), ^0 «7fe, 2 sing, δώοϊς, δώοϊσθα, 3 sing, δίδοί, Imperf. ε'δίδουν, F. διδώσω Epic. δώράσκω (ΔΡΑ-, ΔΡΗΜΙ), to run away, used only in composition, F. δρασομαι, A. ebpd^a, P. δε δράκα, 2 Α. 'ibpdv, Ionic εδρτ/ν, δρω, δραίην, dpavai, δρά?^ δ/δωρι (διδόο), Δ0-), α ο, /'ο ^ζϋβ, F. δώσω, Α. έδωκα only in the in- dicative, P. δεδωκα, P. P. δεδο/χαι, A. P. βδόθην, 2 A. εδωι/, δώ, δοίην (δω7/ν), δο9, δουϊ/αί, δού?. The singular έδωκα, εδωκας, εδωκβ, and the 3 plur. εδωκαι/ are with good writers much more common than the remaining forms of the aorist. Oh the other hand, the sin- gular of the 2 A. εδων is not used in the indicative ; except in some compounds, as δίεδω {Xen. Cyr. 1). — δίδωτι, 3 sing. Doric for δ/δωσι. — ατΓο-δεδόαι/^ί, 2 P. 3 plur. Boeotic. — Epic forms : im- perat. 2 sing. διδο)θι, for δ/δο^ι ; inf. δ id ο ν vat, for δώόναι: 2 A. subj. δώω, δώτ/ί, δώτ; or δώτ/σί or δωσί, δώ ορ,εν, δώ ω σι, for the common δώ, δω?, δω, δώρει/, δώσί ; inf. δόμεναι, δόμεν, for δούναι. — δίδοι, imperat. for δίδοθι, ^olic. δίζημαι (ΔΙΖΕ-), to seek, Ionic, δίζησθαι, διζν,μ^νος, retains the η in the inflection, Imperf. ζδιζημην, F. διζησομαι, A. εδιζησάμην. ^Ιζω, to consider, φροντίζω, doubt, Imperf. εδίζον. Mid. δίζομαι, equiv- alent to δίζημαι, Imperf. €δίζσμηρ. 180 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [^ 133. ^Ιημι (dm, ϊημι), to moisten, sprinkle ; part, dieiy. Mid. Si'e/zai, as ac- . live ^ίηαι, to cha^e ωναν, Imperf. 3 pi. e^Ua-av. Mid. δ/^αί, to speed. ΔΙΚί2, to fling. Poetic, 2 Λ. εδίκοι/, di','^η^/, F. M. ζάσομαι as passive. ί'γγυαω {€ /yvq), to betroth, proffer. Imperf. rjyyvaov, eveyvaov, A. ry- yvrjiTd €>jeyvrj(Ta, €ΐ^€γγνησα, P. rjyyvqKci, €yy€yυηκa, P. P. ηγγνημαι, €yyfyvqiJ.aL, Plup. P. €yy€γvημη^f and €vcyy€yυημηu, A. P. ηyyvη6ηv. Mid eyyuiiopat. to accept a priffer, bind one s self, engage. Imp. ήγ- yυώμη>J, €!^€γυωμην, F. ζγγυί^σομαι^ Α. τ^^γυησάμην^ €ν€γγυησάμην^ ίγγυφτάμηρ* § 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 181 €γ€ίρω (ΕΓΕΡ-, ΕΓΡ-, ΕΓΡΗΜΙ), to rouse, ivoJien, raise, F. iyepcc, A. rjyeipa, P. M. βγηγερμαί, Plup. 3 sing•, rjyepro, A. P. ηγβρθην, 2 P. iypTjyopa as Present intransitive, to be awalce, 2 A. (βγρην) imperat. 3 sing, €yp€τω rare, 2 A. M. ψγρόμην, €γρωμαί, iyρoLμηv, eypeo Epic, eypeaOaL or eypeaOai, iyp6μ€voς. — Epic forms ; 2 P. 3 plur. iyρηy6ρθάσί, as if from ΕΓΕΡΘΩ ; imperat. 2 plur. iypr^yop- θ€ ; inf. iy p7]yopeaL or iypriyopdaL. — eypovrai, 3 plur. for iy αίρονται. εδω, see €σθίω. eetSo/xai, ϋΧττομαι, €€pypvμL, see etSo/xat, ΤΚπομαι, eρyvvμι. 66/}γω, Epic and Ionic for έργω €Ϊpyω, to shut out ; also for βργω etp- yvvμL, to shut in, in which sense it has P. P. part, i€pyμevoς, closely compacted. — ΕΕΡΓΑΘί2, Imperf. iipya6ou, as Aorist. — €€ρχάτο, Plup. 3 plur. Ionic, for eξpyμίvoL ήσαν. βζομαι (ΈΔ-, *ΕΔΕ-), sedeo, to sit, Poetic, imperf. ίζόμψ as Aorist. For the other forms, see καβ^ζομαι. 6(9ίλω (ΕΘΕΑΕ-), to will, to imsh, F. ^θ^λησω, A. ηθέλησα, P. ηθε- Χηκα. ζθίζω, to accustom, ζθίσω, ζ'ίθισα, ζ'ίθίκα, ζ'ίθισμαι, βΐθίσθην. €θω, suesco, to be accustomed, part, ζθων Epic, 2 P. €'ίωθα, Ionic €ωθα, as Present, 2 Plup. άωθζΐν, Ionic iafueLv, as Imperfect. — Ενίθωκα ,, (that is, ^ν^θωκα), P. from ΕΘΟΩ. ^ ΕΙΔΩ (ΕΙΔΕ-, ΙΔΕ-, ΙΔ-), video, to see, 2 A. βιδοζ/ (βΓδα, ιδοι/), ιδω, ϊ8οίμι, ϊδβ or ιδέ, ιδεΓι/, ίδών, F. 13ησώ Doric. Mid. εϊ^ομαι and eVi- 3ομαί, generally Poetic, to seem, appear, resemble, A. άσάμψ and €€ίσάμην, €ΐσάμ€νος or €€ίσάμ€νος, 2 Α. €ΐδόμην or 13όμην, 'ίδωμαί, Ι^οίμην, Idov, Ι^ίσθαι, 13όμ€νος rarely ειδο^ιείΌί, generally with the sense of the active, I saw. The 2 P. olda has the force of the Present, and means I hiow, 2 Pluperf. γι^ζΐν as Imperfect, 1 knew, F. είδήσ-ω, commonly Λσομαι, 1 shall knoiv, A. €Ϊδησα, I knew, rare; — cvide (that is επδβ), 2 A. for €^δ6. — β id el V, 2 A. inf Laconian for Idelv. y^' €Ϊκω, to appear, to seem, to resemble, Imperf. eIkov as Aorist, F. βΐ'^ω, 2 P. eoLKii (Ionic οίκα, rare et/ca) as Present, ζοίκω {ο'ίκω), βοίκοίμι, ioLKlvai (etAieVat), €θίκώς [elicajs), 2 Pluperf. ecoKecv (rarely ωκβίν) as Imperfect. -/- Epic and Poetic : 2 P. dual ί'ίκτον, ίοτ ioUarov [eUa- Tov) ', I plur. eoLyμζv, for €ο[καμ€ν, part, ειοίκώ?, for εοκώ? ; 2 Plup. 3 dual ξΐκτην, for e ω κ€ ίτην {€ΐκ€ίτηΊ/) ; 3 plur. eoLKeaav, for €ωκ€σαν. "ΈοίΚ€ [Olk€), it seems, appears, is likely, fittings impersonal, part, άκός, fitting, proper, natural, reasonable, 2 Plup. icuKet, as Imperfect. €Ϊκω, to yield, regular. — ΕΙΚΑΘΩ, €ΐκάθω, ξΐκάθοιμι, ζΐκάθζΐν, €ΐκάθων, Imperf. Λκαθον, all Aoristic. €ίλίω (ΟΛΕ-), to roll, Imperf. e'CKeov, ieiXeov, F. ζΙΧησω, P. P. ζόλημαι, Pluperf. P. εόλητο. €ΐλϋω, to wrap up, envelop, cover over, roll round, gather upy regular; A. (ΐλνσα, A. P. part. €ίλνσθ€ίς, with the rough breathing. €'^λω{EA')tYo\yOf to roll upj etXo/xat, Epic, A. €λσα, eXaai ϋΧσαι^ 182 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [vj 133. ΤΚσας (rarely etXa?), P. P. eeX/zat, eeXfteVos", 2 A. P. ζάλην Q.ua αΧην (α), άληναί, aXeis- el μι (ΕΣ-, Ε-, Η ΜΙ), sum, to be, to exists ω, €Ϊην, 'ίσθ^ι {^ο^Ζσ^ο), el•- ναι, ων, Imperf, ^vor^, soQietimes ημην, Υ. ^σομαι^ €σοίμψ^, €σ€σθαί, €(ΓΟμ^νος. > Sometimes yiyova, from -γίγνομαί, is used as Perfect to eijLtt, {Aristot. Rhet. 1, 1, 8.) ζίμι {I-, EI-, IMI, IHMI), eo, to go, I shall go, Χω, lot/xt [ίοΐψ], Wl, U- vaL, Ιων J Imperf. ^eiv and fja, F. βϊσο/χαι, A. M. βίσάμην or ζζίσάμην Epic. ζΐννω, Epic for ίννύω, €νννμι, only in composition, Imperf. κατα-ζίνυον, I covered. Mid. €πί-€ίννσθαι. [JUEMIQ. (ΕΠ-, ΕΣΠ-), to say, to tell, 2 A. elnov (Epic eVtTrov), βΓττω, ζ'^τοιμι, €ίπ€, elnclv, ζίπων, also ζ'ίττα (Epic eeina), ζ'ίπαιμι, etVoi/ or €ΐπόν, einaL, €Ϊπας, 2 A. Mid. €ΐπάμην, άπ-^ιπάμην, to refuse, dis- claim, disown, to say no./ — All the forms of €ΐπα, except clnav, etTTiit, €Ϊπας, are used by good Attic writers. Further, άπάτω, e'lna- τον, €'ίπατ€, of the imperative, are preferred to ^Ιπ^τω, iinerov, et- TJ-ere. The present is borrowed from φημί, λέγω, and, in certain connections, from ά-γορ^νω : the other parts are borrowed from et/jo), PEi2, which see ; thus, F. €,αω, P. Λρηκα, P. P. €Ϊρημαί, A. P. epprj- Θψ, βρρύθην, είρηθην, άρ^θην, F. Perf. άρησομαι. — εσπβτβ, 2 Α. ^ imperat. 2 plur. Epic. ζίρ-γνυμι and €ίργνύω (ΈΡΓ-, *ΕΙΡΓ-), to shut in, Γ. €φξω, Α. €ίρξα, Ρ. Ρ. €ίργμαι, Α. Ρ. €Ϊρχθην. βιργω (βργω), arceo, to shut out, F. €'[ρξω, Α. €φξα, P. P. elpypai, A. P. ei/j;(^7;i^ (?), F. M. €φξομα(. as passive. — ΕΙΡΓΑΘί2, άρ-γάθω, elpyaOeiv, Imperf. apyadov, Aoristic. Mid. imperat. elpyaOov. άρίω {Λρω), to say, to tell, Epic. άρομαι, rarely βίρβομαι, Ionic for EPOMAI, ίο asJc, Imperf. €ΐρυμην, F. ίίρησομαι. ίίρνω, for €ρνω, to draw, F. ζίρυσω (υ), Α. βφίίσα, P.P. €ψνμαι and ίϊρνσμαι, P\up. €ΐρνμην (ν), Α. Ρ. ζίρνσθην. Μΐά, €ΐρνομαί(ύ), F. €t- ρύσομαι, Κ. άρνσάμην. — ΕΙΡΥΜΙ, Pres. inf. €ΐρνμ€ναί. Pres. P. 3 plur. elpvaruL (υ) ; inf. εϊρνσθα ι : Imperf. 3 sing. c'ipvTOy 3 plur. etpvvTo. €φω{ΈΡ-), to say, to tell, not Attic in the present and imperfect, F. ερεω, €ρώ, F. Μ. άπ-€ρονμαί, shall refuse. . €'ίρω (EP-), sero, to join,elpa, P. cIpKa, P.P. ^Ιρμαι, Ionic ερμαι, Epic ζ^ρμαι, PI up. P. ϋρμην. €Ϊσκω, to liken, think like, compare, make similar, assimilate, causative of €'ίκω, to be like, Imperf ηϊσκον, ΐίσκον. Mid. P. 2 sing, ήϊξαι, 3 sing. ηϊκται, equivalent to eoLKus-, eoLK€, Plup. 3 sing, ή'ίκτο, ΐίκτο, equiv- alent to €CUK€L. €κκλησίάζω (€κκλησία) , to call an assembly, regular ; Imperf €κκλησία- ζον, βξζκκΚησίαζον, F. €Κ.κΚησιάσω, Α. €κκλησ1ασα, €ξ€κκ\ησίασα. €\αννω. Poetic also βλάω, (ειλω, ΕΑ-) to drive; F. ελάσω, βλώ, Α. ηΚάσμ, Ρ. βΧηλακα, Ρ. Ρ. εληΧαμαι, €\7]\ασμαί, Plup. Ρ. βΧι^Χάμην, ηΧηΧάμην, Α. Ρ. ηΧάθην (α'\, lonic ηΧάσθην, Α. Μ• ηΧασάμην transi- tive. — βλτ/λάδατο, P.P. 3 plur. Epic, as if from ΕΛΑΔΩ. — ■ ηΧσάμην, A. Mid. ffom the radical form ΕΛΟ. — €λη\άμ€νος, P. P. part, proparoxyt'one. § 133.] ANOBIALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 183 €λ6γχω. to examine^ refute, confute, convict, regular; P.P. βληλε-γμαι, or ηΧ€γμαί. €\€λίζω [eXeXeu), to rahe a war-cry, to shout iXeXev, A. eXeXtfa. ζλίλίζω (ΓΛίσσω), to tivirl rapidly, to shake, Epic, Α.. eXeXi^a, A. P. €\ζ\ίχθην as iniddle, A. M. €λ€λίξάμην, to whirl one's sef, coil one's sef. — eXeXiKTo, Imperf. 3 sing, for eXeXi^ero, sometimes Ao- ristic. ΕΛΕΥΘί2, see άρχομαι. ίΧίσσω ox ίΧίττω (ΈΛΙΚ-), to twirJ, F. ίΧί^ω, A. etXi^a, P.P. etXt- Ύμαί. later βΧηΧίγμαι, A. P. ζΐΧίχθην. ίΚκόω, ulcero, to ulcerate, regular ; Plup. P. €ΐΧκώμην, A. P. (ΙΧκώ- βην, not Attic. €Χκω (EAKY-), vello, vellico, to pull, Γ. ^Χξω, ίΧκύσω, Α. €Ϊλξα, €ΪΧκϋσα, Ρ. (ΪΧκνκα, Ρ. Ρ. €ΪΧκνσμαί, Α. Ρ. ύΧκνσβψ. — ηΧκον, Imperf. for cTXkov. t -Χπω, to give hope. Epic, 2 Perf. εοΧττα as Present middle, to hope, 2 Pluperf. ζωΧπ€ΐν as Imperfect middle, I. hoped, was hoping. Mid. ζΧπομαί, ϋΧπομαι, to hope, e.rpect , Imperf. εΧπόμην, ΟΚπόμψ. ΕΛΥί2, volvo, to roll. Epic, A. P. ξ.Χνσθην, part. ζΧνσθ^ίς. *ΕΑί2, see αίρβω. €μ€ω, vomo, to vomit, F. εμβσω, €μίσομαι Ιμονμαι, Α. ημ^σα, Epic ημησα, Ρ. €μημ€κα, Pluperf. €μ€μ€Κ€ίν later, P.P. €μημ€(τμαί. βμ-ττεδόω, to confirm, regular ; Imperf ημττ^^ονν. €μ-ποΧάω, to traffic, F. ^μποΧησω, Α. ημπόΧησα, P. ημπόΧηκα, later €μπ€πόΧηκα, P.P. ημττόΧημαι, Ionic €μτΓΟΧημαι.. • €ΐ>αίρω (ΕΝΑΡ-), to slay, Α. Μ. ζνηράμην, 2 Α. ηναρον. €ν-αντίόομίΗ, to oppose, regular ; P.P. ηναντίωμαι, Α. P. ηναντιωθην. ζναρίζω, to slay. Poetic, F. ^ναρίζω, Α. Ινάριξα, ηνάρισα, Ρ. Ρ. ηνά- ρισμαι. ΕΝΕΓΚί2 (ΕΝΕΚ-), see φβρω. ΕΝΕΘΩ, to sit, to rest upon, 2 P. iTr-evrjvoOe, κατ-ζνψηβζ, as Present, 2 Pluperf. 3 sing. €π-€νψοθ€, κατ-^νψοθ^, with the ending and force of the Imperfect. (§ 118, 1, d.) ΕΝΕΙΚΩ (ENEK-), see ώ/ρω. €ν€πω or ζννίττω, rarely ^νίπτω, (ΕΠ-, ΕΝΙΠ-, ΕΝΙΣΠΕ-, ΕΝΙΣΠ-) in quam, to i,ell, say. Poetic, Imperf. '4ν€πον, ^νν^πον, F. ξνίψω βνίσπηαω, 2 Α. euLmrov, Ινίσττω, βιάσποιμι, €νιστΓ€, ivian^lv. €νίπτω or ^νίσσω (ΕΝΙΠ-, ΕΝΙΣΠ-), to chide, Poetic, 2 Α. ^Ανισπον or ivevLTTov, also ψήπαπον. €νννμι and ίνννω (Έ-), vestio, to clollic, Poetic, F. βσω, A. βσα. Mid. €ννυμαί, to put on, Imperf. ίνννμην, F. ^σομαι, P. ^ίμαι, €σμαί, Plup. €(Γμην, €€σμην, Α. ίσάμην, ί^σάμην. ειζ-οχΧβω, to annoy, vex. Imp. ηνώχΧ€ον, F. 4νοχΧησω, Α. ηνώχΧησα, Ρ. ηνώχΧηκα, Ρ. Ρ. ηνωχΧημαι. €ορτάζω, Ionic όρτά^ω, to celebrate a festival, Imperf ίώρταζον, Y.iop- τάίτω, Α. ζώρτασα, ίορτάσαι. €π-ανρίσκω or 4π-ανρίω (ΑΥΡ-), to enjoy, hit, Poetic and Ionic, F. M. €πανρησομαί, 2 A. ewavpov, 2 A. M. ζπηυρόμην or βπανράμην. ζττί-μίΧομαι Or ^ττί-μ^Χίομαι, ίο take care of, F. €πίμ€Χησομαί, &c., all from the eecond form. 184 INl'LECTION OF WORIXS. [§ 133. 4π-ίσταμαι (ΕΠΙΣΤΑ-, eVi, ΙΔ-), to know, understand, learn, Tmperf. ηπιστάμην, F. €πιστησομαι, A. ηπιστηθην. — e^-eTTiVreat, 2 sing. Ionic, for εζ-^πιστασαι. €πω (ΣΕΠ-), io be employed, to be after any thing, Innperf.' βΓττοι/, A. P. ΤΓ€ρί-€φθην, 2 A. €σ7Γον, σπ€Ϊν, σττων. Mid. βττο/χαι, sequor, to follow, Inaperf. €ΐπόμ.ην, F. βψομαι, A. ίψάμην Yoxe, 2 A. {ζστΓόμην)^ σττώμαί, σττοΐμην, σττου, σπίσθαι, σττόμ^ι/ος. — σπεϊο, 2 Α. imperat. Epic, for σπ€0 σττου, — σπ^Ιομ^ν, 2 Α.. subj. 1 plur. Epic, from ΣΠΗχΜΙ. '4ραμαι, Poetic for ipaco, Imperf. ηράμην, A. ηρασάμψ. — ipdrai, subj. 3 sing, ^olic or Doric, contracted from ζράηται, €ράω (α), to be passionately fond of, to be in love, Imperf. ήραον, A. P. ηράσθην, F. P. ^ρασθησομαι, both as active. €ργάζομαί, to ivork, do. Imp. είργαζόμην, F. epydaqpai, P. ('ίργασμαι, A. p. ζΙρΎασθην passive, A• M. βίργασάμην. — εξ-η ργάσατο, Α. Μ. 3 sing, later. €ργννμί, βσ-βρ-γννμί, for €Ίργννμί, €ΐσ'-€ΐργι>νμί, Imperf. iipyvvv. ΕΡΓί2, see ερδω, to do. €ργω or βργω, the theme of elpyvvpt, to shut in, not found in the pres- ent, F. €ρξω, ξνν-βρξω, βφ-βρξω, άφ-ίρξω, Α. €ρξα ΟΓ €ρξα, Ρ. Ρ. €ργμαί, Α. Ρ. Ερχθην. — Epic Ρ. Ρ. 3 plur. ζρχαται ; Plup. 3 plur. €ρχατο. €ργω, the original form οι €φγω, arceo, to shut out, A. ^ρξα, απ-^ρξα, P. Ρ epypai, α7Γ-€ργμαι, F. Μ. €ρξομαί as passive. — ΕΡΓΑΘΩ, Pres. Mid. imperat. ipyauov transitive, Imperf. ^pyaOov, βργαθόμην, as Aorist. €ρδω or έρδω (ΕΡΓ-), to do, ivork, Ionic and Poetic, Itnperf epdov, ep- dpu, F. €ρξω, A. ep^a, 2 P. eopya, 2 Plup. icupy€LV, Ionic iopyea. — €opyav, 2 P. 3 plur. for iopyaai. epe /δω, to prop, regular ; P. M. ήρεισμαι, ζρηρ^ισμαι, later ηρ-ηρ^ι- σμαι, Plup. ηρηρζίσμην. — Epic forms : P. 3 plur. €ρηρ€δαταί, or € ρη p€ Lvrai, Plup. 3 plur. ερτ/ρεδατο, οτ η pi) p€ lvto. €ρ€ίκω (EPIK-), rump ο, to rend, tear, burst, break in pieces, A. ηρζΐ- ξα, rare ηριξα, P. P. ερηριγμαι, 2 A. ήρικον, commonly intransitive, ' to be rent, torn, burst, broken in pieces, €ρ€ίπω (ΕΡΙΠ-), lo cast down, F. ερβίψ-ω, A. ηρ€ίψα, P. P. €ρηρ€ίμ- μαί, Pluperf. P. 3 sing. epepLnro, 2 A. ηριπον, to fall down. 2 A, P. ηρίπην, 2 P. βρηριπα as passive, to have fallen, A. M. άν-ηρειψά- μην, 2 Α. ηριττόμην as passive, later. €ρ€υθω, ζρνθαίνω, ερυθραίνω, (ΕΡΥΘ-) to redden, Α. έρευσα, ερυθηνα^ 2 Α. Ρ. opt. ερευθειην. ερεω, or ερεομαι, to ask. Epic. — ερειο, imperat. 2 sing, contracted from ερεεο, with the accent on the antepenult. ερώαίνω, ερώμαίνω, (ΕΡΙΔΕ-), for ερίζω, Α. ερί^ηνα, Α. Μ. ερώησα- σθαι. ερίζω, to quarrel, F. ερίσομαι, regular; P. Μ. ερηρισμαι, as Present active. EPOMAI (ερεομαι), to nsk, question, F. ερησομαι, 2 A. η ρό μην, ερω- μαί, εροίμην, ερου, ερεσθαι or ερεσθαι, ερόμενο: ; the rest is borrowed from f ρωτάω. § 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 185 ίρπύζω, another form of βρττω, A. ζίρπνσα. βρπω^ serpo, to creep, Imperf. elpirov, F. €ρ^\τω. €ρρω (EPPE-, EP-), ίο go to destruclion, F. €ρρησω, A. ηρρησα, (siibj. 3siiig. ατΓΰ-βρσ?;, opt.osing. άτΓο-έρσείβ, both Epic,) ν.ήρρηκα. ίρυγγάνω (ΕΡΥΓίί), erugo, ructo, to eruct, 2 A. TJpvyov. ■ €ρνκω, to keep back, regular ; 2 A. ηρύκακον, Epic. €ρυω, to draw, pull. Epic, Imperf. epvov, F. {ερυσω) Ιρνω, Α. epvaa, F. Μ. [ζρνσομαί) ipvopai. — EPYMI, Pres. M. 3 sing. epvraL, inf. €ρυσθαι, Imperf. 2 sing. epv(ro, 3 sing, epvro, 3 plur. epvvro. jJpXopaL (ΕΛΕΥΘ-, ΕΛΥΘ-, ΕΑΘ-), to come, to go, F. eXeuao/xat, 2 P. εληλνθα. Epic €ΐ\ηλονθα, liirely ήλνβα, €ληλονθα, 2Α.τί^χτθον Poetic, commonly ηλθον, ίΚθω, ζΧθοιμι, iXOi, i\6uv, i\6cuv, to come,'T—€l\ri\ov6p€v, 2 P. 1 plur. Epic for ζΙΚηλονθαμζν. — iXrjXv pev, €Χη\ντ€, 2 P. for €\η\νθαμ€ν, €\ηΧνθατ€. €σθίω, sometimes €σθω, εδω, (ΕΔΕ-, ΦΑΓ-) edo, to eat, F. edopat, later βδου/χαι, φάγομαι, P. β^ηδοκα, P. P. ζδηΟξο-μαί, rarely edi^Se/xat, Epic €8η8ομαί, A. P. η^^σθην, 2 Κ. eC^ayov, 2 P. €θη^α Epic. — > ed/otei/ai, Pres. inf. Epic for eoe/xemt, eSeii/. εσπομαι {έπομαι), to follow, εσπωμαι, ίσποΊμην, ίσπ^σθω, eaneaOai (εσπέ'σ^αι ?), Imperf. ίσπόμην usually as Aorist. ίστίάω {iarla), to feast, F. έσηασω, A. ύστίασα, P. ύστίάκα, P. Μ ζίστίάμαί, Α.. P. ζΐστίάθην. ευδω (ΈΥΔΕ-), to sleep, Imperf. €υδον,ηυοον, F. ^ν^ησω, €υ€ργ€τ€ω (evepyeVryj), to do good, benefit, Imperf. €ύηργ€Τ€ον, evep- y€T€Ov, F. €ν€ργ€τη(τω, A. €vηpyeτησa, €V€pyeTi]aa, P. €ύηpyeτηκa, eυ€pytτηκa, P. P. €υηpy€τημaL, €ν€ργ€τημαι. €υνάω, toj)ut to bed, regular; A. P. €υνηθψ,ΧΆΎ^\^ ^ννίθην. €νρίσκω C^EYP-), to find, F. ζυρησω, P. €Ϊ)ρη•<α, P. P. €υρημαί, A. P. €υρίθην, 2 A. €vpov {cvpa), 2 A. M. €νρόμην {€νράμην). — evpCLUV, 2 A. opt. 3. plur. with the ending of the aorist. €ντνχ€ω, to prosper, regular. — €υτυχ€σα, A. later for ευτύχησα, €ϋχομαι, to pray, regular. — evyp^vos, part, for €νχόμ€νος, — evKTOy Imperf. 3 sing, for eu^ero, Aoristic. — ^υχονμην, Imperf. later for €νχόμην. €χθοδοπησαι, to have a contention with, a defective A. inf. €χθο), to hate, Poetic, used only in the present. Pass. €χθομαι, Imperf. ηχθυμην. €χω {€χω, σΚ-, ΣΕΧ-, ΣΧΕ-, ΣΧΗΜΙ), to have, Imperf. €ΐχον, Υ.ζξω, σχησω, Ρ. ^σχηκα, Ρ. Ρ.εο'χημαί, Α. Ρ. ίσχίθην, 2 Α. ^σχον, (τχώ, σχοΊην {σχυίμί), σχες, ^τχ^Ιν, σχών, 2 Α. Μ. ζσχόμην, σχώμαι, σχοί- μην, σχοΐ), σχίσθαί, σχόμ^νος, 2 Ρ. part. σνν-οχωκό:>ς. — ζ'ίχ€€, Im- perf. 3 sing. Ionic for elx^. — ey/xev, inf. Epic for εχίμζν. — ξΐσχη- ^ μ a ι, P. P. later for βσχημαί. — 6π-ό•>χατο, Plup. P. 3 plur. — ΣΧΕ- ΘΟ, σχίθω, σχίθοιμι, σχ^θζ, σχίθειν (Epic σχ^θίζΐν), σχίθοίν, Im- perf. εσχζθον, all Aoristic. εψ-ω (*ΕΨΕ-, ΈΠ-), to cook, Υ. ί-^ησω, ί^\τησομαι, Α. η-^ησα (ηψα), ! P.P. ηψημαι, Α. η-φ-ηθην (part. ίφΘ^ντ^ς rare) — €ψ€€, Imperf. ' Ionic, 3 sing, for η\(τ€. ί*ΕΩ, to seat, set, A. elaa. eaa, elaov, €σας or €Ϊσας. Mid. ΈΟΜΑΙ, to J seat one's self, to sit, F. ζΐσομαι, εσομαι, P. ημαι as Present, to sit. 186 INFLECTION OF \\^ORDS. [§ 133. ψΓο^ ηυθαι, ημ^νος^ Pluperf. ημην as Imperfect, A. ύσάμην^ ίσάμην, €€σάμην^ to place, erect, build, eaaai, €ίσάμ€νοξ, €σσάμ€νος• — In the Perfect and Pluperfect, 3 sing, ησται, η στ ο are more common than the regular ηται, ητο. — earai, Piup. M. 3 pi ur. for ψται. — etaro or earo, Plup. M. 3plur. for ψτο. €ωρταί, see άφίημί. Ζ, ζάω (ΖΗΜΙ), ΐο live, imperat. ζη, ζηθί, inf. ζην, Imperf. ζζαον, also ξζην in the first person singular, F. ζησ-ω, ζησομαι, Α. ^ζησα, P. βζη- κα, later. ζζύγννμι, ζ^υγνυω, (ΖΕΥΓ-, ΖΥΓ-) jungo, to yoke, F. ζ^νξω, Α. €ζ€ν- ξα, Ρ. Ρ. efeuy/xat, Α. Ρ. €ζ€ύχθην, 2χ\. Ρ. €ζνγην. — ζ^νγνυ μ€ν, Pres. inf Epic for (^vyvvvai. — ζΕνγννην, opt. act. ζ^ω, later ζ^νννμι, ζ^ννυω, to boil, commonly intransitive, F. ζίσω, A. ζζζσα, P. €ζ€κα, P. Ρ,^ζ^σμαι, A. P. βζζσθην. ζώνννμι, ζωνννω, (Z0-) to gird, F. ^ώσω, A. ^ζωσα^ P. ζζωκα, P. P. βζωσμαί, A. P. ζζώσθην. Η. ηβάω, to be at the age of puberty, to be vigorous, also ηβάσκω, to ap- proach the age of puberty, F. ηβησω, A. ηβησα, P. ηβηκα, — ΉΒί2Ω, opt. ηβώοιμι. ηβίω (ΗΘ-), to strain as fluids, regular ; A. part, ησας, in Galen. ημί (φημί), inquani, say I, I say, colloquial, Imperf. ην, η, in the phrases ην δ' iyco, said I, η d^ os, said he. But rj, he said, is used by the Epic Poets without the appendage δ' ος.. — ητί, 3 sing. Doric. ημνω {ν, rarely ϋ), to bow down, A. ημϋσα, P. 3 sing. ^ττ-β/χι/ή/Αΐ/κβ, are bent down. ησθημενος, lonic εσθημενος, (εσθης, Υ est is) clothed, a defective P. P. part., Piup. 3 sing, ήσθητο, he had on, was clothed in, later. Θ. βά\\ω (ΘΑΛ-, ΘΑΛΛΕ-, ΘΑΛΕ-), to bhom, F. θαΧλησω, will give birth to, F. M. ^αλήσο /xat, later, 2 A. εθαλον, 2 P. τβθηλα as Present. — τεθάλνϊα, 2 P. part. Epic for τεθηλνΊα. Θάομαι, to gaze at, a Doric verb, imperat. θάεο, θασθ^, F. θάσομαι, θα- σονμαι, Α. βθάσάμην, θησαίμην, θασαι, θάσασθαι. — Θάοντα, part. act. ace. — σαωμβνη, part. Laconian, for Θαομενη. — εσάμεθα, Imperf. 1 plur. Laconian for εβαομεθα. θάπτω (ΘΑΦ-), to bury, F. 6άy\rω, Ϋ.τεταφα, P.P. τίθαμμαι, K.V. εβάφθην rare, 2 A. ζτάφην, F. Perf. τεθάψομαι. — τ€θάφαταί, P. P. 3 plur. Ionic. ΘΑΦΩ, ΘΗΦΩ, to be astonished, Ionic, Ρ.τεθαφα, to astonish; but re- θηπα as Present intransitive, to be astonished, Pluperf. €Τ€θηπ€α as Imperfect intransitive, 2 A. €ταφον. ΘΑΩ, to suckle. Epic, A. ί'βησα. Mid. {θάεσθαή θησθαι, to milh, A. εθησάμην, to suck, also to su'kle. θείνω (ΘΕΝ-^, to smite. Poetic, Imp. ζθζίνον, F. θ^νω, A. eOciva, 2 A. eOevov, ΰίνω, Οίνε, βενείν, Βενων (θενό^ν). ^ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 187 β€λω (ΘΕΛΕ-), the same as ζθ^λω, F. θίΚησω^ A. ^Θ^Κησα, P. τ€6ίλη- κα later. βίρομαι^ Ιο warm one's self, Poetic, Υ.θβρσομαι^ 2 A. P. ^θβρην aa mitldle. Οίσσασθαι, to ohtain hy prayer, to fray that it may he ^ found only in the A. M. 3plLir. θίσσαντο, and part, θ^σσάμ^νος. θύω (ΘΕΥ-), to run, F. θ^νσομαι, later θβνσω. βίω, to put^ see τίβημι. ^iyyfii /ω (ΘΙΓ-), tango, to touch as with the hand, Υ.θίξομαι, 2 A. eOtyov (τβθίγορ). θλάω, to bruise, hrealz, F. θλασω, A. βθλασα, P. P. τίθλασμαι, Doric τίθΧα'^μαι. θλίβω, to S'jtieeze, regular ; 2 A. P. ζθλίβην. θνψΓκω (ΘΑΝ-, ΘΝΑ-, ΘΝΗΜΙ), to be dying, to die, F. θανβομαί Θάνου- μΐίί, P. τίθνηκα, F. Perl, τ^θνηξω, τ€θνηξομαι, 2 Α. edavov, also ζθνην rare, 2 P. {τίβναα)., τεθναίην, τ^θναθι, Tcuvavai, ΤΕθν^ως, 2 Plup. (eVe^metv). — τζθνακην, P. inf. ^olic, ίοτ τ^θνηκβναι. βοινάω (Θ0ΙΝ1Ζ-), to entertain festively, Imperf. εθοίναον, I feasted, intransitive, A. ^θοΐνίσα, A. P. ίθοινηθην as middle. Mid. θοινάο- μαι, to feast, feast upon, F. θοινησομαι or θοινάσομαι, P. τεθοίνάμαί, A. ζθοινησάμην. 90Ω, to feasl, entertain. Mid. βωται, θώνται, θωσθαι, θωμ^νονς, to feast, eat, Doric forms, contracted from 60€ταί θόονται θό^σθαι θοομί- νονς, F. θωσυμαί, Ρ.τίθωμαί, Α. εθωθην, Α. Μ. inf. θωσασθαι. φράσσω (ΘΡΑΧ-), to disturb, Α. ^θραξα, θράξαι, Ρ. τβτρηχα as Pres- ent intransitive, to be tumultuous, Pluperf. €Τ€τρηχ€ίν as Imperfect intransitive, A. P. €θράχθην, F. M. θραξονμαι. 9ρανω, to crumble, regular ; P. P. τίθρανμαί, τίθρανσμαι, Α. P. i6pav- σθην. Κρύπτω (ΘΡΥΦ-) , to crujnble, Α. Wpvyj/a, P. Μ. τίθρνμμαι, Α. P. i6pv- φθην, 2 Α. P. €τρνφην. \9ρώσκω (ΘΟΡ-, ΘΡΟ-), to leap, spring, jump, Υ.θορΙομαι θορονμαι, ■ 2 Α. eOnpov {τ€θυρον). |9ϋω, and θϋνω, to rage, rush, move rapidly, Imperf. Wvov, Wvvov^ F. I θύσω,παρ-θνσω, A. €θϋσα. \%ω, to sacrifice, Υ . θϋσω, Α. Wvaa, Ρ.τεθϋκα, P.P. τβθνμαι, Α. F. i έτνθην, Α. Μ. ζθυσάμην. Ι. \άχω, Ιαχ€ω, (ΑΧ-) to shout. Imp. 'ίαχον, F. Ιαχησω, Α. Ιάχησα, Ρ. part. fern, άμφ-ίαχυΐα as Present, screaming around. \^ρόω, sudo, to sweat, regular.- — ΊΔΡΑί2, opt 3 sing, ί^ρωη ; part. ,' ίδρώοϊ/τα? (ιδρωι^ταί), Epic ; part. fern, ίδρωσα. — 'ίΔΡίΙΩ, part. j fern. Ι^ρώονσα. Κδρυω, ΊΔΡΥΝί2, to seat, locate, F. Ζδρϋσω, Α.ιδρϋσα, P. P. Ι'δρϋ,ααί, A. P. 'ώρνθην or 'ώρυνθην. \Έμαι {dpi), to hasten, Imperf. Ιίμψ. €ω (Έ-), to send, μ^θ-ύω, inf. Ιύν, ^vvulv, Imperf. low. ζω, Ιζάνω, (ζζομαί, ΊΖΕ-) to seat, place; also to sit, Imperf Γ^οί^, A, ϊζησα, P. ίζηκα. Mid. Ιζομαι, to sit, F. καθ-ιζησομαι. 188 "* INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133. ΐημι (ί/ω, *E-), to send, Imperf. t?yi/, F. ησω, Epic also α^-βσω, A. ηκα only in ths indicative, Epic €ηκ.α only in composition, άφ-βηκα, €φ- €ηκα, ζυν-ζηκα, also opt. άν-βσαιμι, P. et/ca, P. P. et/xai, A. P. ζίθηιΌΐ ζθην, €θώ, F. Ρ.ζθησ-ομαι, Α. Μ.ηκάμην rare in AttiC, used only in the indicati^'e, 2 A. ην, ω, €Ϊην, e's•. eivat, ets, 2 A. M. €Ϊμην or e/xT^y, ωμαί, α,μην, (βσο eo) ου, βσθαί, βμ^νος. ) The snigular ^;ca ήκαί ηκ€ and the 3 plar. ηκαν are with good writers much more common than the remaining forms of the aorist. On the other hand, the singular of the 2 A. ψ is not used in the indicative. — βωκα, €ωμαι or €υμαί, Perf. with the syllabic augment, for ζϊκα, et/xat ; 3 plur. €ωνταί, άψ-ίωνται, άν-ίωνται or aviovrai, for eiuraL, άφ^ϊν- raL, άν^ϊνταί. — προ-οΐτο, 2 Α. Μ. 3 sing, for προ-€ΐτο. ίκάνω (2',<ω), ίο come, to have come. Poetic, Imperf. Ικάνον as Aorist. ίκνζομαι (ίκω), to come^ to arrive, F. Ιξομαι, P. ίγμαι, 2 A. ίκόμηι/. Prose- writers use the compound άφικνίομαι.) — Ικτο, t/c/xez/os•, 2 Α. Μ. for LKETO, ίκόμενοζ- Ίκω (Γ), to come, Epic Imp. ϊκον, A. ϊξον. Ιλάσκομαί, rarely ίΧίομαί, ΐλ^όομαι, Epic ίΧάομαι, to propitiate, F. ika- σομαι, later Epic ΪΚάξομαι, K.V . ίλάσθην passively, A. M. Ιλάσά- μην, later Epic ίλαξάμην. ΐλημί (ίλάομαί), to be propitiovs, imperat. ΐΚαθι, ίληθί, P. (ΐληκα) ΐλψ κω, ΪΚηκοίμι, as Present. Mid. ϊλαμαι equivalent to Ιλάσκομαι. ίπτΓο-τροφίω, to keep horses, regular ; P. Ιπποτρόφηκα and καθ-ιπποτζ- τρόφηκα. ίπταμαι {π^τάομαι, ΠΤΑ-, *ΙΠΤΗΜΙ), to fly as a bird, Imp.- Ιπτάμην, F. πτησομαι, 2 A. επτην, ττταίην, τττηναι, τττάς, 2 Α. Μ. ιπτάμην, πτώμαι, πτάσθαι, πτάμ^νος. Χσάμι (ΙΣΑ-), ίο know, a Doric verb, 2 sing, ϊσης ; 3 sing. tVart, 1 plur. ϊσαμ€ν, 2 pi. tVare, 3 pi. tirai'rt, part. Ίσας (not lads), -i^^olic ϊσαίς, — Ισάντί, subj. 3 plur. contracted from Ισάωντι. ΐοτκω for €Ϊ(τκω, Imperf. ϊσκον. ίστάω, the same as ϊστημι, Imperf. Ιστών. Ιστημί (ΣΤΑ-), Statu ο, to cause to stand, set up, erect, raise, place, sta- tion, στήσω, A. έστησα, P. €στηκα as Present intransitive, sto, to stand, later εστακα active, Pluperf. ίστηκ€ΐν or ^Ιστηκ^ιν as Imperfect intransitive, was standing, P. P. ^στάμαι rare, A. P. €στάθην, F. Perf. ίστηξω, έστηξομαι, shaU Stand, as future to ^στηκα] 2 P. {€σταο), ίστω, ίοταίην, €σταθί, ίστάυαι, ίστως, as Present intransitive, to stand ; 2 Pluperf. (eVraeti/) as Imperfect intransitive, was standing, 2 A. €στην, στώ, σταίην, στήθι, στηναι, στάς^ — ^υν-ιστοΊτο, opt. 3 sing, ί'ον ξυν-ισταίτο. — 6στάσ€, Α. 3 sing, for €στησ€ ; 3 plur. €στασαν, for έστησαν. — βστάθην, Α. Ρ. for εσταθην. 1η some compounds wliose middle is intransitive, the Perfect aclive may be translated as a real perfect ; as άνίστημι, to set np, άνίσταμαι, to rise up, άνβστηκα, to liave risen up. ϊσχω {€χω), to have, hold/as/, F. σχησω, P. εσχηκα, &:c., as in €χω. — Ίσχβς, imperat. 2 sing, for ϊσχ€, formed after the analogy of σχίς, from €χω. Γω ('Κί2), another form οΐίημι, found only in composition, άφίω, άφί•' οιμι, Imperf. ξυν -iovj P. P. part, μ^μ^τ-ιμίνος, from μ^θίημι. ^ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 189 K. καθ'ίζομαι {^ζομαι, *ΕΔΕ-, ΈΔ-), to sit doiun, Imperf. €καθζζ6μην. Poet- ic also καθζζόμην, usually as Aorist, F. καθ^^ονμαι, later καθξ^ησο- μαι, A P. ζκαθίσθην as middle, F. Ϋ. καθ^σθησομαί as middle. κ.αβ-^υ^ω (βΟ'δω, ΈΥΔΕ-), to. sleep, Im.p. εκάθευδον, καβεν^ον, or καθηυ- δον, F. καβευδησω, Α. καθ€υοΐ]σα. κάθ-ημαι (Έ-, ^juai),Perf. of'Eii, as Present, to sit, sit down, κάθωμαι, καθοίμην, κάθησο, καθησθαί, καθήμενος, Plup. εκαθημην, καθημην, as Imperfect. — κάθτ], 2 sing, later for κάθησαι. — καθτ} μέθα, opt. ι plur. — κάβου, imperat. 2 sing, contracted from κάθβο, later for κάθησο. καθ-ίζω [Ιζω, ΊΖΕ-), to set, j)lace, F. καθίσω, καθιω, Α. εκάθισα^ P. Μ. κξκάβισμαι rare, F. ]\Ι. καβιζησομαι, Α. Μ. εκαθισάμην. κα^νμαι (ΚΑΔ-), to excel, to be distiiiguislied. Poetic Imp. εκαινυμην, P. κίκασμαι, ΚΕκάσθαι, κεκασμενος and κεκα^μβνος, Plup. €Κ€κάσ-μην. καίνω (ΚΑΝ-), to Idll, Poetic, F. κανώ, 2 Α. cKavou, 2 P. κεκαναί ^'■κα/ω also κάω (KAY-, KE-), to burn, F. κανσω, καύσομαι, Α. εκανσα. Poetic €Κ€α, Epic εκηα or eKeia, P. κίκανκα, P. P. κεκανμαΐ, A. P. ζκαύθην, 2 A. P. εκαην. — κανθησωμαι, F. P. subj. %^κα\€ω ;KAA-, KAA-), to call, F. καλέσω κάλεω καΧώ, Α. εκάΧεσα, Ρ. κεκΧηκα. Ρ. Ρ. κεκΧημαί, Α. Ρ.εκΧηθην, rare εκαΧεσθψ, F. Perf. κβ- κΧησομαι. — Ρ. Ρ. opt. 2 sing, κεκλί/ο, 1 plur. κεκΧτ^μεθα. κάΧηυΛ, mf. καΧημεναί. for καΧεω, καΧεΙν. κάμνω (ΚΑΜ-, ΚΜΑ-), ^0 ZGr/;t^r, F. καμεομαι καμονμαι, Ρ. κεκμηκα, 2 Α. εκαμον, 2 Ρ. part, κεκμηώς, -ώτυς ΟΙ -ότος, 2 Α. Μ. εκαμόμην as actiA^e, Epic. ΚΑΠΥΩ, ίο breathe, Epic, Α. εκάπνσσα. κaτa-yλωτLζω, to Uss, regular ; P. P. part, κατε-γλωτισ μένος. κατ-άγνυμι, κατ-αγνύω, to break to pieces, Υ . κατάγω, Α. κατεαξα, rarely κατηξα, Α. Ρ. κατεάχθην, 2 Α. Ρ. κατεάγην, 2 Ρ. κατεαγα, rarely κα- τηγα. — κατεάξω, F. for κατάξω ; κατεάξας, Α. part, for κατά- ρας', κατεαγω, 2 Α. Ρ. subj. for κατάγω ; κατεαγε is, 2 Α. Ρ. part, for κατάγεις. — καυάξαις, Α. opt. 2 sing, ίοτ κατάξαις; formed as follows, κατά- Γαξαί?, κατ-Ταξαις, κα-Γαξαίς, κα-νάξαις, like κατά- βϊιθι κάτ-βάθί κάβάσι. ΚΑΦΕί2 (ΚΑΦ-), to pant. Epic, P. κεκηφε, is dead, part, κεκαφηώς as Present. κεδάι^ννμι (ΚΕΔΑ-), Epic for σκε^άνννμί, A. εκεδάσα, Pluperf. P. /ce- κεδαστο, A. P. εκε^άσθην. ^*:εΙμαί (KE-, KEI-), Ionic κεομαι, to lie down, κεωμαι or κείωμαι, κεοί- μην, κείσο, κείσθαι {κεεσθαι) , κείμενος^ Imperf. εκείμην, F./cetVo- μαι. κείρω (ΚΕΡ-), to shear, F. κερσω, commonly κερω, Α. εκερσα, com- monly εκειρα, Ρ. Ρ. κεκαρμαι, Α. Ρ. εκερθην, 2 Α. Ρ. εκάρψ. κείω or κεω, Ι will lie down, desire to lie down, Epic for κείσω, κεσω. — κάκκη. imperat. 2 sing. Doric for κατάκεε. (^εΧευω, to command, regular ; P. P. κεκίΧενσμαι, A. P. εκεΧενσθην. κεΧΧω (ΚΕΑ-), to come, or bring, to land, as a ship, F. κεΧσω, A. e/ceX σα 190 INFLECTION OF WORDS. p} 133. κίλομαι (ΚΕΛΕ-), to order, request, exhort, Poetic, F. κ^Κησομαι, A. €Κ€\ησάμην, A. ζκ^λησα rare, 2 A. Κ€κλ6μην, €Κ€κλόμην. — κβκΧο- μαι, κ€κ\όμ€νοί, new Present, froni κ€κλόμην. — Kevro, Imperf. 3 sing. Doric for κελ-το, /ceXero, as Aorist. Κ€ντ£ω (KENT-), to prick, regular. A. inf. κβνσάι. Epic. Κ^ράννυμι and κζραννυω {κεράω, KPA-), to mix, as wine and \vater, F. κεράσω κερω, Α. εκίράσα, Ionic βκρησα, P. P. κίκράμαι, sometimes Κ€Κ€ρασμαί, Α. P. εκραθην, εκεράσβην. κεράω, to mix, Έ'ρίο, imperat. κίρα and Kepaie. — κίρωνται, subj. 3 plur. as if from κβραμαι. Κ€ρ8αίνω (ΚΕΡΔΑ-, ΚΕΡΔΑΝ-), to gain, F. κερΒανώ, later κερ^ησω, κερ^ησομαι, Α. iKepbava, εκερ^ησα, P. κεκερ^αγκα, κεκερδηκα, later Κ€Κ€ρ3ακα. — Κ€ ροηθησωνται, F. Ρ. subj. 3 plur. κ€νθω. Epic κενθάνω, (ΚΥΘ-) to hide, F. κενσω, Α. εκενσα, Ρ. Ρ. 3 sing. κ€Κ€νταί, 2 Α. εκνθον (κΕκνβον), 2 Ρ. κεκενθα as Present, 2 Pluperf. εκεκεύθειν as Imperfect. Κ€ω, see κείω. κη^ω (ΚΗΔΕ-, ΚΑΔ-), to vex, trouble, οβΐη. Epic F. κη^ησ-ω, Α. Μ. ΕκηΒεσάμην, 2 Perf. κ€κη8α as Present middle, F. Perf. κεκάοησομαι as future to Κ€κη3α. κίδνημι, Κίκλησκω, Poetic for κε^άνννμι, κοΧβω. κίννμαι. Epic for κινίομαι, to move ones self, Imperf. εκίνύμην. κιρνάω, κίρνημί, for κεράνννμι, imperat. κιρναθί^ inf. κιρνάμεν Epic, part. KLpvas, ^olic κίρναις, Imperf. εκίρνων, εκίρνην. κίχάνω, κιγχάνω, κιχεω, (ΚΙΧ-, ΚΙΧΗΜΙ) to find, reach. Poetic, Imperf. εκίγανον, εκίγεον, F. κίχ^ησομαι, Epic κιχησω, 2 Α. ζΚίχον, also €κί- χην, {κιχεω κιχώ) κιχείω, κιχείην, κιχημεναι, Κίχείς. Pres. Μ. part. κίχημενος as Present or Aorist, Epic. κίχρημι (χράω), to lend, F. χρήσω, A. έχρησα, P. P. κεχρημαι. ^lid. κίχραμαι, later κιχράομαι, to horroiv, A. εχρησάμην. κίω, to go. Poetic, κιω, κίοίμί, κίε, κίειν, κιών, Imperf. εκιον usually as Aorist. — ΚΙΑΘί2, Imperf. εκίαβον μετ-εκίαθον, as Aorist. κΚάζω (ΚΛΑΓ-, ΚΛΑΓΓ-, ΚΑΗΓ-), clan go, to shout, scream, clang. Poetic, F. κλά-γζω, A. εκλαγξα, P. κβκλα-γχα, 2 A. εκλαγον, 2 P. Κ€- κληγα, κεκλα-γγα, as Present, F. Perf. κεκλά-γξομαί, as future to κε- κΚαγγα. κλαίω, κλάω, (ΚΛΑΙΕ-, ΚΛΑΕ-, ΚΑΑΥ-) to ivccp, F. κλανσω, κλαυσο- μαι, κΧανσονμαι, κλαιησω or κλαησω, Α. εκΧανσα, Ρ. Ρ. κεκλανμαι, Α. Ρ. εκλανσθην, F. Perf. κεκΧαύσομαί. κλαω (ΚΑΗΜΙ), to brcal; Α. έκλασα, P.P. κεκλασμαι,^ Α. Ρ. εκλάσβψ, 2 Α. part, άπο-κλάς. κλείω, claudo, to shut, F. κλείσω, Α. εκλείσα^ Ρ. κίκλείκα, Ρ. Ρ. κε- κλείμαί, commonly κεκλεισμαι, Α. Ρ. εκλείσθην, F. Perf. κεκλείσομάι. — κατακλιεί, F. 3 sing. κλέπτω (ΚΛΕΠ-), clepo, to Steal, F. κλβψω, κλ^ψομαι, Λ. έκλαψα, Ρ. κ€κλυφα, Ρ. Ρ. κβκλεμμαι, Α. Ρ. εκλ^φθην, 2 Α. εκλαπον later, 2 Α. Ρ. εκλάπην. κλγμζω, to celebrate, call. Poetic, F. κλεΐξω Doric, P. P. κζκληϊσμαί, εκληϊσμαι, Plup. P. εκληΐσμην. κληΐω (κλείω), to shut, Ionic, A. εκληίσα, P. P. κεκληϊμαι and κεκλ-ηϊ- σμαΐ, Α. P. εκληίοθην. I § 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTU^E VERES. 191 kX'vco, in-clino, ^0 bend, incline, F. κλίνω, A. έκλινα, P. κεκΜκα, P. P. Κ€!<λϊμαί, A. P. €κλΧθην, PoetlC ΙκΚίνθην, 2 A. P. €κ\Χνην, κλνω (ΚΛΥΜΙ), to hear, Poetic, Imperf. βκλνον as Aorist, P. κ^κλυκα as Present, 2 A. (€κλυν) imperat. κλνθί, κΧντ€, 2 Α. iM. {βκλνμην) part. κλύμ€νοί, celebrated, 2 P. (κίκλυα) imperat. κ€κλΰθί, κ^κλντ£, as Present. κναίω, to scrape, regular ; P. P. κίκναισμαι, A. P. ζκναίσθψ. κνάω, for κναίω, Imperf. 3 sing, ίκνη (eicvae) as Aorist, F. κνησω, A. €κνηση, P. P. κβκνησμαι, A. P. ζκνησθην. κολουω, to checJc, regular ; A. P. ζκολούθην, Ικολονσθηι». κοναβίζω (KONABE-), to resound, A. ζκονάβησα. κόπτω (ΚΟΠ-), to cut, regular ; F. Perf. κ€κόψομαί, 2 A. P. εκόττψ, 2 P. κ€κοπα Epic. κορζνννμι (ΚΟΡΕ-), to satiate, F. κορώσω, κ-ρ:^, Α. ε/φεσα, P. Μ. Κ€κόρ€(τμαί, not Attic κ^κόρημαι. Α. €Κορ€σ-άμην, Α. Ρ. βκορ^σθην aS middle, 2 P. part. κ€κορηά)ς as middle. κορύσσω (ΚΟΡΥΘ-, κόρνς), to arm, Poetic, regular; P. P. part, κεκο- ρνσμίνος, κ^κορνθμςνος. κοτ€ω, κοταίνω, to be angry, F. κοτεσομαι {σσ) ^ Poetic, A. iKorecra, A. M. €Κοτ€(τάμην, 2 P. part. κ€Κθτηώς. κοχύω (χ^ω), to trickle down, Imperf. κοχϋεσκον, or κοχϋ3€σκον^ Epic. κράζω (ΚΡΑΓ-, ΚΕΚΡΑΓ-), to cry aloud, F. κράξω not common, A. €Κ€κραξα later, 2 A. eKpayov, 2 P. κξκραγα as Present, 2 Piup. eKe- KpayeLv as Imperfect, F. Perf. κ^κραγησω, κ€κράξομαί as future to KeKpaya. — κ€ κραχθι, 2 P. imperat. 2 sing, syncopated. κραιαίνω, a protraction of κραίνω, Epic, Imp. ζκραίαινον, A. Ικρηηνα, P. P. 3 sing, κεκράανται, PI up. 3 sing. κ€κράαντο, A. P. εκρά- άνθην. κραίνω (KPAN-), to finish, complete, rule over, Poetic, F. κρανω, A. €Kpdva, Epic ζκρηνα, P. P. 3 sing, κίκρανται, A. P. ίκράνθην, F. M. κρανονμαί as passive. κρεμάνννμι (κρεμάω), to hang, F. κρεμάσω κρεμώ, Α. εκρερΛσα, P. P. κεκρεμασμαι, Α. P. εκρεμάσθην, Α. Μ. εκρεμασάμην. κρεμημι {κρεμάω), to hang transitive, rare in the active. IMid. κρεμα- μαι, to hang, be in a state of suspensioji, to be hanging, Imperf. εκρε- μάμην, F. κρεμησομαι. κρημνάω or κρημνημι, for κρεμάνννμι. ΚΡΙΖί2 (ΚΡΙΓ-, ΚΡΙΚ-), to' creak, shriek, squeak, 2 A. εκρικον, 2 P. κε- i^plya as Present. κρίνω, to separate, judge, F. κρινώ, A. εκρΤνα, P. κεκρΧκα, P. P. κεκρϊ- μαι, Α. P. εκρϊβην, Epic εκρίνθην. κρονω, to knock, regular ; P.P. κεκρονμαι, κεκρονσμαι, Α. P. εκρου- σβην. κρύπτω (ΚΡΥΒ-, ΚΡΥΦ-), to hide, regular ; F. Perf κεκρν^ομαι, 2 A . P. εκρύβην, rarely εκρνφην. — εκρνβον, Imperf. from ΚΡΥΒΩ, {Ν. Τ. Luc. 1, 24.) κτάομαί, to acquire, F. κτησομαί, P. κεκτημαι, εκτημαι, subj. κεκτώμαι or κίκτωμαι, opt. κεκττ^μην or κεκτωμην, as Present, to possess, Α.εκτη- ^/yi/ passively, A. εκτησάμην, }^ , PeiL κεκτΊΐσομαι, εκτησομαί, as fu- ture to κεκτημαι. 192 INFLECTION OF AVORDS. [§ 133. κτ^ίνω (KTEN-, KTAN-, KTA-, KTHMI-), io Jcill, slay, F. κτ^νω. Epic κταν^ω^ A. €κτ€ίνα, P. €κτόνηκα rare, later €κτακα, εκταγκα^ Α. P. Ικτάθην Epic, ζκτάνθην later, F. Μ. κτανίομαι as passive, 2 A. eicra- vnv, also €κτάν, Poetic, 2 A. M. €κτάμην as passive, Poetic, 2 P. €KTova the usual Perfect. KTi'/xei/os• fKTIMI, κΓΐ'^ω), built ^ foiinded. Epic; a defective 2 K. M. part, with a passive signification ; used only in composition, €v-ktl- μ€ν05' KTLvvvfiL, κτινννω, {κτείνω) ίο kill, ά7Γo-κτLVuυμL. — άπο-κτ ίννν μ^ν, subj. I plur. κτνπεω (ΚΤΥΠ-), to sound ^ crash, A. e κτύπησα, 2 A. €κτνπον. χνβω, κνω, to be pi^egnont, to bring forth, F. κυησω, κυησομαι, Α. Ικν- ησα, also €κϋσα to impregnate, P. κ^κνηκα. κνΐσκω, κυΐσκομαί, [κύω) to conceive, Α. Μ. €κϋσάμην^ €κνσάμην (σσ). κυλίνοω, κυ\ίν3€ω, κνΧΐω, ίο roll, F. κυλίνδησω, Α. iKVALcra, Ρ. Ρ. κ^κϋλισμαι, Α. Ρ. ΙκνΚίσθην. κυνίω (ΚΥ-), to kiss, F. κννησομαι, Α. βκυσα. The compound προσ- κυνάω, to worship, is regular. κϋρω, to fall in ivith, to meet, to chance, F. κνρσω, A. €κνρσα. Λ. λαγχάι/ω (AAX-, ΛΗΧ-, ΛΕΓΧ-), to obtain by lot, Τ.Χηξομαι, lonio Χάξομαι, P. €Ϊ\ηχα, ΧεΧαχα, XeXoyy^a, P. P. €'ί\ηγμαι, A. P. fX?'.- χθην, 2 A. 6Χαχον (λβΧαχον) . — ^ΧΧαχον, 2 Α. Epic. — λα;(07;ΐ', 2 Α. opt. for Χαχοίην. Χαμβάνω (χ\ΑΒ-, ΛΑΒΕ-, ΛΗΒ-), to take, F. Χη-^ομαι, P. Λ\ηφα, mn'' ΙγΧ€Χάβηκα, P.P. €ΪΧημμαί, sometimes XeA/^/z/xat, Α. P. εΧηφθη^^. F. Perf. Χ^Χηψομαί, 2 Α. ζΧαβον, 2 Α. Μ. €Χαβυμην {ΧβΧαβόμην). ΛΑΜΒί2 gives the Ionic Χάμψομαι, ΧίΧαμμαι, βΧάμφθην. — eXXa- βον, €ΧΧαβόμην, 2 Α. i^ipic. Χάμπω, ίο shine, regular ; 2 Ρ.\ζΧαμπα. Χανθάνω, Poetic Χηβω, (ΛΑΘ-) lateo, to lie hid, escape notice, Υ,Χησω, A. €Χησα rather rare, P. M. Χ^Χησμαι, Ionic ΧίΧασμαι, A. P. eXa- σθην Doric, F. Perf. ΧζΧησομαι, 2 A. eXaOov {ΧΙΧαθον), 2 A. M. eXa- βόμην [ΧζΧαθόμην), 2 P. Χ^Χηθα, Doric ΧβΧάθα as middle. iMid- Xau- θάνομαι, to forget. Χάσκω (ΛΑΚΕ-, ΛΑΚ-), loquor, to speak, gabble. Poetic, F. Χακησο- μαι, Α. εΧάκησα, 2 Α. βΧακον, 2 Ji. Μ. εΧακυμην {Χ€Χακ6μην), 2 Ρ. Χ^Χάκα, Epic ΧίΧηκα, as Present. λίίω, to see, Epic, Imperf. Χάον. λ/γω. loquor, to say, regular ; A. P. εΧ^χθψ, F. Perf. ΧίΧί^ομαί. Χίγω, to enumerate, io collect, Υ.Χβξω, A. eXe^a, P. €ΪΧοχα, P. P. et- Xey/xat, Xe'Xey^tat, A. P. ΙΧ^χθην, 2 xA. P. ζΧβγην. — Imperf. eXe- γμην, for eXeyojur;!/, 3 sing. XeKTO, for eXeyfro, both Aoristic. λζίπω, Χιμπάνω, (ΛΙΠ-) linquo, /ο /ί^ί/ί'ί?, F. Χζίψω, Α. eXeiyp-a later, P. P. ΧίΧ€ΐμμηί, A. P. βΧ^ίφθην, F. Perf. Χ^Χ^ίψομαι, 2 A. (Χιπον, 2 A. Μ €Χιπόμην, 2 Α. P. (Χίπην later, 2 P. ΧίΧυιπα. — ίΧΧιττοι.'. 2-A. Epic. — cXetTTTo, Imperf. 3 sing, for ζΧβίπ^το, as Aorist. Χίίχω. lingo, /<; //VA•, regular ; 2 P. part. Χ€Χίχμώί or Χ€Χ€ίχμώς. Χέττω, /c> ;;6ΐ'/, regular ; 2 A. ^Χάπην. § 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 193 Χευω, to stone, reg-iilar ; A. P. ίΚενσβην. ΛΕΧΩ, to jmt to bed, A. eXe^a, P. part, λβλοχυΐα. ]\Tid. ΔΕΧΟΜΑΙ, to step]), F. Χίξομαι, A. ελεξάμην. — Xe|^o, Pres. imperat. 2 sj.io•. for λ/χου, Aoristic ; κατα-Χ^χθαι, Pres. inf. for κατα-λ€χβσθαί, Aoristic ; κατα-λ€γμ€νος, Pres. part, for -λ€χόμ€νος. — λ€κτο or €λ€κτο, Imperf. 3 sing. Aoristic. — Xe^eo, A. imperat. 2 sing-. for λεξαι. ληΐζω, to pillage, regular; P. P. λίΚηϊσμαι, \€λτ]σμαι, Α. Μ. εΚη'ίσά- μην, εΧηαάμην. ΛΙΖΩ (ΑΙΓΓ-), to twang, Α. eXty^a. λίλαίομαί (ΑΙ A A-, λάω), to crave. Epic, Ρ,Χελίημαι, the participle λελίημενος means also eager, hastening, Plup. λελίημην. \ίσσομαι, \ίτομαι, to syppHcate, A. εΧισάμην, 2 A. ΐΚιτόμην. — iWi- σάμην, A. Epic, λοβω, to bathe, transiti\^, Epic, A. eXoWa (σσ), F. M. \ο€σομαί{σσ), A. M. €\ο€σάμην [σσ) . λόω, lavo, to bathe. Poetic in the active, Imperf. eXooi/ eXovv, eXoe eXov, €Κόομ€ν eXoC/xei/. Mid. Χοΰμαι, to bathe, reflexive, imperat. Xov, inf. Χουσθαί, part. Χονμενος, Imperf; ζΧονμην, iXovro, iXovv- TO. Χυω (AYMI), solvo, to loose, F. Χϋσω, A. eXvaa, P. XeXvKa, P. P. ΧίΧνμαι, A. P. ζΧνθην, F. Perf. ΧεΧνσομαι,ί 2 A. imperat. Χίιθί, 2 A. M. εΧνμην ΧντοΧνντο. — XeXvro, Perf. Pass. opt. 3 sing. Χώ Xfjg Xrj, plural Χώ/χβί Χητ€ Χωντι, inf. Χήι/, part. Χων, Doric for ^e- Χω, contracted from Χάω. Μ. μαίνω (MAN-, ΜΑΝΕ-), used only in the compound €Κ-μαίνω, to madden, A. €μηνα, 2 A. P. €μάνην as middle, 2 F. μανησομαι as middle, 2 P. μίμηνα as Present middle, ?o be mad, to rave. Mid. μαίνομαι, F. μανοΰμαι, P. μεμάνημαι^ Α.. βμηνάμην. μαίομαι (ΜΑ-), to feel after, touch, seek, probe•, F. μάσομαι[σσ), A. ζμασάμην (σσ). μανθάνω (ΜΑΘΕ-, ΜΑΘ-), ^0 /ecfni, understand, F. μαθησομαι, P. /xe- μάθηκα, 2 A. εμαθον, F. M. {μαθεομαι) μαθενμαι Doric. — €μμα- θον, 2 Α. Epic. μάρναμαι, to fight, Poetic, suhj. μάρνωμαι, opt. μαρνοίμην, imperat (^άρι/ασο) μάρναο, Imperf. €μαρνάμην. μάττω (ΜΑΡΠ-, ΜχΑΠ-), to seize, catch, Υ.μάρψω, Α. ε/χαρψ-α, Plup. 1'. 3 sing. Ιμίμαρπτο, 2 Α.μεμαρπον, μεματτον, εμαπον. — βρά^α^,, λ . inf for μάρψαι. μάϋ'ϋ-ω (ΜΑΓ-), to ivipe, regular ; 2 Α. P. εμάγην. μάχομαι, lonic also for μαχεομαί, di-mico, to fight, F. μαχεσομαι μα- χεομαι μαχονμαί. Epic μαχησομαι, P. μεμάχημαι, rarely μεμάχεσμαι, Α. εμαχεσθην later, Α. Ρ. εμαχεσάμην, later also εμαχησάμψ- — μα- χεονμενος. Pres. part. Ionic for μαχόμενος- ΜΑΩ (ΜΩ-, ΜΕΝ-), to desire earnestly Οΐ strongly, to be eager, intend, Poetic, 2 P. μεμαα, μεμονα, as Present, 2 Pluperf. εμεμάειν as Im- perfect. Mid. μάομαι, μωομαι, 3 sing, μωται, as active, imperat. 2 sing, μωεο, inf. μωσθαι [μωεσθαι), part, μώμενος, Α. εμωσάμην. 9 194 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133. ^— /le/xaey, 2 Pluperf. 3 sing, with the ending and force of the Im- perfect, i^ 118, l,d.) μί^ομαι (ΜΕΔΕ-), to concern one's self cJjout, think of, plan, inachi- "iiate, F. μζ^ησομαι, rarely μώησω. μεθίημι (μ^τά, Ιημι, Γω), to send off, let go, μ^θησω, &C., as in Ίημι ', P. μ^μίθΕίκα, P. P. part. μ€μ€Τίμ6νος lonic. μεθνσκω {μβθύω), to intoxicate, A. Εμίθνσα, P. P. μ^μίθυσμαι, A. P. εμ^θυσθην as middle. Mid . μ^θΰσκομαι, to get drunk. — μ€Θνσθ7)ν, A. P. inf. ^olic for μζθνσθψαι. μ€θύω, to get drunk, defective. μΐίρομαί (MEP-, MOPE-, MOPAZ-), to obtain, acquire. Poetic, Γ. μάρ- σομαι, P. μεμόρηκα, P. Μ. 3 sing. €ηιαρται, μ^μάρηται, μίμορταί, μ€μόρακται, ζμβραται, it is fated, inf. μ^μορθαι, part, ζΐμαρμ^νος^ /xe- μορημβνος, μζμορμίνος, βφραμίνων, fated, ordained by fate, Plu- perf. εϊμαρτο, μζμόρητο, it was fated. Observe that €Ϊμαρταί ζΐμαρτο ^Ιμαρμενος take the rough breathing. μ€λλω (ΜΕΛΛΕ-), to be about to do any thing, to intend, delay, Imperf. €μζΚΚον ήμεΧλον, Α. ΕμβΧλησα ημβΧΚησα. μ€\ο-7Γούω, to compose odes, regular; P. P. part. μ€μ€\θ77€ποίημ€νος. μί\ω (ΜΕΛΕ-), to concern, to care for, F. μίΚησω, 2 P. μ^μηλα as Present, Epic, 2 Plup. €μ€μηλ€ίν as Imperfect, P. M. μ^μοΚημαι as Present active, Pluperf. M. μ^μίΚημην as Imperfect, A. P. part. μζΚη- e€L9 as active. — μίμβΧ^ται, μεμβ\€σθ€, P. Μ. ίοτ^μ^μίΧηται, μ€μίλησθ€ ; μβμβλβτο, Plup. Μ. ίοτ μ^μίλητο ; all Epic. MeXct, it concerns, impersonal, μίΚτ], μ^λοι, μίλ^ιν, μ^Χον, Imperf. e/LteXf, F. μ€\ησ€ί, Α. €μ€\ησ€, P. μ€μ€\ηκ€, Flupevf. €μ€μ€ληκ€ί. μίνω (ΜΕΝΕ-), maneo, to remain, F. μ^νω, Α. 'έμεινα, Ρ. μεμ^νηκα, 2 Ρ. μίμονα rare. ΜΕΝΩ, see ΜΑί2. μβρμηρίζω, to ponder, refect, F. μ€ρμηρίξω, Α. €μ€ρμηρίξα, rarely e/xfp- μηρισα. μ€ταμζ\ομαι (μ^τά, μεΚομαι), Ionic μζταμίΚ^ομαι, to repent, F. μ€ταμ€- ,λησομαι as passive. MerajuteXerat, poenitet, it repents, impersonal. μηκάομαι (MHK-, MAK-), to bleat, 2 A. %μακον, 2 F. μβμηκα as Pres- ent. — μ€μάκν7α, 2 P. part. fem. Epic, for μ^μηκυία. — €/χί- μηκον, 2 Plup. w^ith the ending and force of the Imperfect. (§ Il8, \- ^-^ . μιαίνω, to Stain, regular ; A. εμίηνα, i μίανα, P. P. μ^μίασμαι. — μιαν- Θην, Α. P. 3 plur. Epic, for €μίαν6€ν, ξμιάνθησαν. μίγνυμι, μιγννω, μίσγω, (ΜΙΓ-) misceo, to mix, F. μίξω, Α. €μίξα, P. P. μ€μιγμ.αί, Α. P. ^μίχθην, F. Perf. μζμίξομαι, 2 Α. P. ^μίγγν. — μίκτο or ζμικτο, 2 Α. Μ. for ^μί-γίτο. μίμνησκο) (ΜΝΑ-), memoro, to remind., F. μνησω^ Α. 'ύμνησα. Α. Ρ. εμνησ&ην as middle, F. Perf μ^μνησομαι as middle. Mid. μιμνη- σκομαι, Epic μνάίψαι, reminiscor, to remenucr, F. μνησομαι, P. μίμνημαι as Present, memini, subj. μζμνώμαι or μίμνωμαι, opt. μξ- μν/ιμην OV μ€μνωμην, imper. μίμνησο, inf. μ^μνησθαί, part. μ€μνημ€- νος, Pluperf. εμ^μνημην as Imperfect. — P. M. opt. 2 sing, με- μν ο Lo, 3 sing, μ € μνεφτ ο Ionic [οτ μεμνωτο; 3 plur. ίχβμι/αιατο, § 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 195 Ionic for μ€μνηντο ; imperat. 2 sing. μ€μν€ο ; part, /xe/xz/ouf- νος. — μνωζο, imperat. 2 sing•, from ΜΝΩΩ. μιμνω^ Poetic for μίνω. μινύθω (MINY-, ΜΙΝΥΘΕ-, ΜΙΝΥΘΙΖ-), mi η π ο, ίο diminish, to he less, A. βμίννθησα, €μίρύθισα, P. μ^μιννθηκα, Α. €μι,ννθψ. μνημονεύω ^ to call to mind, regular; P. €μνημόν€νκα. Μ0Αί2, see βλώσκω. μνζω, μνζάω, μνζίω, to suck, Α. ζμνζησα, 2 Ρ. part, dual μ^μνζότζ, μύζω, ίο mutter, grumble, Α. €μνξα, €μνσα. μνκάομαι (ΜΥΚ-), mugio, to bellow, F. μνκησομαι, Α. €μνκησάμην, later ^μυκησα, 2 Χ, ^μνκον, 2 Ρ. μίμϋκα as Present, 2 Plup. e/xe /χϋ- K€Lv as Imperfect. μϋω, ίο close the lips or eyes, A. β/χϋσα, ε/χυσα, P. μίμϋκα. Ν. ναατάω, to inhabit ; part. fern, ναι^τάωσα, Doric as to form. ναίω (NA-), to dwell. Poetic, F. νάσομαι, A. euaaa causative, P. P. νίνασμαι, A. P. €ΐ/άσθην, A. M. €νασάμην. — νάσθαι, 2 Α. Μ. inf. from NHMI. νάσσω or νάττω, to siuff, press close logeiher, F. νάξω, A. €ΐ/αξα, P. P. νίνασμαι, Ionic νίνα-γμαι. ναω, ίο flow, Imperf. vaov, vaiov. ν^ίσσομαι, see νίσσυμαι. Ρ€ίΚ€ω, to chide. Epic, F. ν^ικίσω, A. cvetKeaa. νίμω (ΝΕΜΕ-), to disfribute, consider, pasture, Y. ν€μω,^ν€μησω, A, €ν€ίμα, P. ν€ν€μηκα, P. P. νζΐ'ζμημαι, A. €ν€μηθην, €ν€μ^θην, Α. Μ. €νξίμάμην, €ν€μησάμην. — ΝΕΜΕΘί2, Imperf. €ν€μ€θόμην, Epic. νίομαι, contracted ν^υμαι, to go away, return, usually as Future, 2 sing. [vi^ai] v€laL, subj. 2 sing, νίηαι. Ρέω (NEY-), no η are, to swim, F. ν^νσονμαι, A. evevaa, P. vivcvKa. — e z/i/e ο z/, Imperf Epic. veoa, ίο heap up, A. ένησα, P. P. νενημαι, ν^νησμαι. νεω, νηθω, neo, to spin, F. νήσω, A. ένησα, P. P. νενησμαι, A. P. ενη- θην, Α. Μ. ενησάμην. νηεω, νηνεω, lonic for νεω, to heap up, Α. ενηησα, Α. Μ. ενηησάμην. νίζω, later νίτττω, (ΝΙΒ-) ίο wash, as the hands or feet, F. νίψω, A. ένιψα, P. P. νίνιμμαι, A. P. ενίφθην. νίσσομαί or νείσσομαι. Epic for ν^ομαι. νΐώει, ningit, to snow, to cover with 57ΐοΐϋ, impersonally, F. νίψει, A. ενίψε. νοεω (ΓΝΟ-), to ihinJc, perceive, regular in the Attic dialect. The Ionic contracts οη into ω ; thus, ένωσα, νενωκα, νενωμαι, ενενώμην. νυστάζω, to feel sleepy, Α. εννστασα, later ενύσταξα. ξ^ω, to scrape, Α. εξεσα, Ρ. Ρ. εξεσμαί. ξνν-νεφεω (ΞΥΝ-ΝΕΦ-) , ίο be clouded, ίο lower, P. ξνν-νενοφα. ξνμεω, ξνράω, (αΥΡ-) ίο shave, regular Mid. ξνρεομαί, commonly ξύρομαί. ζνω, to polish, Α. εζϋσα, Ρ. Ρ• εζνσμαι, Α. Ρ. εζνσθην. 196 INFLECTION OF AVORDS. [§ 133. o. δ^άξομαι (ΟΔΑ^Ε-, ΟΔΑΚ-), to bite, F. ο^αξησομαι, P. P. ω3αγμαί, A.^Sl. ώδαξάμην. υδά^ω, to smart from a bite, Imperf. ω^αξον. ΟΔΥΟΜΑΙ, to be angry, P. οδώδυσ/χαι as Present, A. ω^νσάμην. οζω (ΟΖΕ-, 0Δ-), oleo, to emit a smell, have the smell of , Υ,οζησω, Ionic οζίσω, A. ωζησα, Ionic ω^εσα, 2 P. δδωδα as Present, 2 Piu- perf. 68ώδ€ίν, ώδώδβίΐ^, as Imperfect, οιγω, ο'ίγννμι, to open. Poetic, F. οΐξω, A. ω^α, ωϊζα, Α. P. ot;(^7;i^, 2 A. P. οιγτ;^, 2 P. βωγα as Present intransitive, ίο stand open. Pass, θίγομαι, Imp. οΐγόμην, ωϊγννμην. Prose-writers use αζ^ο/γω. οΙκ€ω, to dwell, regular ; Imperf. ew/ceov, rare. οίκοδομξω, to build a house, regular. — οικοδομηται, P. P. subj. 3 sing, in the Heraclean Tables. οΐμώζω (otjLtoi), to bewail, lam.ent, F. οΐμώζομαι, later οΐμά^ζω, A. ωμω- ζα, P. οϊμωγμαί, Α. P. οΐμώχθην. οΙνοχο€ύ}, to pour out vjine, regular; Imperf. 3 sing. €ωι/ο;(θ6ί, in Ho- mer. οίομαι, οΐμαι, (ΟΙΕ-) Ο ρ in or, to think, 2 sing. oUi, Imperf. ωόμην, ωμην, Γ. οίησομαι, ώηθψ. The connecting voAvel is dropped only in οΐμαι, ωμην. — Epic όΐω, οίομαι, (t) ωίόμην, υίβτο, Α.. ώΐσθην, Α. Μ. ώϊσάμην, οίσάμην. ο'ίχομαι (ΟΙΧΕ-, ΟΙΧΟ-), to be gone, as Perfect, Imperf ωχόμην, as Aorist, sometimes as Pluperfect, F. οΐχησομαι, Ρ ο'ίχωκα, sometimes ωχωκα, Epic ωχηκα, P. P. ωχημαι equivalent to ο'ίχωκα. ΟΙΩ, see φβρω. ολισθαίνω, ολισθάνω, rarely ολισθάζω, (0Α1ΣΘ-, ΟΑΙΣΘΕ-) to slip, A. ωΚίσθησα, Ρ• ώΧίσθηκα, 2 Α. ωΧισθον. οΧλνμι, οΧλνω, (ολβω, 0Λ-) to destroy, lose, F. ολ/σω, ολω, Α. ωΧεσα, Ρ.ϋλώλεκα, 2 Ρ. ολωλα as middle, to have perished, 2 Pluperf. ολώ- Xeiv, rarely ωλώλ€ΐν, as middle, 2 A. (ωλον) opt. δλοίην rare, 2 A M. ωλόμην. — oXeeaKev, Imperf. iterative from ολέω. — 6\όμ€- vos or ov\op€vos, 2 A. M. part, as an adjective, fatal. ομννμι, ομνύω, (OM-, 0M0-) to swear, F. ομόσω, commonly (6μ€ομαι) ομουμαι, Α.. ωμοσα, ΐ*.όμώμοκα, Ρ. Ρ. ο/χώ/χοσ/χαί, 6μό)μοται, Α. Ρ. ωμόθην, ώμόσθην, Α. Μ. ώμοσάμην. — όμννην, Prcs. opt. — όμονν res•, part, from ΟΜΟί2. ομόργννμι (ΟΜΟΡΓ-), to ivipe off, F. ομόρξω, A. ωμορξα, A. P. ώμό{>- χθην as middle. ινινημι (ON A-, ONE-, ONHMI), to benefit, F. ονησω, A. ωνησα, A. P. ώνηθην. Mid ονίναμαι, to derive benefit, F. ονησομαι, A. ωνησάμή'ν , ωνάσάμην, later, 2 A. ώνάμην or ώνημην, οναίμην, ονησο, ονασθαι ΟΓ όνησθαι, 6νημ€νος. — ονονντα, Pres. part, from ON ΕΩ. ονομαι (ON-, ΟΝΟ-, ΟΝΩΜΙ), to insult, think lightly of, find fault ivith, inflected like δ/δο/χαι, F. ονόσομαι, A. ώνοσάμην, Epic ωνάμην, A. P. ώνόσθην as middle. — ουζ^εσ^ε, Pres. 2 sing, for oveaue, from ΟΝΩ. )νοματο-πούω, to form a word expressive of some sound, regular ; P. P, ώνοματοπεποίημαι. § 133.] at^ojialous and defective verbs. 197 οπνίω, to inrrry^ said of the man, Γ. ίίττϋσω without the i, όράω (0Π-, ΕΙΔ-), fo see^ Imperf. βώρωι^, Ionic ώρωρ, copeov or opeoi, F. υψομαί, 2 slug. 6yj/€L, A. ω\/^α rare, P. Ιόψάκα^ rare and Poetic eopiiKLi, also ωφα rare, Phipert'. also ώφβ tz/ rare, P. P. icopapat. ωρ pai, A. P. ώφΘην, rarely ωράθην^ A. M. υψάρην rare, 2 A. eldou, 2 A. M. €ΐ3όμηι/, 2 p. οπωπα, Ionic and Poetic. υρί-γω, opeyvvpL, to Stretch out, Y. ορίζω, A. ωρ^ξα, P. ορώρ6;(α, P. M. 6pu)p€ypaL, A. P. ωρίχθην as middle. ορημι, for όράω, Doric ; subj. 2 sing, opr^at or όρηαι. (jpuvpLy υρνύω, (OP-, Ο POP-) to rouse, F. ορσω, A. ωρσα, 2 A. ωρο- pov, 2 P. ορωρα as Present middle, 2 Plup. υρώρειι/, ώρώρ^ιι/, as Imperfect middle. jNIid. opwpaL, opiopai, to rise, rush, Imperf. ωρνυρην, and ορεόμην, F. ορονμαι, P. upcupepai as Present, 2 A. ωρόμην. — ορσ€ο opacv, A. M. imperat. 2 sing. Epic, implying ώρσ-άμην (ώρσόμηυ). — 2 Α. Μ. 3 sing. ωρτο, for ώρβτο, imperat. ορσο, inf. ορθαί ίοτ ορίσθαι, part, oppepos. — υρωρηται, P.M. subj. 3 sing, from opiopai. opopaL {ορννμί), iin-opopaL, to watch over, Imperf. 3 plur. in-opovro. ορνσσω or υρύττω (ΟΡΥΓ-, OPYX-), to dig, regular; P. όρώρνχα, P. P. wpvypai, υρώρυγμαι, Plup. ορωρνγμην, ωρωρύγμην, ώρύγμην, 2 Α. P. ωρύγηι/, 2 F. P. 6pvyr]aopaL, or δρνχησομαι. οσφραίνοραι, rarely όσφράομαί, (ΟΣΦΡ-) to smell, perceive hy the smell, F. οσφρησομαι, A. P. ωσφράνθην later, A. ώσφρησάμην later, 2 A. ]\i. ώσφρόμηρ {ωσφράμη-ν). ουρ€ω, mingo, Imperf. iovpeov, ovpeov, F. ουρήσω, commonly ουρησο- ρ,αι, Α. ζούρησα, ούρησα, Ρ. €ονρηκα, Α. Ρ. ουρηθην. ουτάω (ΟΥΤΗΜΙ), to wound. Epic, Α. οϋτησα, Α. Ρ. οντηβην, 2 Α. ον- TCLu, οντά, ούτάμεναι Οι ουτάμεν^ 2 Α. Μ. οντάμ^νος as passive. οφείλω. Epic ϋφέλλω, (ΟΦΕΙΛΕ-, ΟΦΕΛ-) to owe, I ought, I must, F. οφζίΚησω, A. ωφ€ί\ησα, P. ωφζίΧηκα, 2 A. ωφ^Χον 0Γ οφζΧον, used only in the expression of a wish, Ο Mo// would to God! — ωφελον or οφ€\ον, in the later writers, has the force of the j^ar^i- cle €Ϊθ€, utinam. οφίΧΚω, to increase, glorify, A. opt. 3 plur. όφΓΚλβιεν ^olic as to form. υφλισκάνω (ΟΦΑΕ-, ΟΦΛ-), to be guilty, incur as a penalty, to owe, F. υφλησω, A. ωφλησα rare, P. ώφΧηκα, 2 A. ωφΧον, οφλζϊν, οφλων. — ώφλ€€, 2 Α. 3 sing. Ionic for ωφλ€. οχβησαί, to feel indignant , Epic, found only in the A. act. ind. 3 plur. ωχθησαν, and part, οχθησας. Π. παίζω, to play, F. παίξω, commonly παίξομαι, παιξουμαι, Α. βπαισα, later €παίξα, P. π^παικα, P.P. πίπαισμαι, πeπaLyμaL, Α. Ρ. επαί- χθην later, τταιω (ΠΑΙΕ-), to strike F. παίσω, Poetic παιησω, Α. επαισα, Ρ. Tre- τταικα, Ρ. Ρ. πίπαισμαι, Α. Ρ. ίπαίσθην, Α. Μ. ίπαισάμην. παλαίω, to wrestle, regular; P. P. πβπάλαισραι, Α. P. επαλαίσ^τ;!'. — παλησ€ί€, Α. opt. 3 sing, for TraXatVete, implying ΠΑΑΑΩ. 198 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133. παλίλ-Χογ^ω J to. repeat ^ regular ; Pluperf. P. 3 sing. eVaXXtXcyr/ro, Ionic. πάλλω (ΠΑΛ-), to brandish, A. ίπηΚα, P. M. π^παλμαυ, 2 A. part, άμ- Ίτ^παλων Epic, 2 A. P. βπάλην. — ττάλτο, 2 Α. Μ. 3 sing, for eVa- X€TO. ΠΑΟΜΑΙ, to acquire, F. πάσομαι, P. π^πάμαί as Present, possess, Plup. βπβπάμηρ, ττ^πάμην, as Imperfect, A. ^πάσάμην, F. Perf. π€πάσομαι. παρα-νομίω, to transgress the law, regular ; Inaperf. παρανομούν, παρη- νόμονν, Perf. Pass, παρηνόμημαι. παρ-οινίω, to act like a drunken person, to insult, Imperf. €παροίν€ον, €παρων€ον, Α. παρώνησα, €παρωνησα, Ρ. παπαρωνηκα, Ρ. Ρ. παπαρω- νημαί, Α. Ρ. απαρωνηθην. πάσχω (ΠΑΘ-, ΠΗΘ-, ΠΕΝΘ-), to suffer, Γ. παίσομαι, Α. €πησα rare, Ρ. πάποσχα rare, 2 Α.απαθον, 2 Ρ. πβπονθα. Epic πεπηθα. — π e π ο - σθζ, 2 Ρ. 2 plur. Epic for παπόνθατέ. — παπάθυΐα, 2 Ρ. part. fem. Epic for π€πηθνϊα. — σννβυ-παπονθώς, 2 P. part., benefited, well treated with, πατίομαι (ΠΑ-), pascor, ^o taste, eat. Poetic, Υ,πασομαί, Ι^.πάπασμαι, Α. €πάσάμην, πάνω, to cause to cease, to stop, repress, regular ; A. P. Ιπαυθην, Ιπαν- σθην, middle, F. P. πανθησομαι as middle, F. Perf. παπαύσομαί as middle, 2 A. P. απάην rare and doubtful. Mid. παύομαι, to cease, stop, παίθω (ΠΙΘ-), to persuade, regular; 2Α.€πίθον (πάπιθον) Poetic, 2 A. Μ. €πιθόμην, 2 Ϋ.πάποιθα as Present middle, to trust. Mid πάΘομαι, fid Ο, to believe, obey. ^^ π ^π aid β i, 2 P. imperat. 2 sing. — απάπιθμαν, 2 Plaperf. 1 pltir. Epic for απαποίθβιμαν. — ΠΙΘΕί2, ΠΕΠΙΘΕΩ, F. πιθησω, will obey, παπιθήσω, will persuade, A. part. πιθησας, trusting. Epic. παινάω, to hunger, regular; later forms, Υ,παινασω, A. επαίνάσα. — παινημαναι, inf. Epic, from ΠΕΙΝΗΜΙ. παίρω, to pierce, regular ; 2 A. P. απάρψ. παλάω (ΠΛΑ-, ΠΛΗΜΙ), to bring near, παλάθω, to approach, Epic, int. (παλάν) παλάαν, P. P. πάπλημαι, A. P. απλάθην as middle, 2 A. M. απλημην, approached. πελω, πίΧομαι, to be, Poetic, Imperf. eVeXoi/, πάΧον, απαλόμην, ττβλό- μην. — Syncopated forms; Imperf. 3 sing, εττλβ, ivas ; 2 sing. cTrXeo, eVXei;, πάΧαν, thou art ; 3 sing. επΧατο, he is; part, απι- πΧόμανος, πε ρι-πΧό μανός, πίμπω, to send, regular ; P. πάπομφα. πανθ^ω, to sorrow, regular. — πανθημαναι, inf. Epic, from ΠΕΝΟΗ- MI. πάρδομαι (ΠΑΡΔΕ-, ΠΕΡΔ-), pedo, F. παρδησομαι, 2 A. απαρδον {απρα^ον), 2 P. πάπορ^α as Present, 2 Plup. απαπόρδαιν as Imperfect. πάρθω, to sack as a city, Poetic, regular ; 2 A. απραθον Epic, 2 A. M. απραθόμην Ά8 passive. Pass. πάρΘομαι, απαρθύμην, both Aoristic. — ■ πάρΘαι, Pres. inf. for πβρβασθαι, Aoristic. πάρνημι (παράω), Poetic for πιπράσκω. χτάσσω or πάττω, later πίπτω, (ΠΕΠ-) coquo, to cook, digest^ A. cttc- y\ra, P. P. πάπαμμαι, A. P. απάφβην. ξ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS, 199 ττίτημαι^ the saine as ττ^τάομαι. τταΊάνννμι^τΐ^τανννω, later ττβτάω, (ΠΕΤ-) pando, to eocfand, F. ττβτα- ίτω τΓβτώ, Α. €7Τ€τασ-α^ Ρ. 7Γ€7Γ€τακα, Ρ. Ρ. π€π€τασμαι, π€πτάμαι, Α. Ρ. €π€τάσθην. π^τάομαι, to β//, Α. €π€τασα, later, Α. Ρ. €7Γ€τάσθηι/. ττίτομαί (π€τάομαί), to J%, F. π^τησομαι, 2 Α. επτόμην, πτοίμην, πτε- σθαι, τΐτόμ^νος. πηγννμί, πηγννω^ later πησσω or πηττω, (ΐΙχ\Γ-, ΠΗΓ-) pang ο, figo, to fix, to freeze, F. πήξω, A. έπηξα, P. P. πεπηγμαι, A. P. eV^- ;(^>;y Cut common, 2 A. P. επάγην the usual aorist passive, 2 P. πε- πηγα as Present middle, to be fixed, to standfast, 2 Plup. εττίπτ}- yeiv as Imperfect middle. — πήγι/ϋτο, Pres. Mid. opt 3 sing. — € πηκτό, 2 A. ]M. for Ιπψ/ετο. — π€ ριπηγε ίς, 2 Α. Ρ. part. πίίζω. to squeeze, regular. -^Trte^eo), πίΕζεόμενοζ πιεζενμενος, eVtefe- ον Επύζευν,• Ionic. πιΚνάω (πβλάω), to bring near. Mid. πί\ναμαι, to approach. πίμπλημι, πιμπΧάω, (ΠΛΑ-) pie ο, to fill, Imperf. επίμπΧην, rarely €πιμπ\αον, F. πλησω, A. επλησα, P. πεπΧηκα, P. P. πεπλησμαί, Plup. P. €π€π\ημην, A. P. επλησθην, 2 A. M. επΧημην. The present and imperfect drop the first μ when, in composition, another μ comes to stand before the first syllable ; as εμ-πίπλημι. The same remark applies also to πίμπρημι; as εμ-πίπρημί. — e/x- πίπληθί, imperat. 2 sing. — εμ-πιπλείς, Pres. part. πίμπρημι, πιμπράω, rarely πρηθω, (ΠΡΑ-) to burri, F. πρησω, A. επρησα, rarely έ'ττρβσα, ¥.πεπρηκα, Ρ.Ρ.πεπρημαί, πεπρησμαι, Α. Ρ, επρησθην, F. Perf. πεπρησομαι. — νπο-πίμπρτ]σί, Pies. subj. 3 sing, for πιμπρη. πιννσκω, later πιννσσω, (ΠΙΝΥ-, ΠΝΥ-) ίο render intelligent, to advise, P. P. πεπνϋμαι as Present, to be wise, discreet, imperat. πεπννσο, mi. πεπννσθαί, part, πεπννμενος, Pluperf. επεπννμην as Imperfect, A. P. επίννθην later. — πιννμενη, part. fem. from ΠΙΝΥΙΜΙ. πίνω (ΠΙ-, ΠΙΜΙ, ΠΟ-), poto, bibo, to drink, Υ.π'ιομαι (Γ, t), later πιονμαι, P. πεπωκα, P. P. πεπομαι, A. P. επόθην, 2 A. επιον, πιω, πίοίμι, πϊε commonly πίθι, πιεϊν, πιων. — πωθι, or πω, 2 Α. im- perat. from ΠΩΜΙ. — εμ-πίσεο, Α. Μ. imperat. 2 sing, later Epic. — κατα-π ίε L, for κατα-πίνει. πιπίσκω (ΠΙ-), to give to drink, F. πίσω, A. εν-επισα, A. P. επίσθην, πίττράσκω, περάω, (ΠΡΑ-) to sell, F. περάσω, περώ, Epic, A. επερασα (σσ), Epic, later επρασα, P. πεπράκα, P. P. πεπραμαι, A. P. επρά- 6ην, F. Perf πεπράσομαί the usual future passive. In the Aorist and Future, Attic writers use άπεδόμην, άπο^ώσομαι. πίπτω (ΠΕΤ-, ΠΤΕ-, ΠΤΟ-), cad ο, to fall, F. πεσονμαι, \omc πεσεο- μαι, Α. έπεσα, commonly επεσον, πέσω, πεσαιμι commonly πίσοιμι, πεσείν, πεσων, Ρ. πεπτωκα, ΤΆΐΟ^^επτηκα, 2 Α. επετον Doric, 2 Ρ. part, πεπτηως, -via, -ώτος or -ότος, also πεπτεως, -ώτος, Attic ttc- πτώς 'ώτος, contracted, Α. Μ. επεσάμην later. πίτνάω, πίτνημι, {πετάω) for πετάννυμι, to expand. Epic. π'ιτνω (ΠΕΤ-), for πίπτω, to fall, Poetic, Imperf. επιτνον as Aorist πιφανσκω (φάσκω, ΦΑ Υ-, ΦΑ-), to say, tell, to shoiv. Mid. πιφάσκο- μαι, πιφαύσκομαί. 200 INFLECTION OF \VORDS. [^ 133. πλάζω (ΠΑΑΓ-, ΠΑΑΓΓ-), ίο cause to loander. Poetic, A. €πΚαγξα, A. P. Ιπλάγχθην a? middle, F. M. πλάγξομαι, A. M. €π\α•γξάμ,ην. Mid. πλάζομαι, to wander. πλ€κω, to knit, regular ; P. πβπλοχα, 2 A. P. €7ΐ\άκην. ττλβω (ΠΑΕΥ-), to sail, F. πλβυσω, commonly πλβΰσο/χαι, πλ^υσουμαι., Α. εττλβυσα, P. τΓεττλβυκα, P. P. πίπΧ^νσμαι, Α. P. βπΧβνσθην. πληθω (ΠΑΑ-), to be full, 2 Ϋ.π^πληθα as Present, 2 Plup. inenXr}- θ€ΐν as Imperfect. < ττΚησσω or πλήττω (ΠΑΑΓ-, ΠΑΗΓ-), to smite, F. ττληξω, A. έπληξα, P. P. π€πληγμαί, A. P. βπληχθην rare, F. Perf, π^πλήξομαι, 2 A. πεπλη-γον Epic, 2 A. M. πεπληγόμην, 2 A. Pass, επληγην, in compo- sition generall}?• επλάγην, κατ-€πλάγην, 2 P. πεπληγα, sometimes as passive. Mid. aho πληγννμαί. — πβ πλη-γον, επβπληγον, 2F\\i' perf. with the ending and force of the Imperfect. (§ 118, 1, d ) πλννω, to ivash as clothes, F. πλυνώ, A. έπλυνα, P. P. πύπλνμαι, A P, €πλνθην. πλώω (ΠΑΩΜΙ), Ionic for πλ/ω, regular ; 2 A. ίπλων, part, επι-πλως, πνίω (ΠΝΈΥ-), to blow, F. πνενσω, commonly πνενσομαι, πνενσουμαι., Α. €πν€νσα, P. πεπνενκα, Α. Ρ Επνεύσθην. ΤΓοθβω, to desire, miss, F. ποθήσω, ποθβσομαι, Α. ^πόθησα, απόθεσα, Ρ. πεπόθηκα. — ΠΟΘΗΜΙ, inf. ποθημεναι. Epic. ποΐ€ω or πο€ω, to make, do, regular ; F. Perf. πεποιησομαι. ποίνάομαι, to punish, F. ποινάσομαί. πον€ω, to labor, F. πονησω, πονίσω, Α. έπόνησα, έπόνεσα, Ρ. π^πόνηκα, Ρ. Ρ. πεπόνημαι, Α. Ρ. €πονηθην. Π0Ρί2 (ΠΡΟ-, ΠΑΡ-), ^0 ^ίϋβ, β//^/, Poetic, Α. επρωσα rare, 2 Α. βττο ρον, inf. πεπορείν οι πεπαρύν, Ρ. Ρ. 3 sing, πίπρωται, it is fated ^ πεπρωμένος, fated, Pluperf. P. επίπρωτο, it was fated. πράσσω {HYKV-), to do, regular; F. Perf. πβττρά^ο/χαι, 2 F. πεπρα ya, as intransitive, to have done loell or ill, ΠΡΙΑΜΑΙ, to buy, 2 A. επριάμψ ; the rest is borrowed from ωνεομαι. προνσελεω, to insult, 1 plur. προυσελουμεν, part, προνσελονμενος» προ-χειρίζομαί, to undertake, regular ; A. επροχείρίΡ,άμην, Doric. πρωγγνεύω {προ-βγγυος) , to give security, P. πεπρο^γγνευκα, Doric. πτάρνυμαι (ΠΤΑΡ-), to' sneeze, 2 Α.επταρον, 2 A. P. part, πταρείς. πτήσσω (ΠΤΑΚ-, ΠΤΗΚ-, ΠΤΑ-, ΠΊΉΜΙ), to crouch from fear, F. πτηξω, A. επτηξα, P. επτηχα, 2 A. επτακορ, also (επτην) 3 dual πτητην, 2 P. part, πεπτηοίς, -νΐα, -ώτος. πτύρομαι, to be frighten id, regular ; 2 A. P. επτνρην, πτύσσω (ΠΤΥΓ-), to fold, regular ; 2 A. P. επτύγην. πνκάζω, to cover up, regular. — πεπνκα^μει/ος, P. P. part. πννθάνομαι, Poetic πβύθομαι, rarely πύθομαι, to inqinre, F. πενσομαι, πενσουμαι, P. πίπυσμαι, 2 Α. βπυθόμην. πυρβσσω, πυρεττω, to have a fever, F. πυρ^ξω, Α. επύρεσα, ζπνρεξα. Ρ. ραίνω (PAN-, ΡΑΔ-), to sprinkle, F. ράνω, Α. ερράνα. Epic ερρασα, Ρ. Ϋ.ερρασμαι,ξρραμμαι {}.), Α. Ρ. ερράνθην. — ερράδαται, εορά- ^ δατο, Ρ. and Plup. P. 3 plur. ραίω, to rend, regular ; A. P. ερραίσθην. § 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 201 ραπίζω, to strike ivith a rod^ regular. — ρ^ράπισμαι, P. P. Poetic. ράπτω (ΡΑΦ-), to sew, regular ; 2 A. P. ερράφην. — εραπτον, Imperf. Poetic. ρ€ζω (ΡΕΓ-), for βρδο), to do, Poetic, F. ββξω, A. ερρβξα, epe^a, A. Ρ part. ρ€χθ€ίς. ^- ρβω (PEY-, PYE-, PY-), to flow, Γ. ρ€ύσω, commonly βζύσομαι, A. eppevcra, P. €ρρύηκα, 2 A. P. Ιρρνψ, 2 F. P. ρνησομαι as active. — ρ€ονμζνος^ part. Ionic for ρ€6μ€νος. ΡΕΩ, to say, Perf. ειρτ^κα, P. P. Λρημαί, A. P. €ρρηθψ, ρηθω, ρηθ^ίην^ ρηθηναι, ρηθ^Ις, (sometimes βρρεθην, lonic ζίρηθην, είρίθην, Only IQ the indicative,) F. Perf. άρησοίχαι as Future passive. See also ΕΙ- ΠΩ, ρηγννμί, ρη-γννω, Poetic ρησσω, (ΡΑΓ-, ΡΗΓ-, ΡΩΓ-) frango, to hreak^ F. ρηξω, A^. ερρηξα, P. P. βρρηγμαι, A. P. €ρρηχθην, 2 A. P. €/)- ρά-γην, 2 P. Ερρηγα, ερρωγα, as passiΛ'e. — ευ pay η (that is, εΥραγη), 2 Α.. for βρράγη. ριγεω (ΡΙΓ-), to shudder, Poetic, F. ριγήσω, A. ερρίγησα, 2 P. eppFya as Present, 2 Pluperf. ippTyeiv as Imperf. — ipplyovri, 2 P. part, dat. sing. Doric. (§ 118, 1, d.) ρίγόω, frigeo, rigeo, ί'ο shiver, regular. — ριγών, inf. forptyoCi/, Dor- ic, found also in Attic Poetry. — ρίγω, subj. 3 sing, regularly con- tracted from piyoT]. — ΡΙΓΑΩ, opt. 3 sing, βιγωη ; part, ρίγωσα. ρίπτω, ριπτεω, (ΡΙΦ-) to cast, F. ρί-φ-ω, A. eppiyfra, Poetic εριψα, P. ερριφα, P. P. ερριμμαι, A. P. ερρίφθην, 2 A. P. ερρίφην. Poetic epi- φην. — ρ βριφ^α ι, P. P. inf. Poetic. ρνομαι, to rescue,Y. ρνσομαι, A. Ιρρϋσάμψ, ρνσάμην. — PYMI, inf. ρνσθαι; Imperf. ερρϋτο as Aorist, 3 plur. ρύατο Epic. ρνπόω, to make dirty, regular. — ρερνπωμίνα, P. P. part, in Homer. ρωνννμι, ρωνννω, (P0-) to Strengthen, A. ερρωσα, P. M. ερρωμαι as Present, A. P. ερρωσθψ. Σ. σαίρω (ΣΑΡ-) ; different from σαιρω, to sweep ; 2 P. σίσηρα as Present, to grin. — σεσαρνϊα, 2 P. part. fern. Epic for σεσηρνϊα. σαλπίζω (ΣΑΛΠΙΓΓ-), to sound a trumpet, A. εσάλπιγξα, εσάλπισα, P. P. σεσάλπισμαι. σαόω (σάω), to save. Epic, regular. — σάω, imperat. 2 sing, contract- ed from σάοΓ ; Imperf. 3 sing, σάω, ίσάω, from σάο€, €σάο€. σάω, to sift, commonly σήθω, Α. εσησα, P. P. σεσημαι, σεσησμαι. σβίνννμι, σβενννω, (ΣΒΕ-, ΣΒΗΜΙ) to extinguish, F. σβίσω, Α. εσβε- σα, Ρ. εσβηκα as middle, P. P. εσββσμαι, Α. P. έσβεσθην, F. Μ. σβήσομαι, 2 Α. εσβην, σβηναι, άπο-σβείς, as middle. σεβάσσατο, he forbore, a defective A. M. σείω, to shake, regular; P. P. σεσεισμαι, A. P. εσείσθην. — εσσεί- 01/ TO, Imperf. P. 3 plur. Epic. — άνα-σσείασκε, Imperf. itera- tive. Epic. ΣΕΥΩ (ΣΥ-, ΣΥΜΙ), to move, drive away. Poetic, A. εσσενα, σευα, Α. P. εσνθην, εσσύθην, as middle, P. Μ. ίσσνμαι, εσσνμενος, Α. Μ, σενάμην, 2 Α. Μ. εσσνμην, 2 Α. Ρ. άπ-εσσονα 0). Mid. σενομαι, to pursue, part. σνμενο5. — σενται, Pres. 3 sing, for σενεται, — υ ύ- Θΐ) 2 Α. imperat. 2 sing. «* 202 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133. σηπω (SAII-), to rof, regular ; 2 P. σ^σηπα as intransitive, ίο rot, 2 A. P. €σάπην. — σαπηυ, 2 Α. P. subj. 3 sing. Epic. σιγάω, to be silent, regular ; F. Perf. σ^σιγησομαι. τκάπτω (ΣΚΑΦ-), to dig, regular ; 2 A. P. €σκάφην. ί σκζ^άνννμι, <Τκ€^ανννω, (ΣΚΕΔΑ-) to scatter, Υ. σ/^εδασω σκβδώ, Α. €σκ€^άσα, Ρ. Ρ. Εσκ^^ασμαι, Α. Ρ. €σκ€^άσθην. — dLa-aKcdavvV" σι, 3ία-σκ€δάνννταί, subj. 3 sing. ΣΚΕΛΛί2 (ΣΚΕΛ-, ΣΚΑΛ-, ΣΚΛΑ-, ΣΚΑΗΜΙ), to dry up, A, €σκηλα, P. €σκληκα as middle, F. M. σκΚησομαι, σκ€\ονμαι, 2 Α. €σκλην, σκλαιην, σκΚψαι, as middle. Mid. σκίΧΚομαι, to wittier, σκάπτομαι, commonly σκοπ^ω, σκοπονμαι, specio, to consider, F. σκί- ψομαί, P. €σκ€μμαι, Α. Εσκίφβην, €σκ€ψάμην, F. Perf. €σΚ6ψομαί passively. σκ'ώνημι, for σκ€^άνννμι, Α. Ρ. ^σκώνάσθην» σμύχω, to burn, regular ; 2 Α. P. εσμνγην 0). σόομαι σονμαι, equivalent to σβυομαι, imperat. σου. — άπο-σουν, Pres. inf. act. σπάω, to draw, F. σπάσω, Α. έσπασα, P. εσπάκα, P. P. βσπασμαι^ Α. P. €σπάσθην. σπείρω, to sow, regular ; 2 Α. P. €σπάρην. ■ στΓ^νδω, to offer a libation, F. σπ^ίσω, A. '4σπ€ΐσα, P. €σπ€ίκα, P. P. €σπ€ίσμαί, A. P. ^σπ^ίσθην, regular.. στζίβω (ΣΤΙΒΕ-), to tread, press down, A. eVret^-a, P. P. €στίβημαί. ζ^στβλλω (ΣΤΕΛ-), to send, F. στ^λώ, A. €στ€ΐλα, P. €στάλκα, P. P. βσταλμαί, A. P. ζσταΚθην rare, 2 A. P. €στά\ην. — €στα\ά^ατο, Plup. Μ. 3 plur. Ionic, from ΣΤΑΑΑΔΩ. — άφ-€στά\καμ€ν,Ϋ. 1 plur. for άπ-^στάΧκαμ^ν. στενάζω, to sigh, F. στ€νάξω, A. ^στίναξα. στ€ργω, to be fond of, regular ; 2 P. εστοργα. στ€ρ€ω, στ€ρίσκω, (ΣΊΈΡ-) to deprive, F. στ€ρησω, A. €στ€ρησα, Epic €στ€ρ€σα, P. €στ€ρηκα, P. P. (στβρημαι, A. Ρ €στ€ρηθην, F. Μ. στ€ρησομαι, 2 Α. P. part. στ€ρ€ίς. Mid. also στίρομαι. στ€νταί, pi στ€υνταί, to pledge 07ie^s self, th'eaten, Poetic, Imperf. στ€ντο, defective. στορ^ννυμι, στόρννμι, (ΣΤΟΡ-) stern Ο, to strew, F. στορίσω στορώ, Α. €στόρ€σα, Α. Ρ. βστορίσθην. στρζφω, to turn, F. στρέψω, Α. ξστρ^ψα, Ρ. Ζστροφα, Ρ. Ρ. €στραμ- μαι, Α. Ρ. ΙστρΙφθην, Ionic βστράφθην, 2 Α. Ρ. ^στράφψ the usual aorist passive. στρώνννμι, στρωννυω, (ΣΤΟΡ-, ΣΤΡΟ-) the same as στορ^νννμι, F. στρώσω, Α. έστρωσα, Ρ. Ρ. ^στρωμαι. στνγίω (ΣΤΥΓ-), to shudder at, Κ. ζστνγησα, €στνξα, Ρ. (στύγηκα, Ρ. Ρ. €στνγημαι, βστυγμαί, Α. Ρ. ^στνγηβην, 2 Α. εστυγον, F. Μ. στν Ύησομαι as passive. σνν-ίημι, to understand, Α. εσννηκα, for σννηκα, rare. συρίσσω, σνρ'ιζω, to hiss, rvhistlc, F. συρίξομαι, Α. εσυριξα, Ισυρισα, σ;(άω, σ;(ά^ω, /ο 67// open, let loose, F. σ;^άσω, Α. εσχάσα, εσχασα, Α. Μ. €σχασάμην, to leave off\ give up, abandon. τώ^ω, to save, regular , A. P. εσωθην i'rom συω. § 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 203 ΤΑΓί2, ΤΑί2, to talie. Epic, imperat. (rae) τη, Doric {ra^Tc) τητ€, 2 A. part. τ€ταγών^ Epic. ΤΑΛΑΩ, ΓΑΑΩ, TAHMI, to endure, venture, Poetic, F. ταλάσω rare, Γ . Μ. τλησομαι, Α. €τάλάσα, Ρ. τ€τληκα, Α. ]Μ. ^ταΚασάμην (σσ), 2 Ρ. iTetkaa), τετλαίην, τ^τΚαθι, τ€τ\άναι, Τ€τ\ηώς, 2 Α. ετΧην^ τλώ, τΚαίην, τληθί, τΚψαι, τΚάς. — rerXa, 2 Ρ. imperat. 3 sing•, for re- τΧαθι. τανΰω, Ionic ταννυω, to stretch, F. τανυσω [ν), Epic ται/ιϋω, Α. eVai/i- σα, P. P. τζτάννσμαι, Α. P. €ταννσθην as middle, F. Perf. reravv- σομαι. — TANYMI, Pres. P. 3 sing, τάνυται. τάσσω (ΤΑΓ-), to arrange, regular ; F. Perf. τ€τάξομαι, 2 A. P. €τά•γην. T6iVu) (TEN-, TA-), ten do, to stretch, F. τ€ΐ/ώ, A. eVeii^a, P. reVa/ca, P. P. τεταμαι, A. P. €τάθην. Τ€φ(ύ, to ajjiict, F. τζρσω. τβλβω, to finish, pay, F. τβλβσω τελεω τελώ, Α. ereXcaa, P. rereXe/ca, P. P. τ€Τζ\£σμαι, A. P. ζτίΚζσθην, τέμνω, Ionic τάμνω, (re /χω, TMA-) ^o α<ί, F. τβ/χώ, P. Τ€τμηκα, P. P. τέτμημαι, A. P. Ετμηθην, F. Perf τ€τμησομαί, 2 A. €Τ€μον, rarely €ταμον, 2 A. Mid. €Τ€μόμην, rarely €ταμόμην, 2 P. part, τετμηώς as passive. — €κ-τ€τμησθον, P. P. subj. 3 dual. TEMi2, to find, 2 A. τ^τμον, €Τ€τμον, Epic. τ€ρπω, to amuse, F. τ€ρψω, A. €T€pyj/a, A. P. €Τ€ρφθην, Epic erap- φι^^ν, as middle, 2 A. P. ετάρπην as middle. Epic, 2 A. M. €ταρπό- μην (τ€ταρπόμην) . — τραπείομεν, 2 Α. Ρ. subj. 1 plur. Epic for ταρπωμεν. τίρσομαι, to become dry, to be drying, Ionic, A. €Τ€ρσα, A. M. ετερσά- μην, 2 Α. P. €Τ€ρσην. ΤΕΥΧΕΩ, P. Μ. τ€Τ€νχησθαί, to arm one's self. τ€ύχω (ΤΥΧ-), to prepare, make, F. τεύξω, A. €Τ€νξα, P. τίτευχα as pas- sive, P. P. Τ€τυγμαί, A. P. €τνχβην, lonic €Τ€νχθην, F. Perf. tctcv- ξομαι. The forms τβτνγμαι, €τύχθην are found intransitive, nearly equi\'^alent to €Ϊμί, τυγχάνω, %τνχον. — τ€Τ€νχ€τον, 2 Phioerf. 3 dual with the ending and force of the Imperfect? (§ 118, 1, d.^ τη, see ΤΑΓΩ. τη.κω (TAK-), to melt, regular; 2 A. P. €τάκην, 2 P. τίτηκα as mid- dle, to melt away. ΤΙΕΩ, to sadden, vex, P. Ϋ.τζτίημαί, τ€τιη μένος, 2 P. part, τετιηώς as passive, saddened, dejected. τιθζω (θίω), to put, place, Imperf. ετίθονν, Y.*M, τιθησομαι. — ert- θεα, Ionic for ετίθεον. τίθημι {τίθεω, θεω], to put, place, F. θησω, A. εθηκαί^τλγ in the indic- ative, Ϋ. τεθεικα,Ώ^ίήΟΓΤ'εβεκα, F.P. τεθειμαί, Ώοήο τεθεμαι, A. P. ετίθην, 2 Α. εθην, 6ω, βείην, βίς, θεΐναι, θείς. Μλά. τίθεμαι, βησο- μαι, Ρ. τεβειμαι, Α. εθηκάμην, 2 Α. εβεμην, θωμαί, θείμην, [θεσο - βεο] θον, θεσθαι, θεμενοί. ^ The singular εβηκα, εθηκας, εθηκε, and the 3 piiir. εθηκαν, are, with good writers, much more common than the remaining persons. On the other hand, the singular of the 2 A. εθην is not used in the indicative, at least by good writers. Of the 204 INFLECTION OF ΛΥΟΕΡΒ. [§ 133. aorist middle only the indicatiTe ζβηκάμην and the participle θηκάμζ- ί,υς are found. — τίθητι, Pres. 3 sing. Doric for τίθησι. !^ τίκτω (ΊΈΚ-), to hrins; forth, heget, Γ. τβ^ω, commonly τζξομαι, A. ere- ξα rare, P. P. τ€Τ€γμαί, τβτογμαι, both later, A. P. €Τίχθην, 2 A. €T€KOV, 2 A. M. €Τ€κόμηΐ', 2 r. τ€Τθκα, F. M. ΤΕΚονμαι. τΓ/χάω, /ο honor ^ regular; F. Perf. τετιμησομαι- τίνω {τίω), to pay, expiate, otojie for, F. τΓσω, A. ετΤσα, P. τ€Τίκα, P. P. τ€τισμαί, A. P. Ιτίσθην. — Mid. also τίνυμαι or τίνννμαι τιτράω, τίτρημί, (TPA-) terebro, to bore, A. ^τρησα, P. ν.τίτρημαι, A. P. €τρηθην. :' τίτρώσκω (TOP-, TPO-. ΤΡί2ΜΙ), to wound, F. τρώσω, A. έτρωσα, P. P. τίτρωμαι, A. P. Ιτρωθην, 2 A. TtTooov, also €ξ-€τρων. — τίτορ- θαι, P. P. inf. τίτυσκομαι, rarely τίτίχτκω, (ΤΥΧ-, τύκω) to prepare, take aim at, Epic, 2 A. τβτυκον, 2 A. M. ΤΕτνκόμην. τίω, to honor, regular ; 2 P. τβτια, rare. τμηγω, τμησσω, tO CUt, F. τμηξω, A. €τμηζα, 2 A. ετμαγον, 2 A. P. ^τμάγην, €τμηγην. τορ^ω (TOP-), ^0 pierce, F. τορησω, A. ζτόρησα, 2 A. cTopov. — tcto- ρήσω, from ΤΕΤΟΡΕΩ. (ti, τρ€7Γω, Ionic τράττω, ^y /Mrrt, F. τρβψω, A. €Tp€\j/a, Ionic (τραψα, P. Τ€τροφα, rarely τίτραφα, P. P. Τ€τραμμαι, A. P. ζτρβφθην, Ionic €τράφθην, F. Perf. τ€τράψομαί, 2 A. βτραττον, 2 A. P. ετράπην usu- ally as middle, 2 A. M. βτραπόμην. : τρίφω, rare τράφω, (ΘΡΕΦ-) ίο nourish^ F. θρί^ω, Α. ζθρεψα, P. Te- τροφα, also €τροφα, P. P. τίθραμμαι, Α. P. ^θρίφθην rare, 2 Α. €τραφον as passive, 2 Α. P. €τράφην.• τρίχω, Doric τράχω, (ΘΡΕΧ-, ΔΡΕΜ-, ΔΡΑΜΕ-) ίο r?/n, F. θρίξομαι commonly ^ραμονμαι, rarely θ ρίξω, ^ραμώ, δράμομαι, Α. eSpe^a rare, P. δεδράρ-τ^κα, rarely ύττο-δεδρορτ^κε, P.P. δζδράμημαί, 2 Α. edpapov, 2 P. debpopa, ava-d^dpopa, Epic. τρεω, ίο tremble, A. cTpeaa. τρίβω, to rub, regular ; 2 A. P. €τρίβην, F. M. σνν-τριβύται rare. τρί'^ο (ΤΡΙΓ-), ίο r//?r/>, screech, 2 P. Tirplya as Present, 2 Plup. eVe- TpFyeti/ as Imperfect. 7;ρΰχω ίΤΡΥΧΟ-), ίο i^ear owi, afflict, F. τρύξω, P. P. τ€τρνχωμαι. Pass. τρυ;(όοραι. τρώγύ) (ΤΡΑΓ-), to eat, gnaiv, F. τρωξομαι, Α.^τρωξα, P. P. τετρω- γμαί, 2 Α. €Tpayov. ;< τυγχάι/ω (τεύχω, ΤΥΧΕ-, ΤΥΧ-), ίο obtain, hit, happen, F. τ€υξομαί, Α. ατύχησα Epic, P. τ€Τ€νχα, commonly τ€τνχηκα, Pluperf. €Τ€Τ€νχ€α Ionic, happened, 2 Α. eru;)(oy. In the sense ίο happen, chance, hap- pen to be, it has τυγ;^άΐ'ω, €τνγχανον, €τνχησα, €Τ€Τ€νχ€α, € τυχόν. — τοσσαι (τ?5;(-σαΐ;, for τυ^αι, Α. inf found only in 6π-€τοσσ6 {€π€τυχ€), and part, επι-τόσσαι? ^olic. • τύπτω (ΤΥΠΤΕ-, ΤΥΠ-), ίο 5inAe, F. τυ\/τω, commonly τυπτ?;σω, Α. €TV\j/a, Ρ. Ρ• τίτνμμαι, τ^τνπτημαι, Α. Ρ. βτντττηθην rare, 2 Α. cto»- 7Γ01/ {τ€τνπον) rare, 2 Α. Ρ. €τυπην. Γΰφω ιθΥΦ-), ίο raise smoke, burn, Α. ^θν^α Tdie, P. P. τίθνμμαι^ 2 Α. P. €τνφην, "' § 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 205 Y. νλάσκω, υλαω, to harli as a dog, A. νλαξα later. ντΓ-ίσχνβομαι, Poetic and Ionic νπ-ίσχομαι, to pi^oniise, F. νποσχησομαι, P. νπβσχημαι, A. νπ€σχίθην rare, 2 A. M. νττεσ-χόμην. υφαίνω (ύφάω, ΎΦΑΝ-) , ^0 iceave, regular; F. V. νφασ-μαί, rarely νφυφαατμαί. 'νω (ν), ίο rain, regular ; P. P. νσ-μαι, Α. P. νσβην. Φ. ΦΑΓΩ, see ζσθίω. φαίνω {φάω, ΦΑΧ-) , to show, shine, Υ. φάνω, Α. βφηνα, later βφάι/α, Ρ. πβφαγκα, Ρ. Ρ. ττζφασμαι. Α. Ρ. €φάν6ην, 2 Α. ζφανον, 2 Α.εφα- νόμην, 2 Α. Ρ. εφάνην as middle, 2 P. ττίφηνα as middle. — φαάν- θην, ζφαάνθην, Α. Ρ. Epic for ςφάνθην. φάσκω, see φημΊ•> τηφάσκω. φάω, to shine, Epic, F. Perf. ττΕφησομαι as middle. ΦΑί2, to kill, see ΦΕΧΩ. φύδομαι (ΦΙΔ-), ^0 spare, F. φ€ίσομαί, A. βφζίσάμην, 2 A. ττβφίδο- ^r;i/ Epic. — ΠΕΦΙΔΕΩ, F. ττζφώησομαί, Epic. ΦΕΝΩ, ΦΑΩ, /ο A-z//, Epic, P. P. πίφάται, πβφανταί, inf. π€φάσθaίy F. ^ Perf. π€φησομαί, 2 A. ττ^φνον or ίπ^φνον, τϊ^φνω, τν^φν^μ^ν, π€- φνων (not 7Γ€φνών). φ€ρβω, to feed, 2 P. π^φορβα.. φέρω (ΟΙ-, ΕΝΕΚ-, ΕΝΕΓΚ-, ΕΝΕΙΚ-) , fero, porto, ^ο ^πη^, F. ot- σω, Α. (ωσα), imperat, olae, inf. οισείΐ/, P. ενηνοχα, P. P. evrjve- γμαί, rarely οίσμαι, Α. P. ηνεχθην, F. P. €ν6χθησομαί, οίσθησομαι, 2 Α. ήν€γκον or ήν€γκα. Ionic forms, Α. ήν€ΐκα. Ρ. Ρ. ενην^ιγμαί, Α. Ρ. ηνείχθην. — φβρτε, imperat. 2 plur. for φέρετε. — φ€ρμ€ν, inf. Epic for φερ^μεν. — φ€ρη(η, 3 sing. Epic, from ΦΕΡΗΜΙ. φζνγω (ΦΥΓ-, Φ3ί^), fugio, ίο flee, F. φεύξομαι, φενξονμαί, P. Μ. part. π€φνγμ€νος, Α. Ι\Ι. εφευξάμην rare, 2 Α. εφ^/ον, 2 Ρ. ττ^φεν- ya, jEpic part. τΓβφυ^ότβί. — πεφυγγων, 2 Ρ. part. ..Frolic, from ΦΥίΤΩ. φημί, φάσκω, (ΦΑ-) fari, to say, φώ, φαίην, φάθι οτ φαθί, φάναι, φάς, Imperf εφην, εφάμην, usually as xAorist, F. φήσω, Α. εφησα, Ρ. Ρ. 7Γ€φαμαι, part, ττεφασ/χ^ζ^ο?. φβάνω (ΦΘΑ-, ΦΘΗΜΙ), to anticipate, F. φθάσω, commonly φθησομαι, Α. ζφθάσα, Ρ. εφθάκα, 2 Α. εφβην, φθώ, φθαίην, φθηναί, φθάς, 2 Α. Ι\Ι. part, φθάμενος as acti'v'e. — τταρα-φθαίησ l, 2 Α. opt. Epic for παραφθαίη. ([θείρω (ΦΘΕΡ-), to corrupt, F. φθερώ. Epic φθερσω, F. Μ. φβερον- μαι, φθαρονμαι, Α. έφθειρα, F. εφθαρκα, V. F . εφθαρμαι, 2 Α. Ρ. εφθάρην, 2 Ρ. εφθορα, sometimes as intransitiye or middle. — εφθορθαί, P. P. inf. ^iolic for εφθάρθαί. φθίνω {φθίω, ΦΘΙΝΕ-, ΦΘΠΙΙ) , to he consumed, Α. εφθίνησα rare, P. κατ-εφθίνηκα rare, 2 Α. (εφθϊν). ini. φ ΘΙναί, part, φθίσα rare. — ΦΘΙΘΩ, Imperf. άττ-εφθιθον as Aorist. φθΙω (ΦΘΙΜΙ), to consume, waste, F. φθίσω φθιω, Α. εφθίσα, P.P. εφθ'ίμαί, Plup. εφθίμην, Α. Ρ. εφβίθην, 2 Α. Μ. εφθίμψ, φθίωμΟί, φθίμην φθίτο, φθίσθω, φθίσθαι^ φθίμενος. 206 INFLECTION OF Λν0ΕΏ3. [§ VoS. φθον€ω, to envy^ regular. — βφ^οι/βσα, A. later for αφθόνησα, φιλ/ω, to love^ regular ; F. Perf. ττίφιΚησομαι. — Epic A. M. €φΤΚά- μην, φΐλωμαί^ φίλαί {φΐλαι) , φϊ\άμ€νος, from ΦΙΛΩ. — φίΧημς-^ ναι, inf. Epic from ΦΙΛΗΜΙ. ΦΑΑΖί2 (ΦΛΑΔ-), to burst asunder, P. P. πΐφλασμαι, 2 A. ^φλα^ον, φ\€γω, to hum, regular ; 2 A. P. €φλ€γην. φλνω, π€ρι-φ\νω, (ΦΑΕΥ-) to scorch, P. Ϋ , π^ρι-π^φΧ^νσμαι. φράζω (ΦΡΑΔ-), to tell, explain, regular; 2 A. π^φρα^ον, €π€φραΒον, Epic. — προ-πβφρα^μ^νος, P. P. part, for ιτρο-π^φρασμίνος, — φρά^€ν, Imperf. 3 sing, for εφραζβν. φρΈω, used in composition with €κ, eh, δια, regular. — ΦΡΗΜΙ, 2 A. {€φρην(, in[iperat. φρ^ς, inf. φρηναι. φρύγω, frig ο, to parch, regular ; 2 A. P. βφρνγην. φυλάσσω (ΦΥΑΑΚ-), to watch, regular; 2 P. ττβφυλακα. — προ-φύ- λαχθ€, Pres. imperat. 2 plur. for προφνλάσσ€Τ€. φϋρω, to knead, mix, A. €φνρσα, P. P. ττ^φνρμαι, A. ζφνρθην, F. Perf. τΓζφνρσομαι, 2 A. P. €φύρην.— ΦΥΡΑΩ, φνράσω, &c., regular. φυω (ΦΥΜΙ), to produce, Υ.φϋσω, A. εφνσα, P. πεφϋκα as Present middle, to be, Plup. €π€φνκ€ίν as Imperfect middle, 2 P. π€φνα as Present middle, 2 A. €φνν, φυω, φνην, φνναι, φυς, as Present mid- dle, fore, to be, 2 A. P. βφνην. — encipvKop, Plup. with the end- ing and force of the Imperfect. (^ 118, 1, d.) X. χάζω, άνα-χάζω, χάζομαι, (ΧΑΔ-, ΚΕΚΑΔΕ-) cedo, to yield, F. χάσο- μαι, Κ€κ.α3ησω causative, Α. κ€κα3ησαί rare, Α. Μ. εχασάμην, 2 Α. κεκαΒον causative, 2 Α. Μ. κεκαδόμην, 2 Pluperf εκεκηδειν rare. χαίνω, see χάσκω. χαίρω (ΧΑΙΡΕ-, ΧΑΡΕ-, ΧΑΡ-), to rejoice, F. χαιρησο^, Α. εχαίρησα, Ρ. κεχάρηκα as Present, 2 Α. Ρ. €χάρην as active, F. Perf. κεχαρψ σω, κεχαρησομαί, as future to κεχάρηκα, P. Μ. κεχάρημαι, κίχαρμαι, as Present, Poetic, Α. Μ. εχηράμψ not xAttic, 2 P. κεχαρηώς as Pres- ent, Epic, 2 A.M. εχαρόμην (κεχαρόμην) , χαλάω, to loosen, F. χαλάσω, A. εχάλάσα, P. κεχάλακα, P. P. Κ€χά- λασμαι, Α. P. εχαλάσθην. χανδάνω (ΧΑΔ-, ΧΑΝΔ-, ΧΕΝΔ-), to contain, grasp, hold, Έ.χείσομαι, 2 Α. exabov, 2 P. κίχανδα as Present. χάσκω, later χαίνω, (ΧΑ-, XAN-) hi ο, to gape, F. χανονμαι, A. εχάνα, χάναί, rare, 2 A. εχανον, 2 P. κίχηνα as Present, to be open, gape. χ^ζω (ΧΕΔ-), caco^ F. χίσομαι, χεσονμαι. A, έχεσα, εχεσυν, P. P. κε- χεσμαι, 2 P. κεχοδα. χεω (χενω, ΧΥ-, ΧΥΜΙ), to pour, F. χεω like the present, Epic χεύσω χεύω, later χεώ, Α. €χεα. Epic εχευσα εχενα, TUie εχϋσα, Ρ. κεχΰκα, Ρ. \:^. κεχνμαι, Α. εχνθην, Υ.Μ. χεομαί, Α. Μ. εχεάμην. Epic €χευ- άμην, 2 Α. Μ. εχνμην. Mid. χεομαι. Epic χενομαι. ΧΛΑΖ- (ΧΑΑΔ-), to bubble up, 2 P. part, κβχλαδώ?. — κεχλά^ειν, P. inf. Doric ; κεχλάδων,Υ. part. iEolic ; both with the force of the Present. χΚιδάω (ΧΑΙΔ-), to lii)e luxuriously, 2 P. κεχλΐδα as Present. χολοω^ to enrage^ regular ; F. Perf κ^χοΚωσομαι as Future middle. § 134.] ADVERBS. 207 χόω, χώνννμι, χωνννω, to heap up, Υ. χώσω, Α. ίχωσα, Ρ. κίχωκα, Ρ. Ρ. Κ€χωσμαι, Α, Ρ. €χο^σθην. ΧΡΑΙΣΜΕΩ (ΧΡΑΙΣΜ-), to help, avert, Epic, F. χραίσμησω, Α. €χραΙσμησα, 2 Α. €χραισμον. χράομαί, to Ί /se, F. χρησομαι, Ρ. κίχρημαι, Α. €χρησθηι/, Α. Μ. βχρτ;- (τάμην, F. Perf. Κ€χρησομαι. χράω (χρ/ω, ΧΡΗΜΙ), ^<9 7iee• 1. Some genitives, datives, and accusatives, denot- ing various relations, are commonly regarded as adverbs ; as, G. eξης, ό/χου, προικός, αίφνης D. κομιδη^ eiKrjy αρμοί, κύκλω. €κάτι, €κητι, α€κητι Α. μακράν, χάριν, μάτην, δίκην, τ^λος, άρχην, καιρόν, την ταχίστην^ ay αν, λίαν, eveKa ^ 136.] PREPosiiioNs. 209 2. Especially the accusative of the neuter of an adjective is often used adverbially ; as μόνον, only ; πολύ or πολλά, much. So πλησίον, ύστερον ^ /χάλα, κάρτα, κρύφα, δίχα, τάχα. 8. Sometimes a word Avith the preposition governing it is used adverbially ; as παρα-χρημα, προύργον {προ-βργον)^ καθ-άπ^ρ^ €φ-€ξης. So €ξ-αίφνης, €κ-πο3ων, €μ-πο3ών, €π-€Κ€ίνα, €πί-σχ€ρώ^ κατ-όπιν. § 1S6. PREPOSITIONS. Αμφί {άμφίς), amb-, around, about, mostly Ionic and Poetic. In composition it sometimes implies two sides, which is properly its origi- nal meaning. λνά, on, upon. — ^olic and Thessalian 6v- ; as ον-τίθψ for άνα-τζ- θηναί ; 6v TO μέσον, for ανά το μέσον. Αντί, instead of . In composition it often means against, contrary to, which is its original meaning. Από {άπαί), a, ab, abs, from. In composition, also off, away. Δια {biai), through. * In composition, also asunder. Έΐς, Ionic and old Attic Ey, to, into. — Argive eVy, Doric, Bceotic, and Thessalian, iv. Ε AC or Ε ^, e, ex, out of, from. — Doric e^o whea it stands for e^-^ €στι ; Boeotic and Thessalian e? before a consonant, Ισσ before a vow- el, as h Μωσάωι/, iσyόvως, Ισσάρχι. — It has already been remarked that €κ is used before a consonant, and e§ before a vowel. It is added here, that, in inscriptions, e^ is found before ρ ; as i^ νηνείας. Έν, in, at. — Epic ivi, elv, elvi ; Doric and ^ohc eVo, but only when it stands for ev -εστι. ΕτΓΐ, upon, on. Κατά {καταί), down. In composition, also utterly, up, completely. Μ€τά, after, ivith. — ^olic and Boeotic πβδά. Παρά (παραί), along, near. Uepi, around, about, — In the Elean inscription ΠΑΡΠΟΛΕΜΟ TTfi^pl πολέμου. Προ, prae, before. Tip OS, before, towards. — Doric προτί, ποτί; Boeotic ποτί. Συν οτ Ξυν, cum, con-, with. * Υ 7Γ e ρ ( υπείρ ), super, over. Ύπό (υπαί), sub, under. In composition, it may correspond to the English diminutive ending ~ish ; as υπόλευκος, whitish. Note. The word ως sometimes has the force of ch ; it is never, however, prefixed to a noun denoting an inanimate object. 210 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 137, 138, § 13?'. CONJUNCTIONS. αλλά, sedy aty but, ατ€, quippe, inasmuch as, because. αυτάρ, άτάρ, but, yap, enim, for. he, and, but, for, on the other hand. iav, αϊ/, or ήν, (et av) Epic €t K€V, Doric aUa, if, if in any way. 6t, Doric at, si, if , whether, that, ή. Epic and Ionic ψ, vel, or quam, than. Tjde, Ibe, and, corresponding to rjpev. ημ€ν, both, as well, followed by r]bL ητοί, either, or; in Homer, equiv- alent to pev. Ίνα, όπως, ως, ut, that, in order that. και, et, and. pev, indeed, on the one hand, fol- lowed by oe. ομως^, yet, still. OTL. that, because. ovv€Ka^ since, because. οφρα, Poetic for tva, όπως. re, que, and. § 138. INTERJECTIONS. 3, all! of sorrow^ and compassion. a, a, ha! ha! of laughter. at, αΐβοί, of wonder. άππαπαί or άπαπαί, of approba- tion. άτταΧαττατά, of joy. άτταταϊ, άταταΐ, or άτταταιάξ, of sorrow and disgust. βαβαί, or βαβαιάξ, of astonish- ment. c , or €, h e i ! h e u ! e h e u ! ah! of grief. 6ta, or eta, eja! on! courage! €Ϊ€ν, well, be it so ; a modifica- tion of the preceding. iXeXev, of grief or joy. €vye, that is ev ye, euge ! eu! well done ! bravo ! evoi, evoel evax! the cry of the bacchanals. ήν, ηνί, η vide, en! lo ! behold! Ιατταταϊ^ or Ιατταταιάξ, of sorrow ; with the Genitive. lav, Ιανοϊ, eho! ehodum! heus! in answer to a call ; sometimes it is equivalent to Ιού. Ιώ. ιδού, Ιο ! behold ! Ιη, of exultation. Ιου, alas ! of grief. ιώ, io ! of joy or grief. pv pvy of pain ; it Is made by breathing strongly through the nostrilp. οά, woe ! alas ! o'i, ο i ! alas ! icoe ! with the Da- tive. ο'ίμοί, that is ot μοι, ivoe is me! with the Genitive. oTToroT, ότοτοϊ, όττοτοτοϊ, or δτο' τοτοτοΐ, of sorrow. ούαί, vae ! ivoe! with the Dative. παπαί^παπαίάξ, papae! of pain, sorrow, joy, wonder. π απ απ a, how nice I feel! of pleas- ure. πόπαξ, πόποι, ω πόποι, Ο gods! of complaint. πνπαξ, πνππαξ, of wonder, or ad- miration. ρνπαπαί, used by ro\vers. V V, of smelling. (^fO, φΟ, alas! wdth the Genitive. ώ, oh! of wonder, or grief; wdth the Nominative. ω, Ο! with the Vocative. ωη, of grief. ώότΓ, used in encouraging row- ers. § 139.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. 211 DERIVATION OF WORDS. § 1 oil. Substaritives are derived from adjectives, verbs, and from other substantives. -a G. as•, from adjectives in ος pure or ρος, and from verbs in ρω. Those derived from adjectives denote the abstract, and are always paroxytone ; as όσ/α, αΐτία^ ^Χ^Ρ«• Those derived from verbs de- note action, and regularly change the radical e into ο ; as χαρά, φθοράς μοίρα. -ados G. ου, rare ; ομα^ος^ χρήματος, ορυμαγδός. -αινα G. 7;$•, chiefly from masculines in ων \ as Xeaiva, δράκαινα, 6i- aiva. -αρ., -ας, G. ατός, neuter, from verbs ; as aXetap, (ΐλαφαρ, αλκαρ, et- bap^ etXap, μηχαρ *, depas, τέρας (from ΤΕΡί2, terreo). -άς G. άδο?, feminine, chiefly in national appellatives; it denotes either a female or a country ; as θηλιάς. -ας G. ου, denoting the agent of a verb chiefly in composition; as ορνιθοθηρας, φυγα^οθι^ρας, ονοματοβηρας, -δώζ/ G. όνος, feminine, rarely -^ωνη G. ης, from verbs ; as αλγτ^δώι/, χαιρη^ών, μεΧεδών μεΧεδώνη, κΧεηδών κΧηΒών. '€ΐά G. ας, from nouns in €νς ; only βασίΧεια, Upeia. -eia G. ας, from verbs in ^^υω ; it denotes action ; as παώεία. -€La G. ας, sometimes -ία (Ionic -tr;), from adjectives; it denotes, the abstract of the primitive ; as άΧηθεια, αμάθεια άμαθία, ώφβλ/α, άβΧαβίη, άφραδίη, -ΕΥΣ, G. €ως, oxytone, English -man, -er, from nouns and verbs; as ίΤΓΤΓίΰί, γραμματεύς, Αωριενς, Those derived from verbs denote the agent, and regularly change the radical e into ο ; as γραφενς, φθο- ρεύς, τομενς. — Sometimes it denotes a thing conceived of as an agent ; as εμβοΧεύς. -η G. ης, from adjectives and verbs. Those derived from adjectives - denote the abstract, and are always paroxytone ; as κάκη. Those derived from verbs denote action, are generally oxytone, and regu- larly change the radical ε into ο ; as στροφή, άοώη, σπουδή, μάχη. So άγωγΐ], άκωκη, οκωχη, βδωδή, οπωπη- — Sometimes it denotes the effect ; as τομή, a section. -η ρ G. ερος, the same as -τηρ, rare ; αήρ, αίθηρ. -ης G. ου, denotes the agent of a verb, chiefly in composition ; as γεωμετρης, άΧΧαντοπώΧης, τριηράρχης, τταώοτριβης. -θ pa G. as, a modification of -τειρα, -τ pa ; as άναβάθρα, ουρήθρα. -θβον G. ου, a modification of -τρον ; as ρείθρον, ¥εΙθρον. -ΙΑ, G.a?, English -ness, -dom, denotes the abstract of adjectives ; as κακία, ευδαιμονία. -ίς G. ίδος, feminine, chiefly in national appellatives; it denotes a female or country ; as ΙΙερσίς, ΈΧΧηνίς, Φωκαΐς. — A few come from verbs ; εΧπ'ις, αγυρις, οπις, τρόπις, χάρις, φρόνις, τρόχις, δαι?. -λ τ; or -ΧΧα G. ης, chiefly from verbs ; as ά-γεΧη, ζεύ-γΧη, θυηΧη, τρω" γΧηί αεΧΧα, θυεΧΧα. 212 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 139 '"kcv or -Wov G. ov, chiefly from verbs; as φνΧον, ίΐδωλοι/, dai daXov. -Xosor-XXoy G. ου, chiefly from verbs ; as αυλός , βηλός, κρνσταλ•• \os, οπτίΧος οπτίΧλος, οκταΧΧος ο cuius. -ΜΑ, G. ατός, denotes the effect of a verb ; it regularly has the pe- nult of the first person of the perfect passive ; as ττράσσω πρα-γμα^ άΧΧομαι άΧμα, σπείρω σπβρμα. — 'Ίθμα^ άσθμα, from et/xt, αω. — Sometimes it denotes aclion; as φρόνημα, -γίννημα. -μη Ο. ης, denotes the action, and sometimes the effect, of a verb ; it regularly has the penult of the first person of the perfect passive ; as μνήμη, -γνώμη, τιμή, γραμμή. — Στάθμη from ϊστημί. -μις, a modification of -μη, rare ; ^νναμις, θβμις, φημις. -μός G. ου, denotes the action of a verb ; it regularly takes the penult of the first person of the perfect passive ; as δ^υρμός, διωγμός, σει- σμός. — It is often strengthened by <9 ; as βαθμός, άρθμός, έΧκηθμός. — Ισθμός, from εΙμι. — Sometimes it denotes the effect ; as χρη- σμός, πΧόκαμος πΧοχμός, ρωχμός. ~νη G. ης, chiefly from verbs; στεφάνη, δρεπάνη, εργάνη, ζώνη, πά- χνη, φάτνη, μηχανή. -ν ο ν G. ου, from verbs ; γΧύφανον, δρεπανον, τυμπανον, όργανον, re- κνον. -voy G, εος, from verbs ; έθνος, 'ίχνος, τέμενος. ~νος G. ου, chiefly from verbs; στέφανος, καπνός, κάμινος, κοίρανος τύραννος, Χύχνος ( from ΛΥΚΩ, 1 u c e ο ) . -οια G. ας, rare ; άνοια. -αν G. ου, from verbs; ζώον, έργον, ζυγόν. -ονη G. 77?, chiefly from verbs ; as αγχόνη, άκόνη, βελόνη, σφενδόνη^ χαρμονη, πλησμονή, η^ονη. -ο ς G. ου, denotes the action or agent of a verb ; in dissyllables, the radical e becomes ο ; as έλεγχος, λόγος, ονθος, όγκος. Those de- noting the agent are found chiefly in composition ; as ζωγράφος, λα- τόμος, μουσοπυιός. — Sometimes this ending is active when the acute is on the penult, and passive when on the antepenult ; as μητροκτό- νος, matricide, μητρόκτονος, one slain by his mother. -09 G. εος, is appended to the root of a verb ; as πράγος, γένος. Βεος, τρυψος, άνθος. — "Έσθος from εννυμι. — When the verbal root is lost sight of, neuters of this ending are commonly referred to adjectives in υς ; as βάθος, οξος, αίσχος, κάλλος, μήκος, ϋψος, μάκρος 'ρα G. ας, chiefly from verbs ; ε3ρα, α'ίθρα. -ρον G. ου, chiefly from verbs ; ξυρόν, δώρον, κεντρον, βλεφαρον, /ze• τρον, λεπυρον, θνρετρον. -ρος G. ου, chiefly from verbs; ξυρός, δαιτρός, Ιατρός, όλεθρος, κλήρος, άργυρος, αίθρος. -ς, feminine, appended to the root of verbs; as ώψ•, 6ψ, φλόξ, Βαις, δα)?, πτυξ, ρώζ, την νίφα, τη άλκί, αι στάγες, ττ]ς στιχός ; but 6 βηξ — Sometimes it denotes the agent ; as ιίναξ, κήρυξ, φύλαξ, mascu- line. -σα or -ση G. ης, from verbs ; δόξα, μύξα, νάσσα, αΤσα (from ΑΙΩ, aio), οσσα (ΕΠΩ), μούσα, (ίση. So μάζα, σχίζα, φύζα, with a change of σσ into ζ. ^ 139.] DERR^ATION OF WORDS. 213 -ΣΙΑ, G. ay, paroxytone, equivalent to -σι?; as ζΐκασία, θυσία, - When it denotes the abstract of a verbal adjective in τος, it comes from -τία by changing τ into σ ; as αφθαρσία, ^νσπ€^\τία, απραξία, αθανασία. -Σ 12, G. εω?, Latin -tio, English -ing, -ment, denotes the action of a verb ; it regularly takes the penult of the second person singular of the perfect passive ; as nVts•, ποίησις, οράσις, πράξίς, ΘΧίψις, κόλα- σΐ9. -σος G. eoy, -σον G. ον, rare ; άλσος, ττίσος, αψος, τεΧσον, -Σ Σ Α, G. ης, English -655, from masculines; 3.s Αίβνσσα, ανασσα, θησ- σα, βασίλισσα, ηρώϊσσα. -ΣΥΝ Η, G, ης, paroxytone, English -ness, denotes the abstract of ad- jectives ; as δικαιοσύνη, σωφροσύνη. — 'le ρωσννη and a feAV others lengthen ο into ω before σ. -T€ipa G. ας, from masculines in -τηρ ; as oXireipa. -τη G. ης, rare ; άρ€τη, ατη {ανάτα) , yeverr], δαίτη. -ΤΗΡ, G. ηρος, oxytone, -ΤΗΣ, G. ου, English -ter, -er, denotes the agent of a verb, and regularly takes the penult of the third person singular of the perfect passive ; as σωτηρ, ρυτηρ, δικαστής, ικίτης, — Sometimes it denotes a thing conceived of as an agent ; as ^ω- στηρ, πότη ρ, άητης, €π€νδυτης. -ΤΗΣ, G. ου, paroxytone, English -er, -man, from nouns ; it is com- monly preceded by d, η, Γ, ιά (Ionic ιη), ιω; as ΐΐισάτης, 'γ€νν€ίητης, πολίτης. Σπαρτιάτης, ηπ^ιρώτης, νησιώτης. -ΤΗΣ, G. ητος, feminine, paroxytone, sometimes oxytone, Latin -itas, English -ity, -ness, denotes the abstract of an adjective ; as Ισότης, ο^ύτης, άδροτης, βραδυτης. — ΤΙοτης from πίνω, -τις G. ιδος, feminine to -της from nouns ; as φνλ€τις, γ€νν€ΐατις, πο- Χϊτις. — Α few come from verbs ; πίστις, μνηστις, φάτις, φροντίς. -τ 6 ς G. ου, Latin - tus, apparently the same as verbal adjectives in τος ; as άμητός, κωκϋτός, παγ€τός. Sometimes the accent is placed as far back as the last syllable permits ; as βίοτος, πότος, θάνατος, κάμα- τος. 'Τ pa G. ας, a modification of -τρία, -τ€ΐρα ; it commonly denotes the instrument used by the agent ; as -ψήκτρα, ξύστρα, ρήτρα, τριά G. ας, the same as -τ^ιρα ; as δρχηστρια. τρον G. ου, from -τρα ; as δίδακτρον, νίπτρον, πληκτρον, λοΕτρόν. -τρις G. ίδος, the same as -τ^ιρα, -τρία ; as ανλητρίς, άλ^τρίς. -τύς G. νος, feminine, from verbs ; as άκοντιστνς, βοητνς, ορχηστύς, κιθαριστνς, ά-γορητνς. -τω ρ G. ορός, Latin -tor, the same as -τηρ', as ίστιάτωρ, πράκτωρ. -νςΟί. νος, rare; Ισχνς, πληθνς. -ώ, -ώς, G. ους, from verbs ; ηχώ, τάς βίκους, π€ΐθώ, αΙδώς. -ων G. όνος Οι οντος, in participial nouns ; as άγων, άξων, αηδών, άρη- γών, καύσων, τ^νων. -ώζ/ G. ώνος, masculine, denotes the flace where many things of the same kind are kept ; as δαφνών, 'γυναικών. 'ώνης G. ου, rare ; τελώνης, νομώνάς Bceotic. -ωνιά G. ας, the same as -ών ; as ροδωνιά. -ώρ Cr. οί^ς, the same as -τωρ, rare: κ^ντωρ, θαΚασσοκράτωρ παντΰτ κράτωρ. 214 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [^§ 140, 141. -ωρ, neuter, from verbs, Epic ; βλδωρ eeXSa>p, ελωρ. -ω/5 75 G. rjs, from verbs, Epic ; ά)ν€ωρη, εΚπωρη, θαλπωρή. § 1 4:©• Patronymics, that is, .names of persons derived from their parents or ancestors, end in 'ah ης G. ου, ^olic -abios G. ω, in nouns of the^r^i declension ; as ^Ιππότης ^Ιπποτά^ης, the son of Hippotes ; Bopeas" Βορεάδ/;?, AXevas Αλευάδτ/ί, Avyelas ΑυγηίάΒης, ^Υρρας Υρράδιο?, TiVay Ttvadios. — Nouns in -toy of the second declension change -os into -άδτ;? ; as "Ασίος Ασιάοης. -ί^ης G. ου, Boeotic -Sas", in nouns of the second and third declensions; it is appended according to the folloAving examples : Αίακός Αίακί^ης, Αητώ Αητοϊ3ης, Βοηθόος Βοηθοίδης : Αγαμέμνων -όνος, Α'γαμ^μνονί- δ/^ί, Τυδβυ? -€θί, Τυδβ/δί;? ; Αχαιμβνης -eos, Αχαιμ€νβης, ^HpakXrjs -AcXeoy, ^ΐίρακλ€ί8ης. — For -€ίδης, the ^olic and Done use the un- contracted form -ctdas ; as Κρηθ€-ΐ8ας, 0ΐν€-ΐ3ας. -ίάδης G. ου, an Epic ending, always preceded by a Jong syllable ; as Α•γχίσης ΑγχΤσιά^ης,'^Αρητος Αρητιάδης, Βάκχος Βακχιάδης, Ααομ€- δων Ααομ€8οΡΤίάδης , O'iXcvs Οϊλιάδτ;?, Kanavevs Καπανηϊάδης. 'ίων G. -ϊωνος or Ίονος, masculine, Poetic; as^A/crcup Ακτορίων, Κρό- νος Κρονίων, Ιίη\€νς ΤΙηΧείων. ϊονίδης G. ου, rare; Έλατ-ωνίδης, Ύαλα-'ίονίδης, Ιαπ€τ-ωνί3ης. -as G. -άδοί, feminine to -ά^ης ; as θεστως θεστίάί, daughter of Thes- tius. -ίς G. -/δο9, feminine to -'ώης ; as^'ArXa? ArXai/riy, daughter of Atlas, Κάδμος Καδμηΐς, θησ€νς θησηϊς θηστίς. -ίνη, -ίώνη, G. ης, feminine to -ίων; as Έϋηνος Ένηνίνη, Ακρίσιος Ακρισιωνη. § Ι'^Ι • Α diminutive signifies a small (or if ecr) thing of the kind denoted by the primitive. Diminutives end in 'Lov G. ου, the most usual ending; as άνθρωπος άνθρώπιον, παΙς παώός παώίον. — Many diminutives in -lov have lost their diminutive signi- fication ; as πίδον π€δίον, ελωρ βλώριον, βίβλος βίβλίον, θηρ θηρίην. Still, in such cases, the primitive is always more dignified tlian the diminutive form. ίδιον, commonly contracted with the preceding vowel; as -γρανς Ύραός Ύραϊδιον γράδιον^ yrj y^diov, βους βοός βοίδων, λίξις -€ος Xf ^ei- δίον. — The endings -νίδων, -ύδιον are always written -νδιον, -Ιδιον\ as Ιχθνς Ιχθύδιον^ υς ϋδιον, Ιμάτιον Ιματίδιον. — The ending '€ ίδιον may be written also ϊδιον; as ρησις ρησ€ ίδιον or ρησίδιον. -ιδξύς G. €ως, denoting the young of an animal ; as αετός άετιδεύς, λαγός λαγιδεύς. -ίς (jr. ίδος or Ιδος ; as άμαξα άμαξίς, νήσος νησίς, πίναξ πινακίς. 'ίχνιον, -ίχνη, only in πόλις πολίχνη πολιχνών, κύλιξ κυλίχνη κνλί- χνιον. ίσκιο ν, -ίσκος, -ίσκη, (Baltic -ιχος, -ι χα, chiefly in proper names ;) as κοτύλη κοτνλίσκη κοτνλίσκιον, νεανίας νεανίσκος ; Boeotic ορτάλιχος, πνρριχος. % § 142.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. 215 -aptov; as τΓοί;? τΓοδάρίον, o^drj ω8άριον. ^άσιον, κόρη κοράσιον, the only example. -νΧΧος Οΐ -v\os, -vWls, -vWlov, Latin -ulus; as '^Έρως Ερωτύ- λο?, μ^Ιραζ μ€ίρακνΧλων. -vbpLou; as μ^Χος μβΧύδρων, νήσος νησν^ριον. 'ύφίον, -άφίορ', as ζώον ζωνφων, χώρος χωράφιον. § 1<1:3• Adjectives are derived from substantives, verbs, adverbs, and from other adjectives. -αΤο9 is formed by annexing -toy to the root of nouns of the first de- clension ; as ά-γοραίος, τροχαίος, Αθηναίος. — Its neuter is sometimes used substantively ; as τρόπαιον or τροπαων, Ίΐραϊον. -ακός, equivalent to -ικος, from nouns in ως, ια, lov; as anovdeLUKos, Κορινθιακός, καρδιακός, ΟΧυμπιακός, ΐΧιακός. 'άΧιμος, rare and Epic; κν3άΧίμος, βΙ^άΧίμος, π^νκάΧιμος. -αϊ/ OS after a vowel, -ηνός after a consonant, Ionic always -ηνός, Latin -anus, used in names of places out of Greece Proper; it is equivalent to -ως, and has no neuter. Most commonly adjectives of this ending are used substantively. E. g. Πάρων ΤΙαρίανός, Φασια- νός, Αβυ^ηνός, Ααμψακηνός. -άί G. ά^ος. common gender, chiefly from verbal nouns ; as Ιττπάς, λο- γάς, μαινάς, πτωκάς, άμοιβάς. •αχός is found chiefly in adverbs in -χον, -χη, -χώς ; as άΧΧαχον,αΚ- €ίνός is formed by annexing -ϊνος to the root of nouns of the third declension ; as όρ€ίνός, άΧγ€ίνός. It is found also in adjectiΛ^es de- rived from nouns of the first two declensions ; as ποθβινός, €υ3ΐ€ίνός, νγί€ΐνός, €ρατ€ΐνός. '6 toy is formed by annexing -to? to the root of nouns of the third de- clension ; as ορ€ως, Αργ€7ος. It is appended also to the root of nouns of the same declension ; as γυναικΐ^ος, alyeto?. Not unfre- quently, however, e takes the place of α or ο in nouns of the first two declensions ; as/xovσeto9, σπον^ζϊος, άνθρώπ€ως, Έπικονρεως. — Its neuter is often used substantively ; as κονρ^νς Kovpfiov, θησ€ων, Έ.ρ€χθ€ων, ΉράκΧεων. €ΐς G. €ντος, from substantives ; it generally denotes fulness, and is preceded by 77, o, or t ; as φωνη^ις, ^ΕνΒρψις, πΧακΟ€ίς, χαρίεις. €ο^ς, Latin -e us, English -en, made of, consisting of, chiefly from nouns denoting metals ; as χρνσ€ος, άργνρ€ος. — In poetry, it is of. ten used for -€ως ; as βρότ€ος, βόβος. — Sometimes it comes from other adjectives ; as Χαΐν€ος, κ€ν€Ος. 'ηρηί G. €ος, rare; πονηρής, ξιφηρης. 'ης G. ου, from nouns; as ευωττης, ^θζΧοντης, τριακοντοντης. -Η2, G. ξος, oxytone,from verbs ; as φραδης, άμαθης, θ€0€ώης, άη^ης, οίνοβαρης, θ€ον^ης. — In a few instances, it is active when the acute is on the penult, and passive when on the last syllable ; as θ€ομίσης^ god-hating, θ^ομισης, hated by the gods. -ης G. ητος, chiefly from verbals in -ητος ; as ά^μης, άκμης. -ΙΚΟΣ, oxytone, Latin -icus, English -ic, -ish,helongi7ig to, jperiain- 216 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 142.. ing to, from nouns ; as ποιητικός, αρχικός, Meyaptfco?. — When the root ends in a, the adjective may end in -αϊκός ; as τροχαϊκός, Ka- στανα'ίκός, ΐίΚατάίκός. 'ΐμος, sometimes -ιμαίος, from nouns; it denotes fitness; as iocuhi- μας, χρήσιμος, πότιμος, νποβοΧίμαϊος. -ΙΝΟΣ (ϊ), English -en, made of, consisting of, from nouns ; as ξύλι- νος, δρύινος. — Αδινός, χθ e σ ινός, from α3ην, χθβς. 'ΐνος, equivalent to -ανός ; it has no neuter, and is most commonly used substantively; as Ακρα-^^αντΙνος, Α€οντΐνος. — Αγχιστϊνος, from αγχιστος. -ΙΟΣ, Latin -ins, belonging to, derived from, from nouns ; as ουράνιος, αίθβριος, σωτήριος, ίσττίριος, πάτριος. — Those derived from names of places are commonly used substantively in the masculine and fem- inine ; as ^άξιος, Ύηνιος, Κορίνθιος. — Those derived from other adjectives do not materially diifer from their primitives ; as ίΚ^υθ^- ριος, καθάριος, άθβμίστιος. — The neuter is often used substantively; as Αιονύσιον, ποτηριον. -ts• G. ιδοί, feminine or common, from nouns ; as €υώπις, τριακοντοΰ- τις, αναΧκις, πατρίς, μητρίς. -κός, rare ; θηλν-κός. 'λός, -λ €0 9, 'λιος, or -λ ι ς, from verbs and nouns, denote qiiality ox fulness ; as^SetXos•, στρ€β\ός, €Ϊκ€λος, σι-γηΧός, νπνηΧός, ψωρα- Xeo?, άρπαΧζος, άπατηΚιος, φνξηΚις. -μος, rare; άμφ'ώνμος, η3νμος, δίδυμος, €τνμος. — Ανδρόμβος, from άνηρ. -μων G. όνος, from verbs ; it has an active signification ; as επιστή- μων, ν€κρο3€γμων. -νός, chiefly from verbs ; δεινός, στυ-γνός, σεμνός, ερεβεννός ερεμνός, στιλπνός . -οίος is formed by annexing -ιος to the root of nouns of the second declension ; as αΙδοΊος, ηοΊος, όμοως or όμοιος, ο ς, from verbs, with a change of the radical ε into ο ; used chiefly in composition ; as ταχνγράφος, θοός, δίφθογγος, λοιπός. — in a few instances it is active when the acute is on the penult, and passive when on the antepenult ; as πρωτοκτόνος, that slays first, πρωτόκτο- νος, first slain. 'ρός denotes qvalitij or fubiess ; chieily from nouns or verbs ; it is commonly preceded by e, η, or ν ; as τρυφερός, πονηρός, αλμυρός, λαμπρός, ψυχρός, εχυρός, ΚΡΥΩ κρυερός, ΝΕΚί2 neco νεκρός, λύζω lugeo λυγρός. — ΕΙΔΩ ϊδρις. -S, from verbs ; as αρπαξ, επίτεξ, πολυάϊξ, νεηλυς επηλυς. '(Τίος is formed from -τιος by changing r into σ ; as φιλοτησιος, πλού- σιος, Αφροδίσιος, Μιλ7]σιος, γερούσιος {γερόνσιος) , άκηράσιος, εκού- σιος {εκόνσιος), δημόσιος. — Adjectives like the following imply a primitive in -ητης : βροτησιος, ημερήσιος, νυκτερησιος. Ιθακήσιος, -συνος ', γηβόσυνος, δεσπόσυνος, θάρσυνος, πίσυνος. -ΊΈΟΣ paroxytone, Latin -ndus, from verbs; it denotes ohligation, necessity, propriety ; regularly with the penult of the third person singular of the perfect passive ; as γράφω γραπτεος, scribe ud us to be written, that must be written. § 143.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. 217 -ΤΟΣ oxytone, Latin -tus, from verbs, equivalent to the perfect passive participle ; reffularly with the penult of the third person singular of the perfect passive; as -γράφω -γραπτός^ scrip tus, written. — Sometimes it denotes capableness ; as ^earos•, visible^ capable of beins; seen. — Sometimes it has an active signification ; as καΚυπτός, cov- ering, -υλος, Latin -ulus, English -ish, diminutive, Doric ; μικκός μικκυλος. 'vs is appended to the root of verbs ; as ήδυς, θράσσω τραχύς, ΝΕΚί2 ν€κνς. Not unfrequently the verbal force is lost ; as πλατύς, €ύρύς, βαθύς, γλυκύ?, ταχύς, ώκύς. -νδης, FA^gVish -Ί/, -like, contracted from -ο€ίδης, from ΕΙΔΩ, de- notes resemblance or fulness ; as πνρο€ώης πνρώδης, σφηκώδΐ]:, αι/€- μώΒης. 'ύύϊος, contracted -ω ο ς, formed by annexing -to ς to the root of nouns ; as ηρώ'ίος ηρωος, Κωος, — In a few instances, the ω does not belong to the root ; as πατρώος, μητρώος, παππώος. -ων G. όνος, ωνος, participial adjectives ; πίπων, αϊθων. 'ώνίος, -^ohc, formed by annexing -ιος to the genitive plural of nouns ; άΧΧώνιος, ίτ^ρώνιος, παντώνιος. 'ώς, from adjectives in -ωτος ; as άβρώς, άγνώς. § 1413• Verbs are derived from substantives, adjectives, inter- jections, and from other verbs. -άω, formed by annexing ω to the root of nouns of the first declen- sion ; as τιμάω, άτάομαι, τοΧμάω. ^ -€ω, from nouns, denotes a state, being, or action; as πολε/ζ/ω, cvtv- '€ύω, from nouns, is equivalent to -/ω ; as ταμίζύω, κο\ακ€νω, βασι- Χ^ύω. -όω is commonly forrned by annexing ω to the root of nouns of the second declension ; as δουλόω, στανρόω. — Sometimes it comes from nouns of the other declensions ; as ζημία ζημωω, πυρ πνρόω, -ζω, -άζω, -ίζω, from nouns and interjections; as αρμόζω, σκ€υάζω, ορίζω, οίακίζω, αΐάζω [αϊ αϊ), οΐμώζω (οϊμοι), μνζω (μν), ίΧζΧίζω (eXe- Χ^ν), €φ€νξα (φευ). -αίνω, English -en, to he, to make, commonly from adjectives in ος, or substantives in μα ; as μωραίνω, σημαίνω. -ύνω, English -en, to make, commonly from adjectives in vy ; as βαθύ- νω, σ€μνύνω. -σείω, Latin -urio, desiderative, from the future of the primitive ; as δράω δρασείω. 'ΐάω, rarely -άω, desiderative, from substantives; as στρατηγιάω, ωνη- τίάω, κΧανσιάω, θανατιάω θανατάω, πασχητιάω, χεζητιάω, ^ύΧΧω, diminutive, rare ; as ζξαπατύΧΧω, βδύΧΧω, Note. When the root of a verb is obsolete, it is customary to de- rive the actual form from a kindred noun ; thus βοάω, φιΧίω, δικάζω, which are mere prolongations of the roots BO-, ΦΙΛ-, ΔΙΚ-, are coai- monly derived from βοη, φίΧος, δίκη. 10 218 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§144-146. COMPOSITION OF WORDS. § 144. 1. When the first component part of a compound word is a noun of the first or second declension, its ending is dropped, and an ο is regularly substituted. When it is a noun of the third declen- sion, an ο is generally placed between its root and the second compo- nent part. E. g. θάλασσα κρατίω βα\ασσ-ο-κράτωρ πρώτος τίκτω ττρωτ-ο-τόκος παΊς τρίβω παώ-ο-τρίβης Sometimes the connecting letters are ot, οσ, σο, ?;, ι, α, ασ, at ; as 6d-oL-w6pos, θ€-όσ-Βοτο9, πολισ-σο-νόμος, \αμπα3-η-φ6ρος, καΧλ-ί-παρ€ΐ- 0S, 7Γθ8-α-νίπτηρ, δικ-ασ-πολοί, μ^σ-αι-πόλως. 2. The connecting letter ο is regularly omitted when the second component part begins with a vowel, or when the root of the first part ends in t or υ ; as ψυχ-αγωγός, πτολί-πορθος, άστν-γζίτων, 3. In words compounded with numerals, the first four numerals are μονό- (before a vowel μον-), δι-, τρι-, τ€τρα- (before a vowel τ€τρ-) ; as μονό-παις, .3ί-πονς, τρί-κ€ρως, τετρά-ττονς, τέθρ-ιππον» — H/xt-, semi-, half; as ημι-μαθης, ημι-κνκΚιον, But δΐί, and τρις, in composition, retain their original force ; as δισ- €φθος, doubly baked, τρισ-όλβως, thrice happy. Note 1. When the second part is a digammated word, it is regular- - ly preceded by ο ; in which case -ο^ρ-γος, -ό^χος may be contracted into -ονργος, -ουχος ; as θ^ο-εώης, μ€νο-€ΐκης, άγαθο-€ργός άγαθουργός, κακο-εργός κακούργος, (3α8ό-€χος) δαδονχος. Note 2. For the compounds of nouns in -ης, -ος, G. €ος, -ας G. ατός, αος ; of nouns in -ως of the second declension ; of some primitives in -μα of the third (as αίμα) ; and of yea yrj, βονς, ναυς, μ^λας, πας παν, see Lexicons. § 145. 1. When the first component part is a verb, the connect- ing letters are e, i, €σ, σε, σι, €σί, σο ; as μ^ν-Ι-μαχος ; άρχ-ι-κίραν- νος ; φ€ρ-ίσ-βως. So πίρ-σί-ποΚις ; €ρυ-σί-πο\ις ; δηζί-θϋμος, Τ€ρ'>\τί-νοος ; ταμ-ςσί- χρως, 2. When the second component part begins with a vowel, the con- necting letters are omitted. Sometimes however σ stands between the component parts. E. g. π€ίθ-αρχώ ; 'Π.€ίσ-αν^ρος, ρίψ-ασπις. § 14β. The prepositions lose their final vowel, when the word v/ith which they are compounded begins with a vowel ; except π€ρί and προ ; as άν-άγω, άν6-οπ\ίζω, άπ-ίχω, ^π-αιν^ω, π^ρι-ίχω^ προ-€χω. Προ may be contracted with the second part, when it begins with € ; as προε;^ω προνχω, προίΧ^γον προϋΧ€γον. §§ 147, 148.] COMPOSITION of words. 219 Note 1. The final vowel may be retained before a digammated word ; as άμφΐ€νρνμί, avaotyeaKou, anoemelv, δία€ί3ομαί, Ιπι^νννμι, κατα€ννυμί , μ€τα ΐζω . Note 2. The ^olians, Dorians, and Epic Poets may drop the final vowel oi avay κατά, παρά, ποτί, rarely από, ύπό, before a consonant ; as άνστάντ€ς, άνν^ίται, άΧλεξαι, ay ξηραίνω ; 'ΐΓαρ6€μ€νοι, ττοτθζμ^ν, απ- π€μπω, νββάλλω (for νπβάλλω). For κατά, see above (§ 13, 11). Note 3. The ^olic and Doric may change nepi into περ, in com- position; as TrepoSos", ττ^ρροχος, π€ρρ€χ€ίν, for π€ρίοδος, π€ρίοχος, πε- ρΐ€χ€ΐν, § 147• The inseparable particles are α-, apt-, ept-, δι;σ-, δα-, ζα-, λα-, and νη-, a-, before a vowel av-, English in-, im-, un-, or -less, called a privative or negative ; prefixed to substantives or adjectives ; as aSeos, άχρη- στος, ανόμοιος. — In two or three instances it is prefixed to verbs ; thus, άτίω, άναίνομαί. — Before a digammated word, it is a- ; as ά€ΐκης, aidpLS, aovTos (but άνοντατος). — Αμ-φασίη, άνά -edvos, exceptions to the rule. a- intensive; as ασττβρχ/?, άτβνης, ^ α- denoting 2/.7ifo7i ,• as αλοχοί, ακοιτις. apt-, € pi-, very, much, both intensive; sjs άρίγνωτος, €ριβρ€μ€της, δνσ-, Latm dis-, English mis-, un-, the opposite of €v, denotes diffi- cult]/, misfortune, badness, and is prefixed to substantives or adjec- tive* ; as δνσπορος, δυστυχής. — In δυσθνησκω, it is prefixed to θνησκω. δα-, ζ a-, λα-, very, all intensive; as δαφοινός, ζαμενης, Χάμαχος, νη-, Latin ne, negative ; as νηποινος, νηστις, νώνυμος. § 14:8. When the second component part is a noun beginning with a, €, o, its initial vowel is often lengthened ; as υπ-ηκοος, στρατ- ηγός, όδ-ηγός, \οχ-άγός, ναυ-άγός, ay -ηνωρ, 3υσ-ηλατος, άν-ώνυμος. PART ΠΙ. SYNTAX. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. NOMINATIVE. L^ 149. 1. The subject of a sentence or proposi- tion is that of which any thing is affirmed. The predicate is that which is affirmed of the subject. 2. The subject is either a nominative^ or a word standing for a nominative. The predicate is either a, verb alone, or a verb and a substantive, adjective, pronoun, or participle ; in the latter case, the A^erb is called the copula. Both the subject and the predicate may have other words connected with them. E. g. Εγώλβγω, I say. Aepvos ην βασιλεύς, Lernus was a king ; here Aepuos is the subject ; ην βασιλεύς, the predicate ; and ην, the copula. Ακουσας ταύτα 6 Κύρος επείθετο, Cyrus, hearing these things, was persuaded; here άκουσας ταΰτα 6 Κϋρος is the subject. Note 1. The most usual copulas are et/xtj υπάρχω, πεφυκα, φυναι, ΤτίΚω, πεΧομαί, γίγνομαί, αυξάνομαι, μένω, καταστηναι: εοικα, φαίνο- μαι, όρώμαι, 8η\ουμαι : καΧουμαι, ονομάζομαι, Χεγομαι, ακούω : aipc- θηναι, anode ίκνυμαι : νομίζομαι, κρίνομαι, υποΧαμβάνομαι : εΙμι, κατα- 7Γ€ μπομαι, επιβαίνω. Note 2. The copula retains its peculiar character even Avhen it be- comes a participle , as Αίρνου οντος βασιλέως, Lernus being a king. ^ 150. 1. A finite verb agrees with its subject- nominative in number and person ; as, § 150.] NOMINATIVE. 221 Εγώ λ/γω, / say^ It is I who say. Ή/χαί X/yo/xez/, We say^ It is loe who say. Συ Xeyft?, Thou sayest. Ύ/χβί? Xeyere, You say. Έκ€ΐνϋς Xeyet, He says. Εγώ, ι/ώ, ημ€Ϊς are of the first person; συ, σφώ, v/xeiy, of the second person ; all other nominatives are of the third person. t(a) A subject in the dual may take a plural verb. On the othei hand, a subject in the plural may take a verb in the dual when two persons or things are meant ; ? as Δυο νζανίσκω προσ^τρ^χον. Two young ΊΠβη ran up. Ώί δ' ore χ€ίμαρροί τιοταμοί κατ'' 6ρ€σφί peovres €Ϊς μισ-γά-γκ^ιαν σνμβάΧλ^τον οβριμον νδωρ, And as luhen two winter- torrents descending from the rocks unite their mighty waters in a ravine; where two streams running on opposite sides are meant. (b) The verb may agree in number with the nominative in the pre- dicate ; as Εστόι/ δυω \όφω η Ι^ομύνη υψηλώ, Idomenl is two high hills. ^ 2. Two or more nominatives in the singular, connected by και (expressed or understood), take the verb in the plural and in the chief person, which is the first with respect to the second and third, and the second with respect to the third ; as, Εγώ κα\ συ €λογίζόμ€θα, 1 and thou concluded. ϋάρζίμι κα\ €γώ καΧ ovtos Φρννίσκος^ Both I and this Phryniscus are present. Ύζθνασι Κηφίσό^ωρος κα\ ^μφικράτης κα\ aXXoL, Cephisodoms and Amphicrates and others are dead. '(a) The verb may agree with the nearest or most prominent sub- ject ; as Αποτ€μν€ταί η κεφαλή καΐ χ€\ρ η δε^ιά, The head is cut off, and also the right hand. (b) The verb may be put in the dual, if it belongs to two substan- tives in the singular ; as ΉΧνροποακη κα\ η κιθαριστικη πολύ διαφά' p€Tov άλληλοίν, The art of making lyres, and the art of playing on the Iiarp, differ much from each other. (c) A nominative in the singular followed by /z era or συν, with, may take the verb in the plural ; as Δημοσθένης μετά των ξνστρατη- yiuv σπενδονταί, Demosthenes with his fellow-generals inade a treaty. S. When two or more nominatives of different persons and numbers are connected by ^, ovre^ or /^ητ€, the verb agrees with one of them, and is un- derstood aifter the rest. 222 SYNTAX. [§ 151. ^ When ΗοΛνβνβΓ the nouns are regarded as one whole^ the verb is put in the plural. E. g. Αημοφώι/ η θηριππί^ης €χουσίν, Demophon or Therippides has. Οΰτ€ συ οϋτ^ αν akXos ovOels dvuaLTo, Neither you nor any body else could. So "Όττω? μη φθάσωσι μητζ Kvpos μητ€ οί KlXik€S καταλαβόντ€ς, In order that neither Cyrus nor tlie Cilicians may occupy them beforehand, ,/ 4. The copula βΐμί and its participle are very often omitted ; as, '^Αριστον μβν ύδωρ, Water is indeed the best thing ; sc. eVrt. '^Q.v υφηγητών, Who being leaders ; sc. όντων. Note 1. The first person plural is sometimes used, for the sake of modesty, instead of the first person singular ; as 'i2 Αλκιβιάδη, κα\ ημείς τηΧικοντοί ovt€S deivol τα τοιαύτα ημεν, Ο Alcibiades^ ive too, when at your age, were keen in such matters ; where Pericles alone speaks. Note 2. In the Epic language the dual is sometimes used for the plural ; thus [E, 5, 487) άλόι /re refers to the Trojans. {11. 8, 185) άποτίνζτον, €φομαρτ€Ϊτον, σπενδετον refer to four horses. ( Od. 8, 48. 49) κονρω KpLv6ivT€, βητην apply to fifty-two persons. (Hymn, 1, 487. 501) κάθετον, Xvaavre, ΐκησθον refer to the Cre- tan sailors. Note 3. When έκαστος, έτερος, and άλλος in the expressions άλλος άλλον, άλλος αλλοθεν, are connected with a plural verb, they are really in apposition with the subject of that verb ; as Αναβαίνοντες οπη εδνναντο έκαστος. Ascending as well as they each could, Ηρώτων άλλος άλλο, one asked one thing, and another, another, Ο,ζ^ 151. 1. Whenever a noun in the plural is re- garded as one ivhole^ or when several nouns are regarded as one whole, the verb may be in the sin- gular. Particularly, The nominative of the neuter plural regularly takes the verb in the singular. E. g. Τά στρατεύματα αγωνίζεται. The armies are contending. Ύαντα iy ενετό. These things happened. So *H/xii/ ovK εστί κάρν'' εκ φορμ'ώος δονλω τταραρριπτονντε τόΐς θεω- μενοις. We have not (do not exhibit) a couple of slaves throwing nuts out of a basket to the spectators. ' 2. On the other hand, a collective noun in the singular may have the verb in the plural ; as, ξ>§ 152, 153.] NOMINATIVE.'' 223 To πλήθος oXovraLy The multitude think. To στρατόπ^^ον ave -χωρονν, The army were retreating , '§ 153• 1. The nominatives of the personal pronoun are implied in the personal endings of the verb. (^ 115. n,) Con- sequently, Λvhen they are expressed, they are either emphatic or antithetic. Thus, Γράφω , I write ; Εγώ γράφω. It is I that write ; or / write with an emphasis upon /. Γράφετε, You write ; Ύμ€Ϊς γράφ€Τ€, It is you that write. / 2. When a verb in the third person appears without a nomi- native, its subject must be determined by the context. Partic- ularly, (a) The nominative is omitted when anything general and indefinite [τϊς, πράγμα, χρήμα) is expressed ; as λβγονσι, They say. Οντως €χ€ί, It is so. Aei^et δ;) τάχα, Time luill soon show it, (b) When the verb indicates the employment of a person, the word denoting that person is generally omitted ; as Έκηρυξε τοΊς "Ελλησί παρασκ€νάσασθαι, so. 6 κήρυξ, The herald proclaimed to the Greeks to make ready. (c) When it is implied in some part of the clause ; as Ίον Ισθμον €Τ€ίχ€ον και σφι ην iv reXeV, TJiey were building a icall across the Isth- mus, and their work (wall) was near the end. (d) Frequently the active verb is changed into the third person sin- gular passive, and its subject-nominative into the dative of the agent; as Toiff ποΚ€μίοις €ντνχηται, for Ot ποΚ^μιοι ζύτνχηκάσι, The enemy have succeeded. (e) The, subject of verbs denoting the state of the weather or the op- erations of nature is not expressed ; as vei, it rains ; νίφξΐ, it snows ; €σ€ίσ€, tliere ivas an earthquake, :■' § 133. In general, any word, sentence, expression, or clause may be the subject of a sentence. Particularly, '^ (a) The subject maybe an infinitive; in which case the verb is called impersonal. Such is the subject of most commonly followed by an adjective. δεί, it is necessary, one must. doKel, it seems good or proper, €ίμαρταί, it is fated; εϊμαρτο, it ivas fated. Ιν^ίχςται, it is possible, it hop- pens. eoLKe, it seems, it becomes, €-'€στί, it is possible. €ξ€στί, it is lawful, proper. ia-TL, it is possible, easy, ωην6ηΐ6ηί, \ίγ€ται, it is said, /xeXet, to take care of, π€πρωται, it is destined. πρίπ€ΐ, προσήκει, it is proper, it behooves, it becomes, σνμβαίνα, it happens, χρη, it is necessary, there is need one must. 224 SYNTAX. [§§154-156. ^^ (b) The subject maybe a sentence beginning \vith ori^that; as Δήλοι/ ην οτι iyyvs ττον βασιΚ€ν£ ην, It ivas manifest that the king icas pretty near. (c) The siibject may be a preposition with a numeral adjective fol- lowing it ; as ^Εφυγοι/ περί οκτακοσίονς, About eight hundred fed, - § 1S4• 1. The nominative often has the appearance of the vocative ; as *H ΐΐράκνη εκβαινβ, Procne^ step out, 2. The nominative is used in designating an object without asserting any thing respecting it ; as Όμηρου iXtay, Homer'^s Iliad, CL• 3. The nominative, with or without an interjection, is used in certain exclamations ; as '^Ωμοι εγώ deiKos ! Oh wretched me ! *Q 8ύ(Γμορος ! Unhappy man that I am ! VOCATIVE. 0^ 155• . The vocative with or without ώ is used in addressing ; as, ^Enepyj/'cv ημάς η στρατιά προς σε, ώ Κλεαι/δρε, The army has sent US to you, Ο Oleander, Note 1. The vocative singular may be used in addressing a num- ber of persons ; as"lr' ύ /xetff, ώ 'Ηριττιτίδα, GoySy Ο Herippidas, where Herippidas with others is addressed. Note 2. (a) *Ω may stand after the adjective agreeing with the substantive ; as Μάκαρ ω Στρεψιαδεί, Ο happy Strepsiades ! (b) It may stand between the substantive and its adjective ; as^Epe- βος ω φαζννότατον, Ο most bright Erebos, (c) It may be repeated ; as *ί2 τίκνον ω ycwaiov, Ο my noble child! (d) It may be separated from its substantive by a parenthetical ex- pression ; as ΉμΙν elni, ω προς Αιος Μελτ/τβ, In the name of Zeus, tell us, Ο Meletus ! SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. (λ^^ 156. 1. A substantive annexed to another substantive or to a pronoun, for the sake of expla- nation, is, bj apposition^ put in the same case. So when the annexed substantive is in \he predicate οι the sentence. E. g. Ξ€ρξης βασιλβν?, Xerxes, a hing, or King Xerxes. Εγώ 6 Ίηρ€νς, I Tereus. E/xe τον Ύηρ€α, Me Tereus, Συ "Έλλην ft, Thou art a Grecian, § 156.] SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 225 So /ίαβωι/ Ύκτσαφερνην ως φιλον, Taking with him Tissaphernes as a friend, θε/χίστοκλήί ηκω, I Themistudes have come, (a) In Poetry, especially in Epic Poetry, a noun denoting a part is often put in apposition with the noun denoting the whole. In trans- lation, the leading noun may be regarded as an adnominal genitive. E. g. Αηΐττνρον "EXevos ξίφζ'ί ήλασ€ κόρσην, Helenus smote the temple of Deipyrus with a sword. So Αλλ' ουκ ATpcidr] Αγαμ€μνονί rjvbave θνμω, But it did not please the heart of Agamemnon, tlie son of Atreus. (b) Possessive pronouns and adjectives implying possession are often followed by a genitive, which is in apposition Avith the genitive implied in the possessive pronoun or adjective ; as Ίον ipov αντον τον ταλαίπω- ρου βίοι/, The life of me, a miserable man ; here αυτοί) του ταλαίπωρου is in apposition w'ith βμου implied in ^μόν. Αθηναίος ων πόλ^ω? της 쀕γίστης. Being α citizen of Athens, the greatest city in the w^orld. (c) A noun is sometimes put in apposition wath a w^hole sentence regarded as a substantive. The noun thus appended is in the nomina- tive or accusative according as the principal word in the sentence, to which it refers, is a subject or an object. E.g. Τώ παΐδβ τω σω μ€\- λβτοζ/, τολμηματ^ αϊσχιστα, μονομαχβϊν, Thy two sons are about to fight a duel, a most disgraceful act. Έλβνην κτάνωμ^ν, Μβι/έλβω Χύπην πικράν. Let us slay Helen ^ to the hitter grief of Menelaus. This rule applies also to such parenthetical phrases as To λεγο/ιβι/ρζ/, As the saying is ; Yiav τουναντίον. The very reverse ; On the contrary; To τοΐ) Όμηρου, As Homer says ; According to Homer. (d) When the subject of a sentence is a demonstrative pronoun, it commonly takes the gender of the noun in the predicate ; as ΈπΙ Πΰ- Χας της ΚιΧικίας καΐ της Συρίας. ^Ησαν δε ταύτα δύο τ^ίχη. Το the Gates of Cilicia and Syria. Now these Gates were two walls ; for αύ- ται, sc. al Πύλαί. 2. A substantive in apposition to two or more substantives is put in the plural. ' A,.So when the substantive in apposition is in the predicate, ΦιΧησιος κα\ Αυκων ol Αχαιοί, Philesius and Lycon the Achceans. 3. A noun denoting a whole, which is regularly put in the genitive, may take the case of the nouns denoting .the parts ; as, Οΐκίαι al μεν ποΧΧαΙ €π€πτώκ€σαν, οΧίγαι δε π€ρίη<ταν, Most of the houses had fallen, and but few remained standing. Note 1. Sometimes a substantive (commonly a proper name) is re- peated for the saJte of emphasis ; in which (^se, the repeated noun 10* 226 SYNTAX. [§ 157. may, by attraction, be put in the nominative when there is a nomina- tive in its vicinity closely connected with it ; as Ααοθόη βν-γάτηρ *Άλ- τάο yepovTos' "Αλτβω os Λβλβγβσσι φίλοπτολεμοισίν αι/άσσβι, Laothoe the daughter of Altes old ; of Altes ivho rules over the warlike Leleges. So Ανδρομάχη θυγάτηρ μ€'γαλητορος Ή.€Τίωνος • Ηβτιων ος evaiev νπο Τίλάκω νΚψσσΎ], Andromache the daughter of magnanimous Eetion ; Ettion who dwelt at the foot of woody Placus. Note 2. The limiting noun, which regularly is put in the genitive, may stand in apposition with the limited noun when both nouns refer to the same thing ; as Ae/ca μναί €ΐσφορά, A ωntrihution of ten mincE, Note 3. Sometimes apposition takes place even when the nouns are partially related to each other; as {Her. 2, 133)''ΐναΌί δυώδβκα €Τ€α άντϊ Ιξ ετβων Ύβνηται, αί ννκτβς ημ€ραί yei/d/xei/at, In order that the number of years might becom£ for him twelve instead of six, the nights being reckoned as days. So (Id. 2,41) Touy βονς θάπτονσι, τα κέρατα υπερέχοντα, They bury the oxen with the horns above the ground. (Soph. An. 259) Λόγοι δ' iv άΧληΧοισιν €ρρόθονν κακοί, φυΚαξ ζΧεγχων φύλακα, And hard words passed between them, — ivatchman blaming watchman. Note 4. A personal or national appellative may be used adjective- ly ; as noXty Έλλά? or 'Έ.ΧΚψίς, A Grecian city, θησσαν τράπεζαν, Frwgal table (fare) . Note 5. Ανηρ, man ^ m^y accompany personal or national appella- tives, regarded as adjectives ; as Baaikcvs άνηρ, A man who is a king, simply A king. " Avb pes Αθηναίοι \ Men of Athens ! Athenians! "Av dp€s δίκασταί ! Judges ! Note 6. In Poetry, a verbal substantive of the masculine gender is sometimes put in apposition with a feminine noun ; as (Eurip. Med. 1390) Μυσαρά και παώολετορ. Vile murderess of thy οιωι children ! (Id. Hip. 689) ^i2 nay κάκιστη καί φίλων διαφθορευ, Ο thou most wicked woman and destroyer of thy friends ! ^ 157. 1. An adjective agrees with its substan- tive in gender, number, and case. , So when the adjective is in the predicate of the sentence. This rule applies also to the article, the adjective pronouns, and to the participle. E. g. Ανηρ σοφός, or Σοφός ανηρ, A ivise man. Τω €μω πατρί. To my father. Παρών ό ΚΟρο?, Cyrus being present. Εγώ (ίτολμός ei/xi, I am timid. With respect to position, when the substantive has no article, the adjective is placed before or after its substantive. (a) A noun or pronoun in the dual may take a participle in the § 157.] SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 227 plural. On the other hand, a noun or pronoun in the plural may take a participle in the dual when two things are meant. E. g. Νώ καταβάι/- Γ69, We both descending. Alyvmoi κλάζοντζ μάχονται, Two vultures uttering loud shrieks fight. (b) The masculine of the dual of all adjective forms may agree with a feminine substantive ; as Τώ όδώ, The two ways. Ύοντοιν τοίν κϊνη- a€OLVj Of these two motions. (c) When the subject of a sentence is, or is regarded as, an inani- mate thing (ri, χρήμα, πράγμα), the adjective in the predicate is put in the neuter singular; as Ή χιών ην aXeeivop, The snow was warm (a warm thing). (d) When the subject is any word but a nominative, the adjective in the predicate is put in the neuter singular or plural ; as Fadiov ην λα- βύν, To take was easy. It ivas easy to take. Advvara ην rovs AoKpovs άμύι/€σθαι. It teas impossible to chastise the Locrians. (e) The participle of the copula may agree in gender with the noun in the predicate ; as *H Xiaiva ibv Ισχνρότατον, The lioness being a very strong animal. 2. If an adjective refers to two or more substan- tives, it is put in the plural, and in the leading gen- der, which is the masculine with respect to the other genders, and the feminine with respect to the neuter. So when the adjective is in the predicate of the sentence. E. g. Bovv κα\ Ίππον κα\ κάμηΧον oXovs οπτονς, An ox, a horse, and a camel, roasted ivhole. Tpatdia καΐ yepovria κα\ πρόβατα ολίγα κα\ βους καταΚ^Χ^ίμμ^νους, Old women and old men, a few sheep, and oxen, abandoned, (a) If the substantives denote inanimate beings, the adjective is reg- ularly neuter; as Al6ol t€ κα\ πΧίνθοι κα\ ξνΧα ατάκτως ^ρριμμύνα. Stones, brick, and timber, thrown together without order. (b) The adjective may agree Λvith one of the substantives, common- ly with the most prominent one ; as {Eur. Bac. 905) Έτβρα ολβω κα\ dvvap€L, In another kind of prosperity and power. (c) The adjective or participle may be put in the dual if it refers to tv^^o substantives ; as Καλλία? κα\ ΑΧκιβιά^ης ηκβτην αγοντ€ τον Τ1ρό8ί- κον, Callias and Alcibiades came bringing Prodicus. 3. A collective substantive in the singular may take an adjective or participle in the plural ; as Τροίην ίλοντες Apyetwv στό\ο<;, The army of the Ar- gives having taken Troy. 228 SYNTAX. [§^ 158, 159. Note 1. (a) Sometimes the gender and number of the adjective are determined by the adnominal genitive ; as Ιΐτηνών ayeKai woSetVai/rey, Flocks of birds having been terrified. (b) Sometimes the gender of the adjective or participle is determin- ed by the gender implied in the substantive ; as Φίλε τβκνον, Dear child. Έλθων βίη ΉρακΚηΐη, The might of Hercules having come; that is Hercules, Note 2. The masculine is commonly used in general remarks or assertions, even when the objects- spoken of belong to the female sex ; as ol αγαθοί, the good ; ol κακοί, the wicked; oi τίκτοντας, parents. So also when, in the tragic Poets, a Λvoman speaks of herself in the plural. (^ 150, τι. 1.) Note 3. Δυο or Δυ ω, two, is very often joined to plural substan- tives ; as Δυο -^νχάς. ΑνοΙν οίμωγμασι. Aovpc, two spears, and δσσβ, the eyes, in Homer, are accompanied by a plural adjective. § 158. 1. Any adjective or participle may be used sub- stantively, the substantive with which it agrees being under- stood ; as φίλος, a friend ; ol θνητοί, the mortals ; τα e/xa, my property ; ol φίλοσοφονντ€ς, philosophers, 2. The neuter singular of an adjective or participle, preced- ed by the article, may be used for the corresponding abstract noun ; as τ6 καλόν, the beautiful^ beauty ; τ6 θζίον, divinity ; το bebios, fear ; to μζλλον, the future. So TO €μόν, that lohich is mine, periphrastically for εγώ, I. 3. Masculine and feminine adjectives often supply the place of adverbs ; as ;(^i^o$•, hesternus ; ασμ^νος, gladly. Particu- larly numeral adjectives in -aioy ; as τριταίος., π^μπταως. § ISO• 1. When the comparative is not followed by the genitive, the conjunction rj^ than., is put between it and the word with which it is compared ; the case of the latter being the same as that of tlie former ; as, MeXXetff iir avbpas στρατ^ν^σθαι άμζίνονας η Έκύθας, Thou art about to march against men superior to the Scythians. Ύοϊς βασιλίυσι των \ακ€^αιμονίων ά^ικίίν ήττον βξεστιν η τοΐς ίδίώ- ταις. The kings of the Lacedcemonians have less power to do wrojig than private individuals. Τίη-γοΧ MatavS/jov ποταμοί) καί ίτερον ουκ ελάσσονος η Μαιάνδρου, The sources of the river Mceander, and of another river not smaller than the Mceander. fa,) Sometimes the nominative is used after ή, the context determin- § 159.] SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 229 ing its verb ; as To7s ν€ωτ€ροίς κα\ μοΧλον άκμάζον(ην fj βγω, παραινώ, SC. ακμάζω, Ι advise the young ivho are more vigorous than I am, (b) llpd?, κατά, ore, ως, ώστε, may be used after ή; as Μείζω rj κατά δάκρυα, Too great for tears, 2. A comparison between two qualities of the same person or thing is expressed by means of two comparatives with ή be- tween them ; as Μανικώτεροί η ανδρειότεροι. More rash than brave, 3. When the word, with which the comparison is made, is omitted, the Greek comparative corresponds to the English positive with too^ rather^ som,ewhat^ pretty^ a little, a little too ; as "Οπου δε στενωτερα είη ή οδός, And wherever the road teas too narroio. 4. The comparative may be strengthened by ert, etiam, yet^ stilly μέγα, mucli^ μακρω^ longe, by far^ ολίγω, ολίγον^ little^ by less^ τΓολλω, ετι ττολλω, πολι', multo^ much^ more^ οσω, όσον, by as much as^ the more^ τοσούτον, τοσοντω, so much^ the more ; also by μάλλον, more, 5. The superlative m.ay be strengthened by μακρω, πολλω, ΤΓολί; οσω, τοσοντω, οίος, ως, οττωί, οτι'^ fi^ quam, very ; εν τοις, of αΙΙ^ among all ; also by μάλιστα, πλείστον, μεγιστον, most^ very» Note 1. When a word implies a comparison, it maybe followed by ή\ than ; as Τουναντίον δρων η προσηκ αυτω ποιείν, Doing contrary to what he ought to do. Words of this class are βουλομαι, ^θελω, ζητεω, δίκαιον, σοφόν, εναν- τίον, πικρός, and some others. Note 2. The adverbs πλέον, μείον, ελαττον, often have the ap- pearance of indeclinable adjectives ; as ΐίελταστάς κα\ τοξότας πλέον η είκοσι μυριάδας. More than twenty myriads of targeteers and archers. Note 3. "Ή may be omitted after πλέον, πλείω, ελαττον, followed by a numeral ; as^Er?; γεγονως πλείω έβδομη κοντά, Being upwards of seventy years of age. Note 4. The superlative in a few instances has the force of the comparative ; as Σβίο δ', ΚχιΚΚεΰ, οϋτις άνηρ προπάροιθε μακάρτατος, No man, Ο Achilles, was ever more completely happy than thou. Note 5. After οίος, ως, όπως, οτι (properly ο τι), and 17, the words δυνατόν εστί, or δυνασθαι, as much as possible, as he can or could, may be mentally supplied ; as 'Άνδρας ΙΙελοποννησίους οτι πλείστους, As many Peloponnesians as possible. 230 SYNTAX. [§ 160. PRONOUNS AND ARTICLE. § 160. 1. The genitive of the personal pronoun corre- sponds to the English my^ mine^ our^ ours ; thy^ thine^ your^ yours ; his^ her^ Jiers^ its, their, theirs. 2. Έμον, €μοΙ, €μ€, are more emphatic than the correspond- ing enchtics /ιοί), μοί, μ€. In Poetry, however, even the latter are sometimes emphatic ar antithetic. 3. After a preposition, ejn ο ί, €/χ ο ί, e/xe are generally used. Except μ€ in the expression προς /xe, which however is less strong than np6s e/ie. ' 4. Αυτοί is the usual third person of the personal pronoun. In the oblique cases it refers either to a person or thing dif- ferent from the subject of the sentence, or to the subject of the principal sentence. The same remark applies to the oblique cases of t. E. g. *0 νόμος αυτόν ουκ ia, The law does not permit him, Kvpos edelro τον Σάκα σημαίν€ΐν αυτω, Cyrus desired Sacas to notify to him (sc. Cyrus). ' (a) Αυτοί, accompanied by a substantive, is emphatic, self, very. Sometimes it means by one^s self, in the sense of alone. E. g. Κύτος M€v(uv, Menon himself. Κύρος αυτός, Cyrus himself Αντοϊ yap eV/xei/, For we are alone. (b) Αυτοί, self, very, may be placed before a personal pronoun ex- pressed or implied ; as Αυτοί ei/xt, sc. €γώ, I am the very man. Αυτός συ, or Συ αυτός. Thou thyself. Ταύτα αυτοί €ποια.τ€, You did these things yourselves. (c) Αυτοί, self, very, may be connected with ούτος or ζκίινος, for the sake of emphasis ; as Αυτοί ούτος. This very person. Αυτός ficei- νος. That very person. Αυτού Ικτίνου ^ His own. (d) Αυτοί is used with ordinal numbers, to show that one person with others, whose number is less by one than the number implied in the ordinal, is spoken of; as Ήιρβθη πρ^σβ^υτης €ς Αακ€^αίμονα Se/ca- τος αυτός. He being the tenth {with nine others) was appointed plenipo- tentiary to LacedcBMon. (e) In sentences containing the reflexive pronoun, the nominative of αυτός may, for the sake of emphasis, be placed near the reflexive pronoun ; as Παλαιστήι/ νυν τταρασκ€υάζ€ται in αυτός αυτω, He is now preparing an antagonist against himself (f) In Homer, Αύτόί is often used when a person or thing is to be opposed to any thing connected with it ; as Πολλοί δ' Ιφθϊμους ψϋχας "A'idi npoiayjrev ηρώων, αυτούς di ίλώρια τ€υχ€ κύν^σσιν, And sent pre- § 161.] PRONOUNS AND ARTICLE. 231 maturely many brave souls of heroes to Hades , and made their bodies the prey of dogs, 5. AvToy, preceded by the article, signifies idem^ the same; as Ίΐ€ρ\ των αυτών rrjs αυτής ήμβρας ου ταύτα Ύίγνώσκ.ομ€ν, We do not have the same opinion concerning the same things on the sa?ne day. Note 1. In the Ionic Avriters, ου and the other cases commonly r«- fer to a person or thing different from the subject of the sentence. In the Attic Λvriters they generally refer to the subject of the principal sentence, like the Latin sui, sibi,se. Note 2. Sometimes the personal pronoun is equivalent to the re- flexive ; that is, it refers to the subject of the sentence ; as Oi/xat \η- ρ€Ϊν pe, I think I am taUcing nonsense. Αλλά πολλού μοι 8οκώ τα υμί- τερα €χ€ίν, But Ι think Ι am far from having your things. Note 3. In some instances the third person of the personal pronoun stands for the second; {II. 10, 398) Σφίσιν for υμίν. {Her, 3, 71) Σφ€α^ for νμας. Note 4. The personal pronoun is sometimes repeated in the same sentence for the sake of greater perspicuity ; as E/xot μβν, el καΐ μη καθ* Έλλήι/ων χθόνα τεθράμμεθ^ , αλλ* ουν ξυνετά μοι δοκεί? λέγειν, Το us, although we have not been h^ought up in the land of the Greeks, never- theless thou seemest to speak intelligible things. Note 5. AVhen a noun is separated by intermediate sentences from the verb with which it is connected, αυτό 9^ in its regular signification (4), is, for the sake of perspicuity, put in apposition with that noun ; as Εγώ μ^ν ούν βασίλία, ω πολλά ούτως eVri τα συμμαγα, €Ϊπ€ρ προθϋ- μζίται ημάς άπολύσαι, ουκ οΙΒα ο τι δει αυτόν όμόσαυ, jSow^for my part, I do not see why the king, whose resources are so great, should swear to us, if he really meant to destroy us. Note 6. Αυτό? in the oblique cases is sometimes joined to the rel- ative pronoun for the sake of perspicuity ; as^i2i/ 6 piv αυτών, One oj whom. Examples of this kind are of frequent occurrence in the Sep- tuagint and New Testament. Note 7. The genitive of the first and second persons of the per- sonal pronoun is seldom put after a substantive in classical writers ; thus Ό πατήρ μου is much rarer than Ό εμος πατήρ, My father, § 1©I. 1. The refexive pronoun refers either to the sub- ject of the sentence in which it stands, or to the subject of the principal sentence ; as Σαυτην επώείκνϋ, Shoio thyself. Ό Ap- μ^νως €σιώπα άπορων πότερα συμβουλευοι τώ Κυρω κατακαΐνειν εαυτόν^ The Armenian king kept silence, hesitating lohether to advise Cyrus to slay him. When the genitive of this pronoun depends on a noun, it is equiv- alent to the genitive of the personal pronoun, or to the possessive pro- 232 SYNTAX. [§§ 162, 163. noun ; as Αστυάγης μ(Τ€π€μψατο την iavTov θυγατέρα και τον Traiha αυτής, Astyages sent for his own daughter and her son, '2, The reciprocal pronoun regularly refers to the subject of the sentence in which it stands ; as Αλληλα? ίωρων, They looked at each other. Note 1 . The reflexive pronoun may also refer to the ohject of the sentence to which it belongs ; as λπο σαυτου εγώ σε δίδά^ω, Ι will il- lustrate it to you from your own case. Note 2. Sometimes εαυτού stands for εμαυτου or σεαυτοϋ ; as Αεί ημάς άνερεσθαι εαυτούς, We must ask ourselves, Μόρον τον αυτής οϊσθα, Thou knowest thy fate. Note 3. The third person of the reflexive may stand for the recip- rocal. On the other hand, the reciprocal may be used for the reflexive. E. g. KvTL υφορωμενων εαυτας ηδεως άλληΧας εώρων, Instead of look- ing cross at each other, they looked smilingly. Καθ* αύτοΐν, Against ear^ other, Αιεφθεφαν αλλήλους, They destroyed themselves ; that is, Eaca destroyed himself ^ 163• The possesswe pronoun is equivalent to the gen- itive of the personal ; consequently it has all the properties of the adnominal genitive ; as Ό εμός πατήρ, for Ό πατήρ μου, My father. Οίκος 6 σος. Thy house. So οίκος <το$•, A house of thine, One of thy houses ΤΙόλιν την ημε- τεραν. Our city ; ΐΐόλιν ημετεραν, A city of ours. Ol εμοι παΙΒες, My children; Παίδες εμοί, Some of my children. Σος πόθος, My regret for thee. Note. "Ό ς, his, in Homer, sometimes stands for εμός, σός. — Σ φ έ- τερος for υμέτερος, in Hesiod ; for εμός, in Theocritus. § 1β3• 1. The demonstratives Sbe, ούτος, τόσος, ΤΌίος, ωδε, οΰτως regularly denote that which is before the mind of the speaker ; as οΰτος 6 άνψ, This man. "Έλεγε τάδε. He said these things. 2, Εκείνος, that., he,, she,, it,, regularly refers to a remote per- son or thing ; as Εκείνοι άπολοΰνται. Those men will perish. Note 1. In Herodotus, ούτος, τοσούτος, τοιούτος, and ούτως regu- larly refer to what precedes ; οδβ, τοσόσδε, τοιόσδε, ωδε, to what fol- lows. Note 2. The demonstrative pronoun is sometimes apparently equiv- alent to the adverbs ενταύθα, ωδβ, εκεί; as ^ΙΛνάγκασα σε τούτον, i compelled thee who art here. So Κύτη 8ε σοι γης περίοδος πάσης. Όρας; Λιδβ μεν Αθήναι, Here is for tJiee a map of the lokole earth. Sccst thou .? Here is AtJwns, §§ 164 - 166.] ARTICLE. 233 Note 3. The demonstrative may refer to a noun which goes before in the same sentence, if that noun has been separated from its verb by intervening sentences ; as Μβγιστ/τ/ζ/ τον Κκαρνηνα τούτον τον ζίπαντα €Κ των Ιρών τα. μβΧΚοντά σφι €κβαίν€ίν, Megistias the Acarna- ηιαη .... the one who foretold by the entrails of the victims what would happen to them. Note 4. The demonstrative sometimes follows the relative in the same sentence ; \vbov ποταμον bs κροκοδβίλονς devTepos ούτος ποταμών πάντων παρ€χ€ταί, The river Indus, luhich ts the second river in the world that produces crocodiles. Note 5. Τούτο may refer to a sentence or clause ; as Αίσθόμ^νος τον Αθάμαντα άποκτ€ΐναί ueXovra τον Φρίξον δτ^λοί τοντο τω Φρίξω, Perceiving that Athamas intended to slay Phrixus, he makes it known to Phrixus. § 1G4• The interrogative pronouns and adverbs are used in direct or indirect questions ; as Σύ τις el; Who art thou 1 Olde TL βονλ€ται^ He knows what it wants. § IGS. The indefinite rly, annexed to a substantive, means a certain.^ 5ome, or simply «, an. Without a substantive, it means some one^ somebody, some person^ a certain one ; as "Op- vWes TLves, Some birds. Aeyovai TLves, Some (persons) say. Note 1. (a) Tly is sometimes used for €καστος; as Έυ tls 8όρυ θηξάσθω^ Let every one sharpen his spear well. (b) Sometimes it refers to the speaker or to the person addreseed ; as Ποΐ τις φυγή, Whither can one (I) go ? "Hkcl τω κακόν, Misfor- tune has come to some one {thee). (c) Ύ\ς may mean somebody in the sense of a distinguished person, a man of consequence ; ri, something great, to the purpose ; as Κηγων φαίνομαι τις ημ^ς, I too seem to be somebody. 'Έδοξε τι €ΐπ€Ϊν τω Αστνάγ€ΐ, He seemed to Astyages to say something to the purpose. Note 2, Τ is• is often joined to adjectives and adverbs of quality or quantity, for the sake of strengthening or weakening their signifi cation, as the case may be ; as Τννη ωραιότατη τις, A most blooming woman. Ημέρας έβδομηκοντά τινας. Some seventy days. ΙΙόσος τις; How big a one ? Note 3. The Poets may rejoeai ri? in the same sentence ; as^Eσrt τις ου πρόσω Σπάρτης πόΧις τις, There is, not far from Sparta, a cer- tain city. ARTICLE. C^ 166. 1. Originally the article was a demonstrative or relative pronoun;- Ae, she., it., this., that; who., which., lo.hat. Thus, in the Epic dialect, it is generally a demonstrative or 234 * SYNTAX. [§ 167. relative pronoun ; in the new Ionic, and Doric, very often ; and not unfrequently in the Tragedians. E. g. Ό yap βασιληϊ χόλωβ€ίς, For he having been incensed against the king, Ai δ' €π€μνξαν Αθηναίη re καί'Ήρη, And they muttered, Athene and Hera, 'Όρνϊς ipos τω οϋνομα Φοίνιξ, A sacred bird, the name of which is Phoenix. 2. In the Attic prose -writers, the article retains its demon- strative force in the following cases : ,7^1 a) When it is followed by /leV, Se, without a substantive ; espe- cially in the formula ό μ€ν 6 Se, the one the other, one .... another, some others ; as *0 /xeV ηρχ€ ol δ' ίπ^Ιθοντο, He com" manded and they obeyed. (b) Before the relatives oy, οσο?, οΧος ; as Ύον oy εφ?/, Him who said. Ovdevbs των οσα αίσχννην €στΙ φβροντα. None oj those things luhich are regarded as bringing shame. Mlaelv rovs oUs nep ovtos, To hate such as are like this man. (c) In the expression κα\ τόν, and he, before an infinitive ; as Ka\ τον κ€\€νσαι. And he commanded. (d) In the expression τον καί τόν, this man and that man ; το καί το, this and that, so and so. (e) In TO ye, this ; προ του, or προτού, before this time, formerly. (f) In τω, for this reason, therefore, borrowed from the Epic style. § 1 G7. In its usual signification, the article is a weak de- monstrative pronoun. Accordingly it is used when a person or thing is before the mind of the speaker, writer, hearer, or reader. E. g. "ίπτΓο?, A horse ; *0 Ίππος, The horse, weaker than this or that horse. "Kvbpcs, Men, A number of men; Ol avdpes. The men. 1. Proper names may take the article ; as 6 Σωκράτης, 6 ΟΧνμπος, al Αθήναι. 2. Abstract nouns, and names of sciences^ and the elements of nature, may take the article ; as η αχαριστία, ingratitude ; ή αριθμητική, arithmetic ; 6 χρυσός, gold as a metal ; 6 άηρ^ air ; η yrj, earth. ' 3. When the article is prefixed to such objects as are closely connected with a particular person, it has the force of the pos- sessive pronoun ; "Ερχ€ται η Μαν^άνη προς τον πατέρα, Mandant came to her father. § 168.] ARTICLE. 235 4. The article may be placed before τοωυτος, τοιόσ^ε^ τοσού- τος, τηλικουτος, τις, ποίος, and even before a personal or reflexive pronoun. Δ^ΐι/α, such-a-one^ always takes the article. 5. The article is put before a numeral depending on άμφί, π€ρι, €iSj νπ€ρ ; as ΑμφΙ τα πίντζ η ίκκαώ^κα €τη αντον yei/ojLteVov, He being about fifteen or sixteen years old. 6. The neuter singular of the article may be prefixed to any word or expression regarded as a substantive ; as To νμ,ζίς. The word υμ€Ϊς, Τω efrnt χρησθαί, To use the vwrd CLvai, So before the infinitive ; as To ττίν^ιν, Drinking, To drink. Τον κτησασθαι, Of acquiring. Έν τω χρησθαι, In using, In the use. 7. In grammatical language, every word regarded as an in- dependent object takes the gender of the name of the part of speech to which it belongs ; as ό γάρ, sc. σΰζ/δβσ/χοί, The con- junction yap ; η €γώ, SC. αντωνυμία, The pronoun iya> ; το την, SC. αοθρον. The article την. Note 1. Sometimes the article is of the gender of the substantive which refers to a quotation ; as Κα\ην '4φη παραίνξσιν elvat την καδ- ^νναμιν €p^€Lv, He said, *' To sacrifice to the gods according to thy power, '^^ IS good advice, where the gender of the article before the ex- pression κα^δύναμίν cp^eiv is determined by the substantive τταραίν^σιν. Note 2. When the force of the article is lost sight of in the words τ αυτόν {το αυτό), and θάτ€ρον (το €Τ€ρον), they may be pre- ceded by another article ; as Tlepl το ταυτόν, About the same thing. *0 του θατ€ρου κύκΧος, The circle of the other. {^ § 168. 1. When a noun which has just preceded would naturally be repeated, the article belonging to it is alone ex pressed ; as Ot re Ε€νοφώντος τταίδβρ καΐ οί των αΧλων ποΧΐτων, Both the children of Xenophon^ and those of the other citizens (Ji2. In certain phrases, a noun is understood after the article i^^Avdpes, "Ανθρωποι, men, people; as Oi iv αστ€ί. Those in the \ city. Ot συν αύτω, Those with him. — Oi άμφί τίνα, or Οί π€ρί ] τίνα, Those about any body^ most commonly means a person and his attendants, men, suite, followers, or disciples ; sometimes it stands for the person merely. (ji^ Τη, or Χώρα, land, country ; as Ets την ίαυτων, To their own coun- try. Τυνη, wife, Tdcrely; as Βυρσίνης της Ίππίου, Bijrsine the wife of Hippias. Φερ^τΤμης της Βάττβω, Of Pheretlnia the ivife of Battus. J J Πραγ/χα, οτ Χρήμα, thing, affairs ; as Τα της πόλεως, The affairs I of the state. Τα των 6e(uv, That which comes from the gods. To του Όμηρου, That which Homer says. — Not unfrequently the neuter ar- ticle with a genitive is equivalent to a substantive ; as Τά της οργής, 236 SYNTAX. \§ 169. for η οργή, ivrathj anger» To των πρεσβυτέρων ημών, for ΉμεΊς ol πρεσβύτεροι. We the old people. Υ LOS, son ; as *0 Κλετνίον, The son of Clinias. (Λ § 169. 1. The article may be separated from its substan- tive by an adjective, a possessive pronoun, or participle ; also by an adnominal genitive, an adverb, or by a preposition with its case ; as, *0 σοφός άνηρ, The wise man. Τον εμού οϊκον, Of my house. Triv νπάρχονσαν ^νναμιν, The force which is. To εκείνων πΧοΊον, Their vessel. Ot τότε άνθρωποι, The men of that time. Του κατ"^ άστρα Ζηνός, Of Zeus who dwells among the stars ; in heauen. 2. The word or words accompanying the substantive may come, with the article, after the substantive ; in which case the article may be placed also before the substantive ; as, Ανηρ 6 σοφός, or Ό άνηρ 6 σοφός, j ΟΪκου του ε μου, or Του οϊκου του εμού. Αυναμιν την υπάρχουσαν, οι Ύην ^ΰναμιν την υπάρχονσαν. Το πλοΊ,ον το εκείνων. "Ανθρωποι οί τότε. Τους πολέμους τους προς τους Καρ^ούχους, The wars with the Car' duchians. 3. When a substantive is accompanied by two or more ad- juncts, the article may be repeated with each one of them. When, however, the substantive and one of the adjuncts are regarded as one complex idea, the article is placed only before the other adjuncts. E. g. Έχρωντο ταΐς ξυ\ίναις άσπίσι τα7ς Αϊγυπτίαις, They used the I^'gyp^ tian loooden shields. Έν Tfj του Αιος τη /xeytVrr; εορτή, At the grand festival of Zeus, So To εν Αρκαδία το του Αώς του Αυκαίου Ιερόν, The temple of Zeus Lyc(Tus in Arcadia. Τά τείχη τα εαυτών τα μακρά, Their own long walls. Από των εν τη Έυρωπη πόΧεων ^ΈλΧηνί^ων, From the Grecian states in Europe. 4. The article may be separated from its substantive also by μεν, δε, τε, ye, yap, δη, αύτος αυτού, and, in the lonic dialect, by τις. Also by the object (genitive, dative, accusative) of the sentence. E. g. Ύών τις στρατιωτεων. Some one of the soldiers. Tot? αύτος αυτού πημασι βαρύνεται, He is burdened with his Oton suf' ferings. § 169.] ARTICLE. 237 5. Sometimes the article is separated from its noun by an incidental sentence ; as Αποπανσ -as του 6πότ€ βονΚοιντο βκαστοι γυναίκα aycaOai, Hacing caused them ίο cease from marrying whenever they wished, 2 6. When an adjective without the article agrees with a sub- stantive with the article, the copula et/xt, or its participle ωζ/, is, in good Greelc, always understood ; that is, the adjective forms a predicate ; as, *0 άνηρ σοφός, or Σοφός ο άνηρ, The man is wise ; Wise is the man. So Πολλώζ/ των €πιτηδ€ίων, or Ύών ζπιτη^^Ιων ποΧλων, The provis- ions being many. *Εώρα πολλά rot Acpea, He saw that the meat was abundant ; that there loas much meat. ΎοΊ,ς λόγοι? βραχυτίροις €χρητο, The luords which he used were shorter. 7. When several substantives are connected by και, re .... /cat, the article is repeated with each when they are indepen- dent of, or contrasted with, each other. But when they are regarded as one whole, only the first one takes the article. E.g. Επί Ή-υΚας της Κιλικίας κα\ της Συρίας, Το the Gates of Cilicia and Syria. At €\αφοι κα\ ^ορκάΒες κα\ οΐ aypioi οί€ς κα\ οΐ όνοι οΐ άγριοι άσιν€Ίς €ΐσιν, Hinds and gazelles, wild sheep a7id wild asses, are harmless. 8. Two or even three articles may stand together ; as Οί των παίδων Βώάσκαλοι, The instructers of the hoys. Τά της των πολ- \ων ψυχής όμματα, The cyes of the souls of the many. Note 1. When a verbal noun denoting the action of the verb is followed by a preposition with its case, the preposition may be put after that noun without the repetition of the article ; as *H νυν ύ /xere- pa οργή eV Μιτν\ηναίους, Your present excitement against the Mityte- nians. Note 2. When the article is separated from its substantive ac- cording to the first paragraph, it designates the- substantive and its adjunct or adjuncts as one complex idea ; thus 6 σοφός άνηρ, without any special reference to those who are not σοφοί. But when it comes after the substantive, according to the second paragraph, it emphasizes the adjunct or adjuncts following it ; thus, άνηρ 6 σοφός, the man who is wise, as distinguished from those who are not wise. Note 3. When μίσος, medius, middle, άκρος, extreme, Εσχα- τος, last, are arranged according to the sixth paragraph, they mean the middle, the extremity, or top, of the object denoted by the noun with which they agree, even when the article is omitted; as Aia μίσου του παραδ€ίσου, Through the middle of the park. Note 4. (a) 'Άλλοί, with the article, means the rest, the other 238 SYNTAX. [§§ 170, 171. fart^ of any thing ; as To ak\o στράτευμα, The rest of the army ; but "Αλλο στράτευμα, Another army, (b) When τα aWa (τ αλλ a) is followed by a substantive with the article, that substantive is in apposition with τα άλλα ; as Τα άλλα τα ΤΓολιτικά, The other things, to vi^it, politics, § 17©. 1. When a substantive with the article is in appo- sition with a proper name, it is placed after that proper name ; in which case the proper name rarely takes the article. But names of rivers, mountains, countries, (rarely of islands,) are, with respect to the position of the article, regarded as adjec- tives : and if the nouns are of different genders, the article is repeated. E. g. Βοΐσκος 6 πνκτης 6 Θεσσαλός, Boiscus the boxer, the Thessalian, Ίου Tiy ρητός ποταμού, Of the river Tigres, Ύης'Ί^ης του ορούς, Of Ida, the mountain, 2, W^hen a substantive with the article is accompanied by a personal or de7nonstraiive ^ronoxm, or by παί, άπας, όλος, έκα- στος, ίκάτερος, άμφω, άμφότερος, it is placed before or after these words ; as, *HjLt6iff OL στρατηγοί, We, the generals. Αυτούς τους πρεσβυτέρους, The elders themselves. Ούτος 6 ορνις^ or *0 όρνις ούτος, Tliis bird, ΐΐάντες ol "Έλληνες or Oi "Έλληνες πάντες, ΑΠ the Greeks. Τω παϊδε άμφοτερω, or Αμφοτερω τω παίδε, Both the children. Note 1. When a proper name is appended to 6^ε, οΰτος, εκεΊνος, or αυτός, the article is commonly omitted. It is omitted also when an abstract noun is appended to αυτός ; as Αύτη επιστήμη, Knowledge itself; The essence of knoioledge. Note 2. Ούτος άνηρ, Ουτοσ\ άνηρ, This man. This fellow here, are used in colloquial style ; but 'Ό δ' άνηρ is more dignified than the preceding. Note 3. When πας, άπας are adjectives, they take the article ac- cording to the general rule. RELATIVE. \ § 171. 1. Originally the relative pronoun had the force of the demonstrative ; this^ thai., he., she., it. Thus, in the Epic dialect it sometimes stands for οδβ, ούτος ; as. Αλλα και ος ^ε'ώοικε Αώς μεγάλοιο κεραυνόν, But even he dreads the thunderbolt of irreat Zeus. *0? γαρ ^εύτατος ήλθε, For he came last, νΐάτροκλον κλαιωμεν • δ yap γέρας εστί Θανόντων, Let US mourn Pa- troclus, for this is honor to the dead. § 172.] RELATIVE. 239 2. In prose, 6s retains its demonstrative force in the follow- ing expressions : (a)*Os• μ€ν....ος 6e, equivalent to ό μεν... .6 de ; as UoXeLs Ελλη- νίδας, ας μεν άναιρών, εΙς ας δε τους φυγάδας κατάγων, Destroying some of the Grecian cities, and bringing back the exiles into others. (b) Ka\ OS, And he; as Και os i^avaστas φενγεί, And he rising up fled. Kat OL ηρώτων, And they asked. (c)*Off κα\ OS, This man and that man, Some one; as Ίας βασί- ληΐas Larias επίόρκηκε os κα\ os, Some one has sworn falsely by the royal hearth. (d)'H δ' OS, Said he; Ή δ' η, Said she ; used parenthetically. Note. This rule applies also to the ad^Lib ως, thus, with the acute accent. ^ 172. In its usual signification, the relative is a kind of weak demonstrative. ^1, The relative agrees with its antecedent j that is, the noun to which it refers, in gender and num- ber ; its case is determined by the construction of the sentence in which it stands ; as. Των δώδεκα μνων as ελaβεs, Of the twelve mincB ichich thou receiv edst. *Έορτην iv Βαβυλωνι ηκονσεν είναι, εν τ) πάvτεs οί Βαβυλώνια ολην την νύκτα πίνονσιν, He heard that a feast was celebrating in Baby- lon, during which all the Babylonians drink the whole night. (a) The person of a verb agreeing• with the relative pronoun is de- termined by that of the antecedent, expressed or implied ; Ss Ή/χΐζ/ ου θύετε αΐτινε5 τηρουμεν υμά$, You do not sacrifice to us who preserve you. So Λvhen the antecedent is implied in a possessive pronoun ; as Kvav- bpla TTj ημέτερα olτLvεsσε ου διεσώσαμεν. Through our cowardice (of us) , who did not save thee. (b) The masculine of the dual of the relative may agree with a fem- mine antecedent ; as Ή/χώι/ εν εκάστω δύο τινε εστον Ιδεα αρχοντε κα\ αγοϊ^ε, οίν επόμεθα. In each one of us there are two principles ruling and leading, lohich ive follow. (k:) When the antecedent is, oris regarded as, an inanimate thing, the relative is put in the neuter singular. Also, when the antecedent IS a sentence. E. g. Τυραννίδα Θηραν, ο πληθει χρημασίν θ' άλίσκεται, Τυ hunt power, tvhich is caught by means of nwnbers and money. So Ql εξελθ6vτεs''^\ληvεs συν αυτοίς επεφεύγεσαν /χάλ' οντες συχνοί' 6 οϋπω πρόσθεν εττεποιηκεσαν. The Greeks ivho went out with them had fled, although quite numerous ; a thing which they had never done be- fore. 240 SYNTAX. [§ 172. (d) When the relative is connected with a verb signifying to call, to name, to he, to believe, it may agree in gender and number with the noun in apposition with it ; as Ό φόβος ην αιδώ άπομ^ν. That kind of fear ivJiich ive have called respect. To ήθος rjwep ην devrepa πίστις. Character, ivhich certainly is a second source of confidence. (e) The relative in the singular may refer to a noun in the plural, when one of the persons or things contained in that noun is meant ; as Olvos σ€ Tpa)€L μβΧιη^ης os re καϊ ciXXovs βλάπτ€ί, os av μιν χαν^ον Γλη, Wine, sweet as honey, makes a fool of thee, wJdch ruins others also^ — whoever fours it doivn immoderately. 2. If the relative refers to two or more nouns, it is put in the plural and in the leading gender ; as, ΑΪας καϊ Ύ€υκρος ol μβγίστον eXeyxov eboaav της αυτών avhpeias^ Ajax and Teucer, who gave the clearest proof of their valor. (a) If the antecedents denote inanimate objects, the relative is regu- larly neuter ; as TLepX πολβμον και ζίρηνης a μξγίστην €χ€ΐ hvvapiv, Con- cerning war and peace, ivhich have very great infiuence. (b) The relative may agree Λvith one of the antecedents, commonly with the most prominent one ; as θάνατον καϊ Κηρα μίΧαιναν ος οη σφι σχ^δυκ io-rt, Death and dark Destiny, who (Death) is now near them, (c) The relative may be put in the dual when it refers to two sub- stantives. 3. The relative may be put in the plural, when it refers to a collective noun in the singular, or to a whole class of persons or things implied in a singu- lar antecedent. E, g. TikfjOeL οίπερ ^ικάσ-ονσι, To the multitude who ivill judge. Has TLs ομνϋσί οίς οφειλών τυγχάνω, Every man, to whom I happen to owe money, swears. Ανηρ αυτουργός οϊπερ σώζουσί την γη ν, Α man of the working class y which class deftnds the land. 4. The antecedent is omitted when it is either a general word (χ^ρημα, ττραγμα, ούτος, e/ceZz/o?), or One which can be easily supplied from the context ; as, Ουτοί elaiv ους ορατζ, sc. cKelvoL, These are they whom you see. To μίγ^θος υπ€ρ ων συνεΧηΧύβαμεν, SC. (Κείνων, The magnitude of those things for which we are assrnibled. ΏαρακαΧίσας όπόσους enaOcv, Having invited as many as he could induce. This rule applies also to relative adverbs ; as 'Ίστ? δ;77Γον όθεν 6 §§ 173, 174.] RELATIVE. 241 17X10$• άνίσχ€ί καΐ οπού dveraiy You surely know whence the sun rises and where it sets. Note 1. Sometimes the gender of the relative is determined by the gender implied in the antecedent ; as Tay Κθψας ol ye c/xe κ.α\ πατέρα τον •€μον υπήρξαν α^ικα ποΐ€υντ€ς, Athens (the Athenians) who began first to act unjustly towards me and my fatlier. Note 2. The omission of the antecedent gives rise to the following words and phrases : €uioi {evL οϊ), some ; € ν lore {evi ore), sometimes, €ΐσΙν OL, €στιν ol, €στιν oItlvcs, for eViot, rivks sunt qui, there are who, simply some ; regarded as one word. €στιν y or οτΓτ;, for πτ], in some way. €στίν όπως, for ττώ?, somehow. ουκ €σ^' οττωί, by no means, in no manner, (7^ § 173• When the sentence containing the relative is, in the mind of the speaker or writer, more important than that containing the antecedent, it is, by inversion^ placed first ; as, *A πάντ€ς ϊσάσι, τάδ' eWi, What all know is this; These are the things which all know, "O TL καλόν, φίλον aUl, Whatever is beautiful is always dear. So Ot δ' ore δή ρ' ΐκάνον οθι σκοπον "Έκτορος €κταν, €νβ^ 08v(T€vg pev €ρνξ€ν ωκ€ας ϊππονς, And when they came where they had slain the spy of Hector, then Ulysses checked the swift horses, ,§ 174:. 1. The relative often stands for the interrogative, but only in indirect interrogations ; as Φράζ€ΐ τω νανκληρω όστις €στί, He declared to the captain of the vessel who he was. So At' ην αΐτίην, For what reason, llyvoet ο τι το πάθος €Ϊη, He did not know what the disease was. θβάσασ^β οία η κατάστασις εσται, See what the condition will be. '^Ανθρωπβ, τι ποΐ€Ϊς ; 'Ό τι ποιώ ; Μζη, what art thou doing ? What am I doing ? f/Jl, οίος, οσ-ος^ and ως are often used in expressions of aston• isiiment., wonder., or admiration ; as "Οσα πράγματα e^ety ! How much trouble you have ! ^Ω,ς apyaXiov πραγμ' €στ\ν, ω Zev καϊ θ€οί ! What a hard thing it is, Ο Zeus and gods ! - So in indirect expressions of this class ; as At Apyetat έμακάριζον την μητβρα οίων τ€κνων €κυρησ€. The Argive women congratulated their mother that she had been blessed with such children; they said, '* 0ΐω9 τέκνων €κνρησ€ ! " Ευδαίμων μοι 6 άνηρ ζφαίνζτο, ως αδεώί κα\ y€v ναίως~'€Τ€λ€ντα ! The ιηαη appeared to me to be happy, — how fearlessly and nobly he ended his life / 11 242 SYNTAX. ■ [§ 175, ^ ^ 175. 1. In general, when the relative would naturally be put in the accusative, it is, by attrac- tion^ put in the case of its antecedent, when the antecedent is in the genitive or dative ; as, Έκ τοντων ωι/ Xeyet, From ihese things which lie says ; for a. Τίαισ\ν oh "Αρης eyeivaro, With the children whom Ares begat. This rule applies also to relative adverbs; as Έκ yrjs oOev προν- K€LTo, From the place where it lay, (a) If the antecedent be a demonstrative pronoun, this pronoun is generally omitted, and the relative takes its place ; as "Έξιμ^ν i$ ων τνγχάνομ,€ν €χοντ€ς, We go away from those possessions which we hap- pen to have. So Ovb€v av πράζαιμ αν, ων ου σοΙ φίλον, Ι ιυοηΜ do none of those things, to do ivhich is not agreeable to thee; for i κείνων d /xe ττραξαί ov, (b) The antecedent may be placed after the relative thus attracted ; as Συν ζ €χ€ΐς δυι/ά /xet. With the forces which you have. This inversion takes place also when apparently there is no attrac- tion ; as Εκδύσασθαι bv €χω χιτώνα, To put off the tunic which I have on. Τίάντα a eXajSe κρία, All the meat ivhich he received, (c) In attraction, the noun also in apposition with the relative, after a verb signifying to call, to believe, to consider, to regard, regularly takes the case of the relative ; as Ύοντων ων συ δεσποίνων καΚεις, Of these whom thou callest mistresses ; for as δέσποινας. (d) In some instances, the relative, even when it would be in the nominative or dative, is attracted by the antecedent ; particularly the nominative oi οίος, ηΧίκος-, as, Ovbiv κω elhores των ην π€ρ\ Έάρ^ίς, Knowing as yet nothing oj what happened at Sardes ; for εκείνων a. (Herod. 1, 78.) "^Ων ηπίστΕί πολλούς, Many of those whom he mistrusted ; for εκείνων οϊς. {Xen, C. 5, 4, 39.) So ΙΙρος άνδρας τολμηρούς οίους κα\ Αθηναίους, Το daring men, such as the Athenians are; for oIol κα\ Αθηναίοι είσι. Έκεΐνο δεινον τοϊσιν ηλίκοισι νων, That will be a hard tiling to men of our years ; for ηλίκοι νω εσμεν, — So Ήεανίας δε οίους συ διαδεδρακότας. But young men, like yourself, decamping; for ο toy συ ε I, where συ is not changed into rj, 2. On the other hand, the antecedent is often put in the case of its relative. Most commonly, however, only its most important word or words are attracted by the relative and placed after it. E. g. Ουκ οίσθα μοίρας ης τυχείν αυτήν χρεών ; Knowest thou not the fate ivhich she must meet ? OtYfrat ώευγων ov ηγες μάρτυρα. The ivitness whom you have brought has taken to his heels. § 176.] NUMERALS• 243 So Aoyovs άκουσον ους σοι ^υστνχύς ηκω φζρων, Hear the melan- choly news which I have brought to thee. "Έφασαν eh Κρμζνίαν ηξ^ιν, ης Ορόντας ηρχ^ πολλής κα\ €ύδαίμονος, Thfy said that we would come to Armenia which Orontas governed, — a great and rich country. This rule applies also to relative adverbs ; as''Aλλoσ6 οποί αν^άφίκη, In other places whither you may go, 3. The relative sometimes assumes the case re- quh*ed by a subordinate clause ; as. Ανθρώπους, οϊς οπόταν τις πΧ^ίονα μισθον δίδω, μ^τ €Κ€ίνων ^φ' ημάς άκολουθησουσιν, Men, who, when one gives them higher pay, icill come ivith him against us ; for ot μ^τ €Κ€ίνων ^φ' ημάς άκοΧουθησονσιν , οπό- ταν τις αυτοί ς πλείονα μισθον δίδω. So ϋωρίον ζφη eivai άκρον, ο cl μη τις προκαταΧηψοιτο, αδύνατον εσ€σθαι παρίΚθ€ΐν, He said there was an elevated place, which it would he impossible for one to pass, unless he should occupy it beforehand; for δ αδνι /aroV €σ€σθαι παρελθόν, el μη τις προκαταληψοιτο αυτό. Note. Attraction gives rise to the following expressions : 'Άχρι ου, or Μζχρι ου, as far as, until, till, "Έως ου, until, till. Εξ ου. Εξ οψου, Εξ ων, or Αφ' ου, since. Εις ο, or 'Έστ€ (that is, Es ο re), until, till. NUMERALS. § 1 76• 1. A mixed number^ of which the fractional part is 07ie half^ is expressed by a circumlocution wh-en it denotes a coin or iceight ; as ΤΙεμπτον ημιμναΐον, Four and a half mince; literally The ffth part being a half-mina, implying that the remaining four parts are whole mince : but TLivre ήμιμναΐα. Five half-mince^ or Two and a half, 2, A circumlocution with ^€ωv^ zcanting^ may be used when the number consists of tens accompanied by eight or 7iine ; as Αυοϊν 3^ντ€ς είκοσι. Twenty ΐϋ anting two^ simply eighteen, Ένος ^€οντ€ς τριάκοντα. Thirty wanting one^ simply twenty-nine. This principle applies also to ordinals, as Ένος deov €ΐκοστ6ν €Τος, The nineteenth year. Α€ων, being wanting, neuter, with its substantive may be put in the genitive absolute ; as Τΐ€ντηκυντα μιας δεούσης, Fifty wanting one ; Forty-nine. Ένος ^€οντος τριακοστά €Τ€ΐ, In the twenty-ninth year. .m44 syntax. , [§§177-180. OBJECT. — OBLIQUE CASES. "^ 177. 1. That on which an action is exerted is called the immediate object. That with relation to w^hich an action is exerted is called the remoie object. t 2. The immediate object is usually put in the ac- cusative. The remote object is put in the genitive or dative ; it often however depends on a preposi- tion. E. g. Α'ίυλος €δωκ€ν Οδυσσεΐ tovs άνεμους, JEolus gave the winds to Ulysses^ where τους άνίμονς is the immediate, and ΟδυσσβΙ the re- mote object, 3. When the active is followed by two cases, the passive or middle regularly takes that of the re- mote object. (For examples see below.) § 178• 1. Participles and verbal adjectives in τίον or ria are followed by the same case as the verb from which they are derived. (For examples see below.) 2. The verbal in r eoi/ Λvith eVri (expressed or understood) is equivalent to δ el with the infinitive active or middle ; as, άκονστίον or άκονστία eariv, one must hear ; it is necessary to hear ; the same as δεί άκουαν: μιμητεον, one must imitate; δεί μιμεϊσθαι. Note, In some instances, the verbal in reov or ria has 2i pas- sive signification ; as ηττητ€ον or ηττητία, one must be conquered, the same as δβί ηττασθαι. § 170. In general, any word, sentence, expression, or clause may be the object of a verb. Particularly, (a) The object of a verb may be an infinitive; as Έθίλω χρησθαι, 1 wish to use, (b) It may be a sentence beginning with ort, ώ?, Ίνα, οπω?, οφρα. (For examples see below.) § I 80. The object of a verb is omitted when it can be readily determined by the context ; as Ποίήσασα ίαυττ} (Ικόνα Xt- θίνην €στησ€ν cVi τω τύμβω των παίδων, SC. αυτήν. Having made for herself a stone-image {statue) she placed it on the tomb of her children. §§ 181, 182.] ACCUSATIVE. 245 ACCUSATIVE. i^^ 181. 1. The immediate object of a transitive verb is put in the accusative ; as, Ύαυτα ποιώ, I do these things. ΤΙοίησας ταντα, Having done these things, ΐίοίητίον ταντα. One must do these things• 2. Any verb may be followed by the accusative of a noun having a kindred signification. Here the accusative is generally followed by an adjec- tive. E. g. ΠβσεΓι/ πτώματ ουκ άνασχ^τά, To fall an insupportable fall. 'Ht^ai/ δρόμηιχα deLuov, They rushed furiously . S. Verbal adjectives and substantives^ which reg- ularly take the genitive, are sometimes followed by the accusative ; as, Ύρίβων τα τοιά^β. Skilled in su^h matters. Τα μ€Τ€ωρα φροντκττης, One who ponders on things above. Further, adjectives or substantives are sometimes followed by the accusative of a kindred noun ; as AovXos τας μ€γίστας θωπ€ίας κα\ δοι»- Xemy, The most abject slave. Note 1. The accusative is, in Poetry, sometimes joined to a verb signifying to see, to look, to mark the expression of the look ; as *H Βουλή ζβλζψξ ναπν, Tlie Council looked mustard. '' Note 2. Many verbs, which are intransitive in English, are transi- tive in Greek ; as Κβανάτονζ αΚιτίσβαι, To sin against the immortals. ^ 182. The accusative is often put after verbs^ adjectives^ substantives^ and certain expressions, for the sake of limiting, or more fully explaining, their meaning. The accusative, thus used, is called synecdochical. E. g. Κροίσο? ην Λυδο? το yevos, Croesus was a Lydian hy birth. Ταύτα yjrevbovTaL, They lie in these things. So rt, for what 1 rt, in any thing, in something , somewhat ; ovbiv, in nothing, not ; ταλΧα, in otlter respects ; τοντο μίν, on the one hand, TovTo δε, on the other. 246 SYNTAX. [§§ 183, Ίβ4. § 183. The accusative follows the particles of protestation μ.ά and vrj. Μά is used in negative, and νη m affirinative sentences. But when ναι is placed before /χά, the sentence is affirmative. E.g. Μά την Αναπνοην, μα το Χάος, μα τον AepajOVK adov, By Breath, by Chaos, by Air, I did not see. Nj) tov Ποσβίδώ φιλώ σβ, By Pos'idon, I love thee. Note 1. Sometimes /ζά is omitted; as Ou, τόν Β^'^Ολνμπον, No, by this Heaven, Note 2. Sometimes the name of the god sworn by is omitted after these particles, in which case the article of the omitted name is always expressed ; as Μά τον €γώ μβν ούδ' αν €πίθόμην, By , Ι should not have believed it, § 184. 1 . Verbs signifying to ask^ to teach^ to take away J to clothe^ to unclothe ^ to do^ to say^ to conceal^ and some others, are followed by two ac- cusatives, the one of a person, and the other of a thing ; as, Ύαντά μ€ έρωτας, Thou askest me about these things, Αΐτ€Ϊν τον δημον φύλακας, To ask guards of the people. Tov δημον χΚαΙναν ήμπισχον, I clotlied the people with a cloak. Μονσι,κην νπο Αάμπρον παώ^νθύς, Having been taught music by Lamprus, The accusative of the thing may, in signification, be kindred to the verb ; as *0 Φωκικος πολ€μος άβίμνηστον παώ^ίαν αυτούς βτταιδβυσβι/^ The Phocian war has taught them an ever memorable lesson. 2. Certain verbs may be followed by the accusa- tive and a relative or interrogative sentence, or a sentence beginning with on, that, μη, lest. In translation, the accusative is regarded as the nominative of the 'bllowing sentence. E. g. Τίνωσκ€ σαυτον όστις €l, Know lohat thou art. ''HiSei avTov otl μίσον €χοί του Τΐ€ρσίκοϋ στρατεύματος, He knew that he occupied the middle of the Persian army, 3. Sometimes passive and middle verbs are fol- owed by the accusative of the remote object, al- though the active construction is not used ; as, §§ 185, 186.] ACCUSATIVE. 247 Αποτμηθβϊ/τες τας κβφαλά?, Their heads being cut off ; Being her headed. Note I. The accusatwe of the person is regularly omitted after verbs signifying• to conquer (as ι/Γκάω). The accusative of the thing after these verbs denotes the nature or place of the conquest. E. g. ΙΑάχψ vLKav, sc. rtm, To conquer one in a battle ; To gain a battle. Ολυμπία νζνικηκώς, Having conquered in the Olympic games. ΙΙολλας μάχας ηττηνται, They have been defeated in many battles. Note 2. Some verbs of this class are often constructed different- ly ; thus, Αποστ€ρ€ω orσre/^eω τινά tlvos, To deprive one of any thing. Αφαιρ€ομαί (or παραιρβομαι, π€ pteXclv) τινά τίνος, To deprive one of any thing. Αφαιρούμαι τι τίνος. To take some- thing from some one. Λ βγω or elirelv τίνα €v, καΧώς, or κακώς, To speak well, or ill, of any one. 'Έρ^ω TL TLVL, To do any thing to any body. ΤΙοιεω τι tlvi. To do any thing to anyone. Also ΤΙοίζω τίνα ev, καλώς, or κακώς, To do good, or evil, to any one, § 1S5. Verbs signifying to name^ ίο call, to choose^ to render, to constitute, to esteem, to consider^ to divide, are followed by two accusatives referring to the same person or thing. The second accusative may be an adjective or participle. In the passive, these verbs become copulas. E. g. Στρατηγον αντον^ iiTreSei^ey, He appointed, him general. To στράτευμα κατίν€ΐμ€ ^ώδβκα μ^ρη, He divided the army into twelve parts. Note 1. In reality, the second accusative ioxuis z. predicate ; that is, it is in apposition with the first, and consequently may be preceded by eti^at ; as Σοφιστην ονομάζονσι τον civbpa clvat^ They call him a sophist ; They soy that he is a sophist. Απώ^Ιχθη της 'ίππου eivai ίπ- παρχος, He was appointed master of the horse. Note 2. Sometimes the noun denoting the thing divided is put in the adnominal genitive ; as AtetXd/xe^a της €ΐ8ω\οποΗκης €Ϊδη δυο. We have divided the art of making images into two parts. Terminal functions of the Accusative. ^ 186. 1. In poetry, the accusative often da notes the place whither ? as, Αγλαας €βας θηβάς. Thou camest to illustnous Thebes. "Ίλιον €Ϊσω, Into Ilion. 248 SYNTAX. [§ 187• 2. The accusative is used to denote exient of space, or duration of time ; as, Έξ€\αύν€ί σταθμον? δύο, παρασάγγας Se/ca, He marched two stations, equal to ten parasangs. AeKa €τη κοιμώνται, They sleep ten years. So ^Os τίΘνηκ€ ταύτα τρία €τη, Who has been dead these three years, Ov^iv πω €'ίκοσι €τη ycyovoys, Not being quite twenty years old. Note 1. Sometimes the accusative seems to denote repetition of time ; as Έντ€ίΚάμ€νος την ωρην €παγιν€€ίν σφίσι τας αίγας, Command- ing him to bring the goats to them at the regular time. Note 2. When the accusative denoting duration of time is accom- panied by an ordinal number, it answers to the question, how long ago J as Έννάτην rjpepav γεγαμημίνην, Having been married nine days, GENITIVE, ^ 187. 1. A substantive which limits the mean- ing of another substantive, denoting a different person or thing, is put in the genitive, called ad- nominal. This rule applies also to pronouns, and to adjectives and par- ticiples used substantively. E. g. To τ€μ€νος του Bcov, The temple of the god. "l^pyov Ηφαίστου, Λ ivork of HephcBStus. *H άκρόασις των λβγόι^ων, The act of hearing the speakers, Ύην πόλίν ημών, Our state, Ύην €αυτου ά^€\φην, His own sister, Meaov ημίρας. The middle of the day. To τ€τραμμίνον των βαρβάρων. The defeated portion of the barba- rians, Έΐς τούτο ανάγκης, To this degree of necessity. So when the first substantive is omitted after the article. (For ex- amples, see § 168, 2.) 2. Many verbal adjectives and adverbs^ w^hich have an active signification, are followed by. the genitive of the object ; as, Τριβών Ιππίκης, Skilled in horsemanship, Αρχίκος ανθρώπων, Qualified to rule men. 3. The genitive limits the meaning of some ad- jectives and adverbs denoting possession^ equality^ similarity^ nearness^ or U7iion ; as, § 188.] GENITIVE. 249 Ύυίς αντων Ιδίοις 7Γροσ€χ€ίν τον vovvy Το attend to their private affairs, 'lepus της Αρτψώος, Sacred to Artemis. This rule applies to tStoy, tepo?, οΙκΕΪος, €πίχώρίος, κοινός, ϊσος and its compounds, όμοιος, ά^ίΚφός, γζίτων, πλησίος, άντίος, ενάντιος, αντί- στροφος, πολέμιος, εχθρός ; and some of the compounds of o/ioi) and συν, as ομώνυμος, συγγ€νης. These adjectives, however, with the exception of ϊδιος, ΐ€ρός, and €πιχώριος, are most commonly followed by the da- tive. — Adverbs of this class are αγχι άγχου, €γγύς, ϊκταρ, π€λας, πΧησίον, 4. The genitive limits the meaning of some ad- verbs of place, and of some adverbial cases (^ 135); as, Σκηνής evbov, Within a tent, Έντος ου ποΧΚοϋ χρόνου, Within a short time, Εμπορίας €V€Ka, For the sake of trade, 'Έξης is followed by the genitive or dative. w4j^0TE 1. The adnominal genitive denotes various relations, the most common of which are those of possession, subject, object, quality, material, a whole, component parts. It is called subjective when it is equivalent to the subject-nominative ; objective, when it denotes the object of an action. Thus, in "Έργον Ηφαίστου, it is subjective, because the expression stands for* Ο "Ιίφαι- στος ζΐργάσατο. That which Hephcestus made; in *H άκρόασις τωνΧζ- γόντων, it is objective, because the expression stands for To άκροασθαι των Χξγόντων, To hear the speakers. Note 2. A substantive is sometimes followed by two genitives de- noting different relations ; as Ύην Πελοττο? άπάσης Τί^λοποννήσου κατά- ληψιν, The taking of the whole of Peloponnesus by Pelops, Note 3, The genitive is in a few instances used where one would naturally expect apposition ; as {^sch, Pers. 448) Αθηνών πόλις, The city of Athens ; for Αθήναι πόλις. Note 4. Sometimes the genitives μου, σου are equivalent to the apparently superfluous datives /xoi, σοι; as Ύ^θορυβηταί μου η ψνχη. My soul is troubled. Note 5. Ακόλουθος and δ t ά δ ο χ ο s are followed by the genitive or dative. v^ 188. 1. Adjectives, pronouns, participles, and adverbs, denoting a part, are followed by a genitive denoting the whole ; as, Oi αγαθοί των ανθρώπων. The good among men ; The good men, Ό ήμισυς του αριθμού. Half the number. Ύην π\€ίστην της στρατιάς ^ The greatest part of the army 11* 250 srNTAx. R'§ 189, 190. TrJ9 μαρίΚηε σνχνην, A good deal of coal-dust, Oi καταφν'/όντ€ς αυτών, Such of them as escaped, Ovbels των μ^φακίων, No one of the young men. Πάντων λαμπρότατος. The most splendid of alL Που -γης ; Where on earth ? Als της ημέρας, Twice a day. (^2. The genitive of the reflexive pronoun is put after an adjective of the superlative degree, in order to express the highest degree to which a person or thing attains ; as, "Ore Seti/oraros σαυτοϋ ταύτα ησθα, When your skill in these matters was greatest. Note 1 . The gender of the governing- word is generally the same as that of the noun in the genitive. Note 2. The genitive plural is used when the whole consists, or is regarded as consisting, of many parts. Note 3. Sometimes this construction is employed even where the partitive relation is not obvious ; thus, δίο?, ταΚας, σχίτλιος, δβιλαιοί, φίλη, may be followed by the genitive plural of the noun with which they properly agree ; as Ala γυναικών, Divine woman. ^ 189. Verbs implying a noun are followed by the genitive ; as, Βασιλ€ύ€ΐ αυτών. He is their king. (^ 187.) ΤΙάντων διαπρβπας, Thou surpassest all. (^ 188.) This rule applies chiefly to verbs signifying to rule, to surpass, to excel, to inherit. Note. Αι/άσσω, άρχω, and j^yeoftat, may take the dative in- stead of the genitive. Κληρονομάω, in later Greek, may be follow- ed by the accusative of the thing inherited, and even of the person whose property is inherited. Such examples as Κρατύσθαι νπο του ''Έρωτος, To be ruled by Love, show that κρατ€ω may take the accusative instead of the genitive. ^ 190. The genitive after verbs signifying to be^ to belongs denotes most of the relations ex- pressed by the adnominal and partitive genitive ; as, *0 παΙς Κακοδαιμονιών €στί, The boy is the gift of the LacediBmoni" OM. (^ 187.) §§ 191, 192.] GENITIVE. 251 Ανοιας iari το Θηρασθαι Kcvay It is characteristic oj folly to pursue coin things. EhaL €Tu)u τριάκοντα y To be thirty years old. "Οντα TO €vpos πΚίθρον^ Being a plethrum in In'eadth. Ίοντων yevov /xot, JDo become one of them for my sake, (§ 188.) ^ 191. 1. In general the genitive may be put after any verb when its action does not refer to the whole object, but to a part only ; as, HepwcL των Λυδώι/, He sends some of the Lydians, Ααβόντα των ταινιών^ Taking so/ne of the filets. 2. Particularly, the genitive is put after verbs signifying to partake^ to enjoy, to obtain ; as, Μ€Τ€Ϊχον της Ιορτης, They shared in the festival. Απολαύομζν πάντων των αγαθών, We enjoy all the good things. Οντως οναίμην τ€κνων^ So may I enjoy my children. Note. Sometimes αττολαυω, Χαγχάνω, μ€τα^ίδωμι, μ€τα^ Χαγχάνω, τυχζΊν, to hit, μ€Τ€χω, are followed by the accusative. ^ ^ 192. 1. The genitive is put after verbs sig- nifying to take hold of^ to touchy to feel^ to hear, to taste^ to smelly to perceive^ to consider^ to under standi to remember^ to forget. Causatives of this class are followed by the accu sative of the person and the genitive of the thing. E. g. ^ Αάβ€σθ€ τούτου. Take hold of this man. ^Απτ€σΘαί αυτών, To touch them. Τ^υσαι της θύρας, Taste of the door; Knock at the door. Μζμνησό μου. Remember me. Ύπ€μνησ•€ν re e πατρός. And he reminded him of his father, Έκ de μ€ πάντων \ηθάν€ί, And makes me forget all things. Ύους παΐδας γ^υστίον αίματος. One must make the children taste blood; give them, a taste of blood. 2. Verbs signifying to take hold of are often fol- lowed by the accusative of the object taken hold of, and the genitive of the part by Avhich it is taken ; as, Έλάβοντο της ζώνης τον Ορόντην, They took Orontes by the girdle. Note 1. Some verbs of this class may be followed by the accusa 252 SYNTAX. [^^ 193, 194. iive ; as Κίσβ^αΘαι τι. To perceive something. Those signifying• to see are generally followed by the accusative of the immediate object. A Note 2. Μιμνησκω and ye ύ ω maybe followed by two accusa- tives ; as Oi EyearaioL ξυμμαχίαν άναμιμνησκοντ^ς Αθηναίους, The in- habitants of Egesta reminding the Athenians of their alliance, Γβυσω σ€ μίθυ^ I will give thee wine to taste. ■J Note 3. Ακούω, ττνρθάνομαι, and their synonymes, may take that which is heard in the accusative, and that from which the thing heard proceeds, in the genitive ; as "Ηκουσβ του άγγίλου τα πάρα του Κύρου, Ha heard from the messenger the loords of Cyrus, Ύον avbpa Ίτυνθάνου των οδοιπόρων, Inquire of the travellers about the man. § 193. Verbs signifying to admire^ to contemn, ίο desire, to care for, to neglect, are followed by the genitive ; as, "Α-γασθαί της άρ€της, To admire virtue. Μβγάλωι/ ζτηθϋμύς. Thou desirest great things. Note 1. Many verbs of this class are sometimes follov/ed by the accusative of the object ; as Φροντίζοντας τα τοιαύτα, Caring about such things. {Eurip. Bac. 503) Καταφρονεί /xe, H^ despises me; treats me with contempt. So in the passive ; Ειπών ουν ταντα κατεφρονηθην νττ' αυτοϋ, Saying therefore these things I was despised by him. Note 2. "^Αγα /xat and its synonymes may be followed by the gen- itive of a person and the accusative of a neuter pronoun ; as Τάδ' αύτοΰ ηγαμαι, I admire him for these things. *0 θαυμάζω του εταίρου σου ΊΙρωταγόρου, For ivhich I admire your friend Protagoras. ^ 194. 1. The genitive after certain verbs and expressions denotes that on account of which any thing takes place ; as, Ζη\ω σ€ της ευβουλίας, I admire you for your wisdom. Tfi υμέτερα ττοΚει της -γης της υττ' Ωρωπίων 8ε3ομενης φΘονουσι, They are jealous of your city, on account of the land given to you by the Oropians. 2. The genitive, with or without an interjection, is used in exclamations ; as, *Q ΤΙόσεώον, του μάκρους ! Posidon, what a length ! Kat τις εώε πωποτε βους κριβανίτας ; των άλαζονευμάτων ! And toko ever saw oxen roasted whole in the oven ? what tough stories ! 03. In Poetry, the genitive is sometimes used after verbs signifying to entreat to denote the per- ^ 195.] GENITIVE. 253 son or thing for the sake of which the person en- treated is to grant the request ; as. Μη μ€ γουνών γοννάζβο μηδζ τοκηων, Entreat me not hy my knees, nor by my parents. Ταύτης ίκνονμαί σβ, / beseech tliee for her sake. Αίσσομαι Ζηνος Ολυμπίου, I pray you let me alone, for the sake of Zeus Olympius, (Oc?. 2, 68.) 4. Verbs signifying to accuse^ to prosecute^ to con- vict^ are followed by the accusative denoting the person accused, and the genitive denoting the crime ; as, Αίώξομαί σ€ 8€ί\[ας, I will prosecute you for cowardice. Κλεωζ/α δώρων iXovreSy Convicting Cleon of bribery. .Note 1. Φβΰγω, to be accused, and αΧωναι, to be convicted, are followed by the genitive alone because they have a passive significa- tion. Note 2. Αΐτιάομαί τινά τι, to accuse one of any thing. Έπεξι- €vai or Έπισκηπτ€σθαί τινί τίνος, to prosecute one for any thing. Note 3. The genitive of a person after verbs compounded with κατά, as καταγιγνώσκω , καταδικάζω, κατακρίνω, κατατρέχω, καταχ€ΐ- ροτον€ω, καταψ€ύδομαι, καταψηφίζομαι, κατ^ρϋν, κατηγοράω, common- ly referred to this head, really depends on κατά in composition ; as, Έ,^ωϋτου καταδίκαζες θάνατον. Thou condemnest thyself to death. (a) The passive construction of these verbs implies that they can take the accusative of a person ; as Έκ€Ϊνος κατ€ψηφίσ6η. He was condemned. (b) The accusative is often wanting after these verbs ; as Καττ^γο- ρζΐν αυτού, To accuse him. (c) Κατη'γορ€ω is sometimes followed by. two genitives ; as Πα- ραπρ€σβ€ίας αντου κατηγορβϊν, To indict him for unfaithfully discharg- ing his duties as ambassador. Not Ε 4 . 'Ένοχος and υπ€υ6υνος, accused of, charged with , guil- ty of, are followed by the genitive because they have the force of passive participles. — "Ένοχος may be followed by the genitive of • punishment. '^Ενοχος, devoted to, takes the dative. ^ 195. 1. The genitive is sometimes put after some adjectives, verbs, and adverbs of manner for the sake of limiting or more fully explaining their meaning ; as, - 254 SYNTAX. [§§ 196, 197. ^Απαις αρρένων πα'ώων,*Άτζκνος άρσ^νων παίδων, or ^Απαις cpaevos γόνου, Childless in respect to male offspring ; Having no sons. Ανδρος ωραία, Of the ripe age to he married, Έυ rJK€Lv βίου, to be well off as to property. Καλώ? εχ€ΐν μέθης, To be well off as to drunkenness ; pretty tipsy, *€1ς €Ϊχ€ τάχους. As fast as he could. Ούτω τρόπου €χ€ΐς, This is your character, j 2. The genitive is sometimes found after verbs of sayings judging ^ inquiring^ and examining ; as, ToG κασιγνητου τι φης ; What sayest thou concerning our brother ? Ευδαιμονίας de κα\ άθΧιότητος ωσαύτως η αλΧως κρίνας ; But about Jtappiness and misery dost thou judge likewise or otiierwise? A 3. After σττεζ/δω and εγχέω the genitive is used m libations and toasts ; as, ΣτΓβΐσοι/ αγαθού δαίμονος. Pour out the wine in the name of (or to the honor of) good fortune ; May good fortune attend us, '^^yX'^i 'ΉΧίοδωρας, Pour out to the health of Heliodora, Φ Local and Temporal functions of the Genitive, ^ 19S. The genitive often denotes the place where ? and the time when ? how long since ? or how soon ? The genitive of place is chiefly Poetic. Eg. Ουκ "Apyeo? η€ν ; Was he not in Argos? Ύης νυκτός νέμονται. They feed in the night. Τριάκοντα ήμερων άπυ ταύτης της ημ€ρας, Within thirty days from this day. Ablative functions of the Genitive. ^ 197. 1. In Poetry, the genitive sometimes denotes the place whence ? as, Πύθωνας άγΧαας €βάς Θήβας, From Pytho thou earnest to illustrious Thebes, 2. The genitive is put after verhs^ adjectives^ and adverbs^ implying proceeding from, separation^ departure, cessation. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by §§ 198, 199.] GENITIVE. 255 the accusative of the immediate, and the genitive of the remote, object. E. g. Aap€LOV KOL Πηρυσάτώος ylyvovTai παίδε? δύο, Of Darius and Pary- satis were horn two children, TovTov μ€θί€σθαί, To let him go. Αί€σχον αλλήλων, They separated from each otlier, ^Kv€v TLvos, Without any thing. Note. Αιάφορος, diff'erent, takes the genith^e ; διάφορος, op- posed to, hostile, takes the dative. — Κατάρχω is found also with the accusative. ^ 198. 1. The genitive is put after adjectives and adverbs of the comparative degree to denote that with which the comparison is made ; as, Κρ€ίττων TOVTOV, Better than this man. Ύών ίππων θάττον €τρ€χον, They ran faster than the horses, 2. The genitive is put after adjectives, adverbs. and verbs in>pljing a comparison ; as, 'Έτ€ρονς των vvv όντων. Other than those icho now are, "Opviv τριπλάσων Κλ€ωννμον, A bird three times as large as Cleony- ?nus. 'Π.λ€ον€κτησω τον *1πποκ€ντανρον, I shall have the advantage of the Hippocentaur. So Έλασσονν tlvu tlvos, to malie one less than any thing. — JIpo• €χω, to surpass, is found also Λvith the accusative. 3. When the substantive which is compared is the same as that with which it is compared, the latter is omitted when it fs limited by the ad- nominal genitive ; as. Χώραν €χ€Τ€ ovbev ήττον ημών €ντΤμον, You have a position not less honorable than ours ; sc. της χώρας. Terminal functions of the Genitive. (j-J:^ 199. The genitive sometimes denotes that . towards which an action is directed ; as, Έστοχάζ€το τον μ€ΐρακΙον, He ivas taJdng aim at the young man Οΐστ€νσον Mfi/eXaou, Shoot an arrow at Menelaus. Ρίψ-ω πατρόν τάχα σον, I will Soon throw a stone at you. Ευθύ Ίίελληνης, Straight to PcUene. 256 SYNTAX. [§ 200. Instrumental functions of the Genitive. ^ 2©0. 1. Sometimes the genitive denotes the instrument^ or the agent after a passi\^e form ; as, ΙΙρησαί πυρός δηΐοιο θνρ€τρα^ To burn the gates with consuming fire. ΊΪΚη-γάς θνγατρος Trjs €μης, Being Struck by my daughter. 2. The genitive is used after verbs and adjec- tives to denote the material of Avhich any thing is made; as. Χαλκού woUovTttL, They are made of brass, Fivov ποιητηί/, Made of ox-hide. 3. The genitive is used after verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, implying fulness or want. Transitive verbs of this class are folIoAved by the accusative of the immediate, and the genitive of the remote, object. E. g. Uepias €γ€μ€ν, It was full of poverty. Kcvcuv 3οξασμάτων ττληρζΐς, Full of vain notions. Ύών τ€θνηκότων aXiSj Enough of the dead. 4. The genitive is used to denote the price of a thing; as, Ύών πόνων πωΚονσιν ημίν πάντα Tayaff οι ueoi, The gods sell to us every good thing for labor. ^Qveovrat ras yvvoLKas πάρα των γονέων χρημάτων μ€γά\ων, They buy their wives of their parents for much money. Χρημάτων ώνητη, That can be bought for money. Note 1. The noun denoting the punishment, that is, the price of crime, is sometimes put in the genitive. In classical Greek, however, this applies chiefly to θανάτου^ of death ; as, θανάτου ύπαγαγων Μιλτιάδεα 6δ/ω/<6, He accused MiUiades capitally. Καταδικασθεί θανάτου η φυ-γης, Being condemned to death or banish- ment. '^Ενοχος δεσ/χου, Deserving chains. Note 2. "Αξιος, worthy , and άξίως, worthily, are followed by the genitive of price or value ; as "Αξιο? θανάτου. Worthy of death. — Its verb άξιο ω, to iJiink worthy, is followed by the accusative of a person, and the genitive of a thing ; as ^Κξιουσιν αυτόν μ€γάλων, They think j him worthy of great things. ' ^ § 201.] DATIVE. 257 AVhen αξιο9 means fit^ proper^ becomings it is followed by the da- tive. DATIVE. ^ 20i. 1. The dative is used after many verhs^ adjectives^ adverbs^ and substantives^ to denote the object to or for which any thing is or is done. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accusative of the immediate, and the dative of the remote, object. E. g. Τοΐ? θανονσί nXovros ovdev ώφβλβΐ. Wealth in no way benefits the dead. Κυμαινόμενη τω νεκρω , Abusing the dead body, Αυκώ μοι, I seem to myself; It see?ns to me. Ao/cets /xot. You seem to me. Αοκ€Ϊ μοι, It seems to me. ^Υπίσχνονμαί σοι deKa τάλαντα, I promise to you ten talents. ΙΙοθ€ΐν6ς τοΊζ φίλοις, Dear to his friends. Εγώ Tivi € μποτών et/xt ; Am 1 in any body's way ? So Την τον θ€ου δόσιν νμ7ν, The gift of the god to you» BaaiXet δα- σμός. Tribute to the king. 2. Some verbs, adjectives, and substantives may be followed by the genitive of a thing, and the da- tive of a person ; as, Ύων κρ^ων biabihovai τοΙς ^βραττβυταίί, To give some of the meat to the attendants. (^ 191.) Ύ'π•€χωρησ€ν αντώ τον θρόνου. He yielded the throne to him, (§197,2.)^ Αντω προ€ΐστηκ€ΐ τον ξζνικον, He was the commander of his merce' nary troops. (§ 189.) Μάλιστα στνου^ης άξια τη jroXei, Of the utmost consideration to the state, or Deserving the most serious attention of the state, (^ 200, 71. 2.) Α€Ϊγμ eVrl πασι μικρο'^υχίας, It is a sign of pusillanimity to all All consider it a sign of pusillanimity. (§ 187.) ' 3. The dative is used after verbs signifying to be (βΐμί, rylfyvo^ai), to dcnote that to which any thing belongs ; as, ΎίΧλω naldes ήσαν καλοί τ€ κάγαθοί, Tellus had good and noble chil- dren. Tot? πλουσίοις ποΧλα παραμυθία φασιν elvai, They say that the rich have many consolations. ΪΙάντα σοι Ύ€νησ€ται, All things will be done to thee. 258 SYNTAX. • [§ 201. 4. The dative is used after verbs and adjectives to denote that with regard to which any thing is afifirmed ; as, Σφων μ€ν €ντολη Alos €χ€ΐ reXos δή, As to you two, the command of Zeus is now done, Ύί σοι παράσχω brjra τω τ^Θνηκότι^ Wliat shall I now offer thee for the deceased? Από ΈΧζφαντίνης πολιός ανω Ιόντι ανάντης eVrt το χωρίον, Το α person going up from the city Elephantine the country appears steep. In certain parenthetical phrases ώ s• precedes this dative ; as Εττεί περ €1 ycvi/aios ως Ιδόντι, Since thou art of noble descent to one who sees thee; as thy appearance indicates. Ώς e/xot or "Ως γ e/xot, In my opinion, Ώς yepovTi, For an old man. Κρ€ων ην ζηΧωτοζι ως €μοί, ποτ€, Creon was once, in my opinion, enviable. 5. The dative is often used after verbs, and sometimes after nouns, where the adnominal gen- itive would naturally be expected ; as, ^Ή-ρχον τον ναυτικού τοϊς Συρακονσίοις, They commanded the navy of the Syracusans. Ot Ίπποι αυτοϊς dedevrai. Their horses are tied. Aia TO δΐ€σπάρθαι αυτω το στράτευμα, Because his army has dis- 6. ,The dative is put after the interjections o^, ω, Σώ, οναί\ as Ol μοι^ Woc is me! Note 1 . Many verbs of this class are sometimes foUovi^ed by the accusative of the immediate object ; as ίΐφίΚα,ν τους φίλους, To benefit one's friends. So in the passive : Oi Αακ€^αιμόνίοι άπιστοννται νπο πάντων Πβλο- ποννησίων, The Lacedcemonions are distrusted by all the Peloponnesians ; implying Ι1άντ€ς Ιί^λοποννησιοι άπιστυυσι ΑακζΒαιμονίους. Note 2. Αφαιρώ τι τινι, Το take away any thing from any one. Αρχομαι τι τινι. To receive or accept any thing from any one. ilvcl- σθαι ox ΤΙρίασθαί Ti Tivi, To buy any thing of any one. Note 3. In the Epic dialect the dative is sometimes followed by a participle in the genitive ; and on the other hand a participle in the dative is sometimes appended to a noun in the genitive (5) ; as ( Od. 9, 257) ^νίμίν δ' αυτ€ κατεκλάσθη φίλον ητορ 8€ΐσάντων. {II. 14, 139) Αχιλληος όλοον κηρ ^€ρκομ€νω. Note 4. The impersonals δβί, χρή, /xeXet, μ€Τ€στι, προσηκα may be followed by the genitive of a thing and the dative of a person ; § 202.] DATIVE. 259 as Α€ίνων be σοι βονΚΈνμάτων eoLKe δβΓι», And it is clear that you need Strong arguments, Me'Xet συι τούτου, Thou carestfor this. Most commonly, ho\vever, Set and χ ρ η are followed by the genitive of a person, and the accusative of a thing ; as Αυτόν σε del Ιίρομψ 6ews, Thou thyself needcst a Prometheus, The genitive in connection with μίτ€στι. and ττροσή/^ει depends on μeρoς expressed or understood ; as ^Ω,ν μη^ev μβρος τοΙς πονηροίς /xe- τeστL, Of which the loinked have no part, UpoaTjKet, oxjdevl άρχης, Government belongs to nobody, Note 5. Frequently the dative of the 77er5on<7Z;?ro7z own is apparent- ly superfluous ; Έlπeμevaί μοι, Tpoies, άγαυου ΐλιονηος ττατρί φίλω καΐ μητρΧ yoripevai, Ο Trojans, do tell the beloved father and mother of il- lustrious llioneus to bewail, where μοι might have been omitted with- out any essential injury to the sense. It may be observed here that the pronoun roi [σοι) most commonly has the force of a particle, and may be rendered You know, You see, certainly, or Sir, ^ 2©S. 1. The dative is used after adjectives^ adverbs^ verbsj and substantives^ implying resem- blance^ equality^ union, approach. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accusative of the immediate, and the dative of the remote, object. E. g. "Ομοιοι τοΙς τυφλοΊς, Like the blind. Εγγύί οδω, Near a road, AaKeda^ovLOL9 ^ιαμάχ€σθαι, To fight against the LacedcBmonians . Ό σίδηρος άνισοϊ τους aauevels τοϊς Ισχυροϊς, Steel renders the weak equal to the strong, ^ΟμΤλητα Έ,ωκράτeι, Companions {pupils) of Socrates, 2. When the substantive, which depends on ϊσο^, or ομοίος, is the same as that with which ϊσος, or ομοως, agrees, the former is omitted, and the limit- ^ ing noun is put in the dative ; as, Κόμαί XapLTeo-aLv ομοΐαι, Hair resembling that of the Graces; for όμοϊαι ταΐς κόμαις των %αρίτων. Ο υ yap μeτe'Lχes τας ΐσας πληγας €μοί, For thou didst not receive the same number of stripes with me. / Note 1. Ό αυτό ς^ idem, the same, and el^one, the same, maybe "ToUowed by the dative. In general, how^ever, the dative to which they directly refer is omitted, and the limiting noun takes its place. E. g. 260 SYNTAX. [§§203-206• Ovdiv των αυτών €Κ€ίνοις πράττομ€ν, We do nothing like the things which they did, αυτών refers to the deeds, and €K€lvols to the doers. Ωσαύτως, likewise, in the same manner, the adverb of 6 αυτός, takes the dative. Note 2. Κοινων€ω, κοινωνός, μξτίχω, συμμ€Τ€χω may be followed by the genitive of a thing, and the dative of a person. (^^ 187; 189; 191.) § S®3. The dative is used after verbs to denote the cause of an event, or that on account of which any thing takes place ; as, Απόθνησκα νόσω. He died of disease, Ύαύττ] γαυριας. You feel proud on account of this. ΎοΙς πζπρα-γμίνοις αΙσχυνόμ€νοί, Being ashamed of their past deeds. Local and Temporal functions of the Dative, § 204. The dative often denotes the place where^ and the time when; as, Μαραθωνι οτ^ ημ^ν. When ive were at Marathon. Ύαύτΐ] Trj ημ€ρα ουκ Ιμαχίσατο βασιΚ^υς, The king did not figlU on that day. Terminal functions of the Dative, ^ 303. The dative is used after certain verbs and adjectives to denote that to or towards which their action is directed ; as, Κυτω άφίκοντο. They came to him. ΊΙίπτ€ΐν πεδω, To fall on {to) the ground. Instrumental and Modal functions of the Dative. ^ 206. 1 . The dative is used to denote the in- strument^ manner^ and means; as, θύρσον λαβών Se^ta χ€ΐρί, Taking the thyrsus with the right hand. Αρόμω 'UvTo €ς τους βαρβάρους, They went running against the bar- barians. 2, The dative is often put after adjectives^ snb- stantives^ verbs, and adverbs of manner, for the sake of limiting or more fully explaining their meaning ; as, § 206.] DATIVE. 261 ΑννατοΙ τοις σωμασι{ Strong in body. Ισχυαν τοϊς σώμασι, Το he strong in body. θάψακος ονόματι, Thapsaciis.by na?ne. Έ-γχ^Ιτ} €Κ€καστο, He luas eminent loith the spear, β^β. The dative is put after comparatives to denote the excess of one thing over another ; as, ΠολΓ λογίμω η Έλλά? yeyov€ άσΘ€ν€στ€ρη, Greece has become weaker by one distinguished city, Πολλω ΰστ€ροι/, Long after. ΈνΙ μόνω Ίτροίχονσιν οί Ιππείς ημάς, The horsemen surpass us iji one thing only, 4. The dative after passive verbs and verbal ad- jectives in -T09 and -τεο'ζ denotes the agent of the action ; as, ΤΙροσπολοις φνλάσσ€ταί, He is taken care of by the servants, Έφητο ταύτα τω Ενθυδημω, These things had been said by Euthy- demus. Ύοίς άλλοις €νκτά, Desirable to others. Ωφ€λητ€α σοι η πόλις Ιστίν, The state must he benefited by thee. 5. The dative denotes that by which any thing is accompanied ; as, ΎοΊ,ς λ€ΐπομ€νοις ey Τίλάταιαν ίλθόντ^ς, Having come into PlatcBa with those that loere left. Έβοηθησαν τοΙς Αωρΐ€νσιν εαντ^ων τ€ π^ντακοσίοις kcll χιλίοις οπλίταις κα\ των ξνμμάχων μνρίοις, They assisted the Dorians ivith one thou- sand five hundred heavy-armed soldiers of their own, and ten thou- sand of their allies. This rule applies also to the dative of αυτό? accompanied by a sub- stantive ; as Τριήρεις αυτοϊς πληρώ μασι 8ΐ€φθάρησαν, Α number of gal- leys was destroyed with every thing on board. Note 1. Αωρ€ομαί τί τινι, To present any thing to any one, (^ :201, 1 ;) or Αωρίομαί τινά τινι. To present one with any thing. ^^, Note 2. The dative after χράομαι, utor, to avail one''s self to supply one's need with, to use, denotes the instrument. This dative may have another dative in apposition with it ; or it may be accompa- nied by the synecdochical rt, rt, ο τι. --^'Νομίζω, to use, takes the dative after the analogy of its synonyme χράομαι. Note 3. The dative after such verbs .as ϊημι, σφ€νδονάω, de- notes the instrument ; as *Ω? et^e τον Ελβαρχον δΐ€λαννοντα Ιησι τβ άξίντ]. As he saw Clear chus riding by, he threw the axe at him ; in- tending to liit him xoith the axe. 262 SYNTAX. [§§207,208. Note 4. The dative of instrument may be put after a substantive ; as *H Tois βίΧ^σίν e^e^t?. Tke throwing of missiles. Note 5. When the verbal in -reo ν or -r/a is equivalent to Set with the infinitive, the accusative may be used instead of the dative ; as Ουτ€ μίσθοφορητ€θρ αΧλονς η rovs στρατ^νομίνονς^ Nor must others , / than those icho serve in the army, receive ivages ; equivalent to Oi/Ve δεΙ/' aXXovs μισθοφορ€ίν η rovs στρατΕνομ^νονς. VOICES. ; : § 207. 1. The active voice comprises the greater number of active or transitive^ and neuter or intransitive, verbs ; as κόπτω, τρ€χω, €ΐμί, 2. Causative verbs, that is, verbs signifying to cause one to do any things have the active form ; as γβιίω, to cause to taste. Note 1. The accusative of the reflexive pronoun is often omitted, in which case the verb becomes intransitive ; as ζλαύνω, to impel one's self, to proceed, march; μίγνυμι, to join one's self Λ Note 2. The second perfect and pluperfect, and second aorist active, of some verbs have the signification of the passive or middle ; as α-γννμι eaya, ίστημι ίστην. Also the perfect of αΚίσκομαι, γίγνομαι, ΐστημι, σβ€ννυμί, ΣΚΕΛΛΩ, and φνω. :/.ΝοτΕ 3. Some active verbs are often constructed like passives; that is, they are followed by νττό or πρ6ς with the genitive of the agent ; as άκονω, κ\ύω, ίο be called, αποθνήσκω, τβλβυτάω, to die by the hand of Note 4. The grammatical subject of an active verb is not always the agent of the action. Thus, κατακαίω tl, J burn something, may mean also I cause or order somebody to burn something. § 208. The passive takes for its subject that which was the immediate object of the active. That which was- the sub- ject-nominative in the active becomes genitive in the passive, and depends on ύττο, πρό?, παρά^ or €ξ. Ε. g. Κύων τον ^€σπήτην φιλβΐ. The dog lotes his master, in the passive becomes *0 ^€σπότης φίλβΓτα: νπο του κνυός, The master is loved by his dog. ONote 1. (a) The aoi'ist passive often has the force of the middle ; in which case, the aorist middle is either rare or obsolete ; as απαλ- λάσσω, to delirer, άπαλλαγηναι, to deliver one's self; μιμνηο-κω, to re- mind, μνησβηναι, to remind one's self, to remember. (b) The future passive sometimes has the force of the middle ; as μιμνησκω, μνησθησομαι, μ€μνησομαί. § 209.] VOICES. 263 Note 2. Some neuter verbs are used also in the passive, especially when they are followed by the dative of the agent ; as E/xot κ€κλαυσ€- raij for Κ€κλανσομαι. § 200. 1. Frequently the middle is equivalent to the ac- tive followed by the accusative of the reflexive or reciprocal pronoun ; as, NiVro/xat, I am ivashed, sc by myself, the same as νίπτω €μαντ6ν, I loash myself. Αοώορονμεθα, We revile one another. (L^. Very frequently the middle is equivalent to the active fol- lowed by the dative of the reflexive or reciprocal pronoun. In this case the middle is used traiisiiively. E. g. Ποιβισ^αι την ζίρηνην. To make peace for one'^s self ; but Iloulv την άρηνην, To make peace for others. Ύην χωράν καταν€ν€μηνται, They have divided the place among them- selves. Λ.. 3. The middle is not unfrequently equivalent to the active followed by the genitive of the reflexive pronoun. Here also it is used tra7isitively. E. g. Tlaida /x' ώνομάζζτο, He called me his son. Ανσόμ€νοζ θύγατρα, To ransom his own daughter. Κποφηνασθαι γνώμην, To express one's own opinion. Στξφου κάρα, Crown thy head. Note 1. When the active is causative, the middle is commonly intransitive ; as έ'λττω €λπομαί, γβύω 'γένομαι. Note 2. Somethnes the reflexive or reciprocal pronoun is, for the sake of emphasis, annexed to a middle verb ; as Επβδβ/^ανΓο τά? αυ- τών άρζτάς, They showed their virtues. Ισχνν ημίν αντοίς προσθησό- μέθα, We shall add power to ourselves. Note 3. The middle, like the active, may be used to express an action which takes place at tfie command of the subject of the verb ; as Ύράπ€ζαν παρατίθ€σθαί, To place a table, or To have a table placed, before one's self. Note 4. Sometimes the middle is apparently equivalent to the ac- tive ; as ορασθαι, IdeaOai, χορ^νσασθαι. C«..Note 5. (a) Ύ\νβ future middle of many verbs is equivalent to the future active, in which case the future active is either rare or obso- lete ; as θαυμάζω θαυμάσομαι. (See Catalogue of Greek Λ^erbs, ^ 51.) (b) Not unfrequently the future middle has a passiA^e signification ; as αδικ€ω ά^ικησομαι. (See Catalogue of Greek \^erbs, § 52.) Note 6. In the Epic dialect, the second aorist middle has some- times the force of the passive ; as βλησθαι, κτάσθαί, οντάμ^νος. 264 SYNTAX. [§§210,211. (λ^ SIO. In respect to signification, a deponent verb is^ either transitive or intransitive ; as ^πίμ^Χομαι, €7Γ€μ€ληβην^ ίο take care of; βρϋχάομαι^ ^βρνχησάμην^ to roar. Note 1. Some deponents have both the aorist passive and the aorist middle ; as ^νναμαί, η^ννηθψ, €^ννησάμην. Most commonly, . however, when both aorists are used, the passive has a passive signi- fication ; as δ€χομαί, δβχθηναι, Β^ξασθαι. Note 2. It has already been remarked that the future of a depo- nent verb is taken from the middle. It is added here that a few de- ponents have also a future passive ; as eTrt/xeXo/tat, €πιμεΧησομαι, cVt- ΙχζΧηθησομαι. (^ 8'2, 2.) Note 3. Some deponents have, in the perfect and pluperfect, also a passive signification ; as €ργάζομαι Λρ-γασμαι, μιμύομαι μ^μιμημίνος» J TENSES. § Sll. 1. The present in the indicative expresses action or being which is going on now ; as γράφω ^ I write ^ I am writ- ing ; €i/xi, / am. In the other moods and in the participle, the present ex- presses continued action, but without regard to time. 2. The perfect^ in all the moods and in the participle, ex- presses action which is completed^ and whose effects are, or are regarded as, still continuing ; as γ€γραφα^ I have vrritten, 3. The future^ in all the moods and in the participle, ex- presses an action or event which will take place ; as γράψω, 1 shall or will write. 4. The future perfect is equivalent to the perfect participle with the future of et/xi, to he ; that is, it denotes an action which will be completed in future time ; as γ€γράψ€ταί^ the same as γ€γραμμ€νον eVrat, it loill have been written. Most commonly, however, the future perfect does not differ from the future ; as δί'ω, ^ε^ησομαι, shall be bound; τηπράσκω,π^πράσομαι, shall be sold. 5. The imperfect expresses continued or repeated action go- ing on in past time ; as εγραφον^ I was writing. 6. The aorist in the indicative and participle expresses fin- ished past action, without reference to the time required for its completion ; it simply narrates that which took place ; as €γραψα^ I wrote. In the other moods, the aorist expresses finished action with- out regard to time. ^ 211 ] TENSES. 265 7. The pluperfect expresses action which was comfHeted at some past time ; as iyeypa^cLv^ I had loritten. Note 1. In animated narration, the present and even the perfect may be used for the aorist ; as riatet κατά το στβρνον, καΐ τίτρωσκ€ί Βίά τον θώρακος. He struck him in the breast, and loounded him through the cuirass., Έληλνθε άνηρ Αθηναίος, An Athenian came. (Her. 8, 50.) Note 2. The perfect and aorist are often used for the present lo express a customary action ; as Ό κρατών άμα πάντα (τννηρπακ€, He who conquers takes possession of every thing. So Πάρα /xeV ovv φίλον ov μάθοις αν τονθ\ 6 δ' €χθρ6ς €νθνς ζξη- νάγκασ€ν, Now from a friend you might not learn this ; but the enemy {as a common thing) immediately compels you to learn it. Note 3. The perfect, aorist indicative, 2iua future perfect are some- times used for the future to denote the rapidity or certainty of an ac- tion ; as *Όλω\ας el σ€ ταντ ζρησομαι πάλιν, Thou shalt certainly perish, if I ask thee again this question. Απωλόμ€σθ'' ap^ ei κακόν προσοίσομζν veov παλαίω, Then we are undone^ if loe add a new evil to an old one. So Πράσσω, to do ; π€πράξ€ται. It shall immediately he done, θά- τΓτω, to bury ; τ^θά^^ται, He shall he buried in spite of thee. Note 4. Sometimes the present is used for the future ; as προσκτα- σθ€, €λ€νθ€ρουτ€, for προσκτησ€σθ€, €λ€νθ€ρωσ€Τ€, (Thuc. 4, 95.) — Ei/xt most commonly has the force of the future, I shall go. On the other hand, the future is sometimes used where one would naturally expect the present ; as νπάξζται, επάγεται, ^νσόμ^νος, κατα- βησ€ται, in Sophocles, Homer, and Hesiod. Note 5. 'Ήκω, to have come, and οΐχομαι, to be gone, have the force of the perfect. The imperfect ηκον has the force of the pluperfect, / Λ/2ί/ come ,• ωχόμην is used as aorist or pluperfect ; / was gone; I had gone. τίκτω, to be the parent of, and άκονω, to hear, in certain connec- tions, stand for the aorist €Τ€κον, ηκονσα. Note 6. The perfect of some verbs has the signification of the present ; in which case, the pluperfect has the signification of the im- perfect ; as €ίκω Ζοικα, to seem ; icoKeiv, I seeded. Note 7. The perfect imperative is used when the perfect has the force of the present (n. β) ; as άνώ-γω άνωγίτω αι/ώγβτβ, γίγνομαι ye- γον€τω, κράζω κβκραχθι K€KpayeT€, ΕΙΔί2 Ίσθι, μιμνησκω μ^μνησο. χά- σκω κ€χην€Τ€, πείθω πίπεισθι πεποιθε, κλνω Κ€κλνκ€, παραπίπτω πάρα π€πτωκ€τω . 1η the passive and middle, however, the third person of the perfect imperative of any verb is equivalent to the perfect participle with the imperative of εΙμί ; as^'χ^ω, let it he drawn and remain so ; δε- δόσ^ω, be it given; λβλείφβω, let it remain ; λελ€χθω, ειρήσθω, he it said. 12 266 SYNTAX. [§211. Note 8. In later Greek, the perfect is sometimes confounded with the aorist ; as (iV. T. Matth. 13, 46) AneXucou πίττρακζ πάντα οσα ^χ€, καΙ ηγόρασ€ν αυτόν. {Heb. 11, 17) IliVret ττροσ^νψοχζν Αβραάμ τον Ισαάκ. Note 9. The future perfect is the natural future of \^erhs whose perfect has the force of the present (n. 6) ; as κτάομαι κίκτημαι^ κ€κτη- σομαι, I shall possess ; μιμνησκω μβμνημαι, μ€μνησομαί, I skall remain mindful. Note 10. The imperfect may denote a customary past action ; as Tous πολΓτα? μ^θ ' οπλών ζξεπεμπον, They usually sent out the citizens armed. Note 11. The imperfect is often used for the aorist, especially in the Ionic Λvriters ; as εφην, I said, not I was sal/in^•; €καθ€ζϋμην, I sat, sometimes, / was sitting. When the regular signification of the imperfect is aoristic,the pres- ent of the dependent moods and participle also becomes aoristic ; that is, these moods are, so far as signification is concerned, subjoined to the imperfect ; as €φην, φώ φαίην φάθι φάναι φάς ; €σχ€θον, σχίθω σχίθοίμι σχ^θζ σχίθζίν σχίθων. So in verbs in -άθω, of which the present indicative is not used ; as άΚβξω, άλκάθ€ίν aoristic. Note 12. Sometimes the imperfect expresses an attempt ; as E/zt- σθουτο την ανλην, He erideavoured to hire the court-yard. Ουκ eVet^e τον Ξβρξεα, He could not convince Xerxes. Note 13. The imperfect is sometimes used where one would natu- rally expect the present ; as {Xen. A. 1, 4,9) ζνόμιζον, €Ϊων, for νομί- ζουσιν, ζώσίν. Ήν, was, often stands for eVrtV, is ; as Α-γαθον yap ην ου πάντ€£ ζφί- evTat, For that is good which all men desire. "Εττλβυ, πελευ, thou art ; €πλ€το, he is; from ττ^λω, 7re λο/χαι, to be. So eyiyveTO, αττώλλυτο, for ylyvcTai, άπόλλνται. The aorist εφνν, from φύω, regularly has the force of the present, to be, to be born. Note 14. The aorist indicative and participle is often used where the perfect or pluperfect would be more logical ; as Κατάβηθ' ως e/xe, ίνα /χ' €Κ^ώάξΊ]ς ωνπ€ρ ουνεκ εληλυθα. Σί2Κ. ^Ηλθες de κατά τι; Come down to me, to teach me those things for which I have come. Soc. But you have come for luhat ? Note 15. The aorist indicative of some verbs is, in colloquial style, often used for the present, in order to express a decided feeling of admiration, pity, contempt, or pleasure ; as "Ησθην άπ€Ϊλα7ς, It amuses me to hear your threats. So eye'Xaaa, I can't help laughing ; fjveaa, €πτ}ν€σα, I admire, or / thank you ; άπίπτυσα, I do despise ; ωμωξα, I groan from the bottom of my heart ; άπεπυ^άρισα, π€ρΐ€κόκκνσ•α, I sneeze at it. Note 16. In the old writers, the pluperfect sometimes has the force of the aorist ; as βεβληκα for e/SaXe, (//, 5, 66.) §§212,213.] MOODS. — QUOTATIONS. 267 MOODS. § 212. 1. The indicative is the mood of certainty ; it af- firms or denies, and is used in independent or dependent sentences. 2. The subjunctive is the mood of prohahility ; it is used in dependent sentences, and is regularly connected with the pri- mary tenses of the indicative, the imperative, or with any ver- bal form implying time present or future. 3. The optative is the mood of possihility ; it is used in de- pendent sentences, and is regularly connected with the secon- daiy tenses of the indicative, the aorist participle, or with any verbal form implying time past. 4. The imperative is used to express a command, an exhor- tation, entreaty, or a prohibition. Note. When the past is represented as present, the subjunctive or indicative takes the place of the optative. On the other hand, when the present is conceived of as past, the optative is used for the subjunc- tive or indicative. In later Greek, however, the indicative and subjunctive are very often used where the early writers would have used the optative. QUOTATIONS (5rt, ώ^). § 213. 1. AVords said by a person may be quoted with- out any change. Further, on may stand before the words thus quoted. E. g. Aw€KpLimro otl " Ώ deanora, ου ζη,^^ He answered, '^ master^ lie is not living.''^ . 2. When that which is quoted is not in the Λvords of the speaker, the indicative with 6tl or ώ? (negatively 6tl ου, ως ου) is used after the primaiy tenses and after the imperative ; the optative with the same particles is used after the secondary tenses. In this case, the tense employed by the person whose words or thoughts are indirectly quoted is used. E. g. Λίτ'γουσί, Τίβρσαί ως Ααρ^ϊός ην κάπηΧος. The Persians say that Όοτ rius ivas a huchsfr-r : they say, " Aapfios ην κάπηλος.^^ ElaciyyeWe Ύ^ίρ^σίας otl ζητ€Ϊ vlv. Announce thai Tiresias inquires for hun ; say to him " Ύ^ιρςαΙας ζητ€Ϊ σ^." ^Ηώη yap, otl ej αυτών καλόν tl άνακύψοίτο των ερωτημάτων, For I kneiu that somethiris^ good v:ould come out of these questions: I said to myself, '" E| αυτών καΧόν τι άνακύψεταί των i ρωτημάτων.''^ (a) As the optative has no imperfect, the imperfect indicative, in in- 268 SYNTAX. [§ 214. direct quotations, remains unaltered ; as Et^e Xeyetv otl βασιλβΐ avv€- μάχοντο^ He could confidently soy that they fought xvith the king^ where συμμάχοιντο would mean that he said " Βασιλβΐ σνμμάχονται^ (b) Before an interrogative w^ord, on, ώ$•, are omitted ; as Έίρωτων τι BekoL•, They asked what he ivanted. Note 1. (a) In animated narration, the indicative iRkes the place of the optative ; as^'EXeyei/ on eXev^epos ian, He said that he ivas a free- man, (b) On the other hand, when the present is conceived of as past, the optative takes the place of the indicative ; as Κπομνημον^ν^ται ώ^ λε- yoL ; for € Xeye. Note 2. "VVhen the present has the force of the aorist, it is regular- ly followed by the optative with on, las ; as Γράφει Ιπιστολην παρά βασίΚία on ηξα, He wrote a letter to the king, saying that he should come. Note 3. The imperfect or pluperfect indicative is sometimes used for the optative; as {Xen, An, 3, 1, 2) on ήσαν, ίμ^ΚΧ^ν, προνδ^δώ- Κ€ίσαν, καταΧ€\€ίμμ€ΐ/οί ήσαν» END, MOTIVE, (Ινα, ως, Βπως, ίφρα,) § 214. 1. The subjunctive and optative^ preceded by ti/a, Ιύζ, δπωϊ, οφρα, (negatively Ίνα μη, ως μη, όπως μη, οφρα μη^) reg- ularly denote an end or motive ; as, Αναμνησω νμας Ίνα ddrjre, I loill remind you, that you may know. Έκβίβασον αυτήν Ίνα κα\ νω θ^άσωμ^θα την άηδόνα, Bring her out, that loe too may see the nightingale. 'Επτακόσιους Χογάδας των όπΧϊτών €^€κρΙναν όπως ζ'ίησαν φυΚακ€ς, They selected seven hundred heavy-armed soldiers, in order that they might serve as guards. (a) The expression όπως μη, after words denoting/ecr, anxiety, ex- pressed or understood, generally omits όπως ; in which case μη \s usually translated lest; as, AedoLKa σ , ω πρ€σβυτα, μη πληγών ^erj, I am afraid, old man, that you ivill need stripes. Έδ€δοίκ€ίν μη φάρμακα μ€μίγμ€να ^ίη, Ι was afraid lest poisons had been mixed with it. (b) The future indicative, with όπως (rarely όπως αν), or οφρα, (negatively όπως μη, οφρα μη, or simply μη,) may take the place of the subjunctive ; as, Ae^oLKa όπως μη ανάγκη γ€νησ€ταί, I fear lest there will be a neces- sity. Φοβούμαι μη €υρησομ€ν, I fear lest we shall find. (c) The secondary tenses of the indicative are sometimes put after tva, ώς, όπως, rendered so, so that, so as, in this way ; as, § 214.] END, MOTIVE. 269 TvpLov ο'ώμα Χιπονσ €βάν Iv νπο ^€ΐράσι ΤΙαρνάσον κατζνάσθην, Hav- ing left the Tyrian surge I came, so tliat I might have dwelt under the summits of Parnassus. 2. All the sentences .depending upon Ί^α^ ώ? , οπω?, or 6φρα, are put in the subjunctive or optative, as the principal verb may require ; as, "Έ5ωκ€ τα y ράμματα τυΐς φίλοίς κα\ το7ς αρχονσιν όπως eldeUv των επι- τρόπων οί τ€ σώα αύτοϊς άπο^ώοΪ€ν, οι τ€ μη, He gave the inventory to his friends and to the rulers, that they might know tvho of the agents delivered the things safe, and who did not. ΕπίβουΧεύονσιν ώς, ην δύ- νωνται, άπο\€σωσιν. They are plotting against us, in order that they may destroy us, if they can. Note 1. In animated speech, or when the aorist has the force of the perfect, the subjunctive, or future indicative with όπως, οφρα, or οτω τρόπω, takes the place of the optative. On the other hand, when the present is conceived of as past, the optative takes the place of the subjunctive. E. g. *A τότ€ Αβροκόμας κατίκαυσ^ν Ινα μη Κύρος διαβη. Which Abrocomas then burned up, that Cyrus might not pass over, Ύοντον δ' όχώ. Ινα μη ταλαιπωροίτο, And Ι let this fellow ride that he m,ay not suffer hardship. Note 2. When the present is used for the aorist, it is regularly followed by the optative ; as ΒουΧην €πιτ€χνάταί δπως μη αΚισθα.€ν Αθηναίοι, He contrived apian, which should prevent the Athenians from assembling. Note 3. Sometimes όπως, or όπως μη, depends on opa, σκόπα, see, consider, understood ; as ^Οπως he ypvkkL^elTe κα\ κοΐξ€Τ€, And be sure to grunt and squeal. Και σοι φράσω πράγμ ο συ μαθών άνηρ eVet • όπως he τούτο μη διδάξει? μηδίνα. And Ι will tell you something luhich having learned you will be a man; but see that you communicate it to no- body. Note 4. "Οπως may be omitted before the future indicative; in w^hich case this tense has the appearance of the imperative ; as ^ιω- ξξΐς de μηδαμγι ζΐς αφάνες, And thou shalt by no means pursue the enemy into a. place out of sight. Note 5. x\fter βον\€ΐ or ^eXety, ΐνα may be omitted ; as Eire τι βονλει προσθ^ς η άφελτ]ς, Wliether thou ivishest to add or take away any thing. Here rt βονλει corresponds to quodvis, quidvis, quodlibet, quidlibet. Note 6. Sometimes a ν accompanies tva, όπως, ως, οφρα, μη, with the optative. Note 7. The future optative is rarely found after όπως. [Xen. Cyr, 8, 1, 43) "Οπως eVoti/ro. {Id. ib. 8, 3, 8) "Οπως e|ot. Note 8. In later Greek, Xva is sometimes followed by X\iQ future in- dicative. 270 SYNTAX. [§215. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES (eZ, 16lv, 'άν, ήν). § 2 IS. In a clause containing a condition and consequence or conclusion, the former is called protasis^ and the latter apo- dosis. The protasis usually begins with el, iap, αϊ/, or ην, si, if, negatively el μη, iav /χή, αν μη, ΟΥ ην μη, nisi, if not^ unless, 1. When the condition is assumed as a certainty, the prota- sis is put m the i?idicative with el AVhen it is not assumed as a certainty, it is put in the subjunctive with iav, av, or ήν^ (rarely el,) or in the optative with el (rarely eav). When the consequence is assumed as a certainty, the apodo- sis is put in the indicative^ imperative^ or subjunctive in prohi- bitions. When it is not assumed as a certainty, it is put in the indicative or optative^ generally with the modifying adverb a ν (negatively ουκ av). E. g. AeLva πeLσόμeθa el σιyησ^oμev, We shall suffer terrible disasters if we shall keep silence. Εισομβ^α αντίκα αν ποίησωμεν yp -όφον, We shall immediately know, if we mane a noise. El yap μη3€ ταντα ol^a, καΐ των άν^ραπό^ων φav\ότepos αν eϊηv, If Ι do not know even these things, then I am perhaps more vile than the slaves. Et τις epoLTo μ€, τι νομίζω μζγιστον eivai των Έι/αγόρα πeπpayμevωv, €1? ποΧλην άπορίαν αν κατασταίην, Should any one ask me, which of the deeds of Evas:oras I consider greatest, I should find my- self in great perplexity. 2. When the condition and consequence refer to time past, the secondary tenses of the indicative are used both in the pro- tasis and in the apodosis. The apodosis is accompanied by the adverb «i/, except when the consequence admits of no doubt whatever. E. g. OvTOL el ήσαν avhpes aya6o\, ουκ av ivoTe ταύτα '^πάσχον, If they had been good men, they ivould never have svffered these things. Ναι μα Δία ησχννόμην μ^ντοι, el υπο ^τo\eμίoυ ye οντος €ξηπατηθην, Yes, by Zeus, I should be ashamed indeed, if I had been deceived by one who was my avowed enemy. 3. Not unfrequently the protasis is lost sight of; in which ^ase, the optative with or without liv has the appearance of a WQak present or future indicative, or of a mild imperative ; the subjunctive in ' this case always has the force of a weak fu- ture indicative. The simple negative particle is ο v. But, in § 215.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 271 the Attic dialect, the suhjunctive can have the force of the fu- ture only when it comes after ου μη. Ε. g. Ου yap αν η^\τατ^ αϊτών, For he could not have touched them. OvK av μζ6€ΐμην του θρόνου, I will not give up the throne. Ήδ^ω? αν οΰν αυτών ττυθοίμην. Fain icould I ask them. AeyoLs (ivy You may speak ; milder than Xeye, speak thou. Οϋτ€ ylyvETaL οϋτ€ yeyoj/ev aide οΰν μη y€pητaι, It is not, it has not been, it loill never be. 4. AVhen both the protasis and the apodosis are in the opta- tive, the sentences depending upon them are put in the optative or indicative ; as, El Se πάνυ σττου^άζοι (bay civ, ζίποιμ' αν οτι πάρα ταΊς γνναιζίν €στιν, €ως παρατ^ίναιμι τούτον. And if he was very eager to eat, I would tell him he was in the women's apartment, until 1 worried tl us fel- low to death. 5. Sometimes the infinitive or participle with av is used where one might expect a finite mood ; as, Et e^eXeiy iXBelv, ο'ίομαι av σ€ πιστ^υθηναι, If you would go, I think you would be believed. Ύά Βικαίως αν ρηθβντα κατά της πόλεως, Those things which might justly be said against the state. Note I. Sometimes the optative is used in the apodosis instead of the indicative, especially in the Epic writers, contrary to the second' rule ; as Kat νύ K€v ev6 άποΚοιτο αναξ άντρων Alvclas, ei μη ap^ οζυ νόησ€ Alos βυyάτηρ Αφροδίτη, And now JEneas, king of men, had per- ished, had not Aphrodite, daughter of Zeus, quickly perceived. Note 2. In the Attic dialect the future indicative in the apodosis is very seldom accompanied by the adverb olv. The present and per- fect indicative, in the apodosis, were most probably never accompa- nied by av. Note 3. The secondary tenses of the indicative are sometimes used in the apodosis even \vhen the protasis is in one of the primary tenses of the indicative, or in the optative ; as Et ούτω ταύτα e^et, πώς αν ποΧλοϊ Ιπ^θύμουν Tvpavvelv ; If these things are so, how is it that many desire to be tyrants 1 Εγώ μεν αν, et εχοιμί, ώς τάχιστα όπλα €ποιου- μην. For my part, if I could, I icould, as quickly as possible, make arms for myself. Note 4. In the Epic dialect, the subjunctive, with or without acc or K6V is often used in the apodosis instead of the future indicative ; as Et be K€ μη δώωσt, εγώ δε k€v αυτός €\ωμαι, But if they shall not give it, I will take it myself. Note 5. "Ai/ is often repeated in the apodosis; as Ου? ουκ αν et- λ€σθ' ούδ' αν οΐνόπτας προτού. Whom formerly you would not have appointed even inspectors of wine. 272 SYNTAX. [§ 216 Note 6. (a) After certain words, et or iav has the force of an in- terrogative word, whether, ivheiher or not ; as Έπννθάν^το d σωθείβν πάντ€5, He asked whether all were safe. So ΣκοτΓβίι/ or Σκζψασθαι el, To see ivhether. Ύον νουν ττροσίχζΐν et, To see whether. Ου δηλον et, It is not known whether. (b) Sometimes et has the force of on, that, becavse of ; as Αίσχν- Ρ€σθαί et, To be ashamed of. Ayanau et, To be contented that, θαυ- μάζζΐν et. To wonder that. (c) Not unfrequently et has the force of a relative adverb of time (ore, oTTore) ; in which case it is followed by the optative when it de- pends on a secondary tense ; as Ουκ ην Χαβ^ίν, et μη θηρω€ν. It was not possible to take, unless they hunted. "Ω.ίκτ€ΐρον et αΚωσοιντο, They pitied them, if they should be taken. (d) Et TL9 is often equivalent to the relative οστιε, whoever^ what- ever, such as. Note 7. "Kv is sometimes found without a verb, when the verb can be easily supplied from the context ; as Φοβούμενος ωσπερ άν et τταίί. Fearing like a child ; as a child would fear. Expression of a Wish, ξ 316• 1. When the wish refers to present time, the pres- ent optative with or without et, et γαρ, et^e, ώί, (negatively ei μη^ et yap μη^ et^e μη, ως μη^ Or simply /i ή,) Ο that^would that^ is used ; as, Et yap iycuv Aios ttcus άϊγιόχοίο €Ϊην ! Ο that I were the son of cEgis- hearing Zeus ! 2. If the wish refers to past time, the secondary tenses of the indicative are used after the above-mentioned particles ; as, Et^' etxey, ω τ€Κουσα, βίΚτίονς φρενας I Would that thoUy Ο mother, hadst a better understanding ! Et^e σ' υττ' Ιλιω ήναρ€ δαίμων ! Ο that fate had slain thee under Ilion ! 3. If the wish refers to future time, the aorist optative is used with or without the above-mentioned particles ; as, El yap yivovro ! May it come to pass ! *Qs άπόΧοιτο ! Thus may he perish ! 4. The sentences depending upon the expression of a wish are put in the optative, subjunctive, or indicative, as the sense may require ; as, Vcvoipdv α€τ6ς ij\jnn€Tas ως αν ποτάθείην, May I become a soaring eagle that I may fy. Σοι δβ ^eoi τόσα doUv οσα φρεσϊ ajjaL μενοινας, And may the gods give thee as many things as thou desirest in thy heart. § 217.] RELATIVE SENTENCES. 273 5. The infnitive preceded by ωφ^λοϊ/, ωφβιλοι/, from οφεί- λω, with or without the above-mentioned particles, is often used in the expression of a wish. The time to which the wish in this case refers is determined by the tense of the infinitive. E.g. ^ίΐφίλβ μη^είς αΧλυς ApiaToycLTovL -χαίρξίν ! Would that no other man delighted in Aristogiton I Ολίσθαι δ' ωφζ\ον ! And would that I had perished ! Note 1. The subjunctive is very seldom used after ei^e ; (Eurip. Sup. 1029 ; Hel. 270) EWe φανώσι, EWe λάβω. Note 2. The imperfect indicative is often used when the wish ΐυ fers to present time ; it is however milder than the present optative ; thus, €ΪΘ' €Ϊχ€ς is weaker than €ΪΘ' βχοις. Note 3. In later Greek, ω φ eX ο ν or οφξλον has the force of the particle et^e ; as {N. T. Cor. 2, 11, 1). Note 4. Sometimes the expression of a wish assumes the form of a question beginning with πως αν with the optative ; as Πώ^ au ολοί- ψ,άν ; How might I perish? May I perish ! RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 217. 1. When the relative sentence is assumed as a certainty^ the relative is connected with the indicative. (§ 212, 1.) The negative particle is ού, placed after the relative word. E. g. Autos ei/xt bv ζητ€Ϊς, I am the very man you inquire for, ^Ησαν TTpos rfj κωμτ] €νθα Χ€ίρίσοφοζ ηυΧίζετο, They were near the village where Chirisophus was encamped. These rules apply to relative pronouns, pronominal adjectives, and ad- verbs. Also to αχρι^ H-^XPh '^o-T€, ev6a, evOcv, inei, incidr], (§§ 75 ; 76.) 2. When the relative sentence is assumed as a prohabilify or possibility^ the relative is connected with the subjunctive (generally with αϊ/), or optative (generally without αϊ/), as the leading sentence may require (§ 212, 2. 3). The negative par- ticle is /ιή, placed after the relative word. E. g. Ζώα ου ταντα καλβί?, α αν ψνχην €χη ; Do you not call animals those things which have life. *07ΓΟτ6ρ' au άποκρίνηται το μ€φάκίον, ίξίΚ^'^χθησ^ται, Whatever answer the young man may give, he will be confuted. "Έσφαττον ων Kpareiv dvvaLvro, They butchered those whom they could get hold of Εδίδοσαι/ \αμβάν€ΐν ο tl βονλοιτο, They allowed him to take whatever he wished Είλκον τας vevpas όπ6τ€ to^€vol€v, They pulled the strings when thiey shot. 12* 274 SYJs^TAx. [^218. ΊΐγζΊσθαί eKeXevov οπον τον ^ρόμον π^ποιηκως €'ίη, They requested him to lead them to the place where he had prepared the race- ground. 3. "Ώστβ, 50 that^ so as^ denotes a consequence or effect, and is followed by the indicative^ optative^ infinitive^ and some- times by the imperative. "Ω ore a ν is used with the optative, infinitive, or with the secondary tenses of the indicative. E. g. Τά ev τω τταραδβισω θηρία άνη\ώκ€ί ώστ6 6 Αστυάγης ονκ€Τ^ ^^Χ^^ αύτω avXkeyeLv θηρία, He destroyed the rvild beasts in the park, so that Astyages could no longer collect ivild beasts for him. 4. Εφ' ω, or Εφ' ωτβ, on this condition^ on condition that, for the purpose of, is followed by the infinitive, and sometimes by the future indicative. Note 1. When the past is represented as present, the subjunctive or indicative takes the place of the optative ; as {Xen. An. 4, 7, 20. 24) οψονταί, σκηνησονσι, for οψοίντο, σκηνησοι^ν. On the other hand, when the present is represented as past, the op- tative takes the place of the subjunctive. Note 2. The indicative with the relative sometimes denotes pur- pose, end, motive ; as ΐ1ρ€σβ€ίαν δε ττίμπ^ιν ήτις ταντ^ epel, And to send ambassadors who shall say these things ; in order to say. Note 3. The relative may take the indicative even when its ante- cedent is logically indefinite ; in which case the negative particle is /χή ; as Κνηρ δίκαως eanu ονχ 6 μη άΒικών, αλλ' όστις ά3ίΚ€Ϊν δυνάμε- νος μη βούλ€ται, Α just man is not he who does no wrong, but he ivho being' al)le to do wrong is not willing. Note 4. 'Ω,ς αν, "Ω.στΓερ αν, As if are followed by the optative. The Epic Poets may use ώ ς, as, with the subjunctive^ and ώ σ e i, as if, with the sid)junciive or optative in comparisons. EXHORTATIONS, COMMANDS, PROHIBITIONS. § 218• 1. The imperative is used to express a command, an exhortation, or entreaty ; as φ^υγβ, begone ! φευγόντων, let them depart. 2. The first person of the subjunctive, and the second or third of the optative, may be used in exhortations. The first person of the subjunctive may be preceded by aye, φ^ρε, come, ea, lei ; and the second person of the optative may be accom- panied by av. The negative particle in this case is μη, not. E. g. ^ Φ/ρ' ιδω. Let me sec. Φβρε ακούσω, Let me hear. Τον Μενίλ^ων μιμωμεθα, Let us imitate Menelaus, Μη ϊωμεν, Let y^ not so» § 219.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 275 KXaioLre τον Ιμ€ρΟ€ντα Βίωνα, Weep ye for the lovely Bion. Aiyois aV, You may speak ; softer than Aeye, Speak thou. "ΈΧΘωμζν δ' άνα αστν, βοη δ' ωκιστα yevoLTO, And let US go to tlie city, and let a loud cry be set up very quickly. 3. In prohibitions., the present imperative., or the aorist sub- junctit-e^ is used after μη ; as, Μη λ eye, Say not. Μη λεγετω. Let him not say. Μη λεΙ?;?, Say not. Μη λε^τ;, Let him not say. Note 1. Sometimes μη is followed by the aorist imperative, par- ticularly by the third person ; as Μη πρίω, Μτ^δει? ΙΒετω. Note 2. When the speaker is in great haste, the second person of the imperative may be used for the third ; as Xatpeu ^evpo πάς υπη- ρέτης, τόξ€ν€ πάς τις, Come hither, every servant, shoot, every one of you f Note 3. The imperative is sometimes found in dependent sen- tences, especially in connection with a relative pronoun or adverb after οϊα-θα; knowest thou? where one might expect δβί with the iniini- tive ; as, ΟΪσθ^ ^ovv b 8ράσον ; Knowest thou what thou must do? Οίσθ^ ω: ποίησον; Dost thou know how thou must act? Οίσθα νυν α μοι -γζνεσθω ; Dost thou know what I now desire to be done for me? , Note 4. The imperative ή)€ρ€ is sometimes found with the sec- ond person of the subjunctive ; as {Soph. P. 300) Φ/ρβ μάθης, essen- tially the same as μάθ€. Note 5. In the New Testament, αφ€ς is used for aye or φή:^ with the subjunctive ; as "Άφβ? €κβάλω. "Αφζς ιδω/χβί^. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. § 219. 1. When a definite answer is expected, the indic- ative is used in interrogative sentences. The negative particle in this case is ου, not. E. g. Tt ποί^Ις ; What art thou doing? Οιδ€ TL βού\€ταυ, He knows what it wants. *Hi/ ττνθησβ' όστις (Ιμί, When you have learned who I am. O'Ul yap σοι μαχα,σθαι, ω Kvp€, τον ά3€\φόν ; Dost thou really think, Ο Cyrus, that thy brother will fight. 2. When no definite answer is expected, the subjunctive (generally without av) or the optative (with or without az/) is used ; as, ΤΙως φώ ίπίστασθαι ; JIow can I say that I know ? TiVor' ^ οΰν \€γωμ€ν; What shall we then sayi 276 SYNTAX. [§219. τις αν φράσ€ΐ€ ; Vi^io could tell ? ^ Και TL μίξαιμι ; And what could I do ? ΠϋΖ τις φύ-γοί ; or Ποί tls αν φύγοί ; Whither should one flee 1 3. When a person asks another what he is to do, the first per- son of the subjunctive^ with or without βονλβί or U^Xcis^ is used. The negative particle here \s μη. Ε. g. BovXeL ovv bvo €'ίΒη Θωμζν π€ΐθουζ ; Wilt thou that we now suppose two kinds of persuasion ? Έ'ίπω TL ; Shall I say any thing ? Eyo) σιωπώ ; Am I to keep silence? 4. In negative interrogations, ού is used when yes is expect- ed ; and μη^ when no is expected or desired. Further, ο ν with {he future indicative forms an emphatic imperative. E. g. Ού παραμ€ν€ΐς ; Will you not wait 1 I wish you would wait. Μή αρχιτέκτων βονΧ€ΐ γ^ν^σθαι ; Ουκ ουν εγωγβ, Όο you wish to be- come an architect ? Not I. Μή πΎ} δοκονμζν σοι ουκ αναγκαία έκαστα ^ι^Χηλνθύναι ; Do you sup- pose that we have not gone through every thing necessary? No, 1 do not suppose any such thing. 5. Interrogative sentences may be preceded by the interrog- ative particles ξ, apa or αρά γβ, ουκονν (ουκ ουζ/), μων (μη ονν)^ an.? -ne .? num .ί* Also by the phrase a\Xo τι or aWo τι ψ E.g. ^ *H ούτοι πο\€μιοί άσιν ; Are they enemies ? Ουκονν και τω yeiTovi βού\€ΐ συ άρβσκ^ιν ; Do you not wish to please your neighbour also ? I kno\v you do. Tt χρήμα μαστζΰουσα ; μων ίΚ^υθζρον αιώνα θίσθαι ; Desiring what? to obtain your liberty ? So Et μ€ν yap τνγχάν€ΐ ταύτα αΚηθη οντα^ ηλΧο τι η ημών 6 βίοζ άνα- τ€τραμμίνος αν ζ'ίη ; If these things were true, would not then our life be in confusion ? Note 1. The second and third persons of the subjunctive, and the second of the optative, are not much used in interrog-ations. Further, when the third person of the subjunctive is used after interrogatives, it almost always stands for the first ; as Ποί τις ουν φυγή ; Ποί τις ΤΚθη ; Note 2. When ου μη stands before the future indicative or the aorist subjunctive, in an interrogative sentence, ού is interrogative, and μη modifies the verb immediately following.; as Ού μη λαλήσβυ, αλλ' άκο\ουθησ€ΐς βμοί; Won't you stop your nonsense and follow me? Prate not, but follow me. Note 3. The sentences depending upon the optative in interroga- tions are put in the optative or indicative, according to ^ 215, 4 ; as Πώς δ' αν νηες οποί del άφίκοιντο ; How could ships safely arrive at the place of their destination ? ^§ 220, 221.] INFINITIVE. 277 Νότε 4. When e l means whether, that is^when it is an interroga- tive particle, it may be followed by the subjunctive; as Ουκ old' et Χρυσάντα τοντω δω, I do not know whether I shall give to this Chry- Santas COMPARATIVE SENTENCES {ή, than), § 330• 1. "Ή, than^ after a comparative adjective or ad- verb may stand before any tense or mood ; as, θαττον η ως τις αν ω€το, Sooner than one could have thought. Νβώτεροι €ΐσι η ω(ττ€ cldevai, They are younger than to know ; too young to know. ^Hblov oidev ovde μονσικωτ^ρον η ^ννασθαι \οώορονμ,€νον ή>ίρ€ΐν, Nothing is pleasanter or more musical than to he able to hear being ridiculed; to bear ridicule. After πριν, prius, before, before that^ η is omitted; πρΙν ή\ priusquam, however, is sometimes found before the infinitive^ or the secondary tenses of the indicative, 2. Π/31Ι/, before^ before that^ is used with the subjunctive^ optative^ or with the secondary tenses of the indicative. With the subjunctive and optative it refers to future time ; with the secondary tenses of the indicative, to time past. Further, with the subjunctive, it is regularly followed by av. * Most commonly 7Γ ρ 11^ is preceded by πρότ€ρον^ πρόσθζρ, or by another πριν, in the same sentence. E. g. Ο υ yap πανσομαι πρΙν αν φράστ]ς μοί, Ι will not cease before you have told me. Υποσχόμενος αυτοίς μη πανσασθαι πρΙν αντονς κατάγοι, Promising to them not to cease before he brought them back, Ού πρόσθεν επανσαντο ποΧεμονντες πρ\ν εποίησαν, They did not cease from waging war, until they made. Note. In the Epic dialect, the future indicative is sometimes used for the subjunctive \\'\\\\πρίν \ as (//. 18,283) ΤίρΧν 'ihovrai, (II. 1, •29) IlpXv €π€ίσιν, with the force of the future. INFINITIVE. ^ 321. The infinitive with or without the neu- ter article always has the force of a neuter verbal noun. The subject of the infinitive, if expressed, is put in the accusative ; as, Aei e/ii XcycAv, It is necessary that I should spec^, 278 SYJNTAX. [§ 222. To αμαρτάν^ιν ανθρώπους οντάς ovbev, οίμαι, θανμαστόν, That men.^ as such, should err, is I think nothing strange. ^ S22. 1. In certain connections, the infini- tive, with or without the article, has the force of the subject-nominative (§ 153, a) ; as, Aet κράτιστόν eVrt τάληθή Xeyeiv, It is always best to speak the truth. Apap ταύτα χρη, One must do these things. 2. When the infinitive has the force of the gen- itive or dative^ it is generally preceded by the arti- cle. When it has the force of the accusative^ it takes the article chiefly when it depends on a prep- osition. E. g. Kpetrroi/ eVrt το σωφρονζίν τον ποΧυπρα-γμον^ιν, To he wise is better than to meddle ivith other men^s affair's. "Ώρα βα8ίζ€ΐν, It is time to go ; genitive. Κνά-γκη σβ πάντα ^πίστασθαι, You must of necessity know all things; genitive. Προ? το πράγμα φιλον^ικονντα Xeyeiv τον καταφανές yeveauai, To argue in order that the thing may become evident. (^ 194. 1.) Σ€μνννόμ€θα €πΙ τω β^ΧτΤον yeyovevaL των αΧλων, We pride ourselves upon being of nobler descent than other people. Aia το πολλούς €χ€ΐν νπηρ^τάς, Because he had many servants. 3. After certain verbs and expressions, the infin- itive has the force of the accusative of the imme- diate or remote object ; as, Υ.θζλω μαθζΐν, I ivish to learn. ΜανΘάνονσ -t rofeueii/, They learn to shoot with bow and arrows. AdiKflv 3ννάμ€νος^ Being able to do wrong. E^etro αυτών βοηθών epoi, He prayed them to aid me. ΤΙαραινώ σοι σιωπαν, I advise thee to be silent. Ώαρηγγ€ίλ€ν ημίν Kauevbeiv, He commanded us to sleep. Αώάσ-κονσιν αυτούς π€ίθ€σθαί, They teach them to obey. (a) When a verb, in addition to the infinitive, is followed by a nouii denoting a person, a participle referring to that noun is commonly put in the accusative; as, Eyo) de νμών δ€ομαί κατα>\τηφίσασθαι θεομνηοΎον, ενθνμονμενονς ort, And I beseech you to condemn Theomnestus, when you consider that. A€VLa ηκ€ίν παρηγγ€ίλ€ λαβόντα τους άνδρας^ He requested Xenias to taJie the men and come. § 222.] INFINITIVE. 279 This construction arises from the fact that, in connection with the infinitive, any verb may take the accusative. Thus {Lys. Frag.) Δε- ομαι ν μας σνγγνωμην €χ^€ΐν. i^JEsch. Ch. 16) ί2 ZeO, δόί μ€ τίσασθαι μόρον πατρός. (b) When a verb v^ould be follo\ved by the accusative of the reflex- ive pronoun and the infinitive, the reflexive pronoun is omitted, except in case of emphasis or antithesis ; as, Οΐμαι evp7}K€vaL, sc. βμαντόν, 1 thtJik I have found. Οΐμαί με ακη- KoevaLj I think I have heard. "Έφη €σ€σθαί, He said he should he. Κροίσο? ζνόμισ€ ίωντον elvai ανθρώπων απάντων οΧβιώτατον, Croesus thought that he himself was the happiest of all men. Έβου\€το iavTov φίλζϊσθαί, He wished that he alone should be be- loved. (c) The nominative of the personal pronoun, expressed or under- stood, may, in connection v^-ith the infinitive, take the place of the ac- cusative of the reflexive ; which nominative, grammatically consider- ed, is in apposition with the subject of the verb on which the infinitive depends ; as, No/ziffi? ημάς μβν άνίξεσθαί σου, αυτός Se τνπτησ^ιν ; Dost thou think that we shall tolerate thee, and that thoU canst strike ? here αυτός stands for σαυτόν. Έϋχ€ο δ' Απόλλωνι p^^€iv ίκατόμβην o'Uade νοστησας^ And vow to Apollo to offer him a hecatomb when thou returnest home ; sc. σν, for σαντόν. 4. After verbs signifying to say, promise, think, and their synonymes, the infinitive is put in the tense employed by the person whose words or thoughts are indirectfy quoted ; as, ^Έφασαν αττοδώσειν, They said they would give bark; they said " ΑτΓοδώσο/χβν. ' ' ΈΪναι θ€ούς ζνόμίζ€ν, He believed that there are gods ; he said to him- self '• EtVi Beoi:' (a) The present infinitive may stand, also for the imperfect ; as Ίον Κυρον ζφασαν Xeyetv, They said that Cyrus said; they said '' Ό Κύρος eXeyev."' Ιασθαι αυτός το τραύμα φησί, He says that he himself cured the wound ; he said '* Ιώμην εγώ το τραύμα.''^ (b) Sometimes the aorist or present infinitive takes the place of the future ; as Ύποσχόμζνος μη παύσασθαυ, Promising that he ivould not icase; he said " Ού τταΰσο/χαι." (c) When the active takes the accusative and infinitive, the passive retains the infinitive ; as Α^γουσί or Ό/ιολογοίσι τον Κνρον γενίσθαι ; in the passive Ό Κύρος Xeyerat or 'OpoXoyelTai yeveauai. 280 SYNTAX. [§ 222. 5. The infinitive is often put after a sentence to denote a cause or motive ; as, ΤΙαρ€χονσιν iavrovg το7ς ηρχονσί χρησθαι, They offer themselves ίο the magistrates to employ. 6. The infinitive is put after certain adjectives^ adverbs^ pronouns^ substantives^ and expressions, for the sake of limiting or more fully defining their meaning ; as, ΙΙοΚςμζίν Ικανός^ Capable of fighting. Τ1ίν€σθαί η^ιστος, Very pleasant to drink. ΐ1άσχ€ίν aky€Lvos, Painful to endure. θαύμα Ι^ίσθαι, A luonder to behold. Ουχ olos τ €'ίμ άποσοβησαι τον γβΧων, Ι am not able to drive away my laughter. Pronouns of this class are τοΊος, roLOabe, τοιούτος, τηλίκος, οίος, οϊός τ€, capable; ποϊος, how capable? what sort of ? 6σον, οσα, enough, suf- ficient, 7. Tvi^o or even three infinitives may stand to- gether ; as, ■^Εφτ; iOeXcLv πορ€υ€σθαι. He said he was loilling to go. Αθηναίους πάντας μ€τα τον θ^ίον νομίζεις δυνησ€σθαί ττοιησαι ττζίθζ- σθαί σοι ; Do you think that you will be able to make all the Athe- nians, together with your uncle, follow your advice 1 Hi' όδΓ μίν οϋ φησι χρηναι τους νίονς άσ<€ΐν. Which, this man says, young men ought not to exercise. When two infinitives are in connection with an impersonal verb, one of them has the force of the subject-accusative ; as άοκ€ΐ μοι wpenciv evTevOev ττοιησασθαι την αρχήν, It seems to me proper to begin here ; where ποιησασθαι is the subject οι πρίττ^ιν. Note 1. (a) The infinitive is sometimes omitted, Avhen it can be readily supplied from the context; as {Arist. PI. 1100-2) EtV εμοϊ, συ την Θυραν €κοπτ€ς ουτωσΐ σφό8ρα ; ΕΡΜ. Μα Δι', αλλ' €μ€Χλον^ Tell me, was it you that knocked at the door so furiously J Herm. No, by Zeus, but I was going to knock. In certain connections, levai, to go, is omitted ; as (Id. Ran. 1279) Eyo) μβν ουν e? το βαΧανύον βούλομαι. Now for my part, I wish to go to the bath. (b) On the other hand, the verb upon which the infinitive depends is, in certain connections, omitted ; as *A beikoi ! ττόσ ϊμ€ν ; Ah ! wretches! lohither do ye intend to go? Note 2. After verbs denoting volition (as i θ ζ\ω), Uve. future ζχιά perfect infinitive were perhaps never used by classical writers r § 223.] iNFiNiTiYi.. 281 § S33• 1. The infinitive is often put after ώ^, ώστβ (some- times ωστ av)^ SO Uiat^ SO aSy that^ i(f> ω, e^' ω re, on this COJl- dition^ on condition thai, for the purpose of; as, Kvnpis ηθζ^ ωστ€ yiyv€a6ai τάδβ, Cypris wished that these things should happen. ' Έφασαν άπο^ωσ€ΐν βφ* ω μη KaUiv τας χωρας^ They said they loould ddioer on condition tliat they should not hum the villages, 2. The infinitive with the relatives ώ?, 6σον^ 6 tl^ is• often used in parenthetical phrases ; ως however may be omitted; as, 'Qs €πος βιπβιι/, So to speak, Ού πολλω Χόγω clnelv, Not to use many words. *Ως iv πλ^ονί λόγω ^ηΧωσαι, To explain more fully. "Οσοι/ y ipH eldevai, At least as far as my hiowledge extends, "O TL καμ eldevai, For aught I know, AoKclv €μοί, As it appears to me. Ολίγου δβιι/, almost, nearly. In phrases like this, deiv is sometimes omitted. 3. The infinitive is often put after πριν (Epic πάρος)^ πρ\ν η, πρότ€ρον ή\ ογπρόσθεν η, prius, priusquam, before.^ before that^ and sometimes after ύστερον ή\ postquam., after, after that ; as, Αΐίβησαν ττρίν tovs αλΧονς άποκρϊνασθαι, They passed over before the others answered, ^Υστερον rj αυτούς οΐκίσαί, After they settled. 4. In narration, the infinitive often takes the place of the in- dicative ; as, '' Σάκα §€," φάναι τον Aστvάyηv, " ovbh διδωί ;" '* But,'' said As- tyages, '' will you not give Sacas something ? " 5. The infinitive often takes the place of the imperative ; as Μηποτ€ σύ yvvaLKi ήπιος clvai, Thou must never be indulgent to thy luife, 6. The infinitive is used also in exhortations, commands, proclamations ; as, Akov€T€ \€(u ! τους δπλΤτάς νννμζνΐ άν&Κομίνονς θωπΧα άπύναι πά- Χιν oLKade, Hear ye people ! the hoplitce rnustfor the present take up their shields and go back home, 7. Sometimes the infinitive expresses a wish ; as Zcv πάτερ, rj Α'ίαντα Χαχεΐν η Τΰδ/οί νΐόν, Father Zeus, grant that the lot may fall upon Ajax or upon the son of Tydeus, 8. The infinitive wither without to is sometimes used in exclamations of surprise or indignation ; as To δε μη κννεην / 282 SYNTAX. [§§ 224, 225. οίκοθεν ίΚθβΐν €μ€ τον κακο^αψον έχοντα, But that I, a wretcll^ should have coine from home without a helmet — it is too bad. 9. The infinitive el ναι, to Je, is sometimes apparently super- fluous, particularly in connection with ίκό^ν, willing^ and gen- erally in negative sentences ; as ^Έκίύν re eluaL ουδ' άν μοννομαχ^- οιμι^ And if I had my choice^ I should uotfght even agamst a single man. ^ S@4• When the copula of a sentence is an infinitive, the noun in the predicate agrees in case v\ ith the noun to which it refers ; as, Έκάνος elvai φησι Διόι/ϋσοί Ucos, He says he is the god DioJiysus. Kvpov cdeovTo προθυμότατου yei/eV^at, They besought Cyrus to be very eager. Πολλοί των προσποιησαμ€νων elvai σοφιστών, Many of those who pretended to be sophists. Εφ' ημϊν ίσται το eVteiKeVt κα\ φαΰλοις elvai, It loill depend ujjon ourselves to be respectable or worthless. Βούλ^σθβ γ€ν€σθαί αντον σοφόν ; Do you ivish him to become wise ? Note. Sometimes the noun in the predicate is put in the accusal tive, although the noun it refers to is in the genitive or dative ; as λ,θψ ναίων €^€ηθησάν σφίσι βοηθούς yei/eV^at, They prayed the Athenians to become their helpers. So Ύττό των ^ζομίνων μου ττροστάτην yeveV^ai, By those loho desired me to become their protector. Ένόμιζον αντοίς προσηκζΐν αγαθούς eivai. They thought that it became them to be good. PARTICIPLE. § 225. 1. The participle preceded by the article is equiv- alent to €Κ€Ϊνος OS, he ivho^ and the finite verb ; as Ό λ/γωι/, He who says. *H λβξουσα. She ivho will say. To λεχθ^ν, That which was said. But when the article stands before the substantive Avith which the participle agrees, the participle retains its participial signification ; as Ακουσας he 6 ΚΧ€αρχος ταύτα rjp€TO τον ayyikov. And Clearchus, hav^ iiig heard this, asked the messenger. 2. The participle is very often equivalent to the indicativb. subjunctive, or optative, with a relative pronoun or a relative adverb of time ; as, Πόλι? Ιστ\ν €v τω Έύξβίνω ΤΙόντω ΎρικαρηνΙα καλούμενη, There is a city on the FMxine Sra^ called Tricarejua. TepovTa δε αύτον yeyovcWa η οψις άπβΧιπεν, And when he became an old man, his eyesight failed him. § 225.] PARTICIPLE. 283 3. The participle often denotes the maimer or means ; as, Τίνθομίνη η '^Αλκησης on /zeXXet "Ατμητος avaipelauaL δι' αυτήν, €ξ€λθούσα ίαυτψ παμ^^ωκ^ν, Alcestis, hearing that Adinetus was about to be put to death on her account, came out and surrendered herself. Ααβων δ€ την Γοργόνα κατβκοψβν, And taking Gorgon he cut her up 4. The participle often denotes a cause. When it denotes an assumed cause, it is preceded by ως, as^ as ij\ supposing that ; as, Αγανακτησάμ€νος ^ΙΙρακλης ^πίτίθ^ται τω Ακάστω, Hercules being in•• dignant fell upon Acastus. Mere/xeXovTo αποδβδωκυτβ?, They regretted that they had restored, Ύιμωμ€νοι χαίρονσιν, They delight in being honored. So in the phrases Tt μαθών ; For what reason ? 'Ό tl μαθών, be- cause. Tt παθών ; From what motive ? What induced or possessed you ^ 5. The future participle (and sometimes the present) is regularly put after verbs of motion to express the purpose of the action of those verbs ; as, *Ηλ^€ προς τον ΑγησίΧάον άσπασ6μ€νος, He came to Agesilaus to bid him farewell. 6. The participle may form the protasis of a conditional clause. It is used also where the English employs although,^ not• loithstanding ; in Avhich case it is commonly preceded by καί^ και π€ρ, καίτοι, κα\ ταύτα, or followed by όμως, Ε. g. Τ€νόμ€νος δε κα\ συ γνώ(Τ7] οτι rjbea ταυτά iariv, If you taste, you also will see that these things are sweet. OvK av προδοίην olde π€ρ πράσσων κακώς, I will not betray, though I am, ur fortunate, 7. In connection with certain verbs, adjectives, and phrases, the participle is apparentl}^ equivalent to the object of these words. And when it refers to the subject of the sentence, it is put in the nominative. E. g. Me/xi^^M«t σ-φώ επσγγελλο/χει/ω, I remember your prof essing. Μψνψ μαι άκουσας, I rememlier having heard. Υνους βαπτίζόμ€νον το μ^ιράκιον. Perceiving that the stripling xoas overwhelmed. Επβίδάι/ γνώσιν άπιστουμ^νοι, When they perceive that they are distrusted. To ^υνασθαι δίψώντα άν€χ€σθαί, To be able to endure thirst, ΐΐανσαι φλύαρων, Stop talking nonsense. Ήμ€Ϊς άΒύνατοι ορώμ^ν οντ€ς, We see that we are unable. Δτ^λοϊ ην άνιώμ€νος, It loas evident that he was grieved 284 SYNTAX. [§225, 8. The participle after the following auxiliary verbs contains the leading idea of the expression : Β Tji he ivent, in Homer ; B^ φ€υγων eVt πόντον, He fled to the sea. A lay ω, to pass time; Αιάγονσί μανθάνοντ€ς, They pass their time in learning. Αίατ€\€ω, Αιατρίβω, to continue; Αιατ€λονσι δίκάζοντ€ς. They are continually deciding cases. Αανθάνω, to escape notice; ΑεΧηθα €μαντον σοφός ων, I did not know that I was wise. ΟΪχομαί, to be gone; "Ω,ιχ€το φβυγωι/, He departed precipitately. Τυγχάί/ω, to happen; Ύνγχάνομ€ν 6πίθϋμουντ€ς, We happen to be desirous. Φαίνομαι, to appear ; Αιαφ^ρων €φαίν€το, He appeared differing, He differed. Φθάνω, to anticipate; Φθάν€ί, άναβάς, He ivent up first. The phrase Ουκ αν φθάνοις, with a participle, may be rendered You cannot he too soon ; quickly. Add to these the Ionic expressions ττοΧΚός βίμι, ττολλό? €γκ€ΐμαί, παντοίος γίγνομαι ; also, the periphrastic tenses. 9. The dative of the participles βονλόμενος^ Θελων, ηΒόμξνος, προ(τ8€χόμ€νος, €λπόμ€νος, and of the adjective άκων, after elvai and after verbs signifying to come^ has the force of the cor- responding verbal noun, willingness.^ wish^ expectation^ hope^ umvillingness ; as, Oi Κροτωνιαταί €Ϊπον ουκ αν σφισι βουΧομ^νοις eivai, The Crotoni- ans said that it would not be in accordance with their wishes. Note 1. The participle is sometimes preceded by αντίκα, εξαίφνης, €υθύς, μ€ταξύ, or άμα ; as Έύθύς μβν μ€ψάκίον ων €π€θνμ€ί γζνβσθαι άνηρ, As soon as he was a boy, he wished to become a man. 'Άμα κατα- \αβόντ€ς προσ^κίατό σφι. As soon as they had overtaken them, they pressed hard upon them. So Μεταξύ παίζων elaepx^rai, He came in xohile he played. To fi6- τα^ν πορ€υομ6νους μητ€ €σθί€ΐν μητ€ πίν€ΐν, Neither to eat nor drink while marching . Note 2. (a) The participle after avvoiha and συyyLyvωσκω, followed by the dative of the reflexive pronoun, is put either in the da- tive, or in the nominative, the case of the subject of the verb ; as Εμαυ- τω ξυνη8€ίν oLdiv επισταμίνω, I was conscious to myself that I knew nothing. Τίως ουν €μαυτω roOr' εγώ ξνν€ίσομαί φξύγοντ^ άποΧύσας avdpa; Now how shall I endure the thought that I have let a defendant escape ? (b) In a few instances the participle, in connection with these verbs, is put in the accusative ; as (Xen. CEc. 3, 7) Εγώ σοι σννοώα άνισ-τά- μ€νον — βαδίζοντα — άναπ^ίθοντα. (c) When the participle after olha refers to the subject of the sen- tence, it is put either in the nominative, or in the accusative agreeing § 226.] PARTICIPLE. 285 with the reflexive pronoun ; as Κρ^Ιττων fjdeL ων, He knew he was su- perior. Σώί ισ^ί, sc. ών, Know that thou art safe, "Htoet iavrov ηττονα οντά, He knew himself to be inferior ; He knew that he ivas in- ferior. Note 3. 'Έχων, having, in certain expressions denoting con- tempt, is apparently superfluous ; as ΐΙοΊα νπουηματα φ\υάρ€Ϊς '4χων ; What shoes art thou talking nonsense about ? Note 4. "Έχων, άγων, φβρων, Χαβων, having, bringing, tak- ing, are in certain connections rendered ivith, ^ S26. A substantive with a participle is often put in the genitive, called absolute, to denote time^ manner, means, cause, condition ; as, Taur' €πράχθη, Κόνωνος στρατηγονντος. These things were done when Conon was general, Ύελ^υτησαντος Αλυάττβω, i^ehi^aro την βασιΚηιην Kpolaos, After the death of Alyattes, Croesus received the kingdorn, (a) Frequently ως, ωσπ€ρ, ώστ€, άτ€, οϊα, that, as if, inasmuch as, on the supposition that, stand before the genitive absolute, when it denotes an assumed cause. Often however the accusative is put after these particles instead of the genitive. *Qs• ωδ' €χόντων τώζ/δ' ίπίστασθαΐ σε χρη. Thou must know that these things are so, Ol "ΈΧΚην^ς ούτως ηγανάκτησαν, ώσπερ όλης της Ελλάδος πεπορθη- μίνης, The Greeks felt very indignant, as if the whole of Greece had been devastated. Ένχ€το προς τους θεονς άπλως τάγαθά ^ώόναι, ως τους θβονς κάλλι- στα Είδότας, He prayed to the gods to give him the good things without specifying them, because he belie\^ed that the gods knew best what was good for him. Ονχ νβρ€ΐ λέγω τάδ', αλλ' €Κ€Ϊνον ως παρόντα νων, Ι do not say these things out of wantonness, but because I believe thatAe is near us. So Ήν yap αδύνατος, ωστ€ σηπομίνου τον μηρού, For he loas feeble, inasmuch as his thigh was ulcerating. (b) When the subject of a sentence is not expressed, or when it begins wnth otl, the participle alone is put in the genitive absolute. But when the subject of a sentence. is an infinitive, the participle is put in the accusative absolute. E. g. 'Ύοντος πολλω, It raining heavily; from "Ύβι πολλώ. It rains heavily. Σαφώς δηΧωθζντος otl iv ταΐς ναυσϊ των ^ΈΧΚηνων, It being quite apparent that in the ships of the Greeks. Ilapeov αντω βασιλέα γενέσθαι, αλλω περιεθηκε το κράτος. It being in his power to become a kijig, he conferred this dignity upon another person. ^€ίς εξόν ή^η ποιείν αυτοίς 6 τι αν βονλοιντο. Inasmuch as it now was permitted to them to do whatever they pleased. 286 SYNTAX. [^§227-229. Note 1. When the subject of a sentence begins with on, the participle absolute maybe put in the genitive plural, if the subject of the sentence beginning with 6tl is in the plural; as Εισαγγίλέ€ν- των OTL Φοίνισσαι νψς eV αυτούς enenXeov, It having been announced that Phoenician ships loere sailing against them. Note 2. The genitive absolute refers to a person or thing different from the subject of the sentence. Sometimes however it refers to the subject of the sentence ; as Ταίτα ζΐπάντος αυτού εδοξε tl clnelu τώ Αστυάγ€ΐ, Saying these things, he seemed to Astyages to say something to the purpose. Note 3. In -a few instances, the dative seems to take the place of the genitive absolute ; as {^Xen. Hel, 3, 2, 25) Uepuovn 6e τω Ινιαντω φαίνουσι παΚιν οί έφοροι φρουραν επί τψ ^Ηλίί/. ADVERB. ^ 227. Adverbs modify verhs^ participles^ ad- jectives^ and other adverbs ; as, Ουτω ττοιω, I do so. Καλώς ποιών. Doing well. Επιτήδειος πάνυ, Very convenient. Πάνυ καλώς, Very well. Note. The following adverbs modify all parts of speech : δή, ^ητα, θην, δήθεν, δηπουθεν, dai : ye, περ, τοί : μην (Doric ^άι/), η, ηπου, ήτοι, η μην, μεν τοι, μένουν Οι μεν οΰν, μεν δη. § 228. 1. An adverb preceded by the article has the force of an adjective ; as Oi τότε άνθρωποι, The men of that time, Κάδμου του πάλαι, Of ancient Caclmus. 2. An adverb preceded by the article, without any substan- tive expressed, has the force of a substantive ; as Ή αϋριον, sc. ήμερα, The movrow. Προς τους οίκοι, Το those at home. So TO πάλαι, or τοπάλαι, in olden time; τα νυν, or τανΰν, at the pres- ent time ; το αυτίκα, immediately. "ό. Not unfrequently, an adverb has the force of a noufi even when no article is prefixed to it ; in which case it always de- pends on a preposition or another adverb ; as, άπο τότε., or έκτο- τε, from that time; εΙσ-αεί,^Γ ever; έμπροσθεν, before, μέχρι ενταύθα, as far as here. § 229. The Greek has two simple negative adverbs, ov, now, 7Z0, ?/o/, and μη., ne, not. Both ού and μη precede the word to which they belong. § 230.] ADVERB. 287 1. Ου expresses a direct and absolute negation ; consequent- ly it is used ^with the indicative. The same remark applies also to its compounds ούδβ, οϋτ€, ούδβ/?, οϋτις, οίκ^η, &C. 2. Μη is used with the subjunctive^ optative^ or imperative. The same remark appUes also to its compounds /xTySe, μητ€^ μη- dels, μητίζ^ μηκίη, &C. 8 \Vhen the action of the irifinitive or participle is assumed as a certainty, ού is used ; in all other cases, μη ; as, EiVat diKaLoSi κον doKclv eluat OeXet, He nicans to be just, and not merely to appear to be such. To μη φίλ€ΐν, Not to love ; The not loving. Κήρυγμα ττοιησάμ^νος μη^ίνα άπτζσθαι της Χηΐης, Proclaiming that no one should touch the booty. *0 ου π€ΐ66μ€νοί. He who dOes not obey. *0 μη π€ίθόμ€νο5, He who may not obey. Ουκ άκροώμ€νοί, Not hearing. Μη άκροωμ€νοι, Not hearing, as a supposition. 4. Adjectives.) adverbs .^ and abstract nouns may take ού or μη ; as, Ουχ ικανός, Who is not capable. Μη Ικανός, WJlo may not be capa- ble. Ου σοφως. Certainly not wisely. Μη σοφώς, Perhaps not wisely. Ή ού δίάλυσίί, The not destroying. *H μη €μπ€ΐρία. The not hav- ing experience. Note 1. The formulas ου re, οϋτ€ re, (sometimes re ού T€, οϋ'Τ€ και, οϋτ€ δ/,) are equivalent to οϋτ€ οϋτ€, when both refer to the same verb ; as (//. 1, 603) Ou pev φόρμιγγος π€ρίκαλλ€ος ήν€χ Απόλλων, Μουσάων θ' at αξώον, Neither of the harp of surpass- ing l^auty, ivhich Apollo had, nor of the Muses, who were singing. But if the verb of the second sentence is different from that of the first, the second member (re) of the formula has an affirmative mean- ing : as Oure nporepov ημ^ΐς ηρξαμ€ν ποΧβμου προς ύμας • νυν τ e'^e'Xo- μ€ν σπόντας ποιίίσθαι. We never began tlie war against you; and now we are willing to make a treaty. Note 2. The first negative particle of a negative formula is some- limes omitted ; as Ύρωας οϋθ' ΈΧληνίς, for Oure Ύρωάς οΰβ' Έλληνίς, Neither a Trojan woman rwr a Grecian woman. Note 3. Not imfrequently ju^ is used where ού might be expected; on the other hand ο υ is sometimes used where μη would be more logi- cal. § 2S0. 1. Two or more negatives, belonging to the same verb, strengthen the negation ; as, OvTTore cpei oύδeiί, No one will ever say. 288 SYNTAX. [§ 231. '^Οταν μη φητ€ καλόν clvai μφίν, When you say that there is nothing beautiful; when you deny. 2. But when they refer to different verbs, they retain their distinct force ; as, "Ένθ^ ουκ αν βρίζοντα 'idoLS Αγαμέμνονα, ουδ' ουκ εθίΧοντα μάχεσθαι, Here you could not have seen Agamemnon sleeping, nor unwilling to fight. QvT€ μη μ^μνησθαί ^νναμαι αυτόν, Neither can I for get him. Ovdev ο TL ουκ ηρώτα, Nothing lohich he did not ask ; He asked every thing. Ουδβΐί όστις ουκ ωβτο, There was no one who did not think; Every body thought. 3. Verbs., nouns., and adverbs which contain a negation are regularly followed by /x 77 or μη ο ν, with the infinitive; and some- times by oTL ov, or ώί ου, with the indicative or optative ; as, Tots νίοις άπ€ΐπ€την μη bia\€y€a6ai, They forbade him to converse ivith young men. Ουκ €ναντιώσομαί το μη ου γεγωνεϊν, Ι loill not object to speaking. Note 1. The double negative /x ή oh is used with the infinitive or participle, and is almost always preceded by a negation, expressed or implied. Note 2. When ού is preceded by όπως μη, or μη, after verbs de- noting ye^r, anxiety, it belongs to the verb following ; as Μη νύ τοι ου χραίσμτ], Fear lest it be of no avail to thee, (§ 214, 1, a.) Note 3. When ο ν οτ μη is equivalent to α- privative, it should be' regarded as a part of the word to which it belongs ; (see ουκ εθβλοντα for άθζλίοντα, μη μεμνησθαι for €πίΧανθάν€σθαί, under the second para- graph.) Note 4. M77 and μη ου, after negative words, and words implying fear, anxiety, are, so far as sense is concerned, superfluous. (§«J 230, 3; 214, 1, a.) § 331. PREPOSITION. Αμφί, AROUND, ABOUT, With Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. — ΑμφΙ του, around, about, concerning, on account of, for, for the sake of. — ΑμφΙ τώ, around, about, upon, near, at, concerning, on account of , for, for the sake of — ΑμφΙ τόν, around, about, round about, along. Ανά, ON, UP, UPON, with Genitive (rarely). Dative, or Accusative. — Am του, only in the Homeric expression Am νηος βαίν€ΐν, To go on shipboard. — Am τω, on, upon, Epic and Lyric. — Am τόν, on, up, upon, up to, in, to, through, during ; with numerals it means at the rate of, apiece. Αντί, with Genitive, before, against, rare in this sense; common- ly instead of in the place of, equal to, for, for the sake of. § 231.] PREPOSITION. 289 Αττό, Avith Genitive, from, away from ^ far from ; after, with refer- ence to place or time ; by ?neans of After passive verbs, by, on the part of. Δίά, THROUGH, with Genitive or Accusative. — Alo. tov, through, during. Before numeral adjectives it denotes repetition ; as Aia τρί- τον €τονς, Every third year. — Ata τόν, through, during, on account of for. El ς or Ε 9, with Accusative, το, into, iill, until. It is also found before the Genitive, the noun to which it properly belongs being omit- ted ; as Els παώοτρίβον, sc. οίκον, To the teacher' s house. Εκ. or Εξ, with Genitive, out of, from. After passive forms it means /;?/. ->^ , . . . ^ ΕτΓΐ, UPON, ON, \vith Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. — ΕπΙτου, upon, on, at, near, towards, to, during, in, concerniiig. — Επί τώ, up- on, on, at, by, near, against, in addition to, on account of, for, on condition that. — Επι τον, upon, on, until, during, for, against (ter- minal). Κατά, DOW^N, with Genitive or Accusative. — Kara του, down, down from, down upon, against, down to, under, on. — Κατά τόν, down, down to, in, on, near, throughout, during, according to, in rela- tion to, as to. MfTii, after, with, w^ith Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. — Me- Tci του, with, together with, among. — Μετά τώ, with, among, in, Po- etic. — Μβτά τόν, after, among, to, into the midst of Παρά, ALONG, NEAR, With Geuitive, Dative, or Accusative. — Πάρα του, from near, from, of, by. — Παρά τω, near, at, with, among, by the side of. — Παρά τόν, along, near, to, besides, contrary to, against, dur- ing, in comparison ivith, than, on account of, UepL, AROUND, ABOUT, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. — He p\ του, aroiind, about, concerning, i?i respect to, on account of, for, for the sake of. — Uepl τω, around, about, upon, near, at, concerning, on account of, for, for the sake of. — Hept τόν, around, about, along, during. Προ, with Genitive, before, in behalf of, for the sake of, in prefer- ence to, in comparison with, than. Προ 9, before, towards, wnth Genitive, Dative, or Accusative.— npo9 του, bfore, towards, on the side of, in behalf of .for, for the sake of, in the name of, by. — Ιίρυς τω, before, with, in addition to. — Hpos τόν, towards, to, with, in respect to, in, against. Συν or ^^ύν, with Dative, with, together loith, by means of, with i he help of. *ΥτΓ€ρ, OVER, with Genitive or Accusative. — Ύπερ του, over, above, beyond, in behalf of for, for the sake of . — Ύπ^ρ τόν, over, beyond^ above. 290 SYNTAX. [§ 232. Ύττό, UNDER, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. — 'Υπό του, under, by. — Ύπό τω, under, at the foot of, by. — Ύττό τόν, under, dur- ing. Note 1. A preposition is often nsed even where the relation Avould be denoted by the case alone ; as Μείζον όστις άντ\ τψ αντον πάτρας ώίλυν νομίζ€ΐ, Whoever loves another more than his own country. So Σφ^ας avTovs €s ίξ μοίρας dielXov, They divided themselves into six parts. Αΐνως άθανάττ^σι θ€[]ς ety ωττα €olk€v, She surprisingly re- sembles the immortal goddesses in looks ; in the face. Note 2. (a) Sometimes a preposition is, hy anastrophe, placed after the noun to which it belongs ; as Ιίαώος πίρι, Νβώι/ αττο. Εχθρών νπ€ρ. Κακών e|. Αρτ€μώί ξύν. (b) Sometimes it stands between its substantive and an adjective agreeing with that substantive ; as ΙΙώς €μας ηλβ' ety χείρας ; How did he come into my hands? Note 3. In Poetry, especially in Epic Poetry, two prepositions sometimes stand together ; thus, Alcl ιτρά. ΑμφΙ nepL Ilape/c or Πα- οεξ, *Υπ€Κ, Αποπρό, Uepl προ. Note 4. Sometimes a preposition (αττό, πβρΟ is found in connec- tion with ere κ a, χάριν, % 333• 1. When several substantives depend on a prep- osition, that preposition is repeated with each when they are independent of, or contrasted with, each other. But when they are regarded as one whole^ only the first one takes the preposi- tion. E. g. uepl τών €νθά^€ κα\ π€ρ\ των iv Αίγνπτω κα\ iv Σϊκ€λία ^ύνασθαι φροντίζ€ίν, Το be able to take care of what is going on here and in Egypt and in Sicily. Αγνμνάστως €χ€ΐν προς τ€ ψνχη κα\ Θάλπη, Not to be inured to cold and heat, 2. A preposition before a relative pronoun is commonly omitted when it would be the same as that upon which its an- tecedent depends ; as. Παρά τΓολβσιι/ αϊς αν άμφ6τ€ροί ξυμβώσιν, At the cities where both parties would agree to meet. This peculiarity gives rise to the following words and expressions : Δ tort or simply "Ort (that is At' δ τι, '^O τι), because ; for Aia τού- το ο τι, or Δια ταντα ο τι, Ovv€ κα or *0 θ ούν€κα (ύΐ3.\, is Ου €ν€κα,'Ότον €ν€κα), because; for Τούτου eveKa ου or οτον. Εφ* ω, or Εφ' ω re, upon this condition that; on condition that; for the purpose of; 'for Επί τοντω ω, or ΈπΙ τούτω €φ* ω, {Her, 3, 83.) Έν ω, while ; for Εν Tovrcp ψ. §^233-235.] PREPOSITION. 291 § 233. A preposition in composition is often followed by the same case as when it stands hy itself; as, 'YnepcveyKovres τας vavs τον Ισθμόν, Carrying the ships across the Isthmus. Έσηλθβ μ€. It came into my mind, Ι1αρ€Κϋμίζοντο την Ιταλ/αζ/, They were carried along the coast of It- aly ; sailed along. § 234. A preposition retains its adverbial force in the fol- lowing cases : (a) When it is not followed by a noun ; as Kai κατακτ^νω ye προς, And in addition I will slay thee, Mera δε, moreover, after, (b) In composition ; as αποκόπτω, to cut off; σννειμι, to he with ; προσπταίω, to stumble against. (c) When it is, by tmesis-, apparently separated from the verb with whicii it is compounded ; in which case it may come after the verb ; as Από pev Wave 6 στρατηγός, On the one hand, the general was killed, Ώσβ δ* από ρινόν λίθος. And the stone knocked off the shield, (d) When it apparently stands for elpi, to be, compounded with it- self; as τιάρα tol δίφρος κα\ Ίπποι, sc. eari, There are near thee a chariot and horses ; thou hast. Ούδ' eVt φβίδώ, And there is no spar- in ίζ. Note. In case of tmesis, Avhen the same compound word is to be repeated several times, after the first time the preposition alone is some- times used ; as Κατά pev eXevaav αύτοϋ την γυναίκα^ κατά be τα TeKva, for Κατελβυσαι/ pev αντου την γυναίκα, KaTeXevaav he τα Τ€κνα, On the one liand, they stoned his wife, and, on the other, they stoned his children. § 235. Sometimes, by a kind of attraction, eiy, από, Ικ are used for ev, eVi ; ev for elς\ παρά του for παρά τω ; από, €κ, after verbs signifying to hang, for eV/. E. g. Ές του TίpωτeσLλeω το ipov το iς ΈΧαιουντα άγLveόμevoς γυναίκας, Carrying women to the temple of Protesilaus which Λvas at ElcBus, Αιηρπαστο υπο του βασιλικού στρατ€ύματος κα\ αυτά τά από των οικι- ών ξύλα, The very timber of the houses had been taken away by the royal army. Adverbs of place also are subject to this kind of attraction ; thus, ποί, Όποι, eκξ1σe, eKeWev, o'lKade are sometimes used for που, οπού, eKel, ο'ίκοι ; evboSev for evdov ; οπού for οποί. 292 SYNTAX. [^ 236. CONJUNCTION. § T€, άλλα, r)j COIl- QSG. The conjunctions καί, nect similar words ; as, Hoke μον KOL μάχης. Of IV ar and battle. Αίκαίως κά^ίκως, Justly and unjustly, Kyanav η μΐσίϊν, To love or to hate. Note 1. Sometimes a "possessive pronoun or adjective and a geni- tive are connected by και ; in which case the genitive is joined to the genitive implied in the pronoun or adjective ; as ΙΙαώ^ς €μοί και ττατμος άτασθαΚον, Sons of7ne and of a ivicked father , So when the dative has the force of the genitive ; [Eur. Ion. 884) liais μοι κα\ σόί, My son and thine. Note 2. After adjectives and adverbs implying resemblance, union, approach, κ a i may be rendered as ; as Ουχ ομοίως π^ποιηκάσι κα\ "Ομη- ρος, They have not composed in the same manner as Hoiner. So ϋαραπΚησίά τ€ ewcnovueaau καΐ ζδράσαν αντοϊ iv Πυλω, And they suffered disasters similar to those they themselves had caused at Pylus. Note 3. Conjunctions often correspond to each other and to other words ; thus, both and, as well as both and both a7id stronger than και, and stronger than και, and on the one hand on the others indeed but both .... and, as well as nevertheless, meanwhile, rather not only but not only but not only but not only not but και . . και Τ€ re τ€ και (not separated) και Τ€ ..... Τ€ καΐ τ€ μ€ν δε ημ€ν Tjbe or tSe ου μην αλλά ου μόνον άλλα ου μόνον οτί άλλα ούχ ΟΤΙ άλλα ουχ όπως otl άλλα ουχ όπως {ουχ οίον) άλλ* ούδε not only not but not even μη όπως άλλα not only not but μη ΟΤΙ άλλ' ονδε not only not but not even μη ΟΤΙ (ουχ όπως) alone much less ού άλλα not but ή or ήτοί ή either or πότ€ρον or πότερα η whether or ctre etre whether or av T€ av T€ whether or § 237.] IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTION• 293 IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTION. § S37• 1. Frequently a nominative stands without a verb ; as, (Xen, Hier, 6^ 6) "Ω,σπ^ρ ol άθληταΐ ουχ^ όταν Ιδιωτών -γενωνται Kp€LTTOvs^ τοίτο αυτούς €νφραίρ€ί^ αλλ' όταν των ανταγωνιστών rJTTovsy τουτ'^ αί'τονς avm, ^5 the athletes^ when they become su- perior to inexperienced men^ — this does not gladden them; hut ichen they prove inferior to their opponents^ — this grieves them ; where one might expect Oi άβληταΧ τούτω ευφραίνονται τούτοι άνιωνται, ^ (i/. 3, 21 i) "Αμφω δ' ίζομενω^ "γεραρωτερος η€ν Οδυσσεν?, But ichen both icere sittings Ulysses looked more commanding ; where one might expect ΑρφοΊν δ' Ιζομ^νοίν. 2. The dative of the participle is sometimes used instead of the genitive or accusative ; as, ( Thuc. 1, 62) *Hi/ δε γνώμη του Κριστεως το /xeV /xe^' ίαντον στρατόπεΒον €χοντι iv τω Ισθμώ επιτηρύν τους Αθηναίους, And it loas the design of Arisieus on the one hand to observe^ at the Isthmus^ the movements of the Athenians with the army v^hich he had ivith him ; where the author had in his mind eoo^e τω Αριστεί. 3. The accusative is often found where one might expect a different construction ; as, {Od. 1, 275) Μητ€ρα δ\ 64 οί θϋμος εφορμαται γαμ€€σθαί^ αψ ϊτω €ς μίγαρον πατρός. As to thy mother^ if she very much desires to be married^ let her go back to her father''s house ; where the speaker had άπόπεμψον in his mind ; (see Od. 2, 113.) (Arisfoph. Av, 1268 — 9) Δ,ζΐ,νόν ye τον κήρυκα, τον πάρα τους βροτούς οΐχόμβνον, ei μη^^ποτε νοστήσ€ΐ πάλιν. It is a terrible things that the herald who was despatched to the mortals should not return; where an infinitive would be more regular. {Id, ib. 650) Ώ? iv Αίσωπου Χόγοις €στ\ Χεγόμενον 8ή τι, την ά\ώπ€χ', ως φλανρως €Κοινώνησ€ν άετω ττοτε. That in the fables of jEsop something is said about the fox^ that she was once scur- vily treated by her partner the eagle ; the indicative instead of the infinitive. ( Soph. El. 479 ) "Υπεστί μοι θράσος ά^νπνόων κΚνονσαν άρτιων αρζΐράτων, Ι take courage^ having just heard sweetly breathing 294 SYNTAX. , [§§ 238, 239. dreams ; where κΚνουσαν depends on θράσος μ^ exet, implied in the first three words. § S3 8. Sometimes with two or more substantives only one verb is put, which can belong only to one of them. This irregularity of construction is called zeugma, E. g. (jEschyl, Prom, 21,22) V ovre φωνην, ovre τον μορφην β ρό- των 6ψ€ί, Where thou wilt neither hear the voice^ nor see the form of any mortal ; where φωνψ^ properly speaking, depends on άκουσζί understood. ARRANGEMENT .OF WORDS. ^ S39• 1. When the Avords of a sentence are logically arranged they stand in the following order : Subject before its predicate. Leading substantive before the substantive in apposition to it. Substantive before its adjective. The oblique cases after the words on which they depend. The remote object after the immediate. Adverbs after the words modified by them. 2. The Greeks however most commonly disregard what is called the logical arrangement ; their rule is this : The word or sentence, which, in the mind of the speaker or writer, is most important, is said or written first. Not unfre- quently, however, euphony determines the position of a word or sentence. 8. The following words do not commence a sentence : Adverbs, aV, /ce or K€V, apa, pa, av, δη (except the Epic δ^ τότ€^ δϊ) γαρ), δαί, δη6€ν, δήτα, drjnoOev, γ€, γουν, θην, περ, τοί, pevTOi, Toluvv, ovVf μην, νυν, ποθβν, ποθί, ποί, πτ^, πού, πως, ποτ€, πω. Conjunctions, pev, δ/, re. 4. The Greeks were fond of connecting kindred words as closely as possible ; as, {jEschyl, Ag, 836) ΎοΙς αυτός αντον πη- ιιασι βαρύνεται. He IS oppressed by his οιυη misfortunes, (Id, Cho'eph. 87) Παρά φίλης φίλω γυναικός dvbpl, From a dear wife to a dear husband. PART IV. VERSIFICATION. § 94ί>. Every verse is divided into portions cBlled feet. Feet are either simple or compound. A simple foot consists of two syllables or three syllables ; a compound foot, of four. Simple Feet. Spondee — Tribrach Pyrrhic ^w Molossus Trochee -w Amphibrach Iambus ^- Cretic Dactyle -.^^ BacchTiis Anapest --- Antibacchlus Cofnpound Feet. Dispondee Epitritus 1 Proceleiismatic ww^w Epitritus Π Ditrochee ^-^- Epitritus ΠΙ Diiambus w_w- Epitritus IV Greater Ionic — w^ Paeon I Smaller Ionic WW — Pseon II Choriambic - WW- Psson III Antispast P^on IV § 24:1• Arsis is that part of a foot on which the stress (ictus^ beat) of the voice'falls. The rest of the foot is called thesis. The arsis is on the long syllable of a foot. For exam- ple, the arsis of an iambus or anapest is "on the last syllable ; the arsis of a trochee or dactyle, on the first. The arsis of a spondee is determined by the nature of the verse in which this foot is found. Thus, in trochaic or dactylic verse the arsis is on the first syllable ; in iambic or anapestic, on the last. 296 vEKSTncATON. [§ 242. The trihradi has the arsis on the first syllable, Avhen it is found in trochaic verse ; on tiie third syllable, when it stands in iannbic verse. The daclyle in anapestic or iambic verse has the arsis on the last syllable. The anapest in trochaic verse has the arsis on the first syllable. § 213. 1. Verses are usually denominated from the foot which predominates in them. For example, the verse is called daciylic^ when the dactyle predominates in it. 2. A complete verse is called acataUciic. A verse, of which the last foot is deficient, is called catalectic. 3. The trochaic^ iambic^ and anapestic verses are measured by dipodies ; (a dipody is a pair of feet.) Thus, an iambic verse of four feet is called iambic dimeter ; of six, iambic tri- meter ; of eight, iambic tetrameter. 4. The last syllahJe of most kinds of verse is common ; that is, it can be long or short without regard to the nature of the foot. 5. Anacrusis is an introductory syllable at the beginning of a verse of which the fundamental foot begins with a long syl- lable ; as ΤΙα-ρων απο-^ημα. Sometimes the anacrusis consists of two short syllables ; as ΓΧυκν-πικρον α-μάχανον ορπ€τον. 6. Basis is an introductory foot at the beginning of a verse of which the fundamental foot commences with a long syllable. The basis consists of one of the following feet : trochee, spon- dee, tribrach, dactyle, iambus, anapest, amphibrach, bacchius, antibacchius, molossus, pseon third. 7. The repetition of one of these feet, trochee, spondee, tribrach, dactyle, iambus, anapest, gives a double basis^ so called. Further, these feet, taken two and two, give thirty more dou- ble bases, some of which however may not be in use. 8. Sometimes a double basis receives an anacrusis. 9. The basis, or the double basis, is sometimes placed at the end of a verse, in \Vhich case it is called ecbasis. 10. In most kinds of verse a long svUable may be resolved §§ 243, 244.] VERSIFICATION. 297 into two short ones. Thus, a cretic is equivalent to five short syllables, to a poeon first, or to a pseon fi^urth. § S43• Ccesura is the separation, by the ending of a word, of syllables rhythmically or metrically connected. There are three kinds of csesura ; caesura of the foot, csesura of the rhythm, csesura of the verse. 1. The ccesura of the foot occurs \vhen a word ends before a foot is completed ; as ίλωυ (ξαλα-παξξ πο-λιν^ χη-ρωσβ δ' ayvids, 2. The cresura of the rhythm occurs when the arsis falls up- on the last syllable of a word. This can take place only in feet which have the arsis on the first syllable. E. g. Ap€s A-pe? 3. The csesura of the verse is a pause in verse, so introduced as to aid the recital, and render the verse more melodious. It divides the verse into two parts, and in most kinds of verse its place is fixed. § 244:• 1. The Epic and Lyric Poets often shorten a long vowel or diphthong at the end of a word, when the next word begins with a vowel ; in which case a diphthong is shortened by simply dropping its last vowel ; but a, ?/, ω, respectively be- come a, e, o. This kind of elision can take place only when the long vowel or diphthong is in the thesis of a foot. E. g. Ω nowoif η μαΚα δη μ€Τ€βονΚζν-σαν Scoi αΧλως Xpvaecu α-να σκηπτρω^ και €-λίσσ€το παντας Αχαιούς 2. Α short syllable is often made long by the Epic Poets. This takes place chiefly when the short syllable is in the arsis of a foot. E. g. Εττει-δτ; roi /δ' avhpa SeoL δαμασασβαι €δωκαρ Αωρα Trap* Αιο-λου μ^γάλητορος 'ΐτΓΤΤΟταδάο 3. Sometimes a long vowel or diphthong, before another vowel, is shortened even in the middle of a word ; thus, Ζμπαιον, roiavTLj rovrovt, avrqt are often to be scanned €μπαον, τοαντί, του- rot, avT€L. 4. In a dactylic verse, when the first two syllables of a word, beginning with f, or σκ, form an iambus, f, σκ do not make position ; as, Ot T€ Ζα-κυνθον ^χον, τ^δ' οι Ί,αμον αμφ€ν€μοντο , Αωκ€ δ' €-π€ΐτα σκ€-παρνον €νξοον' ηρχ€ δ' όδοιο 13* 298 VERSIFICATION. [§ 245. Note. It is natural to suppose that when the Poets lengthened a short vowel, they substituted its corresponding long vowel. When however the vowel to be lengthened was followed by λ, /ia, i/, p, σ, it is more than probable that the consonant following it was doubled in pronunciation, and not unfrequently even in writing ; as, Ζηνος €'VL μ€γαροίσίν ΟΧνμπιον αθρόοι ήσαν Τω δβ κορυσσ^σθην άμα δβ νζφος ζΐπβτο τν^ζων Εκ δ^ και αντοί βημεν €-πι ρηγμίνι θαΧασσης Αλλ' ον\ rjp€i φωτα9 ό-Τ€ aevairo διωκζΐν 1η an ancient inscription we find the following dactylic pentameter ; Ύρισσον νπολΧνκαβαν Γραμματικός τβλβω, where νπολΧνκαβαν stands for νπο λυκάβαν. TROCHAIC. § 24l3• The fundamental foot of the trochaic verse is the trochee. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the trochee. The spondee or the anapest can stand only in the even places (2d, 4th, 6th, 8th). In proper names the dactyle can stand in all the places, ex- cept the 4th and the 7th. 1. The trochaic monomefer consists of two feet; the dimeter j of four feet ; the trimeter (a rare verse), of six feet ; as, Την δβ νννΐ monometer acatalectic Ευ/χφβ-ρβι monometer catalectic Τούτο μ€ν ye ηρος aiei dimeter acatalectic Του de χ€ΐμο^-νος πα-Χιν dimeter catalectic Tti/' €K τωι/δ* I €ΐκα-σαι \o-yos πάρα Αωρι-ω φω-νάν ξν-αρμο-ξαι ττε-δΓλω trimeter With an anacrusis, the trochaic dimeter acatalectic forms the third verse of the A Icaic strophe ; as, Ου yap ποτ αμνά-στ€ΐ y 6 φυσάς 2. The Ithyphallic verse is a trochaic tripody (three feet) ; as Βαρβα-ρονς π€-ρωντ€ς, (a) Sometimes the Ithyphallic is subjoined to a trochaic or iambic dimeter acatalectic ; as Έμφ^ρη €χοισα μορφάν ΚΚηϊς d ^y απάτα, Ύον πηΧον, ω πατ€ρ πατ€ρ, τουτονΐ φυΧαξαι, (b) Sometimes two Ithyph allies are united into one verse ; as Acvpo bevTe, Μοισαι, χρϋσιον λιποισαι, 3. The trochaic tetrameter acatalectic (a rare verse) is com- posed of two trochaic dimeters acatalectic ; as Κλί /^t μ€ν ycpov τος ςυζ-Θ(ΐρα χρϋσοπ€π\€ κουρη. 4. The trochaic tetrameter catalectic is formed by subjoining § 246.] TROCHAIC. • — lABIBIC. 299 the trochaic dimeter catalectic to the trochaic dimeter acatalec- tic. Its verse-cassura occurs at the end of the first hemistich ; but it is sometimes neglected. E. g. Οισθα νυν ά μοι γβι/βσ^ω ,• || Σον το σήμαινα ιν ro^e Et doiC€L στ€ΐχωμ€ν, ω yev-vaiov ειρηκως enos 5. The Hipponactean trochaic tetrameter is the same as tiie preceding, except that its seventh foot is always a spondee ; as Etra δ* ^σην €Κ θαλάσσης θυννος ου κακόν βρωμά. 6. Sometimes the trochaic tetrameter is formed by subjoining a psBon first, and a cretic or dactyle, to the trochaic dimeter acatalectic ; in which case the verse-csesura is commonly at the end of the fourth foot ; as, Ουδβν ζστι θηβίον γυ-ναι,κος αμαχωτ€ρον Ουδβ TTvpy ουδ' ώδ' αναί3ης ον^^μια παρ^αΧις 7. The trochaic pentameter catalectic (a rare verse) consists of nine feet and a syllable ; as Έρχεται πολύς μ^ν Xiyaiov διατμψ ξας απ οινηρης Χων, IAMBIC. § 246. The fundamental foot of the iambic verse is the iamhus. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the iambus. The spondee or the dactyle can stand in the odd places (1st, od, 5th, 7th). The onapest can stand in all the places except the last. The tragedians admit an anapest in an even place only when it is contained in a proper name, 1. The iambic raonometer consists of two feet; the dimeter^, of four feet ; as, Kat rots κολοις monometer acatalectic Atat haKpv-€Ls monometer ^Ανηρ avev -ρηκζν τι ταις dimeter acatalectic ΣτΓοζ/δαί-σιν 17-δυ κονκ eoL- dimeter acatalectic K€v ov-bevi μ€-τα^ω-σ€ίν dimeter catalectic 2. The IAMBIC TRIMETER ACATALECTIC coHsists of SIX feet. It never has a tribrach in the last place. The tragedians admit a dactyle only in the first and third places. They admit an anapest chiefly in the first place ; but in proper names they admit the anapest in any place (except the last;, in which case the anapest is contained in the proper name 300 VERSIFICATION. [§ 247. The verse-ccBsura occurs after the thesis of the third foot ; and sometimes after the thesis of the fourth foot. E. g. To σον yap αν-6ος || παν-Τ€χνον ττυρον acXas *As σοί πατήρ (φα-το, \\ τον -he προς π^τραις Ω παν-τα νω-μων, Τ^ι-ρβσιά 3ώα-κτα re Έμοί μ€ν ov-deis μν-Θος^ Αν-τίγονη φίλων Αδαμαν-τινων δβσ/χωι/ ev αρ-ρηκτοις TreSaty Κίμμ€ρι-κον η-ξξΐς^ 6ν θρασν-σπΧαγχνως σε χρη Της ορ-Θοβου-λον θί/χι-δοί αι-πυμη-τα παι 3. The scazon or choliamhus is ttie same as the preceding, except that its last foot is a spondee or trochee ; as, Εγω ΦιλαιίΊ?, η *πίβωτος ανθρωποις 4. The iambic tetrameter acataJectic (a rare verse) is com- posed of two iambic dimeters acatalectic ; as Βοϊσκος 6 απο Κυ- ζίκου παντός "γραφζνς ποιήματος, 5. The iambic tetrameter catalectic is formed by subjoining the iambic dimeter catalectic to the iambic dimeter acatalectic. Its verse-csesura occurs at the end of the first hemistich ; but it may be neglected. E. g. OvKovv πάλαι ^ηπον λέγω ; || σν δ' αντος ουκ ακου^ις *0 δ€σποτης γαρ φησιν ν-μας η^εως απαντάς DACTYLIC. § ίίΛ7• The fundamental foot of the dactylic verse is the dactyJe, The spondee may stand for the dactyle. 1. The dactylic dimeter consists of two feet ; the trimeter, of three ; the tetrameter^ of four ; the pentameter^ of five ; as, Μυστοδο-κο? δόμος dimeter ΤΙαντα δε πνργων Adonic Tla -ρων απο-δημ€ΐ Adonic with anacrusis Άδνμ€-λη κ€λα-δη(τω trimeter Ύη-λ€σκοπω ομματι yaiav trimeter Οιω-νων βασ-ι-λ€νς trimeter Ω μ€γα χρϋσ^ον αστερο-πης φαος tetrameter θούριος όρνις Ύενκρώ' ε ττ' αιαν tetrameter Πολλά βρο-των 8ια-μ€ΐβομ€-νά tetrameter Ω. χθονι-αι βαρν-άχ€€ς ομβροφο-ροι θ" άμα pentameter Arpet -δά? μαχι-μυνς βδα-η λαγο-δαιτάί pentameter Των μ€γα-λων Αανα-ων υπο-κλυζομς-νάν pentameter 2. The Elegiac pe.ntameter consists of tv/o dactylic trimelc» § 248.] DACTYLIC. 301 catalectic on one syllable. The first hemistich almost always ends in a long syllable ; the second hemistich always consists of two dactyles and a syllable. The λ erse -caesura occurs at the end of the first hemistich. This kind of verse is customarily subjoined to the heroic hexameter. E. g. BovXeo δ* €υσ€β€ων oXtyoi? συν χρημασίν olk€lv, Η πλου -rftv, α^ι-κως \\ χρήματα πάσαμ€-νος 3. The dactylic hexameter acatalectic consists of six feet, the last of which is a dactyle. It is used by the tragedians in sys- tems of tetrameters. E. g. Αλλ* ω παντοίας φιλοτητος αμ€ίβομ€ναι χάριν 4. The dactylic hexameter catalectic on two syllables (or HEROIC hexameter) consists of six feet, the last of which is a trochee or spondee ; the fifth foot is commonly a dactyle. (a) The predominant verse-C(2sura is that in the middle of the third foot, either directly after the arsis, or in the middle of the thesis oi a dactyle ; as, Μηνιν a-ftSe, θ€-ά, || Ώη-Χηϊα-^εω Αχι-ληος Avdpa μοί €νν€π€, μονσα, \\ πο-λντροπον, 6s μείΚα ττολλα Μνησομαι ovde \α-βωμχιι Α-7ΓθΧ\ω-νο5 *Ε/<α-τοιο (b) Not unfrequently the verse-oEsura occurs immediately after the arsis of the fourth foot ; as, Αρννμ€-νο9 ην τ€ ψν-χην \\ και νοστον ί-ταιρων (c) The pause at the end of the fourth foot is called the bucolic cae- sura ; as, Νυι/ poba φοίνισ-σ€σ6€ τα ττζνθιμα^ \ νυν ave -μωνά Αρχ€Τ€ ΣΤκζΧι-και τω nevOeos, \ αρχ€Τ€, Μοισαι 5. The hexameter miurus {μ^ίονρος) is the same as the pre- ceding, except that its last foot is an iambus ; as, Αλλ' euavc ψόλοβντα ^αμξίσα θ^ου φρ€να fieXei § 248. A dactylic verse is called logaoedic {Χογαοώικός) when its beginning is dactylic, but its end trochaic ; as, Μαρμαρζ-αίζ €v avyats Kat κνισ-στ] τίνα θϋμί-ησάς Ώαρ6€ν€ τάν κ€φα-Χάν τα δ* c-vepue ννμφα Praxillean 1. The greater Alcaic consists of an anacrusis, a trochee, a trochee or a spondee, and two dactyles ; the last foot may be a cretic. The verse-caesura regularly comes at the end of the second foot E. g. 302 VERSIFICATION. [§ 248. Ου χρη κα-κοισι || θνμον €-πιτρ€π€ίν 'Svv χρη μ€-θυσθην, και τίνα προς βιάν 2. The lesser Alcaic consists of two dactyles and two tro- chees ; the last foot may be a spondee ; as, Olvov €-ν€ίκαμ€-νοίς μ€-θυσθην 3. The Sapphic verse consists of five feet ; a trochee, a tro- chee or spondee, a dactyle, and two trochees ; the last foot may be a spondee. The verse-ccesura is after the second foot, or after the arsis of the dactyle ; sometimes it comes in the middle of the thesis of the dactyle. E. g. TloLKL-\o6pov^ \\ άθανατ^ Αφρο-δΓτα Φαίν€-ταί FoL II κηνοί ι-σος β€-οισιν Ύας €-μάς av-dds || αϊ-οισα πηΧνί 4. The Phalcecean verse consists of five feet, the fii'st of which is a dissyllabic basis ; the second a dactyle ; the rest are trochees ; the last foot may be a spondee ; as, Φρονρ€ίν ομμ^ €wl σω μα-\ιστα καιρώ Έ-χ€ί μ€ν Ανδρομ€-δά κα-Χάν α-μοίβάν with anacrusis 5. The Gly conic verse consists of a basis, a dactyle, a tro- chee or tribrach, and a long syllable. When the last syllable is short by nature, the consonant or consonants at the begin- ning of the next verse make it long by position. — Sometimes the last syllable is resolved into two short ones. E. g. Αλλα και rob^ β-γωγβ θαν- Πβριβαλλ', ω τ€κνον, ωλε-ράς μαζω της υο-μυνσι-άς *Ιι/' νπο Βαρασι νιφοβο-Χοις ΌΘερ π€ρ και Ό-μηρι-δαι Ιορι-ον κατά κολπον eXa- Έπιμ€-ν€ΐ μζ κο-μάς €-μας τα πλβυ-σασα π€-ριρρυ-των (a) Sometimes the Glyconic verse wants the first syllable ; as Υ^,Ε-χηνας 6 vovs δβ σου. (b) Sometimes it has a redundant syllable at the end ; and some- times it takes an anacrusis ; as ΐίαλιμ-ποινα Θ^-Χων α-μ€ΐ-ψ€ί, (c) The Glyconic poly schematist (ποΧνσχημάτιστος), so called, con- sists of a double basis, a dactyle, and a long syllable. ΦίΧοκρα-της λe-ξet ποΧυ τον- Έτ€ρα be ννν αντιμα-θων του κα-κηγο-ρίστοτ€-ρον Βοτρνος ίΧικα ττανσιπο-νον Ξηρών τροπών και βιο-της Ομ-βρον Χι-πονσαι χ€ίμ€ρί-ον 6. The Pherecrafean verse is the Adonic with a basis ; or the Glyconic deprived of its last syllable ; as, Ελδβ-αί φιΧον ητορ Αί μου-σαι τον Έ-ρωτα 7. The Priapean verse is formed by subjoining the Phere- cratean to the Glyconic ; a&, ^ 249.] ANAPESTic. 303 Έυμζνη$ δ' ό AuKetoy β-στω ττάσα νεολαία ΙΙριστησα μεν υτρων \\ Xenrov μικροί/ αποκΧάς 8. The Eupolidean verse is formed by subjoining the tro- chaic dimeter catalectic to the Glyconic polyschematist ; the first foot of the second hemistich however is a basis ; as, Ω θεωμενοι κατερω \\ προς ν-μας εΧευθερως ούτω νϊκηιταιμί τ βγω || και νο-μιζοιμην σοφός Ό σώφρων τ€ χω κατΐιπν-γων α-ριστ' ηκουσατην Κατά μυροπωΧβίν τι μαθοντ' || avdp' €-χρην καθημ€νον 9. An jEoIian verse, so called, is a series of dactyles with a dissyllabic basis, or a double anacrusis ; as, Ατθι, σοι €μ€-θ€ν μ€ν α-πηχθετο Οινος^ ω φιΧε παι, Xeye-rai και α-Χάθεα ΤΧνκυ-τηκρον α-μάχανον ορπετον ANAPESTIC. § 24:9• The fundamental foot of the anapestic verse is the anapesf: The spondee^ the dactyle^ or the proceleusmatic^ may stand for the anapest. A dactylc very seldom precedes an anapest in the same dipody. 1. The anapestic mo7zo7?ie/er consists of two feet; as Γοον ο-ξυβοάν acatalectic. 2. The anapestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet, the last of which is an anapest, a spondee, or a trochee. The verse-ccesura is commonly at the end of the second foot, and sometimes after the first short syllable of the third foot. Some- times it is omitted. E. g. Tt συ προς μεΧαθροις ; \\ tl σν ττ^-δβ ποΧεις ΉτΓβρ 3ορίΧη-πτος \\ er' ην Χοιπη Α€ίΧαι-ά d€L-XaLov γηρως 3. The anapestic dimeter catalectic (paroemiacus) consists of three feet and a syllable : it has no verse-csesura. E. g. ΠοΧεμου στίφος παρεχον-τες ΑονΧ€ί-άς τας ου τΧά-τάς 4. The ANAPESTIC TETRAMETER CATALECTIC ( ArISTOPHANE- an) is formed by subjoining the anapestic dimeter catalectic to tlie anapestic dimeter acatalectic. The principal verse-ccesura comes after the first hemistich ; the secondaiy verse-caesura is 304 VERSIFICATION. [^^ 250 - 252. the same as that of the first hemistich. The principal caesura is \cry seldom neglected. E. g. Ονπω τταρζβη προς το θεάτρον || λεξων ως δ^ξως €στί ΑίαβαΧλομ€νος 3' νπο των €χθρωι/ \\ €Ρ Αθηναιοις ταχνβονΧοις Αλλα τον αντον ye ν^ων βαλλ€ί || /cat Σοννων άκρον Αθην€ων ^ 250. An anapestic verse is called logaoedic when its beginning is a:na|)estic, but its end iambic ; as, Τον anai-da δ απο-στνγω Opyas (διδα-ζατο καί δυσαν-\ων CRETIC OR PiEONIC. § 25 1 • The fundamental foot of the cretic verse is the cretic. The pceon first or fourth may stand for the cretic. Further, it may resolve the long syllables. 1. The cretic monometer consists of one foot ; the trimeter^ of three ; the pentameter^ of ^we ; the hexameter^ of six ; as. Σου Θράσους Έν πολα monometers Των avaL -δων aval- dimeter deaTcpoL και το πράγμα dimeter Μηδ^ν oXi-yov ττοβι dimeter Κρα-νονς aπη-Xayμ€voς dimeter Autos• ert παίς ων dimeter catalectic Μη τί τ\τ]ς τάν ίΚ€τίν €ΐσώ€ίν trimeter Νομον ανομον οΙα τις ξονθά trimeter catalectic Sot, φοίβ€, Μον-σαι τ€ ξνμ-βωμ€ν with anacrusis. ΐΐαντ^ ayaua δη yeyovev ανδρασιν €-μης απο συν-ουσιας 2. The cretic tetrameter consists of four feet ; the verse- ci3esura occurs at the end of the second foot ; but it may be neglected ; as, Marep ω ποτνια^ κΚνθι ννμφαν άβραν lLaLp€ δη, Μονσα • χρονι-ά μ€ν ή-Κ€ίς, όμως δ' Ω μακάρι' Αντομ€ν€ς, ως σβ μακα-ριζομ^ν KovK€TL κα-τ7]\θ6 πάλιν οικαδ' νπο μίσους § 253. 1. The dochmius is formed by prefixing an iam- bus, a tribrach, spondee, or dactyle, to a cretic or its equiva- lent (§ 242, 10), or to a molossus, a greater ionic, a smaller ionic, or to an anapest followed by a pyrrhic. Accordingly the dochmius has thirty-two difierent forms, all of which how- ever ma\^ not be in use. E. g. Δουλοσυ-^άί υπ^ρ Τ1οντομ€~δων αναζ Θέο5 τστ' ctpa τοτ€ Τον κατα-ράτοτατον '^<5. 253 -255.] CHORIAMBIC. IONIC. 305 2. The dochmius may be preceded by cretic, iambic, tro- chaic, choriambic, anapestic, and dactylic measures. E. g. θρζνμαι φοβζρα μ€γαλ^ αγτ) Τι pe-^ei? προδω-σβι? Tt /xeX-Xo/xei/ aya -στονοί *Av ποτ €ν-ψί\η-ταν cOov CHORIAMBIC. § St>3• The fundamental foot of the choriambic verse is the choriambus. The tribrach may stand for the trochee of the choriambus. Sometimes two tribrachs supply the place of the choriambus. Further, an iambic monometer may supply the place of tne choriambus. Most commonly, a choriambic verse, besides the fundamental foot, contains iambic monometers, trochaic monometers, single iambuses and trochees, spondees, and other feet. The choriambic monometer consists of one foot ; the chori- ambic dimeter^ of two ; the choriambic trimeter^ of three ; the choriambic tetrameler^ of four ; as, Μου μιννθ€ί monometer Μισθοφόροι τριήρεις monometer Αλλα παλαι -ayap monometer Νυζ/ δε tou €κ θημ€Τ€ρου dimeter Οιμοι φοβον-μαι το προσ€ρ-πον ττεριφαν-τος άνηρ Et δ? κνρζΐ τις πελα? οι-ωνοποΚων trimeter Δ6ΐ;τ6 νυν α-βραι Χάριτες, καΧλικομοι τ€ Μοισαι Ου φορ-βάν ιεράς γάς σπορον ουκ άΚΚων ^εινα μεν ουν δείνα ταρασ-σει σοφός οι-ωνοθετάς IONIC. ^ 2S4• The fundamental foot of the ionic a majors is the greater ionic. The trochaic monometer, the molossus, or the opitritus third may stand for the ionic. Further, a long syl- lable may be resolved into two short ones. E. g. Tt? την υ3ρι-ην υμών dimeter Κρησσαι νυ ποθ' ώδ' εμμε\ε-ως ποδεσσιν trimeter The ionic tetrameter catalectic {Sotadic) consists of three feet and a spondee or trochee 1 as, Av χρΰσοφο-ρτ]ς, τούτο τυ-χης εστίν ε-παρμα Έις υυχ 6σι-ην τρϋμαλι-ην το κεντρον ωθείς § QSi5. The fundamental foot of the ionic a minore is the 30b VERSIFICATION. [<^ 255. smaller ionic. The trochaic monometer, the paeon third, or the molossus may stand for the smaller ionic. Further, a long syl- lable may be resolved into two short ones. 1. The ionic dimeter or Anacreontic consists of two feet. Most commonly its first foot is a paeon third. E. g. Υ.θ€\ησ€ΐς rt μοι ovv, ω Πολιοί μ€ν ημιν η^η Πατβρ, ην σου τι ^€ηθω Κροτάφου καρη de XevKov ΣίΚ€\ος κομ-ψος ανηρ catalectic 2. The ionic trimeter consists of three feet ; the tetrameter^ of four ; as, Απο μοι θα -veLV yevoir. Ου yap αν aWrj AvcLS €K. πο-νων jevolt, ον-3αμα τωι/δβ TLenepaKev μ€ν ό π€ρσ€-πτο\ί9 η^η βασίΧ€ίος Στρατοί €LS αν τιττορον yei-rova χωράν, ΧινοΒίσμω ΙΙοοφανως τον-το δώασκων απο^ϋστ] βωτην GaUinmbic APPENDIX Remarks on the Alphabet. § fSSG• In the following• table, the names of the Hebrew letters are taken from the Septuagint : Hebrew. Old Greek. Roman. ^Αλ^φ A '^Αλφα Α Βηθ Β Βήτα Β Τίμβλ Γ Τάμμα G Αάλζθ Δ Δέλτα D "Η ^ Ε Έϊ Ε Οναν F(Y) Βαυ F (V, υ, Υ) Ζαΐν ζ Ζήτα (Ζ) "ηθ Η 'Ήτα Η Ύηθ θ θητα Ιώδ Ι Ιώτα Ι (J) Χάφ Κ (Χ) Κάππα C(K) Αάμζ^ Λ Αάμβδα L Μημ Μ Μΰ Μ Νουν Ν NO Ν Σάμεχ S Έίγμα S "Κίν Ο Οΰ Φη π (φ) m ρ Τσαδή Κώφ Q * κόππα Q νηχ9 ρ Ρω R Χσβι/ Σ 2άν θαυ Τ Ταυ Τ Old Attic ΑΒΓΔΕΖΗΘΙΚΛΜΝΧΣΟΠΡΣΤΥΦΧΦΣΟ Ionic ΑΒΓΔΕΖΗΘΙΚΛΜΝ ΗΟΠΡΣΤΥΦΧ Ψ Q The old Greek alphabet was the same as the Phoenician. This is evident from the names, forms, arrang-ement of the letters, and from tradition. This alphabet is found in inscriptions cut about the sixth or seventh" century before the commencement of the Christian era The old Attic alphabet is found in inscriptions cut before the archon-- ship of Euclides (B. C. 403). The Ionic alphabet is found in all the Ionic inscriptions ; also in Attic inscriptions cut after the archonship of Euclides. This alphabet is the same as that used at the present day, and called the Greek alphabet. 308 APPENDIX. [^^ 257 - 259. <^ SST. E, H. In the old Greek alphabet, the character Ε rep- resents the vowels e, η, or the diphthong ec ; in the Ionic alphabet it stands for e or et ; as ΑΘΕΝΑΙΟΙ ΑθηναΊοι, ΕΠΙΘΕΝΑΙ επιθύναι. It is observed further that when the I in the diphthong ci was not a radical letter, this diphthong was generally represented by Ε ; but when I was a radical or essential letter, this diphthong was always represented in the usual way, EI ; as ΠΟΑΕΙ πόλα, ΕΥΠΕΙΘΕΣ βυπει- θης, ΑΕΙΟΣ λβΐο?, ΟΦΕΑΑΟΚΑΕΙΔΑΣ Οφελλοκλβ/δαΓ, KELMENON κ€ίμ€νον^ ΕΔΕΙ eSet, ΕΙΠΕΝ €Ϊπ€ν. During the Alexandrian period, this diphthong was generally represented by EI. The character H, in the old Greek and old Attic alphabets, has the power of the Latin H, or of the rough hrcathing• of the later Greeks ; as ΗΙΕΡΟΠΟΙΟΙ Uponoioi, HOYTOI οντοι, HEKTEI'eKr7;t, TPIHEMI- ηΟ^ΙΟΈ,τριημιπο^ίονς, ΕΝΗΟΔΙΑ ivobia, in the Ionic alphabet, Η represents long Ε ; as ΜΗΝΟΣ μηνός, ΑΘΗΝΗΣΙ Αθηι/ησι, The change of Η into a long vowel must have been gradual, for in the Therean inscriptions this character is both a breathing and a vowel ; thus, ΙΙΡΟΚχ\ΗΣ Προκλης, ΑΡΚΗΑΓΕΤΑΣ Αρχαγβτας. Ο, Ω. In the old Greek alphabet, the character Ο represents the vow- els o, ω, and the dipthhong ov. In the Ionic alphabet, it represents ο or ου. During the Alexandrian period the diphthong ov was generally represented in the usual way, OY. E. g. ΑΠΟΦΑΙΝΟΝΤΟΝ, άπο- φαινόντων, HIEPON iepcov, ΕΚΑΣΤΟΙ ίκάστωι, ΤΟΙ ΔΕΜΟΙ τωι δημωι. In the pronoun ovtos and the adverb ov, the diphthong ov is com- monly represented by OY even in the old xAttic alphabet; as ΤΟΥΤΟΝ, ΟΥΚ or OK, ΟΥΔΕ. EE for Η and Ο Ο for Ω are found only in spurious inscriptions, chiefly in those of Fourmont. Υ is merely an attenuation of the consonant F; consequently it is to F, what the Latin i is to j. In his Cratylus, Plato says expressly that E, Y, O, and Ω had no names ; in pronunciation the first three were merely lengthened into εΓ, ^Y, Ou, respectively. It is evident therefore that the epithets ψιλόν, μικρόν, and fteya, appended to these letters, were introduced in later times. § 9ί58• θ. Φ, Χ. The prototype of θ is the Phoenician Ύηθ, Avhich bad the same relation to θαν (Τ) that Κώφ (Q) had to K. Before the introduction of Φ and X, the Greeks used ΠΗ for Φ, and KH for X ; as ΕΚΠΗΑΝΤΟΙ Έκφάντωι, ΑΜΕΝΠΗΕΣ άμ€μφ€ς, ΓΡΟ- ΠΗΟΝ γράφων, ΔΕΑΠΗΙΣ Α^λφίς, ΕΠΕΥΚΗΟΜΕΝΟΣ €7Τ€νχόμ€νος, ΑΡΚΗΑΓΕΤΑΣ, found in the Melian and Therean inscriptions. (Compare the Latin TH, PH, CH.) TH for θ has not yet been found in any inscription. ' § 9t59. Z, S, Ψ. It has already been remarked that Ζ is not a double consonant. It is added here that ΔΣ for Ζ is found only in Fourmont's spurious inscriptions. Before the introduction of S and Ψ, the ^olians and Dorians used ΚΣ for S, and ΠΣ for Ψ; the Athenians used ΧΣ for S, and ΦΣ for Φ* §§ 260 - 263.] APPENDIX. 309 as ΔΕΚΣΑΙ δ/ξαι, ΠΡΟΧΣΕΝΟΣ πρυξ€νος ; ΠΣΗΝ ψ^ίι/, ΦΣΥΧΑΣ yp-v- χάς, found in inscriptions. § ΰ60• Q, S, 2. The Greek Q is found only in Doric inscnp- tions, and is usually followed by Ο ; as AYQOAOPKAS Αυκοδόρκα?. After it ceased to be a letter of the alphabet, Q was employed as a numeral, denoting 90. Originally Σίγμα and Σάν were two different letters, the former cor- responding to Σάμ€χ, and the latter to Shin. The original form of Σίγμα, the prototype of the Roman S, w^as not unlike the three upper lines of Σ ; that of Σάν was Σ or M. The lonians, after the rejection of Σάν, put Σίγμα in its place. The characters Κόππα and Σαν were used also as brands on horses, \vhich, thus marked, were respectively called Κοππατίαι, Κορρα- branded, ΆπάΣαμφόραί (written also Σαπφόραι), San-branded, § 261. After Η was converted into a vowel, the character |-, resembling the first half of H, was employed to denote the rough breathing. This character however does not occur in inscriptions be- longing to Greece Proper ; it is found only in the Heraclean Tables, and on Heraclean and Tarentine coins. In process of time, this character became L, which being further modified, produced our rough breathing ( ' ). It is proper to remark here, that in inscriptions in which Η has the power of long E, there is no mark for the rough breathing ; always excepting the Heraclean Tables and Heraclean and Tarentine coins. The liharacter -j, resembling the second half of H, was employed to denote the smooth breathing. This being modified became J, and finally ( * ) . The smooth breathing is not found in any ancient in- scription. § S63• The digamma, the sixth letter of the old Greek alpha- bet, is, in inscriptions belonging to Greece Proper, almost always rep- resented byjP; hence its later name Δίγαμμα, double gamma. Its true name is Βαν, Vau, the same as the Oriental Ovav. In the Hera- clean Tables it is represented by C, which is the prototype of the nu- meral r, often mistaken for the abbreviation r for στ. The digamma Λvas most probably sounded like the English W, Digammated words are found in inscriptions, on coins, in Dionysius . of Halicarnassus, Trypho, Apollonius, Priscian, and Hesychius. lii the glossary of Hesychius, however, Γ is put for F, either because, in some of the dialects, the digamma was changed into Γ, or because He- sychius or his transcribers mistook F for Γ. § ^63. 1. The digamma was often changed into its kindred la- bial Β ; as βζίκατι, βώζϊν, for γ^ίκατι, Fidelv. 2. Sometimes it w^as changed into Γ ; as άγρ^ω, άγρυπνος, for αΓρ€ω, αΓνπνοζ. 3. Not unfrequently it was changed into Φ ; as Φ/σπβροΓ, for Fc- σπ€ρος. 4. It was very often changed into its corresponding vowel Y. This is generally the origin of the diphthongs av, €v. E. g. βουών, βου^σσι, for βογών, βόν€σσι, from βους ; ναυς, καυάζαις, evade, for vaFs, καΥα' ξαις, (Fade. 310 APPENDIX. [§264. 5. In a few instances it was changed into Ο ; as boav, Οίτυλου, '^Οαζος, Οϊλβνί, for ^Fai/, Ftr^Xo?, Fti^os, YtXcvs. 6. In many instances the digamma was attenuated into the rough breathing ; as oXls, άν^άνω, for FoKls, Γαι/δάι^ω. 7. The digamma was never doubled ; but instead of this, its cor- responding vowel Υ was prefixed, and sometimes annexed, to it. Thus, in inscriptions we find ΒακβυΓα, ΈνΤαρα, ατυτον. 8. Some words are found digammated only in Latin and other kin- dred languages ; as ippea, novem, nine; reoy, novus, new ; kXcls κληΐς, clavis. 9. Words which originally began with two consonants, the second of which was F, often appear with one only; as sweet, suavis, (ραδύί) /SaSus" άδύί ήδύί ; Schwaher, socer, (FeKvpoy) ίκνρός, ^ SCkl• In the following list, digammated words found in in- scriptions are spaced; as Tapyov, τ^πος. Words which once had the digamma, but in which the digamma was changed into β, -y, υ, or o, also words which appear digammated only in Latin, are included within parentheses. AFAi2 ΑΑΩ, αυάτά ατη, αΤατάομαί άτάομαι, άάβακτοί άάατος• — {Α¥ΤΩ) αϋξω αυξάνω, augeo vigeo vegeo. αΡβίδω ae /δω, άβη^ών άη^ων \ aFvbog άοώός, found in the Boeotic avXaFvdos, κίθαραΓνδοζ, κοί/χαΡυδο^, ραψαΓν^ος, rpaya- Ρυδοί. — {αΥημι, αΡω) αημι αω, άβηρ ανηρ άηρ, aveWa «βλλα, ανητηζ άητης, ανρα. — (AFPO) ΑΥΡΩ, άγρ^ω αίρ^ω, άρνω^ haurio. aFvTos αυτός. — (αΡωί) αϋως άώς ηώς άβώρ όβάσαι. — atPet aid, aevum, αΙών. — At Ρα? Α'ίας. — (atPeroy) αΐβζτός αΐ€τ6ς, — (άκρο- Faopai) άκροβάομαι άκροάομαι. Baκ€υFaL Βακ^ύα. — {βοΡς) βους,\)θ3 bo vis. (γραΡί) γραυς, καραβί^€ς. gray, Romaic γρίβος γραβανός. (ΔΑΓΩ) ΔΑΥΩ δαίω, δαΡίΟ? δηίος, δάβελο? δαυλός. — ΔαΡο?, Da ν US. — (δΡαι/) δοάν 3ψ. — (δΡο) δυο, duo, two. — ΔΙΡΣ ΔΙΣ Zevs, ΔιΡι Δα', divus. ΕυΡαρα Έυάρα. — (βΡαω) €βάω βάω. — (evveFa) ivvia, novem, nine. payi/i;/xt ayvυμL, Ρακτο?, βάy()ς, Υαξος "Οαξος 'Άξος, Υαύξιος V ά- ξιος "Αξιος, καυάξαις. — (Ραγω) άyω αγω, βάyoς άyός, ago vagor ι ν eh Ο vagabundus, wagon wain vagabond. — {Υαλικιωτας) βαΧίκιώτας η\ικιώτης. — PaXt αλις. — FaXtj Άλι? 'HXty, FaXeios Ηλείο?. — (Ραλίσ /co/xat) αΧίσκομαι, €υά\ωκ€ν €άλωκ€ν. — Ραλλο? ήΧος, Λ^allus. — Ράι^αξ αναξ, βάuvaς, Υαναξιωρ, ΒαναξιβουΧος, Έυ ρυβανασσα, — Υαν^άνω άι/δάι/ω, Ραδβδάω , Ραδο^αι βάΒομαι ηδο- μαι, Ραδβώ, βαδος^ η3ος, Ραδιξ, Ρασσα, βαδύς ήδυ?, suavis, sweet, Υαδων 'Άδωι/, βυαδε, yηθeω, gaudeo. — Favrjp άνηρ. — Ραρνός, του άρνυς, Υαρνων "Αρνων. — {Ρασκαριζω) βασκαρίζω άσκαρίζω, F ασκών "Ασκούν. — Ραστυ άστυ, Υ αστινιος, Υαστυμζίδοντί' ο ς, Υασστυοχος. — Ρατάλα: ώτ€ΐλαί. Feap eap η ρ, ver, Υηράν6€μον. — Ρ^ΡκαΧος (ϋκηΧος. — Ρ^θω ζθω, sues- C0, Ρτ^έ^ο? ήθος, β^σόν e^o?, €νίβωκ€ν. — Ρείδοι/ βιδοζ/, video, wit, wise, βώΕΪν ιδείν, βύ'ϊδε 6ΐδ6, Ρίσάμι ϊσαμι, ρίστωρ ΐστωρ, Ροίδημί οιδα, Υιδριας ίδρίας, αυΐδ€Τος. — FeiKort F ίκατι βζίκατί, εικατι, viginti, ΥείκατιΒειον Υ ικατιδ€ΐορ, Fi/cariFcTif y €Ϊκοσα€^ '^ 264.] APPENDIX. 311 r«ff, FiKartnebov. — Ρείκω ei/cco, β€ίκη\ά, weak, schwach, w e i c h. — Γείλω 6ΐλω , FE A Υί2 ΕΑΥΩ , ν ο i ν ο, \v a 1 1 ο νν, welter, w a 1- zen, Ρίλη ΐλη, ν€ίλξω βιλ^ω, €γ¥η\ηθιωντί ζζειληθωσι^ FeXovrpov eXvTpov, Γολα/χοί ούλα/χό?, βαΧάρχας ΐΧάρχης^ β^ιΧαρμόστας ίΧαρ- μόστας^ βίΧημα ξ'ίΧημα. — Υ€ΐπύν elirelv^ Fen ο ς €πος, yox, voice. — Fetpo) €ΐρω, sero, Feiprjva ζίρηνη. — FcKcis F€LKas €κάς, β€κώς. — {F€ κύρος) ίκυρός, socer, Schwaher. — Ρ€κων €κών, Γβκαθά €Κονσα. — FeXa β€Χα ελα etXr/, a,3eXtoi aeXios, sol, FeXodvTLa ηΧω^υσία, ai~ Χας^σξΧηνη, — FeXari α Ελάτεια, Υ €Χατίηο9 EXareimoy. — FeXeVa ^ΕλεΊ/α. — ΥζΧίσσω ελίσσω, Υ^Χίκη εΧίζ. — ΕΕΑΑΩ, FeXXai eiXat, veil ο, FeXκωy ν el lie ο, sulcus. — Γελττι? ίΧπίς ^Χπίς. — FeXxavos ΈΧχάνος. — Γελεϊν ελεΐι/, Fevro cXcto, Yevvov iXov. — Fevvos φ€ννος ei/oy, annus. — FeVi/u/xt ei^z^u/xt, vestio, Γε/χ/χα Fημμa €ίμα^ Fearia, vestis, vest, FeVrpa, FeWpou, βίστον, β^ττο^. — FENNQ FEQ ΈΩ, FeVi /ου, €ζομαί, if ω, σατίνη σελ/χα σφελα?, sedeo sedo sido, seat set sit, Sell we He. — Fevrep -γαστηρ, venter, waist, Wanst. — Ρβξ ε^, sex, six, Fe ξηκοντα ίξηκοντα, F€ktos €Κτος, Υζξα- κατιοι ίξακόσ-ωι. — (Fε7ro/xαt) e7ro/xat ΣΕΠΩ, sequor, seek. ?ΕΡΓΩ ΕΡΓΩ, work, Fepyavov opyavov, Fapyov εργοι/, \A^erk. — (Fεp7Γω) ερττω, serpo. — Fεppω ερρω, verro, erro, F€pητηpLa, βαρ• ρεί, βίρρης β^ρης^ βερρεύεί, /3ερ7;δεύει. — (Fεσ7rεpα) eanepa, ves- pera, Φίσπ^ρος 'Έσπερος. — (Feana) 'Εστία, V^esta. — Γετο$ €Tos ετοί, vet us vetustus, Feras €της, Fικαr^Fεrtεs εικο- σα€Τ€2ς. — {^εχω) €χω €χω, ν eh Ο? fi t, Fov ου, Fol oi, Fe ε, Feuev eOeu, f'lv 'lv, Fos ος, σφός, σφε, sui sibi se suus. — ^^Ftdtos tSto? totoy, viduus. — {Fupa^) ίίραξ, βεί- ρακές ϋρακες, βειρακη. — {ΥιΧενς) Ο'ίΧευς. — (Fi^o?) t|o?, viscus. — f'lov lov, viola, violet. — (Fts) Ίς, vis. — FiVoy FtσFόs tVos, Ftσorελtα ΙσοτεΧεια, βίωρ ϊσως. — FLστίaL Ιστονργοί. — Γιστιώ, future. — (Ρίσχω) ϊσχω, Ρισχυν βίσχνν Ισχνν. — Γιτεα Ιτεα, βί- τυς ϊτυς, οίσνα, vitex, with withy, Οίτυλο? ΒείτνΧος. FoIko^ 'Jt/coj, vicus, FoLKLa FvKia οΙκία, πεδαΡοικος μέτοικος. — ΥοΙνος, vin um, wine. — ΡοΙτος οίτος. — FOprv^ ορτυξ. (γραώίος) βραίδως ραδως. — {FpaKoXov) βράκαΧον ρόπαΧον. — FPEQ ΡΕΩ, νρατρα ρήτρα, βρητωρ ρητωρ. — Ρρηγνυμι ρηγυυμι, frango, break, wreck, brehen, ρρηξις ρηξις, βράκος ράκος, εύρά-γη ερρά- γη, αν ρηκτος άρρηκτος. — {ρριγεω) βίγεω φρίσσω, frigeo I'rigus. — (Fpifa) βρίσδα βρίζα ρίζα. — Ρρίνος ρινός. — {Fpobov) βρόδον ρόδον, rosa, rose. — (ΕΡΥΩ) ΡΥΩ, βρυτηρες, ρυτηρες, βρυτίδες ρυτίδες. (γυπνος) ύπνος, a-yp -υπνος, somnus. — (Ρνς) συς νς, sus, swine s ο w. (Ρωνεομαι) ωνεομαι, veneo, venum, vendo. HpFaototy 'Hpaototy. (κλεFts•) κΧείς κΧηΐς, clavis. — κΧεΥος κΧεος, celeber, c-elebro. XaFoy Χανός Χαός, ΑαΡοκοΡων Ααοκόων. — (λoFω) λοω Χούω, lavo. — {ΧαιΓος) Χαιός, laevus, left. — (ΧεΡρος ΧεΡιος) Χευρός Χείος, lae- vis, levis. \ (i/aFoi) ναυός ναός. — (να¥ς) ναυς, η avis, navy. — (νεΥος) peos, no• ν us, new. — (νεΡρον) νευρον, nervus, nerve. oFts οίς, ο vis. — {ορουΡω) ορούβω ορονω. 312 APPENDIX. [§§265-268. (προσΥζΧω) Ίτρονσζλίω npovFeXelv, προνσεΧλζΊν. (σαΓω) σάω, salvus, salveo, save safe. — {σκαιτος) σκαιό:, scae- vus. {νλρη) νλη, sylva. φαΓον φάβος φάος, Αημοφάτων Αημοφών, φαυοφόρος. ώνόν ωβζον ώόν, ovum, egg. § S65• In the Epic poets and in Pindar, a number of words, beginning with a vowel, have the following pecuharities : (a) A short vowel standing immediately before them is commonly not elided ; as oLKOvde έκαστος. (b) The final syllable of the preceding word, if short, is commonly made long, as if by position, even when it stands in the thesis ; as άρ- vvpe-vos ην. (c) A final long vowel or diphthong, in the thesis, often remains mialtered before these words ; as αντίκα δ' βγι/ω ^σιν. As most of these words are found or implied in the preceding list, nothing is more natural than to suppose that these poets commonly pronounced them with F, It is to be observed, however, that in our copies of these authors Ν movable is introduced before these words when the preceding word admits of it ; also ονχ or ουκ for ov. The words to which these remarks apply are chiefly αγνυμι, αλΐ9, Αλί.$•, ava^y άρΒάνω,'^Αρρη^ τον apvos, αστν, dcivos, drjVj cap, €θω, ddou, c'lKoaL, €Ϊκω, 6ΐλω, βιττβίι/, €κάς, €καστος., cKvpos, ίκων^ "ΈΧατος, ελίσσω, ελπω, ελωρ, evuvpi, €ργω or €ργω, ΕΡΓΩ, eancpos, eros, ηνοψ, "WioVy \oVy *lpLS, 'Ipos, ϊί, ίσος, Irea, ϊτνς, oIkos, οίνος, ov oi e, ov possessive, with their compounds and derivatives. When the digammated word is preceded by a short vowel in the ar- sis, F is to be mentally changed into Y, after the analogy of evade, evide, €νάλωκ€ν, €νίθωκ€ν, κανάξαίς ; as φ/λβ eKvpe, φίλ€Υ€κνρ€ ; apa €ρξαν, αραΥβρξαν. Numerals. § see* In tlie most ancient numeral system, I, Π, Δ, Ρ , Η, Ρ, Χ, F, Μ, Ρ, respectively denote ΙΟΣ, one, Uevre, five, Δ^κα, ten, ϋ^ντάκίς AeKa, fifty, HeKarov {ίκατόν), hundred, Ιΐ€ντάκίς He^a• τον, five hundred, XlXlol, thousand, Πεντάκις XlXlol, five thousand, Μύ- ριοι, ten thousand, ΐΐ^ντάκις Mvpioi, fifty thousand. This system is analogous to the Latin, except that 4 is always IIII ; 9, mm ; 19, AmiII ; 90 is expressed by the character for 50 follow- ed by ΔΔΔΔ ; 900, by the character for 500 followed by HHHH. ^ Sey» The system which employs the letters of the Alphabet in their numerical order is limited in its application, inasmuch as it does not extend beyond twenty four ; as iXtciSoy Ρα-ψ-ωδ/α A, The first hook of the Iliad ; Odvao-eias Ραψωδία Ω, The twenty-fourth book of the Odyssey. § 268• In the latest numerical system, the first nine letters, in- cluding the obsolete r (F), denote units ; the next nine, including the obsolete g, tens; the last nine, including the character Σάι/ττι, hundreds. Thousands commence the alphabet again with a stroke before. α 1 ια 11 V 30 υ' β' •2 ί/3' 12 μ' 40 χ' 7 3 'y 13 ν 50 δ' 4 '* 14 r 60 Χ €' 5 ί€' 15 ο' 70 ω Γ β tr 16 7γ' 80 % Γ 7 *r 17 / 90 α ^' 8 ^^' 18 />'^ 100 β ^ 9 '^ 19 . <γ' 200 .7 t' 10 κ 20 τ 300 §§ 269, 270. 1 APPENDIX. 313 The letters denoting units, tens, and hundreds have an accent above, *"'hich however is not found in ancient inscriptions. 400 500 600 700 800 1?) or Λ 900 1000 2000 3000 &c. Examples, αωμΓ, 1846 ; αψ/χβ, 1745 ; yχη, 3608 ; e(9, 5009 ; βοθ» 2099. § 369• The character Σάνπι is found neither in inscriptions nor on coins ; it is not mentioned by any ancient author, with the excep- tion perhaps of a corrupt Scholium on the twenty-third line of the Clouds of Aristophanes ; of course it was never used as a letter of the Greek alphabet. The first form of this mark is evidently the same as the Phoenician vi^, Shin, with an additional toofh; the second is pre- cisely the same as one of the forms of the Phoeaician Shin. As to the name Έ,άνπι, evidently compounded of Σάι/ and ΠΓ, it, properly speaking, applies to the first of these figures, which has the appearance of C (one of the later forms of Σ) and Π united into one form. This name therefore is analogous to Αίγαμμα (dis, γά/χ/χα), that is, it owes its existence to fancy. Joseph Scaliger and others supposed that Σάνπί was the same as the Hebrew Τσαδή ; consequent- ly, in their alphabetical tables, they make it occupy the place of Τσαδί7, which arrangement is the origin of the hypothesis that ^άνπι was so called because it stood next to ΙΙΓ. Remarks on Pronunciation. § 27©. Roman mode of writing Greek Words, A, I, Υ are represented hj Λ, I, Y. Ε by Ε short, Η by Ε long ; as €πίβηκη epitheca, Ο by Ο short, Q by Ο long ; as 6β€λίσκος obeliscits, ωμοπΚάται omo- platae. AI by AE, rarely AI ; as αίγο/^βρω? aegoceros, Mala Maia; the diphthong a, by d; as θρακ€ς Thraces, AY by A TJ; as αυτόττϋρος autopyrus. EI by I Jong, sometimes by Ε long , as Σειρψ Siren, Μτ/δβ/α Me- dea. EY by EU; as evye euge, OI by OE, rarely by 01; as οίστρος oestrus; Τροία Troia, OY by TJ long; as άρκτοΐιρος arctUrus. YI by YI ; Άδ^Αρπυια Harpy ia. QI by OEy or Ο long ; as κωμωώός conwediLS, φδή ode, U 314 APPENDIX. [§§271,272. Β, Γ, Δ, by Β, G, Ό, respectively. Before γ, κ, χ, ξ, Γ is repre- sented by Ν; as σν-γγραφη syngropha, eyKavaros encaustus, Αγχί- σης Anckises, Σφίγξ Sphinx. Ζ, θ, Κ, Λ, Μ, Ν, S, Π, by Ζ, ΤΗ, C, L, Μ, Ν, Χ, Ρ, respect- ively. Ρ by jR ; 'ρ by EH; as ρητωρ rhetor, σκίρρος sciri^hus. 2, Τ, Φ, Χ, by S, Τ, ΡΗ, CH, respectively. Ψ by PS, sometimes by £S; as άψίς apsis or ahsis. § S*?*!• Greek mode of writing Latin Words. A is represented by A. JE short hj Έ, Η long by Η ; as car ere κάρηρε, J, J, by I ; as Scipio Σκιπίων, Julius IovXlos. Ο short by O, Ο long by Ω ; as Commodus Κόμμοδος, Clodius Κλώ- 8los. ZJby OY or γ ; as Fuscus Φούσκος, Lucius Avklos. After q, by O, OY, or Υ ; as Quintus Κό'ίντος, Κονϊντος, Κνϊρτος. AE by ΑΙ, rarely by Η ; as Caesar Καίσαρ, Maevianus Μηουβιανός, A U, OE, by AY, 01, respectively ; as Augustus Αύγουστο?, Cloe- lia Κλοιλία. Β, C, A F, G, i, M, N, P, by B, K, Δ, Φ, Γ, A, M, N, Π, re- spectively. CH by X ; as Chorus Χώρος. Η by the rough breathing ; as Honorius Όνώρ^οί. Q, R, S, T, by K, P, Σ, T, respectively. F by Β or OY ; as Verus Ούηρος, Flavia Φλαβία, Flavins Φλαονϊος. After e, a, or o, it is represented by /3, ov, or υ, as Severus 2€βηροί Σ€ονηρος or Σβνηρος, Avidius Αβίδως Ανΐδιος, novembris νοβζμβρίων νονζμβρίων. Χ by S ; as Sextus Σίξτος. ' § S7S. Romaic Pronunciation. A, like a in father. ' After the sound t (t, et, 77, 77, ot, v, vt), like a in peculiarity, nearly. Ε is a little longer than the first e in veneration. H, like t. I, like i in machine, or ee in feel. Ο is a little longer than in confuse. Y, i2, like t, o, respectively. B, like -y, but not so strong ; or like Spanish b between two vowels. Γ, before the sounds e and t, like y in yet, yes, yoke, but stronger ; in all other cases, like the German g in Tag, very nearly. Beftre κ, χ, ξ, or another γ, like ng in hang. Δ, like th in that, rather; or like Spanish J between tw^ vowels. Z, like z. Θ, like th in thin, mouth. K, like k. After y, like g hard ; as άγκάΧη, ang-gah-lee, A, like I. Before the sound t, like // in Wiaiam; or like Italian gl, but not so strong. Μ , like m. § 273.] APPENDIX. 315 Ν, like η. Before the sound t, like Italian gn, or Spanish fz, but noi so strong. The final ν of the proclitics aV, biv, eV, συν, roj/, rr;v, and of some other words, before κ or ^, is pronounced like y un- der the same circumstances, that is, like ng ; before ττ, or -ψ-, like μ. S, like X in <2xe. Π, like ji). After /x, like δ ; as εμπρός, einbrass. P, like r. Σ, like 5 in soft. Before /3, γ, δ, /χ, ι/, and ρ, in the same or in the next word, like ζ ; as 'Σμύρνη, pronounced Ζμνρνη. Τ, like t in tell. After j/, like i^; as €ντίμος, endimos. So also after civ, SeV, σύζ^, roi/, tjji^. ΤΣ (formerly TZ), like if5. Φ, like/or j97i. X, like German ch, or Spanish^' (a?). Ψ, like ps in perhaps. After /x, like ^5; as έμψυχος embsvchos, aL, like e ; as γυναίκα, pronounced yiveKa. a, like a ; as αίτια, pronounced eria. αυ, €υ, ηυ, ωυ, before a vowel, or before β, y, δ, λ, /χ, ν, ρ, like α/3, (β, ηβ, ωβ ; as αϋρων, νεύμα, ηύρα, ωυριπ'ώη, pronounced άβριον, νεβ- μα, ίβρα, ώβριπ'ώι ; in all other cases like αφ, εφ, ηφ, ωφ, respectively. ει, J], OL, υ, υι, like ι; as είπα ίπα, εκείντ] εκίνι, λοιπόν Χιπόν, κύριος KLpLos, υΙός ιός. ου, like 00 in moon, pool, ω, like ο ; as κυρίω κφίο. The rough breathing is silent; thus, άγως, όσος, οποίος, ως, are pro- nounced άγιος, όσος, οπίος, ος, ^Vhen a consonant is doubled, only the first one is pronounced ; as σφάλλω, φυΧάττω, γράμμα, pronounced σφάΧο, φίΧάτο, γράμα. The circumflex does not differ from the acute ; as εκείνος, καΧώς, pro- nounced εκίνος, καλός. The grave, or rather the acute at the end of a word, is somewhat weaker than the acute. A proclitic is pronounced as if it were a part of the next word; as ως άνθρωπος, οσάνθροπος. An enclitic is pronounced as if it were a part of the attracting ΛVord; as άνθρωπος τις, άνθρωποι τίνες, pronounc- ed άνθροπόστις, άνθροπίτινες, with a secondary accent on the -πας, -TTOt ; εδίκός μου, εδίκόζμου ; γυναικών τίνων, γινεκόντινον. When the attracting word has the circumflex on the penult, the second accent is disregarded ; as δείζόν μοι, δίξονμι. Probable ancient Pronunciation. § 273• It is hardly necessary to remark in this place that the Greeks, during the most flourishing period of their language, wrote as they pronounced. A, like a in father, far. {Dionys. de Comp. <^ 14.) B, Γ, Δ, like b, g hard,c?; in later times like Romaic β, γ, δ. {Aiistot. Poet. § 20 ; Scxt. ad Gram. 1, 5.) Before κ, γ, χ, ξ, Γ had the sound of ?i^ in hang. E, like Romaic ε, or Italian e. Z, like z, but stronger. {Dionys. ibid.; Belaer. Anecd. 2, p. 815 ; Quinctil. 12, 10, 27 ; Victor in. Gram. 18; Isidor. Hispal. 1, 4, 15.) H, like French e as in fete. {Plat. Crat. 418 C ; Dionys. ub. supr. ; Sext. ub. supr.) 316 APPENDIX. [ξ} 273. θ, like th in thin, ether, saith. I, like i in machine. {Dionys. uh. supr.) K, like k. (Priscian. p. 543.) Λ, M, like /, m, respectively. N, like n. At the end of a word it was often pronounced and writ- ten as if it were a part of the next word. (^ 34, n. 2.) S, in the Attic dialect, like ΧΣ ; in the other dialects, like K2. In later times the sound ΚΣ prevailed. 0, like Romaic o, or Italian o. {Dionys. uh. supr.) Π, like p. P, like r. At the beginning of a word it was rolled; when it was doubled, only the second one was rolled. It was rolled also after Θ, φ, χ. (Seat. ub. supr.) Σ, like s in soft, past. Before /x, it was, in later times, sounded like ζ, and even changed into ζ in writing ; as Ζμυρνα for 2pvpva, in an in- scription. {Lucian. Jud. Voc. §9; Sext. ub. supr.) T, like t in tell, strong. Y, like French u. {Dionys. ub. supr. ; Quinctil. 12, 10, 27.) Φ, like/, but stronger. {Quinctil. 1,4, 14; Priscian. p. 543.) X, like Romaic χ, German ch, or Spanish^" {x). ^, in the Attic dialect, like ΦΣ ; in the other dialects, like Π2. In later times, the sound ΠΣ prevailed. Ω, like in note, nearly. [Dionys. ub. supr.) When a consonant was doubled in writing, it was doubled also in pronunciation. {Lucian. Pseudosoph. p. 563.) During the most flourishing period of the language, both the vowels of a diphthong were distinctly heard. During the brazen age, and probably during the latter part of the silver age, the diphthongs AT, EI, OY, had each the power of a single vowel. {Seat. ub. supr.) AI, like ai in aisle ; in later times, like η, or French e ; during the latter part of the brazen age, like e. AY, like ou in our, house ; in later times, like av, af, ΈΙ,Υύί^ ei m freight, nearly; in later times, like t. {Callimach, Epigr. 29.) During the silver and brazen ages, Ε was often prefixed to I long merely to mark its quantity ; as κρ^ίνω, τ^Ισαι, τζίμησαι. And when quantity began to be disregarded, even short I was repre- sented by EI ; as Έΐσ'ώωρος, Έΐσοκράτης, Ύνμνασ€ίαρχη(τας. (Seoct. 1,9; Priscian. 1,9.) ΕΥ, like eh-oo rapidly pronounced ; in later times, like ev, ef 01, like oi in oil, nearly. OY, like oh-oo rapidly pronounced ; in later times like oo in 7noon, or like French ou, Italian'^. When the Boeotians used OY for Y, they pronounced it long or short according as the original Υ was long or short; thus, in ον^ωρ, σούν, it was short, like oo in book; in οϋΧη, άσουλία, long, like oo in moon. (Eustath. ad II. 1, 10.) YI, like ivi in twist ; Ύΐ, like whi in whip; in later times, like Y. As to the diphthongs a, 77, ω, αυ, ηυ, ων, they differed from at, ct, OL, av, €v, ov only in the prolongation of the first vowel. In later times, a, 77, ω were pronounced like a, η, ω, respectively. (Sirah, U,p. 648; Sext. 1, 9.) INDEX, GREEK INDEX. The figures designate the sections (§) and their subdivisions : n. stands for Note. a-, inseparable, 147. άγάΧλομαι τώ, 203. αγαμαι, 193, η. 2. ayavy 14, η. 8. ά-γαπάω τω, 203. αγγ€λλω, with participle, 225, 7. ayuos τον, 197, 2. αγχι, άγχου, τον, 187, 3. αγω, αγωρ, 225, η. 4. — aye, 218, 2. — ατ^ομαί TLva τον, 192, 2. ά^€\φ6ς, 187, 3. α^ην τον, 200, 3. άθνμεω τω, 203. Αίητης, αΐναρίτης, 43, 4, a. αίρβω, eXelv τίνα τον, 192, 2. αίσ-θάνομαι, with participle, 225, 7. αίσνμνάω τον, 189. αίσχννομαί τω 203. — with partici- ple, 225, 4. αίτιος τον, 187, 2. αΐτίωμαί, 194, η. 2. ακόλουθο?, 187, η. 5. α/^οΰω, 192, η. 3; 211, η. 5. — with participle, 225, 7. άκρος, 169, η. 3. αλι? του, 200, 3. άΧλοϊος τον, 198, 2. ά'λλο?, 150, η. 3; 169, η. 4, — with genitive, 198, 2. — αλΧο τι, άλλο τι ή, 219, 5. αλλότριο? του or τω, 198, 2 ; 202. άλνσκω τον, 197, 2. άλώϊ /at, 194, η. 1. άμα τω, 202. — with participle, 225/ η. 1. αμαρτάνω τον, 197, 2. άμοθζν των, 188. άμπΧακίσκω τον, 197, 2, α/ζφι 7Γ€ρι, 231, η. 3. άμφίσβητ€ω τον, 194. αν, 215, et seq. άνακονφίζω τι τον, 197, 2. αι/άσσω τον, 189. αι/ελ/ίω Ttm του, 192, 2. αι^βυ του, 197, 2. ανέχομαι Toif, 192 ; 193 ? — with participle, 225, 7. άνηρ, 156, η. 5. άνίημι τον, 197, 2. αι/^' ωι/, because, 232, 2. άντιάω τον, 191, 2. άντιπερας τον, 187, 4, άντιποιονμαί τινι τον, 201 ; 194, 1. αντίστροφος τον, 187, 3. αι^ω του, 187, 4, άξιος, άξίως, άξιόω, 200, η. 2. άπ€ΐΘ€7ν τον, 192 ; 189. άπολανω τον, 191, η. άποπρό, 231, η. 3. άπορεω τω, 203. άποστ€ρ€ω, 184, η. 2. άποτ€μνω, άποτεμνομαι την Κζφα• \ην, 184, 3. άποτίνω, άποτίσασθαί τι τον, 184. απωβζν τον, 197, 2. αρα, αρά γ€, 219, 5. apt-, inseparable, 147. άρχην, 135. άρχω, άρχομαι, to begin, 197, 2.— "ΡΧ^> ίο rw/e, 189, η. 318 GREEK INDEX. are, 226, a. ατιμάζω tl τόν, 184. αντίκα, with participle, 225, n. 1. avTOSf 160, 4. 5. — 6 αυτός, 202, η. 1.— dative of, 206, 5. αφαιρώ, 201, η. 2. — αφαιρούμαι, 184, η. 2. αφ€?, 218, η. 5. άφικν€ομαι τω, 205. αφ' ου, 175, η. αχθομαι τω, 203. — with participle, 225, 4. ' «;;(pt, αχρις, 17, 1 ; 217. — τον, 199. — cixpiod, 175,11. βασιλ€νω τον, 189. βί, 225, 8. ^ βλάπτω, βΧάπτονσι κ€\€νθου, 197. — βΧαββρτα Χοισθίων βρόμων, 197. βλαστάνω τον, 197, 2. βοριάς βορράς, 7, η. 2. βούλβί, 214, η. 5; 219, 3. γεΰω, 192, η. 2. γίγνομαι τον, 190. — ίο Ζ>6 horn of, 197, 2. — Λvith dative, 201, 3. γιγνώσκω, with participle, 225, 7. Ύράφ€ΐν τι TOP, 184. γνμνος τον, 200, 3. δα-, inseparable, 147. Βασνς τον, 200, 3. δ£Ϊ, 201, η. 4. ^€ίκννμι, with participle, 225, 7, ^βίλαιος, 188, η. 3. δβίι/α, 72, 2.-6 δεΤϊ/α, 167, 4. δβίσαι Tti/off, 194, 1. δ^στΓο^ω του, 189. ^€ντ€ρος τον, 198, 2. δ6χο/χαι,201, η. 2. δεω, δ€θμαι, τον, 200, 3. — δέομαι τον τι, 182. — 2)2/ αϊ/ σου δβηθώ, entreat of thee^ {Xen. C. 5, 5, 35.) δτ^λοω, δζλοί, with participle, 225, 7. bιάyω, 225, 8. ^ια^εχομαι τω, 202. ^ΐΛώοχη τω, 202. διάδο;}(θί, 187, η. 5. 8ιαπρό, 231, η. 3. διασκοπ^ω του, 192, 1. διατβλ/ω, 225, 8. 8ιατρίβω, 225, 8. Βιαφζρω τον, 197, 2. διάφορος, 197, 2, η.; 198, 2. ^ιΐστημι, 3ΐ€στ7]κα, τον, 197, 2 , 198, 2. διορίζω τίνα τον, 197, 2. 8ϊος, 188, η. 3. διότι, 232, 2., διττλόο?, διπλάσιο?, του, 198, 2 δΐί τόσωί του, 198, 2. διψάω τον, 193. δουρε, 157, η. 3. δράττομαι τον, 192, 1. δνναμαι τι, 181, η. 2. δυο, 157, η. 3. δυσ-, inseparable, 147. δωρβομαι, 206, η. 1. δώρημα τω, 201. ea, 218, 2. eai/, 215. βγγύί του, τω, 187, 3 ; 202, 1, €γχ€ω, 195, 3. el, 215, et seq. — whether, 219, η. 4. €1 yap, 216. €1^6,216. ei/xt, Upai τω, 205. eijLti omitted, 150, 4. €LPai superfluous, 223, 9. eiVeii/, 184, n. 2. efy, 202, n. 1. βισιι/ οϊ, 172, η. 2. eiy ο, 175, η. βισω τον, 187, 4. €1 τΐίΓ, 215, η. 6, d. €κ, 13, η. 1 ; 17 ; 38, η. €καστος, 150, η. 3. €kt6s τον, 187, 4. 6κώι/ eiVat, 223, 9. ΤΚαττορ, 159, η. 2. βλαττουι/, 198, 1. €λανρω τιρα τον, 197, 2. €\€νθ€ρος τον, 197, 2. ζλλξίπομαι, with participle, 225, 7. eW /^α του, 187,4. — in connection Λvith a preposition, 231, η. 4. Ερθα, 217. cV^ei/, 217.— του, 187,4. eViot, 172, η. 2. GREEK INDEX. 319 €νοχος, 194, η. 4. iv τοϊς, 159, 5. εντός τον^ 187, 4. €v ω, 232, 2. εξαίφνης^ 225, η. 1. €ξ€λ€γχομαι,, with participle, 225, 7. εξηζ, 187, 4. ε^ικνύσθαι τον, 191, 2. e^ ο ν, 6^ οτον, ζξ ωι/, 175, η. €7Γαρκ€ω τοίι, 191, 2. eVft, €π€ί3η, 217. €π€ξΐ€ναι^ 194, η. 2. επίβονλενω, επίβουλη , τω, 201. επισκηπτεσθαι, 194, η. 2. επιτρέπω, επιτρέπομαι τι, 184, 3. επιχ^ώριος, 187, 3. επτακαιεικοσαπλάσως τον, 198, 2. 6/?δω, 184, η. 2. ερημουσθαι τον, 200, 3. ept-, inseparable, 147. epts• τω, 202. έρχομαι, with future participle, 89. — εΧθεΐν τώ, 205. — πεδίοιο, 196. εστβ, 175, η. ; 217. εστιάω τίνα τον, 192, 1. εστίν οι, οίτινες, rj, οπτ], όπως, 172, η. 2. εσ;)^ατοί, 169, Π. 3. έτερος, 150, η. 3. — with genitive, 198, 2. ευΒαίμων τον, 194. βύ^ύ του, 199. ενθνς, 225, η. 1. ενρίσκω, with participle, 225, 7. εύωχονμαι τον, 191. 2. €φ^ ω, εφ' ωτε, 217, 4; 223; 232, 2/ εχω Ttm τοί), 197, 2. — with an adverb and genitive, 195, 1.— εχομαι τον, 192, 1. — €χων, 225, η. 3.4. εως ον, 175, η. ; 199. ζηΧοίιν τίνα τον, 194, 1. η, 150, 3 ; 236. — η κατά, προς, οτε, ως, ώστε, 159 ; 220 7, 159, 5. ήγεομαι, 189, η. ί^δο/χαι τώ. 203. — with participle, 225,4*. η δ' ορ, 171, 2, d. ?7λ:ω, 211, η. 5. — with adverb and genitive, 195, l. — w^ith dative, 205. ηΧίκος, 175, 1, d. η μι-, 176. ημιόΧιος τον^ 198, 2. ηττώμαι τον, 198, 2. — μάχας, 184, η. 1. ^αι/άτου, 200, η. 1. θανμάζωτω, 203. θανμαστον όσον, θαυμαστως ως, see όσος, ως. θέλεις, 214, η. 5; 219,3. ^6ω, ^eeti/ πεΒίοιο, 196. θρασύς πολλού, 200, 3. Ι'διο? του, 187, 3. Ζδίωτβυω τον, 189. teVat του πρόσω, 199. — τω, 205. ifpoff τον, 187, 3. ί77/χί τω, 206, η. 3. Ιθνς τοΰ, 199. ίκετενω, ίκνονμαι, τίνα τον, 194, 3. ϊνα, 214. — Ίνα τι, wliereforei sup- ply -γενηται. 'ίσος, 187, 3 ; 202, 2. ϊσταμαι τον, 197, 2. καθαιρώ τον, 197, 2. καθαρός τον, 197, 2. mt, 150, 2 ; 236 ; 225, 6. και 6ς, 171, 2, b. κα\ τον, 166, 2, c καλώς τον, 195. κάμνω, with participle, 225, 4. κατά, 13, 11. — genitive after verbs compounded with, 194, n. 3. κατάγννμι, κατεα-γεναι της κεφαλής, κατάξαι τίνος της κεφαλής, 195, 1. καταμανθάνω τον, 192, 1. κατάρχω, 197, Π. κατηγορεω, 194, η. 3. κάτω τον, 187, 4. κιν^ννενειντον, 189. κιττάω τον, 193. κληρονομεω, 189, η, κλνω τον, 192, 1, κοινός τον, 187, 3. κοινωνεω, κοινωνός, 202, XI. 9• κολάζω τι τόί/, 184. 320 GREEK INDEX. κραίνω τον, 189. κρατ€ω του, 189, η. κρεμαστός του, as participle, 192, 2. κρυφά τον, 187, 2. κύκλω, round, 204. κυρ€ω του, 191, 2. λα-, inseparable, 147, λαβών, 225, η. 4. λαγ;(άι/ω, 191, η. λάθρα του, 187, 2. λανθάνω, 225, 8. λζίπω, λείπομαι τον, 197, 2 ; 198, 2. λοίτΓΟί, του λοίΤΓοί), 196. λονεσθαι ποταμοΐο, 196. fxa, 183. μακάριος τον, 194. αάλιστα, 159, 5. μάλλον, 159, 4. μανθάνω, with participle, 225, 7. — τι μαθών, 225, 3. μζγαίρω τιν\ τον, 194. μεγίστον, 159, 5. μζθνσκομαι τον, 200, 3. μεΤον, 159, η. 2. μ€ίον€κτ€ω τον, 191, 2. μίλει, 201, η. 4. μέλημα τω, 201. αελλω, with infinitive, 89. μέσος, 169, η. 3. /χεσόω του, 189. /ιΐ6στ09, with participle, 225, 7. μετα^ίδωμι, 191, η. /Χ6ταλαγ;;(άϊ^ω, 191, η. μεταμελομαι, with participle, 225, 4. μεταξν τον, 187, 4. — with parti- ciple, 225, η. 1. αεταποιονμαι τον, 194. μετεστι, 201, η. 4. υ,ετεχω, 191, η. ; 202, η. 2. /zexpt, μ€χρις, 17,^ 1 ; 217. — του, 199. — M^xpt ot», 175, η. — P^Xpf- ου or οτον is sometimes followed by a genitive in apposition with ου or ότου. {Herod. 2, 173.) /ίΐή, 214, et seq. ; 229, et seq. μη ου, 230, 3, η. 1. μήτε, 150, 3. may χειρός, at a single stroke, ■ 200. υΛκρός, μικρόν δεΐν, or simply μι- κράν, 223, 2. μιμνησκω, 192, η. 2. — μεμνησθαΐ, with participle, 225, 7. μονουσθαι τον, 197, 2. ftoi), 187, η. 4. μώι/, 219, 5. ϊ/ movable, 16. ϊ/τ;-, inseparable, 147. νή, 183. νίκάω τι, 184, η. 1. νομίζω, 206, η. 2. νοσφίζω τινά τον, 197, 2. ξνλλαμβάνειν τινός τινι, 191, 2 ; 201, 2. ξννάρασθαι τον, 191, 2. of ω του, ^ have the smell of, 192. It may be followed by two gen- itives, one of which denotes that from which the smell proceeds. όθοννεκα, 232, 2. οΓα, 226, a. οί άμφί, οι περί, 168, 2, olda τον, 192, 1. — with participle, 225, η. 2, c— -οισ^' 6 ^ράσον^ 218, η. 3. οΙκεΊος, 187, 3. οίκτείρω τινά τον, 194, 1. otos, 159, 5 ; 174, 2 ; 175, 1, d ; 222, 6. — with the article, 166, 2, b. — oiosTe, 222, 6. οϊχομαι, 211, η. 5 ; 225, 8. όκταπλάσιος τον, 198, 2. ολίγος, ολίγον δείν, or simply ολί- γου, 223, 2. 6 μεν, 6 8ε, 166, 2. όμοιος, 187, 3; 202, 2. — with par- ticiple, 225, 7. όμολογεω, with participle, 225, 7. ο/χωί, 225, 6. ονίνασθαι τον, 191, 2, όπισθεν τον, 187, 4. όπως, 214. όράω, with participle, 225, 7. ορφανός τον, 200, 3. Off with the article, 166, 2, b. — os κα\ 6ς, 171, 2, c. — ος μεν, ος Se, 171, 2, a. οσοί, 174, 2. — with the article, 166, 2, b. — οσοι/, οσα, 222, 6 ; 223. — θανμαστος όσος, άμηχα" νος όσος, νπερφνης όσος, in the oblique cases, 175, 2. GREEK INDEX. 321 οσσ€, 157, η. 3. on, 159, 5; 213; 232, 2. ο rt, 223 , 182. οτύ) τρόπω, in the sense of όπως, 214, n.'l. ov, 17, 3 ; 229, et seq. ovSels όστις ου, ουδζΐς ος ονχί, 230, 2. Ovbiv, 182, ουκ αν φθάνοις, 225, 8. ουκ €σθ' όπως, 172, η. 2. οί'κουν, 219, 5, ού ρ}, 215, 3; 219, η, 2, ουν€κα, 232, 2, oure, 150, 3. ούτω?, 17. οφ^λον, 216, η. 3. οφρα, 214, τταλιι/, τται/, 14, η. 5, C, παντοίος γίγνομαι, 225, 8, πaρaLpoυμ,aly 184, η,, 2. παραχωρ^ω tlvi τον, 197, 2 ; 201, 2, πσ,ρβξ, παρβκ, 231, η, 3, πάροίθ^ν του, 187, 4. παροίξαι της θύρας, 191, πάρος, 223, 3. 7Γάα•;)(ω, τι παθών, 225, 4, παύω, παύομαι, with participle, 2^25, 7, π^ίθω τίνα τον, 184. — π€ίθ€σθαι Tod. 192, ίΓ€ΐι^άω τοί), 193. π^ιράομαι τον, 192. τΓέλα? του, τω, 187, 3 ; 202, ΐΙ^Χοπόννησος, 7, η, 2. πίΧω, πβΧομαι, 211, η. 13, πίνης τον, 200, 3, Trepav του, 187, 4. TrepteXfii/, 184, η, 2, π€ριπρό, 231, η. 3. π^ριστ^φης τον, 200, 3. περιττός τον, 198, 2. π\€Ϊον, 159, η. 2. ττλβίστον, 159, 5. πΧ^ον^κτίω τον, 191, 2 ; 198, 2. πΧην τον, 197, 2, ττλτ/σιά^ω τον, 189. π\ησ•ίος τον, 187, 3. πλούσιος, πΧοντίω, του, 200, 3. ττν^ω του, 192. πούω, 184, η. 2. τΓοΓο?, 222, 6. πολέμιος, 187, 3. ΤΓολλαπλάσιο? τον, 198, 2. πολλοί 61/χι, €γκ6ΐμαι, 225, 8. τΓο'ρρω του, 197, 2 ; 188. πρ€σβ€ύω Tod, 198, 2 ; 189 1 πρίασθαι, 201, η. 2. πριν, πρόΐ^ ^, 220 ; 223. προ, genitive after the compounds of, as προκατακλίνομαι, 198, 2. προέχω, 198, 2. Προκί^ι-Ί/ι^σοί, 7, η. 2. προσβάλΧει τον, 192. προσ^'ώωμι τον, 191, 2. προσηκ€ΐ, 201, η. 4. πρόσθεν τον, 187, 4. — προσθ^ν η^ 223, 3. πρόσω τον, 188. προτιμάω τον, to care for, 193. προτον, 166, 2, e. πννθάνομαι, 192, η. 3. ρίπτΈΐν τον, 199, σ movable, 17. σάττω, σεσα-γμαι του, 200, 3. -o"/cGi/, 118, ι, ο, σοί), 187, η. 4. σοφός του, 187, 2, σπ/ζ/δω, 195, 3. στεργω τω, 203. στβρεω, 184, η. 2. στοχάζομαι του, 199, στρατηγεω του, 189, συγγιγι/ώσκω , 225, η. 2 συμμετέχω τινί τίνος, 202, η. 2. συζ/, 14, 7. σύϊ/οιδα, 225, η. 2. συντρίβω, σνντριβηναι της κεφa\ηςy σνντρίψαι της κεφαΧης τίνος, 195, 1. σφίσι, σφεας, 160, η. 3. σχετλιος, 188, η. 3. σώζω του, 197, 2. τάλας του, 194 ; 188, η. 3, τ^λα, 182. τεκνόω τι τον, 197, 2. -Τ60Ι/, verbal in, 178, 2 ; 206, 4, η. 5. τ7?λίκο9. 222, 6. η/λοΰ των άγρων. 188. 322 GREEK INDEX. τι. 182. τι μαθών ^ 225, 4. τι παθών, 225, 4. τίκτω, 211, η. 5. τιτντκομαί του, 199. τό y€, 166, 2, e. TOL, 201, η. 5. roioy, τοιόσδβ, rotoCros•, 222, 6. roi» κα\ τόν, το κα\ τό, 166, 2, d. τοξ€υω τον, 199. τοίτο, 163, η. 5. — synechdochical, 1Η2. τρίχο), δραμ^Ιν τον, 199. τριπλόος. τριπλάσιος, τον, 198, 2. τνγχάνω, to hit, 191, 2. — with par- ticiple, 225, 8. τω, tlierefore, 166, 2, f. νπαντάω τον, 191, 2. ι-τΓίψχω. with participle, 225, 7. νπ(ίκω TLvl τον, 197, 2 ; 201, 2. νπ€Κ, 23 ι, η. 3. υπ€ρθ€ν τον, 187, 4. νπ€νθννος, 194, η. 4. νπηρ^τύν τον, 194, 1. νποχωρίω τινί τον, 197, 2; 201, 2. υστ^ραως τον, 198, 2. νστ€ρβω τον, 198, 2. φαίνομαι, 225, 8. φανερής, with participle, 225, 7. φίί^ομαι τον, 193. φέρω, φίρζ, 218, 2. — φίρων, 225, II. 4. — with an adverb and gen- itive, 195, 1. φ€νγω, 194, η. 1. — with genitive, h)7, 2. φϊ^μΐ τον, 195, 2. φθάνω, 225, 8. φθον^Ιν τινι τον, 194. -φι, -φΐ2/, 42, η. 2. φί\η, 188, η. 3. φνω, ^φνν τον, 197, 2. — Ζ β/72, 211, η, 13. φωνψσι, 14, 5. χαίρω τω, 203. — with participle, 225, 4. χαριζομίνη παρζόντων, 191 ? χάρίν του, 187, 4. — with a prepo- sition, 231, η. 4. χράομαι, 206, η. 2. χρη, 201, η. 4. χρύζω του, 200, 3. ;(ωρι? τον, 197, 2. ψαύω Ttm τοί), 192, 2. ψ€ν8^σθαί τον, 197, 2. — τι τόι/, 184. ψιΧονσθαι τον, 200, 3. ώ, 155, η. 2. ών^ομαι τώ, 201, η. 2. ως, 38, η. c ώί, in exclamations, 174, 2. — with dative, 201, 4. — in quotations, 213. — for Ίνα, 214. — in the ex- pression of a wish, 216. — rela- ti\'e, 217, n. 4. — with partici- ple, 225, 4 ; 226, a. — in θανμα- στώς ώς attracts the adverb, ai'ter the analogy of όσος, which see; compare θ^σπ^σιον ως. ως, to, 136, η. ώς αν, 217, η. 4. ώσαντως, 202, η. 1. ώσβι, 217, η. 4. ωσπ^ρ, 226, a. ώσπ€ρ αν, 2 17, η. 4. ώσπ€ρ αν €L, 215, η. 7. ωστ€, ώστ€ αν, 217, 3 ; 223 ; 226, a. ωφζλον, 216, η, 3. 323 ENGLISH INDEX. Abstract nouns, 139. Accent, 29, et seq. — JEoYic, SO, n. I. — Doric, 31, n. 2. Accusative, 41, 4 ; 42, 2. — of the third declension, 47, 4; 49. — Syntax, 181, et seq. — ^ after nouns, 181, 3. — synecdochical, 182. — terminal, 186. — of ex- tent and duration, 186. — sub- joined to a clause, 156, 1, c. — absolute, 226, a. Active Voice, 207. Adjectives, 57, et seq. — derivation of, 142. — Syntax, 157. — as substantives and adverbs, 158. Adonic Verse, 217, 1. Adverbs, 134; 135. — comparison of, 66. — Syntax, 227, et seq. — as nouns, 228. ^oUan Verse, 248, 9. Alcaic A^erses, 245, 1 ; 248, 1. 2. Anacreontic Verse, 255. Anacrusis, 242, 5. Anastrophe, 33, 2 ; 231, n. 2. Aorist, augm^ent of, 91, 5. — for- mation of, 110, et seq. — pas- sive , 127. — syncopated , 131. — Syntax, 211. Aphsresis, Apocope, 12. Apodosis, 215. Apostrophe, 21. Apposition, 156. Arsis, 241. Article, 73. — Syntax, 166, et seq. — with genitive, 168, 2 ; 187, 1. — with participles, 225, 1. — with adverbs, 228. Atona- 38. Attic keduplication, 94. Attraction, 175 ; 224. Augment, 90, et seq. Basis, 242, 6. Breathings, 4. Caesura, 243. Case-endings, 42, Characteristic of tenses, 115, 1. Choliambus, 246, 3. Collective Nouns, 157, 3 ; 172, 3. Comparative, 63, etseq. — Syntax, 159. Composition of Words, 144, etseq. Conditional Sentences, 215. Conjunction, 137 ; 236. Connecting A^owels, 115, et seq. — omission of, 121, et seq. Consonants, 5; 6. — doubling of, 7. — commutation of, 10. Contraction, 18. Copula, 149, 2. Dative, 41, 4; 42, 2.— of the third declension, 51. — Syntax, 201, et seq. — superfluous, 201, n. 5. — of cause, 203. — local and tem- poral, 204. — terminal, 205. — instrumental and modal, 206. — absolute, 226, n. Demonstratives, 74; 76. — Syntax, 156, 1, d; 163. Deponents, 81 ; 82.— -Syntax, 210. Derivation, 139, et seq. Desideratives, 143. Diseresis, 18 ; 39. Diminutives, 141 ; 143. Diphthongs, 3 ; 9; 11, 4. 5. Dochmius, 252. Dual, 40, 3. — first person, 117, n. 2. — Syntax, 150 ; 157 ; 172. Elegiac, 247, 2. Elision, 21. Enclitics, 37. Epenthesis, 12, 4. Euphonic changes,. 13, et seq. Eupolidean Averse, 248, 8. Future, 109, et seq. — Doric, 114. — Syntax, 211. Future Perfect, 112 ; 211. Galliambic Verse, 255, 2. Gender, 41, 2. — implied, 157, n. 1. Genitive, 41,4; 42, 2. — Syntax, 324 ENGLISH INDEX. 187, et seq. -— partitive, 188. — of cause, 194. — in exclama- tions, 194, 2. — after the com- pounds of κατά, 194, η. 3. — of limitation, 195. — local and tem- poral, 196. — ablative, 197. — after comparatives, 198. — ter- minal, 199. — instrumental, 200. — of material, 200. — of fulness and want, 200. — of price, 200. — of punishment, n. 1. — abso- lute, 226. — in apposition to possessive w^ords, 156, 1, b. Glyconic Verses, 248, 5. Hipponactean Verse, 245, 5. Imperative, 117, 4. — Syntax, 218. Imperfect, augment of, 91, 5. — formation of, 108. — Syntax, 211. Impersonal verbs, 153, a. Indefinites, 72, 2 ; 76 ; 165. Indicative, 115, et seq. — Syntax, 212, etseq. infinitive, 117, 5. —Syntax, 221, et seq. — as a copula, 224. Interjection, 138. Interrogatives, 72, 1 ; 76. — Syn- tax, 164. Iota Subscript, 3. Lengthening of Vowels, 11. Logacedic Verses, 248. Metathesis, 12, 1. Middle Voice, 209. . Negatives, 229 ; 230. Neuter Adjective, 158, 2; 151, 1. Nominative, 41,4; 42, 2. — Syn- tax, 149, et seq. — subjoined to a clause, 156, 1, c. — without a verb, 237. Numbers, 40, 3. Numerals, 79, etseq. ; 176. Object, 177, et seq. Optative, 117, 3.— -Syntax, 212, et seq. Paragoge, 12, 6. Parenthesis, 39. Participle, 117, 6. — Syntax, 178, 1; 225; 226. -—in periphrastic tenses, 89. Passive Voice, 208. Patronymics, 140. Perfect, augment of, 91, 1.2.— formation of, 111. — Syntax, 211. Periphrastic Tenses, 89. Personal Endings, 115, et seq. Personal Pronoun, 68. — Syntax, 160. Phalsecean, Pherecratean Verses. 248, 4. 6. Pluperfect, augment of, 91, 3. — Ionic, 118, 1, b. — Syntax, 211. Possessive Pronoun, 71. — Syntax, 162. Praxillean Verse, 248. Predicate, 149, et seq. Prepositions, 136 ; 231, et seq. Present, 108. — Syntax, 211. Priapean Averse, 248, 7. Prosthesis, 12, 2. Protasis, 215. Protraction, 11, 3. Quantity, 25, et seq. Reciprocal Pronoun, 70. — Syntax, 161. Reduplication, 91, 1 ; 94. Reflexive Pronoun, 69. — Syntax 161. Relatives, 75 ; 76. — Syntax, 171, et seq. Resolution of Diphthongs, 11, 4. 5. Root, 42, 1 ; 98, et seq. Sapphic Verse, 248, 3. Sotadic Verse, 254. Subject, 149. Subjunctive, 117, 2.— Syntax, 212, et seq. Substantives, 139. — Syntax, 156. Superlatives, 63, et seq. — Syntax. 159, 5. Syllables, 22, etseq. Syncope, 12, 5. Synecdoche, 182. Synecphonesis or Synizesis, 19. Thesis, 241. Tmesis, 234. Vocative, 41, 4 ; 42, 2. —Syntax, 155. Vowels, 2; 8; 11. Zeugma, 238 ADVERTISEMENTS. WILLIAM JAMES HAMERSLEY, HARTFORD, CONN., PUBLISHES THE FOLLOWING VALUABLE BOOKS. School and Colleg^e Series. WooDBRiDGE AND Willard's UNIVERSAL GEOGRAPHY. — AccompaTiied by ai. Atlas, Physical and Political. This is the only Geography suitable for High Schools. It is adopted in many of the principal seminaries in the Union. The work has been translated into the German language, and is used as a text-book in some of the first schools in Germany. Willard's Ancient Geography and Atlas. — This work has been re- cently revised by the author, with the assistance of Mr. Walter, Profes- sor of Geography in the Royal Schools of Berhn, Prussia. Woodbridge's Modern School Geography. — Accompanied by an Atlas, Physical and Political. The attention of school committees and others is particularly invited to this work. Wherever introduced it has given great satisfaction. It is confidently claimed to be the best School Geog- raphy before the public. It is recommended in the highest terms by Rev. T. H. Gallaudet ; Rt. Rev. Thomas C. Brownell ; Prof Goodrich, of Yale College ; Rev. Dr. Bushnell ; Wm. A. Alcott, Esq. ; Bishop Potter, of Pennsylvania ; Rev. Simson North, President of Hamilton College ; Emer- son Davis, Esq., of Mass. ; and by numerous practical teachers and other fi'iends of education. Flint's Surveying. — New and Revised Edition. RoBBiNs' Outlines of History. — New Edition, enlarged and improved. The Class Book of Nature. — Containing Lessons on the Universe, the Three Kingdoms of Nature, and the Form and Structure of the Human Body. With Questions, and numerous Engravings. Highly recom- mended and extensively used. The Practical Spelling-Book. — By T. H. GaUaudet and H. Hooker — on a new plan. The attention of teachers is respectfully invited to an examination of the peculiar features of this work. First Lessons on Natural Philosophy. — Parts 1 and 2. — By Mary A. Swift. — These Books, for clearness of explanation and illustration, are un equaled by any other work on the subject for young children. They are used in every State in the Union. The Columbian Drawing Book. — Embracing a progressive series of studies, adapted from the first masters, by C. Kuchel. AVith instructions, by Gervase Wheeler — the Drawings by D'Avignon, Kuchel, and others. This is the most elegant Drawing Book published in the country. ADVERTISEMENTS. CrFcek. Series. The following series of Greek text-books have been received withun- qnahfied favor by classical teachers. Sophocles' Greek Grammar is used in Harvard, Yale, and many other of the principal colleges in the Union, and in a large number of High Schools and Academies. Sophocles' Greek Lessons. '' First Book in Greek. " Greek Grammar, old edition. " Greek Grammar, revised edition. ^' Romaic Grammar. " Greek Exercises. " *' Exercises and Key. '' '• Verbs. Felton's Greek Reader. Crusius' Homeric Lexicon. Λν. J. H. ALSO PUBLISHES. The Book of Nature.— By John Mason Good, LL. D., F. R. S. Whisper to a Bride. — By Mrs. Lydia H. Sigourney. Price, in scarlet cloth, gilt edges, 63 cents; elegant white watered silk, gilt edges, $1,25. Persons in any part of the country, w^ishing single copies, can be fur- nished by mail, postage prepaid, on remitting the price to the publisher. W. J. H. publishes the folioAving '* Illustrated Series," suitable for school libraries and family reading. Book of the Army, with numerous Engravings. " " Navy, " *' Colonies, '' " - " " Indians, " " " of Anecdotes, " " '' '' Good Examples, u u Also, the following "Miniature Series." Gift for Young Men, by Rev. Joel Hawes, D. D. " *' " Ladies, by Emily Yernon. Poetic Gift, by Mrs. E. Oakes Smith. The Yoices of El covers, by Mrs. L. H. Sigourney. The Weeping Willov\^, by Mrs. L. H. Sigourney. The Primrose, by Rev. C. ΛΥ. Everest. The Harebell, by Rev. 0. W. Everest. The Ladies' Yase, by a Lady. RECENTLY PUBLISHED, . The Eighth Edition of Memoir of Mrs. Mary E. Yan Lennep, oniy daughter of Rev. Joel Hawes, D. D., by her Mother — with a Portrait. The String of Diamonds. — Gathered from many Mines, by a Gem Fancier. Being selections from American, English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian Poets. A CHOICE GIPT BOOK. THE STRING OF DIAMONDS, GATHERED FROM MANY MINES BY A GEM FANCIEE, BEING SELECTIONS FROM AMERICAN, ENGLISH, GERMAN, FRENCH, SPANISH PORTUGUESE, AND ITALIAN POETS. From the many favorable notices the Publisher has received, he would respectfully invite attention to the following. " This is one of the choicest, and at the same time most complete selections of poetry I have seen. It is a handsomely executed volume, and compiled with re- markable judgment and taste. I predict it will become a standard gift-book and popular volume of reference." — H. T. Tuckerman. '"Ihave been throuf;:h it, every line, with much true satisfaction, and am de- lighted to possess such a tasteful treasure. The matter is admirably selected, both as to moral and poetic beanty. and I shall take pleasure in recurring to the volume, *maiiy a time and oft.' " — Hannah F. Gould. "I feel much obliged to the ' Gem Fancier,' wiio has brought together so many of my favorites in the same rich casket." — Anne C. Lynch. "A sparkling and beautiful book." — American Courier. "Tt is a volume whose inner and outer adornings justify its happy nomenclature." — Lydia 11. Sigournexj. " I am particularly struck with the freshness and good taste of the selections." — Geo. Η Boker. " I doubt whether a more choice collection of poetry was ever brought within an equal space." — J. G. Saxe. "I thank the editor for bringing to my mind in so pleasant a shape such an array of brilliancies as are scattered through the volume.— 7^. Marvel. "I have had great pleasure in looking over the selection," — Oliver Wendell Bohnes. '' It well merits the name given to it, for it contains gems of the first water I trust that the pure and discriminating taste evinced in The selection will be properly appreciated by the public, and secure for it a wide circulation.— TFas^m^fo;i Irving. Any person wanting a single copy can have it sent by mail, postage prepaid, on remitting to the publisher the price, which is $1 plain muslin, $1,25 gilt edge, $1,75 full gilt. W. J. HAMERSLET, Hartford Ct c&^v/[4^u . c^itce^' c'Ci^ '^■'kc'i^ '^ l•. 4102 (d -^. '^• .#■ 1 Ο 0^ •■■■ ξ«1#:^^^" . ^ ^ Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide Treatment Date: July 2006 'Jp \^V C " -P '^b -0 X A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 0^"^ PreservationTechnologies 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive Cranberry Township. PA 16066 (724)779-2111 w^_: Λ^^ %:^y^..>s ' D.^• ' Λ'^ ^\" .^^ ^''\ $' κ - tV - /^-^•\ vT * λ\• -P < .^^ V ^^' ..^iZ'^\ Λ •^■ 'Οί,' v^ . ■^^ ^ ^ ^-. rO^ χ- ^^Λ%^' Λ 1 /\ Ο ^/ C ° ~^ '^ * "^b- <^' ' -J>Sv ' '^ ^ ■^ --" ^-^'^ χΟ <^.. ^ Mi^ 1 '^ S' '^ί'. <^ -ν -^ <•\ Λ^^ %. ^"^W'. >^ --C. ο>• > .0 ,# ^.. «ίκ ^^ ν^ ^'τ"^^^^^^ •>- \ » LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 003 035 627 vK' };<•^Λ' ^'m/ . •), I sMji (lis •Ι I'l . «'s Γ ,ίί!•ί .l.iV'jM ' ■ , " Γ Τ''!ί'ί':!ίί;ΐ1 ■'^■' ίί,Ιί,ί,ίΐ!